Salesforce Summer24 Release Notes

Salesforce Release Notes
Future proof your business with CRM + AI + Data + Trust

Salesforce, Summer ’24
Last updated: June 14, 2024

© Copyright 2000–2024 Salesforce, Inc. All rights reserved. Salesforce is a registered trademark of Salesforce, Inc., as are other
names and marks. Other marks appearing herein may be trademarks of their respective owners.
CONTENTS
SALESFORCE SUMMER ’24 RELEASE NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

What’s New for the Salesforce Release Notes? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
How to Use the Release Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Get Ready for the Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Monthly Release Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Release Note Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Supported Browsers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
How and When Do Features Become Available? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Salesforce Overall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Release Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Analytics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Commerce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Data Cloud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Einstein . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Experience Cloud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Field Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Industries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Marketing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
MuleSoft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
OmniStudio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Revenue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Salesforce CMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
Salesforce Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
Salesforce for Slack Integrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
Security, Identity, and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
Work.com . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
Other Salesforce Products and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
Legal Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730
SALESFORCE SUMMER ’24 RELEASE NOTES
See how the Summer ’24 release helps teams work smarter with new product innovations built on CRM + AI + Data + Trust.
IN THIS SECTION:
What’s New for the Salesforce Release Notes?
Learn about new features that make the Salesforce release notes easier to use. Think of this page as release notes for the release
notes, and check back each seasonal release to see what’s new and improved. We also welcome your feedback!
How to Use the Release Notes
The Salesforce release notes offer brief, high-level descriptions of enhancements and new features. They include setup information,
tips to help you get started, and best practices to ensure your continued success.
Get Ready for the Release
Reading the release notes is a great step in preparing for the release. These other resources help get you and your users ready for
what’s coming your way. We add resources throughout the release when they become available, so check back often.
Release Notes for Features Released Monthly
Salesforce releases features and enhancements more frequently than three times per year for some products. Find out what’s new
and read more about these features, as often as monthly, right here in the seasonal release notes.
Release Note Changes
Read about changes to the release notes, with the most recent changes first.
Supported Browsers
We’ve made some changes to our supported browsers documentation, making it easier to find what you need. Supported browsers
for Salesforce vary depending on whether you use Salesforce Classic or Lightning Experience.
How and When Do Features Become Available?
Some features in Spring ’24 affect all users immediately after the release goes live. Consider communicating these changes to your
users beforehand so that they’re prepared. Other features require direct action by an administrator before users can benefit from
the new functionality.
Salesforce Overall
Learn about new features and enhancements that affect your Salesforce experience overall.
Release Updates
Salesforce periodically provides release updates that improve the performance, logic, security, and usability of our products. The
Release Updates page provides a list of updates that can be necessary for your organization to enable. Some release updates affect
existing customizations.
Analytics
Analytics enhancements include new and updated features for Lightning reports and dashboards, Data Cloud reports and dashboards,
CRM Analytics, Intelligent apps, and Tableau.
Commerce
Commerce Cloud enhancements include new and updated features for B2B and D2C Commerce, Salesforce Order Management,
and Salesforce Payments.
1
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes
Customization
Manage users more easily with the user access, public group, permission set, and permission set group summaries. Give record page
users more of what they need where and when they need it with Lightning record page enhancements such as blank space support
and visibility rules on individual tabs.
Data Cloud
Ingest, harmonize, unify, and analyze streaming and batch data with Data Cloud. Then use that data to unlock meaningful and
intelligent experiences across Customer 360 applications and beyond.
Deployment
Check out what’s new in change sets.
Development
Whether you’re using Lightning components, Visualforce, Apex, or Salesforce APIs with your favorite programming language, these
enhancements help you develop amazing applications, integrations, and packages for resale to other organizations.
Einstein
Supercharge your workforce efficiency with predictive and generative AI.
Experience Cloud
Customization is key, and Experience Cloud is here to help you deliver. Integrate enhanced LWR sites with Data Cloud to gain deeper
insights into site visitor interactions. Elevate your site with new styling features for forms and buttons, streamlined search options,
and increased control over the layout and spacing of your LWR sites. Improve your visitor login experience with a new integration
framework for headless login and guest user identity flows. Stay productive on the go with a collection of updates to the Mobile
Publisher app.
Field Service
See what’s new in Field Service to help your team deliver on performance and customer service.
Industries
Industries solutions shape Salesforce to the needs of your business, reducing the need for you to customize things yourself. Consumer
Goods Cloud streamlines delivery and distribution processes with Direct Store Delivery and Van Sales. Optimize service operations
in the field with Field Service for Industries. Health Cloud integrates with Milliman Care Guidelines (MCG) to bring industry-standard
assessments to Integrated Care Management. Loyalty Management gives marketing managers greater flexibility with Global
Promotions Management. Manufacturing Cloud helps manufacturers streamline the process of recovering costs on defective parts
from suppliers with Warranty Supplier Recovery. Salesforce for Education helps students plan their degrees better with Intelligent
Degree Planning. We also have plenty of changes for Automotive Cloud, Salesforce for Nonprofits, Public Sector Solutions, Industries
common features, and much more.
Marketing
Salesforce offers three marketing products: Account Engagement (formerly known as Pardot), Engagement (formerly known as
Marketing Cloud), and Marketing Cloud Growth edition. Unified Messaging tools support Marketing Cloud Growth and other Salesforce
apps.
MuleSoft
Use the MuleSoft Anypoint Platform suite of products to connect and integrate apps, systems, and data across your enterprise.
Streamline operations by building and automating processes with clicks instead of code. You can design, develop, govern, and share
APIs and integration apps and host them in the cloud or on-premises.
Mobile
Configure offline landing pages without code using Mobile Builder for Salesforce Mobile App, which is now generally available.
Improve your Mobile Publisher app with new security features and prepare your app for new notification and device operating
system requirements. Submit the required Firebase information for push notifications on Android mobile connected apps.
2
OmniStudio
In Summer '24, OmniStudio (when the Managed Package Runtime setting is disabled) supports features from OmniStudio for Vlocity,
including filling address fields in omniscripts with Google Map data, using Salesforce private connect for HTTP actions in integration
procedures, and choosing whether to merge entries within a list in an integration procedure list action. Also, DataRaptor is now
Omnistudio Data Mapper. For Winter '25 upgrades, disable New Order Save Behavior. To prepare for future releases, remove
organization and profile standard objects from data mappers, remove OmniStudio components with unlocked packages, and check
the impact of the date change in the ADDDAY function return.
Revenue
Automate and scale your revenue operations with a robust portfolio of Revenue Cloud products. Use Revenue Lifecycle Management
to empower your organization’s sales and revenue management processes. Salesforce Billing offers efficient resolutions to all invoice
processing issues.
Sales
Boost your sales teams’ results with new Einstein features, more actions, and improved performance and setup experiences. Sales
rep’s get a boost to their productivity with standard and custom list view actions in the Account, Contact, and Lead Intelligence
views. Sales teams have a bird’s-eye view of their conversations with customers with Conversation Signals. Use Generative Conversation
Insights to create custom insights for video calls and get answers to things such as customer sentiment or deal terms. Sales managers
have more flexibility in how they view forecasts. Enablement has an improved test and deploy experience for sales programs. And
in Salesforce Maps, users experience better performance when plotting for high-volume data.
Salesforce CMS
Clone any content type and its variants, add an API name when you create an enhanced CMS workspace and content, and work
with CMS content previews.
Salesforce Flow
Compose intelligent workflows with Flow Builder and Flow Orchestration. Integrate across any system with Flow Integration.
Salesforce for Slack Integrations
Use Slack and Salesforce together to connect with customers, track progress, collaborate seamlessly, and deliver team success from
anywhere.
Security, Identity, and Privacy
External Client App Manager, OAuth 2.0 token exchange handlers, and Event Log File Browser are each now available in Setup. Also,
external client apps now support a bunch of new OAuth flows. Give users access to manage custom domains with a new, more
targeted user permission. Create uninterrupted user experiences across Salesforce and custom interfaces with the new Single-Access
UI Bridge API. Access your Data Cloud encryption policy status from the Security Center Encryption Policy metric. Scratch orgs on
Salesforce Edge Network use partitioned domains. And Android mobile connected apps now require the Admin SDK private key
and project ID from a Google Firebase project.
Service
Check out new features that enable customer service agents to work faster and more productively across customer service channels.
Work.com
Prepare your business, employees, and facilities. Respond to major events, such as the current COVID-19 crisis, with the apps and
services in Work.com.
Other Salesforce Products and Services
Get the latest information on features from Customer Success Group, Heroku, IdeaExchange, and Trailhead GO.
Legal Documentation
We made seasonal updates to Salesforce Legal Documents.
3
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes What’s New for the Salesforce Release Notes?
What’s New for the Salesforce Release Notes?

Learn about new features that make the Salesforce release notes easier to use. Think of this page as release notes for the release notes,
and check back each seasonal release to see what’s new and improved. We also welcome your feedback!
Learn About New and Updated Data Cloud Features More Frequently
Data Cloud releases some features and enhancements as often as monthly, so be sure to keep up with what’s new as soon as it comes
out. To find these release notes, just search for Monthly Release Notes.
Find Updates for Marketing Cloud Engagement in One Place

Marketing Cloud Engagement release notes have moved from the documentation site to the main Salesforce Release Notes. Older
Engagement release notes are archived as PDFs. This change improves organic search engine results and makes it easier to access
Engagement release notes alongside other cloud information.
How to Use the Release Notes

The Salesforce release notes offer brief, high-level descriptions of enhancements and new features. They include setup information, tips
to help you get started, and best practices to ensure your continued success.
• Your browser’s settings determine the language that you see. To change the language, scroll to the bottom, click Change Language,
and select a language.
• The release notes include details about new and modified features. For information on known issues, visit Salesforce Known Issues.
• Use the table of contents search and filters to zero in on the news that matters the most.
We want to know what works for you and what doesn’t.

• Trailblazer Community—Post your feedback in the Release Readiness Trailblazers group. To help us track and respond to your
feedback, use a hashtag that indicates the release, such as #Summer24Feedback.
• Feedback forms—As you’re working with our documentation in Salesforce Help, release notes, or developer guides, look for the
feedback buttons and vote up or down. Add comments if you have them.
• Salesforce Customer Success on X—Follow Salesforce Customer Success at@asksalesforce for select documentation updates and
highlights..
4
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Get Ready for the Release
Note: Until the new release is available to you, links from release notes to Salesforce Help, implementation guides, developer
guides, and other documentation don’t work. And sometimes the links point to material from the previous release.
Some of our documentation has preview versions available several weeks before the release. To access a preview version on
Salesforce Developers, select Preview from the Documentation Version dropdown list.
Get Ready for the Release

Reading the release notes is a great step in preparing for the release. These other resources help get you and your users ready for what’s
coming your way. We add resources throughout the release when they become available, so check back often.
Summer ’24 Highlights for Admins

Check out this video for a preview of key features for admins in Summer ’24.
Watch a video
What’s New This Release

• Release Milestones. See key dates for the release.
• Release Overview Deck (ROD). Create internal training for your users, review setup screens, and learn how to use features.
• Release Matrix. Quickly see which features immediately affect your users.
• Summer ’24 Pre-release Signup. Sign up for a pre-release org to get early access to the new features.
• Release Readiness Live. Register and make the most of the new features.
• Release Demos. Get quick video overviews of what’s coming this release.
• Summer ’24 Release Website. Check out the new features.
• Summer 24 Release Highlights Module. Get the release Trailhead badge.
• Release in a Box. Use this kit to prepare for the new release and to present it to your users.
Release Readiness Essentials

• Release Readiness Trailblazers. Access resources and experts for all things release readiness.
• Trust Status Maintenances. See sandbox and other release dates and times. To see your maintenance dates, click Instances and
your instance.
• Sandbox Refresh Calculator. Plan if and when to refresh your sandboxes.
• Sandbox Preview Video. Learn how to navigate the sandbox preview process.
• Sandbox Preview Instructions. Get early access to new features in your sandbox.
• Certification Release Maintenance Schedule. Keep your certification updated in Trailhead.
• Prepare for Salesforce Releases. Use Trailhead to create your release strategy.
5
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Release Notes for Features Released Monthly
Release Notes for Features Released Monthly

Salesforce releases features and enhancements more frequently than three times per year for some products. Find out what’s new and
read more about these features, as often as monthly, right here in the seasonal release notes.
As you explore this content, keep these considerations in mind.
• Monthly release notes aren’t the same as release notes for delayed features. Sometimes, a feature released seasonally is subject to
a slight delay. When that happens, the timing is explained in the “When” section of that feature’s release note.
• New monthly release notes aren’t the same as changes to previously published release notes. Sometimes, we need to update
previously published release notes for the current seasonal or monthly release. When we make those updates, we list the specific
change in the “Release Notes Changes” topic.
• Sometimes, monthly releases coincide with seasonal releases. When that happens, we identify related release notes by the first full
month of the seasonal release. These features are available when Salesforce rolls out the specific seasonal release to your instance.
For example, the Summer ’24 release begins rolling out to customer instances in mid-May of 2024. Release notes for features released
in May or June are linked to from a topic called “June 24 Release.” Release notes for features released in August 2024 are linked to
from a topic called “August ’24 Release.”
IN THIS SECTION:
June ’24 Release
Learn about features released in June ’24. Features included in the June monthly release generally become available when Summer
’24 rolls out to your org.
June ’24 Release

Learn about features released in June ’24. Features included in the June monthly release generally become available when Summer ’24
rolls out to your org.
• Data Cloud Features
• Einstein Features
• Einstein Platform
Release Note Changes

Read about changes to the release notes, with the most recent changes first.
June 17, 2024

SOQL
Added clarification on when the use of NULL triggers the new error code.
Copy Large Datasets Efficiently in Automation Studio
Updated the title and content of the Data Copy or Import release note for clarity.
Einstein Data Detect Is Now Data Detect
Added a release note announcing the product name for Einstein Data Detect.
6
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes June 17, 2024
New and Changed Standard Platform Events

Added release notes for two new fields on the Insecure External Assets event type.
New and Changed Objects
Added a release note for updates to the PromptVersion object.
Connect REST APIs
Added release notes to announce the new resource and properties available with Context Service.
New Connect REST API Resource in Record Rollup Definitions
Added a release note to announce the new resource available with Record Rollup Definitions.
Review Updated URLs for List Views
Added a release note that announces changes to the URL format for list view pages.
Encrypt Search Index Keys with Manageable Root Keys
Updated the release note to reflect that when an org’s search indexes are upgraded to support root keys, Salesforce automatically
generates a Salesforce root key and data encryption key for you.
Unify Knowledge from Various Sources in Salesforce (Generally Available)
Updated the release note with a link to the blog post 10 Ways To Prep Your Knowledge Base for AI Grounding.
Give Feedback on Copilot Responses
Added a release note that announces feedback on Einstein Copilot responses.
See Records from Different Objects in Einstein Copilot’s Responses
Added a release note that announces multi-object records in responses given by Einstein Copilot.
Use AI to Set Course and Program Expectations with Einstein Skills Generator
Added a release note that announces Einstein Skills Generator for Education Cloud.
Einstein for Fundraising (Beta)
Added a release note that announces Copilot Actions Fundraising Gift Proposals as part of Fundraising in Education Cloud.
Update Your Firebase Cloud Messaging API Certificate for Mobile Push
Added a release note announcing the need to update the Firebase Cloud Messaging (FCM) API certificate to continue sending mobile
push notifications in Marketing Cloud Personalization.
Updated Default Behavior of Visualforce Section Header Components
Added a release note about the new default behavior of the Visualforce <apex:sectionHeader> component’s description
attribute.
Life Sciences Cloud (Generally Available)
Added release notes for the new generally available product, Life Sciences Cloud.
Patient Program Outcome Management
Added release notes for the new pilot feature, Patient Program Outcome Management.
Pharmacy Benefits Verification
Added release notes for the new generally available product, Pharmacy Benefits Verification.
Keep the Pub/Sub API Publishing Stream Alive More Easily
Added release notes for the increased timeout of the Pub/Sub API PublishStream RPC method.
Hide Global Search for Specific Lightning Apps
Added a release note announcing the ability to hide global search in specific Lightning apps in Salesforce Mobile app.
Run Flows in Bot User Context (Release Update)
Updated the scheduled enforcement to Winter '25.
7
Removed: Build Custom Forms with the ElementInternals Web API

This feature isn’t quite ready, so we’re removing it while we make improvements.
See Only Actions You Can Use in Mobile Builder
Added a release note announcing that the only actions that now show in Mobile Builder are LWC Global actions.
Organize and Find Records Easily with Personal Labels
Clarified that labels can be used with custom objects. Also added detail that the Label object and its record page lagout aren't
editable.
Keep Routing Work During Service Degradation
Added release notes for the new feature, Omni-Channel Fallback Mode.
Salesforce CLI Enhancements
Updated the list of Salesforce CLI enhancements with information about the Source Mobility (beta) feature.
Optimize Data Retrieval with Cache-First (Beta)
Added release note to announce the release of the Cache-First (beta) feature.
Improve Search Results with Einstein Semantic Search
Added that semantic search is available in North America and Europe and will be available in the Asia-Pacific region in Summer ’24.
Removed: Authenticate Messaging for Web in Channel Menu with User Verification
Removed the release note about supporting user verification on Messaging for Web deployments that are added to Channel Menu.
The release of this feature is postponed.
June 10, 2024

Stage Management
Added the When section to the Stage Management release notes.
Removed: Look Up Data from DMOs for Your Org
Removed: Call Component Lifecycle Hooks Using Native Browser APIs
Added a release note to announce that the CustomObjectUserLicenseMetrics object was removed.
Limit Who Receives Notifications About Certificate Expiration
Added more information about how certificate expiration email notifications behave and what to expect when the new user
permission isn't assigned to any user.
Identify and Backfill Missing Call Transcripts in Bulk
Updated See Also link to the implementation guide.
Test CRM Analytics Endpoints in Postman
Added release note for new CRM Analytics Postman collection.
Log Emails and Events More Intuitively
Added release notes for updates to quick logging emails and events in an Outlook or Gmail integration.
See the Topics That Matter Most to Your Customers with Sales Signals
This feature will be available starting in August 2024.
Added a release note about root keys for search index encryption, which is now available on a rolling basis throughout the Summer
'24 release.
8
Capture a Scratch Org’s Configuration with Scratch Org Snapshots (Generally Available)
This feature will be available on a rolling basis starting in late June 2024.
Clarified that we removed Product SKU as a default sortable field on search and category pages in new D2C stores.
Context Namespace
Added a release note to announce the new Context Apex namespace.
Import Your Common App Data into Education Cloud
Added a release note to announce the new Data Importer for Common App.
Removed: Conceal Sensitive Information When Your Experience Cloud App is in the Background
This feature isn’t quite ready, so we’re removing it for now. We’ll let you know when it’s ready.
See Improved Contrast in Focus States
Added more image examples of increased color contrast focus states.
Send Real-Time Event Monitoring Events to Amazon EventBridge with Event Relays
Added a release note to announce the availability of real-time event monitoring events with event relays.
Removed: See More Results with Advanced Lookup Search
This feature has been removed while we make improvements.
Metadata API
Added a new enumeration value, SourceDate, to the type field in the MLField metadata type.
Adjust Service Appointments with Visiting Hours to Your Local Time Zone
The How section was updated to indicate the correct location of the setting in the UI.
New Metadata Type
Added a release note to announce the new metadata types, CollectionsDashboard and InvLatePymntRiskCalc.
Salesforce Subscription Management
Added a release note to announce the new metadata type SubscriptionManagementSettings.
Simultaneous Token Requests Are Blocked During the Refresh Token Flow
Added a release note about a new error for the refresh token flow that can impact integrations.
New Connect REST API Resource
Added a release note to announce the new Retrieval Summary Connect API.
View Fields That Are Encrypted Under Your Shield Platform Encryption Policy
Added a release note to announce the new Field Level Encryption metric.
June 3, 2024
Data Cloud Related List Enrichments Now Support Accounts
Updated release note to specify a roll-out date for June, 2024.
New Invocable Actions for Einstein Bots
Added a release note about new invocable actions and a changed metadata type for Einstein Bots.
Added a link to the new Unified Knowledge: Quick Look badge on Trailhead.
Grant Access to the Label Object In Custom Profiles To Continue Using To Do List Labels (Release Update)
Added a release note about a release update requiring custom profiles to include access to the Label object to allow continued use
of labels in the To Do List.
9
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes May 27, 2024
Search for Any Price Book with the Redesigned Price Book Component
Added a new release note to announce the redesigned UI for the price book component in Salesforce Pricing.
New Metadata Type
Added a release note to announce the IndustriesPricingSettings metadata type in Salesforce Pricing.
Support Customers While on the Go with Omni-Channel for Mobile (Beta)
Updated the release note to mention that this feature will be available after June 15, 2024. Also updated the instructions for granting
a user access to Omni Mobile in the Salesforce Mobile app.
Get Improved Accessibility in List Views
Clarified that the ability to navigate related lists with the key combination Ctrl+Alt+arrow key (Windows) or Cmd+Option+arrow
key (macOS) was first available in Spring ’24.
Other Improvements in Screen Flow Components
Updated the release note to mention that screen readers are now able to announce when no items are selected in a Data Table
component.
May 27, 2024

Stage Management
Added the release notes for Stage Management, which is an Industries common feature.
Added release notes for the new NamespacePrefix field in the OauthCustomScope object and the
OptionsEmbeddedLoginEnable field in the Network object.
Catch Up On Emails Quickly with Einstein Work Summaries for Email (Generally Available)
Updated names.
Use AI to Offer Conversational Recommendations and Add Products to Cart
Added a release note to clarify that new Health Cloud customers no longer have access to the Health Cloud managed package.
Help Partners Send Personalized Sales Emails Fast
Revised the required add-on license. Customers require Einstein for Sales, not Sales Cloud Einstein.
Removed: See the Topics That Matter Most to Your Customers with Sales Signals
Removed: Get Faster Segment Counts with Approximate Segment Population (Beta)
This feature isn’t ready, so we’re removing it for now. We’ll let you know when it’s back up.
Get Set Up Quicker with the Updated Commerce Assistant
Added a link to a video that shows using the Commerce Setup Assistant.
New Fundraising Metadata Types
Added a release note to announce the new AffinityScoreDefinition metadata type available with Fundraising in Nonprofit Cloud.
Disable CTR Sync for Voice Call Records
Added information about how to disable CTR Sync.
Let Einstein Build a Draft Flow for You (Beta)
We’re delaying the release of this feature while we make improvements. A When section was added and the enablement information
was updated.
Marketing Cloud Engagement Release Notes
Added the Marketing Cloud Engagement release notes for Summer '24.
10
Ensure Security in Search with Search Manager

We’re delaying the release of this feature while we make improvements. Added a When section.
Other Changes in Marketing Cloud Growth
Added a release note about data kit and analytics package updates.
Create Contacts Automatically from Email and Calendar Interactions
Added information about automatically created contacts not eligible for automatic contact enhancement unless they're in a Buyer
Relationship Map.
Add Company and Buyer Information to Contacts Automatically
Added information about automatically created contacts not eligible for automatic contact enhancement unless they're in a Buyer
Relationship Map.
Migrate to a Multiple-Configuration SAML Framework (Release Update)
We’re postponing this release update for production instances, but not for sandboxes. Updated the enforcement date for production
instances to Spring ’25.
Download Up to 1 Year of Event Log Files
Updated the release note to state that this feature is only available in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
May 20, 2024

Share Visit is Retiring
Added a release note to announce the Share Visits feature deprecation for Consumer Goods Cloud.
Get Meaningful Recommendations with Account Summarization (Beta)
Added a release note to announce the Generative AI Account Summarization feature for Consumer Goods Cloud.
Digital Lending
Updated the names of Digital Lending features. Underwriter Workbench is now called Underwriter Console. Self-serve experience
is now called self-service application intake and agent-assisted application experience is now called assisted application intake.
Metadata API
Added a release note about the new SearchOrgWideObjectConfig metadata type.
Changed available threshold values to up to 3. Previously, they were from 3 to 10.
Added information about how to enable Einstein for Flow.
Prepare for Restrictions on Salesforce Cookie Use
Clarified the use cases.
Connect REST APIs
Added release notes to announce the new and changed Connect REST APIs available with Product Configurator.
Answer Questions Easily with Knowledge and Generative AI
Clarified how admins can enable the feature.
Connect REST APIs
Added release notes to announce the new and changed Connect REST APIs available with Product Catalog Management.
Connect REST APIs
Added release notes to announce the new and changed Connect REST APIs available with Salesforce Pricing.
Receive Change Event Notifications for More Objects
Added new objects that support change event notifications.
11
Find Content on Managing Users and Data Access in One Place

Added a release note about improvements to Help content.
Create, Update, Get care plan tasks
Added release notes to announce the new Connect REST APIs available with Care Plan Tasks.
Einstein for Service Catalog (Beta)
Clarified that Einstein Copilot in Service Catalog is a beta service.
Removed: Identify Your Best Prospects with Prospecting Center
The update to this feature isn’t quite ready, so we’re removing it while we make improvements.
Removed: Find Your Next Customer with Account Scoring
Announced the new GeolocationBasedActions object, a new field on the FieldServiceMobileSettings object, and a new field on the
Quotes object.
Create a Custom UI Solution for Messaging for In-App and Web (Beta)
Added a release note about a new deployment type in Messaging for In-App and Web.
Apex: New and Changed Items
Added the new sfdc_enablement namespace.
New Invocable Action in Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator
Added a release note to announce the new invocable action available with Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator.
New Metadata Type in Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator
Added a release note to announce the new actionType field value, which is on the FlowActionCall subtype of the Flow metadata
type.
Access the Recent Activity Timeline on the Salesforce Mobile App with Copilot Enabled
Added a release note to highlight that Salesforce Mobile app users can now see their Recent Activity timeline with Einstein Copilot
enabled.
Boost Sales Productivity with the Group Benefits App
Added an instruction to not install the Insurance managed package if the OmniStudio Foundation managed package is already
installed. Having both packages installed results in duplicate components, and the Group Benefits app doesn't work in orgs with
duplicate OmniStudio components.
Manage Your Event Subscriptions with Pub/Sub API (Beta)
Updated release notes to remove a statement about when to commit a Replay ID. Replay ID commit details are covered in the
developer guide.
New Connect REST API Resource in Salesforce Scheduler
Added a release note to announce the new Connect REST API for Salesforce Scheduler.
Removed: Implement Health Cloud Without the Managed Package
We’ve removed this release note and replaced it with a newer one. The removed release note did not indicate that new Health Cloud
customers no longer have access to the managed package.
End of Distribution for the Health Cloud Managed Package
Added a release note to clarify that new Health Cloud customers no longer have access to the Health Cloud managed package.
12
May 13, 2024

Revenue Lifecycle Management Videos
Added a release note announcing the new Revenue Lifecycle Management video.
New Objects in Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator
Added a release note about the new Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator objects.
Code Builder
Added link to off-cycle Code Builder release notes on GitHub.
Tailor Your Enablement Programs to Your Company’s Preferred Content System - Developer Preview
Added developer preview disclaimer to topic.
Added Who section to the topic.
Added See Also links to the topic.
New and Changed Objects for Grantmaking
Removed picklist values from Outcome Management objects’ type fields.
New and Changed Connect REST API Resources
Added a release note about the new Data Cloud Connections Connect API resources.
Metadata API
Added an entry about custom field attributes in Data Cloud objects.
Experience Improved Performance for Big Objects
Added a release note about processing changes to Big Objects.
Metadata API
Added two Einstein Copilot types: GenAiFunction, GenAiPlanner.
Tooling API New and Changed Objects
Added two Einstein Copilot objects: GenAiFunctionDefinition, GenAiPlannerDefinition.
Lightning Web Security Enablement Rollout Postponed
Added a release note about LWS enablement status.
API Distortion Changes in Lightning Web Security
Added a release note about LWS distortion updates.
Enforce View Roles and Role Hierarchy Permission When Editing Public List View Visibility (Release Update)
Updated the enforcement date for this release update from Winter ’25 to Spring ’25.
Added more details to the Einstein for Flow release note.
Work More Efficiently with the Improved Your Account Interface
Updated the text and note to that certain users cannot view the new horizontal tab navigation in Your Account unless certain user
profile tab settings are changed. Added links to help docs which provide instructions on changing the tab settings.
Find and Buy Salesforce Products Faster with the Improved Product Catalog
Added a note that certain users cannot view the new horizontal tab navigation in Your Account unless certain user profile tab settings
are changed. Added links to help docs which provide instructions on changing the tab settings.
Other Changes to Salesforce Scheduler
Added a note that lists small but important improvements to Salesforce Scheduler.
Metadata API
Added a release note to announce the new ApplicationRecordTypeConfig metadata type.
13

Added information about required packages, permissions, and configuration.
Partner users can get support from Einstein generative AI to draft messages to their contacts and leads from Experience Cloud Aura
sites by using Einstein Sales Emails.
Digital Lending—India
Added a release note to announce the Digital Lending—India feature that support banks and financial institutions in India with an
end-to-end loan origination solution.
Control Access to Service Processes by Listing Them as Products
Added a release note to announce the integration of Service Process Studio with Product Catalog Management feature. You can
now control access to service processes by listing them as products.
Transaction Dispute Management
Added a release note to announce the integration of Transaction Dispute Management with Mastercom® feature. You can now
resolve transaction disputes with an efficient chargeback process.
Removed: Access Salesforce In More Regions With Hyperforce
The latest region for Hyperforce isn’t quite ready, so we’ve removed it from this release.
Confirm Your Components Use Supported Design System Customizations
Updated the release note title to clarify the conditions that can require updates to component customizations.
Connect REST APIs
Added release notes to announce the new and changed Connect REST APIs available with Product Discovery.
Improved Clean Up Process for Invoice Runs
Updated the release note to clarify enhancements made to the invoice run clean-up process.
Use the Token Exchange Flow with More Identity Providers
Added a release note about support for larger third-party tokens when using the OAuth 2.0 token exchange flow.
Updated the release note to include details on when the feature will be available.
Use Smart Totals with Formula Fields
Added a release note about support for smart totals in Data Cloud reports.
May 6, 2024
Use a CSV File as a Data Source
Added open pilot disclaimer to topic.
Copy and Report On Search Results
Added details about setting up the Copy Records and Create Report search actions.
Upgrade Your CG Managed Package Seamlessly
Added details about testing a new version of CG Managed Package in your sandbox environment.
New and Changed Financial Services Cloud Object Fields
Added a release note to announce the CanUseInIntegrationOrch, IsManual, OmniUiCardConfigId, and
StorePayload fields on the existing IntegrationProviderDef object.
Changed the product availability from generally available to beta.
14
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes April 29, 2024
Update More Commitments With Fundraising

Added information about using the Business Process API in Postman.
Transition to the Lightning Editor for Email Composers in Email-to-Case (Generally Available) (Release Update)
Updated the enforcement date for this release update to Spring ‘25.
Get Ready to Retain Data with Privacy Center
Added a release note about an upcoming feature in Privacy Center.
Easily Organize Cadence Builder 2.0 Cadences
Added a release note about saving Cadence Builder 2.0 cadences to any folder.
Mock SOQL Tests for Data Cloud Objects
Updated the limitations with stub implementation and the sample code.
Elevate Retirement
Added release note about Elevate retirement.
foundationConnect Retirement
Added release note about foundationConnect retirement.
Refine Access with Data Spaces Feature Permissions
Added a release note about enhanced security data space permission sets.
Evaluate Dynamic Formulas in Apex (Beta)
Added a code sample.
Changed the product availability from beta and generally available.
Removed: Research Companies and Individuals with One Click
Benefit from Simplified Org Migration with Automatically Migrated Change Sets
Added a release note to announce that change sets are migrated with org migrations.
April 29, 2024

Get the Latest LWC Changes with LWC API Version 61.0
Consolidated these versioned changes into the LWC API Version 61.0 release note:
• Update Your Light DOM Components for Improved Slot Forwarding
New and Changed Modules for Lightning Web Components on page 235
Removed the beta label on the lightning/platformUtilityBarApi module.
Metadata API
Added a release note about the new csvDelimiter, fileIdentifier, filePath, and dataType fields on the existing
BatchCalcJobDefinition metadata type.
Intelligent Analytics Apps
Updated link to Field Service Intelligence.
Manage Your SMS Request and Flow Experience
Added a release note about the new SMS features for Unified Messaging.
Register More API Specifications with Support for YAML
Updated a release note about the 3 MB maximum file size limit on YAML-formatted specifications.
15
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes April 24, 2024

Updated the editions where Einstein for Flow is available.
Updated the release note to clarify that the feature is available in English only.
Query Low-Latency Event Data with Event Log Objects (Beta)
Updated the release note to state that the event log object framework (beta) is only available to a subset of US East Hyperforce
customers.
Metadata API
Added a release note to announce the isAutoExtractedValue field on the existing OcrSampleDocumentField subtype of
the OcrSampleDocument metadata type.
April 24, 2024

Published preview release notes.
Supported Browsers
We’ve made some changes to our supported browsers documentation, making it easier to find what you need. Supported browsers for
Salesforce vary depending on whether you use Salesforce Classic or Lightning Experience.
IN THIS SECTION:
Supported Browsers and Devices for Lightning Experience
See the supported browsers and devices for Lightning Experience.
Supported Browsers and Devices for Salesforce Classic
Salesforce Classic doesn't support mobile browsers, so we recommend using the Salesforce mobile app for working on mobile
devices.
Supported Browsers for CRM Analytics
Supported browsers for CRM Analytics include those supported for Lightning Experience.
Supported Browsers and Devices for Lightning Experience

See the supported browsers and devices for Lightning Experience.
Lightning Experience is available in Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions. When
accessing Lightning Experience on a mobile device, we recommend that you use the Salesforce mobile app. You can also access Lightning
Experience on iPad Safari. For more information, see Lightning Experience on iPad Safari Considerations.
Consider these browser restrictions when working with Lightning Experience.
• Salesforce doesn’t support nonbrowser applications that embed WebView or similar controls to render content for Lightning
Experience. Examples of approaches that embed this type of control include Salesforce Mobile SDK, Microsoft’s WebBrowser Control,
Electron’s embedded Chromium browser, iOS’s UIWebView and WKWebView, and Android’s WebView.
• Lightning Experience doesn’t support incognito or other private browsing modes.
16
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Supported Browsers and Devices for Lightning Experience
Desktop and Laptop Browsers

Salesforce supports these browsers. Make sure that your browsers are up to date. Other browsers or older versions of supported browsers
aren’t guaranteed to support all features.
Microsoft® Microsoft® Microsoft® Google Mozilla® Apple®

Internet Edge Edge Chrome™ Firefox® Safari®
Explorer® (non-Chromium) Chromium
Lightning Not supported Not supported Supports latest Supports latest Supports latest Supports latest
Experience stable browser stable browser stable browser stable browser
version. Internet version version version
Explorer mode
for Microsoft
Edge Chromium
isn’t supported.
Experience Not supported Not supported Supports latest Supports latest Supports latest Supports latest
Builder sites stable browser stable browser stable browser stable browser
version. Internet version version version
Explorer mode
for Microsoft
Edge Chromium
isn’t supported.
Special setup Not supported Not supported No No No No

considerations?
Limitations? Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes
Note: The browser vendor defines “latest.” Check with your browser vendor to determine the latest version available.
Tablet Browsers
Use Apple Safari on iPadOS (iOS 13.x or later). . Lightning Experience on iPad Safari doesn’t support portrait orientation and orientation
switching. Use landscape orientation, and maximize your Safari browser to full width. To prevent your tablet from switching orientation,
turn on the iPad rotation lock.
We support only the Salesforce mobile app for Android-based tablets.
Apple® Safari® Google Chrome™ Other Browsers Salesforce Mobile

App
iPadOS Supported Not supported Not supported Supported
Android — Not supported Not supported Supported
Salesforce treats touch-enabled laptops, including Microsoft Surface and Surface Pro devices, as laptops instead of tablets. You can’t
access the Salesforce mobile app on these devices. Users are redirected to the full site experience that’s enabled for them—Lightning
Experience or Salesforce Classic. Only standard keyboard and mouse inputs are supported on these types of devices.
17
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Supported Browsers and Devices for Salesforce Classic
Phones
For the best experience, use the Salesforce mobile app.
Third-Party Browser Extensions and JavaScript Libraries

Before you use a third-party browser extension or JavaScript library, we recommend that you check AppExchange for browser extensions
and apps from Salesforce partners or the Component Reference for base components that match your requirements.
Although some third-party browser extensions can personalize and enhance your Salesforce experience, we don’t recommend using
browser extensions that manipulate the DOM. Using third-party browser extensions is at your own risk. Salesforce can’t prevent these
extensions from accessing your Salesforce data, nor can we detect that there’s any attempt to access your data. Additionally:
• Browser extensions that insert or remove elements in the DOM can interfere with the stability of Lightning Experience and lead to
unexpected behavior.
• Browser extensions that don’t follow Salesforce security standards can fail to work properly in Lightning Experience.
• The internal DOM structure of Lightning Experience can change in a future release, and compatibility with a third-party browser
extension isn’t guaranteed.
To use a third-party JavaScript library with custom Lightning components, upload it first as a static resource. Use the JavaScript library
by loading it in the component depending on which model that you’re using.
• Lightning Web Components: Load a third-party JavaScript library via lightning/platformResourceLoader
• Aura Components: Load a third-party JavaScript library via ltng/require
Supported Browsers and Devices for Salesforce Classic

Salesforce Classic doesn't support mobile browsers, so we recommend using the Salesforce mobile app for working on mobile devices.
Salesforce Classic is available in all editions.

Salesforce Classic IE 11 no longer Not supported Supports latest Supports latest Supports latest Supports latest
supported after stable browser stable browser stable browser stable browser
December 31, version. Internet version version version
2022 Explorer mode
for Microsoft
Edge Chromium
isn’t supported.
Salesforce Classic IE 11 no longer Not supported Supports latest Supports latest Supports latest Not supported
Console supported after stable browser stable browser stable browser
December 31, version. Internet version version
2022 Explorer mode
for Microsoft
Edge Chromium
isn’t supported.
Special setup Yes Not supported No No Yes No

considerations?
18
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Supported Browsers for CRM Analytics

Limitations? Yes Yes Yes No No Yes
Note: The browser vendor defines “latest.” Check with your browser vendor to determine the latest version available.
Supported Browsers for CRM Analytics

Supported browsers for CRM Analytics include those supported for Lightning Experience.
How and When Do Features Become Available?

Some features in Spring ’24 affect all users immediately after the release goes live. Consider communicating these changes to your users
beforehand so that they’re prepared. Other features require direct action by an administrator before users can benefit from the new
functionality.
Salesforce Overall
Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
General Enhancements
Create and Verify Your Default No-Reply

Organization-Wide Email Address to
Send Email (Release Update)
Enable LWC Stacked Modals (Release

Update)
Add the New Setup Domain (not

immediately available)
Prepare for Restrictions on Salesforce

Cookie Use
Temporarily Opt Out of Google Chrome

Storage Partitioning
MFA Is On by Default for Direct Logins

to Production Orgs
Salesforce Admins Get In-App

Reminders If MFA Is Turned Off
19
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?

Better Error Handling for Outdated
Pages in Lightning Experience (not
immediately available)
Monitor Net Zero Cloud Changes with

Field History Tracking
Work More Efficiently with the Improved

Your Account Interface
Find and Buy Salesforce Products Faster

with the Improved Product Catalog
Experience Improved Performance for

Big Objects
Salesforce Scheduler
Invite Customers to Enroll in Group

Service Appointments
Enable Unauthenticated Users to Modify

Service Appointments
Generate Personalized Appointment

Invitation Emails with Prompt Builder
New Connect REST API Resource in

Einstein Search
IdeaExchange Delivered: Improve Search for Users with Search Manager (Generally Available)
Other Improvements in Search Manager
Provide Relevant Results with Objects

to Always Search in Search Manager
(Generally Available)
Ensure Security in Search with Search

Manager
Improve Search with Insights from

Search Analytics (Pilot)
Salesforce Data Pipelines
Access Your Snowflake Data Using VPC

on AWS (Pilot)
20

Optimize Recipes That Use the Local
Salesforce Connection (Pilot)
Analytics

Unified Analytics Experiences
Post from CRM Analytics to Slack
Access Any Analytics Collection in

Lightning Pages
Data Cloud Reports and Dashboards
Summarize Complex Data with Matrix

Reports
Analyze Data from Unified Objects and

Related Source Objects
Export More Records from Data Cloud

Reports
Build More Granular Reports on

Calculated Insights
Unlock Insights from Unstructured Data
Add Calculated Fields to Your Data

Cloud Reports with Einstein Generative
AI
CRM Analytics
Analytics Experience and Visualizations
Amplify Visual Impact In Waterfall Charts

with Conditional Formatting
Embed CRM Analytics Dashboards in LWR

Sites (Generally Available)
21

Get More Functionality with the New
Dashboard Lightning Web Component
Data Integration
Optimize Recipes That Use the Local

Salesforce Connection (Pilot)
Access Your Snowflake Data Using VPC on

AWS (Pilot)
Analytics Development
Tableau
Marketing Cloud Intelligence
Commerce
Commerce Cloud enhancements include new and updated features for B2B and D2C Commerce, Salesforce Order Management, and
Salesforce Payments.

Salesforce B2B and D2C Commerce
Switch to an Improved Merchant

Experience with the Refreshed
Commerce App
Improve the Look and Feel of Your Store

with the Refreshed D2C Template
Commerce Einstein
Improve Search Results with Einstein

Semantic Search
Commerce Setup
Use Tailored Guided Steps for Quick Store

Setup
22

Get Set Up Quicker with the Updated
Commerce Assistant
Activate and Publish a Store Without a

Custom Domain
Streamline Store Creation with Smart

Defaults
Set Up Person Accounts with One Click
Share Your Store Setup Experience with

In-App Feedback
Guest Access to D2C Stores Is Automatically

Enabled
Include Attachments When Importing

Products
Commerce Cart and Checkout
Set Up Checkout Details Quickly with

Salesforce Checkout for D2C Stores
Automate Your Shipping Setup with

Salesforce Checkout
Provide Shoppers Estimated Delivery Dates

at Checkout
Improve the Shopping Experience with an

Add-to-Cart Success Message
Show the Precise Price Breakdown in the

Cart Summary
Give Shoppers More Options with Coupons

at Checkout
Improve Checkout with a Guided Flow
Dynamically Display Cart Information at

Checkout
Commerce Search
Automatically Rebuild Your Search Index
Get Improved Page Performance with

Displayable Product Fields (Beta)
Sort Products by SKU
23

Improve Your Browse Experience with the
Redesigned Product List Page
Data Cloud for Commerce
Drive Business Insights and Grow Revenue

with Data Cloud for Commerce
Get Performance Insights with the Inventory

Intelligence Analytics Dashboard
Review Product Behavior with the Product

Intelligence Analytics Dashboard
Understand Shopper Behavior with the

Shopper Intelligence Analytics Dashboard
Bring Inventory Data into Data Cloud with

the Omnichannel Inventory Connector
Deliver a Personalized Customer Experience

Using Data Cloud Segments
Use AI to Offer Conversational

Recommendations and Add Products to
Cart
Commerce Promotions
Create Promotions with Ease Using a

Template
Entice Customers with Shipping Promotions
Configure Promotion Segments with More

Flexibility
Highlight Promotional Pricing in Your Store
Commerce Components
Blend Social Media into Your Commerce

Store with the Social Links Component
Improve the Shopper Experience with

Enhanced Components
Commerce Store Management
Goals and Recommendations Is Now Part

of the Insights and Actions Workspace
Enhance Store Performance with More

Recommended Actions
24

View the History and Status of Accepted
Actions
Use Visibility Rules to Manage What Buyers

See
Commerce Dashboards
Analyze Payment Performance with the

Commerce Payments Dashboard
Measure the Effectiveness of Your

Promotions with the Commerce Promotions
Dashboard
Track Your Store’s Financial Health with the

Commerce Finance Dashboard
Get Order Summary Entity Data in the

Business Overview Dashboard
Additional Commerce Features
Automate Tax Processes with the New

Salesforce Tax Solution for Salesforce
Checkout (Generally Available)
Preview Added Products in Your Store

Before Activating
Salesforce Tax Solution Is Renamed Manual

Salesforce Tax Solution
Use a Single Custom Domain for Multiple

Commerce Sites
Customize Your Salesforce Content Delivery

Network (CDN) Settings for Commerce LWR
Stores
Salesforce Order Management
Exchange Fulfilled Items Using UI Flows
Bulk-Edit Items on Cancel, Discount,

Return, and Return RMA Flows
Salesforce Payments
Simplify Payments Setup Using the

Commerce Setup Assistant
25

Save Time Setting Up a Merchant
Account Using Salesforce Checkout
Get Pay Now with a Payments License

Purchased from Your Account
Offer Shoppers One-Click Checkout with

Passwordless Login
Customization

Permissions and Sharing
IdeaExchange Delivered: Get a Summary

of a User’s Permissions and Access
IdeaExchange Delivered: See Where a

Public Group Is Used
IdeaExchange Delivered: See What’s

Enabled in Permission Sets and
Permission Set Groups (Generally
Available)
IdeaExchange Delivered: Automate and

Migrate User Access with User Access
Policies (Generally Available)
Update the Order Field for Existing User

Access Policies
IdeaExchange Delivered: Allow Users to

Freeze Users and Monitor Login History
Without the Manage Users Permission
Find Content on Managing Users and

Data Access in One Place
Lightning App Builder
26

IdeaExchange Delivered: Use Blank
Spaces to Align Fields on Dynamic
Forms-Enabled Pages
IdeaExchange Delivered: Set

Conditional Visibility for Individual Tabs
in Lightning App Builder
Create Rich Text Headings in Lightning

App Builder
See Fields in Compact Density When

Configuring a Lightning Record Page
Globalization
Enable ICU Locale Formats (Release

Update)
Conduct Business with New Zimbabwe

Gold Currency
Review Updated Label Translations
Evaluate the Impact of the Latest ICU

and JDK Locale Updates
General Setup
Fix Formula Syntax Errors with Einstein

for Formulas
Add New Custom Fields to Dynamic

Forms-Enabled Pages
Enforce View Roles and Role Hierarchy

Permission When Editing Public List
View Visibility (Release Update)
Register More API Specifications with

Support for YAML
Access More External Data Types with

the Custom Adapter for Salesforce
Connect
See Required Fields at a Glance on

Aura-Based Page Views
Get Better Performance for List Views
27

See Record Fields in Two Columns on

Tablets
See Dynamic Forms-Enabled Lightning

Page Information for Custom Fields
Data Cloud
Ingest, harmonize, unify, and analyze streaming and batch data with Data Cloud. Then use that data to unlock meaningful and intelligent
experiences across Customer 360 applications and beyond.

Data Cloud Features Released by Month
AI in Data Cloud
Leverage Alerts to Evaluate the Quality

of Your Predictive Model
Let Einstein Autoselect the Best Factors

for Your Use Case
Evaluate Your Model Performance with

Activity Metrics
Access Models Quicker with the

Updated Einstein Studio Navigation
Einstein Studio Legacy Tab Is No Longer

Available in Data Cloud
Access Data from Amazon Redshift and

Databricks with BYOL Data Federation
Query Data Graphs for Metadata and

Data Using the Data Graphs APIs
Prioritize Campaigns with Waterfall

Segments (Generally Available)
Apply Filters to Contact Points and the

Activation Membership (Generally
Available)
Data Cloud Related List Enrichments

Now Support Accounts
28

Enrich Most Objects in Your Org With
Data Cloud Data
Enrich Data Actions Using Data Graphs
Run Batch Data Transforms at Custom

Time Intervals
Enhance Row Security in Batch Data

Transforms
Run Batch Data Transforms with No

Downtime
Edit an Output Node in a Batch Data

Transform
Modify Streaming Data Transforms
Refresh a Streaming Data Transform
Improve Data Quality by Monitoring

Problem Record Metrics
Bring Inventory Data into Data Cloud

with the Omnichannel Inventory
Connector
Customize Web Pages in Real Time
Refine Access with Data Spaces Feature

Permissions
Connect Unstructured Data in Data Cloud
Enhance Your AI and Automation

Strategies with Unstructured Data in
Data Cloud
Use Vector Search in Generative AI,

Automation, and Analytics Tools
Import data from the Adobe Marketo

Engage connector to Data Cloud
Experience Faster Salesforce CRM

Connector Refreshes
Cross Cloud Updates for Data Cloud
29
Deployment

New and Changed Components for
Change Sets
Development

Lightning Components
Update Your Light DOM Components for

Improved Slot Forwarding
Use Third-Party Web Components in

LWC (Beta)
Navigate to a URL-Addressable
Lightning Web Component
Control Utilities Within the Utility Bar
Confirm Your Components Use

Supported Design System
Customizations
Be Aware of Base Lightning Component

Internal DOM Structure Changes for
Future Native Shadow Support
Class and Style Attributes Render with

Extra Whitespaces
Lightning Web Security Enablement

Rollout Postponed
API Distortion Changes in Lightning

Web Security
Visualforce
30

Update References to Visualforce Pages
Served on Salesforce.com
Updated Default Behavior of Visualforce

Section Header Components
Apex
Use Cursors for Expanded SOQL Query

Result Support (Beta)
Evaluate Dynamic Formulas in Apex

(Beta)
Use SOQL in Apex with Data Cloud

Objects
Consider Field- and Record-Level Access

When Using Apex With Data Cloud
Objects
Support for Five-Level Parent-to-Child

Relationship SOQL Queries in Apex
Make Invocable Actions Easier to

Configure with New InvocableVariable
Modifiers
IdeaExchange Delivered: Monitor Apex

Scheduled Jobs More Efficiently
Update the API Version of Abstract or

Virtual Classes to Prevent Overriding
Private Methods
IdeaExchange Delivered: Monitor Setup

Methods Using ApexTestResult
View CronTrigger and Batch Job IDs in

Improved Error Messages with
Scheduled and Batch Apex
Ensure More Secure Compilation of

Apex Classes
See Improved Logging When FOR

UPDATE Locks Are Released
31

Resolve Unhandled Exceptions Faster
with Additional Information in Apex
Exception Emails
See Improved Behavior with Custom

Exceptions
Support for Standard Fields in the

getRelationshipOrder Method
API
Update API Calls to Use Your My Domain

Login URL
Update Records Using External IDs in

REST API
View More Details in the Updated

OpenAPI Spec sObjects (Beta)
Delete the Obsolete Salesforce API Only

Systems Integrations User Profile
Benefit from Simplified Org Migration

with Automatically Migrated Change
Sets
Salesforce Platform API Versions 21.0

Through 30.0 Retirement (Release
Update)
Packaging
Use Second-Generation Managed

Packaging to Build Data Cloud Apps
Quickly Iterate Package Development

Using Async Validation
Shorten Package Install Time in Scratch

Orgs by Skipping a Handler
Package External Client Apps In

Second-Generation Managed Packages
Explore the Updated Documentation

for Components in Managed Packages
Development Environments
Data Mask
32

Access Information About Specific Data
Mask Job
Automate the Running of Data Mask

Processes with Job Scheduler
Other Improvements to Salesforce Data

Mask
Capture a Scratch Org’s Configuration

with Scratch Org Snapshots (Generally
Available)
Increase Sandbox Security with Inactive

User Freezing
New User Permission: Manage Dev

Sandboxes
Platform Development Tools
Salesforce CLI
Salesforce Extensions for Visual Studio

Code
Code Builder
Einstein for Developers (Beta)
Deploy Scalable Apps with Scale Center
Plan and Test with Scale Test
Heroku
Extend Your Customer 360 Experiences

with Heroku
Salesforce Functions
Salesforce Functions Is Being Retired
Change Data Capture
Receive Change Event Notifications for

More Objects
Platform Events
Add Real-Time Event Monitoring Events

to a Custom Channel
33

Standard-Volume Platform Events Are
Being Retired
Streaming API Versions 23.0 Through

36.0 Are Being Retired
Event Bus
Manage Your Event Subscriptions with

Pub/Sub API (Beta)
Keep the Pub/Sub API Publishing

Stream Alive More Easily
Send Real-Time Event Monitoring

Events to Amazon EventBridge with
Event Relays
Einstein

Einstein Features
Einstein Platform
Einstein Bots
Get the Information Your Team Needs with

Required Responses
Answer Questions Easily with Knowledge

and Generative AI
Run Flows in Bot User Context (Release

Update)
View Standard Bot Reports in the Summer

’24 Folder
Einstein Copilot
The Mask Personally Identifiable Information

(PII) Setting Has Been Removed
34

See Records from Different Objects in

Einstein Copilot’s Responses
Clear Your Einstein Copilot Feed History
Give Users Control in Custom Einstein

Copilot Actions
New and Changed Standard Copilot Actions
Einstein Studio in Data Cloud
Prompt Builder
Ground Your Prompts Automatically
Use the Starter Usage Type for Lower

Cost Models
Other Changes
Use Supported Locales in the Einstein

Generative AI Platform
Experience Cloud
insights into site visitor interactions. Elevate your site with new styling features for forms and buttons, streamlined search options, and
increased control over the layout and spacing of your LWR sites. Improve your visitor login experience with a new integration framework
for headless login and guest user identity flows. Stay productive on the go with a collection of updates to the Mobile Publisher app.

Prepare Your LWR and Aura Sites for
Design System Architecture Updates
Upgrade Your App with the Latest

Features from Mobile Publisher for
Experience Cloud
Aura and LWR Sites
Integrate with Data Cloud to Harness

Site Data (Generally Available)
35

Customize the Forms and Buttons on
Your LWR Site with New Styling
Features
Polish the Layout of Your LWR Site for

Every Screen Size
Configure Search Results Layouts with

Search Manager (Generally Available)
See Updates to Dependent Picklists

While Editing Records in LWR Sites
Enable or Disable a Modernized Record

Experience in Aura Sites in Your
Sandbox Environment
Customize URLs for Accounts and

Contacts to Improve SEO (Beta)
Customize Your Einstein AI-Generated

Search Answer Settings
Help Partners Draft Sales Emails Quickly
Site Performance
Improve the Performance and

Scalability of LWR Sites with Experience
Delivery (Pilot)
Update References to Your Force.com

Site URLs
Load Cached Visualforce Site Pages

Faster
Security and Sharing
Switch to a Single Domain Certificate

for Your Salesforce Content Delivery
Network
Salesforce Content Delivery Network Is

Off by Default for Government Cloud
Organizations
Refine Your Experience Cloud Site with

New Customer Identity Features
Try a More Flexible Integration

Framework for Headless Identity Flows
36

Assign a New User Permission for
Custom Domain Management
Track More Visualforce Site Changes
Field Service

Field Service Einstein
Customize the Pre-Work Brief with

Prompt Builder
Field Service Resource Management
Enhanced Scheduling and Optimization
Prevent Overlapping Optimization Runs
Adjust Service Appointments with Visiting

Hours to Your Local Time Zone
Enhance Service Coverage and Boost

Resource Productivity by Scheduling Across
Multiple Time Zones
Benefit from Smoother Scheduling and

Optimization Services for Overlapping Travel
Time Scenarios
Get More Clarity and Resolve Issues Faster

with Improved Error Messages
Trace Who Triggered an Optimization in the

Optimization Request
Let Dispatchers Easily Set Criteria for

Schedule Optimization
Review the History of Scheduling and

Optimization Requests with Activity Reports
(Beta)
Access Optimization Request Files on Your

Own (Beta)
37

Keep Important Appointments Scheduled
During Optimization (Beta)
Create More Precise Travel Time Estimations

by Including a Buffer (Beta)
Get More Accurate Scheduling

Recommendations with Appointment
Insights (Beta)
Work Capacity
Reserve Workforce Capacity in a Service

Territory
Work Capacity Limit Relaxation Renamed

for Better Clarity to Limit Override
Share Work Capacity Data and Information

with Partner Community Dispatchers via
Experience Cloud
Field Service Operations
Service Documents
Personalize Service Documents with

Embedded Expressions
Asset Management
Minimize Downtime with Proactive Asset

Tools
Provision Entitlements with Precision
Link Assets to Multiple Accounts and

Contacts
Migrate from Maintenance Plan Frequency

Fields to Maintenance Work Rules (Release
Update)
Field Service Intelligence
Unlock Insights and Dashboards with Field

Service Intelligence
Field Service Customer Engagement
Improve Your Data Security with

Automated Deletion of Visual Remote
Assistant Video Recordings
38

Field Service Mobile
Lightning Web Components
Simplify Interactions with Data with Near

Field Communication on iOS
Capture the Layout of a Space with

Augmented Reality
Give Workers Access to Files with

Content Libraries
Track Hours Offline With Time Sheets

Priming
Stay on Track with the Field Service

Widget (Generally Available)
Get Accurate Site Check-Ins and

Check-Outs (Generally Available)
Choose How Mobile Workers Navigate

to Destinations
Measure an Object with Augmented

Reality
Create Leads and Opportunities from

the Field
Upsell Your Business from the Field

(Beta)
Optimize Data Retrieval with Cache-First

(Beta)
Industries
Goods Cloud streamlines delivery and distribution processes with Direct Store Delivery and Van Sales. Optimize service operations in
the field with Field Service for Industries. Health Cloud integrates with Milliman Care Guidelines (MCG) to bring industry-standard
assessments to Integrated Care Management. Loyalty Management gives marketing managers greater flexibility with Global Promotions
Management. Manufacturing Cloud helps manufacturers streamline the process of recovering costs on defective parts from suppliers
with Warranty Supplier Recovery. Salesforce for Education helps students plan their degrees better with Intelligent Degree Planning. We
also have plenty of changes for Automotive Cloud, Salesforce for Nonprofits, Public Sector Solutions, Industries common features, and
much more.
39

Automotive Cloud
Data Cloud for Automotive Experiences
Evaluate Vehicle and Driver Performance

Telematics Data
Monitor E-Vehicle Charger Telematics Data
Connect Data Cloud and Automotive Cloud

Using Prebuilt Data Streams
Improve Sales and Service Experiences for

Customers Using Calculated Insights
View Telematics Metrics On a Vehicle Page
Visualize Calculated Insights for a Vehicle
Visualize Calculated Insights for an Account
Supplier Recovery Claims
Standardize Supplier Recovery Terms Using

Contracts
Automatically Create Supplier Recovery

Claims from Dealer Claims
Give Your Suppliers Visibility Into Claims
Manage Claims with an Improved Context

Definition
Product Service Campaigns for Vehicle and Parts Recalls
Manage Asset Recalls and Upgrades At Scale
Segment Assets for Product Service

Campaigns Easily
Automotive Foundational Enhancements
Help Partners and Customers Launch

Actions from the Experience Cloud Site
Specify the External System Name and

Identifier for Vehicles and Parts
Track Repair and Maintenance Costs for

Assets Using Quotes
Communications Cloud
Consumer Goods Cloud
40

Consolidate Your Customer Data with
Data Cloud for Consumer Goods
Retail Execution
Plan Tours and Start Tours Activities

Efficiently
Get Meaningful Recommendations with

Account Summarization (Beta)
Capture Store-Related Data Easily
Sync Management
Centrally Administer Your Sync Experience
Expedite Sync Using Optimized Named

Fetch Trees
Identify Sync Records in Logs Easily with

Sync IDs
Process Simultaneous Sync Request Load

Efficiently
Improve Support for Solving Sync Issues by

Logging Extended Sync KPIs
Include CPU Calculation Time in APEX

Calculation
New and Changed Objects in Consumer

Goods Cloud Sync
Visual Studio Code Based Modeler
Simplify Contract Customization with

Keyword Suggestions
Add Validation Methods in A Few Quick

Steps
Deep Link Additional Apps in Your

Consumer Goods Cloud Offline Mobile App
Trade Promotion Management
Retain Manually Entered KPI Values for

Periods
41

Download Promotion Data Easily
Share Claim Data With Third-Party Systems
Execute Push Promotions Faster
Improve Promotion Effectiveness with

Analytics Dashboards
Upgrade Your CG Managed Package

Seamlessly
Manage Permission Sets Efficiently
Other Changes in Consumer Goods

Cloud
Energy and Utilities Cloud
Field Service for Industries
Product Service Campaign
Manage Mass Asset Recalls, Modifications,

and Upgrades Easily
Segment Assets in Product Service

Campaigns Swiftly
Work Order Estimation
Estimate Field Service Work Before You

Create Work Orders
Financial Services Cloud
Digital Lending
Give Clients a Self-Serve Loan Application

Process
Help Clients Apply for a Loan
Approve or Reject a Loan Application by

Using Underwriter Console
Get Digital Lending—India Up and Running

with Ease
Increase Speed and Ease of Adoption with

Digital Lending—India Sample App
42

Onboard Loan Applicants Faster with
Guided Application Intake
Offer a Smooth Loan Application Review

Experience
Reduce the Turnaround Time for a Loan

Disbursal
Resolve Transaction Disputes Faster with

Prebuilt Mastercom® Integration
Business Client Engagement
Discover the Ultimate Owners of Your

Business Clients
View Relationships of Your Business Clients
Rollup Definitions for Record Rollups
Create Record Rollup Definitions More Easily
Integration Orchestration (Generally Available)
Streamline Integration Callouts with

Integration Orchestration
Visualize Integration Callouts and Manage

Them Easily
Group Membership and Households
Use Party Relationship Groups to Create

Groups Easily and Efficiently
Visualize Groups or Households with

Actionable Relationship Center
Household API Setup
Aggregate and View Salesforce Records in

your Financial Planning Tool by Using API
Data Cloud for Financial Services Cloud
Visualize Insights into a Household and its

Members
Calculate More Customer Insights
Capture Income and Expenses
43

View Client Cash Flow Summary
Financial Account Management Standard Objects
Deliver Excellent Banking Service with the

Retail Banking Console App
Streamline Communication and Foster

Customer Success with the Wealth
Management Console App
Manage Your Commercial Banking Activities

Efficiently with the Commercial Banking
Console App
Get Customer’s Financial Account

Information with Standard Objects
Add Flexibility to Financial Accounts in

Service Processes with Standard Objects
Get Started Faster with Guided Setups
Get Households Up and Running with Ease
Get Record Rollups Up and Running with

Ease
Get Financial Accounts, Financial Account

Parties, and Financial Account Transactions
Up and Running with Ease
Watch Financial Services Cloud Videos
New and Changed Financial Services

Cloud Object Fields
Health Cloud
Einstein for Health Cloud
Automate Assessment Generation With

Einstein Generative AI
Home Health Enhancements
Revolutionize Patient Care With Home

Health
Optimize Home Visit Scheduling With

Manual Resource Assignment
44

Provide Personalized Care by Recording
Patient Preference Order
Streamline Dependent Home Visit

Scheduling With a New Flow
Deliver Effective Patient Care With Advanced

Group Visit Capabilities
Elevate Scheduler Efficiency With an

Improved User Interface
Expedite Your Home Health Setup
Integrated Care Management Enhancements
Access MCG Assessments and Care

Guidelines
Create Care Plans Using MCG Assessments
Administer Assessments Suggested from

MCG Assessments
Track MCG Assessment History
Update Care Plans Using Care Plan

Templates
Automatically Share Care Task Records
Group Benefits in Health Cloud
Boost Sales Productivity with the Group

Benefits App
Intelligent Appointment Management Enhancements
Book a Series of Appointments with

Multi-Step Scheduling
Reduce Friction in Managing Appointment

Changes
Get Enhanced Guidance to Set Up Intelligent

Appointment Management
Medication Management Updates
Medication Management Add-On License

is Deprecated
45

Store Outcome Data in the Patient Program
Outcome Management Data Model
Calculate Outcome Metrics Using Salesforce

Flows
View a Comprehensive Summary of Patient’s

Member Plans
Raise Verification Requests for Pharmacy

Benefits
Record Responses from Payers
Provider Network Management Enhancements
Use Provider Network Management in an

App
Use DocuSign to Collect Provider Signature

on Applications
Enhance Security with reCAPTCHA
Provider Search Enhancements
View More Relevant Details in Search Result

Cards
Improve Provider Search Results with Precise

Matching
Get More Control Over Provider Search Data
Get Enhanced Guidance to Set Up Provider

Search
Optimize Patient Care by Using

Segmentation Insights
Health Cloud Console
View Events, Tasks, and More with the

Health Cloud Console App
Health Cloud Managed Package
End of Distribution for the Health Cloud

Managed Package
Use Standard Relationship Objects in More

Health Cloud Features
46

Health Cloud Admin Guide
Find the Single Source of Truth for the

Health Cloud Has New and Changed

Objects
MuleSoft Direct Integrations with Health

Cloud
New and Changed Invocable Actions in

Health Cloud
Insurance
Life Sciences Cloud
Participant Management
Discover Clinical Trials Easily with

Criteria-Based Search and Filter
Evaluate Participant Eligibility With

Prescreening Assessments
Simplify Application Process With Built-in

Templates
Capture Informed Participant Consents with

Flows
Store Outcome Data in the Patient Program

Outcome Management Data Model
Calculate Outcome Metrics Using Salesforce

Flows
View a Comprehensive Summary of Patient’s

Member Plans
Raise Verification Requests for Pharmacy

Benefits
Loyalty Management
Global Promotions Management
47

Add Multidimensional Promotion Rules for
Nuanced Business Requirements
Refine Promotion Rule Eligibility Based on

a Product's Attributes
Design Promotion Rules with No Eligibility

Requirements
Control Who Can Create Promotions with

Ease
Provide Uninterrupted Member Services

with Negative Points Balance
Replicate Seasonal and Repetitive

Promotions with Minimal Effort
Streamline Program Manager

Onboarding
Increase Your Loyalty Program's Appeal

by Partnering with More Brands
Quickly Find Vouchers and Badges

When You Design Promotion Setup
Rules
Watch Loyalty Management Videos
New and Changed Objects in Loyalty

Management
New Metadata Types in Loyalty

Management
Manufacturing Cloud
Data Cloud Features for Manufacturing Cloud
Harmonize Asset and Operator Performance

Telematics Data
Share Data Between Manufacturing Cloud

and Data Cloud at Scale Using Data Streams
Make Data-Driven Decisions on Assets and

Customer Revenue with Calculated Insights
Warranty Supplier Recovery
Establish Contract Terms for Supplier Cost

Recovery
48

Efficiently Create and Edit Supplier Recovery
Claims
Manage Supplier Recovery Claims by

Efficiently Using the Experience Cloud
Manage Mass Asset Recalls, Services, and

Upgrades Efficiently
Identify and Segment Assets in Product

Service Campaigns Easily
Estimate Field Service Work and Quote

Costs to Customers Easily
Associate Any Sales Agreement with a

Contract
Media Cloud
Net Zero Cloud
Insert Questions and Response

Placeholders in Microsoft 365 Word to
Design Document Templates for ESG
Disclosures
Einstein for Net Zero Cloud
Draft ESG Reports by Using Einstein

Generative AI
Other Improvements for ESG Report

Accuracy Assessment by Using Einstein
Generative AI
Export Carbon Calculations for Audit
Track Value Changes in Key Objects and

Fields
Simplify Energy Use Data Collection
Grant Energy Use Data Upload and Entry

Permissions to Users
New and Changed Objects for Net Zero

Cloud
Public Sector Solutions
49

Enable Constituents to File Social
Insurance Claims
Tackle Care Barriers with Care Plans and

Goals
Enhance Service Delivery Experience for

Public Sector Providers
Efficiently Capture Complete Interaction

Notes by Using a Guided Flow
Redetermine Benefit Eligibility When

Constituents Recertify for Benefits
Share Performance Indicators and

Outcome Results on an Experience
Cloud Site
Help Employees Do More on the

Employee Experience Cloud Site
IdeaExchange Delivered: Give Inspectors

a Link to More Information About a
Regulatory Code
IdeaExchange Delivered: Make

Follow-Up Visits Easier for Inspectors by
Relating Them to the Previous Visit
Set Up Service Excellence Capabilities

More Easily
Improvement in Dynamic Assessments
Set Up Licensing and Permitting Flows

with Out-of-the-Box Components
Keep Your Benefit Management Flows

Up to Date with the Latest Fixes and
Improvements
New and Changed Objects in Public

Sector Solutions
Metadata API
Referral Marketing
Design Reusable Promotion Templates

Aligned with Your Business Goals
50

Make the Most of the Refreshed Referral
Promotion Guided Flow
Save Time with the Revamped

Promotion Email Templates
Knock Off the Hassle of Determining the

Sender Email Address
Improve Referral Prediction Accuracy

by Analyzing Additional Features
Track Advocate Count as a Promotion

KPI
Reduce Customer Acquisition Costs by

Running Referral Promotions for Your
Members
Watch Referral Marketing Videos
New and Changed Objects in Referral

Marketing
Salesforce Contracts
Salesforce for Education
Help Students Determine Their Steps to

Graduation with Intelligent Degree
Planning
Track Academic Advancement with

Learner Progress
Compare and Connect Mentors with a

Mentee
Migrate from Managed Packages to

Education Cloud
Import Your Common App Data into

Education Cloud
Get a Quick View of Admissions Item

Status
Assign Appointment Resources

Automatically and Efficiently
Draft Questions by Using Einstein for

Intake Assessments
51

Use AI to Set Course and Program
Expectations with Einstein Skills
Generator
Use QR Codes to Facilitate Check-ins
View Learning Details in Learning

Summary
Use Fundraising Updates for

Advancement
New and Changed Objects in Education

Cloud
Salesforce for Nonprofits
Nonprofit Cloud
Fundraising
Program Management
Nonprofit Cloud for Case Management
Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking
Quickly Find Salesforce for Nonprofit

Managed Package Release Information
Elevate Retirement
Vlocity Contract Lifecycle Management
Industries Common Features
Action Launcher
Provide Prompt Customer Service by Quickly

Launching Aura Components
Experience Improved Clarity with the

Renamed Out-of-the-Box Deployment
Feature
Changed Object in Action Launcher
Actionable List Members
Add or Remove Columns in Actionable List

Members to View Relevant Information
52

Improve the Efficiency of List Creators with
the Record Status Filter
Streamline the List Creator Workflow with

Contextual OmniScripts on Bulk Action
Panel
Save Time and Improve Efficiency with Bulk

Action Plans
Business Rules Engine
Replace and Delete Subexpressions in

Expression Sets Easily
Map Subexpression Variables to Expression

Set Resources Efficiently
Use Boolean Data Type in Expression Set

Constants
Troubleshoot Large Expression Sets Easily
Change Decision Tables Used in Expression

Sets Effortlessly
Easily Create Decision Tables by using

Templates
Enhance your Decision Table Logic by using

the Does Not Match and Contains Operators
Create Decision Tables that Support Large

Number of Rows (Pilot)
Changed Business Rules Engine Objects
Context Service
Automatically Map Context Definition to

Standard Objects
Generate Input Mapping Easily for Context

Definitions
Specify Context Mapping Intent to Use

Different Mapping Types
Use Context Definitions as Mapping Data

Source
New Objects in Context Service
Connect REST APIs
53

Context Namespace
Enrich the Search Experience on Experience

Cloud Sites
Show Search Results in an Interactive Map
Help Users Refine Search Results with

Sorting for Cards
Data Processing Engine
Add Flexibility to Data Cloud Filter and Join

Nodes with All Map Fields
Support for Multiple Writeback Nodes with

Data Cloud
Make Smarter Definitions With Formula

Nodes for Data Cloud
Metadata API
Einstein Summary
Efficiently Summarize the Information

Stored in Object Records
Engagement (Beta)
Efficiently Summarize a Customer

Interaction (Beta)
Efficiently Summarize Up To Five Recent

Customer Interactions (Beta)
Grantmaking
Effortlessly Launch Complex Grant

Applications
Measure the Impact and Success of Grants

with Outcome Management
Securely Collaborate on Grantmaking

Application Sections
54

Easily Add Grantmaking Permission Sets to
Permission Set Groups
Quickly Delete Individual Applications
Industry Integration Solutions
Efficiently Deploy Industry Integrations to

CloudHub 2.0
Ensure Confidentiality of Parameter Values

on Anypoint Platform
Intelligent Document Reader
Optimize Data Extraction by Excluding Rows

in Tabular Data
Intelligent Form Reader
Optimize Data Extraction by Excluding Rows

in Tabular Data
Interaction Summaries
Efficiently Create and Manage Interaction

Notes
New and Changed Objects in Interaction

Summaries
List Builder for Data Cloud Segment
Get Better Outreach Results by Suppressing

Irrelevant Records
Changed Object in List Builder for Data

Cloud Segment
Work More Intuitively with Record Rollup

Definitions UI
New Connect REST API Resource in Record

Rollup Definitions
Scoring Framework
Efficiently Debug Analytics App Installation

Failures with Saved Assets
55

Service Process Studio
Control Access to Service Processes by

Listing Them as Products
Watch the Service Process Studio Video
Stage Management
Automate and Manage Business Process

Stage Transitions
Timeline
Quickly Deliver Better Customer Insights to

Contact Center Agents (CCAs) With Data
Graph
Provide Personalized Support to Customers

with Summaries on Timeline
Marketing
Salesforce offers three marketing products: Account Engagement (formerly known as Pardot), Engagement (formerly known as Marketing
Cloud), and Marketing Cloud Growth edition. Unified Messaging tools support Marketing Cloud Growth and other Salesforce apps.

Marketing Cloud Account Engagement
Send Operational Emails to Opted-Out

Prospects Directly from Engagement
Studio
Copy Images to a Salesforce CMS

Workspace
View Alerts in the Optimizer
Account Engagement API: New and

Changed Items
Engage for Gmail Chrome Extension Is

Being Retired
Marketing Cloud Engagement
App, Setup, and Security
56

Quickly Deploy a Retail Onboarding Journey
with Industry Solutions
Get More Subscriber Information with

Package Manager Interactive Email Industry
Solutions
Visualize Automation History
Copy Large Datasets Efficiently in

Automation Studio
Fine-Tune Permissions for SFTP Users
Plan Automations Based on Start-Time

Scheduling Recommendations
Repeat Automations More Frequently
Get More Insights About Your Automation

Health and History
Secure Event Notification Service

Connections with OAuth 2.0 with Assertion
Authentication
Monitor Event Notification Service Callbacks

Using Alert Manager
Social Studio Is Being Retired
Cross-Cloud
Prevent Email Sends with Empty Fields in

Distributed Marketing
Data Management
Maximum Length of a Data Extension Field

Has Changed
Developers
AMPscript RetrieveSalesforceObjects()
Function Rowset Limit
Compress Journey History Data Downloads
Manage Data Extensions with REST API
Release Multiple Contacts from Journey

Waits Simultaneously
57

Use AMPscript to Encode JWTs with RSA
Signatures
Journeys
Give Journeys a High System Priority
Get Useful Journey Information on the

Canvas
Send a Larger Volume of Emails with

High-Throughput Sending
Specify Inbox Message Send Dates in

Journey Builder
Improve Journey Performance with

Recommendations
Messaging
Shorten SMS Links in MobileConnect and

Journey Builder
Secure a Custom Domain for SMS Link

Shortening in MobileConnect
Simplify SMS Messaging by Using DLT

Templates in MobileConnect
Add MobilePush to Your Flutter Mobile Apps
Test and Troubleshoot Your App

Configuration Using the MobilePush
Diagnostic Tool
MobilePush Developer Documentation Has

Been Updated
Enhance Message Engagement Tracking

with More MobilePush Events
Stay Compliant with Apple Privacy

Regulations with the New Privacy Manifest
Adopt the New Authentication Pattern for

Android Applications in MobilePush
Get Customer Behavior Information with

the LinkedIn Company Page Connector
58

Leverage More Data from Google Display &
Video 360
Easily Integrate Marketing Cloud Intelligence

with Google Search Ads 360
Drive Campaign Performance with

Performance Max Data in Bing Ads
Marketing Cloud Personalization
Track More Marketing Cloud Personalization

Product Metrics
Update Your Firebase Cloud Messaging API

Certificate for Mobile Push
Archived Release Notes
Marketing Cloud Growth
Work More Efficiently with New Access

Points on Campaigns
Get More Done with Updated Flow

Functionality
Build a Static List Quickly with

Campaign Members
Track and Use Data to Inform Your

Strategy
Streamline Tasks with Content Creation

Enhancements
Make Your Landing Pages More

Accessible and Secure
Manage Your SMS Request and Flow

Experience
Other Changes in Marketing Cloud

Growth
Unified Messaging
Merge Marketing and Service by

Migrating from WhatsApp-First Business
Messaging to Unified Messaging
59

Transfer a WhatsApp Conversation from
Marketing Cloud Engagement to Service
Cloud with Journey Builder
View Analytics for the WhatsApp

Session Transfer Activity in Journey
Builder
Suppress Promotional WhatsApp

Messages During Support Interactions
with Journey Builder
Expand the Data Available for Your

WhatsApp Engagement Queries in
Unified Messaging
Mobile
Configure offline landing pages without code using Mobile Builder for Salesforce Mobile App, which is now generally available. Improve
your Mobile Publisher app with new security features and prepare your app for new notification and device operating system requirements.
Submit the required Firebase information for push notifications on Android mobile connected apps.

Salesforce Mobile App
Everything That’s New in the Salesforce Mobile App
Hide Global Search for Specific Lightning

Apps
Configure Offline App Landing Pages Easily

with Mobile Builder (Generally Available)
Keep Working While Your Records

Download with Background Priming (Beta)
See Only Actions You Can Use in Mobile

Builder
Access the Recent Activity Timeline on the

Salesforce Mobile App with Copilot Enabled
Message Customers in the Salesforce Mobile

App (Beta)
Mobile Publisher
60

Submit Your Mobile Publisher Android
App’s Required Firebase Information
Before June
Mobile Publisher Android Apps with

Managed Public Distribution Are No
Longer Updated
Experience Cloud Apps Now Require

Android 8 or iOS 16 and Later
Set Up Opt-In Biometric Login for Fast

and Secure Experience Cloud App
Logins (Beta)
Configure How Your Experience Cloud

App Responds to Security Threats
Binary Upload Is the Default Distribution

Method for New Mobile Publisher Apps
Add Links to an Experience Cloud iOS

App’s Login Page
Set the Default Method for How Your

Experience Cloud App Opens External
URLs (Generally Available)
Customize Mobile Publisher Android

App Permission Requests to Post
Notifications
Simplify Site Navigation on Mobile

Publisher for LWR Sites (Beta)
Privacy Manifests Are Now Generated

for Experience Cloud iOS Apps
General
Update Your Android Mobile Connected

App with Firebase Information Required
for Push Notifications
OmniStudio
procedures, and choosing whether to merge entries within a list in an integration procedure list action. Also, DataRaptor is now Omnistudio
Data Mapper. For Winter '25 upgrades, disable New Order Save Behavior. To prepare for future releases, remove organization and profile
61
standard objects from data mappers, remove OmniStudio components with unlocked packages, and check the impact of the date
change in the ADDDAY function return.

Easily and Accurately Complete Address
Fields
Make Secure HTTP Outbound Calls to

AWS VPC
Remove Duplicates Within a List When

Merging Lists
OmniStudio DataRaptor Has a New

Name
Configure New Order Save Behavior

During Upgrade
Remove Organization and Profile

Standard Objects from Data Mappers
Used by Customer Portal Users
Change in the ADDDAY Function Output
Remove OmniStudio Components from

Unlocked Packages
OmniStudio Minor Releases
Revenue
processing issues.

Revenue Lifecycle Management
Product Catalog Management
Use Dynamic Options to Add All Products

Based On a Product Classification to a
Product Bundle
62

Maximize Product Reach with Translated
Product and Product Category Data
Accurately Represent Monetary Values and

Percentages in Product Attributes
Alter Product Attribute Values Through

Slider Controls
Personalize Product Catalog Management

Objects with Custom Fields
Other Changes in Product Catalog

Management
Product Discovery
New and Changed Objects in Product

Catalog Management
Connect REST APIs
Salesforce Pricing
Accurately Derive Prices from Products and

Assets Using Salesforce Pricing
Automatically Populate Output Variables for

Pricing Elements
Easily Update Context Tags
Enhance Pricing Data Security
Tailor Pricing Discounts for Your Business

Using Contract-Based Pricing
Monitor Your Pricing Data From the

Operations Console
Comprehensively Track Product Cost by

Using Cost Books
Search for Any Price Book with the

Redesigned Price Book Component
New Objects in Salesforce Pricing
Connect REST APIs
New Metadata Type
Product Configurator
63

Increase Productivity with Actionable
Configuration Rules
Create Flexible and Dynamic Sales Packages
Enhance Product Configuration with

Additional Data Types
Increase Service Adaptability With Custom

Field and Field Mapping Support
New and Changed Objects for Product

Configurator
Connect REST APIs
Quote and Order Capture
Transaction Line Editor
Extend Revenue Lifecycle Management With

Custom Field Support
Customize Prices for Different Types of

Transactions
Craft Professional Quote Documents with

Document Builder
Get Better Cost Estimates by Including Tax

Information on Orders
Easily Submit Orders for Fulfillment
New and Changed Objects in Quote and

Order Capture
Asset Lifecycle
Assetize Orders Flow
Use Contract Pricing to Apply Prices and

Discounts
Create Contract Prices and Discounts Using

a Flow
Visualize Your Quote and Order Changes
Asset Conversion Tool for Transitioning from

Subscription Management to Revenue
Lifecycle Management
64

Customer Community and Customer
Community Plus Support for Asset Lifecycle
Managed Asset Viewer
New Object in Asset Lifecycle
Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator (Generally Available)
Enable Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator for

Your Org
Set Up Permissions and Licenses
See Your Fulfillment at a Glance from the

Home Page
Define How Order Line Items Decompose
Design Orchestration Graphically
Configure Mapping for Fields and Attributes
Monitor Decomposition During Fulfillment
View Fulfillment While it Happens
Keep Track of Items in Jeopardy
Manage Fallout
New Objects in Dynamic Revenue

Orchestrator
New Metadata Type in Dynamic Revenue

Orchestrator
New Invocable Action in Dynamic Revenue

Orchestrator
Salesforce Billing
Improved Clean Up Process for Invoice

Runs
New Metadata Type
Sales
Boost your sales teams’ results with new Einstein features, more actions, and improved performance and setup experiences. Sales rep’s
get a boost to their productivity with standard and custom list view actions in the Account, Contact, and Lead Intelligence views. Sales
65
teams have a bird’s-eye view of their conversations with customers with Conversation Signals. Use Generative Conversation Insights to
create custom insights for video calls and get answers to things such as customer sentiment or deal terms. Sales managers have more
flexibility in how they view forecasts. Enablement has an improved test and deploy experience for sales programs. And in Salesforce
Maps, users experience better performance when plotting for high-volume data.

Einstein for Sales
Draft Personalized Sales Emails with

Einstein
Control Whether Users Can Enter Their

Own Sales Email Prompt Instructions
Einstein Automated Contacts Is Being

Retired in February 2025
Improve the Convenience of Setting Up

Meeting Requests
Relationship Selling
Visualize Key Contacts on the Buyer

Relationship Map
Add Company and Buyer Information to

Contacts Automatically
Sales Foundations
Contacts
Create Contacts Automatically from Email

and Calendar Interactions
Enhance Your Contact Information

Automatically
Activities
Return to Your To Do List Exactly as You Left

It
Organize and Find Records Easily with

Personal Labels
Grant Access to the Label Object In

Custom Profiles To Continue Using To
Do List Labels (Release Update)
See More Valuable Information in Seller

Home
66

IdeaExchange Delivered: Save Time with
More Actions in the Intelligence Views
Einstein Conversation Insights
See the Topics That Matter Most to Your

Customers with Sales Signals
Configure Custom Insights with

Generative Conversation Insights
Use Einstein Conversation Insights with

Single User Meetings
Share Edit Access for Record Collections

with Other Users
Access More Dashboard Improvements
Sales Engagement
Use Screen Flows as Cadence Steps in

Cadence Builder 2.0
Create More Customized Sales

Playbooks in Cadence Builder 2.0
Save Time by Creating Email Templates

with Cadences
Easily Organize Cadence Builder 2.0

Cadences
Cadence Builder Classic Is Being Retired
Revenue Intelligence
Navigate Revenue Insights Dashboards

More Easily
Use Custom Fiscal Forecasts in Revenue

Insights
Increase Your Deal Potential with Lead

Data in Einstein Account Management
Access Your Revenue Insights Resources

in One Place
Get Your Revenue Data Even Faster
Monitor Your Revenue Insights

Installations and Upgrades
67

Collaborative Forecasts
View Forecasts Grouped How It Makes

Sense to You
Pipeline Inspection
Save Time with More Actions in Pipeline

Inspection
Identify Potentially Risky Contacts on

Deals
Sales Programs and Partner Tracks with Enablement
Provide Users with Coaching-Inspired

Feedback Driven by Einstein Generative
AI
Make Your Enablement Goals More

Effective with Advanced Milestone
Options
Get Transparency on Your Goal Progress

with Itemized Progress Details
Help Users Discover and Complete

Enablement Program Goals on Time
Develop, Test, and Deploy Enablement

Programs and Measures More Easily
Tailor Your Enablement Programs to

Your Company’s Preferred Content
System - Developer Preview
Other Changes in Enablement
Partner Relationship Management
Help Partners Send Personalized Sales

Emails Fast
Sales Performance Management
Salesforce Maps and Salesforce Maps Advanced
Preview an Enhanced User Experience
Changes Afoot for Custom Data Sources
Sales Planning
Data Sources Management
68

Segmentation
Territory Planning
Quota Planning
Limited Availability of Original Sales

Planning
Sales Territories (Formerly Enterprise Territory Management)
Enterprise Territory Management Is Now

Sales Territories
Compensate Reps Based on Effective

Territory Coverage Dates
Email, Calendar, and Integrations
Einstein Activity Capture
Understand Downloaded User Connection

Reports Quickly
Outlook and Gmail Integration
Enter Generative AI Instructions to Create

Sales Emails in Email Integrations
Salesforce Inbox (Retired)
Inbox Mobile Was Retired
Salesforce for Outlook (Retiring)
Salesforce for Outlook Is Now Being Retired

in December 2027
Sales Cloud Everywhere
See the Fields You Want in Sales Cloud

Everywhere
Focus on the Right Records and

Personalize Your Workspace
Other Changes in the Sales Cloud
Enable New Order Save Behavior

(Release Update)
69
Salesforce CMS
Clone any content type and its variants, add an API name when you create an enhanced CMS workspace and content, and work with
CMS content previews.

Save Time with Content Record Cloning
in Your Enhanced CMS Workspace
Preview Custom Content Types in

Enhanced CMS Workspaces
Preview CMS Content as a Guest or

Authenticated User
Secure Linked Sources in Salesforce CMS

Content with Trusted URLs
Add an API Name to New Enhanced CMS

Workspaces and Content
Salesforce Flow

Flow Integration
Flow Builder Updates
Let Einstein Build a Draft Flow for You

(Beta)
Screen Flow Updates
IdeaExchange Delivered: Collect User Input

to Build a List of Records from a Screen
IdeaExchange Delivered: Empower Users to

Fill in Addresses More Quickly with the New
Search Field in the Address Screen
Component
IdeaExchange Delivered: Require User Input

in the Address Screen Component
70

Update Choices on a Screen in Real Time
with Reactive Collection Choice Sets
Troubleshoot Screen Flows Faster with More

Detailed Error Messages
Restrict User Input on Screen Components

with the Disabled and Read Only Fields
Update Records Using the State and Country

Codes Selected in Address Screen
Components
Run and Use the Results of an Autolaunched

Flow on the Same Screen with the New
Action Button Component (Beta)
Other Improvements in Screen Flow

Components
User Experience Updates
Find the Type of Automation to Build with

Ease
View Your Elements by Label in the Flow

Builder Toolbox
Build Flows More Easily with

Auto-Generated Element Names
Find and Select Flow Resources More Easily

in More Elements
Use the Enhanced Action and Subflow Panel

in Flow Builder
Transform Your Data in Flows (Generally

Available)
Configure Conditions More Easily with

Is Blank and Is Empty Operators in Flows
Check for Duplicates Before Creating

Records in a Flow
Flow Marketing Cloud
End a Flow for a User at Any Point with

Exit Rules
Wait for Specific Link Clicks with the

Wait Until Event Element
71

Access Data Graph Attributes in Your
Campaign Flows
View Detailed Flow Execution Data
Debug Segment-Triggered Flows
Package Segment and Form-Triggered

Flow Templates
Flow Debugging
Run Tests for Data Cloud-Triggered

Flows
Debug Scheduled Flows More

Successfully
Flow Runtime
Flow and Process Run-Time Changes in

API Version 61.0
Flow Management
Manage Your Flows More Efficiently

with the Automation Lightning App
Fine-Tune Access to Elements in Flow

Builder
Have Unlimited Paused and Waiting

Flows
Organize Your Flows Based on

Categories and Subcategories That You
Define
Flow Actions
Lock and Unlock Records with an Action
Use the New Toggle for Flow Action

Inputs with Explicit Default Values
Configure a Secure Connection with

MuleSoft in Setup (Generally Available)
Use Threading Tokens in Emails
Flow and Process Release Updates
72

Enable EmailSimple Invocable Action to
Respect Organization-Wide Profile
Settings (Release Update)
Enforce Sharing Rules when Apex

Launches a Flow (Release Update)
Prevent Guest User from Editing or

Deleting Approval Requests (Release
Update)
Restrict User Access to Run Flows

(Release Update)
Enable Secure Redirection for Flows

(Release Update)
Enforce Rollbacks for Apex Action

Exceptions in REST API (Release Update)
Run Flows in User Context via REST API

(Release Update)
Evaluate Criteria Based on Original

Record Values in Process Builder
(Release Update)
Make Flows Respect Access Modifiers

for Legacy Apex Actions (Release
Update)
Disable Access to Session IDs in Flows

(Release Update)
Enable Partial Save for Invocable

Actions (Release Update)
Improve Scheduled Flow Performance

with Updated Limits
Sort Apex Batch Action Results by

Request Order (Release Update)
Enforce Permission Requirements

Defined on Built-In Apex Classes Used
as Inputs (Release Update)
Flow Orchestration
Suspend and Resume an Orchestration
Resume a Failed Orchestration
73

Select the Orchestration Work Item to
Complete
Use Omni-Channel Routing with Work

Items
Configure Conditions More Easily with

the Is Blank Operator in Orchestrations
Other Improvements

external client apps now support a bunch of new OAuth flows. Give users access to manage custom domains with a new, more targeted
user permission. Create uninterrupted user experiences across Salesforce and custom interfaces with the new Single-Access UI Bridge
API. Access your Data Cloud encryption policy status from the Security Center Encryption Policy metric. Scratch orgs on Salesforce Edge
Network use partitioned domains. And Android mobile connected apps now require the Admin SDK private key and project ID from a
Google Firebase project.

Salesforce Backup
Set a Custom Backup Schedule
Add Read-Only Objects to Your Backup

Policy
Domains
Update References to Your Previous

Salesforce Domains
Identify Redirections for Your Instanced

My Domain Hostnames
Grant Specific Permission to Manage

Custom Domains
Maximize Availability with Partitioned

Domains in More Orgs
Identity and Access Management
Customize SMS One-Time Password

Delivery for Experience Cloud Sites
(Beta)
74

Brand the Welcome Email for
Passwordless Registration
Create External Client Apps While

Maintaining Security and Defined User
Roles
Use More OAuth Features with External

Client Apps
Integrate Custom App Experiences with

the Salesforce UI
Create Token Exchange Handlers More

Easily
Migrate to a Multiple-Configuration
SAML Framework (Release Update)
Enter New Firebase Information

Required for Android Push Notifications
Use REST API for Access to External

Client App OAuth Consumer Credentials
(Release Update)
Verify Email Addresses to Meet the

Email Verification Requirement
Stay on Top of MFA Compliance
Forced Login is Permanently Disabled

in Winter ’25
Identify the Origin IP Address for Logins

with One or More Proxies
Password Reset Login Subtype Label Is

Changed
Enable Embedded Login
Take Advantage of Apex Enhancements

for Processing JSON Web Tokens (JWTs)
Use the Token Exchange Flow with More

Identity Providers
Simultaneous Token Requests Are

Blocked During the Refresh Token Flow
Privacy Center
75

Get Ready to Retain Data with Privacy
Center
UI Text and Functionality Improvements

in Privacy Center
Permission Requirements for the

Consent Event Stream Are Enforced
Salesforce Shield
Data Detect
Event Monitoring
Query Low-Latency Event Data with Event

Log Objects (Beta)
Access and Download Event Log File Data

with the Event Log File Browser (Generally
Available)
Track Network Performance Metrics
Identify Instanced Hostname Redirections
Field Audit Trail
Audit Net Zero Cloud Field Changes
Shield Platform Encryption
Encrypt Search Index Keys with Manageable

Root Keys
Encrypt Grantmaking Compliant Data

Sharing Comments
See Fewer Encryption Statistics and Sync

Timeouts
Access the Bring Your Own Key Pages with

Assistive Technologies
Encrypt Application Form Seller Item Fields
Encrypt Party Income and Party Expense

Fields
76

Encrypt Party Financial Liability, Party
Financial Asset, and Party Financial Asset
Lien Fields
Security Center
Create Custom Metrics in Security

Center (Beta)
View Pertinent Data with an Enhanced

Security Center Dashboard Page
View Your Data Cloud Encryption Policy

Status from the Security Center
Encryption Policy Metric
View Fields That Are Encrypted Under

Your Shield Platform Encryption Policy
Other Changes
Allow Only Trusted Cross-Org

Redirections (Release Update)
Adopt Updated Content Security Policy

(CSP) Directives (Release Update)
Review and Resolve Blocked External

Redirections
IdeaExchange Delivered: Limit Who

Receives Notifications About Certificate
Expiration
Control Which HTTP Status Codes

Refresh Access Tokens for Named
Credentials
Create 3072-Bit Sized Certificates
Audit More Changes to Salesforce Sites

and Visualforce Sites
Enjoy Faster Load Times for Cached

Salesforce Site Pages
The BrowserId_sec Cookie Was

Removed
Visualforce Section Header Components

Are Secure by Default
77
Service

Discover Service Capabilities with My
Service Journey (Beta)
Einstein for Service
Einstein Conversation Mining
Track Key Trends and Top Contact

Reasons Across More Channels
Einstein for Feedback Management
Get Insightful Perspectives from Summaries

of Survey Responses
Get Deeper Insights from Survey Responses
Einstein Work Summaries
Catch Up with Midconversation Summaries

in Five More Languages
Catch Up Quickly On Emails with Einstein

Work Summaries for Email (Generally
Available)
Get Your Service Intelligence Data Even

Faster
Monitor Your Service Intelligence

Installations and Upgrades
Access Your Service Intelligence

Resources in One Place
Help Agents Predict Time to Resolve

Cases
View Contact Center Metrics on

Enhanced Dashboards
Simplify Service Intelligence Permission

Sets
Service Catalog
Run Catalog Items for Contacts in

Service Console
78

Make Catalog Items Available On
External Sites with Lightning Out
Provide Guest User Access to Service

Catalog
Integrate Service Catalog with

Knowledge
Drive Case Resolution in Service Catalog

with AI (Beta)
Share Catalog Item Links to Customers with

Einstein Copilot (Beta)
Channels
Email
Transition to the Lightning Editor for Email

Composers in Email-to-Case (Generally
Available) (Release Update)
Disable Ref ID and Transition to New Email

Threading Behavior (Release Update)
Catch Up On Emails Quickly with Einstein

Work Summaries for Email (Generally
Available)
Enjoy Improved Threading for Emails Sent

by Flows
Use Threading Tokens with More Objects
Threading Tokens Are Exempt From

Salesforce Org Storage Policy
Manage Visibility for Your Email Routing

Address
Messaging
Merge Marketing and Service by Migrating

from Enhanced WhatsApp to Unified
Messaging
Message Your Customers from the

79

Say Goodbye to Standard WhatsApp
Channels
Upgrade SMS and Facebook Messenger

Channels from Standard to Enhanced
Block Sensitive Data in Enhanced Messaging,

Messaging for In-App and Web, and Voice
Transcripts
Use Status-Based Capacity with Messaging

(Beta)
Register SMS Long Codes in Setup
Create a Custom UI Solution for Messaging

for In-App and Web (Beta)
Messaging Components
Agent Messaging Experience
Track Who Ends Enhanced Messaging

Sessions
Activate or Deactivate Sensitive Data Rules

from the Rules List View
Einstein Conversation Mining is Now

Available in Messaging for In-App and Web
Access to Sensitive Data Rules is Restricted

to Admins
Route Data to Objects in Partner Messaging

(Beta)
Set a More Informative Channel Type in

Partner Messaging (Beta)
Customize the Partner Messaging Channel

Setup Experience Using Icons (Beta)
The Minimize Chat Window Button Is

Relocated in Messaging for Web
Messaging for Web Development
Send Automated Notifications in Partner

Messaging Channels (Beta)
Voice
80

Reassign Agents to Queues on the Fly
Get Midconversation Summaries for Voice

in Five More Languages
Protect Sensitive Data by Masking Customer

Phone Numbers
Identify and Backfill Missing Call Transcripts

in Bulk
Take Calls from Preferred Audio Devices
Security Increased for Authenticating Users

in Amazon Connect with SSO
Resolve Common Status Conflicts Between

Omni-Channel and Amazon Connect
Toggle Between Callers and Put Other

Agents on Hold in Multi-Party Calls
Troubleshoot Failures During Amazon

Contact Center Creation
Customize When to the Apply Sales

Engagement Automatic Task Creation
Feature
Use an Apex-Defined Variable for All

Intelligence Signal Types (Release Update)
Pass the Conversation Intelligence Rule

Name as Input to a Flow (Release Update)
Show an Accurate Call-Recording State in

Omni-Channel
Control the Enhanced Conversation

Component’s Height in the Voice Call
Record Page
Get the Latest Enhancements for Your

Amazon Connect Contact
Social Media
Social Customer Service Starter Pack Is Being

Retired
Chat
81

Legacy Chat Is Being Retired
Channel Tools
The Search Individual Flow Action Is Now

Generally Available
Knowledge
Unify Knowledge from Various Sources

in Salesforce (Generally Available)
Turn On Lightning Article Editor and

Article Personalization for Knowledge
(Release Update)
Run the Lightning Knowledge Migration

Tool
Routing
IdeaExchange Delivered: Support

Customers While on the Go with
Omni-Channel for Mobile (Beta)
Stay Logged In to Omni-Channel When

Using Multiple Tabs
Route Orchestration Work Items with

Omni-Channel
Pause Messaging Sessions with

Omni-Channel Status-Based Capacity
(Beta)
Keep Routing Work During Service

Degradation
Feedback Management
Do More with an Enhanced Data Mapper

Page
Survey Invitations View in Contact

Activity Tab Is No Longer Supported
Scheduled Reminders
Boost Participation for Upcoming Events

with Scheduled Reminders
Industries in Service Cloud
82
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Salesforce Overall

Extend Your Service Cloud
Implementation with Service
Innovations from Industries
Create Rules with Business Rules Engine
Salesforce Overall
IN THIS SECTION:
Summer ’24 gives you more reasons to love Lightning Experience.
Create group appointments and invite customers to enroll to service appointments. Provide unauthenticated users the flexibility to
modify or cancel their appointments. Generate personalized emails for appointment invitations.
Einstein Search
Customize search, provide relevant results, and ensure security in Search Manager. Improve search with Search Manager and Search
Analytics, and see more results with advanced lookup search.
Connect to more data sources with the new Parquet connector and support for Virtual Private Connections on Snowflake.
Summer ’24 gives you more reasons to love Lightning Experience.
IN THIS SECTION:
Create and Verify Your Default No-Reply Organization-Wide Email Address to Send Email (Release Update)
To comply with increased email security standards, orgs are required to create and verify a Default No-reply address in
Organization-Wide Email Address settings.
Enable LWC Stacked Modals (Release Update)
As part of the Salesforce internal migration from Aura to LWC, more modals in Lightning Experience now render using LWC. This
update provides improved performance, especially when working with a large number of fields on a record create or edit modal.
You can now also use Dynamic Forms in a modal that's opened from a Create from Lookup field on most LWC-enabled record pages.
When you enable this update, you can expect minor changes to modal behavior. This update is available starting in Summer ’24.
Add the New Setup Domain
Ensure that Setup pages in Lightning Experience load content correctly when browsers block third-party cookies. If your users have
general access to the internet, no action is required. If your company controls users’ or servers’ access to the internet through firewalls
or allowlists, your IT department must add *.salesforce-setup.com to the company’s list of allowed domains. Salesforce Setup pages
are now hosted on that domain.
83
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes General Enhancements

To test custom functionality and code that uses a Salesforce session cookie before browsers fully block third-party cookies, enable
the My Domain setting, Require first-party use of Salesforce cookies. For example, to load your authenticated Visualforce page in an
iframe on a third-party website, the process uses a Salesforce session cookie. Also, if you previously enabled third-party cookies to
use Lightning Out (beta) without a custom domain or token-based authentication, test the Lightning components that you deployed
outside of Salesforce servers. Previously, to test the impact of this change on the use of Salesforce cookies, you set flags and settings
in your browser, and those steps vary by browser.
Temporarily Opt Out of Google Chrome Storage Partitioning
Google Chrome storage partitioning is enabled for Salesforce domains in Summer ’24. Give your company additional time to transition
away from unpartitioned storage with a new setting that disables storage partitioning until September 2024.
MFA Is On by Default for Direct Logins to Production Orgs
To prevent unauthorized access to Salesforce accounts, multi-factor authentication (MFA) is required when users log in. To help
customers satisfy this contractual security requirement, MFA is now a default part of the direct login process when a new production
org goes live. Sandbox orgs aren’t affected by this change. Orgs that are in a trial period aren’t affected until they’re converted to a
subscription.
Salesforce Admins Get In-App Reminders If MFA Is Turned Off
As previously communicated, the contractual requirement to use multi-factor authentication (MFA) for Salesforce products is in full
effect (as of February 1, 2022). Instead of the original plan to technically enforce the use of MFA, we’ve implemented a new notification
model instead. If a customer disables the MFA org-wide setting, they no longer comply with the MFA requirement. All admins for
the org receive periodic in-app warnings until MFA is re-enabled.
Better Error Handling for Outdated Pages in Lightning Experience
Experience a smoother workflow with more precise error handling if your page falls out of sync with the Salesforce server. Previously,
an outdated page immediately triggered an error and a forced refresh. Now, the server attempts to process the outdated page. If
successful, the page shows a warning message that reminds you to refresh the page when convenient. Rarely, the server can’t
process the outdated page. In this case, an error message prompts you to refresh the page, which resyncs the page to the server.
We’ve updated Salesforce Lightning Design System (SLDS) blueprints and Lightning base components with a new focus state styling
that overrides the browser’s default focus state styling. The new styling will appear as a dark blue line around the perimeter of the
component. Depending on the component, this styling may be outset or inset. This change is turned on by default, and there’s no
option to turn it off.
Monitor Net Zero Cloud Changes with Field History Tracking
View changes to key Net Zero Cloud fields with Field History Tracking. You can add up to 20 fields per object on every Net Zero Cloud
object, expanding your monitoring and data governance reach to sustainability and emissions data
An updated interface provides a more consistent and improved experience, helping you find the information that matters most to
you.
The Product Catalog in the Your Account App provides a dedicated place where you can view and purchase Salesforce products or
buy additional licenses and consumption-based resources.
To optimize performance, data is no longer encoded or validated during the write process when it’s larger than the maximum
allowed size. When data is read, the UI layer interprets precision and scale as specified in the metadata. Previously, precision and
scale were enforced when writing data to or reading data from a big object.
84
Create and Verify Your Default No-Reply Organization-Wide Email Address to Send
Email (Release Update)
To comply with increased email security standards, orgs are required to create and verify a Default No-reply address in Organization-Wide
Email Address settings.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in all Editions, except Database.com.
When: This update was introduced with Summer ’24 and Salesforce is scheduled to enforce it in Winter ’25. To get the major release
upgrade date for your instance, go to Trust Status, search for your instance, and click the maintenance tab.
Why: The verified Default No-Reply organization-wide email address is used to send emails from your org. This update allows increased
accountability for email deliverability.
How: In order to comply with increased email security standards, some emails will fail to be sent when lacking a customer defined
Default No-Reply Organization-Wide Email Address.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up a Default No-Reply Email Address (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Considerations for Using Organization-Wide Email Addresses (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Release Updates

As part of the Salesforce internal migration from Aura to LWC, more modals in Lightning Experience now render using LWC. This update
provides improved performance, especially when working with a large number of fields on a record create or edit modal. You can now
also use Dynamic Forms in a modal that's opened from a Create from Lookup field on most LWC-enabled record pages. When you
enable this update, you can expect minor changes to modal behavior. This update is available starting in Summer ’24.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in all editions.
When: Salesforce enforces this update in Spring ’25. To get the major release upgrade date for your instance, go to Trust Status, search
for your instance, and then click the maintenance tab.
How: This update introduces minor changes to modal behavior. When you create a record via a lookup field, the Save & New button
no longer appears. Additionally, post-save navigation no longer occurs on modals that are opened from a custom quick action. When
creating a record from a stacked modal, you’re returned to the record page on record save instead of navigating to the created record.
To review this update, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates. For Enable
LWC Stacked Modals, follow the testing and activation steps.
If you use custom quick actions, consider these guidelines.
• LWC quick actions—When using the lightning/navigation module, the newer modal overlays and stacks on the previous
modal by default. To automatically close the previous modal when navigating, set replace to true.
85
• Aura quick actions—If you used force:createRecord or force:editRecord, we recommend updating your code
to use lightning:navigation so that you can control post-save navigation behavior. To use post-save navigation on record
save, specify navService.navigate(pageRef, true); where the replace property is true.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Break Up Your Record Details with Dynamic Forms (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Lightning Web Components Developer Guide: LWC Migration for Record Home Pages (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Lightning Web Components Developer Guide: Quick Action Navigation (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Lightning Aura Components Developer Guide: Navigate to a Record Create Page with Default Field Values (can be outdated or unavailable
during release preview)
Add the New Setup Domain

Ensure that Setup pages in Lightning Experience load content correctly when browsers block third-party cookies. If your users have
general access to the internet, no action is required. If your company controls users’ or servers’ access to the internet through firewalls
or allowlists, your IT department must add *.salesforce-setup.com to the company’s list of allowed domains. Salesforce Setup pages are
now hosted on that domain.
When: This feature continues its staggered rollout in Summer ’24. The change is first enabled in sandboxes and nonproduction orgs,
and then in production orgs.
SEE ALSO:
Knowledge Article: New Setup Domain Rollout FAQ
Knowledge Article: Understand How Google’s Privacy Sandbox Initiative Impacts Salesforce
Salesforce Help: Allow the Required Domains (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

To test custom functionality and code that uses a Salesforce session cookie before browsers fully block third-party cookies, enable the
My Domain setting, Require first-party use of Salesforce cookies. For example, to load your authenticated Visualforce page in an iframe
on a third-party website, the process uses a Salesforce session cookie. Also, if you previously enabled third-party cookies to use Lightning
Out (beta) without a custom domain or token-based authentication, test the Lightning components that you deployed outside of
Salesforce servers. Previously, to test the impact of this change on the use of Salesforce cookies, you set flags and settings in your browser,
and those steps vary by browser.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance,
Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Why: Major web browsers block third-party cookies by default. Users can configure some browsers to allow these cookies, but browser
developers intend to stop offering that option. Notably, Google plans to fully block third-party access to Salesforce cookies in Chrome
in December 2024.
How: To prevent third-party use of Salesforce cookies, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter My Domain, and then select My
Domain. In the Routing and Policies section, click Edit. Enable Require first-party use of Salesforce cookies, and save your changes.
86
Important: This setting only affects Salesforce cookies. To test calls from Salesforce that use a third-party cookie, including
third-party applications embedded in Salesforce, disable third-party cookies in your browser.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Test the Impact of Blocked Salesforce Session Cookies (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Temporarily Opt Out of Google Chrome Storage Partitioning

Google Chrome storage partitioning is enabled for Salesforce domains in Summer ’24. Give your company additional time to transition
away from unpartitioned storage with a new setting that disables storage partitioning until September 2024.
Where: This feature applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in all editions.
Why: In Chrome 115, Google enforced storage partitioning in third-party contexts. Salesforce currently participates in Google’s deprecation
trial, which temporarily extends the use of unpartitioned storage on Salesforce domains. In Summer ’24, Salesforce enables storage
partitioning. This earlier rollout provides you with more time to test partitioned storage solutions, because the change can be reverted
if any issues occur. For flexibility, you can use the new setting to opt out of Salesforce’s rollout for now and keep unpartitioned storage
until Google’s deprecation trial permanently ends on September 3, 2024. After this date, Google Chrome storage partitioning is enabled
regardless of the setting.
Note: Google Chrome storage partitioning affects multiple web APIs, including localStorage and sessionStorage.
If you use these APIs in a third-party context, replacing these APIs can require storage solutions that use the same origin or allow
access across origins. To test for and resolve issues related to Google Chrome storage partitioning, updates can be required outside
of Salesforce. We can’t provide instructions or support for those changes.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter User Interface, and then select User Interface. Select Disable Google Chrome
Storage Partitioning for Salesforce Domains, and then save your changes. Clear all browser cookies and browser history, and then
close the browser. Log into Salesforce and ensure that all functionality works properly.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: User Interface Settings (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Google Privacy Sandbox: Storage Partitioning
Knowledge Article: Understand How Google’s Privacy Sandbox Initiative Impacts Salesforce
87
MFA Is On by Default for Direct Logins to Production Orgs

To prevent unauthorized access to Salesforce accounts, multi-factor authentication (MFA) is required when users log in. To help customers
satisfy this contractual security requirement, MFA is now a default part of the direct login process when a new production org goes live.
Sandbox orgs aren’t affected by this change. Orgs that are in a trial period aren’t affected until they’re converted to a subscription.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and all versions of the mobile app in all editions.
When: This change went into effect on April 8, 2024.
Why: On their own, usernames and passwords no longer provide sufficient protection against cyberattacks. MFA is one of the simplest,
most effective ways to prevent unauthorized account access and safeguard your data and your customers’ data. To help protect against
threats like phishing attacks and credential stuffing, Salesforce requires all users to log in with MFA. To learn more about the value of
MFA and how it works, watch this short video. For full details about the contractual requirement to use MFA, see the Salesforce MFA
FAQ.
Important: MFA is also required for users who access Salesforce with single sign-on (SSO). If you use SSO for your production
org, ensure that MFA is enabled for your SSO identity provider. Alternatively, you can use the free MFA functionality provided by
Salesforce. See Use Salesforce MFA for SSO Logins in Salesforce Help.
How: Salesforce enables MFA for your production org’s direct login process via the Require multi-factor authentication (MFA) for
all direct UI logins to your Salesforce org setting on the Identity Verification page in Setup.
Each time a user logs in directly to your production org with their Salesforce username and password, they must also provide an MFA
verification method. Verification method options include authenticator apps, security keys, and built-in authenticators. The first time the
user logs in, they’re guided through the steps to register their method.
There’s a 30-day grace period where users can skip MFA. The grace period starts the first time any user logs in. After it starts, the 30-day
clock applies uniformly to all users. For example, if a user logs in 20 days after the grace period began, they can skip MFA for 10 more
days.
Note: There are some use cases that aren’t required to use MFA. For a few of these situations, a Salesforce admin must manually
waive MFA for the affected user types. Check out Exclude Exempt Users from MFA in Salesforce Help for full guidance.
SEE ALSO:
Knowledge Article: Everything You Need to Know About Multi-Factor Authentication
Salesforce Help: Register for Multi-Factor Authentication (or Get a Little More Time If You Need It) (can be outdated or unavailable

As previously communicated, the contractual requirement to use multi-factor authentication (MFA) for Salesforce products is in full
effect (as of February 1, 2022). Instead of the original plan to technically enforce the use of MFA, we’ve implemented a new notification
model instead. If a customer disables the MFA org-wide setting, they no longer comply with the MFA requirement. All admins for the
org receive periodic in-app warnings until MFA is re-enabled.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and all versions of the mobile app in all editions.
Why: Salesforce has finished automatically enabling MFA for direct logins to existing production orgs, and MFA is now turned on by
default when new production orgs are created. Thanks to the partnership of our customers and their commitment to safeguarding user
account access, this MFA program has been extremely successful. Because of high adoption rates for products built on the Salesforce
Platform, and wanting to be respectful of your time and resources, we’re shifting away from the original plan to enforce MFA by removing
the option to turn it off. We recognize that it could be helpful for Salesforce admins to retain the option to briefly disable MFA for testing
88
or configuration purposes. However, customers should keep in mind that if they turn off MFA, they’re out of compliance with their
contractual obligation to use it.
Important: The contractual requirement to use MFA for direct and SSO logins to products built on the Salesforce Platform remains
in effect. This change doesn’t apply to other Salesforce products where MFA is enforced.
How: If the Require multi-factor authentication (MFA) for all direct UI logins to your Salesforce org setting is disabled in a
production org, all Salesforce admins see a warning prompt when working in Setup. These recurring prompts advise that the org is out
of compliance with the contractual MFA requirement and provide guidance on how to proceed. An admin can select the Turn On MFA
button in the prompt to go directly to the page in Setup where they can re-enable the MFA setting.
Admins can dismiss this prompt, but it reappears periodically until the MFA org-wide setting is turned on again.
SEE ALSO:
Knowledge Article: Everything You Need to Know About Multi-Factor Authentication
Knowledge Article: Salesforce Multi-Factor Authentication FAQ
Better Error Handling for Outdated Pages in Lightning Experience

Experience a smoother workflow with more precise error handling if your page falls out of sync with the Salesforce server. Previously,
an outdated page immediately triggered an error and a forced refresh. Now, the server attempts to process the outdated page. If
successful, the page shows a warning message that reminds you to refresh the page when convenient. Rarely, the server can’t process
the outdated page. In this case, an error message prompts you to refresh the page, which resyncs the page to the server.
When: This change is applied on a rolling basis starting in Summer ’24.
89

We’ve updated Salesforce Lightning Design System (SLDS) blueprints and Lightning base components with a new focus state styling
that overrides the browser’s default focus state styling. The new styling will appear as a dark blue line around the perimeter of the
component. Depending on the component, this styling may be outset or inset. This change is turned on by default, and there’s no option
to turn it off.
Why: Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) include criteria for non-text contrast and focus appearance. Meeting these guidelines
means that all users can more easily see the content on any device or in any lighting conditions.
With the current focus state colors in Salesforce, users with low vision who use a keyboard or other assistive devices sometimes struggle
to see which element is focused on. This update satisfies WCAG’s criteria for non-text contrast and makes it clear which element is
focused on.
Old Styling vs. New Styling
The following images show examples of the old focus state styling versus the new focus state styling.
Old focus state styling:
New focus state styling:
90
Old focus state styling (left images) vs. new focus state styling (right images):
SEE ALSO:
SLDS: Salesforce Lightning Design System
W3C: Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG)

View changes to key Net Zero Cloud fields with Field History Tracking. You can add up to 20 fields per object on every Net Zero Cloud
object, expanding your monitoring and data governance reach to sustainability and emissions data
Where: This change applies to Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs), Lightning Experience, and the Salesforce app in Contact
Manager, Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Database.com editions. Standard Objects
aren’t available in Database.com.
Who: This feature is available for customers with New Zero Cloud enabled.
91
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Field History Tracking, and then select Field History Tracking. Click View
on an object, enable tracking on that object, and then select the fields you want to track.
SEE ALSO:
Track Value Changes in Key Objects and Fields
Salesforce Help: Field Audit Trail (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

An updated interface provides a more consistent and improved experience, helping you find the information that matters most to you.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Starter, Pro Suite, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
Who: Your Account is available to users with the Manage Billing permission or the Your Account App Admin User permission set.
Why: Switch between your most frequent Your Account tasks with the new horizontal navigation menu. Increase your product and
license count, manage quotes, contracts, and renewals, and pay invoices without having to return to the home page.
To view the horizontal navigation menu, enable tab visibility for custom profiles and standard profiles without the Manage Billing
permission or the Your Account App Admin User permission set. In the Users - Profiles settings, set all Your Account tabs to Default On.
Important: If the Product Catalog tab is set to Tab Hidden, users can’t access the feature.
As part of this enhancement, we created these virtual objects: SalesforceContract, SalesforceInvoice, SalesforcePayment, and
SalesforceQuote.
See New and Changed Objects
SEE ALSO:
Update User Profiles
View and Edit Tab Settings in Permission Sets
Tab Settings
The Product Catalog in the Your Account App provides a dedicated place where you can view and purchase Salesforce products or buy
additional licenses and consumption-based resources.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Starter, Pro Suite, Professional, Enterprise, Performance,
and Unlimited editions.
Who: Your Account is available to users with the Manage Billing permission or the Your Account App Admin User permission set.
Why: In the Shop Available Products tab, browse Salesforce products that you can add to your contract. In the Manage Your Products
tab, browse a list of Salesforce products you own and buy additional licenses and consumption-based resources.
92
With detailed product descriptions, pricing, and discount information, the Product Catalog provides a comprehensive buying experience
all in one place.
Important: To view the Product Catalog, enable tab visibility for custom profiles and standard profiles without the Manage Billing
permission or the Your Account App Admin User permission set. In the Users - Profiles settings, set Product Catalog tab to Default
On. If the Product Catalog tab is set to Tab Hidden, users can’t access the feature.
How: In the Your Account app, click Browse & Buy or the Product Catalog tab.
SEE ALSO:
Update User Profiles
View and Edit Tab Settings in Permission Sets
Tab Settings
93
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Salesforce Scheduler

To optimize performance, data is no longer encoded or validated during the write process when it’s larger than the maximum allowed
size. When data is read, the UI layer interprets precision and scale as specified in the metadata. Previously, precision and scale were
enforced when writing data to or reading data from a big object.
Where: This change applies to Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
When: This feature rolls out in May 2024.
Create group appointments and invite customers to enroll to service appointments. Provide unauthenticated users the flexibility to
modify or cancel their appointments. Generate personalized emails for appointment invitations.
IN THIS SECTION:
Invite Customers to Enroll in Group Service Appointments
Create appointments for a large group of customers, and provide them with the flexibility to enroll in or unenroll from the service
appointment. Directly enroll lead records and authenticated users to the appointment or share the group appointment enrollment
URLs with unauthenticated users via email. You can also customize the default email templates to reflect brand personality and
include the links for unenrollment.
Enable Unauthenticated Users to Modify Service Appointments
Unauthenticated users can now modify or cancel the service appointments that they created. Salesforce Scheduler provides
customizable email templates that include links that redirect users to dedicated pages, allowing them to modify their appointments
with ease.
Generate Personalized Appointment Invitation Emails with Prompt Builder
Save your end users time from manually writing appointment invitation emails by creating a Salesforce Scheduler Email prompt
template.
Learn about the other small but important improvements to Salesforce Scheduler.
Connect REST APIs help customers, partners, and ISVs integrate with Salesforce software and UIs. Learn more about the new resource
available in Salesforce Scheduler.
Invite Customers to Enroll in Group Service Appointments

Create appointments for a large group of customers, and provide them with the flexibility to enroll in or unenroll from the service
appointment. Directly enroll lead records and authenticated users to the appointment or share the group appointment enrollment URLs
with unauthenticated users via email. You can also customize the default email templates to reflect brand personality and include the
links for unenrollment.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with Salesforce Scheduler enabled.
How: When you create the service appointment, use the group appointment mode. After you create the service appointment, you can
add the customers who you want to enroll.
94
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Scheduler Help: Schedule an Outbound Appointment (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Scheduler Help: Enable Concurrent Scheduling for Group Service Appointments (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)
Salesforce Scheduler Help: Considerations for Group Service Appointments (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Scheduler Help: Considerations for Multiple Service Resource Events (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Enable Unauthenticated Users to Modify Service Appointments

Unauthenticated users can now modify or cancel the service appointments that they created. Salesforce Scheduler provides customizable
email templates that include links that redirect users to dedicated pages, allowing them to modify their appointments with ease.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with Salesforce Scheduler enabled.
How: Click the link in the email notification that launches the flow to modify a service appointment for unauthenticated users.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Scheduler Help: Manage Guest Service Appointments in Salesforce Scheduler (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Generate Personalized Appointment Invitation Emails with Prompt Builder

Save your end users time from manually writing appointment invitation emails by creating a Salesforce Scheduler Email prompt template.
Where: Prompt Builder is available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Performance editions with the Einstein for Sales, Einstein
for Platform, or Einstein for Service add-on. These add-ons include Data Cloud. Einstein generative AI is available in Lightning Experience.
95
Who: To use Salesforce Scheduler Email prompt template type, users need the Salesforce Scheduler AddOn license.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Prompt, and then select Prompt Builder. Create a prompt template by using the
Salesforce Scheduler Email template type and the appointment invitation object.
To purchase an add-on, contact your Salesforce account executive.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Scheduler Help: Create a Salesforce Scheduler Email Prompt Template (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Salesforce Scheduler Help: Share Service Resource Availability with Actionable List Members (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)
Salesforce Scheduler Help: Prompt Builder (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Learn about the other small but important improvements to Salesforce Scheduler.
Where: These changes apply to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with Salesforce Scheduler enabled.
Why: All users with the Salesforce Scheduler permission set license can now use shift concurrency.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Scheduler Help: Configure Shift Settings (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
96
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Einstein Search

Connect REST APIs help customers, partners, and ISVs integrate with Salesforce software and UIs. Learn more about the new resource
available in Salesforce Scheduler.
Retrieve a list of group appointments along with the remaining attendee limit
Make a POST request to the new /connect/scheduling/group-appointments resource.
New request body: Group Appointments Input
New response body: Group Appointments
Einstein Search
Customize search, provide relevant results, and ensure security in Search Manager. Improve search with Search Manager and Search
Analytics, and see more results with advanced lookup search.
Rights of ALBERT EINSTEIN are used with permission of The Hebrew University of Jerusalem. Represented exclusively by Greenlight.
IN THIS SECTION:
Improve search efficiency and relevance by customizing search for your users in Search Manager. Create configurations for search
channels, filter search for your users with rules, and configure objects to always search. This feature, now generally available, includes
some changes since the beta release. We delivered this feature thanks to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
Provide Relevant Results with Objects to Always Search in Search Manager (Generally Available)
Select objects to always search in a global search configuration. Tailor your selection for a specific user profile. The page to select
objects to always search has moved to Search Manager. This feature, now generally available, includes some changes since the beta
release.
Apply field-level security to custom fields that contain sensitive information in Search Manager. All standard fields are protected by
default. You can select up to 100 custom fields per object. If an object has more than 100 custom fields, the search engine matches
results based on information in the unprotected additional fields. To prevent unwanted results, protect fields or remove unprotected
fields from the search index.
Improve Search with Insights from Search Analytics (Pilot)
Analyze search-related data with the built-in dashboard or build your own dashboard. Use insights to make search engine changes,
optimize content, and train users. For example, Search Analytics tells you when your users can’t find results for certain search terms.
You can then add content to address gaps or modify the search engine to include those search terms in synonym groups.
Improve Search for Users with Search Manager (Generally Available)

Improve search efficiency and relevance by customizing search for your users in Search Manager. Create configurations for search
channels, filter search for your users with rules, and configure objects to always search. This feature, now generally available, includes
some changes since the beta release. We delivered this feature thanks to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
97
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Einstein Search
IN THIS SECTION:
Manage the search index, edit and delete configurations, and migrate configurations in Search Manager.
SEE ALSO:
Provide Relevant Results with Objects to Always Search in Search Manager (Generally Available)
Salesforce Help: Customize Search with Search Manager (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Manage the search index, edit and delete configurations, and migrate configurations in Search Manager.
Why: Search Manager users can now:
• Manage the search index by adding and removing fields from objects.
• Clear up clutter by editing and deleting Search Manager configurations.
• Avoid repeating work by migrating Search Manager configurations between Salesforce orgs.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Customize Search with Search Manager (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Manage the Search Index (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Provide Relevant Results with Objects to Always Search in Search Manager (Generally
Available)
Select objects to always search in a global search configuration. Tailor your selection for a specific user profile. The page to select objects
to always search has moved to Search Manager. This feature, now generally available, includes some changes since the beta release.
Why: For new users, Einstein sometimes doesn’t have enough data to accurately determine which objects to search. Make sure your
new users see objects relevant to their profile in their search results. For example, if marketing users in your Salesforce org always search
for leads, select Lead as an object to always include in searches for marketing users.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Select Which Objects to Always Search in Global Search (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
98
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Salesforce Data Pipelines

Apply field-level security to custom fields that contain sensitive information in Search Manager. All standard fields are protected by
default. You can select up to 100 custom fields per object. If an object has more than 100 custom fields, the search engine matches
results based on information in the unprotected additional fields. To prevent unwanted results, protect fields or remove unprotected
fields from the search index.
When: After June 5, 2024, in your sandbox, go to Search Manager. If you have objects with unprotected fields, test the index configuration
to resolve security risks. After June 12, migrate the configuration to your production org.
Why: Protect fields to prevent unwanted results. For example, add the Trade Union custom field to the Employee object and apply
protection. If you don’t protect this field, users can search for the trade union’s name and find all employees in that trade union.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Protect Custom Fields in Search (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Manage the Search Index (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Improve Search with Insights from Search Analytics (Pilot)

Analyze search-related data with the built-in dashboard or build your own dashboard. Use insights to make search engine changes,
optimize content, and train users. For example, Search Analytics tells you when your users can’t find results for certain search terms. You
can then add content to address gaps or modify the search engine to include those search terms in synonym groups.
Note: This feature is not generally available and is being piloted with certain Customers subject to additional terms and conditions.
It is not part of your purchased Services. This feature is subject to change, may be discontinued with no notice at any time in
Salesforce’s sole discretion, and Salesforce may never make this feature generally available. Make your purchase decisions only on
the basis of generally available products and features. This feature is made available on an AS IS basis and use of this feature is at
your sole risk.
Who: To use Search Analytics, you need a Data Cloud license and Data Cloud credits.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Einstein Search, and then select Settings.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Getting Insights with Search Analytics (Pilot) (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Connect to more data sources with the new Parquet connector and support for Virtual Private Connections on Snowflake.
IN THIS SECTION:
Access Your Snowflake Data Using VPC on AWS (Pilot)
You can now gain insights into your private Snowflake data in Salesforce Data Pipelines. Create a remote connection using the Virtual
Private Connection (VPC) for Snowflake on AWS connector to sync data from Snowflake to Data Manager. Using the AWS VPC
interface endpoints provides secure connectivity to Snowflake internal stages and ensures that data transfer from Snowflake takes
place on the AWS internal network and doesn’t use the public internet.
99
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Salesforce Data Pipelines
Optimize Recipes That Use the Local Salesforce Connection (Pilot)

Improve the performance of recipes run after a full local Salesforce object sync by choosing to optimize the synced data.

You can now gain insights into your private Snowflake data in Salesforce Data Pipelines. Create a remote connection using the Virtual
Private Connection (VPC) for Snowflake on AWS connector to sync data from Snowflake to Data Manager. Using the AWS VPC interface
endpoints provides secure connectivity to Snowflake internal stages and ensures that data transfer from Snowflake takes place on the
AWS internal network and doesn’t use the public internet.
Where: This change applies to Salesforce Data Pipelines in Lightning Experience. Salesforce Data Pipelines is available for an extra cost
in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
your sole risk.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Private, and select Private Connect. Create an outbound connection, and then on
the Named Credentials page create external credentials and named credentials. In Data Manager, create a new connection for the
Snowflake Private Connector.
SEE ALSO:
Knowledge Article: Participate in a Salesforce Pilot
Salesforce Help: Snowflake VPC Connection (Pilot) (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Where: This change applies to Salesforce Data Pipelines in Lightning Experience. Salesforce Data Pipelines is available for an extra cost
in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
your sole risk.
How: In Data Manager, open the Connections option. Under SFDC_LOCAL, click the object that you want to optimize full syncs for.
Then, on the Data Sync Settings tab, select Optimize data sync for future runs. It’s recommended that you use a sandbox environment
to test this feature.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Optimize Recipes That Use the Local Salesforce Connection (Pilot) (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
100
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Release Updates
Release Updates
Salesforce periodically provides release updates that improve the performance, logic, security, and usability of our products. The Release
Updates page provides a list of updates that can be necessary for your organization to enable. Some release updates affect existing
customizations.
Every time a release update is created, it gets scheduled to be enforced in a future release. We announce each update and its schedule
here as soon as that schedule is known, but occasionally, updates are postponed or canceled. If that happens, we let you know in the
section that describes that specific release update.
Often, release updates provide a Test Run option so you can enable an update and examine any changes to your org, including changes
to customizations, before that update’s Complete Steps By date. You can view attachments in the Salesforce mobile app, but you can’t
edit them.
To view release updates, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and select Release Updates.
Enforced with This Release

These updates are scheduled to be enforced this release.
Allow Only Trusted Cross-Org Redirections (Release Update)
To protect your users and network, limit redirections to other Salesforce orgs. Add the specific Salesforce org URLs that you trust to
the Trusted URLs for Redirects allowlist. This update was first available in Winter ’24.
Enable EmailSimple Invocable Action to Respect Organization-Wide Profile Settings (Release Update)
With this update enabled, the EmailSimple invocable action adheres to organization-wide email address profile settings. This update
was first made available in Summer ’23 and was scheduled to be enforced in Spring ’24, but we postponed the enforcement date
to Summer ’24.
Enable ICU Locale Formats (Release Update)
To conduct business wherever you are, adopt the International Components for Unicode (ICU) locale formats. Locales control the
formats for dates, times, currencies, addresses, names, and numeric values. ICU sets the international standard for these formats. The
ICU locale formats provide a consistent experience across the platform and improve integration with ICU-compliant applications
across the globe. When you enable this update, the ICU locale formats replace Oracle’s Java Development Kit (JDK) locale formats
in Salesforce. This update was first made available in Winter ’20 and will be enforced on a rolling basis starting in Spring ’24.
The Label object is now available in the API. This change supports the Record Labels feature in Sales Cloud. Standard profiles include
access to the Label object automatically. If you use custom profiles, add access to the Label object to let users assign labels to records
and continue using labels in the To Do List.
Scheduled to Be Enforced in Winter ’25

These updates are scheduled to be enforced in Winter ’25. The list can include new, previously announced, and previously postponed
release updates.
Adopt Updated Content Security Policy (CSP) Directives (Release Update)
To help protect your org from cross-site scripting and other code injection attacks, Salesforce updated the delivered CSP directives for
Lightning pages. This change can prevent externally hosted fonts and images from loading. It can also prevent external websites
from loading within an iframe on your Lightning pages. To prepare for this change, review the impact and update your trusted URLs.
This update is available starting in Summer ’24.
101
Create and Verify Your Default No-Reply Organization-Wide Email Address to Send Email (Release Update)
After Winter ’25, to comply with increased email security standards, orgs are required to create and verify a Default No-reply address
in Organization-Wide Email Address settings.
Disable Access to Session IDs in Flows (Release Update)
Salesforce previously enforced this release update in Winter ’24. In some cases, the associated preferences were inadvertently reverted
by user actions, requiring Salesforce to re-launch the update for a subset of users. For impacted users, this update is available in your
org and is scheduled to re-enforce it in Winter ’25. To improve security, this update prevents flow interviews from resolving the
$Api.Session_ID variable at run time. Previously, when a flow screen included the $Api.Session_ID variable, the browser session ID
of the user that ran the flow appeared on the screen. A user was able to employ the session ID to bypass security controls.
Enable Partial Save for Invocable Actions (Release Update)
Salesforce previously enforced this release update in Spring ’20. In some cases, the associated preferences were inadvertently reverted
org and is scheduled to re-enforce it in Winter ’25. This critical update improves the behaviors and effects of failed invocable actions.
It only affects external REST API calls to invocable actions done in bulk. With this update, when invoking a set of actions in a single
request, a single failed invocable action no longer causes the entire transaction to fail. Without this update, if a single invocable
action fails, other invocable actions within the transaction are rolled back and the entire transaction fails.
Enforce Sharing Rules when Apex Launches a Flow (Release Update)
When this update is enabled, an autolaunched flow that runs in the default context enforces sharing rules when an Apex class
launches the flow. To enforce sharing, the Apex class must be declared using the with sharing keyword. This update is available
starting in Spring ’24.
Make Flows Respect Access Modifiers for Legacy Apex Actions (Release Update)
org and is scheduled to re-enforce it in Winter ’25.With this release update enabled, developers can trust that their legacy Apex
actions are properly protected and available only to other components in their managed packages. This update makes a flow fail if
it contains a public legacy Apex action.
Migrate from Maintenance Plan Frequency Fields to Maintenance Work Rules (Release Update)
The Frequency and Frequency Type fields on the Maintenance Plan are being retired. To prepare for this retirement and take advantage
of updated features, migrate your Frequency and Frequency Type data to maintenance work rules. This update was first available
in Summer ’22 and was scheduled to be enforced in Winter ‘22, but we postponed the enforcement date to Winter ‘25.
Pass the Conversation Intelligence Rule Name as Input to a Flow (Release Update)
This release update adds a new ruleDevName flow input parameter that’s sent to Recommendation Strategy and autolaunched
flows linked to the Conversation Intelligence rule. The input parameter contains the developer name of the rule. This update is
available starting in Spring ’24.
Prevent Guest User from Editing or Deleting Approval Requests (Release Update)
After Prevent Guest User from Editing or Deleting Approval Requests is enabled, guest users can approve or reject an approval
request. Guest users are no longer able to edit, reassign, or delete approval requests. This update was first available in Winter ’23 and
enforcement was scheduled for Summer ’23. We then postponed the enforcement date to Spring ’24 and postponed again to Winter
’25.
Restrict User Access to Run Flows (Release Update)
With this update enabled, Salesforce restricts a user’s ability to run a flow. A user must be granted the correct profile or permission
set to run the flow. When enabled, this release update deprecates the FlowSites org permission. With this update, flows run more
securely because only users who are granted correct profiles or permission sets can run flows. This update is available starting in
Winter ’24.
102
Run Flows in User Context via REST API (Release Update)

org and is scheduled to re-enforce it in Winter ’25.With this update, a flow that runs via REST API uses the running user’s profile and
permission sets to determine the object permissions and field-level access of the flow.
Turn On Lightning Article Editor and Article Personalization for Knowledge (Release Update)
Unlock a richer and more user-friendly experience with the new Lightning Article Editor. And with Article Personalization, your
knowledge content supports agent productivity specific to your business needs.
Use REST API for Access to External Client App OAuth Consumer Credentials (Release Update)
To follow recommended security standards, use the new credentials Connect REST API resource instead of Metadata API to
access External Client App OAuth consumer credentials.
With this update enabled, a flow initiated by a bot runs in user context. The user profile and permission sets associated with the bot,
as well as any sharing rules, determine the object permissions and field-level access of the flow. This update prevents flows initiated
by a bot from creating, reading, updating, or deleting records that the bot doesn’t have permission to access or modify. Previously,
a flow initiated by a bot ran in system context and had permission to access and modify all data. This update was first made available
in Summer ’23.
Scheduled to Be Enforced in Spring ’25

These updates are scheduled to be enforced in Spring ’25. The list can include new, previously announced, and previously postponed
release updates.
Disable Ref ID and Transition to New Email Threading Behavior (Release Update)
This update turns off Ref ID threading and transitions to Lightning threading in Email-to-Case. With the new Email-to-Case threading
behavior, incoming emails aren’t matched using Ref IDs. Instead, they’re matched using a secure token in the email subject or body.
If no match is found, Email-to-Case checks metadata from the email headers. This update was first available in Winter ‘21.
As part of the Salesforce internal migration from Aura to LWC, more modals in Lightning Experience now render using LWC. This
update provides improved performance, especially when working with a large number of fields on a record create or edit modal.
You can now also use Dynamic Forms in a modal that's opened from a Create from Lookup field on most LWC-enabled record pages.
When you enable this update, you can expect minor changes to modal behavior. This update is available starting in Summer ’24
and will be enforced in Spring '25.
Enable New Order Save Behavior (Release Update)
After the New Order Save Behavior is enabled, whenever an order product update causes a change to the parent order, Salesforce
runs custom application logic. Previously, in this scenario, Salesforce didn’t correctly evaluate custom application logic on the parent
record.
Enable Secure Redirection for Flows (Release Update)
To protect your users and network, apply stricter validation to the flow URL parameter that determines where you redirect users
after they complete a screen flow. With stricter validation, Salesforce blocks requests to redirect users to URLs that don’t meet the
additional validation requirements unless they’re on your list of trusted URLs in Setup. When Salesforce blocks a request, users see
an invalid-page redirection error. This update is available starting in Spring ’25.
Enforce Permission Requirements Defined on Built-In Apex Classes Used as Inputs (Release Update)
This update enables permission requirements to be enforced for file-based Apex classes that are used as inputs for Apex actions. It
also guarantees that the affected Apex action operates within the current component context. Currently, Apex actions rely on the
previous component context. This behavior leads to failed flow interviews when the flow includes an Apex action that contains a
file-based Apex class with permission requirements as input.
103
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Analytics
Enforce Rollbacks for Apex Action Exceptions in REST API (Release Update)
This update preserves data integrity by rolling back transactions that end in an exception. When you execute an Apex action using
REST API, the API doesn’t change Salesforce data if that exception occurs. This update, originally named Enforce Rollbacks for Custom
Invocable Action Exceptions in Connect REST API, was first made available in Spring ’23 and was scheduled to be enforced in Spring
’24, but we postponed the enforcement date to Spring ’25.
With this update, only users with the View Roles and Role Hierarchy permission can see or select from your organization’s list of roles
when they edit public list view visibility. This update was first available in Spring ’24 and was scheduled to be enforced in Winter ’25,
but we postponed the enforcement date to Spring ’25. If your organization doesn’t use roles, this update has no impact.
Sort Apex Batch Action Results by Request Order (Release Update)
This update enables Apex batch action results to be displayed in the order the requests are received. Currently, error-prone requests
are prioritized at the top of the result list, while successful ones are positioned at the bottom.
When enabled, this release update replaces the email editor in the docked and case feed email composers. This update was generally
available in Lightning Experience in Spring ‘24.
Use an Apex-Defined Variable for All Intelligence Signal Types (Release Update)
This release update adds a new intelligenceSignals flow input parameter that contains detected conversation intelligence signals.
Use this Apex-defined input parameter for your Recommendation Strategy and autolaunched flows linked to a Conversation
Intelligence rule. This update is available starting in Summer ’24.
If you see this release update, your Salesforce instance is using our original single-configuration SAML framework, which supports
single sign-on (SSO) with only one external identity provider. With this release update, we’re removing support for the
single-configuration SAML framework and supporting only the multiple-configuration SAML framework. To preserve your existing
configuration, follow the steps to apply this update. If you don’t, your SSO configuration stops working when this update is enforced.
This update was first made available in Spring ’24. It was scheduled to be enforced for all instances in Summer ’24, but we postponed
the enforcement date for production instances to Spring ’25. This update is still enforced for sandboxes in Summer ’24.
Scheduled to Be Enforced in Summer ’25

These updates are scheduled to be enforced in Summer ’25. The list can include new, previously announced, and previously postponed
release updates.
Evaluate Criteria Based on Original Record Values in Process Builder (Release Update)
This update fixes a bug with the evaluation criteria in processes that have multiple criteria and a record update. This release update
ensures that a process with multiple criteria and a record update evaluates the original value of the field that began the process with
a value of null. This update was first made available in Summer ’19.
Salesforce Platform API Versions 21.0 Through 30.0 Retirement (Release Update)
The retirement of versions 21.0 through 30.0 of the Salesforce Platform API was first scheduled for Summer ’23. The retirement is
now postponed to Summer ’25. You can continue to use these API versions but they’re not supported and won’t be available starting
in Summer ’25. Applications consuming them are then disrupted. Requests fail with an error message indicating that the endpoint
is deactivated. Upgrade all applications that use a legacy API version to a current version before this breaking change occurs.
Analytics
104
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Unified Analytics Experiences
IN THIS SECTION:
Post snapshots of CRM Analytics dashboards and lenses in Slack. Add any collection created in Analytics as a component of your
Lightning page.
Track important metrics in matrix format. Include unstructured data in your reports. Get help from Einstein generative AI when
creating report formulas.
CRM Analytics
Distribute CRM Analytics dashboards and lenses to expanded audiences with new Lightning web components.
Make data-driven decisions fueled by product, shopper, and inventory insights in Commerce Intelligence. Identify trends in your
service operations with insights from Field Service Intelligence.
Tableau
Use Tableau to analyze, explore, and make decisions on your data with just a few clicks. Create engaging visualizations, and embed
them in your Lightning pages to use them in your workflows. Tableau has enterprise analytics platform solutions for deep data
exploration.
With Marketing Cloud Intelligence, you connect, harmonize, visualize, and act on your marketing data to optimize performance
within campaigns, discover insights in real time, and then act on them.

Post snapshots of CRM Analytics dashboards and lenses in Slack. Add any collection created in Analytics as a component of your Lightning
page.
IN THIS SECTION:
Facilitate data-driven collaboration by sharing directly from CRM Analytics to your channels in Slack. Now you can post CRM Analytics
dashboards and lenses, including intelligent app dashboards. Slack recipients get a snapshot showing the latest data. Or post a link
with quick action buttons that can include view details, share, subscribe, and download from Slack.
Access Any Analytics Collection in Lightning Pages
Provide analytics where your users work with embedded collections on Lightning pages. In the Lightning App Builder, you can now
select any Analytics collection to be a component of your page. Previously, only the first collection was available for embedding. A
collection can include CRM Analytics dashboards and lenses, Lightning reports and dashboards, and Tableau dashboards.

Facilitate data-driven collaboration by sharing directly from CRM Analytics to your channels in Slack. Now you can post CRM Analytics
dashboards and lenses, including intelligent app dashboards. Slack recipients get a snapshot showing the latest data. Or post a link with
quick action buttons that can include view details, share, subscribe, and download from Slack.
Where: This change applies to CRM Analytics in Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic. CRM Analytics is available in Developer
Edition and for an extra cost in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions. The CRM Analytics for Slack app is available for use where
approved by a workspace admin and installed in Slack.
105
Who: Users must have the Connect Salesforce with Slack system permission in Salesforce, and they must connect their CRM Analytics
for Slack app in their Slack workspace to their Salesforce account. To post snapshots, users need the Download CRM Analytics Data
permission, and if Secure Image Sharing and Downloading is enabled, they also need the Share CRM Analytics Images permission.
How: On a dashboard or lens that’s been saved in CRM Analytics, click the Post to Slack icon.
Select the Slack workspace and channels where you want to share the item. Optionally, add a comment to spark conversation with your
teammates.
You can post with or without a snapshot. Both options include a link to the item in CRM Analytics.
106
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Add Apps in Your Personal Slack Sidebar
Salesforce Help: CRM Analytics for Slack
Access Any Analytics Collection in Lightning Pages

Provide analytics where your users work with embedded collections on Lightning pages. In the Lightning App Builder, you can now
select any Analytics collection to be a component of your page. Previously, only the first collection was available for embedding. A
collection can include CRM Analytics dashboards and lenses, Lightning reports and dashboards, and Tableau dashboards.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer
editions. This change applies to CRM Analytics in Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic. CRM Analytics is available in Developer
Edition and for an extra cost in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
How: In the Lightning App Builder, add the CRM Analytics Collection component to your page (1). Select an available collection from
the Collection lookup in the configuration panel (2).
107
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Data Cloud Reports and Dashboards
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Curate and Share Insights with Collections
Salesforce Help: Add Collections to Lightning Pages

Track important metrics in matrix format. Include unstructured data in your reports. Get help from Einstein generative AI when creating
report formulas.
IN THIS SECTION:
Summarize Complex Data with Matrix Reports
Get a comprehensive view of your data at a glance by grouping Data Cloud records in a matrix format. Surface trends across sections
of the data by comparing subtotals. For a broader perspective, review the totals and grand totals in the report. For example, identify
customers’ shopping patterns by adding a row grouping for event type and a column grouping for product category in a matrix
report. You can add up to two row-level and two-column level groups, which can also be based on formulas.
Analyze Data from Unified Objects and Related Source Objects
Data Cloud reports now support unified link objects that are key to identity resolution, so you can review records from a unified
object and related source objects in the same report. For example, to review customer details from different sources along with key
qualifier IDs, build a custom report that relates Individual, Unified Individual, and Unified Individual Link Object DMOs.
Export More Records from Data Cloud Reports
Export up to 50,000 rows from a Data Cloud report using the .csv, .xls, or .xlsx file formats. This limit includes totals and subtotals.
Previously, the limit was 2,000 rows.
Build More Granular Reports on Calculated Insights
To get a more in-depth analysis of metrics from a calculated insight object, add up to five dimensions as groups to a calculated
insight report. Previously, you could include up to three dimensions. With this enhancement, you can define non-aggregatable
measures with higher precision, such as ranking. For example, focus your marketing efforts with a report that ranks web traffic sources
based on five demographic characteristics: age group, gender, education, income, and family status.
Sometimes the relevant customer information that you capture, such as call notes and chat transcripts, resides as unstructured data
in your data source. With Data Cloud reports, you can process unstructured data in a data model object (DMO), analyze it, and report
on it. For example, review customer satisfaction scores alongside customer comments from the Survey Response DMO. Or, include
PDF files of case notes from case DMO records for future reference.
108
Add Calculated Fields to Your Data Cloud Reports with Einstein Generative AI
Customizing reports to meet your business needs is much easier when Einstein Report Formula Generation assists with the technical
work of creating row-level and summary formulas. Describe a calculation in simple terms, and Einstein discovers the relevant data
and suggests a formula. Previously, constructing formulas for calculated fields required expertise in data models, objects and fields,
available functions, and the various limitations of data types and formula types.
You can now use smart totaling in Data Cloud reports that include a formula field column. For example, in a Sales Order DMO, the
total order amount is calculated using a formula with the unit price and quantity for each line item. When you run a report on the
DMO, smart totaling ensures that each line item in the sales order is included in subtotals and grand totals only once.
Summarize Complex Data with Matrix Reports

Get a comprehensive view of your data at a glance by grouping Data Cloud records in a matrix format. Surface trends across sections of
the data by comparing subtotals. For a broader perspective, review the totals and grand totals in the report. For example, identify
customers’ shopping patterns by adding a row grouping for event type and a column grouping for product category in a matrix report.
You can add up to two row-level and two-column level groups, which can also be based on formulas.
Where: This change applies to Data Cloud in Developer, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
How: From the Reports tab or from the report run page, click next to a field name and select Groups Rows by This Field or Groups
Columns by This Field.
109
Analyze Data from Unified Objects and Related Source Objects

Data Cloud reports now support unified link objects that are key to identity resolution, so you can review records from a unified object
and related source objects in the same report. For example, to review customer details from different sources along with key qualifier
IDs, build a custom report that relates Individual, Unified Individual, and Unified Individual Link Object DMOs.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Report Types, and then click New Custom Report Type.
For the report type, select a unified object DMO as the primary object, and specify the report’s Store-in category. Relate the primary
object to the data source object and the unified link object DMOs. Then specify the fields that you want to display.
110
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Video: Build a Data Cloud Report Using a Custom Report Type
Salesforce Help: Unified Link Objects and Relationships to Unified Objects (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Export More Records from Data Cloud Reports

Export up to 50,000 rows from a Data Cloud report using the .csv, .xls, or .xlsx file formats. This limit includes totals and subtotals. Previously,
the limit was 2,000 rows.
How: From the Reports tab or from the report run page, click and select Export.
111
Build More Granular Reports on Calculated Insights

To get a more in-depth analysis of metrics from a calculated insight object, add up to five dimensions as groups to a calculated insight
report. Previously, you could include up to three dimensions. With this enhancement, you can define non-aggregatable measures with
higher precision, such as ranking. For example, focus your marketing efforts with a report that ranks web traffic sources based on five
demographic characteristics: age group, gender, education, income, and family status.

Sometimes the relevant customer information that you capture, such as call notes and chat transcripts, resides as unstructured data in
your data source. With Data Cloud reports, you can process unstructured data in a data model object (DMO), analyze it, and report on
it. For example, review customer satisfaction scores alongside customer comments from the Survey Response DMO. Or, include PDF
files of case notes from case DMO records for future reference.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Report Types, and then click New Custom Report Type. Build a custom report
type using the DMO that contains the unstructured data as a primary or secondary object. Relate other DMOs to suit your reporting
needs, and specify the fields that you want to display.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Video: Build a Data Cloud Report Using a Custom Report Type
Add Calculated Fields to Your Data Cloud Reports with Einstein Generative AI
Customizing reports to meet your business needs is much easier when Einstein Report Formula Generation assists with the technical
work of creating row-level and summary formulas. Describe a calculation in simple terms, and Einstein discovers the relevant data and
suggests a formula. Previously, constructing formulas for calculated fields required expertise in data models, objects and fields, available
functions, and the various limitations of data types and formula types.
Where: This change applies to Data Cloud in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Einstein 1 Sales Edition
or Einstein 1 Service Edition and the DC Report GPT add-on. Einstein generative AI is available in Lightning Experience.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Einstein Setup, and then select Einstein Setup. Enable Turn on Einstein.
When editing a report, select Create Formula in the Fields panel, or select Add Summary Formula or Add Row-Level Formula in
the Columns menu.
112
In the formula builder, on the Einstein tab (1), describe the calculation that you want (2). You can ask questions such as, “How many
days did it take each opportunity to close?” or “After deducting taxes and expenses, what are our net earnings?” If the Einstein formula
looks good, click Insert Formula (3) and Einstein fills in all the fields for you (4).
113
Feedback can help us improve, and it’s greatly appreciated. Access the thumbs up and thumbs down icons by hovering on Einstein’s
response.
SEE ALSO:
Einstein Features
Salesforce Help: About Einstein Generative AI
Salesforce Help: Adding Calculated Columns with Einstein Report Formula Generation (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)

You can now use smart totaling in Data Cloud reports that include a formula field column. For example, in a Sales Order DMO, the total
order amount is calculated using a formula with the unit price and quantity for each line item. When you run a report on the DMO, smart
totaling ensures that each line item in the sales order is included in subtotals and grand totals only once.
114
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes CRM Analytics
CRM Analytics
Distribute CRM Analytics dashboards and lenses to expanded audiences with new Lightning web components.
IN THIS SECTION:
Analytics Visualization and Sharing
Apply conditional formatting in waterfall charts. Embed dashboards in Lightning Experience and Experience Cloud pages with the
new, native CRM Analytics Dashboard Lightning web component.
Analytics Data Integration
Connect to secure data sources with support for Virtual Private Connections on Snowflake.
CRM Analytics Development
Inspect your Analytics assets and execute queries using the new CRM Analytics Connect API Postman collection.
Analytics Visualization and Sharing

Apply conditional formatting in waterfall charts. Embed dashboards in Lightning Experience and Experience Cloud pages with the new,
native CRM Analytics Dashboard Lightning web component.
IN THIS SECTION:
Amplify Visual Impact In Waterfall Charts with Conditional Formatting
Help users quickly spot areas of interest and get deeper exploration of their data by adding conditional formatting to waterfall charts.
Previously, your data had to be configured with other supported chart types that weren’t as compelling with displaying how positive
and negative changes impacted initial data values.
115
Embed CRM Analytics Dashboards in LWR Sites (Generally Available)

Let your customers view and interact with CRM Analytics dashboards in your Lightning Web Runtime (LWR) site by adding the CRM
Analytics Dashboard component. For example, customers can view visualizations of account data alongside their account information.
Get More Functionality with the New Dashboard Lightning Web Component (Generally Available)
Embed your CRM Analytics dashboards in Lightning Experience pages with the new, native CRM Analytics Dashboard Lightning
web component. The component works seamlessly in Lightning Experience pages and LWR sites. For example, customers can view
visualizations of opportunity data alongside their opportunity information.
Amplify Visual Impact In Waterfall Charts with Conditional Formatting

Help users quickly spot areas of interest and get deeper exploration of their data by adding conditional formatting to waterfall charts.
Previously, your data had to be configured with other supported chart types that weren’t as compelling with displaying how positive
and negative changes impacted initial data values.
How: Open or create a dashboard with a waterfall chart. Click Formatting and open Conditional Formatting.
Apply a conditional formatting rule to a field. For example, highlight when available container inventory is lower than demand. Click
Done.
116
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Automatically Highlight Data with Conditional Formatting (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Embed CRM Analytics Dashboards in LWR Sites (Generally Available)

Let your customers view and interact with CRM Analytics dashboards in your Lightning Web Runtime (LWR) site by adding the CRM
Analytics Dashboard component. For example, customers can view visualizations of account data alongside their account information.
Where: This change applies to CRM Analytics in LWR sites accessed through Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic. CRM Analytics
is available in Developer Edition and for an extra cost in Enterprise and Performance editions, and requires an Experience Cloud license.
How: Use the new CRM Analytics Dashboard Lightning web component in your Experience Cloud pages. From the component palette
of an object detail page in Experience Builder, drag the dashboard component to the page.
117
Get More Functionality with the New Dashboard Lightning Web Component (Generally Available)
Embed your CRM Analytics dashboards in Lightning Experience pages with the new, native CRM Analytics Dashboard Lightning web
component. The component works seamlessly in Lightning Experience pages and LWR sites. For example, customers can view visualizations
of opportunity data alongside their opportunity information.
How: Open Lightning App Builder for the page you want to edit. From the component palette, drag LWC CRM Analytics Dashboard
onto the page.
Analytics Data Integration

Connect to secure data sources with support for Virtual Private Connections on Snowflake.
IN THIS SECTION:
You can now gain insights into your private Snowflake data in CRM Analytics. Create a remote connection using the Virtual Private
Connection (VPC) for Snowflake on AWS connector to sync data from Snowflake to Data Manager. Using the AWS VPC interface
endpoints provides secure connectivity to Snowflake internal stages and ensures that data transfer from Snowflake takes place on
the AWS internal network and doesn’t use the public internet.

118
your sole risk.
How: In Data Manager, open the Connections option. Under SFDC_LOCAL, click the object that you want to optimize full syncs for.
Then, on the Data Sync Settings tab, select Optimize data sync for future runs. It’s recommended that you use a sandbox environment
to test this feature.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Optimize Recipes That Use the Local Salesforce Connection (Pilot) (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)

You can now gain insights into your private Snowflake data in CRM Analytics. Create a remote connection using the Virtual Private
Connection (VPC) for Snowflake on AWS connector to sync data from Snowflake to Data Manager. Using the AWS VPC interface endpoints
provides secure connectivity to Snowflake internal stages and ensures that data transfer from Snowflake takes place on the AWS internal
network and doesn’t use the public internet.
your sole risk.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Private, and select Private Connect. Create an outbound connection, and then on
the Named Credentials page create external credentials and named credentials. In Data Manager, create a new connection for the
Snowflake Private Connector.
SEE ALSO:
Participate in a Salesforce Pilot
Salesforce Help: Snowflake VPC Connection (Pilot) (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
CRM Analytics Development

Inspect your Analytics assets and execute queries using the new CRM Analytics Connect API Postman collection.
119
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Intelligent Analytics Apps
IN THIS SECTION:
Develop more quickly with the new CRM Analytics collection in Postman. Test endpoints using your own development environment,
and view output instantly. Use these results to help you build your integrations with CRM Analytics.

Develop more quickly with the new CRM Analytics collection in Postman. Test endpoints using your own development environment,
and view output instantly. Use these results to help you build your integrations with CRM Analytics.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where CRM Analytics is enabled.
SEE ALSO:
Postman for Salesforce Developers: Salesforce CRM Analytics Connect API
CRM Analytics REST API Developer Guide

Make data-driven decisions fueled by product, shopper, and inventory insights in Commerce Intelligence. Identify trends in your service
operations with insights from Field Service Intelligence.
• Commerce Intelligence Release Notes
• Field Service Intelligence Release Notes
• Revenue Intelligence Release Notes
• Service Intelligence Release Notes
Tableau
Use Tableau to analyze, explore, and make decisions on your data with just a few clicks. Create engaging visualizations, and embed them
in your Lightning pages to use them in your workflows. Tableau has enterprise analytics platform solutions for deep data exploration.
• Tableau Cloud is a secure, fully hosted, cloud-based, self-service platform. Use it to prepare your data, author, analyze, collaborate,
publish, and share. See Tableau Cloud Release Notes for the latest updates.
• Tableau Pulse allows you to make data-driven decisions right in your flow of work by sending you insights about metrics that you
follow. See Tableau Pulse Release Notes for the latest updates.
• Tableau Desktop is a data visualization tool. Use the intuitive, drag-and-drop interface to discover hidden insights and make
impactful business decisions. See Tableau Desktop and Web Authoring Release Notes for the latest updates.
• Tableau Prep is a data preparation tool. Use it to clean, shape, and combine data for analysis in Tableau. See Tableau Prep Release
Notes for the latest updates.
• Tableau Server is a secure, on-premises solution for deploying Tableau in your own environment. Use it to prepare your data,
author, analyze, collaborate, publish, and share. See Tableau Server Release Notes for the latest updates.
To learn more about Tableau products, go to Tableau Help.

With Marketing Cloud Intelligence, you connect, harmonize, visualize, and act on your marketing data to optimize performance within
campaigns, discover insights in real time, and then act on them.
120
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Commerce
• Marketing Cloud Release Notes

• Marketing Cloud Intelligence Help Map
• Segment Intelligence in Data Cloud
Commerce
Commerce Cloud enhancements include new and updated features for B2B and D2C Commerce, Salesforce Order Management, and
Salesforce Payments.
IN THIS SECTION:
Delight your users and enhance your store’s performance with the updated Commerce app. Customize your store in under 30
minutes with the refreshed D2C Store template. Jump-start your promotions with predesigned templates that populate your
promotion details. Take advantage of Salesforce Checkout, included with new D2C stores, for a seamless payment, tax, and shipping
setup. Enable automatic index rebuilds for up-to-date product information, and use Data Cloud for Commerce for actionable insights
into your ecommerce business. Automate tax calculations and reporting on global payments for a streamlined checkout process
with Salesforce Tax Solution.
Easily replace shopper and buyer items using enhanced exchanges, now accessible in the UI via flows. Manage orders in bulk with
large order support for cancellations, returns, and more.
Salesforce Payments
Let the Commerce Setup Assistant configure Salesforce Payments, and add a Payments merchant account to your D2C store using
Salesforce Checkout. Streamline how registered customers make purchases with one-click checkout. Get Pay Now with a new
Salesforce Payments license that’s independent of a Commerce license.

Delight your users and enhance your store’s performance with the updated Commerce app. Customize your store in under 30 minutes
with the refreshed D2C Store template. Jump-start your promotions with predesigned templates that populate your promotion details.
Take advantage of Salesforce Checkout, included with new D2C stores, for a seamless payment, tax, and shipping setup. Enable automatic
index rebuilds for up-to-date product information, and use Data Cloud for Commerce for actionable insights into your ecommerce
business. Automate tax calculations and reporting on global payments for a streamlined checkout process with Salesforce Tax Solution.
IN THIS SECTION:
Switch to an Improved Merchant Experience with the Refreshed Commerce App
The refreshed Commerce app includes a redesigned landing page for store home, is easier to navigate, and improves access to your
store’s data and content with revamped workspaces. Easily move between stores, and use the new store switcher dropdown to
create a store. Preview and activate your store using the new quick access buttons without going through Experience Builder or
store settings. New Summer ’24 customers automatically receive the refreshed app. If you’re an existing customer, you can make
the switch at your convenience.
Improve the Look and Feel of Your Store with the Refreshed D2C Template
Create a new store with the refreshed D2C Store template, which includes updated styling, fonts, and colors to create a cohesive
and visually pleasing experience for your customers. Grab your visitors’ attention with the new banner on the Home page, and the
refreshed layout provides better organization and presentation of your products and content.
121
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Salesforce B2B and D2C Commerce
Commerce Einstein
Turn on Semantic Search on the Commerce Einstein page to improve relevance, reduce “no results found” pages, lower bounce
rates, and increase conversion rates.
Commerce Setup
Set up a store quickly using tailored guided setup steps and an updated Commerce setup assistant. Activate and publish the store
without a custom domain. Streamline store creation with smart defaults, and easily set up person accounts. Guest access is automatically
enabled when the store is created, and you can share feedback on the setup experience. Import attachments along with product
data.
Quickly configure checkout services for a D2C store to streamline your store setup. Improve the shopping flow, and keep your
customers engaged with a simple add-to-cart message. Show the precise price breakdown in carts so shoppers know what they’re
paying for. Offer shoppers the ability to enter coupons during checkout for more options and incentives to complete their purchase.
Make it easier for shoppers to complete their purchases with a guided flow and a dynamic cart summary displayed at checkout. Give
shoppers confidence when selecting shipping options with estimated delivery dates at checkout.
Commerce Search
Automatically rebuild your search index to ensure that your customers always view the most up-to-date product and catalog
information in their search results. Improve store performance and page load times on search, product, cart, and checkout pages
with default displayable product fields. Sort search and category pages by product SKU. Adjust column and spacing settings for
product cards and get more category, filter, and sort options on the redesigned product list page.
Harness the power of near real-time analytics with Data Cloud for Commerce. Intelligent analytics dashboards for product, shopper,
and inventory insights provide key performance indicators to help make data-driven decisions that grow revenue and improve
efficiency. Use the new Omichannel Inventory Connector to bring your inventory data into Data Cloud, and deliver personalized
shopping experiences to your customers.
Commerce Promotions
Rev up your promotions with templates that make it easy to create enticing deals for your customers. Offer shipping promotions to
drive sales and encourage customers to complete their purchases. Enjoy the flexibility of updating an active promotion. Make your
promotions stand out by displaying pricing on Product Card components with customizable text colors. Combine promotions for
a total percentage discount to keep things tidy.
Commerce Components
Showcase your content on your Commerce LWR store with the Carousel component. Easily integrate links to popular social media
platforms into your Commerce LWR store with the Social Links component. Enhance your customers’ shopping experience with the
upgraded Order History component, now featuring product images to help them track their purchases.
In the refreshed Commerce app, Goals and Recommendations has moved into the Insights and Actions workspace. Use the new
History table to see details of a specific action and the output, such as a new promotion. The table shows only the actions that were
taken for the selected goal. Get more ideas about how to improve your store’s performance with more recommended actions.
Commerce Dashboards
Gain valuable insights into the health and performance of your store's payment transactions with the Commerce Payments Dashboard.
Take advantage of the Promotions Dashboard to view coupon offerings and discount campaigns to create data-driven strategies to
optimize and enhance customer acquisition, engagement, and retention. Monitor your store’s financial health with the Commerce
Finance Dashboard, which provides a comprehensive view of your sales, taxes, and shipping charges.
122

Calculate, collect, and report tax on global payments automatically with the Salesforce Tax Solution. Add a product to up to five
categories in your store and preview the results without leaving the add product page. Personalize your customers’ shopping
experience by combining Data Cloud segments and Commerce buyer groups. Create shopper profiles using a wide range of customer
data available in Data Cloud.
Switch to an Improved Merchant Experience with the Refreshed Commerce App

The refreshed Commerce app includes a redesigned landing page for store home, is easier to navigate, and improves access to your
store’s data and content with revamped workspaces. Easily move between stores, and use the new store switcher dropdown to create
a store. Preview and activate your store using the new quick access buttons without going through Experience Builder or store settings.
New Summer ’24 customers automatically receive the refreshed app. If you’re an existing customer, you can make the switch at your
convenience.
Where: This change applies to B2B Commerce and D2C Commerce in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: Move through the app with ease using persistent left navigation (2) , which keeps you on track with access to all the functions
and features. The navigation is always available under the Store tab (1). Preview the store by clicking Preview (3).
You can also customize the app by adding items to the navigation or by using the Lightning App Builder to tailor your record pages.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Enable the Refreshed Commerce App (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Create a new store with the refreshed D2C Store template, which includes updated styling, fonts, and colors to create a cohesive and
visually pleasing experience for your customers. Grab your visitors’ attention with the new banner on the Home page, and the refreshed
layout provides better organization and presentation of your products and content.
Where: This change applies to D2C Commerce in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
123
How: From the Commerce Setup Assistant, click Start Selling Online, and select the refreshed D2C Store template.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create a Store or Reorder Portal (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Commerce Einstein
Turn on Semantic Search on the Commerce Einstein page to improve relevance, reduce “no results found” pages, lower bounce rates,
and increase conversion rates.
IN THIS SECTION:
Turn on semantic search to improve relevance, reduce “no results found” pages, lower bounce rates, and increase conversion rates.
Einstein semantic search accounts for synonyms, alternate spellings, abbreviations, typos, and product themes, improving your
search results.

Turn on semantic search to improve relevance, reduce “no results found” pages, lower bounce rates, and increase conversion rates.
Einstein semantic search accounts for synonyms, alternate spellings, abbreviations, typos, and product themes, improving your search
results.
When: Semantic search is available in North America and Europe and will be available in the Asia-Pacific region in Summer ’24.
How: From Store Settings, select Commerce Einstein, and then turn on Commerce Einstein and Semantic Search. Rebuild your
search index to start seeing results.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Enable Commerce Einstein (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Enable Semantic Search for Commerce (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: AI-Powered Search for Commerce (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
124
Commerce Setup
Set up a store quickly using tailored guided setup steps and an updated Commerce setup assistant. Activate and publish the store
without a custom domain. Streamline store creation with smart defaults, and easily set up person accounts. Guest access is automatically
enabled when the store is created, and you can share feedback on the setup experience. Import attachments along with product data.
IN THIS SECTION:
Use Tailored Guided Steps for Quick Store Setup
Get started with your store in under 30 minutes. Customize it further with intelligent tasks, and get your orders rolling faster with
the enhanced store setup experience. The required guided tasks, which are curated based on your selling channel, are marked
complete as you go—you no longer need manual clicks to indicate that they’re done. After all the tasks are complete, you can
preview and activate your store. If you’re using the refreshed Commerce app, you can preview and activate directly from the new
store home page and avoid navigating to multiple pages.
Experience a faster setup process, reduced manual effort, and increased efficiency with the latest enhancements to the Commerce
Setup Assistant. Take advantage of one-click automated setup of Payments, Order Management, Reports and Dashboards, and
Omnichannel Inventory. You can also enable guest shoppers to visit the store and purchase products with a one-click person account
setup. If you’ve already set up Commerce, run the setup assistant to update settings with optimized values.
Activate and Publish a Store Without a Custom Domain
Now you can activate your Commerce store to share it with colleagues or see what the store looks like before setting up your custom
domain. Then when you’re ready to go live, configure the CDN and custom domain to provide optimal performance, scalability, and
security. We’ve also expanded the activate function so that when you activate the store, the store also gets published.
Streamline Store Creation with Smart Defaults
When you create a D2C store using the channel creation wizard, if person accounts are enabled, the guest access and self-registration
options are now enabled. And, all new D2C stores are also set up with Salesforce Checkout, a unified checkout experience that uses
Salesforce native services for payments, taxes, and shipping.
Set up person accounts in B2B Commerce and D2C Commerce with just one click. Person accounts represent the customers who
visit the store and make purchases, making the shopping experience more convenient and seamless.
Share Your Store Setup Experience with In-App Feedback
Help us create the best store setup experience by providing feedback directly while you’re setting up your store. Rate your store
setup experience at any time, and help us understand what is working well and where we can improve.
Guest Access to D2C Stores Is Automatically Enabled
You no longer need to manually turn on guest access when a D2C store is created. Your guests can browse, make purchases, and
get a hassle-free shopping experience the moment that your store is active. After guest access is enabled automatically, the Guest
User profile is created, sharing settings are turned on, and person accounts is mapped as the default record type.
Include Attachments When Importing Products
Bring all your product information together in one place. Now you can import PDF files and other attachments that you want to
provide with your products along with the product data when you import a CSV file. Create a CSV file that references the attachments
and then import the file from the Product Workspace.
125
Use Tailored Guided Steps for Quick Store Setup

Get started with your store in under 30 minutes. Customize it further with intelligent tasks, and get your orders rolling faster with the
enhanced store setup experience. The required guided tasks, which are curated based on your selling channel, are marked complete as
you go—you no longer need manual clicks to indicate that they’re done. After all the tasks are complete, you can preview and activate
your store. If you’re using the refreshed Commerce app, you can preview and activate directly from the new store home page and avoid
navigating to multiple pages.
Where: This change applies to B2B Commerce, D2C Commerce, and Reorder Portal in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: On your store home page, complete all the tasks that are displayed based on the selling channel. This image shows the store
home page for a D2C store.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Commerce Store Setup Tasks (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Experience a faster setup process, reduced manual effort, and increased efficiency with the latest enhancements to the Commerce Setup
Assistant. Take advantage of one-click automated setup of Payments, Order Management, Reports and Dashboards, and Omnichannel
Inventory. You can also enable guest shoppers to visit the store and purchase products with a one-click person account setup. If you’ve
already set up Commerce, run the setup assistant to update settings with optimized values.
How: From Salesforce Setup, access the Commerce Setup Assistant. On the Salesforce Commerce Setup tile, click Get Started.
126
Watch a video overview of the Commerce store setup process.
Watch a video
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Prepare Your Org for Commerce (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Activate and Publish a Store Without a Custom Domain

Now you can activate your Commerce store to share it with colleagues or see what the store looks like before setting up your custom
domain. Then when you’re ready to go live, configure the CDN and custom domain to provide optimal performance, scalability, and
security. We’ve also expanded the activate function so that when you activate the store, the store also gets published.
127
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Activate Your Store (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Configure a Custom Domain and CDN (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Streamline Store Creation with Smart Defaults

When you create a D2C store using the channel creation wizard, if person accounts are enabled, the guest access and self-registration
options are now enabled. And, all new D2C stores are also set up with Salesforce Checkout, a unified checkout experience that uses
Salesforce native services for payments, taxes, and shipping.
Who: This feature is available only with the External Apps license.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create a Store or Reorder Portal (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Automate Your Shipping Setup with Salesforce Checkout

Set up person accounts in B2B Commerce and D2C Commerce with just one click. Person accounts represent the customers who visit
the store and make purchases, making the shopping experience more convenient and seamless.
How: From Salesforce Setup, access the Commerce Setup Assistant. On the Salesforce Commerce Setup tile, click Get Started. Go to
the Additional Setup tab, and for Person Accounts for Guest Access, click Get Started.
SEE ALSO:
Share Your Store Setup Experience with In-App Feedback

Help us create the best store setup experience by providing feedback directly while you’re setting up your store. Rate your store setup
experience at any time, and help us understand what is working well and where we can improve.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Store Customization (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Guest Access to D2C Stores Is Automatically Enabled

You no longer need to manually turn on guest access when a D2C store is created. Your guests can browse, make purchases, and get a
hassle-free shopping experience the moment that your store is active. After guest access is enabled automatically, the Guest User profile
is created, sharing settings are turned on, and person accounts is mapped as the default record type.
128
SEE ALSO:
Include Attachments When Importing Products

Bring all your product information together in one place. Now you can import PDF files and other attachments that you want to provide
with your products along with the product data when you import a CSV file. Create a CSV file that references the attachments and then
import the file from the Product Workspace.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Import and Export Commerce Data (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: CSV File Format for Importing Data Globally (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Quickly configure checkout services for a D2C store to streamline your store setup. Improve the shopping flow, and keep your customers
engaged with a simple add-to-cart message. Show the precise price breakdown in carts so shoppers know what they’re paying for. Offer
shoppers the ability to enter coupons during checkout for more options and incentives to complete their purchase. Make it easier for
shoppers to complete their purchases with a guided flow and a dynamic cart summary displayed at checkout. Give shoppers confidence
when selecting shipping options with estimated delivery dates at checkout.
IN THIS SECTION:
Set Up Checkout Details Quickly with Salesforce Checkout for D2C Stores
Take advantage of Salesforce Checkout, a unified setup experience supported by Salesforce’s native services for payments, taxes,
and shipping that’s included with new D2C stores. Many tasks are automated with smart defaults and consolidated on one page so
that you can configure checkout in just a few clicks. Salesforce Checkout provides an optimized checkout experience for shoppers,
including one-click checkout.
Salesforce Checkout for new D2C stores uses the Salesforce native shipping service, which includes a default shipping profile. The
shipping profile uses a shipping zone based on your store’s default ship-to country, a free-shipping rate, and shipping processing
time.
Provide Shoppers Estimated Delivery Dates at Checkout
Add confidence to the shopping experience by letting customers know during checkout when to expect delivery. The estimated
delivery date for each shipping option displays as “Arrives: [Date]”.
Improve the Shopping Experience with an Add-to-Cart Success Message
Let customers know they’ve successfully added an item to their cart so that they can continue shopping. The add-to-cart success
toast requires no action from your customer, allowing them to continue their shopping experience uninterrupted.
Show the Precise Price Breakdown in the Cart Summary
Provide shoppers a clear understanding of the final price displayed in the cart summary by displaying per-item prices, item-level
and cart-level discounts, and subtotals.
129
Give Shoppers More Options with Coupons at Checkout

Let shoppers apply coupon codes and view promotions during checkout. Use the Promotions component on the checkout page
to display applied promotions and show a field to enter coupon codes.
Provide shoppers an optimized checkout experience using an accordion-style, guided flow that incorporates checkout summary
information. New D2C stores include the new component on the checkout page by default. If you have an existing store, you can
replace your current layout.
Dynamically Display Cart Information at Checkout
Display the cart summary, promotions, and cart items in a dynamic component that expands and collapses on mobile. Use the
Checkout Summary component on the cart or checkout page to show a summary of cart-related information. The component stays
pinned to the right side of the page so that customers can always view the information without scrolling or moving to a different
page.
Take advantage of Salesforce Checkout, a unified setup experience supported by Salesforce’s native services for payments, taxes, and
shipping that’s included with new D2C stores. Many tasks are automated with smart defaults and consolidated on one page so that you
can configure checkout in just a few clicks. Salesforce Checkout provides an optimized checkout experience for shoppers, including
one-click checkout.
Where: This change applies to D2C Commerce in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions. Salesforce Checkout requires Salesforce
Payments. Salesforce Checkout doesn’t support subscriptions.
Why: Watch the video to learn about the benefits of Salesforce Checkout.
Watch a video
How: To view your checkout setup, go to the Checkout Configuration page in your store settings.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Checkout Configuration for a Commerce Store (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
130

Salesforce Checkout for new D2C stores uses the Salesforce native shipping service, which includes a default shipping profile. The shipping
profile uses a shipping zone based on your store’s default ship-to country, a free-shipping rate, and shipping processing time.
How: To view and manage your shipping profile, on the Checkout Configuration page in your store settings, go to the Shipping section.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up Salesforce Native Shipping for a Commerce Store (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Provide Shoppers Estimated Delivery Dates at Checkout

Add confidence to the shopping experience by letting customers know during checkout when to expect delivery. The estimated delivery
date for each shipping option displays as “Arrives: [Date]”.
Where: This change applies to B2B and D2C Commerce in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: To calculate estimated delivery dates, in the Shipping section of the Checkout Configuration page, set your processing time (1)
and transit time (2) for each shipping rate.
131
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up Salesforce Native Shipping for a Commerce Store (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Improve the Shopping Experience with an Add-to-Cart Success Message

Let customers know they’ve successfully added an item to their cart so that they can continue shopping. The add-to-cart success toast
requires no action from your customer, allowing them to continue their shopping experience uninterrupted.
How: This feature is included by default when creating a store. If you have an existing store, republish your site to add the toast message.
SEE ALSO:
Show the Precise Price Breakdown in the Cart Summary

Provide shoppers a clear understanding of the final price displayed in the cart summary by displaying per-item prices, item-level and
cart-level discounts, and subtotals.
132
How: This feature is included by default when creating a store. If you have an existing store, republish your site to add the pricing details.
SEE ALSO:
Give Shoppers More Options with Coupons at Checkout

Let shoppers apply coupon codes and view promotions during checkout. Use the Promotions component on the checkout page to
display applied promotions and show a field to enter coupon codes.
How: New D2C stores have the Promotions component included on the checkout page. If you have an existing store, use one of the
preset checkout layouts that includes the Promotions component.
SEE ALSO:
Commerce Promotions
Salesforce Help: Design Your Checkout Page in a Commerce Store (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
133

Provide shoppers an optimized checkout experience using an accordion-style, guided flow that incorporates checkout summary
information. New D2C stores include the new component on the checkout page by default. If you have an existing store, you can replace
your current layout.
How: If you have an existing store, replace your current layout with the Checkout Layout: Salesforce component (1). For new or existing
stores without a Salesforce Payments license, add the Checkout Layout: Accordion (2) component to your page.
SEE ALSO:
Dynamically Display Cart Information at Checkout

Display the cart summary, promotions, and cart items in a dynamic component that expands and collapses on mobile. Use the Checkout
Summary component on the cart or checkout page to show a summary of cart-related information. The component stays pinned to the
right side of the page so that customers can always view the information without scrolling or moving to a different page.
How: New D2C stores include the Checkout Summary component on the Salesforce Checkout layout page. If you’re designing your
own checkout page, remove the individual Cart Summary, Promotions, and Cart Items components and drag the Checkout Summary
component onto your checkout page.
134
SEE ALSO:
Commerce Search
Automatically rebuild your search index to ensure that your customers always view the most up-to-date product and catalog information
in their search results. Improve store performance and page load times on search, product, cart, and checkout pages with default
displayable product fields. Sort search and category pages by product SKU. Adjust column and spacing settings for product cards and
get more category, filter, and sort options on the redesigned product list page.
IN THIS SECTION:
Enable automatic index rebuilds on the redesigned search index summary page to ensure that your customers always view the most
up-to-date product and catalog information in their search results. Automatic rebuild checks for product and catalog updates every
5 minutes and rebuilds the index if necessary. The Rebuild Log also gives you insight into index and product errors that occurred
during indexing, providing you with increased visibility into the status of your index.
Get Improved Page Performance with Displayable Product Fields (Beta)
When you create a new store, the Category Description, Category Name, Family (Product), Product Code, Product Description, Product
Name, and Product SKU fields are now configured as displayable product fields. Displayable product fields improve your store
performance and page load times on search, product, cart, and checkout pages. If you have an existing store, you can add the fields
to see improvements.
Product SKU is now removed as a default sortable product field on search and category pages in new D2C stores to better support
customer sort preferences. Sorting search results by Product SKU is more common in B2B stores than in D2C stores. You can continue
to manually configure Product SKU as a sortable field in B2B and D2C stores, enabling you to sort results in ascending or descending
order to find the products that you’re looking for.
Improve Your Browse Experience with the Redesigned Product List Page
The product list page offers redesigned sort options, category navigation, filter selections, and accordion dropdown menus to collapse
and expand filter sections. In B2B stores, the responsive behavior in the Results component is now updated and no longer includes
the Grid Max Columns Displayed field. In D2C stores, configure the new Results Grid component to adjust column and spacing
settings and customize how your product cards display.
135

Enable automatic index rebuilds on the redesigned search index summary page to ensure that your customers always view the most
up-to-date product and catalog information in their search results. Automatic rebuild checks for product and catalog updates every 5
minutes and rebuilds the index if necessary. The Rebuild Log also gives you insight into index and product errors that occurred during
indexing, providing you with increased visibility into the status of your index.
How: From your store’s search page, click Search Index Summary, and then turn on Rebuild Automatically.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Commerce Search Index (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Considerations for Product Searchability (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Get Improved Page Performance with Displayable Product Fields (Beta)

When you create a new store, the Category Description, Category Name, Family (Product), Product Code, Product Description, Product
Name, and Product SKU fields are now configured as displayable product fields. Displayable product fields improve your store performance
and page load times on search, product, cart, and checkout pages. If you have an existing store, you can add the fields to see improvements.
Note: This feature is a Beta Service. Customer may opt to try such Beta Service in its sole discretion. Any use of the Beta Service
is subject to the applicable Beta Services Terms provided at Agreements and Terms.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Configure Displayable Product Fields (Beta) (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Product and Product Category Standard Fields (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Product SKU is now removed as a default sortable product field on search and category pages in new D2C stores to better support
customer sort preferences. Sorting search results by Product SKU is more common in B2B stores than in D2C stores. You can continue
to manually configure Product SKU as a sortable field in B2B and D2C stores, enabling you to sort results in ascending or descending
order to find the products that you’re looking for.
136
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Product and Product Category Standard Fields (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Improve Your Browse Experience with the Redesigned Product List Page
The product list page offers redesigned sort options, category navigation, filter selections, and accordion dropdown menus to collapse
and expand filter sections. In B2B stores, the responsive behavior in the Results component is now updated and no longer includes the
Grid Max Columns Displayed field. In D2C stores, configure the new Results Grid component to adjust column and spacing settings and
customize how your product cards display.
How: Open the search page in Experience Builder to view the redesigned product list page.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: LWR Store Components (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Configure Product Cards to Display on the Product List Page (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Configure How Product Cards Are Displayed on the Product List Page (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)

Harness the power of near real-time analytics with Data Cloud for Commerce. Intelligent analytics dashboards for product, shopper, and
inventory insights provide key performance indicators to help make data-driven decisions that grow revenue and improve efficiency.
Use the new Omichannel Inventory Connector to bring your inventory data into Data Cloud, and deliver personalized shopping experiences
to your customers.
137
IN THIS SECTION:
Drive Business Insights and Grow Revenue with Data Cloud for Commerce
Data Cloud for Commerce uses the power of Data Cloud and CRM Analytics to provide a data-driven solution that offers important
and actionable insights into your ecommerce business. The combination of customer data, key performance indicators (KPIs), and
easy-to-understand data visualizations can help you improve store performance and the shopper experience.
Get Performance Insights with the Inventory Intelligence Analytics Dashboard
Explore stock status, compare inventory to orders at different locations, and track inventory levels and units sold—all with the
Inventory Intelligence Analytics dashboard. Use stock level, product, and product grade filters to get a detailed analysis of your
inventory.
Review Product Behavior with the Product Intelligence Analytics Dashboard
Get product stats on your total sales and orders in the Product Intelligence Analytics Dashboard. Dive into charts showcasing your
top-selling items and categories. Get insights into your customers’ product search habits, and explore which products are commonly
purchased together.
Understand Shopper Behavior with the Shopper Intelligence Analytics Dashboard
Dive into the world of customer shopping behavior with engaging data visualizations in the Shopper Intelligence Analytics Dashboard.
Discover who your active, at-risk, and churned customers are with easy-to-understand graphics. Gain valuable insights into your
customer base by exploring important metrics like average customer lifetime value, average order value, and average purchase
frequency.
Bring Inventory Data into Data Cloud with the Omnichannel Inventory Connector
Omnichannel Inventory tracks inventory availability across locations and selling channels, making stock management and customer
order fulfillment a breeze. Use the Omnichannel Inventory Connector to ingest your inventory data into Data Cloud and unlock
valuable inventory insights and predictions.
Deliver a Personalized Customer Experience Using Data Cloud Segments
Personalize your customers’ shopping experience by combining the power of Data Cloud segments and Commerce buyer groups.
Create shopper profiles using a wide range of customer data available in Data Cloud, and deliver personalized shopping experiences
to your customers. When using data segment–based buyer groups, you can also show targeted content via Expression-Based Visibility
and tailored promotions for buyer groups.
Enhance your shopping experience with two new Shopper Copilot actions for B2C Einstein Bots. Use the provided template to create
an Einstein bot and connect it to your store. You can also use the new Commerce Concierge bot blocks to add functionality.
Drive Business Insights and Grow Revenue with Data Cloud for Commerce
Data Cloud for Commerce uses the power of Data Cloud and CRM Analytics to provide a data-driven solution that offers important and
actionable insights into your ecommerce business. The combination of customer data, key performance indicators (KPIs), and
easy-to-understand data visualizations can help you improve store performance and the shopper experience.
Where: This change applies to Omnichannel Inventory, B2B Commerce, and D2C Commerce in Enterprise and Unlimited editions.
Who: To use the Intelligence Analytics dashboards, you need the Commerce Intelligence User permission set. To manage the Intelligence
Analytics dashboards, you need the Commerce Intelligence Admin permission set.
138
How: To enable Data Cloud for Commerce, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Data Cloud for Commerce, and then
select Data Cloud for Commerce. Complete the required Data Cloud setup steps. Enable CRM Analytics, and turn on Data Cloud for
Commerce. Assign the Commerce Intelligence permission sets to the users who you want to have access to Data Cloud for Commerce.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Improve Store Performance with Commerce Intelligence (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Get Performance Insights with the Inventory Intelligence Analytics Dashboard

Explore stock status, compare inventory to orders at different locations, and track inventory levels and units sold—all with the Inventory
Intelligence Analytics dashboard. Use stock level, product, and product grade filters to get a detailed analysis of your inventory.
Where: This change applies to Omnichannel Inventory, B2B Commerce, and D2C Commerce in Enterprise and Unlimited editions.
How: Use filters to select locations and time periods (1). See the value of inventory items based on their importance to the business (2),
and review charts that show stock supply (3). Understand more about your current inventory snapshot with filters for stock level, product,
and product grade (4). Review your inventory and order levels by location (5) and for individual products (6).
139
140
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Commerce Intelligence Analytics Dashboards (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Review Product Behavior with the Product Intelligence Analytics Dashboard

Get product stats on your total sales and orders in the Product Intelligence Analytics Dashboard. Dive into charts showcasing your
top-selling items and categories. Get insights into your customers’ product search habits, and explore which products are commonly
purchased together.
Where: This change applies to B2B Commerce and D2C Commerce in Enterprise and Unlimited editions.
How: Use filters to select specific time periods and stores (1). See high-level statistics about your sales, orders, and purchased categories
and products (2). Review charts that show your top-selling products and categories (3). Understand more about your customer’s product
search behavior (4), and review data about which products are frequently bought together (5).
141
SEE ALSO:
Understand Shopper Behavior with the Shopper Intelligence Analytics Dashboard

Dive into the world of customer shopping behavior with engaging data visualizations in the Shopper Intelligence Analytics Dashboard.
Discover who your active, at-risk, and churned customers are with easy-to-understand graphics. Gain valuable insights into your customer
base by exploring important metrics like average customer lifetime value, average order value, and average purchase frequency.
Where: This change applies to B2B Commerce and D2C Commerce in Enterprise and Unlimited editions.
How: Use filters to select specific time periods and stores (1). Review high-level statistics and charts about your customers (2) and
customer lifetime value (3). Understand more about your customers’ purchase behavior (4) and their location and recency, frequency,
and monetary value (RFM) score (5).
142
SEE ALSO:
order fulfillment a breeze. Use the Omnichannel Inventory Connector to ingest your inventory data into Data Cloud and unlock valuable
inventory insights and predictions.
Where: This change applies to Data Cloud and Omnichannel Inventory in Developer, Enterprise, and Unlimited editions.
When: This feature is available starting in June 2024.
Who: To connect to Omnichannel Inventory, use the Data Cloud Admin or Commerce Intelligence Admin permission set.
143
How: From Data Cloud Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Omnichannel Inventory Connector, and then select Omnichannel
Inventory Connector.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up an Omnichannel Inventory Connection (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Deliver a Personalized Customer Experience Using Data Cloud Segments

Personalize your customers’ shopping experience by combining the power of Data Cloud segments and Commerce buyer groups. Create
shopper profiles using a wide range of customer data available in Data Cloud, and deliver personalized shopping experiences to your
customers. When using data segment–based buyer groups, you can also show targeted content via Expression-Based Visibility and
tailored promotions for buyer groups.
How: To use Data Cloud segments, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Commerce Personalization, and then select
Commerce Personalization with Data Cloud Segments.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create a Buyer Group Based on a Data Segment (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Enhance your shopping experience with two new Shopper Copilot actions for B2C Einstein Bots. Use the provided template to create
an Einstein bot and connect it to your store. You can also use the new Commerce Concierge bot blocks to add functionality.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Unlimited Edition with Commerce Cloud Einstein and the Einstein Bots and
Digital Engagement add-on. Einstein generative AI is available in Lightning Experience.
To purchase the Einstein Bots and Digital Engagement add-on, contact your Salesforce account executive.
How: From the Einstein Bots page in Setup, create a bot from the Commerce Concierge B2C template. To add blocks to a bot, from the
Dialogs page of the Bot Builder, import a block into your bot.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Optimize Your Customers’ Shopping Experience with the Commerce Concierge Bot (can be outdated or unavailable
Commerce Promotions
Rev up your promotions with templates that make it easy to create enticing deals for your customers. Offer shipping promotions to drive
sales and encourage customers to complete their purchases. Enjoy the flexibility of updating an active promotion. Make your promotions
stand out by displaying pricing on Product Card components with customizable text colors. Combine promotions for a total percentage
discount to keep things tidy.
IN THIS SECTION:
Create Promotions with Ease Using a Template
Jump-start your promotions by using a predesigned template. Choose from examples that use products and categories from your
store, which then populate your promotion details.
144

Offer shipping promotions in your store to compel customers to complete their purchase. You can select the adjustment type,
percent, amount and currency.
Configure Promotion Segments with More Flexibility
When creating a store, you can now associate a promotion segment with either a store or a buyer group, but not both. Plus, you
have the flexibility to update the Active, Commerce Promotion, and Automatic Promotion fields when the promotion is associated
with a segment. If you have an existing Commerce store that has a buyer group and sales store segment, delete either the store or
buyer group and then create the promotion.
Make your promotions pop. Your customers can now view promotional pricing on the Product Card component. Adjust the color
of the text for some extra pizzazz. Decide when to combine all promotions into a total percentage to keep things tidy.
Create Promotions with Ease Using a Template

Jump-start your promotions by using a predesigned template. Choose from examples that use products and categories from your store,
which then populate your promotion details.
How: In the Promotion workspace, click Draft from Template, and then select the store. Select a sample template that describes the
promotion that you want to create. Review the details presented and then activate your promotion.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create a Promotion Using a Template (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Create Promotions with Einstein (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Offer shipping promotions in your store to compel customers to complete their purchase. You can select the adjustment type, percent,
amount and currency.
How: In your promotion, on the Discounts tab, select New. Select Shipping for the target type.
145
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Define Promotion Discounts (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Configure Promotion Segments with More Flexibility

When creating a store, you can now associate a promotion segment with either a store or a buyer group, but not both. Plus, you have
the flexibility to update the Active, Commerce Promotion, and Automatic Promotion fields when the promotion is associated with a
segment. If you have an existing Commerce store that has a buyer group and sales store segment, delete either the store or buyer group
and then create the promotion.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Add a Promotion Segment (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Make your promotions pop. Your customers can now view promotional pricing on the Product Card component. Adjust the color of the
text for some extra pizzazz. Decide when to combine all promotions into a total percentage to keep things tidy.
How: In Experience Builder, add a Product Card to a Search, Category, or Product page. Choose when to present a total promotion
percentage, and select a promotion text color.
146
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Customize Promotions in Experience Builder (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Commerce Components
Showcase your content on your Commerce LWR store with the Carousel component. Easily integrate links to popular social media
platforms into your Commerce LWR store with the Social Links component. Enhance your customers’ shopping experience with the
upgraded Order History component, now featuring product images to help them track their purchases.
IN THIS SECTION:
Blend Social Media into Your Commerce Store with the Social Links Component
Integrate links to popular social media platforms in your Commerce LWR store with the Social Links component. The component
recognizes and displays the logos of the prominent social media sites, making it easy to connect with your audience across various
platforms. Customize the component’s appearance to match your brand’s style and preferences. Replace the default icons with your
own images, choose between horizontal or vertical display styles, and fine-tune the alignment of the icons to achieve your desired
look.
Improve the Shopper Experience with Enhanced Components
Help your customers track their purchases with an upgraded Order History component that now features product images. Customers
can view their order history and filter results for a selected time frame. Add the No Results template to your Order History component
to display a message on the search results page when a query yields no results. Check out the improved Profile navigation to offer
your customers a more user-friendly experience.
Blend Social Media into Your Commerce Store with the Social Links Component
Integrate links to popular social media platforms in your Commerce LWR store with the Social Links component. The component
recognizes and displays the logos of the prominent social media sites, making it easy to connect with your audience across various
platforms. Customize the component’s appearance to match your brand’s style and preferences. Replace the default icons with your
own images, choose between horizontal or vertical display styles, and fine-tune the alignment of the icons to achieve your desired look.
147
How: From Experience Builder, drag the Social Links component onto a page.
SEE ALSO:
Improve the Shopper Experience with Enhanced Components

Help your customers track their purchases with an upgraded Order History component that now features product images. Customers
can view their order history and filter results for a selected time frame. Add the No Results template to your Order History component
to display a message on the search results page when a query yields no results. Check out the improved Profile navigation to offer your
customers a more user-friendly experience.
How: In Experience Builder, go to the My Profile page and select the Navigation List Menu. Add or modify menu items to personalize
your account navigation.
148
SEE ALSO:

In the refreshed Commerce app, Goals and Recommendations has moved into the Insights and Actions workspace. Use the new History
table to see details of a specific action and the output, such as a new promotion. The table shows only the actions that were taken for
the selected goal. Get more ideas about how to improve your store’s performance with more recommended actions.
IN THIS SECTION:
Goals and Recommendations Is Now Part of the Insights and Actions Workspace
In the refreshed Commerce app, Goals and Recommendations has moved into the Insights and Actions workspace.
Enhance Store Performance with More Recommended Actions
Get more ideas about how to improve your store’s performance. Some of the new recommended actions include Configure Displayable
Product Fields, Configure Search Settings, and Deploy Commerce Einstein. In the refreshed Commerce app, the top three recommended
actions are featured on the store home page.
View the History and Status of Accepted Actions
In the Goals and Recommendations workspace, use the new History table to see details of a specific action and the output, such as
a new promotion. The table shows only the actions that were taken for the selected goal.
Use Visibility Rules to Manage What Buyers See
Customize the content that buyers see when switching accounts using expression-based visibility rules. Improve user experience
and increase engagement by choosing which information is visible to different buyers.
Goals and Recommendations Is Now Part of the Insights and Actions Workspace
In the refreshed Commerce app, Goals and Recommendations has moved into the Insights and Actions workspace.
149
How: In the refreshed Commerce app, click Insights and Actions.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Goals and Recommendations (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Enhance Store Performance with More Recommended Actions

Get more ideas about how to improve your store’s performance. Some of the new recommended actions include Configure Displayable
Product Fields, Configure Search Settings, and Deploy Commerce Einstein. In the refreshed Commerce app, the top three recommended
actions are featured on the store home page.
SEE ALSO:
View the History and Status of Accepted Actions

In the Goals and Recommendations workspace, use the new History table to see details of a specific action and the output, such as a
new promotion. The table shows only the actions that were taken for the selected goal.
How: In the Goals and Recommendations workspace, select a goal. To see the actions that were taken for that goal, view the History
table.
150
SEE ALSO:
Use Visibility Rules to Manage What Buyers See

Customize the content that buyers see when switching accounts using expression-based visibility rules. Improve user experience and
increase engagement by choosing which information is visible to different buyers.
Where: This change applies to B2B Commerce in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: In Experience Builder, select the component that you want to customize, and add the visibility rule to the component.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Allow Buyers Access to External Accounts for B2B Stores (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Commerce Dashboards
Gain valuable insights into the health and performance of your store's payment transactions with the Commerce Payments Dashboard.
Take advantage of the Promotions Dashboard to view coupon offerings and discount campaigns to create data-driven strategies to
optimize and enhance customer acquisition, engagement, and retention. Monitor your store’s financial health with the Commerce
Finance Dashboard, which provides a comprehensive view of your sales, taxes, and shipping charges.
151
IN THIS SECTION:
Analyze Payment Performance with the Commerce Payments Dashboard
Get insights into the health and performance of your store’s payment transactions. The Commerce Payments Dashboard offers a
comprehensive view of your online payments. You can analyze this information and make data-driven decisions to streamline your
transaction processes.
Measure the Effectiveness of Your Promotions with the Commerce Promotions Dashboard
Get a comprehensive analysis of your promotions, coupon offerings, and discount campaigns. Use the information to create data-driven
strategies and optimize your promotions, ultimately improving customer acquisition, engagement, and retention.
Track Your Store’s Financial Health with the Commerce Finance Dashboard
Get a comprehensive view of your store’s financial health with the Commerce Finance Dashboard. Monitor your sales, taxes, and
shipping charges within a selected date range all in a single dashboard.
Get Order Summary Entity Data in the Business Overview Dashboard
The Business Overview Dashboard now displays reports using data from the Order Summary entity, resulting in a more streamlined
view of your key business metrics. To use the Order Summary entity data, reinstall the Business Overview Dashboard using Commerce
Setup Assistant. If your current dashboard has customizations that you want to maintain, clone it before installing the new dashboard.
Analyze Payment Performance with the Commerce Payments Dashboard

Get insights into the health and performance of your store’s payment transactions. The Commerce Payments Dashboard offers a
comprehensive view of your online payments. You can analyze this information and make data-driven decisions to streamline your
transaction processes.
How: Install the Commerce Payments Dashboard using the Commerce Setup Assistant.
152
SEE ALSO:
Measure the Effectiveness of Your Promotions with the Commerce Promotions Dashboard
Get a comprehensive analysis of your promotions, coupon offerings, and discount campaigns. Use the information to create data-driven
strategies and optimize your promotions, ultimately improving customer acquisition, engagement, and retention.
153
SEE ALSO:
Track Your Store’s Financial Health with the Commerce Finance Dashboard
Get a comprehensive view of your store’s financial health with the Commerce Finance Dashboard. Monitor your sales, taxes, and shipping
charges within a selected date range all in a single dashboard.
154
SEE ALSO:
Get Order Summary Entity Data in the Business Overview Dashboard

The Business Overview Dashboard now displays reports using data from the Order Summary entity, resulting in a more streamlined view
of your key business metrics. To use the Order Summary entity data, reinstall the Business Overview Dashboard using Commerce Setup
Assistant. If your current dashboard has customizations that you want to maintain, clone it before installing the new dashboard.
SEE ALSO:

Calculate, collect, and report tax on global payments automatically with the Salesforce Tax Solution. Add a product to up to five categories
in your store and preview the results without leaving the add product page. Personalize your customers’ shopping experience by
combining Data Cloud segments and Commerce buyer groups. Create shopper profiles using a wide range of customer data available
in Data Cloud.
155
IN THIS SECTION:
Automate Tax Processes with the New Salesforce Tax Solution for Salesforce Checkout (Generally Available)
Your merchants can now calculate, collect, and report tax on global payments automatically using the new Salesforce Tax Solution
for Salesforce checkout. You can stop maintaining static tax rate tables because the new tax solution manages US sales tax calculations.
For non-US stores, the earlier version of Salesforce Tax Solution, now called Manual Salesforce Tax Solution, is still available with
custom checkout to help you maintain your static tax rate tables.
Preview Added Products in Your Store Before Activating
Assign a product to as many as five categories in your store and preview the results without leaving the add product page. The new
product’s details are saved to your store’s default buyer group, entitlement policy, CMS workspace, price book, strikethrough price
book, and catalog. Previously, you added this information manually.
Salesforce Tax Solution Is Renamed Manual Salesforce Tax Solution
With the introduction of the new tax solution that automatically calculates tax, we renamed the existing Salesforce Tax Solution to
Manual Salesforce Tax Solution. The new automatic tax solution is now named Salesforce Tax Solution. Based on how you want to
set up your taxes, you can choose either solution. Salesforce Tax Solution is available only with Salesforce checkout. Manual Salesforce
Tax Solution is available only with custom checkout.
Use a Single Custom Domain for Multiple Commerce Sites
You can now have multiple Commerce and non-Commerce sites that use different URLs on a custom domain on the Salesforce
CDN. Previously, each Commerce LWR site required a dedicated custom domain.
Customize Your Salesforce Content Delivery Network (CDN) Settings for Commerce LWR Stores
We recommend using the customizable Salesforce CDN for Commerce B2B and D2C LWR stores, so you can fine-tune the CDN
default settings to address the unique needs of your storefront domain. Apply image optimization and the web application firewall
(WAF) as needed, and protect your domain from malicious activity with up to 10 custom WAF rules. You can use an autonomous
system number (ASN), IP address, and country to define the custom WAF rules. You can update the default settings of domains that
are already provisioned.
Automate Tax Processes with the New Salesforce Tax Solution for Salesforce Checkout (Generally
Available)
Your merchants can now calculate, collect, and report tax on global payments automatically using the new Salesforce Tax Solution for
Salesforce checkout. You can stop maintaining static tax rate tables because the new tax solution manages US sales tax calculations. For
non-US stores, the earlier version of Salesforce Tax Solution, now called Manual Salesforce Tax Solution, is still available with custom
checkout to help you maintain your static tax rate tables.
How: After you set up payments, select the default tax category and complete the tax registration.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Configure the Salesforce Tax Solution (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Preview Added Products in Your Store Before Activating

Assign a product to as many as five categories in your store and preview the results without leaving the add product page. The new
product’s details are saved to your store’s default buyer group, entitlement policy, CMS workspace, price book, strikethrough price book,
and catalog. Previously, you added this information manually.
How: To turn live preview on or off, click the preview icon (1).
156
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Add a Product to a Commerce Store (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Tax Solution Is Renamed Manual Salesforce Tax Solution

With the introduction of the new tax solution that automatically calculates tax, we renamed the existing Salesforce Tax Solution to
Manual Salesforce Tax Solution. The new automatic tax solution is now named Salesforce Tax Solution. Based on how you want to set
up your taxes, you can choose either solution. Salesforce Tax Solution is available only with Salesforce checkout. Manual Salesforce Tax
Solution is available only with custom checkout.
How: To switch to Manual Salesforce Tax Solution, on the Checkout Configuration page, click Use Custom Checkout. You can’t use
the new Salesforce Tax solution after you switch to Manual Salesforce Tax Solution.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Configure the Salesforce Tax Solution (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
157
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Salesforce Order Management
Use a Single Custom Domain for Multiple Commerce Sites

You can now have multiple Commerce and non-Commerce sites that use different URLs on a custom domain on the Salesforce CDN.
Previously, each Commerce LWR site required a dedicated custom domain.
Where: This change applies to B2B Commerce and D2C Commerce sites in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
Customize Your Salesforce Content Delivery Network (CDN) Settings for Commerce LWR Stores
We recommend using the customizable Salesforce CDN for Commerce B2B and D2C LWR stores, so you can fine-tune the CDN default
settings to address the unique needs of your storefront domain. Apply image optimization and the web application firewall (WAF) as
needed, and protect your domain from malicious activity with up to 10 custom WAF rules. You can use an autonomous system number
(ASN), IP address, and country to define the custom WAF rules. You can update the default settings of domains that are already provisioned.
Where: This change applies to B2B Commerce and D2C Commerce sites in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
How: When creating a custom domain, select Serve the domain with the Salesforce Content Delivery Network (CDN) and select
Use the Salesforce CDN for Commerce LWR sites or sites hosted on Experience Delivery . Then associate the domain with a
Commerce LWR store. To customize the Salesforce CDN settings, go to the Domains page and click Edit CDN Settings next to the
domain. You can enable the Use the Salesforce CDN for Commerce LWR sites or sites hosted on Experience Delivery option for
existing custom domains, as well, with no downtime.

Easily replace shopper and buyer items using enhanced exchanges, now accessible in the UI via flows. Manage orders in bulk with large
order support for cancellations, returns, and more.
IN THIS SECTION:
Enhance your exchanges with post-fulfillment and uneven exchanges—no need to create your own flow using APIs. Increase your
post-order services and provide a more flexible order management experience. To use the exchanges flow in the UI, clone the flow
and then add it to your Actions and Recommendations section.
Bulk-Edit Items on Cancel, Discount, Return, and Return RMA Flows
Quickly edit quantity, reason, and shipping information for the items that you want to cancel, discount, and return in bulk. Improve
item findability using the new page navigation and search components for order summary records with more than 25 lines.

Enhance your exchanges with post-fulfillment and uneven exchanges—no need to create your own flow using APIs. Increase your
post-order services and provide a more flexible order management experience. To use the exchanges flow in the UI, clone the flow and
then add it to your Actions and Recommendations section.
Where: This change applies to Order Management in Unlimited, Developer, and Enterprise editions with the Order Management Growth
license.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Process an Exchange with an RMA Return (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
158
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Salesforce Payments
Bulk-Edit Items on Cancel, Discount, Return, and Return RMA Flows

Quickly edit quantity, reason, and shipping information for the items that you want to cancel, discount, and return in bulk. Improve item
findability using the new page navigation and search components for order summary records with more than 25 lines.
Where: This change applies to Order Management in Unlimited, Developer, and Enterprise editions.
How: From the Actions & Recommendations list on an order summary record, select the flow and use the new page navigation, search,
and bulk-edit capabilities.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Cancel an Order Item (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Discount an Order Item (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Create a Simple Return with a Refund (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Create a Managed RMA Return Order (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Payments
Let the Commerce Setup Assistant configure Salesforce Payments, and add a Payments merchant account to your D2C store using
Salesforce Checkout. Streamline how registered customers make purchases with one-click checkout. Get Pay Now with a new Salesforce
Payments license that’s independent of a Commerce license.
IN THIS SECTION:
Simplify Payments Setup Using the Commerce Setup Assistant
Sit back and let the Commerce Setup Assistant enable and configure Salesforce Payments for your D2C store, including remote
payment gateways and Payments administrator profiles and permissions. The Commerce Setup Assistant also creates a Digital
Experience site to serve as a data channel.
Save Time Setting Up a Merchant Account Using Salesforce Checkout
Salesforce Checkout is the fastest way to configure Salesforce Payments as your D2C store’s payment service. It guides you through
merchant account setup and assigns credit cards as the default payment method. If needed, you can add more payment methods.
After you set up Payments, the configuration of the tax and shipping is also simplified so that you can get selling with minimal effort.
Get Pay Now with a Payments License Purchased from Your Account
Salesforce Pay Now lets you extend payments across any Salesforce app. Send a payment link to your customers and get paid. You
can add Pay Now right from your org using the self-service Your Account app. Simply purchase a standalone Salesforce Payments
license, and get key payments features at blended-rate pricing. If you want enterprise commerce features and negotiated pricing,
Salesforce Payments is available with a B2B Commerce, D2C Commerce, Connected Commerce, or Order Management licenses,
and offers Interchange-plus pricing.
159
Offer Shoppers One-Click Checkout with Passwordless Login

Simplify the checkout process and reduce cart abandonment with one-click checkout. When a first-time shopper checks out, they
have the option of saving their payment and shipping information for future use. By opting in, the shopper creates an account with
your store. When a registered shopper returns to make another purchase, they enter only their email address and a verification code.
Their shipping and payment information is automatically filled in. Customers always have the option to check out as a guest.
Simplify Payments Setup Using the Commerce Setup Assistant

Sit back and let the Commerce Setup Assistant enable and configure Salesforce Payments for your D2C store, including remote payment
gateways and Payments administrator profiles and permissions. The Commerce Setup Assistant also creates a Digital Experience site to
serve as a data channel.
Where: This change applies to Payments and D2C Commerce in Enterprise and Unlimited editions.
How: From the Commerce Setup Assistant, run the Salesforce Commerce Basic Setup.
SEE ALSO:
160
Save Time Setting Up a Merchant Account Using Salesforce Checkout

Salesforce Checkout is the fastest way to configure Salesforce Payments as your D2C store’s payment service. It guides you through
merchant account setup and assigns credit cards as the default payment method. If needed, you can add more payment methods. After
you set up Payments, the configuration of the tax and shipping is also simplified so that you can get selling with minimal effort.
Where: This change applies to Payments and D2C Commerce in Enterprise and Unlimited editions.
How: From your store’s home page, select Checkout Configuration.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Configure Checkout for a Commerce Store (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
161
Get Pay Now with a Payments License Purchased from Your Account
Salesforce Pay Now lets you extend payments across any Salesforce app. Send a payment link to your customers and get paid. You can
add Pay Now right from your org using the self-service Your Account app. Simply purchase a standalone Salesforce Payments license,
and get key payments features at blended-rate pricing. If you want enterprise commerce features and negotiated pricing, Salesforce
Payments is available with a B2B Commerce, D2C Commerce, Connected Commerce, or Order Management licenses, and offers
Interchange-plus pricing.
Where: This change applies to Salesforce Payments in Enterprise and Unlimited editions.
How: Purchase a standalone Salesforce Payments license right from the self-service Your Account app.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Salesforce Pay Now (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Add Products and Licenses with the Your Account App (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Offer Shoppers One-Click Checkout with Passwordless Login

Simplify the checkout process and reduce cart abandonment with one-click checkout. When a first-time shopper checks out, they have
the option of saving their payment and shipping information for future use. By opting in, the shopper creates an account with your store.
When a registered shopper returns to make another purchase, they enter only their email address and a verification code. Their shipping
and payment information is automatically filled in. Customers always have the option to check out as a guest.
Where: This change applies to Payments and Commerce in Enterprise and Unlimited editions.
How: For new D2C stores, one-click checkout is on by default. For existing D2C stores, go to Experience Builder and from the Checkout
page, enable passwordless login in the Contact Information component. Next, drag the User Registration component onto the page.
162
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Customization
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Reduce Checkout Time with One-Click Checkout (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Customization
IN THIS SECTION:
Understand access in under five clicks with new summary pages for user access, public groups, permission sets, and permission set
groups. User access policies are generally available.
Use the new Blank Space component to customize field alignment on Dynamic Forms-enabled record pages. Show or hide individual
tabs inside a Tabs component with visibility rules.
Globalization
Enforcement of ICU Locale formats continues on a rolling basis. The Zimbabwe Gold (ZiG) currency is available in Salesforce. Stay
up to date with ICU and JDK locale formats.
163
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Permissions and Sharing
General Setup
Get explanations for formulas and fix syntax errors with Einstein for Formulas. Use a new step in the custom field creation wizard to
automatically add new custom fields to your Dynamic Forms-enabled record pages. Block users with only the Manage Public List
Views permission from seeing roles and role hierarchies when they edit public list views.

Understand access in under five clicks with new summary pages for user access, public groups, permission sets, and permission set
groups. User access policies are generally available.
IN THIS SECTION:
IdeaExchange Delivered: Get a Summary of a User’s Permissions and Access
If you've wondered what permissions, public groups, or queues a user is assigned, you're in luck. With the User Access Summary
you can see this information directly from the user’s detail page, saving you time, clicks, and effort. There’s no need to run queries
or look through each profile, permission set, public group, or queue when troubleshooting or managing access. We delivered this
feature thanks to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
IdeaExchange Delivered: See Where a Public Group Is Used
Quickly find where a public group is used and the level of access its users get without running queries or clicking multiple features.
For a specific public group, you can view the sharing rules an object is referenced in and the list views it’s shared with in the new
Public Group Access Summary. You can also see the report and dashboard folders that the public group can access and the other
public groups it’s included in. We delivered this feature thanks to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
IdeaExchange Delivered: See What’s Enabled in Permission Sets and Permission Set Groups (Generally Available)
It can be tricky to track all the permissions included in your permission sets and permission set groups. To make managing your
users’ access easier, you can now see all enabled object, user, field, and custom permissions on one page. You can also see which
permission set groups include the permission set and vice versa. This feature, now generally available, includes some changes since
the beta release. The summary page has an improved interface, and we added the ability to see included custom permissions and
permission sets in permission set groups. We delivered this feature thanks to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
IdeaExchange Delivered: Automate and Migrate User Access with User Access Policies (Generally Available)
Automate your users’ assignments to permission sets, package licenses, public groups, and other access features based on criteria
that you set. Create policies that automatically grant or remove access whenever users are created or updated. Or, easily migrate
large sets of users to a new access setup in a single operation. User access policies, now generally available, include some enhancements
since the Spring ’24 release. You can now create 200 active policies, up from 20, and set the order in which active policies are run.
We delivered this feature thanks to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
Update the Order Field for Existing User Access Policies
You can now specify which active user access policy is applied when a user meets the criteria for multiple policies by using the new
Order field. Active user access policies created before Summer ’24 were given order values based on their last-update date, but
editing the order values to fit your requirements is recommended. Manual policies that aren’t automated weren’t given order values.
IdeaExchange Delivered: Allow Users to Freeze Users and Monitor Login History Without the Manage Users Permission
You can now grant the ability to freeze and unfreeze users by using the Freeze Users permission. You can also allow users to view
and download login history with the Monitor Login History permission. With this permission, a user can access the login history
related list on user records and view data in Login History reports with relevant report permissions. Previously, you assigned the
Manage Users permission to enable these features for users, but it includes additional capabilities. For users currently assigned the
Manage Users permission, the Freeze Users and Monitor Login History permissions are enabled automatically. We delivered this
164

To make it easier to manage users and data access, we moved all related content to a single location in Salesforce Help. There you
can find all Help content related to users, licenses, permissions, sharing, and more. We included content about managing external
users and their access in Experience Cloud sites. We also expanded our guidance on troubleshooting access issues.
Get a Summary of a User’s Permissions and Access

If you've wondered what permissions, public groups, or queues a user is assigned, you're in luck. With the User Access Summary you
can see this information directly from the user’s detail page, saving you time, clicks, and effort. There’s no need to run queries or look
through each profile, permission set, public group, or queue when troubleshooting or managing access. We delivered this feature thanks
to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in all editions.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Users, and then select Users. Select a user, and then click View Summary.
SEE ALSO:
IdeaExchange: Access Summary on User
Salesforce Help: View a User’s Access Summary (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
165
See Where a Public Group Is Used

Quickly find where a public group is used and the level of access its users get without running queries or clicking multiple features. For
a specific public group, you can view the sharing rules an object is referenced in and the list views it’s shared with in the new Public
Group Access Summary. You can also see the report and dashboard folders that the public group can access and the other public groups
it’s included in. We delivered this feature thanks to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Professional, Enterprise, Performance,
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Public Groups, and then select Public Groups. Select a public group, and then
click View Summary.
SEE ALSO:
IdeaExchange: Add "Where Is It Used?" Button for Public Group
Salesforce Help: View the Public Group Access Summary (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
See What’s Enabled in Permission Sets and Permission Set Groups (Generally
Available)
It can be tricky to track all the permissions included in your permission sets and permission set groups. To make managing your users’
access easier, you can now see all enabled object, user, field, and custom permissions on one page. You can also see which permission
set groups include the permission set and vice versa. This feature, now generally available, includes some changes since the beta release.
The summary page has an improved interface, and we added the ability to see included custom permissions and permission sets in
permission set groups. We delivered this feature thanks to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
166
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Permission Sets, and then select Permission Sets. Or, enter Permission
Set Groups, and then select Permission Set Groups. Select a permission set or permission set group, and then click View Summary.
SEE ALSO:
IdeaExchange: Permissions View Associated to a Permission Set
Salesforce Help: View Permissions Enabled in a Permission Set or Permission Set Group (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Automate and Migrate User Access with User Access Policies (Generally
Available)
Automate your users’ assignments to permission sets, package licenses, public groups, and other access features based on criteria that
you set. Create policies that automatically grant or remove access whenever users are created or updated. Or, easily migrate large sets
of users to a new access setup in a single operation. User access policies, now generally available, include some enhancements since
the Spring ’24 release. You can now create 200 active policies, up from 20, and set the order in which active policies are run. We delivered
this feature thanks to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Enterprise and Unlimited editions.
167
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter User Management Settings, and then select User Management Settings.
Turn on User Access Policies. To create or manage your user access policies, in the Quick Find box, enter User Access Policies,
and then select User Access Policies.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: User Access Policies (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
IdeaExchange: Permission Sets For Public Groups
IdeaExchange: Assign a Permission Set to a Profile
IdeaExchange: Allow Public Groups to Reference Profiles
IdeaExchange: Assign a Role to a Permission Set
IdeaExchange: Add Custom Permissions to Individual User, Group, or Role
IdeaExchange: Group Permission Sets - Dynamic Lists
Update the Order Field for Existing User Access Policies

You can now specify which active user access policy is applied when a user meets the criteria for multiple policies by using the new
Order field. Active user access policies created before Summer ’24 were given order values based on their last-update date, but editing
the order values to fit your requirements is recommended. Manual policies that aren’t automated weren’t given order values.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Enterprise and Unlimited editions.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter User Access Policies, and then select User Access Policies. To edit the order
value, select a user access policy, and then click Edit Details. If a user meets the criteria for multiple policies, the policy with the lowest
order value is applied.
SEE ALSO:
IdeaExchange Delivered: Automate and Migrate User Access with User Access Policies (Generally Available)
Salesforce Help: User Access Policies (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Allow Users to Freeze Users and Monitor Login History Without the Manage
Users Permission
You can now grant the ability to freeze and unfreeze users by using the Freeze Users permission. You can also allow users to view and
download login history with the Monitor Login History permission. With this permission, a user can access the login history related list
on user records and view data in Login History reports with relevant report permissions. Previously, you assigned the Manage Users
permission to enable these features for users, but it includes additional capabilities. For users currently assigned the Manage Users
permission, the Freeze Users and Monitor Login History permissions are enabled automatically. We delivered this feature thanks to your
ideas on IdeaExchange.
168
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Lightning App Builder
How: To assign these new permissions, add them to a permission set, and then assign the permission set to users who require these
permissions.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Monitor Login History (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Freeze or Unfreeze User Accounts (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
IdeaExchange: Enable Managers to View Login History

To make it easier to manage users and data access, we moved all related content to a single location in Salesforce Help. There you can
find all Help content related to users, licenses, permissions, sharing, and more. We included content about managing external users and
their access in Experience Cloud sites. We also expanded our guidance on troubleshooting access issues.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Manage Users and Data Access
Salesforce Help: Troubleshooting User Access Issues and Insufficient Privileges Errors

Use the new Blank Space component to customize field alignment on Dynamic Forms-enabled record pages. Show or hide individual
tabs inside a Tabs component with visibility rules.
IN THIS SECTION:
IdeaExchange Delivered: Use Blank Spaces to Align Fields on Dynamic Forms-Enabled Pages
Customize field alignment in Dynamic Forms field sections with the new Blank Space component. Find it on the Fields tab when
viewing Dynamic Forms-enabled Lightning record pages in the Lightning App Builder. You can use a blank space on its own to
separate fields vertically inside a field section. To further enhance the alignment of your field section content, you can also use a
blank space in conjunction with the field section property Align fields horizontally. We delivered this feature thanks to your ideas on
IdeaExchange.
IdeaExchange Delivered: Set Conditional Visibility for Individual Tabs in Lightning App Builder
Customize tab visibility in the Lightning App Builder according to your business needs. You can set the conditions to dynamically
show or hide an individual tab in the Tabs component. This change applies to tabs on LWC-enabled record pages. We delivered this
Create Rich Text Headings in Lightning App Builder
Customize rich text on your Lightning pages by giving it style values such as Heading 1 and Heading 2 using the new dropdown
menu in the Rich Text component editor. Assigning rich text a Heading value also makes that text accessible for users viewing your
Lightning page with a screen reader.
See Fields in Compact Density When Configuring a Lightning Record Page
The Compact density setting is now respected in Lightning App Builder preview on Dynamic Forms-enabled pages. When Compact
mode is enabled, the height of fields in field sections is shorter.
169
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Lightning App Builder
Use Blank Spaces to Align Fields on Dynamic Forms-Enabled Pages

Customize field alignment in Dynamic Forms field sections with the new Blank Space component. Find it on the Fields tab when viewing
Dynamic Forms-enabled Lightning record pages in the Lightning App Builder. You can use a blank space on its own to separate fields
vertically inside a field section. To further enhance the alignment of your field section content, you can also use a blank space in conjunction
with the field section property Align fields horizontally. We delivered this feature thanks to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: For example, these two versions of the same field section contain account fields, with a blank space added below the Phone field.
The left image shows the default behavior without Align fields horizontally selected. The blank space appears with a single row height.
On the right, the horizontal alignment setting was selected, causing the Website field to stay aligned horizontally with Parent Account
instead of collapsing upward. The blank space height is now expanded to align with the row height of its neighbor, Billing Address.
A blank space component is considered a field and counts against the limit of 100 fields per region. It doesn’t count against the component
page limit.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Break Up Your Record Details with Dynamic Forms (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Set Conditional Visibility for Individual Tabs in Lightning App Builder

Customize tab visibility in the Lightning App Builder according to your business needs. You can set the conditions to dynamically show
or hide an individual tab in the Tabs component. This change applies to tabs on LWC-enabled record pages. We delivered this feature
thanks to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, Pro Suite, and Developer editions.
How: For a complete list of LWC-enabled objects, see LWC Migration for Record Home Pages.
170
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Globalization
Create Rich Text Headings in Lightning App Builder

Customize rich text on your Lightning pages by giving it style values such as Heading 1 and Heading 2 using the new dropdown menu
in the Rich Text component editor. Assigning rich text a Heading value also makes that text accessible for users viewing your Lightning
page with a screen reader.
How: Open a custom Lightning page in the Lightning App Builder, and select a Rich Text component on the canvas. Select a block of
text inside the editor, and use the new styling dropdown to give the text a heading value. For regular rich text, select the Normal setting.
See Fields in Compact Density When Configuring a Lightning Record Page

The Compact density setting is now respected in Lightning App Builder preview on Dynamic Forms-enabled pages. When Compact
mode is enabled, the height of fields in field sections is shorter.
Globalization
Enforcement of ICU Locale formats continues on a rolling basis. The Zimbabwe Gold (ZiG) currency is available in Salesforce. Stay up to
date with ICU and JDK locale formats.
171
IN THIS SECTION:
To conduct business wherever you are, adopt the International Components for Unicode (ICU) locale formats. Locales control the
formats for dates, times, currencies, addresses, names, and numeric values. ICU sets the international standard for these formats. The
ICU locale formats provide a consistent experience across the platform and improve integration with ICU-compliant applications
across the globe. When you enable this update, the ICU locale formats replace Oracle’s Java Development Kit (JDK) locale formats
in Salesforce. This update was first made available in Winter ’20 and will be enforced on a rolling basis starting in Spring ’24.
Conduct Business with New Zimbabwe Gold Currency
To help support your customers in Zimbabwe, the Zimbabwe Gold (ZiG) is available in Salesforce.
To improve accuracy and your users’ experience, we updated the translations for some standard object, tab, and field names for
these languages: Chinese (Simplified), Danish, Dutch, Finnish, German, Greek, Hungarian, Japanese, Spanish, Spanish (Mexico),
Norwegian, Russian, Slovenian, and Turkish.
Evaluate the Impact of the Latest ICU and JDK Locale Updates
Stay up to date with the latest locale formats from International Components for Unicode (ICU) and Oracle's Java Development Kit
(JDK). For ICU, the date formats changed for the language-only locale Thai. For JDK, there are changes to the date formats for Arabic
(Saudi Arabia) and changes to the date, time, currency, and accounting formats for Serbian locales, Tagalog locales, and Chinese
(Malaysia). Whether you use the ICU or the JDK format, we recommend that you evaluate the changes that affect the locales that
you use. Then test your filters, code, and components as needed.

To conduct business wherever you are, adopt the International Components for Unicode (ICU) locale formats. Locales control the formats
for dates, times, currencies, addresses, names, and numeric values. ICU sets the international standard for these formats. The ICU locale
formats provide a consistent experience across the platform and improve integration with ICU-compliant applications across the globe.
When you enable this update, the ICU locale formats replace Oracle’s Java Development Kit (JDK) locale formats in Salesforce. This update
was first made available in Winter ’20 and will be enforced on a rolling basis starting in Spring ’24.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and all versions of the Salesforce mobile app in all editions,
except Database.com.
When: Salesforce is retiring JDK locale formats and enforcing ICU locale formats on a rolling basis starting with the Spring ’24 release.
Salesforce orgs created in Winter ’20 or later have ICU locale formats enabled by default. You can defer the enforcement until Spring ’25
through the UI. Salesforce emails admins 30 to 60 days before the ICU enablement for their orgs. After the ICU locale formats are enabled,
Salesforce also notifies admins of that event.
How: To enable this update, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates. To
Enable ICU Locale Formats, follow the testing and activation steps.
The English (Canada) locale (en_CA) requires separate activation. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter User Interface, and
select User Interface. Then select Enable ICU formats for en_CA, and save your changes.
172
To defer the enforcement of the ICU locale formats until Spring ‘25, in Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter User Interface, and
select User Interface. Then deselect Enable ICU locale formats as part of the scheduled rollout and save your changes. This option
is visible only if your org uses the JDK locale formats.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Go Global with New International Locale Formats (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Knowledge Article: JDK Locale Format Retirement
Trailblazer Community Group: ICU Locale Formats Adoption
Conduct Business with New Zimbabwe Gold Currency

To help support your customers in Zimbabwe, the Zimbabwe Gold (ZiG) is available in Salesforce.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and all versions of the Salesforce mobile app in all editions.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Supported Currencies (ICU)
Salesforce Help: Supported Currencies (JDK)

To improve accuracy and your users’ experience, we updated the translations for some standard object, tab, and field names for these
languages: Chinese (Simplified), Danish, Dutch, Finnish, German, Greek, Hungarian, Japanese, Spanish, Spanish (Mexico), Norwegian,
Russian, Slovenian, and Turkish.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and all versions of the mobile app in all editions.
How: To review the changes, see Review Summer ‘24 Updated Label Translations and download the attached list. If you want to use a
different translation for tab and field labels, you can change the name using the Rename Tabs and Labels functionality.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Rename Object, Tab, and Field Labels (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Evaluate the Impact of the Latest ICU and JDK Locale Updates
Stay up to date with the latest locale formats from International Components for Unicode (ICU) and Oracle's Java Development Kit (JDK).
For ICU, the date formats changed for the language-only locale Thai. For JDK, there are changes to the date formats for Arabic (Saudi
Arabia) and changes to the date, time, currency, and accounting formats for Serbian locales, Tagalog locales, and Chinese (Malaysia).
Whether you use the ICU or the JDK format, we recommend that you evaluate the changes that affect the locales that you use. Then
test your filters, code, and components as needed.
Where: These changes apply to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and all versions of the mobile app in all editions except
Database.com.
SEE ALSO:
Knowledge Article: Java Development Kit (JDK) Locale Format Changes in Summer ’24
Salesforce Help: Locales Overview (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
173
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes General Setup
General Setup
Get explanations for formulas and fix syntax errors with Einstein for Formulas. Use a new step in the custom field creation wizard to
automatically add new custom fields to your Dynamic Forms-enabled record pages. Block users with only the Manage Public List Views
permission from seeing roles and role hierarchies when they edit public list views.
IN THIS SECTION:
Fix Formula Syntax Errors with Einstein for Formulas
Einstein for Formulas now helps you fix syntax errors in a formula in addition to providing an explanation for a formula that’s used
in Formula fields, default field values, and record validation rules. Create a formula or use an existing Salesforce formula in the Formula
Editor and get an explanation generated. For any syntax errors in the formula, use the fixed formula suggested by Einstein.
Add New Custom Fields to Dynamic Forms-Enabled Pages
Quickly and easily add a new custom field to your Dynamic Forms-enabled pages by using a new step in the custom-field creation
wizard.
Register External Services-compliant OpenAPI 2.0 or 3.0 specifications with either JSON or YAML formatting. Note that YAML-formatted
specifications are subject to a maximum size limit of 3 MB. Previously, you could register only JSON-formatted specifications.
Access More External Data Types with the Custom Adapter for Salesforce Connect
Enhancements to the Apex Connector Framework help you connect your users to more external data when you develop your own
custom adapter for Salesforce Connect. With support for more external object field types, your users can work with and search across
a richer set of external data directly in Salesforce.
See Required Fields at a Glance on Aura-Based Page Views
When you create, edit, or clone records on Aura-based pages on a desktop, a message now tells you that fields with asterisks are
required.
Learn about small but important changes that make list views more accessible.
To improve performance and meet the latest accessibility standards, list views for custom objects now render with Lightning Web
Components (LWC) instead of Aura. LWC, Salesforce’s newest framework, delivers your data faster and makes the latest features
available for your list views. List views for standard objects, such as accounts, still render with Aura.
To support rendering list views for custom objects with Lightning Web Components (LWC), every list view URL now identifies the
list view by its API Name rather than by its ID. The API Name is an automatically assigned unique identifier based on the list view’s
original name. Additionally, when you select your Recently Viewed list, the URL uses the parameter __Recent instead of Recent.
Review and update any business processes that rely on details from the list view URL.
See Record Fields in Two Columns on Tablets
If you have Dynamic Forms on Mobile enabled, the Record Detail - Mobile and Field Section components now display fields in two
columns when viewed on a tablet. Previously, fields in these components displayed in only one column when viewed on a tablet
even if they were configured with two columns.
174
See Dynamic Forms-Enabled Lightning Page Information for Custom Fields

You can now successfully view the Lightning page information for custom fields in use on Dynamic Forms-enabled pages via the
Where is this used? button. In the Where is this used? list, a link to a Lightning page associated with a FlexipageFieldInstance reference
type correctly routes you to the details for that page. Previously, clicking a Lightning page link for a FlexipageFieldInstance reference
type resulted in an error.
Fix Formula Syntax Errors with Einstein for Formulas

Einstein for Formulas now helps you fix syntax errors in a formula in addition to providing an explanation for a formula that’s used in
Formula fields, default field values, and record validation rules. Create a formula or use an existing Salesforce formula in the Formula
Editor and get an explanation generated. For any syntax errors in the formula, use the fixed formula suggested by Einstein.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions. Einstein generative AI is available
in Lightning Experience.
Why: The formula syntax checker identifies syntax errors in a formula but doesn’t provide a solution to fix them. Einstein for Formulas
addresses this limitation by providing a fixed formula that you can use in the Formula Editor.
How: To fix a syntax error in a formula you entered in the Formula Editor, click Use Formula Assistant and Einstein suggests a fixed
formula for you.
Add New Custom Fields to Dynamic Forms-Enabled Pages

Quickly and easily add a new custom field to your Dynamic Forms-enabled pages by using a new step in the custom-field creation
wizard.
How: Create a custom field as usual in Setup. After setting field-level security, you see the new step to select which Lightning record
pages to add the field to.
175
The new field is added to each record page you select as the last field in the first field section on the page.
If there aren't any Dynamic Forms-enabled pages for the object for which the field is being created, then the new step doesn't appear.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create Custom Fields (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Enforce View Roles and Role Hierarchy Permission When Editing Public List View
Visibility (Release Update)
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
for your instance, and click the maintenance tab.
Why: This security update blocks users with only the Manage Public List Views permission from seeing roles and role hierarchies when
they edit public list views.
How: To edit public list views, a user needs the Manage Public List Views permission. After you enable this update, so that users can
make list views visible to roles, grant them the View Roles and Role Hierarchy permission as well. Alternatively, have a user who already
has the View Roles and Role Hierarchy permission grant access to list views. A user with only the Manage Public List Views permission
can still make a list view visible to Public Groups or set a list view to fully public or private.
To view this update, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates. For Enforce
View Roles and Role Hierarchy Permission When Editing Public List View Visibility, follow the testing and activation steps.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create a Custom List View in Salesforce Classic (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Create or Clone a List View in Lightning Experience (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Release Updates

Register External Services-compliant OpenAPI 2.0 or 3.0 specifications with either JSON or YAML formatting. Note that YAML-formatted
specifications are subject to a maximum size limit of 3 MB. Previously, you could register only JSON-formatted specifications.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: OpenAPI 2.0 and 3.0 Support (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Access More External Data Types with the Custom Adapter for Salesforce Connect
Enhancements to the Apex Connector Framework help you connect your users to more external data when you develop your own
custom adapter for Salesforce Connect. With support for more external object field types, your users can work with and search across a
richer set of external data directly in Salesforce.
176
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Unlimited, Developer, and Performance editions.
How: To use the Apex Connector Framework to map external data to Salesforce external objects, create or update a
DataSource.Connection Apex class. The newly supported external object field types include:
• Currency
• Date
• Email
• Percent
• Phone
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Access External Data with a Custom Adapter for Salesforce Connect (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Apex Developer Guide: Get Started with the Apex Connector Framework (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Apex Reference Guide: DataType Enum (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
See Required Fields at a Glance on Aura-Based Page Views

When you create, edit, or clone records on Aura-based pages on a desktop, a message now tells you that fields with asterisks are required.
How: Salesforce shows * = Required Information on the top right of the page if you’re creating, fully editing, or cloning a
record. When inline editing, the message is at the bottom right of the page.
Most standard objects are LWC-enabled, but a few still use Aura. This enhancement applies to the few Aura-based objects, such as
Campaigns, Products, and Tasks. For a complete list of LWC-enabled objects, see LWC Migration for Record Home Pages. If you don’t
see an object on this list, then it still uses Aura.

Learn about small but important changes that make list views more accessible.
Where: These changes apply to Lightning Experience in Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: Check out details about these changes.
• Screen readers announce the text in the new chart window in a more logical order. Additionally, screen readers clearly announce
the start of a table data when reading the contents of an existing chart.
• The pin list button always includes the name of the list view for screen readers, whether the list is pinned or not.
• The chart and filter buttons now display tooltips when they have focus.
• Introduced in Spring ’24, users with an activated screen reader can navigate related lists with the key combination Ctrl+Alt+arrow
key (Windows) or Cmd+Option+arrow key (macOS).

To improve performance and meet the latest accessibility standards, list views for custom objects now render with Lightning Web
Components (LWC) instead of Aura. LWC, Salesforce’s newest framework, delivers your data faster and makes the latest features available
for your list views. List views for standard objects, such as accounts, still render with Aura.
177
How: List view pages for custom objects include these minor changes, but the overall way that your users work in list views hasn’t
changed.
• The List Views dropdown menu displays up to 100 lists and shows Recent List Views and the option to search your lists at the top
of the dropdown. If you have more than 100 list views, use search terms to find a specific list.
• Keyboard navigation for the List Views dropdown menu starts with focus at the top of the list rather than on the currently pinned
list.
• Some icons and highlights, such as the check mark next to a selected list in the List Views dropdown menu and the icon, have
updated colors. Additionally, the color, size, alignment, and capitalization of some windows, buttons, and dropdown menus have
changed.
• The Filters panel has new button options in the add or edit filters work flows. Cancel to exit the add or edit filter flow, and Save to
apply your changes. You can still click outside of the panel or press the Escape key to close the panel. When you add or edit a filter,
the Value menu closes each time you select an option from it. Options appear below the Value menu as you select them. To remove
an existing filter, click the icon.
• When you edit filter logic, the Cancel and Save buttons don’t appear in the Filters panel until you click outside of the Filter Logic text
field. Your filter logic is checked for errors when you save your changes.
• When you create a filter that uses a location-based field, the values that you select initially show as the full location name in the
Filters panel. After you save your changes, the values convert to an abbreviated form, such as CA for California or NV for
Nevada.
• After you add a filter, keyboard focus returns to the Add Filter button. After you edit a filter, keyboard focus returns to the edited
filter.
• Header icons in columns and fields don’t render.
• Some errors and in-app messages appear in updated locations or formats and with new language.
For example, after a save, a field-level error previously appeared directly below the affected input field. Now, a field-level error appears
to the left of the row and includes the affected field's name.
Some errors occur before you save. With this type of error, the error message appears below the input field in the edit panel, and
the field reverts to its original value if you close the panel before fixing the issue.

To support rendering list views for custom objects with Lightning Web Components (LWC), every list view URL now identifies the list
view by its API Name rather than by its ID. The API Name is an automatically assigned unique identifier based on the list view’s original
name. Additionally, when you select your Recently Viewed list, the URL uses the parameter __Recent instead of Recent. Review and
update any business processes that rely on details from the list view URL.
How: To see the updated URL format, visit a saved list view and check the URL after filterName. Instead of a generic alphanumeric string,
the parameter now shows an API-friendly version of the list view’s name. When you visit your Recently Viewed list, you see __Recent
after filtername.
If you click a saved link or bookmark that uses the previous URL format to visit the list view for a custom object rendered with LWC, then
you’re redirected to the new URL. If you click a saved link or bookmark that uses the previous URL format to visit the list view for an object
rendered with Aura, then the previous URL is accepted.
178
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Data Cloud
See Record Fields in Two Columns on Tablets

If you have Dynamic Forms on Mobile enabled, the Record Detail - Mobile and Field Section components now display fields in two
columns when viewed on a tablet. Previously, fields in these components displayed in only one column when viewed on a tablet even
if they were configured with two columns.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Enable Dynamic Forms on Mobile (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
See Dynamic Forms-Enabled Lightning Page Information for Custom Fields

You can now successfully view the Lightning page information for custom fields in use on Dynamic Forms-enabled pages via the Where
is this used? button. In the Where is this used? list, a link to a Lightning page associated with a FlexipageFieldInstance reference type
correctly routes you to the details for that page. Previously, clicking a Lightning page link for a FlexipageFieldInstance reference type
resulted in an error.
How: From Setup, select Object Manager > Object Name > Fields & Relationships. Click the name of a custom field used on a
Lightning page that uses Dynamic Forms, and then click Where is this used?.
Data Cloud
Ingest, harmonize, unify, and analyze streaming and batch data with Data Cloud. Then use that data to unlock meaningful and intelligent
experiences across Customer 360 applications and beyond.
IN THIS SECTION:
Data Cloud features and changes are released as often as monthly, so check back again soon for the latest solutions. Changes included
in the Summer ’24 release are generally listed under June.
AI in Data Cloud
Let Einstein do the hard work and autoselect the capabilities that can best influence a predictive outcome. As you build your predictive
model, use data and training alerts to improve its quality. The updated UI includes the ability to quickly access different AI models.
For more comprehensive AI capabilities, switch to the new Einstein Studio experience.
179
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Data Cloud
Access Data from Amazon Redshift and Databricks with BYOL Data Federation
Use Bring Your Own Lake (BYOL) data federation to securely view and consume data from Amazon Redshift and Databricks as if it’s
native to Data Cloud. Data federation uses zero-copy integration to seamlessly access external data without copying it into Data
Cloud. With access to trusted, governed, and customer-rich external information, you can build rich, accurate profiles to establish a
single source of truth and eliminate expensive integration processes.
Query Data Graphs for Metadata and Data Using the Data Graphs APIs
You can use REST API calls to query data graphs for their primary model objects, related objects, and fields. You can also query data
from a specific data graph by ID or by using secondary lookup keys. Use Query API V1 to query data graphs.
Prioritize Campaigns with Waterfall Segments (Generally Available)
When running a campaign with multiple offers, use a waterfall segment to create a hierarchical structure and prioritize your campaigns.
For example, you have four different discounted offers, but you don’t want a customer to receive more than one offer. To target your
campaign, create a prioritized list of mutually exclusive segments so that an audience member exists in only one subsegment of
your waterfall and receives only one promotional offer. You can also rearrange subsegments in your waterfall to adjust the priority.
This feature, now generally available, includes some changes since the last release.
Apply Filters to Contact Points and the Activation Membership (Generally Available)
Pinpoint the target audience for specific campaign goals by using activation membership filters to have more control on your target
audience. With contact point filtering, you can now apply consent filters to target contact points based on your audience preference.
Data Cloud Related List Enrichments now offer support for Account objects.
Enrich Most Objects in Your Org With Data Cloud Data
You can now copy Data Cloud data into more objects in your org from Setup. Previously, you could copy data into the Contact and
Lead objects from Object Manager.
Add more details or context to a primary engagement object by pulling in the relevant data from a connected data graph. Then,
send the entire payload as events to Marketing Cloud, core platform, and webhook destinations.
Run Batch Data Transforms at Custom Time Intervals
Tailor data updates to your needs by scheduling a transform to run at daily and hourly intervals in your preferred time zone. Previously,
scheduling was limited to hourly intervals in the scheduler’s local time zone.
Enhance Row Security in Batch Data Transforms
To ensure accuracy and data uniqueness, generate a UUID for each row in a table to maintain distinct values. As you combine data
from various sources within a batch data transform, you can potentially duplicate or overwrite rows that contain similar ID values.
Run Batch Data Transforms with No Downtime
You can now run a sequence of batch data transforms one after the other without scheduling by using a flow. After a batch data
transform completes, the next one starts immediately.
Edit an Output Node in a Batch Data Transform
Add a column to a data model object (DMO) output node without leaving the editor. Previously, to change a DMO, you needed to
leave the batch data transform and go to the Data Model Objects tab to add a column.
You can now change a streaming data transform’s name and SQL expression. Changes affect the incoming data as soon as you save.
When you update a streaming data transform, you can now apply the changes to all your data—current and incoming—by rebuilding
the target data lake object.
180
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Data Cloud Features Released by Month
Improve Data Quality by Monitoring Problem Record Metrics

Records that aren’t ingested into Data Cloud due to data quality issues are now logged in a problem records data lake object (DLO).
A problem records DLO is generated each time a data stream is created and is deleted if the data stream is deleted. You can also
query and map the problem records DLO just like any other DLO to identify and address data quality issues.
order fulfillment a breeze. Use the Omnichannel Inventory Connector to ingest your inventory data into Data Cloud and unlock
valuable inventory insights and predictions.
Wow your customers by processing user engagement data in profile data in milliseconds to enable next-page personalization. With
real-time identity resolution, real-time calculated insights, and real-time segmentation built on real-time data graphs, you can match
profiles, generate metrics and segments, and return profile data while a customer is actively browsing.
Data security within Data Cloud data spaces is being enhanced and better aligned with CRM access control, enforcing security for
data spaces across all access methods. This upgrade includes changes that integrate data space access control into permission sets.
Now, admins can directly associate multiple data spaces to a permission set. Use new feature permissions to further restrict access
to data space-aware features for each data space within the permission set.
Connect unstructured data in Data Cloud and create search index configurations to prepare that data for vector search. With
unstructured data and vector search, you can create more customer-focused results in your searches and queries across Salesforce
gen AI, automation, and analytics tools.
Import data from the Adobe Marketo Engage connector to Data Cloud
Use the Adobe Marketo Engage Connector to import campaigns, leads, and lead activities data from Adobe Marketo.
Experience Faster Salesforce CRM Connector Refreshes
With the support of stream processing, data stream deployment and change events are optimized to process data with minimal
latency. Stream processing is available for standard objects, such as Account, Contact, Lead, and Opportunity, and all custom objects.
Our latest round of cross-cloud features for Data Cloud.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Data Cloud Release Notes Changes

Data Cloud features and changes are released as often as monthly, so check back again soon for the latest solutions. Changes included
in the Summer ’24 release are generally listed under June.
Feature Release Note

May ’24
Enrich Your Org Data Cloud Related List Enrichments Now Support Accounts
Enrich Your Org Enrich Most Objects in Your Org With Data Cloud Data
Data Actions Enrich Data Actions Using Data Graphs
181
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Data Cloud Features Released by Month
Feature Release Note

June ’24
Segmentation Prioritize Campaigns with Waterfall Segments (Generally Available)
Activation Apply Filters to Contact Points and the Activation Membership

Connect Data Bring Inventory Data into Data Cloud with the Omnichannel
Inventory Connector
Connect Data Import data from the Adobe Marketo Engage connector to Data
Cloud
Connect Data Experience Faster Salesforce CRM Connector Refreshes
Real Time Customize Web Pages in Real Time
Data Transforms Run Batch Data Transforms at Custom Time Intervals
Data Transforms Enhance Row Security in Batch Data Transforms
Data Transforms Run Batch Data Transforms with No Downtime
Data Transforms Edit an Output Node in a Batch Data Transform
Data Transforms Modify Streaming Data Transforms
Data Transforms Refresh a Streaming Data Transform
Unstructured Data Enhance Your AI and Automation Strategies with Unstructured

Data in Data Cloud on page 192
Unstructured Data Use Vector Search in Generative AI, Automation, and Analytics
Tools on page 193
Data Model Get a list of activation records from Audience data model objects
(DMOs). See New and Changed Connect REST API Resources on
page 251
July ’24
Einstein Studio Leverage Alerts to Evaluate the Quality of Your Predictive Model
Einstein Studio Let Einstein Autoselect the Best Factors for Your Use Case
Einstein Studio Evaluate Your Model Performance with Activity Metrics
Einstein Studio Access Models Quicker with the Updated Einstein Studio Navigation
Einstein Studio Einstein Studio Legacy Tab Is No Longer Available in Data Cloud
182
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes AI in Data Cloud
AI in Data Cloud
Let Einstein do the hard work and autoselect the capabilities that can best influence a predictive outcome. As you build your predictive
model, use data and training alerts to improve its quality. The updated UI includes the ability to quickly access different AI models. For
more comprehensive AI capabilities, switch to the new Einstein Studio experience.
IN THIS SECTION:
Leverage Alerts to Evaluate the Quality of Your Predictive Model
Einstein Studio provides alerts to help you manage data discrepancies and issues that can occur during model training. Act on and
resolve your alerts to build, retrain, and deploy models that can deliver more accurate predictions. You can review the alerts on the
model details page, in model settings, and on the model activity tab.
Let Einstein Autoselect the Best Factors for Your Use Case
Einstein saves you time and intelligently selects the most relevant variables and recommended algorithm for a use case.
Evaluate Your Model Performance with Activity Metrics
Use activity metrics to understand the performance of your predictive or generative model. View a summary of the total number of
inferences over different time periods and gain insights into your connection, timeout, and authentication errors. In Model Builder,
select the activated model, and go to the Activity tab to view its metrics.
Access Models Quicker with the Updated Einstein Studio Navigation
You can now access models from a centralized location. Use the sidebar to locate models and open the model library. You can also
view and manage predictive and generative models from their respective tabs.
Einstein Studio Legacy Tab Is No Longer Available in Data Cloud
The new Einstein Studio tab in Data Cloud is now your home base for creating and connecting your AI models. Previously, you could
also access model building capabilities on the Einstein Studio (Legacy) tab. We replaced this tab with one experience that provides
access to more enhanced AI capabilities, such as predictive and generative AI models and activity metrics. You also get data, model,
and training alerts.
Leverage Alerts to Evaluate the Quality of Your Predictive Model

Einstein Studio provides alerts to help you manage data discrepancies and issues that can occur during model training. Act on and
resolve your alerts to build, retrain, and deploy models that can deliver more accurate predictions. You can review the alerts on the
model details page, in model settings, and on the model activity tab.
When: This functionality is available starting in July 2024.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Address Data Quality (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Monitor Model Activity (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Let Einstein Autoselect the Best Factors for Your Use Case
Einstein saves you time and intelligently selects the most relevant variables and recommended algorithm for a use case.
How: In Model Builder, use these autoselection capabilities.
183
With Autopilot, Einstein selects variables with the highest impact on your predictive outcome.
With Automatic Selection, Einstein selects the best algorithm for your use case.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create a Model From Scratch (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
184
Evaluate Your Model Performance with Activity Metrics

Use activity metrics to understand the performance of your predictive or generative model. View a summary of the total number of
inferences over different time periods and gain insights into your connection, timeout, and authentication errors. In Model Builder, select
the activated model, and go to the Activity tab to view its metrics.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create a Model From Scratch (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Access Models Quicker with the Updated Einstein Studio Navigation

You can now access models from a centralized location. Use the sidebar to locate models and open the model library. You can also view
and manage predictive and generative models from their respective tabs.
Where: This change applies to Data Cloud in Developer, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions. Einstein Generative AI is
available in Lightning Experience.
How: In Data Cloud, go to the Einstein Studio tab to view the updated experience and model tabs.
185
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Monitor Model Activity (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Einstein Studio Legacy Tab Is No Longer Available in Data Cloud

The new Einstein Studio tab in Data Cloud is now your home base for creating and connecting your AI models. Previously, you could
also access model building capabilities on the Einstein Studio (Legacy) tab. We replaced this tab with one experience that provides
access to more enhanced AI capabilities, such as predictive and generative AI models and activity metrics. You also get data, model, and
training alerts.
186
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Access Data from Amazon Redshift and Databricks with BYOL
Data Federation
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Use AI Models (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Connect a Model (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Access Data from Amazon Redshift and Databricks with BYOL Data
Federation
Use Bring Your Own Lake (BYOL) data federation to securely view and consume data from Amazon Redshift and Databricks as if it’s native
to Data Cloud. Data federation uses zero-copy integration to seamlessly access external data without copying it into Data Cloud. With
access to trusted, governed, and customer-rich external information, you can build rich, accurate profiles to establish a single source of
truth and eliminate expensive integration processes.
When: This feature is being rolled out in June 2024.
Where: This change applies to Data Cloud in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: BYOL Data Federation
Query Data Graphs for Metadata and Data Using the Data Graphs APIs
You can use REST API calls to query data graphs for their primary model objects, related objects, and fields. You can also query data from
a specific data graph by ID or by using secondary lookup keys. Use Query API V1 to query data graphs.
When: As of January 2024, this feature is available for new and existing Data Cloud orgs.
SEE ALSO:
Data Cloud Reference Guide: Query Data Graph Data
187
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Prioritize Campaigns with Waterfall Segments (Generally
Available)
Prioritize Campaigns with Waterfall Segments (Generally Available)

When running a campaign with multiple offers, use a waterfall segment to create a hierarchical structure and prioritize your campaigns.
For example, you have four different discounted offers, but you don’t want a customer to receive more than one offer. To target your
campaign, create a prioritized list of mutually exclusive segments so that an audience member exists in only one subsegment of your
waterfall and receives only one promotional offer. You can also rearrange subsegments in your waterfall to adjust the priority. This feature,
now generally available, includes some changes since the last release.
When: The Waterfall Segments feature is available starting in June 2024.
How: From Segments, create a waterfall segment, drag in segments to define the priority, and save your waterfall segment. Then activate
the individual subsegments to target specific customers.
Apply Filters to Contact Points and the Activation Membership (Generally

Available)
Pinpoint the target audience for specific campaign goals by using activation membership filters to have more control on your target
audience. With contact point filtering, you can now apply consent filters to target contact points based on your audience preference.
When: This functionality is available starting in June 2024.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Add Filters to the Activation Membership
Salesforce Help: Add Filters to Contact Points in Activation
Salesforce Help: Contact Points and Source Priority Order

Data Cloud Related List Enrichments now offer support for Account objects.
How: From the Account object management settings, select Data Cloud Related Lists, and then create a new related list.
When: This change rolls out in June 2024.
Enrich Most Objects in Your Org With Data Cloud Data

You can now copy Data Cloud data into more objects in your org from Setup. Previously, you could copy data into the Contact and Lead
objects from Object Manager.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Enrichments, and then select Enrichments.
You can create and access copy field enrichments for more objects from Setup. You can still create copy field enrichments for the Contact
and Lead objects in Object Manager, but not for other objects.
When: This change rolls out in May 2024.
188
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Enrich Data Actions Using Data Graphs

Add more details or context to a primary engagement object by pulling in the relevant data from a connected data graph. Then, send
the entire payload as events to Marketing Cloud, core platform, and webhook destinations.
Where: This change applies to Data Cloud in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
When: This feature is available starting mid-May 2024.
Who: Data Cloud customers with a Data Cloud license.
Run Batch Data Transforms at Custom Time Intervals

Tailor data updates to your needs by scheduling a transform to run at daily and hourly intervals in your preferred time zone. Previously,
scheduling was limited to hourly intervals in the scheduler’s local time zone.
How: From Recently Viewed, click next to the batch data transform name, and select Schedule. Under Run Mode, click Scheduled.
Select the frequency and time interval.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Schedule a Batch Data Transform
Enhance Row Security in Batch Data Transforms

To ensure accuracy and data uniqueness, generate a UUID for each row in a table to maintain distinct values. As you combine data from
various sources within a batch data transform, you can potentially duplicate or overwrite rows that contain similar ID values.
How: In a transform node, select Formula, and then select Custom Formula. In the formula editor panel, from the list of additional
functions, select uuid.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Additional Functions for Formulas
Run Batch Data Transforms with No Downtime

You can now run a sequence of batch data transforms one after the other without scheduling by using a flow. After a batch data transform
completes, the next one starts immediately.
How: To run batch data transforms consecutively, use the Run Batch Data Transform action in a flow.
189
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Edit an Output Node in a Batch Data Transform
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Flow Core Action: Run a Batch Data Transform in Data Cloud (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Edit an Output Node in a Batch Data Transform

Add a column to a data model object (DMO) output node without leaving the editor. Previously, to change a DMO, you needed to leave
the batch data transform and go to the Data Model Objects tab to add a column.
How: In a batch data transform, click an output node. From the list of available columns, click Create New.

You can now change a streaming data transform’s name and SQL expression. Changes affect the incoming data as soon as you save.
How: From Recently Viewed, click next to the data transform name, select Edit, and make your changes.

When you update a streaming data transform, you can now apply the changes to all your data—current and incoming—by rebuilding
the target data lake object.
How: From Recently Viewed, click next to the data transform, and select Rebuild.
190
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Improve Data Quality by Monitoring Problem Record Metrics
Improve Data Quality by Monitoring Problem Record Metrics

Records that aren’t ingested into Data Cloud due to data quality issues are now logged in a problem records data lake object (DLO). A
problem records DLO is generated each time a data stream is created and is deleted if the data stream is deleted. You can also query
and map the problem records DLO just like any other DLO to identify and address data quality issues.
When: This feature is being rolled out in July 2024.
How: You can access the problem records information in any of the following ways:
• Use the Refresh History tab on data stream record home to view a new metric Problem Records, which count the number of records
that were impacted for each job run.
• On the data stream record home, you can retrieve the name of the problem records DLO under properties and proceed to query it
via:
– Query Editor
– Data Explorer
– Query API
Bring Inventory Data into Data Cloud with the Omnichannel Inventory
Connector
order fulfillment a breeze. Use the Omnichannel Inventory Connector to ingest your inventory data into Data Cloud and unlock valuable
inventory insights and predictions.
Where: This change applies to Data Cloud and Omnichannel Inventory in Developer, Enterprise, and Unlimited editions.
Who: To connect to Omnichannel Inventory, use the Data Cloud Admin or Commerce Intelligence Admin permission set.
How: From Data Cloud Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Omnichannel Inventory Connector, and then select Omnichannel
Inventory Connector.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up an Omnichannel Inventory Connection (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Wow your customers by processing user engagement data in profile data in milliseconds to enable next-page personalization. With
real-time identity resolution, real-time calculated insights, and real-time segmentation built on real-time data graphs, you can match
profiles, generate metrics and segments, and return profile data while a customer is actively browsing.
Who: This feature is available on a limited basis in Summer ’24. Contact your Account Executive for more information.
When: This feature becomes available with the Summer ’24 release.
How: Ingest profile data from the Web SDK or Mobile SDK for real-time matching. Identity resolution runs as real-time when a real-time
data graph is created from its output Unified Individual data model object. Real-time insights and real-time segments built on the data
graph are triggered when records are updated. Use Data Cloud Connect REST API to return a data graph record in real time.
191
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Refine Access with Data Spaces Feature Permissions

Data security within Data Cloud data spaces is being enhanced and better aligned with CRM access control, enforcing security for data
spaces across all access methods. This upgrade includes changes that integrate data space access control into permission sets. Now,
admins can directly associate multiple data spaces to a permission set. Use new feature permissions to further restrict access to data
space-aware features for each data space within the permission set.
When: Data Cloud orgs began receiving new permission sets starting in December 2023. All Data Cloud orgs except orgs with Marketing
Cloud Growth enabled received new permissions sets by April 20, 2024.
How: To prepare for enhanced security data spaces, assign new permission sets to Data Cloud users when your org gets them. Enable
enhanced security data spaces after assigning new permission sets.
Permission sets for each data space are no longer created automatically when you create a data space. Instead, associate data spaces in
the Data Cloud Data Space Management settings for a Data Cloud standard permission set or custom permission set. After a data space
is associated with a permission set, select the data space link to access feature permissions.
Sharing is no longer supported on data space-aware feature objects.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Partition Your Data with Enhanced Security Data Spaces
Salesforce Help: Update Data Cloud to Enhanced Security Data Spaces
Salesforce Help: Data Cloud Permission Set Names During the Enhanced Security Migration Period

Connect unstructured data in Data Cloud and create search index configurations to prepare that data for vector search. With unstructured
data and vector search, you can create more customer-focused results in your searches and queries across Salesforce gen AI, automation,
and analytics tools.
IN THIS SECTION:
Enhance Your AI and Automation Strategies with Unstructured Data in Data Cloud
Connect your unstructured data—such as chat transcripts, audio files, emails, or Salesforce Knowledge articles—to drive personalized,
customer-centric results in your Einstein generative AI (Prompt Builder and Einstein Copilot), automation (Flow Builder), and analytics
(Tableau) applications.
Use Vector Search in Generative AI, Automation, and Analytics Tools
With unstructured data and vector search, you can ground your generative AI, automation, and analytics tools with relevant,
customer-specific data to deliver results that align with users’ intent or contexts. To get started with vector search, you first build
search index configurations from existing unstructured data.
Enhance Your AI and Automation Strategies with Unstructured Data in Data Cloud
Connect your unstructured data—such as chat transcripts, audio files, emails, or Salesforce Knowledge articles—to drive personalized,
customer-centric results in your Einstein generative AI (Prompt Builder and Einstein Copilot), automation (Flow Builder), and analytics
(Tableau) applications.
Using your unstructured data, you can enhance service reply recommendations by generating responses to customers using Knowledge
Article data or create prompt templates that use prior emails to generate personalized messages. Or use Flow Builder and Einstein Copilot
192
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Import data from the Adobe Marketo Engage connector to
Data Cloud
to show service agents similar case data to help in case resolution or when they log new cases. You can connect unstructured data from
Amazon S3, Google Cloud Platform, Microsoft Azure Blob Storage, or any existing connector in Data Cloud.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
How: In Data Cloud, create an unstructured data lake object. Map the UDLO to an unstructured data model object. You can also ingest
unstructured data through any existing connector into a data lake object (DLO).
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Unstructured Data in Data Cloud (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Connect Unstructured Data in Data Cloud (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Use Vector Search in Generative AI, Automation, and Analytics Tools

With unstructured data and vector search, you can ground your generative AI, automation, and analytics tools with relevant,
customer-specific data to deliver results that align with users’ intent or contexts. To get started with vector search, you first build search
index configurations from existing unstructured data.
How: Search index configurations break unstructured data into chunks to prepare it for vector search. Vector embeddings are then
generated from those chunks. The vectorized content, stored in the Data Cloud search index, is searchable from and can be used in
Einstein gen AI applications (Prompt Builder and Einstein Copilot), as well as automation (Flow Builder) and analytics (Tableau) applications.
From Data Cloud, go to the Search Index page and create a search index configuration using either Easy Setup or Advanced Setup.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Use Search to Ground AI(can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Create Search Index Configurations in Data Cloud(can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Import data from the Adobe Marketo Engage connector to Data Cloud
Use the Adobe Marketo Engage Connector to import campaigns, leads, and lead activities data from Adobe Marketo.
Where: Where: This change applies to Data Cloud in Developer, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
When: This feature is generally available in June 2024.
Experience Faster Salesforce CRM Connector Refreshes

With the support of stream processing, data stream deployment and change events are optimized to process data with minimal latency.
Stream processing is available for standard objects, such as Account, Contact, Lead, and Opportunity, and all custom objects.
When: This functionality is available starting in June 2024.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Data Stream Schedule in Data Cloud
193
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Cross Cloud Updates for Data Cloud

Our latest round of cross-cloud features for Data Cloud.
New and Changed Features
• Data Cloud and Apex:
– Use SOQL in Apex with Data Cloud Objects
– Consider Field- and Record-Level Access When Using Apex With Data Cloud Objects
– Mock SOQL Tests for Data Cloud Objects
• Data Cloud with Commerce: Commerce Intelligence

• Data Cloud and Einstein Search: Improve Search with Insights from Search Analytics (Pilot)
• Data Cloud and Industries:
– Data Cloud and Automotive Cloud: Data Cloud for Automotive Experiences on page 313
– Data Cloud and Consumer Goods: Consolidate Your Customer Data with Data Cloud for Consumer Goods
– Data Cloud and Data Processing Engine: Data Processing Engine
– Data Cloud and Financial Services Cloud: Data Cloud for Financial Services Cloud
– Data Cloud and List Builder: List Builder for Data Cloud Segment
– Data Cloud and Loyalty Management: Control Who Can Create Promotions with Ease
– Data Cloud and Manufacturing Cloud: Data Cloud Features for Manufacturing Cloud
• Data Cloud and Marketing Cloud: Other Changes in Marketing Cloud Growth
• Data Cloud with Salesforce Flow: Run Tests for Data Cloud-Triggered Flows
• Data Cloud with Service Cloud:
– Service Intelligence
– Field Service Intelligence
• Data Cloud Enrichments: Data Cloud Related List Enrichments Now Support Accounts
• Data Cloud Enrichments: Enrich Most Objects in Your Org With Data Cloud Data
• Data Cloud Reports and Dashboards: Data Cloud Reports and Dashboards
• New and Changed Data Model Objects (DMOs): New and Changed Data Model Objects
Deployment
IN THIS SECTION:
New and Changed Components for Change Sets
The components available for a change set vary by edition.
New and Changed Components for Change Sets

The components available for a change set vary by edition.
194
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Development
EnablementProgramDefinition and EnablementMeasureDefinition

Retrieve Enablement programs and measures from a sandbox and deploy them to production.
Development
IN THIS SECTION:
Salesforce is modifying internal implementations of components and styles to prepare for SLDS architecture updates. LWC API
version 61.0 provides ElementInternals Web API support and several bug fixes. Support for third-party web components is
still in beta, and open mode now gives you access to the shadowRoot object. You can also navigate to a URL-addressable
component and use the Utility Bar API in LWC.
Visualforce
Check whether you’re affected when all unmanaged Visualforce pages are served on the force.com domain. To check if the new
default behavior of the <apex:sectionHeader> component affects your orgs, review the uses of markup in the component’s
description attribute.
Apex
Use new Apex cursors to break up the processing of a SOQL query result into pieces that can be processed within the bounds of a
single transaction. Formula evaluation in Apex is now in beta. Use SOQL in Apex and mock SOQL tests for Data Cloud objects.
Understand security considerations when using Apex with Data Cloud objects. Apex now supports SOQL relationship queries that
traverse up to five levels of parent-child records. Track Apex scheduled job limits, edit jobs, and view enhanced job details on the
All Scheduled Jobs page in Setup. Instance methods in a subclass don’t override private methods with the same signature. Monitor
limits and cumulative run time for setup methods using ApexTestResult. See enhanced error messages on deleting a class, improved
logging when FOR UPDATE locks are released, and information on org, user, and My Domain names in Apex exception emails.
API
Update records using external IDs and interact with an improved OpenAPI spec sObjects REST API. The previously announced
retirement of API versions 21.0 through 30.0 of the Salesforce Platform API is delayed until Summer ’25.
Packaging
Packaging facilitates the development and distribution of business apps. Use second-generation managed packages to create apps
to sell and distribute on AppExchange. Use unlocked packages to develop internal business apps.
Development environments are full-featured Salesforce environments that you use to develop and test existing or new features and
custom applications. They include Developer Edition orgs, sandboxes, and scratch orgs.
Build applications collaboratively and deliver continuously with Salesforce Developer Experience (DX), the open and integrated
experience for custom app development on Salesforce.
Heroku
Use Heroku to build, deliver, monitor, and scale innovative apps fast. Build them using popular programming languages and
frameworks without having to maintain the infrastructure.
Salesforce Functions is retiring on January 31, 2025. Learn about the retirement plan for Salesforce Functions.
195
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Lightning Components
Change Data Capture

Receive change events for more objects.
Platform Events
Add real-time Event Monitoring events to a custom channel. Learn about planned feature retirements for standard-volume platform
events and some Streaming API versions.
Event Bus
Manage your Pub/Sub API event subscriptions. Use real-time event monitoring events with event relays.
New and Changed Items for Developers
Here is where you can find new and changed objects, calls, classes, components, commands, and more that help you customize
Salesforce features.
Salesforce is modifying internal implementations of components and styles to prepare for SLDS architecture updates. LWC API version
61.0 provides ElementInternals Web API support and several bug fixes. Support for third-party web components is still in beta,
and open mode now gives you access to the shadowRoot object. You can also navigate to a URL-addressable component and use
the Utility Bar API in LWC.
Note: Looking for new and changed Lightning web components, Aura components, and Aura component interfaces? See the
lists of new and changed items at the end of the Development section.
IN THIS SECTION:
LWC API version 61.0 provides a new feature and several bug fixes. By versioning your custom Lightning web components, we can
ship new features, bug fixes, and performance improvements. Versioning also helps us deprecate legacy features. API versioning on
a custom component guarantees that the LWC framework behaves as it did for the Salesforce release that corresponds to the specified
API version for that component.
Use Third-Party Web Components in LWC (Beta)
Open mode now gives you access to the shadowRoot object. Using third-party web components in LWC continues to be available
in beta.
Navigate to a URL-Addressable Lightning Web Component
Make your component available via a URL using the lightning__UrlAddressable target. To create a URL addressable
component, you no longer have to embed your Lightning web component in an Aura component.
To control a utility within a utility bar, use the Utility Bar API methods from a Lightning web component.
Salesforce is modifying internal implementations of our own Lightning components, Salesforce Lightning Design System (SLDS)
styles, and custom properties to support future UI changes. These internal changes won’t cause visible UI changes for most customers.
If you customize your components or sites using supported techniques, we expect these changes to have little to no impact on your
customizations. However, if your components use unsupported customizations, we recommend that you update them to use
supported techniques to prevent visual regressions.
Be Aware of Base Lightning Component Internal DOM Structure Changes for Future Native Shadow Support
Salesforce is preparing the base Lightning components to adopt native shadow DOM to enhance performance and comply with
Web Components standards. These updates change the internal DOM structure. Ensure that your tests don’t rely on the previous
internal structure of these components.
196
Class and Style Attributes Render with Extra Whitespaces

More components render with extra whitespaces in the class and style attributes. In Spring ’23, we announced an improved
rendering time for your Lightning web components as a result of an optimization on how the framework handles static elements.
That change influenced how the class and style attributes of your static nodes are rendered in the DOM. Extra whitespaces
or unexpected characters sometimes appear in values for those attributes.
Starting in Spring ’22, Salesforce began enabling Lightning Web Security (LWS) in some customer orgs. To minimize disruption for
customers with highly customized environments, we’re postponing automatic enablement until further notice. If LWS isn’t enabled
yet in your org, we encourage you to enable it in a sandbox environment to test your components running in LWS.
Lightning Web Security includes new security protections with additional distortions for web APIs. ESLint rules matching the distortions
are also available. In addition, some distortions have changed and one was removed.
SEE ALSO:
Lightning Web Components Developer Guide
Lightning Aura Components Developer Guide
LWC API version 61.0 provides a new feature and several bug fixes. By versioning your custom Lightning web components, we can ship
new features, bug fixes, and performance improvements. Versioning also helps us deprecate legacy features. API versioning on a custom
component guarantees that the LWC framework behaves as it did for the Salesforce release that corresponds to the specified API version
for that component.
Where: This change applies to custom Lightning web components in Lightning Experience, Experience Builder sites, and all versions
of the Salesforce mobile app.
How: To specify an API version, use the apiVersion key in the .js-meta.xml file for the component.
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<LightningComponentBundle xmlns="http://soap.sforce.com/2006/04/metadata">
<apiVersion>58.0</apiVersion>
</LightningComponentBundle>
Setting the apiVersion key to 58.0 ensures that the custom component continues to behave as it did in Summer ’23. However, by
setting the API version to 58.0, you don’t get the new features, bug fixes, and enhancements that are available only with LWC API version
59.0 and later.
Starting in Winter ’24, all LWC API versions of 58.0 and earlier are treated as version 58.0 (Summer ’23). These components continue to
work based on LWC framework behavior in Summer ’23.
Important: To receive the latest fixes and enhancements in your component, we recommend that you upgrade your component
API version one version at a time. For example, from 58.0, upgrade from 58.0 to 59.0, fix any errors or warnings you encounter, and
then repeat until you get to the latest API version.
LWC API version 61.0 corresponds to v6.0.0 in LWC open source (OSS). LWC developers who use LWC outside of the Salesforce platform
are impacted by additional breaking changes. See LWC OSS v6.0.0.
197
IN THIS SECTION:
Update Your Light DOM Components for Improved Slot Forwarding
In LWC API version 61.0 and later, you have to configure the slot attribute for light DOM <slot> elements that forward content
into a shadow DOM <slot>. Also, when you pass a component into a light DOM <slot>, LWC removes the component’s slot
attribute so it doesn’t render in the DOM. These changes impact Jest snapshots, so we recommend you review and update your
tests. Earlier versions of LWC required you to create an HTML wrapper instead of the slot attribute for slot forwarding.
SEE ALSO:
Lightning Web Components Developer Guide: API Versioning (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Update Your Light DOM Components for Improved Slot Forwarding

In LWC API version 61.0 and later, you have to configure the slot attribute for light DOM <slot> elements that forward content
into a shadow DOM <slot>. Also, when you pass a component into a light DOM <slot>, LWC removes the component’s slot
attribute so it doesn’t render in the DOM. These changes impact Jest snapshots, so we recommend you review and update your tests.
Earlier versions of LWC required you to create an HTML wrapper instead of the slot attribute for slot forwarding.
of the Salesforce mobile app. This change also applies to Lightning web components in open source.
How: For example, if you want the light DOM namedSlot slot to pass this <span> element into the forwardedSlot slot,
namedSlot has to have the property slot="forwardedSlot".


<template>
<c-outer>
<span slot="namedSlot">Named slot content</span> // Content to pass from namedSlot
into forwardedSlot
</c-outer>
</template>


<template lwc:render-mode="light">
<c-inner>
<slot name="namedSlot" slot="forwardedSlot"></slot> // The namedSlot slot
</c-inner>
</template>


<template>
<slot name="forwardedSlot"></slot> // The forwardedSlot slot
</template>
In the latest version of LWC, native and synthetic shadow slots still preserve the slot attribute. So, the inner component renders
in the DOM with slot="namedSlot".
<c-outer>
<c-inner>
<span slot="namedSlot">Named slot content</span>
</c-inner>
</c-outer>
198
However, if you pass a component into a named light DOM slot, LWC removes the slot attribute from the slotted content. In this
example, the template passes the div element into the named slot.
<template>
<c-light-child>
<div slot='lightSlot'>Slotted content</div>
</c-light-child>
</template>


<template render:mode="light">
<slot name="lightSlot"></slot>
</template>
c-light-child renders in the template without the slot attribute.
<c-light-child>
<div>Slotted content</div>
</c-light-child>
If your CSS selectors or querySelector() methods reference the slot attribute, choose a different CSS selector or
use lwc:ref instead.

const foo = this.querySelector('[slot="foo"]');


<c-child>
<div slot="foo" lwc:ref="foo">hello</div>
</c-child>
SEE ALSO:
Lightning Web Components Developer Guide: slot Attribute for Light DOM Elements (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Lightning Web Components Developer Guide: API Versioning
Use Third-Party Web Components in LWC (Beta)

Open mode now gives you access to the shadowRoot object. Using third-party web components in LWC continues to be available
in beta.
of the Salesforce mobile app.
How: Many third-party web components require an open shadow root, so they can call appendChild, adoptedStyleSheets,
and other web APIs. For example, they can append HTML tags like <div> and <style> or share a stylesheet with a shadow root.
To create a shadow root, a custom element uses the attachShadow() web API method in the constructor.
199
Previously, Lightning Web Security changed open mode to closed mode automatically. In closed mode, JavaScript access to the shadow
DOM tree is blocked, and shadowRoot returns null.
SEE ALSO:
MDN web docs: Using custom elements
Lightning Web Components Developer Guide: Use Third-Party Web Components in LWC (Beta) (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)
Navigate to a URL-Addressable Lightning Web Component

Make your component available via a URL using the lightning__UrlAddressable target. To create a URL addressable
component, you no longer have to embed your Lightning web component in an Aura component.
Where: This change applies to custom Lightning web components in Lightning Experience and all versions of the Salesforce mobile
app. This change also applies to Lightning console apps in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions. This change isn't
available in Experience Builder sites because it interferes with custom domain and CDN support.
How: To generate a URL for your Lightning web component and make it available via a URL, include the
lightning__UrlAddressable target in your component’s .js-meta.xml configuration file. Set the <isExposed>
tag to true. The <apiVersion> tag has no impact on this feature and can be set to an earlier or later version.

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" ?>
<LightningComponentBundle xmlns="http://soap.sforce.com/2006/04/metadata">
<apiVersion>59.0</apiVersion>
<isExposed>true</isExposed>
<targets>
<target>lightning__UrlAddressable</target>
</targets>
</LightningComponentBundle>
To navigate to the custom component, use the lightning/navigation module with the standard__component page
reference type.
// navToComponentWithState.js
import { LightningElement } from 'lwc';
import { NavigationMixin } from 'lightning/navigation';
export default class NavToComponentWithState extends NavigationMixin(LightningElement) {

navigateToComponent() {
this[NavigationMixin.Navigate]({
// Pass in pageReference
type: 'standard__component',
attributes: {
componentName: 'c__myComponent',
},
state: {
c__propertyValue: '2000',
},
});
}
}
The standard__component page reference type has this attribute.
200
• componentName—The Lightning web component name in the format namespace__componentName.

You can pass any key and value in the state object. The key must include a namespace, and the value must be a string. If you don’t
have a registered namespace, add the default c__ namespace.
In your URL addressable component, myComponent, use a getter to return the property value from the state object.
// myComponent.js
import { LightningElement, wire, api } from 'lwc';
import { CurrentPageReference } from 'lightning/navigation';
export default class MyComponent extends LightningElement {

@wire(CurrentPageReference)
currentPageRef;
@api propertyValue;
get propertyValue() {
return this.currentPageRef.state.c__propertyValue;
}
}
A component with the lightning__UrlAddressable target has a URL with the format
/lightning/cmp/c__MyComponent?c__mystate=value.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Console Developer Guide: Using Page References to Open Console Workspace Tabs and Subtabs
Lightning Web Components Developer Guide: Navigate to a URL Addressable Component (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)

To control a utility within a utility bar, use the Utility Bar API methods from a Lightning web component.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer
editions. Lightning console apps are available for an extra cost to users with Salesforce Platform user licenses for certain products. Some
restrictions apply. For pricing details, contact your Salesforce account executive.
How: To access the LWC Utility Bar API methods and wire adapter, import the lightning/platformUtilityBarApi module.
This module is supported for use with Lightning Locker and Lightning Web Service.
To make your component available for use in the utility bar, include the lightning__UtilityBar target in your component’s
.js-meta.xml configuration file.
These Utility Bar API methods for LWC are available for Lightning console apps.
• enableModal()—Toggles modal mode for a utility.
• enablePopout()—Toggles pop-out mode on a utility.
• getAllUtilityInfo()—Returns the state of all utilities.
• getInfo()—Returns the state of the current utility.
• minimize()—Minimizes a utility.
• onUtilityClick()—Registers an event handler for the utility.
• open()—Opens a utility or minimizes a utility if it’s already open.
201
• updatePanel()—Specifies a label and icon on the utility panel, and provides a height and width for the panel.
• updateUtility()—Specifies a label and icon on the utility bar, and sets a utility as highlighted.
The EnclosingUtilityId() wire adapter is available for Lightning console apps. It returns the ID of the enclosing utility.
To retrieve the record context from a component in a utility, use the CurrentPageReference wire adapter.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Console Developer Guide
New and Changed Modules for Lightning Web Components

Salesforce is modifying internal implementations of our own Lightning components, Salesforce Lightning Design System (SLDS) styles,
and custom properties to support future UI changes. These internal changes won’t cause visible UI changes for most customers. If you
customize your components or sites using supported techniques, we expect these changes to have little to no impact on your
customizations. However, if your components use unsupported customizations, we recommend that you update them to use supported
techniques to prevent visual regressions.
Where: These changes apply to Lightning Experience, Experience Cloud sites, and all versions of the Salesforce mobile app in all editions.
Why: At Salesforce, we’re constantly improving our UI architecture and planning for the future. For this reason, Salesforce can at any
point change the internal implementation of UI components. Starting in the Summer ’24 release, we’re changing the internals of some
UI components, which can change the rendered DOM. Don’t modify the DOM elements of Salesforce components via CSS or JavaScript
or target SLDS classes in unit tests. See Salesforce Component Internals Are Protected.
If you customize Lightning pages or Experience Cloud sites by targeting Salesforce components and CSS styles that change with the
architecture updates, some visual regressions are possible. Visual regressions can range from a UI component displaying a slightly
different color to layout changes in your UI.
How: For information about supported and unsupported customization techniques, and how to update your customizations, see the
SLDS Architecture Updates FAQ.
Be Aware of Base Lightning Component Internal DOM Structure Changes for Future
Native Shadow Support
Salesforce is preparing the base Lightning components to adopt native shadow DOM to enhance performance and comply with Web
Components standards. These updates change the internal DOM structure. Ensure that your tests don’t rely on the previous internal
structure of these components.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and all versions of the mobile app in all editions.
Why: Salesforce works continuously to align the base Lightning components with web standards. This newest effort is part of our process
for Lightning Web Components to support native shadow DOM in a future release (safe harbor). Since the Spring ‘23 release, 62
components have been adapted to prepare for native shadow DOM, as we announced in the Spring ’24 release notes.
In Summer ’24, these additional components have been adapted to prepare for native shadow DOM.
• lightning-button
• lightning-file-upload
• lightning-formatted-name
• lightning-formatted-number
• lightning-navigation
202
• lightning-progress-bar
• lightning-progress-ring
• lightning-select
• lightning-textarea
Salesforce documented that the internal component structure is protected. Salesforce may at any time redesign the internals of our
components to improve performance, enhance functionality, and support accessibility. See Anti-Patterns for Styling Components.
Important: If your tests rely on this protected internal DOM structure, rewrite your tests as soon as possible.
How:
To ensure that your tests are ready for the internal DOM structure changes, review your integration tests and selenium-based tests.
Additionally, make sure that your component CSS follows best practices.For supported integration tests, use the UI Test Automation
Model (UTAM) and UTAM Page Objects, which stay up to date with changes in component structure. For supported Selenium-based
tests, see Working With Shadow DOM Elements Using Webdriver. For supported CSS styling, see Style Components with Lightning
Design System in the Lightning Web Components Developer Guide.
Class and Style Attributes Render with Extra Whitespaces

More components render with extra whitespaces in the class and style attributes. In Spring ’23, we announced an improved
rendering time for your Lightning web components as a result of an optimization on how the framework handles static elements. That
change influenced how the class and style attributes of your static nodes are rendered in the DOM. Extra whitespaces or unexpected
characters sometimes appear in values for those attributes.
of the Salesforce mobile app. This change also applies to Lightning web components open source.
How: An element with class values can render with an extra space. For example, consider this element with the highlight and
yellow class values.
<div class=" highlight yellow">
We recommend updating code that uses style or class attributes. Previously, you could query elements with an exact class name.
// Don’t do this
document.querySelector('[class="highlight yellow"]')
Revise the query to use a selector that ignores whitespace changes.

// Do this instead
document.querySelector('.highlight.yellow')
SEE ALSO:
Lightning Web Components Developer Guide: Anti-Patterns for Styling Components

Starting in Spring ’22, Salesforce began enabling Lightning Web Security (LWS) in some customer orgs. To minimize disruption for
customers with highly customized environments, we’re postponing automatic enablement until further notice. If LWS isn’t enabled yet
in your org, we encourage you to enable it in a sandbox environment to test your components running in LWS.
203
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Visualforce
SEE ALSO:
Lightning Web Components Developer Guide: Lightning Web Security
Lightning Web Components Developer Guide: Workflow to Try Your LWCs in Lightning Web Security
Lightning Web Security FAQ

Lightning Web Security includes new security protections with additional distortions for web APIs. ESLint rules matching the distortions
are also available. In addition, some distortions have changed and one was removed.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in all editions, LWR-based Experience Cloud sites, and Lightning web components
in Aura sites when LWS is enabled.
How: These APIs have new distortions documented in the LWS Distortion Viewer. Corresponding ESLint rules are included in the ESLint
package.
• Window.requestFileSystem
• Window.webkitRequestFileSystem
These distortions changed.
• CustomElementRegistry.prototype.define
• Element.prototype.attachShadow
• Element.prototype.shadowRoot getter
• HTMLIFrameElement.prototype.src setter
• HTMLObjectElement.prototype.data setter
This distortion and associated ESLint rule was removed.
• ShadowRoot.prototype.mode getter
Visualforce
Check whether you’re affected when all unmanaged Visualforce pages are served on the force.com domain. To check if the new default
behavior of the <apex:sectionHeader> component affects your orgs, review the uses of markup in the component’s
description attribute.
IN THIS SECTION:
Update References to Visualforce Pages Served on Salesforce.com
If your unmanaged Visualforce pages are served on the salesforce.com domain, update hard-coded references, links, bookmarks,
and external integrations to those pages. To ensure continued access when browsers block third-party cookies, all Visualforce pages
are served on the force.com domain or a site domain.
The new behavior of the description attribute makes the Visualforce <apex:sectionHeader> component secure by
default. Only commonly used, secure HTML elements are evaluated in the description attribute’s output. Previously, all markup
characters were evaluated. Now Visualforce pages, templates, and other components that contain <apex:sectionHeader>
components are protected against cross-site scripting (XSS) attacks. The component also has a new escape attribute so that
customers can override the default behavior if desired.
204
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Visualforce
Update References to Visualforce Pages Served on Salesforce.com

If your unmanaged Visualforce pages are served on the salesforce.com domain, update hard-coded references, links, bookmarks, and
external integrations to those pages. To ensure continued access when browsers block third-party cookies, all Visualforce pages are
served on the force.com domain or a site domain.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Contact Manager, Group, Professional, Enterprise,
Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: To determine whether this change applies to you and to make the required updates, see the knowledge article Ensure Access to
Your Visualforce Pages in Summer ’24 and Winter ’25.

The new behavior of the description attribute makes the Visualforce <apex:sectionHeader> component secure by default.
Only commonly used, secure HTML elements are evaluated in the description attribute’s output. Previously, all markup characters
were evaluated. Now Visualforce pages, templates, and other components that contain <apex:sectionHeader> components
are protected against cross-site scripting (XSS) attacks. The component also has a new escape attribute so that customers can override
the default behavior if desired.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs), and all versions of the Salesforce mobile
app in all editions.
How: To secure Visualforce pages with <apex:sectionHeader> components, no action is required. To make sure that your users
see the correct output, audit your implementation for uses of markup in the component's description attribute. Then set the
corresponding escape attribute to one of the three behaviors.
• When the escape attribute isn’t set, the description attribute allows commonly used, secure HTML elements. Uncommon
HTML elements, insecure attributes, and all JavaScript are removed. We recommend that you remove any unsupported markup
from the description attribute. Users can’t see unsupported HTML elements, and extraneous markup characters render as
plain text.
• When the escape attribute is set to true, all markup contained in the component’s description attribute is escaped. We
recommend that you remove all markup from the description attribute. Otherwise, users can see these characters rendered
as plain text.
• When the escape attribute is set to false, all markup contained in the component’s description attribute is evaluated.
Warning: Setting the escape attribute’s value to false makes pages that contain <apex:sectionHeader>
vulnerable to XSS attacks.
With a new User Interface setting, you can optionally set the default escape value of all <apex:sectionHeader> components
in your org to false. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter User Interface, and then select User Interface. Select Set the
default value of the escape attribute in <apex:sectionHeader> components to false, and then save your changes. To override
this behavior on an individual <apex:sectionHeader> component, manually set the escape attribute.
Warning: Selecting this setting makes pages containing <apex:sectionHeader> vulnerable to XSS attacks. We recommend
that you keep this setting unselected.
205
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Apex
We recommend that Independent Software Vendors (ISVs) explicitly set the escape attribute of any <apex:sectionHeader>
components used. Setting the escape attribute overrides the default behavior that the subscriber org configures, so
<apex:sectionHeader> retains the expected behavior in all subscriber orgs.
SEE ALSO:
Knowledge Article: The Description Attribute of the Visualforce Section Header Component Doesn’t Render Some HTML Elements
Visualforce Developer Guide: Unescaped Output and Formulas in Visualforce Pages
Visualforce Developer Guide: apex:sectionHeader
Apex
Use new Apex cursors to break up the processing of a SOQL query result into pieces that can be processed within the bounds of a single
transaction. Formula evaluation in Apex is now in beta. Use SOQL in Apex and mock SOQL tests for Data Cloud objects. Understand
security considerations when using Apex with Data Cloud objects. Apex now supports SOQL relationship queries that traverse up to five
levels of parent-child records. Track Apex scheduled job limits, edit jobs, and view enhanced job details on the All Scheduled Jobs page
in Setup. Instance methods in a subclass don’t override private methods with the same signature. Monitor limits and cumulative run
time for setup methods using ApexTestResult. See enhanced error messages on deleting a class, improved logging when FOR UPDATE
locks are released, and information on org, user, and My Domain names in Apex exception emails.
For more information on these enhancements, see the Apex Developer Guide and the Apex Reference Guide.
IN THIS SECTION:
Use Cursors for Expanded SOQL Query Result Support (Beta)
With Apex cursors, you can break up the processing of a SOQL query result into pieces that can be processed within the bounds of
a single transaction. Cursors provide you with the ability to work with large query result sets, while not actually returning the entire
result set. You can traverse a query result in parts, with the flexibility to navigate forward and back in the result set. Package developers
and advanced developers can use cursors effectively to work with high-volume and high-resource processing jobs. Cursors are an
alternative to batch Apex and address some of batch Apex’s limitations. Cursors are also more powerful because they can be used
in a chain of queueable Apex jobs.
Dynamic formulas in Apex now support using an Sobject as the context object. Use the new Formula.builder() method
to create an instance of the FormulaBuilder to configure the formula. Get a list of the field names as referenced in a formula
using the getReferencedFields() method. Formula evaluation in Apex is bound by the character limit, but not the compile
size limit.
Use SOQL in Apex with Data Cloud Objects
Static SOQL is now supported with Data Cloud data model objects (DMOs) as a more direct alternative to using either dynamic SOQL
or ConnectAPI. Additionally, SOQL using Apex Database.QueryLocator or in FOR loops is supported in API version 61.0
and later. In versions earlier than 61.0, only the first 201 records are returned. Batch Apex is currently blocked against DMOs when
using QueryLocators, but is supported when using Iterable.
Consider Field- and Record-Level Access When Using Apex With Data Cloud Objects
Data Cloud data model objects (DMOs) in all data spaces are accessible from Apex in system mode, even when a permission set for
the data space isn’t explicitly assigned. Read-only object-level access checks are supported if the user has access to the data
space. There’s currently no support for field-level security or for record-level access control. Apex features, such as WITH USER_MODE,
WITH SECURITY_ENFORCED, describe calls, and Security.stripInaccessible(), can check only object-level access
for DMOs.
206

Mock SOQL query responses for Data Cloud data model objects (DMOs) in Apex testing by using the new SOQL stub methods and
a new test class. Use static or dynamic SOQL queries against DMOs and return mock records in a testing context.
Support for Five-Level Parent-to-Child Relationship SOQL Queries in Apex
Apex now supports SOQL relationship queries that traverse up to five levels of parent-child records. Each parent-child relationship
subquery counts towards the number of aggregate queries processed in an SOQL query statement.
Make Invocable Actions Easier to Configure with New InvocableVariable Modifiers
Set a default value for an input parameter by using the new defaultValue modifier. Set custom placeholder text for an input
parameter and provide examples or additional guidance by using the placeholderText modifier. The defaultValue
and placeholderText modifiers appear in Flow Builder for the Action elements that correspond to an invocable method.
IdeaExchange Delivered: Monitor Apex Scheduled Jobs More Efficiently
Mitigate potential limit problems before they happen by tracking the percentage of the scheduled jobs used. You can now schedule
Apex jobs from the All Scheduled Jobs page and manage jobs that are scheduled using a cron expression. You can also view the ID
of the CronTrigger object associated with scheduled jobs in the details list. We delivered this feature thanks to your ideas on
IdeaExchange.
Update the API Version of Abstract or Virtual Classes to Prevent Overriding Private Methods
In API version 61.0 and later, private methods are no longer overridden by an instance method with the same signature in a subclass.
This change is versioned, so to prevent the override, update your abstract or virtual classes that contain private methods to API
version 61.0 or later. In API version 60.0 and earlier, if a subclass declares an instance method with the same signature as a private
method in one of its superclasses, the private method is overridden by the method in the subclass.
IdeaExchange Delivered: Monitor Setup Methods Using ApexTestResult
ApexTestResult rows are now generated for Apex tests run with the @testSetup annotation. A new IsTestSetup
column is set to true for these annotated tests to distinguish them from other test methods. Also, a new TestSetupTime
column on ApexTestRunResult tracks the cumulative time of all setup methods for the given ApexTestRunResult,
similar to how TestTime tracks the cumulative time of all its test methods. Previously, information about limits and cumulative
run time was available only by parsing the appropriate method sections in the debug log. We delivered this feature thanks to your
View CronTrigger and Batch Job IDs in Improved Error Messages with Scheduled and Batch Apex
You can now see CronTrigger and batch job IDs in error messages generated when you delete a class in use by a scheduled or batch
job. If you try to uninstall a package containing a class that’s in use by a batch job, the error message also includes the Apex batch
job ID. The error message lists up to five IDs. Also, if you modify a class that’s being used by a batch job, the error message includes
the AsyncApexJob ID.
Ensure More Secure Compilation of Apex Classes
Run the Compile all classes option on the Apex Classes page in Setup to achieve more reliable compilation. Compiling all classes
from Setup now produces consistent compilation output as compared with other compilation mechanisms, such as metadata
deployment or on-demand compilation.
See Improved Logging When FOR UPDATE Locks Are Released
Record locks that are obtained in Apex using FOR UPDATE are released automatically when you roll back to a savepoint that's set
using the Database.setSavePoint() method. The information is now logged in the debug log, and the logged database
category message includes the most recently locked entity type. For example: FOR_UPDATE_LOCKS_RELEASE | FOR
UPDATE locks released due to a savepoint rollback. The most recent lock was Account.
207
Resolve Unhandled Exceptions Faster with Additional Information in Apex Exception Emails
When your Apex code encounters unhandled exceptions, Apex exception emails now include the org name, user name, and My
Domain name where the exception occurred. You can use these additional details to resolve the exception faster and improve the
performance of your Apex code. Previously, the email included only the Apex stack trace, exception message, and the customer’s
org and user ID.
See Improved Behavior with Custom Exceptions
In API version 61.0 and later, the overridden equals() and hashcode() methods are correctly handled for custom exceptions.
This behavior is versioned. In API 60.0 and earlier, these methods aren’t called in some cases where exceptions are used, such as in
Sets and Maps, or on an object reference of a custom exception instance.
Support for Standard Fields in the getRelationshipOrder Method
When you call the DescribeFieldResult.getRelationshipOrder method for a standard field, it now returns 0 if
the field is the primary relationship field or 1 if the field is the secondary relationship field. This behavior is versioned. In API 60.0 and
earlier, this method always returned null for a standard field.
SEE ALSO:
Use Cursors for Expanded SOQL Query Result Support (Beta)

With Apex cursors, you can break up the processing of a SOQL query result into pieces that can be processed within the bounds of a
single transaction. Cursors provide you with the ability to work with large query result sets, while not actually returning the entire result
set. You can traverse a query result in parts, with the flexibility to navigate forward and back in the result set. Package developers and
advanced developers can use cursors effectively to work with high-volume and high-resource processing jobs. Cursors are an alternative
to batch Apex and address some of batch Apex’s limitations. Cursors are also more powerful because they can be used in a chain of
queueable Apex jobs.
Where: This change applies to all editions.
is subject to the applicable Beta Services Terms provided at Agreements and Terms. You can provide feedback and suggestions
for the feature in the Trailblazer Community.
How: Apex cursors are stateless and generate results from the offset that is specified in the Cursor.fetch(integer position,
integer count) method. You must track the offsets or positions of the results within your particular processing scenario.
A cursor is created when a SOQL query is executed on a Database.getCursor() or Database.getCursorWithBinds()
call. When a Cursor.fetch(integer position, integer count) method is invoked with an offset position and the
count of records to fetch, the corresponding rows are returned from the cursor. The maximum number of rows per cursor is 50 million,
regardless of the operation being synchronous or asynchronous. To get the number of cursor rows returned from the SOQL query, use
Cursor.getNumRecords().
Apex cursors throw these new System exceptions: System.FatalCursorException and
System.TransientCursorException. Transactions that fail with System.TransientCursorException can be
retried.
Apex cursors have the same expiration limits as API Query cursors.
To get Apex cursor limits, use these new methods in the Limits class.
• Limits.getApexCursorRows() and its upper bound Limits.getLimitApexCursorRows() method
• Limits.getFetchCallsOnApexCursor() and its upper bound
Limits.getLimitFetchCallsOnApexCursor() method
208
These Apex governor limits have been updated with this feature.
• Maximum number of rows per cursor: 50 million (both synchronous and asynchronous)
• Maximum number of fetch calls per transaction: 10 (both synchronous and asynchronous)
• Maximum number of cursors per day: 10,000 (both synchronous and asynchronous)
• Maximum number of rows per day (aggregate limit): 100 million
Example:
public class QueryChunkingQueuable implements Queueable {
private Database.Cursor locator;
private integer position;
public QueryChunkingQueuable() {
locator = Database.getCursor
('SELECT Id FROM Contact WHERE LastActivityDate = LAST_N_DAYS:400');
position = 0;
}
public void execute(QueueableContext ctx) {

List<Contact> scope = locator.fetch(position, 200);
position += scope.size();
// do something, like archive or delete the scope list records
if(position < locator.getNumRecords() ) {
// process the next chunk
System.enqueueJob(this);
}
}
}
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Developer Limits and Allocations Quick Reference: API Query Cursor Limits

Dynamic formulas in Apex now support using an Sobject as the context object. Use the new Formula.builder() method to
create an instance of the FormulaBuilder to configure the formula. Get a list of the field names as referenced in a formula using
the getReferencedFields() method. Formula evaluation in Apex is bound by the character limit, but not the compile size
limit.
is subject to the applicable Beta Services Terms provided at Agreements and Terms. You can provide feedback and suggestions
for the feature in the Trailblazer Community.
How: This example uses an SObject type as the context object in the withType() method to build and evaluate a formula.
FormulaEval.FormulaInstance likelyBuyer = Formula.builder()
.withType(Account.SObjectType)
209
.withReturnType(FormulaEval.FormulaReturnType.BOOLEAN)
.withFormula('AnnualRevenue > 10000 AND ISPICKVAL(Industry, "Biomechanical")');
SEE ALSO:
Apex Reference Guide: FormulaEval Namespace (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Use SOQL in Apex with Data Cloud Objects

Static SOQL is now supported with Data Cloud data model objects (DMOs) as a more direct alternative to using either dynamic SOQL
or ConnectAPI. Additionally, SOQL using Apex Database.QueryLocator or in FOR loops is supported in API version 61.0 and
later. In versions earlier than 61.0, only the first 201 records are returned. Batch Apex is currently blocked against DMOs when using
QueryLocators, but is supported when using Iterable.
How: This example uses static SOQL with the UnifiedIndividual__dlm Data Cloud object.
Warning: Running SOQL queries against DMOs can result in Data Services credits being consumed from your Data Cloud
subscription. For more information on how usage is billed, see Data Cloud Billable Usage Types. Use caution when using FOR loops,
query locators, recursion, or any mechanism that can result in multiple queries to Data Cloud.
//Static SOQL example
List<UnifiedIndividual__dlm> unifiedIndividuals = [
SELECT
Id,
ssot__FirstName__c,
ssot__LastName__c,
ssot__Email__c,
ssot__SkyMilesBalance__c,
ssot__MedallionStatus__c
FROM UnifiedIndividual__dlm
WHERE ssot__CompanyId__c = :companyId
];
Consider Field- and Record-Level Access When Using Apex With Data Cloud Objects
Data Cloud data model objects (DMOs) in all data spaces are accessible from Apex in system mode, even when a permission set for the
data space isn’t explicitly assigned. Read-only object-level access checks are supported if the user has access to the data space. There’s
currently no support for field-level security or for record-level access control. Apex features, such as WITH USER_MODE, WITH
SECURITY_ENFORCED, describe calls, and Security.stripInaccessible(), can check only object-level access for DMOs.
How: Starting with API version 61.0, you can get information on a specific DMO using SObjectType.getDescribe(). Currently,
there’s no field-level security to be enforced because all fields on DMOs that are accessed by field describes and security model checks
are read only. You also can’t use Schema.getGlobalDescribe() to discover exposed DMOs. Instead, use the
Schema.describeSObjects(List<String>) method with the known DMO API names.
210

Mock SOQL query responses for Data Cloud data model objects (DMOs) in Apex testing by using the new SOQL stub methods and a
new test class. Use static or dynamic SOQL queries against DMOs and return mock records in a testing context.
How: Create mock test classes by extending the new System.SoqlStubProvider class and overriding the
handleSoqlQuery() class method. Create DMO instances using either Test.createStubQueryRow() or
Test.createStubQueryRows(). Register the mock provider in the test using Test.createSoqlStub() and execute
the test code.
Note: Apex governor limits apply to the stubbed records.
The SOQL query must be against a DMO, either directly with a FROM clause or via a subquery. Also, these features are not allowed within
a stub implementation.
• SOQL
• SOSL
• Callouts
• Future methods
• Queueable jobs
• Batch jobs
• DML
• Platform Events
This example shows a mock test class for the SkyMilesForBusinessOptInController class.
@IsTest
public class SkyMilesForBusinessOptInController_Test {
@IsTest
public static void mockSoql() {
SoqlStubProvider stub = new UnifiedIndividualSoqlStub();

Test.createSoqlStub(UnifiedIndividualSoqlStub__dlm.sObjectType, stub);
Assert.isTrue(Test.isSoqlStubDefined(UnifiedIndividualSoqlStub__dlm.sObjectType));
Test.startTest();
string companyId = 'SampleCompanyId';
// Performs SOQL query against Data Model Object
List<SkyMilesMember> members =
SkyMilesForBusinessOptInController.getSkyMilesProfilesFromDataCloud(companyId);
Test.stopTest();
Assert.areEqual(1, members.size());
SkyMilesMember member = members[0];
Assert.areEqual(companyId, member.CompanyId);
Assert.areEqual(5000, member.SkyMilesBalance);
211
class UnifiedIndividualSoqlStub extends SoqlStubProvider {

public override List<sObject> handleSoqlQuery(sObjectType sot, string stubbedQuery,
Map<string, object> bindVars) {
Assert.areEqual(UnifiedIndividual__dlm.sObjectType, sot);
// Stub assumes that the SOQL query is searching for a single record by company
id
string companyId = 'Default';

if(bindVars.containsKey('tmpVar1')) {
companyId = (string)bindVars.get('tmpVar1');
}
UnifiedIndividual__dlm dmo = (UnifiedIndividual__dlm)Test.createStubQueryRow(
sot,
new Map<string, object> {
'ssot__FirstName__c' => 'Codey',
'ssot__LastName__c' => 'Bear',
'ssot__Email__c' => '[email protected]',
'ssot__SkyMilesBalance__c' => 5000,
'ssot__MedallionStatus__c' => 'Gold',
'ssot__CompanyId__c' => companyId
}
);
return new List<sObject> { dmo };
}
}
}
public with sharing class SkyMilesForBusinessOptInController {

public static List<SkyMilesMember> getSkyMilesProfilesFromDataCloud(String companyId)
{
List<UnifiedIndividual__dlm> unifiedIndividuals = [
SELECT
Id,
ssot__FirstName__c,
ssot__LastName__c,
ssot__Email__c,
ssot__SkyMilesBalance__c,
ssot__MedallionStatus__c,
ssot__CompanyId__c
FROM UnifiedIndividual__dlm
WHERE ssot__CompanyId__c = :companyId
];
List<SkyMilesMember> skyMilesMembers = new List<SkyMilesMember>();
for (UnifiedIndividual__dlm individual : unifiedIndividuals) {
skyMilesMembers.add(
new SkyMilesMember(
individual.Id,
212
individual.ssot__FirstName__c,
individual.ssot__LastName__c,
individual.ssot__Email__c,
individual.ssot__SkyMilesBalance__c,
individual.ssot__MedallionStatus__c,
individual.ssot__CompanyId__c
)
);
}
return skyMilesMembers;
}
}
SEE ALSO:
Apex Developer Guide: DataCloud (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Support for Five-Level Parent-to-Child Relationship SOQL Queries in Apex

Apex now supports SOQL relationship queries that traverse up to five levels of parent-child records. Each parent-child relationship
subquery counts towards the number of aggregate queries processed in an SOQL query statement.
How: In API version 61.0 and later, SOQL parent-child relationship queries in Apex can contain a parent root as the first level of the query
and child relationships up to four levels deep from the parent root. Track the number of aggregate queries processed in an SQL statement
with the Limits.getAggregateQueries() method. The Limits.getLimitAggregateQueries() method returns
a value of 300, which is the total number of aggregate queries that can be processed with SOQL query statements.
This example SOQL query statement includes five levels of parent-child relationships.
List<Account> accts =
[SELECT Name,
(SELECT LastName,
(SELECT AssetLevel,
(SELECT Description,
(SELECT LineItemNumber FROM WorkOrderLineItems)
FROM WorkOrders)
FROM Assets)
FROM Contacts)
FROM Account];

Set a default value for an input parameter by using the new defaultValue modifier. Set custom placeholder text for an input
parameter and provide examples or additional guidance by using the placeholderText modifier. The defaultValue and
placeholderText modifiers appear in Flow Builder for the Action elements that correspond to an invocable method.
213
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Performance, Unlimited, Developer, Enterprise, and
Database.com editions.
SEE ALSO:
Apex Developer Guide: InvocableVariable Annotation
Monitor Apex Scheduled Jobs More Efficiently

Mitigate potential limit problems before they happen by tracking the percentage of the scheduled jobs used. You can now schedule
Apex jobs from the All Scheduled Jobs page and manage jobs that are scheduled using a cron expression. You can also view the ID of
the CronTrigger object associated with scheduled jobs in the details list. We delivered this feature thanks to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Scheduled Jobs, and then select Scheduled Jobs. On the All Scheduled Jobs
page, view the current consumption stats for the scheduled jobs along with the allowed org limit.
SEE ALSO:
IdeaExchange: Apex Scheduler - Existing jobs need to be editable and show scheduling details
Salesforce Help: Monitoring Scheduled Jobs (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Schedule Apex Jobs (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Update the API Version of Abstract or Virtual Classes to Prevent Overriding Private
Methods
In API version 61.0 and later, private methods are no longer overridden by an instance method with the same signature in a subclass.
This change is versioned, so to prevent the override, update your abstract or virtual classes that contain private methods to API version
61.0 or later. In API version 60.0 and earlier, if a subclass declares an instance method with the same signature as a private method in
one of its superclasses, the private method is overridden by the method in the subclass.
Monitor Setup Methods Using ApexTestResult

ApexTestResult rows are now generated for Apex tests run with the @testSetup annotation. A new IsTestSetup column
is set to true for these annotated tests to distinguish them from other test methods. Also, a new TestSetupTime column on
ApexTestRunResult tracks the cumulative time of all setup methods for the given ApexTestRunResult, similar to how
TestTime tracks the cumulative time of all its test methods. Previously, information about limits and cumulative run time was available
only by parsing the appropriate method sections in the debug log. We delivered this feature thanks to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
How: ApexTestResult is updated by default for all setup methods. You can opt out in one of these ways.
• From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Apex Settings, and then select Do not create Apex test results for @TestSetup
methods.
214
• To disable this feature programmatically with Metadata API, use the enableTestSetupSkipTestResults option in
ApexSettings.
SEE ALSO:
IdeaExchange: Executing an Apex Test with @TestSetup annotation should generate ApexTestResult
Metadata API Developer Guide: ApexSettings (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
View CronTrigger and Batch Job IDs in Improved Error Messages with Scheduled and
Batch Apex
You can now see CronTrigger and batch job IDs in error messages generated when you delete a class in use by a scheduled or batch
job. If you try to uninstall a package containing a class that’s in use by a batch job, the error message also includes the Apex batch job
ID. The error message lists up to five IDs. Also, if you modify a class that’s being used by a batch job, the error message includes the
AsyncApexJob ID.
Ensure More Secure Compilation of Apex Classes

Run the Compile all classes option on the Apex Classes page in Setup to achieve more reliable compilation. Compiling all classes from
Setup now produces consistent compilation output as compared with other compilation mechanisms, such as metadata deployment
or on-demand compilation.
Why: Previously, in some scenarios the Compile all classes option could compile classes that reference Salesforce entities that your
organization doesn’t have access to. Attempts to compile Apex classes that contain such references now result in compilation errors,
such as Invalid Type: SomeEntity.
See Improved Logging When FOR UPDATE Locks Are Released

Record locks that are obtained in Apex using FOR UPDATE are released automatically when you roll back to a savepoint that's set using
the Database.setSavePoint() method. The information is now logged in the debug log, and the logged database category
message includes the most recently locked entity type. For example: FOR_UPDATE_LOCKS_RELEASE | FOR UPDATE locks
released due to a savepoint rollback. The most recent lock was Account.
Resolve Unhandled Exceptions Faster with Additional Information in Apex Exception

Emails
When your Apex code encounters unhandled exceptions, Apex exception emails now include the org name, user name, and My Domain
name where the exception occurred. You can use these additional details to resolve the exception faster and improve the performance
of your Apex code. Previously, the email included only the Apex stack trace, exception message, and the customer’s org and user ID.
SEE ALSO:
Apex Developer Guide: Unhandled Exception Emails (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
215
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes API
See Improved Behavior with Custom Exceptions

In API version 61.0 and later, the overridden equals() and hashcode() methods are correctly handled for custom exceptions.
This behavior is versioned. In API 60.0 and earlier, these methods aren’t called in some cases where exceptions are used, such as in Sets
and Maps, or on an object reference of a custom exception instance.
Support for Standard Fields in the getRelationshipOrder Method

When you call the DescribeFieldResult.getRelationshipOrder method for a standard field, it now returns 0 if the
field is the primary relationship field or 1 if the field is the secondary relationship field. This behavior is versioned. In API 60.0 and earlier,
this method always returned null for a standard field.
SEE ALSO:
Apex Reference Guide: DescribeFieldResult.getRelationshipOrder (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
API
Update records using external IDs and interact with an improved OpenAPI spec sObjects REST API. The previously announced retirement
of API versions 21.0 through 30.0 of the Salesforce Platform API is delayed until Summer ’25.
IN THIS SECTION:
Update API Calls to Use Your My Domain Login URL
To prevent service interruptions, update instanced URLs in your API calls to your My Domain login URL. An instanced URL contains
your Salesforce instance. For example, https://ap2.salesforce.com contains the instance ap2. After your instance
changes due to an org migration or an instance refresh, API traffic that uses a URL that contains your previous instance is no longer
routed to your new instance. My Domain login URLs always use the correct instance.
Update Records Using External IDs in REST API
You can now update a record using the value of its external ID with the new updateOnly parameter in REST API. Previously, you
could only upsert a record using its external ID.
View More Details in the Updated OpenAPI Spec sObjects (Beta)
View a details page and get more usable responses with the updated OpenAPI Spec sObjects REST API. The new details page contains
information about the state of the current request and details of any errors that have occurred.
Delete the Obsolete Salesforce API Only Systems Integrations User Profile
We’re updating the obsolete Salesforce API Only Systems Integration user profile from a standard to a custom profile so you can
delete the profile in orgs where it exists.
Before an org migration, you no longer need to keep a list of your metadata changes in order to preserve your existing change sets.
Now, when Salesforce migrates an org from one instance to another, change sets are migrated during this process automatically.
The retirement of versions 21.0 through 30.0 of the Salesforce Platform API was first scheduled for Summer ’23. The retirement is
now postponed to Summer ’25. You can continue to use these API versions but they’re not supported and won’t be available starting
in Summer ’25. Applications consuming them are then disrupted. Requests fail with an error message indicating that the endpoint
is deactivated. Upgrade all applications that use a legacy API version to a current version before this breaking change occurs.
216
Update API Calls to Use Your My Domain Login URL

To prevent service interruptions, update instanced URLs in your API calls to your My Domain login URL. An instanced URL contains your
Salesforce instance. For example, https://ap2.salesforce.com contains the instance ap2. After your instance changes due
to an org migration or an instance refresh, API traffic that uses a URL that contains your previous instance is no longer routed to your
new instance. My Domain login URLs always use the correct instance.
Where: This change applies to all API versions.
When: API traffic that uses an incorrect instanced URL stops working on October 12, 2024.
How: To get your org’s My Domain login URL, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter My Domain, and then select My Domain.
Find your My Domain login URL in the Current My Domain URL field in the My Domain Details section.
To find hard-coded references to instanced URLs, download your org’s metadata. Then use a code editor such as Microsoft Visual Studio
Code to search for instanced URLs. Replace the instanced URLs with your org’s My Domain login URL.
For example, if your org’s My Domain login URL is mycompany.my.salesforce.com and an API call uses
https://ap2.salesforce.com/services/Soap/class/DemoService, update the API call to use
https://mycompany.my.salesforce.com/services/Soap/class/DemoService.
SEE ALSO:
Knowledge Article: Updating Hard-Coded References
Update Records Using External IDs in REST API

You can now update a record using the value of its external ID with the new updateOnly parameter in REST API. Previously, you
could only upsert a record using its external ID.
Where: This change affects API version 61.0 and later.
How: To prevent creating a new record if the target record can’t be found or doesn’t exist, add the updateOnly parameter to a URL
that executes an upsert operation. You can also use URLs with the updateOnly parameter in composite REST API and composite
graph REST API.
SEE ALSO:
REST API Developer Guide: Upsert Records Using sObject Rows by External ID
REST API Developer Guide: Upsert Records Using sObject Collections
View More Details in the Updated OpenAPI Spec sObjects (Beta)

View a details page and get more usable responses with the updated OpenAPI Spec sObjects REST API. The new details page contains
information about the state of the current request and details of any errors that have occurred.
217
Where: This change affects API version 61.0 and later. This beta feature is available in Developer Editions, Partner Developer Editions,
sandboxes, and scratch orgs that have API Enabled.
How: This release introduces important behavior changes to REST API:
• To get the OpenAPI document, use a URI that ends in /locatorID/results. Don't use a URI that ends in /locatorID.
• On a successful POST request, the server responds with an HTTP 202 status code (Accepted) and a JSON response body. That body
contains a URI to view the details page and a URI to get the OpenAPI document.
• If an attempt is made to send more than one document request within 6 hours, an HTTP 429 status code with an error message is
returned. Previously, an HTTP 202 status code with a non-error response body was returned.
SEE ALSO:
REST API Developer Guide: Generating an OpenAPI 3.0 Document for sObjects REST API (Beta)
Idea Exchange: Ability to generate OpenAPI docs for REST-ful integration
Delete the Obsolete Salesforce API Only Systems Integrations User Profile
We’re updating the obsolete Salesforce API Only Systems Integration user profile from a standard to a custom profile so you can delete
the profile in orgs where it exists.
Where: One or more Salesforce Integration user licenses are available by default in Enterprise, Unlimited, Performance, and Developer
editions. More add-on licenses are available to purchase for these editions.
Why: The Salesforce API Only Systems Integration user profile was replaced with the more secure Minimum Access - API Only Integrations
user profile in the Spring ‘24 release.
Before an org migration, you no longer need to keep a list of your metadata changes in order to preserve your existing change sets.
Now, when Salesforce migrates an org from one instance to another, change sets are migrated during this process automatically.
Where: This change applies to all Salesforce editions.
The retirement of versions 21.0 through 30.0 of the Salesforce Platform API was first scheduled for Summer ’23. The retirement is now
postponed to Summer ’25. You can continue to use these API versions but they’re not supported and won’t be available starting in
Summer ’25. Applications consuming them are then disrupted. Requests fail with an error message indicating that the endpoint is
deactivated. Upgrade all applications that use a legacy API version to a current version before this breaking change occurs.
Where: This change affects these API versions.
Bulk API
21.0, 22.0, 23.0, 24.0, 25.0, 26.0, 27.0, 28.0, 29.0, 30.0
SOAP API
21.0, 22.0, 23.0, 24.0, 25.0, 26.0, 27.0, 28.0, 29.0, 30.0
REST API
v21.0, v22.0, v23.0, v24.0, v25.0, v26.0, v27.0, v28.0, v29.0, v30.0
218
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Packaging
Note: This change affects all REST APIs that use URIs beneath /services/data/vXX.X/, including:
• Bulk API
• Connect REST API
• IoT REST API
• Lightning Platform REST API
• Metadata API
• Place Order REST API
• Reports and Dashboards REST API
• Tableau CRM REST API
• Tooling API
This change applies to Professional (with API access enabled), Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions. It affects all
API-enabled orgs, including Sandboxes and Scratch orgs.
How: Before the Summer ’25 release, modify or upgrade all applications to function with current API versions. Newer API versions offer
more capabilities and improved security and performance.
Identify requests made from old or unsupported API versions of SOAP API, REST API, and Bulk API using the API Total Usage event.
Packaging
Packaging facilitates the development and distribution of business apps. Use second-generation managed packages to create apps to
sell and distribute on AppExchange. Use unlocked packages to develop internal business apps.
IN THIS SECTION:
Use Second-Generation Managed Packaging to Build Data Cloud Apps
You now get all the benefits of second-generation managed packaging for Data Cloud features. When you package Data Cloud
metadata, add it to a data kit first and then add the data kit to a package. Data Cloud apps must contain only Data Cloud metadata.
Quickly Iterate Package Development Using Async Validation
When creating a new package version, you have the option to specify async validation. Async validation creates a new package
version before completing package validations. By receiving the package version earlier in the process, you can install and test the
new version right away. If your development team is using continuous integration (CI) scripts, async validation can reduce your
overall CI run time.
Shorten Package Install Time in Scratch Orgs by Skipping a Handler
To shorten package install time when installing in scratch orgs, you can specify the FeatureEnforcement skip handler when
using either the PackageInstallRequest object, or the sf package install command. The feature enforcement
handler adds object and feature validations in the subscriber org that prevent an admin from turning off a feature that would cause
your app to malfunction. However, this enforcement isn’t critical in scratch orgs.
Package External Client Apps In Second-Generation Managed Packages
Take advantage of the external client apps framework. The new and improved generation of connected apps is catching up to
connected apps fast. The new framework now supports headless login, passwordless login, and guest user flows using the Authorization
Code and Credentials Flow. You can also configure an external client app to issue JSON Web Token (JWT)-based access tokens, which
is required for the guest user flow. External client apps can be included in second-generation managed packages.
219
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Packaging
Explore the Updated Documentation for Components in Managed Packages

We’ve made it easier to discover which components can be packaged in second-generation managed packages (2GP), first-generation
managed packages (1GP), or both package types. Component documentation is now in both the 2GP and 1GP developer guides.
Each guide displays only the components available in that package type, and indicates whether the component can be packaged
in both types.
Use Second-Generation Managed Packaging to Build Data Cloud Apps

You now get all the benefits of second-generation managed packaging for Data Cloud features. When you package Data Cloud metadata,
add it to a data kit first and then add the data kit to a package. Data Cloud apps must contain only Data Cloud metadata.
Where: This change applies to second-generation managed packages.
When: This functionality is available starting in April 2024.
Who: Data Cloud Second-Generation Managed Packaging is available only to Salesforce Partners.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Release Notes: Build Data Cloud Apps Using Second-Generation Managed Packaging
Data Cloud Developer Guide: Packages and Data Kits (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Data Cloud Developer Guide: Metadata Components for Data Cloud Cheat Sheet (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Quickly Iterate Package Development Using Async Validation

When creating a new package version, you have the option to specify async validation. Async validation creates a new package version
before completing package validations. By receiving the package version earlier in the process, you can install and test the new version
right away. If your development team is using continuous integration (CI) scripts, async validation can reduce your overall CI run time.
Where: This change applies to unlocked packages and second-generation managed packages.
When: Async validation is available starting on June 15, 2024.
How: Specify async validation when you create a new package version.
sf package version create –-async-validation <rest of command syntax>
Shorten Package Install Time in Scratch Orgs by Skipping a Handler

To shorten package install time when installing in scratch orgs, you can specify the FeatureEnforcement skip handler when
using either the PackageInstallRequest object, or the sf package install command. The feature enforcement
handler adds object and feature validations in the subscriber org that prevent an admin from turning off a feature that would cause your
app to malfunction. However, this enforcement isn’t critical in scratch orgs.
Where: This change applies to unlocked packages, second-generation managed packages, and first-generation managed packages
installed in scratch orgs.
How: Set the SkipHandler field on the PackageInstallRequest object to FeatureEnforcement.
Or use the CLI and specify:
sf package install --skip-handlers FeatureEnforcement <rest of command syntax>
220
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Development Environments
Package External Client Apps In Second-Generation Managed Packages

Take advantage of the external client apps framework. The new and improved generation of connected apps is catching up to connected
apps fast. The new framework now supports headless login, passwordless login, and guest user flows using the Authorization Code and
Credentials Flow. You can also configure an external client app to issue JSON Web Token (JWT)-based access tokens, which is required
for the guest user flow. External client apps can be included in second-generation managed packages.
Where: This change applies to second-generation managed packages.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Release Notes: New OAuth Enhancements for External Client Apps
Salesforce Help: External Client Apps (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Configure Packageable External Client Apps (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Second-Generation Managed Packaging Developer Guide: External Client App Header
Explore the Updated Documentation for Components in Managed Packages

We’ve made it easier to discover which components can be packaged in second-generation managed packages (2GP), first-generation
managed packages (1GP), or both package types. Component documentation is now in both the 2GP and 1GP developer guides. Each
guide displays only the components available in that package type, and indicates whether the component can be packaged in both
types.
Where: This change applies to the second-generation managed packaging and first-generation managed packaging developer guides.
SEE ALSO:
2GP Developer Guide: Components in Second-Generation Managed Packages
1GP Developer Guide: Components in First-Generation Managed Packages
Development environments are full-featured Salesforce environments that you use to develop and test existing or new features and
custom applications. They include Developer Edition orgs, sandboxes, and scratch orgs.
IN THIS SECTION:
Data Mask
Click into specific information about each mask, and automate how frequently Data Mask runs. Enjoy faster job processing times,
better handling of complex data, and protect your data with automation bypasses.
Capture a snapshot of a scratch org’s configuration so that you can use it to create scratch org replicas. A snapshot is a point-in-time
copy of a scratch org. New features since beta include support for Salesforce Platform and Limited Access user licenses, the extension
of the snapshot expiration period to 90 days, and the ability to change the snapshot’s language.
Increase Sandbox Security with Inactive User Freezing
The Inactive User Freezing feature increases sandbox security by freezing users who haven’t logged in to a sandbox within 60 days
of it being created, cloned, or refreshed.
221
New User Permission: Manage Dev Sandboxes

Provide users the ability to create, clone, refresh, and delete only Developer and Developer Pro sandboxes. Developers are empowered
to manage their own developer sandboxes while restricting access to production data that is copied in Partial Copy and Full sandboxes.
Data Mask
Click into specific information about each mask, and automate how frequently Data Mask runs. Enjoy faster job processing times, better
handling of complex data, and protect your data with automation bypasses.
IN THIS SECTION:
Access Information About Specific Data Mask Job
The Run Logs tab in Data Mask is now the Jobs tab. From a list view in the Jobs tab, you can click the Data Mask name to view specific
information about each mask, such as configured objects, current job progress, and any errors thrown by the current job.
Automate the Running of Data Mask Processes with Job Scheduler
Configure how frequently you run Data Mask, daily, weekly, or monthly, to mask all new data in your sandbox.
Other Improvements to Salesforce Data Mask
We’ve optimized the record loading and transformation so Data Mask jobs complete faster. When it completes a job, Data Mask
now bypasses automation rather than deactivating or reactivating when a job is complete. Data Mask deletes field-history tracking
instead of turning it off for the masking process. Serial mode is removed as jobs automatically retry records when row-locked.
Access Information About Specific Data Mask Job

The Run Logs tab in Data Mask is now the Jobs tab. From a list view in the Jobs tab, you can click the Data Mask name to view specific
information about each mask, such as configured objects, current job progress, and any errors thrown by the current job.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Data
Mask is installed.
Who: This change is available to customers who want to install the latest managed package, 2.1000.
Automate the Running of Data Mask Processes with Job Scheduler

Configure how frequently you run Data Mask, daily, weekly, or monthly, to mask all new data in your sandbox.
Mask is installed.
Other Improvements to Salesforce Data Mask

We’ve optimized the record loading and transformation so Data Mask jobs complete faster. When it completes a job, Data Mask now
bypasses automation rather than deactivating or reactivating when a job is complete. Data Mask deletes field-history tracking instead
of turning it off for the masking process. Serial mode is removed as jobs automatically retry records when row-locked.
Mask is installed.
222
Capture a snapshot of a scratch org’s configuration so that you can use it to create scratch org replicas. A snapshot is a point-in-time
copy of a scratch org. New features since beta include support for Salesforce Platform and Limited Access user licenses, the extension
of the snapshot expiration period to 90 days, and the ability to change the snapshot’s language.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Developer, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
When: This feature will be available on a rolling basis starting in late June 2024.
Why: Configuring a scratch org with a project’s dependencies can be a manual and time-consuming process. It can require pushing
dependent metadata to a scratch org, seeding it with sample data, installing a package or two, and then performing manual tasks directly
in the scratch org. And then, poof, the scratch org expires, and you have to start all over again. With scratch org snapshots, you can
quickly replicate scratch orgs with the required project dependencies.
How: Using Setup, enable Scratch Org Snapshots in the Dev Hub org that you use to create scratch orgs. If you don't have access to the
Scratch Orgs Setup page, ask your Salesforce admin for help. Then use Salesforce CLI commands to create and manage the snapshot,
such as org create snapshot and org list snapshot.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce DX Developer Guide: Scratch Org Snapshots
Increase Sandbox Security with Inactive User Freezing

The Inactive User Freezing feature increases sandbox security by freezing users who haven’t logged in to a sandbox within 60 days of it
being created, cloned, or refreshed.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and
When: This feature is available on a rolling basis starting in June 2024.
Who: Any user who hasn’t logged in to a newly created, cloned, or refreshed sandbox within the first 60 days is frozen.
How: The Setup Audit Trail provides information about the number of users that were frozen due to inactivity. You can provide access
to frozen users by unfreezing their user accounts.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Freeze or Unfreeze User Accounts
Salesforce Help: Monitor Setup Changes with Setup Audit Trail
New User Permission: Manage Dev Sandboxes

Provide users the ability to create, clone, refresh, and delete only Developer and Developer Pro sandboxes. Developers are empowered
to manage their own developer sandboxes while restricting access to production data that is copied in Partial Copy and Full sandboxes.
When: This user permission is available when your production org is upgraded to the Summer ’24 release.
Who: All users with the Manage Dev Sandboxes user permission. Only users with the existing Manage Sandboxes user permission can
manage Partial Copy and Full sandboxes.
How: Assign the Manage Dev Sandboxes user permission via a profile or permission set.
223
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Platform Development Tools

Build applications collaboratively and deliver continuously with Salesforce Developer Experience (DX), the open and integrated experience
for custom app development on Salesforce.
IN THIS SECTION:
Use Salesforce CLI to create environments for development and testing, synchronize source code, run tests, and control your
application lifecycle.
Salesforce Extensions for Visual Studio Code
The Salesforce extension pack includes tools for developing on the Customer 360 Platform in the lightweight, extensible VS Code
editor.
Code Builder
Code Builder is a web-based integrated development environment that has all the power and flexibility of Visual Studio Code,
Salesforce Extensions for VS Code, and Salesforce CLI in your web browser.
Einstein for Developers is an AI-powered developer tool that’s available as an easy-to-install Visual Studio Code extension built using
CodeGen, the secure, custom AI model from Salesforce. Einstein for Developers is enabled in all Salesforce orgs by default.
We’ve added additional org performance metrics for connection pools, Visualforce, and sync/async callout errors. You can also view
recommendations to improve SOQL performance in the database CPU investigation. And you can export ApexGuru insights in PDF
format.
Book a slot on your sandbox instance calendar and test at production peak load. Compare performance data from recent tests. Get
in-app notifications and email confirmations about booking start times, end times, and cancellations.

Use Salesforce CLI to create environments for development and testing, synchronize source code, run tests, and control your application
lifecycle.
We release new versions of Salesforce CLI weekly. Here’s a taste of some of the new and changed features we recently delivered; these
changes apply to Salesforce CLI version 2.44.8 and later.
Source Mobility (Beta)
Move source files inside your local Salesforce DX project without source-tracking thinking that you’ve deleted and then recreated a
metadata component. To use this opt-in beta feature, set the SF_BETA_TRACK_FILE_MOVES environment variable to true. Then
reorganize your files as you like!
Keep these considerations in mind.
• Source Mobility works with file moves, not file renames. Salesforce CLI still interprets renaming a source file as deleting a metadata
component and then creating one with the different name.
• Child source files can move only to an identically named parent. For example, a custom field can move between Object folders
in different package directories only if both Object folders have the same name.
Improved data Commands (Beta)
Import and export test data more easily with the improved data import|export tree commands. For example, you can
now export more than two levels of child objects in a query when using data export tree --plan. The data import
224
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Platform Development Tools
tree --plan command can now handle files that contain more than 200 records. To try out the improvements, use the data
import beta tree and data export beta tree commands.
Decompose More Metadata Types (Beta)
Track changes in custom labels, permission sets, sharing rules, and workflows more easily by specifying that Salesforce CLI decompose
their large metadata files into smaller and easily digestible source files. Custom objects have always worked this way, and developers
love it, so we decided to extend the functionality to these metadata types too.
Refresh a Sandbox from Salesforce CLI
Easily refresh a sandbox from the command line with the new org refresh sandbox CLI command.
Store Flag Values in Local Text Files
Simplify and shorten long CLI commands by storing flag values in local text files. Let’s say, for example, that you run this CLI command
to insert a new record into the Account object.
sf data create record --sobject Account --values "Name='Universal Containers'
Website=www.example.com BillingAddress='123 Main St., Oakland, CA' <many more fields>"
--target-org myorg
Because Account has many fields, the CLI command could potentially get so long that it exceeds the maximum length of a terminal
command. With this new feature, you can shorten the command by storing the value of all its flags in local text files and then run
the command this way:
sf data create record --flags-dir flags/values.txt
More Colorful Help

The --help output of all commands now uses colors to highlight the different parts. If you don’t like the default colors, you can
customize them.
SEE ALSO:
GitHub: Salesforce CLI Release Notes
GitHub: New "data import|export beta tree" Commands
Salesforce DX Developer Guide: Create, Clone, or Refresh a Sandbox
Salesforce CLI Setup Guide: Customize the Colors in Help Output

The Salesforce extension pack includes tools for developing on the Customer 360 Platform in the lightweight, extensible VS Code editor.
We release new versions of the extensions weekly. Read the weekly release notes to learn about recent updates.
SEE ALSO:
Code Builder
Code Builder is a web-based integrated development environment that has all the power and flexibility of Visual Studio Code, Salesforce
Extensions for VS Code, and Salesforce CLI in your web browser.
We release new versions of Code Builder, as needed.
225
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Heroku
See the off-cycle Code Builder release notes on GitHub.
SEE ALSO:
Code Builder Developer Guide

Einstein for Developers is an AI-powered developer tool that’s available as an easy-to-install Visual Studio Code extension built using
CodeGen, the secure, custom AI model from Salesforce. Einstein for Developers is enabled in all Salesforce orgs by default.
Read the weekly release notes to learn about recent updates.
SEE ALSO:

We’ve added additional org performance metrics for connection pools, Visualforce, and sync/async callout errors. You can also view
recommendations to improve SOQL performance in the database CPU investigation. And you can export ApexGuru insights in PDF
format.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Unlimited Edition. Scale Center isn’t supported in Government Cloud Plus.
Who: Scale Center is generally available at no additional cost for all Unlimited Edition Full Copy Sandbox, Signature, and Scale Test
customers. You can enable Scale Center for five Standard (non-SysAdmin) users per org.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Scale, and then click Scale Center.

Book a slot on your sandbox instance calendar and test at production peak load. Compare performance data from recent tests. Get
in-app notifications and email confirmations about booking start times, end times, and cancellations.
Who: Scale Test is available for customers with a full copy sandbox in all Hyperforce regions except for Singapore.
How: To get access, contact your customer success representative or account executive. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Scale,
and then click Scale Test.
Heroku
Use Heroku to build, deliver, monitor, and scale innovative apps fast. Build them using popular programming languages and frameworks
without having to maintain the infrastructure.
To learn more about Heroku, see the Heroku Dev Center.
IN THIS SECTION:
Extend Your Customer 360 Experiences with Heroku
Explore how Heroku provides the tools and infrastructure to meet your diverse business requirements. With flexible deployment
options, auto-scaling capabilities, extensive add-ons, and reference apps, developers can innovate with performance and security
in mind. Learn about the platform, understand the key use cases, and how to get started on Heroku.
226
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Salesforce Functions
Extend Your Customer 360 Experiences with Heroku

Explore how Heroku provides the tools and infrastructure to meet your diverse business requirements. With flexible deployment options,
auto-scaling capabilities, extensive add-ons, and reference apps, developers can innovate with performance and security in mind. Learn
about the platform, understand the key use cases, and how to get started on Heroku.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Developer, Enterprise, Professional, Starter, and Unlimited
editions.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Heroku, and then select About Heroku.
Salesforce Functions is retiring on January 31, 2025. Learn about the retirement plan for Salesforce Functions.
IN THIS SECTION:
Salesforce Functions is retiring on January 31, 2025. You can continue using your subscription through your existing Order Term. To
preserve the capabilities that Salesforce Functions provided to your org, deploy an alternative solution before your existing Order
Term ends.

Salesforce Functions is retiring on January 31, 2025. You can continue using your subscription through your existing Order Term. To
preserve the capabilities that Salesforce Functions provided to your org, deploy an alternative solution before your existing Order Term
ends.
See Salesforce Functions Retirement on the Heroku Dev Center for the end-of-life timeline and more information on migrating your
functions.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs), and all versions of the mobile app in
Professional, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
SEE ALSO:
Developer Doc: Salesforce Functions Release Notes
Change Data Capture

Receive change events for more objects.
IN THIS SECTION:
With Change Data Capture, you can now receive notifications of record changes for more objects.

With Change Data Capture, you can now receive notifications of record changes for more objects.
227
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Change Data Capture
How: Select the objects for which you want to get notifications on the Change Data Capture page in Setup or create a custom channel.
You can now receive change events for these objects.
Industries
• Award
• IdentityDocument
• InsurancePolicy
• PersonEmployment
• AuthorNote
• CareObservationComponent
• CarePerformer
• ClinicalAlert
• ClinicalDetectedIssue
• ClinicalDetectedIssueDetail
• ClinicalEncounterFacility
• ClinicalEncounterIdentifier
• ClinicalEncounterProvider
• ClinicalEncounterReason
• ClinicalEncounterSvcRequest
• ClinicalServiceRequest
• ClinicalServiceRequestDetail
• DiagnosticSummaryDetail
• HealthConditionDetail
• Identifier
• PatientHealthReaction
• PatientImmunizationProtocol
• PersonLanguage
• PersonName
• ProblemDefinition
Security and Identity

• AuthorizationForm
• AuthorizationFormText
• CommSubscription
• CommSubscriptionChannelType
• EngagementChannelType
Service
• Survey
• SurveyPage
228
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Platform Events
• SurveyQuestion
• SurveyQuestionChoice
• SurveyQuestionResponse
• SurveyResponse
• SurveyVersion
SEE ALSO:
Change Data Capture Developer Guide
Platform Events
Add real-time Event Monitoring events to a custom channel. Learn about planned feature retirements for standard-volume platform
events and some Streaming API versions.
IN THIS SECTION:
Add Real-Time Event Monitoring Events to a Custom Channel
You can now receive multiple real-time event monitoring event types in one stream by adding them to a custom platform event
channel. A subscriber can then subscribe to the channel to receive the various events.
Standard-Volume Platform Events Are Being Retired
Standard-volume platform events are legacy custom events and scheduled for retirement in Summer ’25. As of Spring ’19 (API version
45.0), you can define only high-volume platform events, and you can’t define standard-volume platform events. If you still have
legacy standard-volume events, we recommend that you replace them with high-volume platform events.
Streaming API Versions 23.0 Through 36.0 Are Being Retired
Streaming API versions 23.0 through 36.0 are scheduled for retirement in Winter ’25. They’re deprecated and no longer supported.
If you're using one of these versions, upgrade to a recent Streaming API version or a version greater or equal to version 37.0, which
corresponds to Durable Streaming. The newer Streaming API versions are maintained with product enhancements and bug fixes.
SEE ALSO:
Apex System Namespace Changes: EventBus.publish Methods
Add Real-Time Event Monitoring Events to a Custom Channel

You can now receive multiple real-time event monitoring event types in one stream by adding them to a custom platform event channel.
A subscriber can then subscribe to the channel to receive the various events.
How: To specify that a channel holds event monitoring events, set the new eventType field in the PlatformEventChannel metadata
type to the appropriate value. Use Metadata API or Tooling API to configure the channel with PlatformEventChannel, and add each event
to the channel with PlatformEventChannelMember. You can add up to 3 custom event monitoring channels, and each channel can
contain up to 10 members that reference real-time event monitoring events.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Real-Time Event Monitoring
Platform Events Developer Guide: Group Platform Events into One Stream with a Custom Channel
229
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Event Bus
Standard-Volume Platform Events Are Being Retired

Standard-volume platform events are legacy custom events and scheduled for retirement in Summer ’25. As of Spring ’19 (API version
45.0), you can define only high-volume platform events, and you can’t define standard-volume platform events. If you still have legacy
standard-volume events, we recommend that you replace them with high-volume platform events.
Streaming API Versions 23.0 Through 36.0 Are Being Retired

Streaming API versions 23.0 through 36.0 are scheduled for retirement in Winter ’25. They’re deprecated and no longer supported. If
you're using one of these versions, upgrade to a recent Streaming API version or a version greater or equal to version 37.0, which
corresponds to Durable Streaming. The newer Streaming API versions are maintained with product enhancements and bug fixes.
SEE ALSO:
Knowledge Article: Streaming API Versions 23.0 through 36.0 Retirement
Event Bus
Manage your Pub/Sub API event subscriptions. Use real-time event monitoring events with event relays.
IN THIS SECTION:
Use managed event subscriptions to track the events that a subscriber client consumed and to resume a subscription from where
it left off after a client disconnects. When you resubscribe with the new ManagedSubscribe RPC method, the subscription
resumes after the last Replay ID that the client successfully committed on the server.
The timeout for keeping the publishing stream alive for the PublishStream RPC method increased from 60 seconds to 30
minutes. The timeout is counted from the last PublishRequest that the client sent or from the last PublishResponse that the server
sent. The increased timeout simplifies your client implementation and reduces the amount of PublishRequests that the client sends
to the server to keep the stream alive.
You can now use real-time event monitoring events with event relays. Create a custom channel that references a real-time event
monitoring event and stream the events to Amazon EventBridge, where you can store and process them. Previously, real-time event
monitoring events weren’t available for event relays.

Use managed event subscriptions to track the events that a subscriber client consumed and to resume a subscription from where it left
off after a client disconnects. When you resubscribe with the new ManagedSubscribe RPC method, the subscription resumes after
the last Replay ID that the client successfully committed on the server.
Where: This change applies to Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions. Pub/Sub API isn’t available in Government
Cloud.
230
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes New and Changed Items for Developers
How: Managed subscriptions use configuration options that you set in ManagedEventSubscription using Tooling API or Metadata API.
As part of this change, the new bidirectional streaming ManagedSubscribe RPC method is available.
rpc ManagedSubscribe (stream ManagedFetchRequest) returns (stream ManagedFetchResponse)
In addition to the RPC method, these Protobuf messages are added.

• ManagedFetchRequest
• ManagedFetchResponse
• CommitReplayRequest
• CommitReplayResponse
The client calls ManagedSubscribe to subscribe using the ID of ManagedEventSubscription. Each client has a unique subscription
ID that can’t be shared with other clients for the same Salesforce org. Subscriptions in Pub/Sub API are pull-based, so a client specifies
the number of events to request in ManagedFetchRequest. The events are returned in ManagedFetchResponse. A client commits a
Replay ID by setting the CommitReplayRequest field in ManagedFetchRequest.
SEE ALSO:
Metadata API Developer Guide: ManagedEventSubscription (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Tooling API Developer Guide: ManagedEventSubscription (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

The timeout for keeping the publishing stream alive for the PublishStream RPC method increased from 60 seconds to 30 minutes.
The timeout is counted from the last PublishRequest that the client sent or from the last PublishResponse that the server sent. The
increased timeout simplifies your client implementation and reduces the amount of PublishRequests that the client sends to the server
to keep the stream alive.
Where: This change applies to Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions. Pub/Sub API isn’t available in Government
Cloud.
You can now use real-time event monitoring events with event relays. Create a custom channel that references a real-time event
monitoring event and stream the events to Amazon EventBridge, where you can store and process them. Previously, real-time event
monitoring events weren’t available for event relays.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Real-Time Event Monitoring
Salesforce Help: Event Channels
New and Changed Items for Developers

Here is where you can find new and changed objects, calls, classes, components, commands, and more that help you customize Salesforce
features.
231
IN THIS SECTION:
Lightning Components: New and Changed Items
Build UI easily with these new and changed resources.
These classes, enums, and interfaces are new or have changes.
ConnectApi (Connect in Apex): New and Changed Classes and Enums
Create custom experiences in Salesforce using Connect in Apex.
API: New and Changed Items
Access more data objects and metadata types in API version 61.0.
Lightning Components: New and Changed Items

Build UI easily with these new and changed resources.
IN THIS SECTION:
New and Changed Lightning Web Components
Build UI easily with these new and changed components.
Do more with Lightning web components by using modules.
New and Changed Aura Components
New and Changed Lightning Web Components

Changed Lightning Web Components

These components have changed.
lightning-combobox
These accessibility behaviors are new.
• You can now use the Tab or Enter key to select combobox elements.
• The string value of the combobox label is now used on the aria-label attribute on the input and button elements.
These attributes have changed.
• spinner-active—When this attribute is present, role=”presentation” is replaced by role=”option” on
the wrapping div element for lightning-spinner.
• required—The error message reads out on every focus.
lightning-datatable
• Unsaved cells have new colors to improve contrast.
• Assistive text is appended to unsaved cells in addition to contrasting color.
• Custom data types support keyboard navigation. Set data-navigation=”enable” and
tab-index={internalTabIndex} on custom elements.
232
• The role=”gridcell” attribute is removed from all non-td elements.

These attributes are new.
• aria-describedby—An ID of an element that provides a description for the table element.
• data-navigation—Set value to “enable” on custom elements to enable keyboard navigation.
• tabindex—Set value to {internalTabIndex} on custom elements to enable keyboard navigation.
This attribute has changed.
• aria-selected—When you specify hide-checkbox-column, aria-selected is removed from all tr elements.
lightning-helptext
• You can now dismiss the helptext tooltip on focus by pressing the Escape key.
• Moving the mouse into the helptext tooltip doesn’t make the tooltip disappear.
lightning-input
These accessibility behaviors are new for all input elements.
• Set role=”status” and aria-live=”polite” to set error messages on input elements.
This attribute is new for all input elements.
• aria-live—Set aria-live=”polite” to set input error messages.
These accessibility behaviors are new for type=”color”.
• Hue slider now represents the updated value set from the input field.
• Screen readers now state “Current Color: None Selected” when no color is selected.
• When focused, hue selector is always visible.
• Screen readers now read out hexadecimal color codes instead of saturation and brightness values for hue sliders.
These attributes have changed for type=”color”.
• aria-disabled—Sets aria-disabled on both button and input fields.
• aria-keyshortcuts—Is now passed to the input element.
• role—Can now set role=”status” to set input error messages.
These accessibility behaviors are new for type=”datetime”.
• aria-attributes has been updated to avoid multiple announcements of the current month.
• After date selection, focus now moves back to the input element.
• Setting aria-disabled passes aria-disabled to both date and time input fields.
These attributes are new for type=”datetime”.
• date-access-key—Allows an access key to be set on date input fields.
• time-access-key—Allows an access key to be set on time input fields.
lightning-input-address
• show-compact-address—When this attribute is present, the street field is rendered as two separate inputs instead of a
single textarea. To provide a label for the first street field, use street-label. To provide a label for the second street field,
use subpremise-label.
233
• subpremise—The value for the subpremise field. The maximum length is 80 characters. Use this field for supplementary
street information, such as the building number. Use this attribute with show-compact-address. The subpremise field
doesn’t require a value for form submission.
• subpremise-label—The label for the subpremise field, which is visible only when using show-compact-address.
• subpremise-placeholder—The placeholder for the subpremise field, which is visible only when using
show-compact-address.
These attributes have changed.
• street—When using this attribute with show-compact-address, the street field is rendered as two separate inputs
instead of a single textarea. The maximum length is 80 characters. To provide a value for the second street field, use subpremise.
• show-address-lookup—When using this attribute with show-compact-address, the first street field functions
as the address lookup field.
lightning-progress-indicator
• role=”presentation” when type=”path”.
• role=”listitem” when type=”base”.
• When using the path type, the unordered list renders with the aria-labelledby attribute. This attribute corresponds
to an element that contains the description, “Stage:” followed by the current step label.
lightning-progress-step
• This component now uses a div with tabindex=”0” instead of a button.
• The div element doesn’t render with both aria-describedby and title attributes to prevent screen readers from
reading the steps twice.
• label—A step with an error now appends “Error” to the label for assistive text.
lightning-select
• aria-describedby—The ID of an element or elements on the page that provides an accessible description for the select
element.
• aria-labelledby—The ID of an element or elements on the page that provides an accessible name for the select element.
lightning-textarea
This attribute is new.
• aria-labelledby—The ID of an element or elements on the page that provides an accessible name for the textarea
element.
lightning-tree
Data can now be added dynamically through the tree component whenever it’s loaded by using the key and expand properties
in the change event. When the tree node is expanded, the component requests the data for the expanded section. This dynamic
loading improves performance when loading tree data.
234
SEE ALSO:
Component Library

Do more with Lightning web components by using modules.
Changed Modules
These modules have new, changed, or deprecated wire adapters and JavaScript functions.
lightning/analyticsWaveApi
This module includes these new functions.
• deleteWaveFolder(folderId)—Deletes a specific CRM Analytics folder.
• getWaveFolder(folderId, mobileOnlyFeaturedAssets, disableMru)—Requests a CRM Analytics
folder by ID, with optional parameters.
• postWaveFolders(waveFolder)—Create a CRM Analytics folder.
• updatePartialWaveFolder(folderId, folder)—Applies a patch or partial update a specific CRM Analytics
folder.
• updateWaveFolder(folderId, folder)—Fully updates a specific CRM Analytics folder.
lightning/platformUtilityBarApi
Use the LWC Utility Bar API to work with the utilities on a utility bar. This module supports both Lightning Locker and Lightning Web
Security. For more information, see Control Utilities Within the Utility Bar.
lightning/platformWorkspaceApi
This module supports both Lightning Locker and Lightning Web Security. Previously, you had to enable Lightning Web Security
before you could use this module.
experience/mobilePublisherConfigApi (Beta)
This module includes a new wire adapter.
• getNavigationConfig—Exposes properties that enable or disable the hamburger menu and back button on your Mobile
Publisher for Experience Cloud LWR site.
For more information, see Simplify Site Navigation on Mobile Publisher for LWR Sites (Beta).
SEE ALSO:
Component Library
New and Changed Aura Components

Changed Aura Components

This component has changed.
235
lightning:inputAddress
• showCompactAddress—When this attribute is present, the street field is rendered as two separate inputs instead of a
single textarea. To provide a label for the first street field, use streetLabel. To provide a label for the second street field,
use subpremiseLabel.
• subpremise—The value for the subpremise field. The maximum length is 80 characters. Use this field for supplementary
street information, such as the building number. Use this attribute with showCompactAddress. The subpremise field
doesn’t require a value for form submission.
• subpremiseLabel—The label for the subpremise field, which is visible only when using showCompactAddress.
• subpremisePlaceholder—The placeholder for the subpremise field, which is visible only when using
showCompactAddress.
• street—When using this attribute with showCompactAddress, the street field is rendered as two separate inputs
instead of a single textarea. The maximum length is 80 characters. To provide a value for the second street field, use subpremise.
• showAddressLookup—When using this attribute with showCompactAddress, the first street field functions as the
address lookup field.
SEE ALSO:
Component Library
Lightning Web Components Developer Guide
Lightning Aura Components Developer Guide

These classes, enums, and interfaces are new or have changes.
For more information on these enhancements, see the Apex Developer Guide and the Apex Reference Guide.
IN THIS SECTION:
Auth Namespace
The Auth namespace has these new or changed classes, methods, interfaces, enums, or exceptions.
ConnectApi Namespace
The ConnectApi namespace (Connect in Apex) has new or changed classes, methods, or enums.
Context Namespace
The Context namespace is used to manage the sharing and consumption of business application data by using Context Service.
It has this new class and these methods.
DataSource Namespace
The DataSource namespace has these new or changed classes, methods, interfaces, enums, or exceptions.
System Namespace
The System namespace has these new or changed classes, methods, interfaces, enums, or exceptions.
FormulaEval Namespace (Beta)
The FormulaEval namespace has these new or changed classes, methods, interfaces, enums, or exceptions.
236
Sfdc_enablement Namespace (Developer Preview)

The new sfdc_enablement namespace is used for Enablement programs to create custom items and render them to the Salesforce
Platform. It has these new classes and methods.
SEE ALSO:
Apex: New Features
Auth Namespace
The Auth namespace has these new or changed classes, methods, interfaces, enums, or exceptions.
New Classes
Extend the behavior of an external client app
These are highlights of the methods in the new ExternalClientAppOAuthHandler class. Use the authorize method
to authorize the specified user to access the external client app. Use the customAttributes method to set new attributes for
the specified user. Configure the refresh method for Salesforce to use during a refresh token exchange.
Get more test coverage by mocking HTTP callouts
Use the setHttpMock(mock) method in the new Auth.HttpCalloutMockUtil class.
New or Changed Methods in Existing Classes

Understand which Auth.JWT methods you can use depending on where the JWT came from
The getValidityLength(), setValidityLength(), getNbfClockSkew(), and setNbfClockSkew()
methods in the Auth.JWT class now throw a NoAccess exception for JWTs generated using the Auth.JWTUtil class.
See more claims for JWTs generated using the Auth.JWTUtil class
The getAdditionalClaims() method in the Auth.JWT class now returns additional claims for JWTs generated using
the Auth.JWTUtil class. Claims formatted as an inner list are converted to JSON strings, which you can then convert into a
map.
ConnectApi Namespace
The ConnectApi namespace (Connect in Apex) has new or changed classes, methods, or enums.
Many Connect REST API resource actions are exposed as static methods on Apex classes in the ConnectApi namespace. These
methods use other ConnectApi classes to input and return information. The ConnectApi namespace is referred to as Connect
in Apex.
For the new and changed ConnectApi classes, methods, and enums, see ConnectAPI (Connect in Apex): New and Changed Classes and
Enums.
Context Namespace
The Context namespace is used to manage the sharing and consumption of business application data by using Context Service. It
has this new class and these methods.
237
New Class
Manage the processes of a Context Service
These are highlights of the methods in the new IndustriesContext class. Use the buildContext(input) method
to create a context. Use the buildContext(input) method to delete a context. Use the getContext(input) method
to retrieve context details. Use the getContextTranslation(input) method to retrieve context mappings based on a
target mapping ID. Use the persistContext(input) method to persist the current data or state of context. Use the
queryRecordStatus(input) method to query the status of a record. Use the queryTags(input) method to query
a context by using tags. Use the updateContextAttributes(input) method to update the attributes of a context.
DataSource Namespace
The DataSource namespace has these new or changed classes, methods, interfaces, enums, or exceptions.

Map more external data types to Salesforce external objects using the Apex Connector Framework
Use the new currency(name, length, decimalPlaces), date(name), email(name), percent(name,
length, decimalPlaces), and phone(name) methods in the Column class to create new columns on a
DataSource.Table.
Changed Enums
Specify the new data types supported by the Apex Connector Framework
Use the new CURRENCY_TYPE, DATE_TYPE, EMAIL_TYPE, PERCENT_TYPE, and PHONE_TYPE DataType enum
values.
System Namespace
The System namespace has these new or changed classes, methods, interfaces, enums, or exceptions.

Use Apex cursors to traverse large result sets (beta)
Use the new Database.getCursor()or Database.getCursorWithBinds()methods to create a cursor when a
SOQL query is executed. Then, use the new Cursor.fetch()method, specifying the offset for generating results. To get Apex
cursor limits, use these new methods in the Limits class.
• getApexCursorRows
• getFetchCallsOnApexCursor
• getLimitApexCursorRows
• getLimitFetchCallsOnApexCursor
Create an instance of the FormulaBuilder (beta)
Use the new Formula.builder() method.
Create mock test classes for Data Cloud objects
Extend the new SoqlStubProvider class and override the SoqlStubProvider.handleSoqlQuery() class method.
Create and run DMO instances using either the Test.createStubQueryRow() or Test.createStubQueryRows()
methods and the Test.createSoqlStub()method.
238
Perform better error handling when publishing sObjects that aren’t platform events
The EventBus.publish(event) and EventBus.publish(events) methods now return a
System.UnexpectedException when publishing sObjects that aren’t platform events.
New Exceptions
Process System exceptions thrown by Apex cursors (beta)
Catch the new System.FatalCursorException and System.TransientCursorException exceptions.
Transactions that fail with System.TransientCursorException can be retried.
FormulaEval Namespace (Beta)

The FormulaEval namespace has these new or changed classes, methods, interfaces, enums, or exceptions.

Get a list of field names as referenced in a formula
Use the new getReferencedFields() method.
Set the context type used with the build() method to SObject type
Use the new withType(contextType) overload.

The new sfdc_enablement namespace is used for Enablement programs to create custom items and render them to the Salesforce
Platform. It has these new classes and methods.
New Classes
Define the exercise type for a custom item in an Enablement program
Use the getName(), getLabel(),getIcon(), and getLearningItemType() methods in the
sfdc_enablement.EnblProgramTaskDefSubCategoryType class.
Define a learning item type for a custom item in an Enablement program
Use the getName(), getLabel(), getComponentDef(), and getIcon()methods in the
sfdc_enablement.LearningItemType class.
Provide metadata information for a custom learning item type in an Enablement program
Use the getType(), getEntityId(), and getLearningItemField() methods in the
sfdc_enablement.LearningItemTypeHandler class.

Create custom experiences in Salesforce using Connect in Apex.
Many Connect REST API resource actions are exposed as static methods on Apex classes in the ConnectApi namespace. These
methods use other ConnectApi classes to input and return information. The ConnectApi namespace is referred to as Connect
in Apex.
239
IN THIS SECTION:
ConnectApi Rate Limit Changes for New Orgs
To avoid potentially restrictive per user, per namespace, per hour ConnectApi rate limits, method calls from orgs created in Summer
’24 and later count toward the per org, per 24-hour Salesforce Platform API rate limit. For these new orgs, only method calls that
require Chatter are subject to the per user, per namespace, per hour rate limit.
New Connect in Apex Classes
These classes are new.
Changed Connect in Apex Input Classes
These input classes have changes.
Changed Connect in Apex Output Classes
These output classes have changes.
Changed Connect in Apex Enums
These enums have changes.
SEE ALSO:
Connect REST API
Apex Reference Guide: ConnectApi Namespace
Connect REST API Developer Guide
ConnectApi Rate Limit Changes for New Orgs

To avoid potentially restrictive per user, per namespace, per hour ConnectApi rate limits, method calls from orgs created in Summer ’24
and later count toward the per org, per 24-hour Salesforce Platform API rate limit. For these new orgs, only method calls that require
Chatter are subject to the per user, per namespace, per hour rate limit.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and all versions of the Salesforce mobile app in all editions in
all API versions.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Developer Limits and Allocations Quick Reference : API Request Limits and Allocations
New Connect in Apex Classes

These classes are new.
Commerce
This new method is in the ConnectApi.OmnichannelInventoryService class.
Update an existing inventory reservation in Omnichannel Inventory
• ConnectApi.OmnichannelInventoryService, updateReservation
New input class: ConnectApi.OCIUpdateReservationInputRepresentation
New output class: ConnectApi.OCIUpdateReservationOutputRepresentation
240
Salesforce CMS
This new method is in the ConnectApi.ManagedContent class.
Clone a piece of managed content
• cloneManagedContentDocument(contentKeyOrId, ManagedContentCloneInputParam)
New input class: ConnectApi.ManagedContentCloneDocumentInput
New output class: ConnectApi.ManagedContentCloneDocument
Changed Connect in Apex Input Classes

These input classes have changes.
Commerce
ConnectApi.CartInput
This input class has this new property.
• customFields—Array of sObjects and custom fields for the sObjects.
ConnectApi.CartItemInput
Salesforce CMS
ConnectApi.ManagedContentDocumentInput
• apiName—API name of the managed content.
ConnectApi.ManagedContentPublishInput
• contextContentSpaceId—ID of the context workspace.
ConnectApi.ManagedContentUnpublishInput
Changed Connect in Apex Output Classes

These output classes have changes.
Commerce
ConnectApi.AbstractCartItem
This output class has these new properties.
• customFields—Array of sObjects and viewable custom fields for the sObjects.
ConnectApi.CartItem
241
• unitAdjustedPriceWithItemAdj—Unit price, including both tier and item level discounts, for the item. This value
is informational only and isn't used in pricing calculations.
• unitItemAdjustmentAmount—Item level adjustments made to the unit price for the item. This value is informational
only and isn't used in pricing calculations.
ConnectApi.CartSummary
• totalAmountWithItemAdjustment—Total amount, including both tier and item level discounts but excluding cart
level discounts, for all items in the cart. This value is informational only and isn't used in pricing calculations.
• totalCartLevelAdjustmentAmount—Total cart level discount amount used for the cart. This value is informational
Einstein
ConnectApi.EinsteinLLMGenerationItemOutput
This output class has this new property.
• contentQualityRepresentation—Specifies whether the generated response contains toxic language (true) or
not (false).
Orchestration
ConnectApi.OrchestrationWorkItem
• createdDate—Date when the work item was created.
• lastModifiedDate—Date when the work item was last modified.
Salesforce CMS
ConnectApi.ManagedContentDocument
ConnectApi.ManagedContentSpace
• apiName—API name of the managed content space.
Changed Connect in Apex Enums

These enums have changes.
For information about these enums, see ConnectApi Enums in the Apex Reference Guide.
ConnectApi.CartTaxType
This enum has this new value.
• Automatic—Automatic taxation policy.
ConnectApi.ExternalCredentialParameterType
242
• AdditionalRefreshStatusCode—4xx HTTP status codes that trigger Salesforce to refresh expired or invalid access
tokens for named credentials, in addition to the standard 401 HTTP status code response.
ConnectApi.MaintenanceType
• MaintenanceAndAvailable—Maintenance with availability.
ConnectApi.OrchestrationInstanceStatus
This enum has these new values.
• Closed
• Discontinued
• Error
• Suspended
API: New and Changed Items

Access more data objects and metadata types in API version 61.0.
IN THIS SECTION:
Access more data through these new and changed standard objects.
New and Changed Data Model Objects
Access more data groupings through these new and changed data model objects (DMOs).
Receive real-time notifications from Salesforce by subscribing to the channels of these new and changed standard platform events.
Connect REST API
Integrate mobile apps, intranet sites, and third-party web applications with Salesforce using Connect REST API.
CRM Analytics REST API
Retrieve datasets by type of dataflow and get folder associations using the CRM Analytics REST API. Make GET requests with the CRM
Analytics Connect API collection.
Metadata API
Access more metadata through these new and changed metadata types.
SOQL
The updates to SOQL errors and functionality in this release could affect existing code that relies on old errors and functionality.
Access more metadata through these new and changed Tooling API objects.
User Interface API
Do more with lists, and work with more objects.

243
Salesforce Overall
REMOVED: The CustomObjectUserLicenseMetrics object is removed
Removed in API version 59.0, CustomObjectUserLicenseMetrics has been deleted from the Object Reference for the Salesforce
Platform.
Commerce
Set the default order processing time and processing time unit for a location
Use the new DefaultProcessingTime and DefaultProcessingTimeUnit fields on the existing Location object.
By default, field-level security hides these fields.
Set the default order pickup time for a location
Use the new DefaultPickupTime field on the existing Location object. By default, field-level security hides these fields.
Set the fulfilling business hours for a location
Use the new FulfillingBusinessHours field on the existing Location object. By default, field-level security hides these
fields.
Add shipping services provided by a shipping carrier
Use the new ShippingCarrierMethod field on the existing OrderDeliveryMethod object.
Set earliest and last estimated delivery dates
Use the new EarliestEstimatedDeliveryDate and LastEstimatedDeliveryDate fields on the existing
OrderItem and OrderItemSummary objects.
Set earliest and last estimated delivery times
Use the new EarliestEstimatedDeliveryTime and LastEstimatedDeliveryTime fields on the existing
OrderItem and OrderItemSummary objects.
Create a unique reference ID for a delivery estimation
Use the new DeliveryEstimationReference field on the existing OrderItem and OrderItemSummary objects.
Set the time zone that estimated delivery times are based on
Use the new DeliveryEstimationTimeZone field on the existing OrderItem and OrderItemSummary objects.
Set the date when a fulfillment order becomes active and is closed
Use the new ActiveDate and ClosedDatefields on the existing OrderItem and OrderItemSummary objects.
View shipping carrier information
Use the new ShippingCarrier and ShippingCarrierMethodId objects.
BEHAVIOR CHANGE: The PriceAdjustmentCauseId is now nillable on the CartItemPriceAdjustment and
WebCartAdjustmentGroup objects
You can now set the PriceAdjustmentCauseId field to null and empty the content.
View cart and item level adjustment amounts for a cart
Use the new TotalCartLevelAdjAmount and TotalProductItemAdjAmount fields on the existing WebCart object.
View unit price adjustment amounts for a cart item
Use the new UnitAdjustedPriceWithItemAdj and UnitItemAdjustmentAmount fields on the existing CartItem
object.
Specify the state of the payment authorization reversal
Use the new value Pending in the existing Status field on the existing PaymentAuthAdjustment object.
View delivery estimation details for a delivery method
Use the new TransitTimeMin, TransitTimeMax, TransitTimeUnit, ProcessTime, and ProcessTimeUnit
fields on the existing CartDeliveryGroupMethod object.
244
Specify the ID of the saved payment method record

Use the new SavedPaymentMethodId field on the existing CardPaymentMethod object. Introduced in API version 60.0, this
field has been added to the Object Reference Guide.
Set shipping processing time and processing time unit
Use the new ProcessTime and ProcessTimeUnit fields on the existing ShippingConfigurationSet object.
BEHAVIOR CHANGE: The GatewayReference is now idLookup on the SavedPaymentMethod object
You can now use the GatewayReference field to specify a SavedPaymentMethod record in an upsert call.
Show shipping carrier information and set shipping transit times for a standard shipping rate.
Use the new ShippingCarrierMethodId,TransitTimeMin, TransitTimeMax, and TransitTimeUnit fields
on the existing StandardShippingRate object.
Customization
Specify which active user access policy is applied when a user meets the criteria for multiple policies
Use the new Order field on the existing UserAccessPolicy object.
Development
View the scratch org snapshots that can be used to create another scratch org
Use the new OrgSnapshot standard object.
Determine the org snapshot from which a scratch org was created
Use the new Snapshot field of the ActiveScratchOrg and ScratchOrgInfo standard objects.
Event Monitoring
Track network performance metrics
Use the new UI Telemetry Resource Timing and UI Telemetry Navigation Timing event types.
Experience Cloud
Add an API name when you create an enhanced CMS workspace
Use the new ApiName field on the existing ManagedContentSpace object.
Field Service
Apply a work capacity limit to an entire service territory
Use the new IsSvcTerrOnlyLimit field on the WorkCapacityLimit and WorkCapacityUsage objects.
Store historical data for AssignedResource records
Use the new AssignedResourceHistory associated object.
Connect a Quote to a Work Order
Use the new RelatedWorkId field on the Quote object. The field is automatically populated when a quote is created from a
work order.
Determine How Mobile Workers Navigate to Destinations
Use the new DestinationType field on the FieldServiceMobileSettings object.
Set Up Actions Based on the Geolocation of Mobile Workers
Use the new GeolocationBasedAction object.
245
Marketing Cloud
Create a brief, which contains the purpose, key message, and target audience for a campaign.
Use the new Brief object. This object is available only in Marketing Cloud Growth.
Associate a brief with a campaign.
Use the new BriefId field on the existing Campaigns object to add a brief to a campaign. This field is available only in Marketing
Cloud Growth.
Revenue
Capture successful order asset creation and order item relationships
Use the new IsSuccess and OrderItemId fields on the existing CreateAssetOrderDtlEvent object.
Determine which billing schedules to include in an invoice batch run
Use the new InvoiceBatchRunCriteria object.
Track the date your invoices are posted
Use the new PostedDate field on the existing Invoice object.
Accurately track the status of your invoices
Use the new supported values Draft, Draft In Progress, and Posting In Progress in the existing Status
field on the Invoice object.
Sales
Set the access on call collections
Use the new AccessLevel field on the existing SharingRecordCollectionMember object.
BEHAVIOR CHANGE: Identify roles for forecast types when user role hierarchy and territory hierarchy are in use
When querying forecast data for a user in forecasting objects, ensure that the filter criteria on the primary ID or
ForecastingTypeID field are for the same hierarchy. If a filter isn’t included, the role from the user role hierarchy is returned
by default.
Reference team adjustment values that include a subordinate’s owner and manager adjustment, but not the forecast
manager’s owner and manager adjustment
Use API names SubordinateOverrideAmount1, SubordinateOverrideAmount2, SubordinateOverrideAmount3,
SubordinateOverrideQuantity1, SubordinateOverrideQuantity2, and SubordinateOverrideQuantity3 in the Formula field on the
existing ForecastingColumnDefinition object.
Add buyer profile information to contacts
Use the new BuyerAttributes, DepartmentGroup, and TitleType fields on the existing Contact object. To see these
fields on a Contact record, add them to the record layout.
Indicate whether Automatic Contact Creation created the contact
Use the new ContactSource field on the existing Contact object.
Let Einstein Coach generate feedback for sales reps from the transcription of a video call
Use the new PromptTemplate and Type fields on the LearningPractice object and the new CallId field on the
LearningItemSubmission object.
Track more complex sales activity across multiple objects with composite goals for Enablement outcomes and milestones
Use the new CompositeMilestoneType field on the EnblProgramTaskDefinition object. Also, use the new
EnblProgramTaskMeasure object.
246
Provide more transparency to Enablement users

Use the new ContributingRecordCount field on the EnblProgramTaskProgress object. Also, use the new
EnblPgmTaskMeasureProgress object.
Support Enablement programs and measures in Metadata API
Use the new EnablementProgramDefinition object, the new EnablementProgramDefinitionId field on the
EnablementProgram object, and the new DeveloperName field on the EnblProgramSection object. Also, use the
EnablementMeasureDefinition object.
Support in-app guidance prompts and walkthroughs in Experience Cloud sites
Use the new Experience and ExperienceContextId fields on the PromptVersion object. Introduced in API version 60.0,
these fields have been added to the Object Reference for the Salesforce Platform.
Salesforce Flow
View the logging data for a FlowOrchestrationInstance, FlowOrchestrationStageInstance, or FlowOrchestrationStepInstance
Use the new FlowOrchestrationLog object.
Obtain more information about a flow
Use the new ActiveVersionId, ApiVersion, Builder, FlowType, IsLightningAppEnabled, IsOverridable,
IsTemplate, Manageable State, NamespacePrefix, OverriddenById, OverriddenFlowId,
SourceTemplateId, and TriggerObjectOrEventLabel fields on the existing FlowRecord object.
Obtain more information about a flow version
Use the new ApiVersion, Builder, Description, FlowType, IsOverridable, IsTemplate, OverriddenById,
OverriddenFlowId, RunInMode, SourceTemplateId, Status, and TriggerObjectOrEventLabel fields
on the existing FlowRecordVersion object.
Relate the appointment category to a shift
Use the new AppointmentCategoryId field on the Shift object.
Set the maximum number of attendees for a group service appointment in a shift
Use the new AttendeeLimit field on the ShiftWorkTopic object.
Set the maximum number of attendees for a group service appointment for a work type or work type group
Use the new AttendeeLimit field on the WorkType object.
Specify the users who can access the group service appointment
Use the new GroupAppointmentAccessTypefield on the ServiceAppointment object.
Determine whether an attendee has attended the service appointment
Use the new HasAttended field on the ServiceAppointmentAttendee object.
Determine whether the appointment category of the service appointment is of type group
Use the new IsGroup field on the AppointmentCategory object. The field also determines whether work types and shifts support
the group category.
REMOVED: The Attended value in the Status field is removed
Instead, use the new Enrolled and Unenrolled values on the ServiceAppointmentAttendee object.

Review blocked redirections and resource requests
Use the new BrowserPolicyViolation object.
247
REMOVED: The CspViolation object is removed

To view resource requests that are blocked due to your content security policy (CSP) directives, use the BrowserPolicyViolation object
instead.
Configure a custom one-time password delivery handler for Experience Cloud site identity verification use cases
Use the new CustomOtpDeliveryHandlerId field (beta) on the existing NetworkAuthApiSettings object.
Use the login history to track the origin IP address for logins with one or more proxies
Use the new ForwardedForIp field on the existing LoginHistory object.
Use event monitoring to track the origin IP address for logins with one or more proxies
Use the new FORWARDED_FOR_IP field on the existing Login event type.
Customize the welcome email that users receive during passwordless registration
Use the new PwdlessRegEmailTemplateId field on the existing Network object.
BEHAVIOR CHANGE: Session revocation is now tracked in the Logout event type
The Logout event type now tracks when a user revokes access to a connected app, when a user calls the Salesforce revocation
endpoint, and when Salesforce disables a connected app.
Store the configuration for a custom metric within Security Center
Use the new TenantSecurityCustomMetricSetup (Beta) object.
Store custom metric data within Security Center
Use the new TenantSecurityCustomMetricStat (Beta) object.
Track the fields encrypted under your Shield Platform Encryption policy
Use the new TenantSecurityEncryptedField object.
Surface event data stored in standard objects
Use the new event log objects (beta): AnalyticsChangeEventLog, AnalyticsDownloadEventLog, AnalyticsInteractEventLog,
AnalyticsPerfEventLog, ApexCalloutEventLog, ApexExecutionEventLog, ApexExtlCalloutEventLog, ApexRestApiEventLog,
ApexSoapApiEventLog, ApexTriggerEventLog, ApexUnexpectedExcpEventLog, ApiTotalUsageEventLog, AsyncReportRunEventLog,
AuraRequestEventLog, BulkApiEventLog, BulkApi2EventLog, ConcurApexLimitEventLog, FlowNavMetricEventLog,
KnowledgeArticleEventLog, LightningLoggerEventLog, LightningPageViewEventLog, LoginEventLog, LoginAsEventLog,
ReportEventLog, RestApiEventLog, SearchEventLog, SearchClickEventLog, SoapApiEventLog, TransactionSecurityEventLog, UriEventLog,
and VisualforceRequestEventLog.
Review an OAuth custom scope’s namespace
Use the new NamespacePrefix field on the existing OauthCustomScope object.
Use the new OptionsEmbeddedLoginEnabled field on the existing Network object.
248
Service
Track how enhanced messaging sessions end
Use the new EndedByType field on the existing MessagingSession object.
Track the preferred language of messaging users
Use the new EndUserLanguage field on the existing MessagingSession object.
View whether a messaging channel is standard or enhanced
Use the new PlatformType field on the existing MessagingChannel object. This field was previously available only in the UI.
View details about a connector to a third-party knowledge source for Unified Knowledge
Use the existing ExtKnowledgeConnector object.
Your Account
View contract information related to your organization’s Salesforce subscription
Use the new SalesforceContract virtual object.
View invoice information related to your organization’s Salesforce contracts
Use the new SalesforceInvoice virtual object.
View payment information related to your organization’s Salesforce invoices
Use the new SalesforcePayment virtual object.
View quote information related to your organization’s Salesforce contracts
Use the new SalesforceQuote virtual object.
New and Changed Data Model Objects

Access more data groupings through these new and changed data model objects (DMOs).
Data Cloud
Reference unstructured data in Data Cloud
For unstructured data, the data resides in files in an external blob store, such as Amazon S3. The unstructured data is referenced
directly in Data Cloud by an unstructured data lake object (UDLO).
Consume unstructured data in Salesforce
Workloads in Data Cloud that consume unstructured data do so through unstructured data model objects (UDMOs). When you
create a UDLO, you map it to a UDMO.
Store chunked object fields in Data Cloud
When you create a search index configuration, Data Cloud creates a chunk data model object (CDMO). Each field that you supply a
chunking strategy to is stored in the chunk data model object, from which Data Cloud references the chunked data.
Store generated vector embeddings in Data Cloud
When you create a search index configuration, Data Cloud creates a vector data model object (VDMO). This object stores generated
vector embeddings and a unique identifier for each chunk in Data Cloud.
Search
View search-related data on articles, queries, and interactions, such as clicks and hovers
Use the new Search Results DMO, Search Queries DMO, and Search Interactions DMO.
249

Receive real-time notifications from Salesforce by subscribing to the channels of these new and changed standard platform events.

Track the origin IP address for logins with multiple proxies
Use the new ForwardedForIp field on LoginEvent and LoginEventStream to see the origin IP address for logins that redirect
users with multiple HTTP proxies.
Identify the Experience Cloud site related to an insecure external asset
Use the new NETWORK_ID field on the Insecure External Assets event type.
Determine the CSP HTTP header that identified an insecure external asset
Use the new DISPOSITION field on the Insecure External Assets event type.
View the message for the error blocking the download request, if any.
Use the new DOWNLOAD_ERROR field on the Wave Download event type.
Connect REST API

Integrate mobile apps, intranet sites, and third-party web applications with Salesforce using Connect REST API.
IN THIS SECTION:
Connect REST API Rate Limit Changes for New Orgs
To avoid potentially restrictive per user, per application, per hour Connect REST API rate limits, requests from orgs created in Summer
’24 and later count toward the per org, per 24-hour Salesforce Platform API rate limit. For these new orgs, only requests that require
Chatter are subject to the per user, per application, per hour rate limit.
These resources are new or have changes.
Changed Connect REST API Request Bodies
These request bodies have changes.
Changed Connect REST API Response Bodies
These response bodies have changes.
SEE ALSO:
Connect REST API Developer Guide
Apex Reference Guide: ConnectApi Namespace
Connect REST API Rate Limit Changes for New Orgs

To avoid potentially restrictive per user, per application, per hour Connect REST API rate limits, requests from orgs created in Summer
’24 and later count toward the per org, per 24-hour Salesforce Platform API rate limit. For these new orgs, only requests that require
Chatter are subject to the per user, per application, per hour rate limit.
250
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and all versions of the Salesforce mobile app in all editions in
all API versions.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Developer Limits and Allocations Quick Reference : API Request Limits and Allocations

Commerce
Use asynchronous product import
The /commerce/management/webstores/webstoreId/product-import resource is being removed in version
63.0. Use /commerce/management/import/product/jobs instead.
Add a coupon to a checkout
Make a POST request to the new
/commerce/webstores/webstoreId/checkouts/activeOrCheckoutId/coupons resource.
New request body: Checkout Coupon Input
New response body: Checkout Coupon
Remove a coupon from a checkout
Make a DELETE request to the new
/commerce/webstores/webstoreId/checkouts/activeOrCheckoutId/coupons/cartCouponId
resource.
Add a product to a store and associate it with specified category and media records and the store’s default records
Make a POST request to the new /commerce/management/webstore/${webstoreId}/composite-products
resource.
Update a product record to associate it with specified category and media records
Make a PUT request to the new
/commerce/management/webstore/${webstoreId}/composite-products/${productId} resource.
Retrieve product media records in order summaries
Make a GET request to the existing /commerce/webstores/${webstoreId}/order-summaries resource.
New request parameter: includeProducts
Update an existing reservation in Omnichannel Inventory
Make a POST request to the new /commerce/oci/reservation/actions/update/ resource.
New request body: Update Reservation Input
New response body: Update Reservation
Data Cloud
Create a web or mobile connection
Make a POST request to the new /ssot/connections resource. This resource is available starting in May 2024.
New request body: Connection Input
New response body: Connection Output
251
Get a web or mobile connection

Make a GET request to the new /ssot/connections/connectionId resource. This resource is available starting in May
2024.
New response body: Connection Output
Get a list of web or mobile connections
Make a GET request to the new /ssot/connections resource. This resource is available starting in May 2024.
New response body: Connection Collection Output
Delete a web or mobile connection
Make a DELETE request to the new /ssot/connections/connectionId resource. This resource is available starting in
May 2024.
Get a list of activation records from Audience data model objects (DMOs)
Make a GET request to the new /ssot/activations/activationId/data resource. This resource is available starting
in June 2024.
New response body: Audience DMO Collection Output
Experience Cloud Sites

Get a preview URL for an Experience Cloud site page
Make a GET request to the new /connect/communities/communityId/preview-url/pages/pageApiName
resource.
New response body: Community Preview URL
Network Data Category

Update the network data category record in an Experience Cloud site
Make a GET request to the new
/connect/communities/communityId/network-data-category/networkDataCategoryId resource.
Retrieve child categories of a network data category in an Experience Cloud site
/connect/communities/communityId/network-data-category/networkDataCategoryId/child-category
resource.
New response body: Network Data Category Collection
Retrieve the hierarchy of the network data categories in an Experience Cloud site
/connect/communities/communityId/network-data-category/networkDataCategoryId/parent-path
resource.
New response body: Network Data Category Collection
Salesforce CMS
Clone a piece of managed content
Make a POST request to the new /connect/cms/contents/contentKeyOrId/clone resource.
New request body: Managed Content Document Clone Input
New response body: Managed Content Document Clone
252
Get folder hierarchy information

Make a GET request to the existing /connect/cms/folders/folderId resource.
New request parameter: contextContentSpaceId
SEE ALSO:
Connect REST API Developer Guide: B2B and D2C Commerce Resources

Commerce
Cart Input
This request body has this new property.
Cart Item Input
Salesforce CMS
Managed Content Input
Managed Content Publish Input
Managed Content Unpublish Input

Commerce
Cart Item
This response body has these new properties.
• unitAdjustedPriceWithItemAdj—Unit price, including both tier and item level discounts, for the item. This value
is informational only and isn't used in pricing calculations.
• unitItemAdjustmentAmount—Item level adjustments made to the unit price for the item. This value is informational
253
Cart Summary
• totalAmountWithItemAdjustment—Total amount, including both tier and item level discounts but excluding cart
level discounts, for all items in the cart. This value is informational only and isn't used in pricing calculations.
• totalCartLevelAdjustmentAmount—Total cart level discount amount for the cart. This value is informational only
and isn't used in pricing calculations.
Delivery Method
• earliestEstimatedDeliveryTime—Earliest estimated delivery date and time for the delivery in ISO 8601 format.
Determined by the time at checkout, plus processTime, plus transitTimeMin.
• latestEstimatedDeliveryTime—Latest estimated delivery date and time for the delivery in ISO 8601 format.
Determined by the time at checkout, plus processTime, plus transitTimeMax.
• processTime—Merchant-specified process time for the delivery. Process time includes the time between when an order is
placed and when the shipment is given to the shipping carrier.
• processTimeUnit—Unit of time used to define processTime.
• transitTimeMax—Maximum estimate of transit time for the delivery. Transit time includes the time between when a
shipping carrier receives a shipment and when the shipment arrives at the delivery address.
• transitTimeMin—Minimum estimate of transit time for the delivery. Transit time includes the time between when a
shipping carrier receives a shipment and when the shipment arrives at the delivery address.
• transitTimeUnit—Unit of time used to define transitTimeMax and transitTimeMin.
Einstein
Einstein LLM Generation Item
This response body has this new property.
• contentQualityRepresentation—Specifies whether the generated response contains toxic language (true) or
not (false).
Flow Orchestration
Orchestration Work Item
• createdDate—Date when the work item was created.
• lastModifiedDate—Date when the work item was last modified.

Lightning Knowledge Article Version Collection
• baseUrl—Lightning Web Runtime (LWR) base URL for the Knowledge Article Detail page.
• categoryGroupName—Name of the network data category group.
254
• categoryOrGroupLabel—Label of the data category or data category group.

• relativeUrl—Relative URL of the network data category.
Service Catalog Item Collection
• baseUrl—Lightning Web Runtime (LWR) base URL for the Knowledge Article Detail page.
Service Catalog Item
This response body has this changed property.
• imageID—Image URL of the service catalog item. This property was previously named imageUrl.
Salesforce CMS
Managed Content Document
Managed Content Space
• apiName—API name of the managed content space.
Managed Content Space Folder Detail
• folderType—Type of folder.
• isShared—Specifies whether the folder is shared with another workspace (true) or not (false).
CRM Analytics REST API

Retrieve datasets by type of dataflow and get folder associations using the CRM Analytics REST API. Make GET requests with the CRM
Analytics Connect API collection.
IN THIS SECTION:
New and Changed CRM Analytics REST API Resources
Changed CRM Analytics REST API Request Bodies
Changed CRM Analytics REST API Response Bodies
New and Changed CRM Analytics REST API Resources

Get a collection of datasets filtered by dataflow type
Make a GET request to the /wave/datasets resource.
New request parameters: typeOfDataflow
Get a collection of folder associations
Make a GET request to the new /wave/folders/folderId/associations resource.
255
Request parameters: assetTypes

Response body includes new App Template Association Collection and App Template Association representations.
Changed CRM Analytics REST API Request Bodies

Aggregate Flex Query Step Input
The request body has this new property.
• dataspace—The dataspace name for a Data Cloud object.
Cdp Step Input
The request body has this new property.
Changed CRM Analytics REST API Response Bodies

Aggregate Flex Step
The response body has this new property.
Cdp Step
Wave Features
• canWriteToDataCloud—Indicates whether Analytics data can write to Data Cloud data model objects (true) or not
(false).
Metadata API
Analytics
Enable new Lightning Experience dashboard change owner feature
To enable the dashboard change owner feature, use the enableDashboardChangeOwnerPref field on the existing
AnalyticsSettings metadata type.
Customization
Migrate Search Manager configurations between Salesforce orgs
Use the new SearchCustomization metadata type to migrate Search Manager configurations.
Configure the search index in your Salesforce org
Use the new SearchOrgWideObjectConfig metadata type to configure the org-wide search index.
256
Use the new order field on the existing UserAccessPolicy metadata type.
BEHAVIOR CHANGE: Only the properties of certain fields are retrieved or deployed on Data Cloud objects
The CustomField attributes you can retrieve or deploy on a Data Cloud object depend on the custom field data type. Data
Cloud objects support a subset of data types. For more information, see CustomField in the Metadata API Developer Guide.
Translate the description of custom applications
Use the description field on the existing CustomApplicationTranslation metadata type.
Development
Add Real-Time Event Monitoring events to a custom channel
Create a channel that can hold Real-Time Event Monitoring events by setting the new eventType field on the PlatformEventChannel
metadata type.
Einstein
Manage Einstein Copilot actions and customize the planner service
Use the new GenAiFunction and GenAiPlanner types.
Learn that a Field Used in a Prediction is the Interaction’s DateTime
Use the SourceDate value for the type enumeration on the existing MLFieldType metadata type. Introduced in API version
54.0, this value has been added to the Metadata API Developer Guide.

Enable or disable Financial Account Management Standard Objects setting
Use the new enableFinancialAccountMgmt field on the the existing IndustriesSettings metadata type to indicate the
status of the Financial Account Management Standard Objects setting for your org.

Retrieve and deploy marketing workspaces
Use the new marketing workspace type folder on the existing DigitalExperienceBundle type to retrieve and deploy forms and
referenced images in marketing workspaces.
Share content across marketing workspaces
Use the new DigitalExperienceFolderShare subtype on the existing DigitalExperienceBundle type to share source marketing workspaces
with target workspaces in Marketing Cloud Growth.
Sales
Enable or disable Automatic Contact Creation, Automatic Contact Enhancements, and Buyer Relationship Map features
Use the autoContactCreationPref, autoContactEnrichmentPref, and relationshipGraphPref fields
on the existing EACSettings metadata type.
Retrieve Enablement programs and measures from a sandbox and deploy them to production with change sets and Salesforce
CLI
Use the new EnablementProgramDefinition and EnablementMeasureDefinition metadata types.
257
Deploy forecast types with groups, and identify group values

Use the new forecastingGroupDeveloperName and hasCustomGroup fields on the existing ForecastingType
metadata type, to indicate that a type includes a forecast group, based on a custom picklist. Use the new ForecastingGroup and
ForecastingGroupItem metadata subtypes on the existing ForecastingTypeSettings to identify the group and its values.
Salesforce Flow
Lock or unlock a record for editing while an approval is in process, and specify a user, group, queue, or user role that can
edit the record while it’s locked
Use the new lockRecord value, which is in the existing actionType field on the existing Flow metadata type.
Check whether a value is blank in a flow or orchestration or whether a value is empty in a flow
Use the new isBlank value or isEmpty value, which is in the existing operator field on the existing FlowCondition subtype
of the existing Flow metadata type.
Check whether a value is blank or is empty in a flow test
Use the new isBlank value or isEmpty value, which is in the existing operator field on the existing FlowTestCondition
subtype of the existing FlowTest metadata type.
Check for matching records before creating new ones in the Create Records element
Use the new filterLogic, filters, operationMultMatchingRecords, operationOneMatchingRecord,
and operationZeroMatchingRecords fields on the existing FlowRecordCreate subtype of the existing Flow metadata
type.

Mimic the behavior when browsers block third-party cookies
Use the new isFirstPartyCookieUseRequired field on the existing MyDomainSettings metadata type.
Specify more 4xx HTTP status codes to refresh access tokens for named credentials
Use the new AdditionalRefreshStatusCode value in the existing parameterType field on the
ExternalCredentialParameter subtype of the ExternalCredential metadata type.
Configure OAuth handler policies for external client apps
Use the new apexHandler and executeHandlerAs fields on the existing ExtlClntAppOauthConfigurablePolicies metadata
type.
Specify custom scopes for external client apps
Use the new commaSeparatedCustomScopes field on the existing ExtlClntAppOauthConfigurablePolicies metadata type.
Use an external client app for headless login, passwordless login, and guest user variations of the Authorization Code and
Credentials Flow
Use the new isCodeCredFlowEnabled and isCodeCredPostOnly fields on the existing ExtlClntAppGlobalOauthSettings
metadata type.
Configure external client app OAuth policies for the guest user variation of the Authorization Code and Credentials Flow
Use the new guestJwtTimeout and isGuestCodeCredFlowEnabled fields on the existing
ExtlClntAppOauthConfigurablePolicies metadata type.
Enable an external client app to issue JSON Web Token (JWT)-based access tokens as a developer
Use the new isNamedUserJwtEnabled field on the existing ExtlClntAppGlobalOauthSettings metadata type.
Enable an external client app to issue JWT-based access tokens as an admin
Use the new isNamedUserJwtEnabled and namedUserJwtTimeout fields on the existing
ExtlClntAppOauthConfigurablePolicies metadata type.
258
Configure an external client app for the OAuth 2.0 asset token flow
Use these new fields on the existing ExtlClntAppOauthSettings metadata type.
• areAttributesIncludedInAssetToken
• areCustomPermsIncludedInAssetToken
• assetTokenAudiences
• assetTokenSigningCertificate
• assetTokenValidity
Service
Track external interactions in messaging channels
Use the new externalInteractionId, externalInteractionName, and externalInteractionType fields
on the existing MessagingChannelStandardParameter subtype of the MessagingChannel metadata type.
Define a messaging component for Enhanced Messaging channel or Messaging for In-App and Web session
Use the new ConversationMessageDefinition metadata type. Introduced in API version 59.0, this type has been added to the Metadata
API Developer Guide.
Check whether a key is extracted automatically or manually in an OCR sample document
Use the new isAutoExtractedValue field on the existing OcrSampleDocumentField subtype of the OcrSampleDocument
metadata type. Introduced in API version 57.0, this field has been added to the Metadata API Developer Guide.
SOQL
The updates to SOQL errors and functionality in this release could affect existing code that relies on old errors and functionality.
Changed Error Codes

The new error code MALFORMED_QUERY replaces the error code INVALID_QUERY_FIILTER_OPERATOR.
Changed Functionality
Negative currency values are now supported in queries such as SELECT Name FROM Invoice__c WHERE Balance__c
< USD-500.
Changed Error Messages

These cases use example SOQL queries to show how the resulting error messages have changed.
• Invalid SOQL queries
– SELECT Id FROM Account USING everything
• Old: unexpected token: '<EOF>'
• New: unexpected token: 'everything'
– SELECT ParentId, Value FROM InteractionRefOrValue WHERE ParentId IN ()

• Old: unexpected token: ')'
• New: unexpected token: 'ParentId IN ()'
– SELECT FROM ServicePresenceStatus
259
• Old: unexpected token: 'FROM'

• New: unexpected token: 'SELECT FROM'
– SELECT Id from $casecomment WHERE isdeleted = false

• Old: line 1:15 no viable alternative at character '$'
• New: line 1:15 unexpected token: '$'
– SELECT lastmodifieddate, companyna fr$om user

• Old: unexpected token: user
• New: missing value at 'user'
• Quotes surrounding an unexpected token

– SELECT annualrevenue , parentid FROM Account
WHERE (isDeleted = false AND NumberOfEmployees != 100)
OR (isDeleted = false AND Site = '999')
AND ParentId = '000000000000000' LIMIT 50000 OFFSET 0
• Old: unexpected token: AND

• New: unexpected token: 'AND'
– SELECT Id, HP_Lead_ID__c,ResponseId__c, Status, Status_Reason__c,

Nurture_Reasons__c, Nurture_Type__c, Lead_Close_Reasons__c, FirstName,
LastName,
Name, Email, Phone,MobilePhone, Company, Street, City, State, PostalCode,
Country, Region__c,
OwnerId,owner.name, HPD_Opportunity_ID__c, ProductFamily__c, Products__c,
Reseller_Account__c,Segment__c, Sub_Segment__c FROM Lead
WHERE RecordType.name='Commercial'
AND ProductFamily__c<>'IA – Software'
AND Company LIKE '%GM%' OR Domain__c='gm.com'
• Old: unexpected token: OR

• New: unexpected token: 'OR'
• Using NULL literals in WHERE statements with the LIKE keyword

– SELECT Id, Name, Country__c, State__c, City__c, PAN_Number__c
FROM Account WHERE PAN_Number__c LIKE NULL AND Name LIKE '%a%'
• Old: invalid operator

• New: unexpected token: 'OR'
• More than two nested functions

– SELECT convertCurrency(calendar_year(convertTimezone(lastmodifieddate))) FROM
account
• Old: expecting a right parentheses, found ‘(’
• New: unexpected token: ‘(’
• Invalid datetime literals

– SELECT Id FROM Account WHERE SystemModstamp > 2020-12-12t12:12:00-25:00
260
• Old: line 1:67 mismatched character '5' expecting set '0'..'3'

• New: Invalid datetime: 2020-12-12t12:12:00-25:00
• – SELECT Id FROM Account WHERE SystemModstamp > 2020-52-12t12:12:00-05:00

• Old: line 1:51 no viable alternative at character '5'
• New: Invalid datetime: 2020-52-12t12:12:00-05:00
• Using “WITH SECURITY_ENFORCED” without a proper Apex context setup

– SELECT Id FROM Account WITH SECURITY_ENFORCED
• Old: SECURITY_ENFORCED not allowed in this context
• New: rule soqlWithIdentifierClause failed predicate:
{this.helper.allowApexSyntax() && this.helper.hasApexContext()}?

Access more metadata through these new and changed Tooling API objects.
Customization
Use the new Order field on the existing UserAccessPolicy object.
Development
Add Real-Time Event Monitoring events to a custom channel
Create a channel that can hold Real-Time Event Monitoring events by setting the new EventType field in PlatformEventChannel.
Decrease package install time in scratch orgs
Specify FeatureEnforcement in the new SkipHandlers field of the PackageInstallRequest object.
Einstein
Manage Einstein Copilot actions and customize the planner service
Use the new GenAiFunctionDefinition and GenAiPlannerDefinition objects.

Specify more 4xx HTTP status codes to refresh access tokens for named credentials
Use the new AdditionalRefreshStatusCode value in the existing ParameterType field on the
ExternalCredentialParameter object.
User Interface API

Do more with lists, and work with more objects.
IN THIS SECTION:
New and Changed User Interface API Resources
261
Changed User Interface API Response Bodies

Supported Objects
All new standard objects are auto-enabled for use with User Interface API.
SEE ALSO:
User Interface API Developer Guide
New and Changed User Interface API Resources

Lists
Update list view metadata
Make a PATCH request to the existing /ui-api/list-info/${objectApiName}/${listViewApiName} resource.
New request body: List Info Input
Delete list view metadata
Make a DELETE request to the existing /ui-api/list-info/${objectApiName}/${listViewApiName} resource.
Get list views for an object
Make a GET request to the new /ui-api/list-info/${objectApiName} resource.
New response body: List Info Summary Collection
Create a list view for an object
Make a POST request to the new /ui-api/list-info/${objectApiName} resource.
New request body: List Info Post Input
Get metadata for a list view object
Make a GET request to the new /ui-api/list-object-info/${objectApiName} resource.
New response body: List Object Info
Get list view records and filter your results with a search term or where string
Make a GET request to the existing /ui-api/list-records/${listViewId} or
/ui-api/list-records/${objectApiName}/${listViewApiName} resource.
New request parameters: searchTerm, where
Get list view records using a request body
Make a POST request to the existing /ui-api/list-records/${objectApiName}/${listViewApiName}
resource.
New request body: List Records Input
Get list preferences for a list view
Make a GET request to the new /ui-api/list-preferences/${objectApiName}/${listViewApiName}
resource.
New response body: List Preferences
Update list preferences for a list view
Make a PATCH request to the new /ui-api/list-preferences/${objectApiName}/${listViewApiName}
resource.
262
New request body: List Preferences Input

New response body: List Preferences
DEPRECATED: These list view resources are deprecated
Task Deprecated Resources Use Instead

Get list views /ui-api/list-ui/${objectApiName} GET /ui-api/list-info/${objectApiName}
for an object
Get list view /ui-api/list-ui/${listViewId} Records:

records and /ui-api/list-ui/${objectApiName}/ GET /ui-api/list-records/${listViewId}
metadata ${listViewApiName} GET
/ui-api/list-records/${objectApiName}/${listViewApiName}
POST
/ui-api/list-records/${objectApiName}/${listViewApiName}
Metadata:
GET /ui-api/list-info/${listViewId}
GET
/ui-api/list-info/${objectApiName}/${listViewApiName}
Get most /ui-api/mru-list-records/${objectApiName} GET

recently used /ui-api/list-records/${objectApiName}/__Recent
list view
records POST
/ui-api/list-records/${objectApiName}/__Recent
Get most /ui-api/mru-list-info/${objectApiName} GET

recently used /ui-api/list-info/${objectApiName}/__Recent
list view
metadata
Get most /ui-api/mru-list-ui/${objectApiName} Records:

recently used GET
list view /ui-api/list-records/${objectApiName}/__Recent
records and
metadata POST
/ui-api/list-records/${objectApiName}/__Recent
Metadata:
GET
/ui-api/list-info/${objectApiName}/__Recent
Changed User Interface API Response Bodies

263
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Einstein
Lists
Field
This response has this changed property.
• dataType—This property supports the Anytype, JunctionIdList, and Long values.
List Column
• inlineEditAttributes—Map of record type ID to inline edit attributes for the column.
• searchable—Indicates whether the list column can be searched.
List Info
• inlineEditDetails—Inline edit details for the list.
• listReference—Object representing the list. Introduced in API version 43.0, this property was previously undocumented.
• listShares—Items that the list is shared with.
• objectApiNames—API names of objects that are returned by the list.
• scope—Scope information for the list.
• searchable—Indicates whether the list can be searched.
List Record Collection
• searchTerm—Search term specified in the request.
• where—Where string specified in the request.
Supported Objects
All new standard objects are auto-enabled for use with User Interface API.
Previously, we provided a list of objects that are supported by User Interface API in the current release. As of Summer ’23, all new standard
objects are automatically enabled for User Interface API usage.
To view new objects that are auto-enabled for User Interface API, see New and Changed Objects.
These standard objects aren’t new to your org but are new for User Interface API.
• GroupMember
• MilestoneType
• Payment
• SurveyVersion
• Territory2
SEE ALSO:
User Interface API Developer Guide: Send a Request Using Postman
User Interface API Developer Guide: Supported Objects
Einstein
264
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Einstein Features
Rights of ALBERT EINSTEIN are used with permission of The Hebrew University of Jerusalem. Represented exclusively by Greenlight.
IN THIS SECTION:
Einstein Features
Learn more about how Einstein can supercharge productivity across all Salesforce clouds. Einstein features are released as often as
monthly, so check back again soon for the latest AI solutions. Features included in the June monthly release generally become
available when Summer ’24 rolls out to your org.
Einstein Platform
Build smart solutions for your business cases with generative AI, predictive AI, and everything in between. Learn about functionality,
security, and performance improvements to AI at Salesforce. Einstein platform changes are released as often as monthly, so check
back again soon for the latest and greatest.
Einstein Features
Learn more about how Einstein can supercharge productivity across all Salesforce clouds. Einstein features are released as often as
monthly, so check back again soon for the latest AI solutions. Features included in the June monthly release generally become available
when Summer ’24 rolls out to your org.
Cloud Features Release Note

June ’24
Analytics Report Formula Generation Add Calculated Fields to Your Data Cloud Reports with Einstein
Generative AI
Field Service Pre-Work Brief Customize the Pre-Work Brief with Prompt Builder on page 285
Flow Builder Einstein for Flow Let Einstein Build a Draft Flow for You (Beta)
Industries: Contracts Contracts AI Tailor Your Default and New Field Prompts for Effective Data
Extraction
Industries: Health Cloud Assessment Generation Automate Assessment Generation With Einstein Generative AI
Industries: Net Zero Cloud ESG Reports Einstein for Net Zero Cloud
Overall Salesforce Scheduler Generate Personalized Appointment Invitation Emails with Prompt
Builder
Sales Einstein Conversation Insights Einstein Conversation Insights
Sales: Experience Cloud Einstein Sales Emails for Partners Help Partners Send Personalized Sales Emails Fast
Sales Enablement, Relationship Einstein for Sales

Selling, Sales Emails
Service Article Recommendations, Einstein for Service

Feedback Management, Work
Summaries
Service Service Catalog Einstein for Service Catalog (Beta)
265
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Einstein Platform
Einstein Platform
Build smart solutions for your business cases with generative AI, predictive AI, and everything in between. Learn about functionality,
security, and performance improvements to AI at Salesforce. Einstein platform changes are released as often as monthly, so check back
again soon for the latest and greatest.
In June’s release, Einstein Copilot end users can clear Einstein Copilot feed history and receive a confirmation request before a copilot
makes changes in your org. Prompt Builder makes it easier to ground prompts in relevant data with Record Snapshot. Plus, we’ve
expanded usage and language support.
IN THIS SECTION:
Einstein Bots
Get key information from customers by requiring an answer to certain questions. And, if you have Einstein Copilot, generate
conversational answers to customer questions by connecting the Answer Questions with Knowledge copilot action to your bot.
Einstein Copilot
Bring the power of conversational AI to your business with Einstein Copilot.
Explore new capabilities such as autoselection, metrics, and alerts. Einstein Studio's enhanced navigation and user interface simplifies
how you create and connect your AI models. Learn more about Einstein Studio in the Data Cloud release notes.
Prompt Builder
Simplify your users’ daily tasks by integrating generative-AI moments powered by prompt templates into their workflow. Create,
test, revise, customize, and manage prompt templates that incorporate your CRM data from merge fields that reference record fields,
flows, related lists, and Apex. Prompt Builder helps you to make effective prompts that safely connect you and your data with LLMs.
Use the Starter Usage Type for Lower Cost Models
Usage for Bring Your Own Large Language Models (BYO-LLMs) is now calculated with the Starter usage type. The new usage type
reduces costs for customers who bring their own models. This usage type is automatically assigned upon model configuration.
Other Changes
Enjoy expanded Einstein generative AI support for languages.
Einstein Bots
Get key information from customers by requiring an answer to certain questions. And, if you have Einstein Copilot, generate conversational
answers to customer questions by connecting the Answer Questions with Knowledge copilot action to your bot.
IN THIS SECTION:
Get the Information Your Team Needs with Required Responses
Get key information from customers by requiring an answer to certain questions. When you require a response for a Question dialog
step, the bot repeats the question until the customer’s response fits the entity requirements.
Generate conversational answers to customer questions by connecting the Answer Questions with Knowledge copilot action to
your bot. When a customer asks your bot a question that doesn’t match to a dialog, the copilot action searches for relevant information
in your knowledge articles. If the action finds information, the Einstein Copilot platform sends an AI-generated response to the bot.
Then the bot delivers the response as a message to the customer. Currently, this feature is available in English only.
266

With this update enabled, a flow initiated by a bot runs in user context. The user profile and permission sets associated with the bot,
as well as any sharing rules, determine the object permissions and field-level access of the flow. This update prevents flows initiated
by a bot from creating, reading, updating, or deleting records that the bot doesn’t have permission to access or modify. Previously,
a flow initiated by a bot ran in system context and had permission to access and modify all data. This update was first made available
in Summer ’23.
View Standard Bot Reports in the Summer ’24 Folder
Each release, Einstein Bots adds a folder that contains the latest versions of all standard bot reports. In Summer ’24, no changes affect
standard bot metric types or individual reports from Spring ’24, but you can access fresh versions of all reports in the Einstein Bot
Reports Summer ’24 folder.
Use the new invocable actions and changed metadata type for Einstein Bots. To use these actions and values, you must enable
Lightning Knowledge.
Get the Information Your Team Needs with Required Responses

Get key information from customers by requiring an answer to certain questions. When you require a response for a Question dialog
step, the bot repeats the question until the customer’s response fits the entity requirements.
How: In the Bot Builder, go to the Question dialog step that you want to require. In the Step Properties panel, enable Require a Response,
and then save your changes.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Use a Dialog Question Step (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Generate conversational answers to customer questions by connecting the Answer Questions with Knowledge copilot action to your
bot. When a customer asks your bot a question that doesn’t match to a dialog, the copilot action searches for relevant information in
your knowledge articles. If the action finds information, the Einstein Copilot platform sends an AI-generated response to the bot. Then
the bot delivers the response as a message to the customer. Currently, this feature is available in English only.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with the Einstein for Sales,
Einstein for Service, or Einstein Platform add-ons.
When: The Answer Questions with Knowledge copilot action for Einstein bots is available starting in July 2024.
Who: To use the Answer Questions with Knowledge copilot action with Einstein bots, you must have the Use Einstein Copilot for
Salesforce user permission and a Knowledge license.
267
How: Set up Einstein Copilot for Salesforce and Lightning Knowledge. Then, in the Bot Builder, go to the Bot Overview page. In the
Knowledge section of Settings, select Use features that intelligently search for knowledge articles with this bot. Then, for the
knowledge feature, select Copilot Action: Answer Questions with Knowledge.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Answer Questions with a Knowledge-Powered Copilot Action (Beta) (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Einstein Copilot

With this update enabled, a flow initiated by a bot runs in user context. The user profile and permission sets associated with the bot, as
well as any sharing rules, determine the object permissions and field-level access of the flow. This update prevents flows initiated by a
bot from creating, reading, updating, or deleting records that the bot doesn’t have permission to access or modify. Previously, a flow
initiated by a bot ran in system context and had permission to access and modify all data. This update was first made available in Summer
’23.
Setup for Einstein Bots is available only in Lightning Experience.
When: Salesforce enforces this update in Winter ’25. To get the major release upgrade date for your instance, go to Trust Status, search
Why: This update improves security by preventing you from unintentionally allowing bots to create or modify records that they don’t
have access to.
How: Before you enable this update in production, we recommend that you test your bots that run flows with this update enabled in
a sandbox or developer org. Test that the flows initiated from your bot can perform all flow operations. If a flow fails, identify the missing
permissions and add them to the user profile or permission sets associated with your bot.
SEE ALSO:
Release Updates
View Standard Bot Reports in the Summer ’24 Folder

Each release, Einstein Bots adds a folder that contains the latest versions of all standard bot reports. In Summer ’24, no changes affect
standard bot metric types or individual reports from Spring ’24, but you can access fresh versions of all reports in the Einstein Bot Reports
Summer ’24 folder.
Setup for Einstein Bots is available only in Lightning Experience.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Navigate Einstein Bot Standard Reports (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Use the new invocable actions and changed metadata type for Einstein Bots. To use these actions and values, you must enable Lightning
Knowledge.
268
Search for knowledge articles based on data category and data category groups
Use the new searchKnowledgeArticles, getDataCategoryGroups, and getDataCategoryDetails actions. Introduced in API version 56.0,
these actions have been added to the Actions Developer Guide.
Use the new searchKnowledgeArticles, getDataCategoryGroups, and getDataCategoryDetails values
in the existing actionType field on the existing Flow metadata type. Introduced in API version 56.0, these fields have been added to
the Metadata API Developer Guide.
Einstein Copilot
Bring the power of conversational AI to your business with Einstein Copilot.
Einstein Copilot features are released as often as monthly, and there’s much more to come in Summer ’24. Stay tuned! In the meantime,
we’re continuing to add features to Spring ’24 through May 2024. Check out our Spring ’24 release notes to learn more.
IN THIS SECTION:
The Mask Personally Identifiable Information (PII) Setting Has Been Removed
Copilot actions apply Einstein Trust Layer data masking by default, so the Mask personally identifiable information (PII) setting has
been removed from custom and standard copilot action inputs and outputs. The Trust Layer uses a combination of pattern matching
and machine learning techniques to automatically identify and mask PII, no additional settings required.
Users can now give a thumbs up or thumbs down on Copilot responses and let Salesforce know if the responses were helpful. When
users hover over a Copilot response and select a thumbs down, they can select a reason why the response was unhelpful, or they
can use the Other field to enter a reason not represented in the list. In the Salesforce mobile app, users can give feedback when they
long-press a system-generated response.
Users can now see responses from Einstein Copilot that combine different object types in one list. For example, a salesperson asks
Einstein Copilot, “Show me all the records owned by John Smith.” After clicking View More, the salesperson can now see accounts,
contacts, opportunities, and campaigns owned by John Smith in one list in the new All Records tab.
Have a bit of clutter in your feed after a long chat with Einstein Copilot? Clear your feed history and start fresh with a new session.
Clearing your feed history deletes previous interactions with Einstein Copilot, so if you need a response in your feed, make sure that
you saved it elsewhere.
Give Users Control in Custom Einstein Copilot Actions
When you create a custom action for Einstein Copilot, enable the Require user confirmation setting so that your users receive a
confirmation request before a copilot makes changes to your org. For example, a salesperson uses a custom action to ask Einstein
Copilot to update an opportunity’s stage that’s currently set at Prospecting. Einstein Copilot reviews the activities around the
opportunity and settles on the Negotiation stage. Before making the update, the salesperson must click Confirm to ensure that the
stage is the correct one.
Quickly add powerful functionality to a copilot with new and changed copilot standard actions.
The Mask Personally Identifiable Information (PII) Setting Has Been Removed
Copilot actions apply Einstein Trust Layer data masking by default, so the Mask personally identifiable information (PII) setting has been
removed from custom and standard copilot action inputs and outputs. The Trust Layer uses a combination of pattern matching and
machine learning techniques to automatically identify and mask PII, no additional settings required.
269
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, the Salesforce mobile app for iOS and Android, the Field Service mobile app for
iOS and Android, and Sales Cloud Everywhere in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with the Einstein for Sales, Einstein for
Service, or Einstein Platform add-on. Setup for Einstein Copilot is available on the desktop site.
When: This change applies starting the week of June 17, 2024.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Data Masking

Users can now give a thumbs up or thumbs down on Copilot responses and let Salesforce know if the responses were helpful. When
users hover over a Copilot response and select a thumbs down, they can select a reason why the response was unhelpful, or they can
use the Other field to enter a reason not represented in the list. In the Salesforce mobile app, users can give feedback when they long-press
a system-generated response.
When: On iOS and Android devices, the feature is available the week of July 1, 2024.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Einstein Audit and Feedback Data

Users can now see responses from Einstein Copilot that combine different object types in one list. For example, a salesperson asks Einstein
Copilot, “Show me all the records owned by John Smith.” After clicking View More, the salesperson can now see accounts, contacts,
opportunities, and campaigns owned by John Smith in one list in the new All Records tab.

Have a bit of clutter in your feed after a long chat with Einstein Copilot? Clear your feed history and start fresh with a new session. Clearing
your feed history deletes previous interactions with Einstein Copilot, so if you need a response in your feed, make sure that you saved it
elsewhere.
How: Use the clear history icon to clear your feed and start a new session.
270
Give Users Control in Custom Einstein Copilot Actions

When you create a custom action for Einstein Copilot, enable the Require user confirmation setting so that your users receive a confirmation
request before a copilot makes changes to your org. For example, a salesperson uses a custom action to ask Einstein Copilot to update
an opportunity’s stage that’s currently set at Prospecting. Einstein Copilot reviews the activities around the opportunity and settles on
the Negotiation stage. Before making the update, the salesperson must click Confirm to ensure that the stage is the correct one.
How: When you create a custom action, enable the Require user confirmation setting and the confirmation button shows up on the
action.

Quickly add powerful functionality to a copilot with new and changed copilot standard actions.
Availability of copilot standard actions and related prompt templates can vary by edition and license.
Week of June 17, 2024

Draft a Gift Proposal on page 429
Nonprofit and Education Cloud customers can now use Copilot Actions Fundraising Gift Proposals to streamline and expedite writing
compelling and personalized gift proposals using data in your Salesforce org. This feature is available with Einstein Copilot.
Week of June 10, 2024

Send Meeting Request on page 544
Sales users can use the new Send Meeting Request copilot action to draft a meeting request to a recipient. The email draft contains
three time slots and a link to the sender's calendar to schedule a meeting.
June ’24
New and changed copilot actions included in the June monthly release generally become available when Summer ’24 rolls out to your
org.
Answer Questions with Knowledge
Einstein Bots customers can now use the existing Answer Questions with Knowledge copilot action in a bot.
Service Catalog Item (Reference Action Type) on page 683
Service Catalog customers can use the new Service Catalog Item reference action type to create custom actions from their Service
Catalog items. Plus, access custom actions prebuilt for Service Catalog use cases in just a few clicks.

Explore new capabilities such as autoselection, metrics, and alerts. Einstein Studio's enhanced navigation and user interface simplifies
how you create and connect your AI models. Learn more about Einstein Studio in the Data Cloud release notes.
271
Where: This change applies to Data Cloud in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions. Einstein generative AI is
SEE ALSO:
AI in Data Cloud
Prompt Builder
Simplify your users’ daily tasks by integrating generative-AI moments powered by prompt templates into their workflow. Create, test,
revise, customize, and manage prompt templates that incorporate your CRM data from merge fields that reference record fields, flows,
related lists, and Apex. Prompt Builder helps you to make effective prompts that safely connect you and your data with LLMs.
IN THIS SECTION:
With Record Snapshots, it’s easier than ever to use your Salesforce data in Prompt Builder. Record Snapshots brings a new way to
ground your prompts, by automatically including data available on the user’s page layout for an object with one resource.

With Record Snapshots, it’s easier than ever to use your Salesforce data in Prompt Builder. Record Snapshots brings a new way to ground
your prompts, by automatically including data available on the user’s page layout for an object with one resource.
When: Record Snapshots is available on a rolling basis starting in sandbox environments on June 5, 2024 and in production on June 12,
2024.
How: From the resource picker in Prompt Builder, select an input object of the prompt template, and then select Record Snapshot.
Then, craft a prompt as you normally do, and Record Snapshot grounds the prompt with data available on the user's page layout for the
object.
SEE ALSO:
Ground with Record Snapshots
Use the Starter Usage Type for Lower Cost Models

Usage for Bring Your Own Large Language Models (BYO-LLMs) is now calculated with the Starter usage type. The new usage type reduces
costs for customers who bring their own models. This usage type is automatically assigned upon model configuration.
272
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Experience Cloud
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with an Einstein for Sales, Einstein
for Platform, or Einstein for Service add-on. All Einstein 1 Editions, Marketing Cloud - Growth - Enterprise Edition, and Marketing Cloud
- Growth - Unlimited Edition.
SEE ALSO:
Einstein Generative AI Rate Card
Data Cloud Billable Usage Types
Einstein Usage
Einstein Generative AI Rate Card
Data Cloud Billable Usage Types
Other Changes
Enjoy expanded Einstein generative AI support for languages.
IN THIS SECTION:
Use Supported Locales in the Einstein Generative AI Platform
The Einstein Generative AI Platform supports English, French, German, Italian, Japanese, and Spanish in all regions.
Use Supported Locales in the Einstein Generative AI Platform

The Einstein Generative AI Platform supports English, French, German, Italian, Japanese, and Spanish in all regions.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with an Einstein for Sales, Einstein
for Platform, or Einstein for Service add-on.
How: All features listed in Einstein Generative AI Features support English. Some features or their components can support additional
languages.
SEE ALSO:
Einstein Generative AI Supported Languages and Locales
Experience Cloud
insights into site visitor interactions. Elevate your site with new styling features for forms and buttons, streamlined search options, and
increased control over the layout and spacing of your LWR sites. Improve your visitor login experience with a new integration framework
for headless login and guest user identity flows. Stay productive on the go with a collection of updates to the Mobile Publisher app.
IN THIS SECTION:
Prepare Your LWR and Aura Sites for Design System Architecture Updates
To support future UI changes, we’re modifying the internal implementation of Salesforce Lightning Design System (SLDS) styles,
custom properties, and Salesforce Lightning components, including standard components in site templates. In Summer ’24, we
expect these changes to have little to no impact on your site customizations. However, if your site customizes Salesforce components
by overriding their CSS, we recommend that you instead use supported techniques. Otherwise, your site can’t adopt future product
innovations of the UI without experiencing visual regressions.
273
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Prepare Your LWR and Aura Sites for Design System
Architecture Updates
Upgrade Your App with the Latest Features from Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud
Protect your Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud app with new security features, such as user opt-in biometric login (beta) and
customizable mobile security policies. To make sure that your Android app meets Google’s requirements for notifications and
permissions, submit the required Firebase information and permission description for posting notifications. Prepare your users for
the new device operating system minimums of Android 8 and iOS 16. Mobile Publisher Android apps distributed with the legacy
Managed Public option no longer receive app updates in Summer ’24 and later releases.
Aura and LWR Sites
Harness the power of Data Cloud for your enhanced LWR site and gain a deeper understanding of your site visitors. Precisely style
the layout, forms, and buttons on your LWR site with an abundance of new styling properties in Experience Builder. Use Search
Manager, now generally available, to deliver relevant search results and create search configurations. Work more efficiently with the
ability to see updates to dependent picklists in the Record Detail component. For your Aura, LWR, and Visualforce sites, use your
sandbox environment to try upgraded record components based on the Lightning web components framework.
Site Performance
Enjoy faster page load times and improved security and SEO for LWR sites in the Experience Delivery pilot. Public site pages built in
Visualforce also load more quickly thanks to new caching behavior. Update references to your old force.com sites to ensure continued
access.
New features improve the login experience to your Experience Cloud sites. For off-platform apps, use the new integration framework
to set up headless login and guest user identity flows. Control who can manage custom domains and URLs with a new, more targeted
permission. Audit more settings for Visualforce sites in Site History, and switch to a single domain certificate if you’re using a shared
domain certificate for your Salesforce CDN.
Prepare Your LWR and Aura Sites for Design System Architecture Updates
To support future UI changes, we’re modifying the internal implementation of Salesforce Lightning Design System (SLDS) styles, custom
properties, and Salesforce Lightning components, including standard components in site templates. In Summer ’24, we expect these
changes to have little to no impact on your site customizations. However, if your site customizes Salesforce components by overriding
their CSS, we recommend that you instead use supported techniques. Otherwise, your site can’t adopt future product innovations of
the UI without experiencing visual regressions.
Where: This change applies to Aura and LWR sites accessed through Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance,
How: For information about supported and unsupported customization techniques, and how to update your site, see the SLDS Architecture
Updates FAQ.
SEE ALSO:
Upgrade Your App with the Latest Features from Mobile Publisher for
Experience Cloud
Protect your Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud app with new security features, such as user opt-in biometric login (beta) and
customizable mobile security policies. To make sure that your Android app meets Google’s requirements for notifications and permissions,
submit the required Firebase information and permission description for posting notifications. Prepare your users for the new device
operating system minimums of Android 8 and iOS 16. Mobile Publisher Android apps distributed with the legacy Managed Public option
no longer receive app updates in Summer ’24 and later releases.
274
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Aura and LWR Sites
Where: This change applies to apps created with Mobile Publisher for Aura and LWR sites in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and
Developer editions.
How: Learn about all the new Mobile Publisher features and announcements for your app in Mobile Publisher Summer ’24 release notes
on page 491.
Aura and LWR Sites

Harness the power of Data Cloud for your enhanced LWR site and gain a deeper understanding of your site visitors. Precisely style the
layout, forms, and buttons on your LWR site with an abundance of new styling properties in Experience Builder. Use Search Manager,
now generally available, to deliver relevant search results and create search configurations. Work more efficiently with the ability to see
updates to dependent picklists in the Record Detail component. For your Aura, LWR, and Visualforce sites, use your sandbox environment
to try upgraded record components based on the Lightning web components framework.
IN THIS SECTION:
Integrate with Data Cloud to Harness Site Data (Generally Available)
Data is the new currency of business and an important tool for understanding how to best serve your customers. To collect a
comprehensive view of your customers and then use those insights to create enhanced analytics and personalized, one-to-one
experiences for every site visitor, connect Data Cloud to your enhanced LWR sites. After connecting to Data Cloud, your integration
gathers user data from your site, such as the user’s profile and site engagement. That information is then funneled to Data Cloud to
build user profiles, create analytics, suggest individualized recommendations, and personalize your sites. When you turn on your
Data Cloud integration, it connects your site to Data Cloud so that you can start tracking events as they occur on your site.
Customize the Forms and Buttons on Your LWR Site with New Styling Features
Show off your unique brand identity with a wealth of additional style properties for forms and buttons in Experience Builder. Specify
the padding for input fields and buttons, the shape of checkboxes, the color of labels and input text, and more. Find these new style
controls in the Theme section of Experience Builder.
Polish the Layout of Your LWR Site for Every Screen Size
Enjoy more flexibility and control over the layout and spacing of your LWR site, and ensure the best presentation of your content
on any screen size. Arrange columns to be side by side or stacked, and specify the arrangement for desktop, tablet, and mobile
devices. Vertically align the components across columns to the top, center, or bottom of the column. Refine page spacing and layout
with the minimum height fields in the Section and Columns components.
Configure Search Results Layouts with Search Manager (Generally Available)
Now generally available, Search Manager makes search results from LWR sites more relevant and simplifies the process of creating
search configurations. Configure filters to surface only the search results you need, and save search configurations that you can reuse
across multiple sites. Users can apply additional filters to those configurations to further refine their searches.
See Updates to Dependent Picklists While Editing Records in LWR Sites
The Record Detail component in LWR sites now supports dependent picklist behavior. After site visitors change the value of a
controlling field, they see updates to dependent field options and values. This support also includes compound fields such as Address
when state and country/territory picklists is enabled. Previously, when site visitors edited Salesforce records in an LWR site, a change
to a value in a controlling field didn’t update the values of its dependent fields. Site visitors updated them manually.
Enable or Disable a Modernized Record Experience in Aura Sites in Your Sandbox Environment
Use upgraded records components, running on Lightning web component technology, in your Aura sites. For now, the changes
are only available in Create Record Form, Record Banner, and Record Detail components in sandbox environments. Test the components
in your sandbox, and see how they differ from your current Aura components. Your experience can help us fix any bugs that bubble
up.
275
Customize URLs for Accounts and Contacts to Improve SEO (Beta)

Boost organic traffic to your enhanced LWR site with new URL configuration solutions that improve search engine optimization
(SEO). Create SEO-friendly URL snippets, or “slugs,” for your site’s account and contact pages. A slug replaces the record ID in the
URL with relevant and human-readable information, ensuring that search engines optimally surface your site’s page. Previously,
SEO-friendly URLs were available only for custom object pages in enhanced LWR sites and Product and Catalog pages in LWR
Commerce sites.
Customize Your Einstein AI-Generated Search Answer Settings
The AI-generated search answers on the Search results page of your site can be customized to better fit your brand. You can customize
the title and description of your Einstein AI-Generated search answers on the Results Layout component.
Partners can now use Einstein generative AI to draft sales emails from Experience Cloud Aura sites in just a few quick seconds. After
setting up Einstein Sales Emails for partners, partners get access to a Draft with Einstein button from the email composer for contacts
and leads. Partners can also access any custom sales emails prompt templates that you create in Prompt Builder.
Integrate with Data Cloud to Harness Site Data (Generally Available)

Data is the new currency of business and an important tool for understanding how to best serve your customers. To collect a comprehensive
view of your customers and then use those insights to create enhanced analytics and personalized, one-to-one experiences for every
site visitor, connect Data Cloud to your enhanced LWR sites. After connecting to Data Cloud, your integration gathers user data from
your site, such as the user’s profile and site engagement. That information is then funneled to Data Cloud to build user profiles, create
analytics, suggest individualized recommendations, and personalize your sites. When you turn on your Data Cloud integration, it connects
your site to Data Cloud so that you can start tracking events as they occur on your site.
Where: This change applies to LWR sites accessed through Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance,
How: To turn on your Data Cloud integration, in Experience Builder, go to Settings and select Integrations. On the Data Cloud card,
select Add to Site, and then select Share site data with Data Cloud. To start sending user engagement data, configure user consent
options and publish your site.
Customize the Forms and Buttons on Your LWR Site with New Styling Features
Show off your unique brand identity with a wealth of additional style properties for forms and buttons in Experience Builder. Specify the
padding for input fields and buttons, the shape of checkboxes, the color of labels and input text, and more. Find these new style controls
in the Theme section of Experience Builder.
How: In Experience Builder, go to Theme > Forms, and find new properties to:
• Specify the padding within fields.
• Determine the font family, font size, text styles, and spacing for field labels, captions, and input text.
• Set the shape and thickness of the borders around fields and checkboxes.
In Theme > Colors > Advanced, find new properties in the Forms section to specify colors for:
• Field labels, placeholder text, and input text, including a property to set the color of in-focus text
• Backgrounds for fields and checkboxes, including properties to designate the colors for in-focus fields and selected checkboxes
• Borders around fields and checkboxes
276
In Theme > Buttons, control the space above and below the text inside the button.
Polish the Layout of Your LWR Site for Every Screen Size
Enjoy more flexibility and control over the layout and spacing of your LWR site, and ensure the best presentation of your content on any
screen size. Arrange columns to be side by side or stacked, and specify the arrangement for desktop, tablet, and mobile devices. Vertically
align the components across columns to the top, center, or bottom of the column. Refine page spacing and layout with the minimum
height fields in the Section and Columns components.
How: In Experience Builder, on the Section or Columns property panel, adjust the Minimum Height and Component Alignment fields.
To specify the column arrangement for a specific screen size, use the View Mode dropdown in the top navigation bar to select the
Desktop, Mobile, or Tablet view, and adjust the Column Arrangement property.
277
Configure Search Results Layouts with Search Manager (Generally Available)

Now generally available, Search Manager makes search results from LWR sites more relevant and simplifies the process of creating search
configurations. Configure filters to surface only the search results you need, and save search configurations that you can reuse across
multiple sites. Users can apply additional filters to those configurations to further refine their searches.
How: To update the Search Results page for the site you’re on, from Experience Builder, go to the Results Layout component properties
panel. From the Search Configuration dropdown list, select Customize Search. To search at a more granular level, click Search Manager
and create a search configuration.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create and Save Search Configurations (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
See Updates to Dependent Picklists While Editing Records in LWR Sites

The Record Detail component in LWR sites now supports dependent picklist behavior. After site visitors change the value of a controlling
field, they see updates to dependent field options and values. This support also includes compound fields such as Address when state
and country/territory picklists is enabled. Previously, when site visitors edited Salesforce records in an LWR site, a change to a value in a
controlling field didn’t update the values of its dependent fields. Site visitors updated them manually.
Unlimited, and Developer editions with active Experience Cloud licenses.
278
How: A controlling field can be a picklist or a checkbox, and a dependent field can be a picklist or multi-select picklist.
A warning appears at the bottom of the LWR site record edit window when there are controlling fields whose dependent field values
can change. To see the list of controlling fields and their dependent fields, click or tap Learn more.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Standard Components for the Build Your Own (LWR) Template (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Salesforce Help: Dependent Picklists (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Configure State and Country/Territory Picklists (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Enable or Disable a Modernized Record Experience in Aura Sites in Your Sandbox

Environment
Use upgraded records components, running on Lightning web component technology, in your Aura sites. For now, the changes are
only available in Create Record Form, Record Banner, and Record Detail components in sandbox environments. Test the components
in your sandbox, and see how they differ from your current Aura components. Your experience can help us fix any bugs that bubble up.
Where: This change applies to Aura sites accessed in sandbox environments through Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in
Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: In Setup > Digital Experiences, enable or disable Use a modernized record page experience in Aura sites. When this setting
is enabled, the Create Record Form, Record Banner, and Record Detail components in sandboxes see these changes:
• Buttons are center-aligned. Previously, they were right-aligned.
• Text in the window is indented compared to the title. Previously, the text and title were inline with one another.
• If a form includes required fields, there’s now an explanation that an asterisk connotes a required field. Previously, there was no
explanation.
• If a required field is left blank, users now see a red outline around the required field and an inline error telling them to complete the
field.
Customize URLs for Accounts and Contacts to Improve SEO (Beta)

Boost organic traffic to your enhanced LWR site with new URL configuration solutions that improve search engine optimization (SEO).
Create SEO-friendly URL snippets, or “slugs,” for your site’s account and contact pages. A slug replaces the record ID in the URL with
relevant and human-readable information, ensuring that search engines optimally surface your site’s page. Previously, SEO-friendly URLs
were available only for custom object pages in enhanced LWR sites and Product and Catalog pages in LWR Commerce sites.
How: Use the ObjectRelatedUrl object to upload SEO-friendly URL slugs in the Salesforce Platform APIs that you typically use.
Customize Your Einstein AI-Generated Search Answer Settings

The AI-generated search answers on the Search results page of your site can be customized to better fit your brand. You can customize
the title and description of your Einstein AI-Generated search answers on the Results Layout component.
279
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Site Performance

Partners can now use Einstein generative AI to draft sales emails from Experience Cloud Aura sites in just a few quick seconds. After
setting up Einstein Sales Emails for partners, partners get access to a Draft with Einstein button from the email composer for contacts
and leads. Partners can also access any custom sales emails prompt templates that you create in Prompt Builder.
Where: This change applies to Aura sites accessed through Lightning Experience in Unlimited editions. A PRM add-on license and an
Einstein for Sales add-on license are required for each partner user.
SEE ALSO:
Site Performance
Enjoy faster page load times and improved security and SEO for LWR sites in the Experience Delivery pilot. Public site pages built in
Visualforce also load more quickly thanks to new caching behavior. Update references to your old force.com sites to ensure continued
access.
IN THIS SECTION:
Improve the Performance and Scalability of LWR Sites with Experience Delivery (Pilot)
Boost the performance and scalability of your LWR sites using Experience Delivery, a powerful new infrastructure for hosting LWR
sites. Along with subsecond page load times, this new infrastructure provides improved security and search engine optimization
(SEO) to ensure that your site meets your customers’ demands. Experience Delivery includes some changes since the previous release.
Update References to Your Force.com Site URLs
Ensure continued access to your sites when the temporary redirection of legacy Salesforce domains ends, starting in September
2024 for production orgs. Update references to your old *.force.com site URLs. Look for references to those domains in Salesforce,
such as in a knowledge article, and outside Salesforce, such as links in your marketing materials.
Load Cached Visualforce Site Pages Faster
To improve page load times, the caching behavior is updated for public site pages built in Visualforce. When an unauthenticated
user visits a login-enabled site and the Visualforce page is cached, the cached version exists on the proxy server and the end user’s
web browser. Previously, the page was cached only on the proxy server.
Improve the Performance and Scalability of LWR Sites with Experience Delivery (Pilot)
Boost the performance and scalability of your LWR sites using Experience Delivery, a powerful new infrastructure for hosting LWR sites.
Along with subsecond page load times, this new infrastructure provides improved security and search engine optimization (SEO) to
ensure that your site meets your customers’ demands. Experience Delivery includes some changes since the previous release.
Where: This change applies to LWR sites accessed through Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance, and
Unlimited editions. Developer Edition isn’t supported.
280
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Site Performance
your sole risk.
Why: Existing LWR sites use client-side rendering (CSR), meaning that all the HTML, JavaScript, CSS, and assets that make up the page
are downloaded to the client before being rendered in the browser.
By contrast, Experience Delivery uses server-side rendering (SSR) and a dedicated content delivery network (CDN) to render the page
on the server and then cache it in the CDN. This approach provides optimal site performance with page load times up to 60% faster,
which leads to increased conversions and lower bounce rates.
Since the previous release, we added support for:
• Enhanced domains, meaning that custom domains are optional.
• Custom URLs with path prefixes, such as /help and /support. Previously, custom URLs could contain only a root URL.
How: To participate in this pilot, contact your Salesforce account executive. This pilot is aimed at developers who are comfortable:
• Building LWR or enhanced LWR sites with Experience Builder
• Developing custom Lightning web components that are server-side ready
• Working with Salesforce DX
After your org is approved for the pilot, you can enable Experience Delivery at the site level in the Settings tab of the site’s Administration
workspace. Experience Delivery is supported in new and existing LWR and enhanced LWR sites.
Update References to Your Force.com Site URLs

Ensure continued access to your sites when the temporary redirection of legacy Salesforce domains ends, starting in September 2024
for production orgs. Update references to your old *.force.com site URLs. Look for references to those domains in Salesforce, such as in
a knowledge article, and outside Salesforce, such as links in your marketing materials.
Where: This change applies to Aura, LWR, and Visualforce sites accessed through Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise,
SEE ALSO:
Update References to Your Previous Salesforce Domains
281
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Security and Sharing

To improve page load times, the caching behavior is updated for public site pages built in Visualforce. When an unauthenticated user
visits a login-enabled site and the Visualforce page is cached, the cached version exists on the proxy server and the end user’s web
browser. Previously, the page was cached only on the proxy server.
Where: This change applies to Visualforce sites and Salesforce Sites accessed through Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Configure Site Caching (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

New features improve the login experience to your Experience Cloud sites. For off-platform apps, use the new integration framework
to set up headless login and guest user identity flows. Control who can manage custom domains and URLs with a new, more targeted
permission. Audit more settings for Visualforce sites in Site History, and switch to a single domain certificate if you’re using a shared
domain certificate for your Salesforce CDN.
IN THIS SECTION:
Switch to a Single Domain Certificate for Your Salesforce Content Delivery Network
Switch to a single domain certificate if you’re using a shared domain certificate for your Salesforce content delivery network (CDN).
To comply with the latest security updates, we’re retiring shared domain certificates. When this change is enforced, shared domain
certificates are updated to non-HTTPS, which isn’t as secure as the single domain certificate. Switching from a shared certificate to
a single domain certificate has no downtime.
Salesforce Content Delivery Network Is Off by Default for Government Cloud Organizations
For compliance reasons, some Government Cloud organizations can’t use a content delivery network (CDN). The Salesforce CDN is
turned off by default for all new sites created from Government Cloud orgs that have enabled Enhanced Domains.
Refine Your Experience Cloud Site with New Customer Identity Features
Get more control over your identity verification process. Give users uninterrupted access across custom apps and Salesforce UIs by
bridging an existing access token into a new UI session. Enable Embedded Login.
Try a More Flexible Integration Framework for Headless Identity Flows
The External Client App framework, a new generation of Connected Apps that’s easier to package and distribute, now supports all
variations of the headless Authorization Code and Credentials Flow. Use this improved framework to set up headless login, passwordless
login, and guest user identity flows in an off-platform app.
Assign a New User Permission for Custom Domain Management
To provide more precise permissions management, assign the new Custom Domain Management user permission for managing
custom domains and custom URLs. With a custom domain, you provide your users a branded experience by serving your Experience
Cloud sites on a domain that you own, such as https://www.example.com.
Audit more settings for your Visualforce sites in the Site History related list.
282
Switch to a Single Domain Certificate for Your Salesforce Content Delivery Network
Switch to a single domain certificate if you’re using a shared domain certificate for your Salesforce content delivery network (CDN). To
comply with the latest security updates, we’re retiring shared domain certificates. When this change is enforced, shared domain certificates
are updated to non-HTTPS, which isn’t as secure as the single domain certificate. Switching from a shared certificate to a single domain
certificate has no downtime.
Developer editions.
When: Salesforce enforces this update in Spring ‘25.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Domains, and select Domains. For each domain with a shared certificate, select the
domain and click Edit a Domain. To update your certificate selection for the CDN, select Single certificate for Content Delivery
network (CDN).
Note: You can only change the domain from shared to single domain certificate in a production org.
Salesforce Content Delivery Network Is Off by Default for Government Cloud

Organizations
For compliance reasons, some Government Cloud organizations can’t use a content delivery network (CDN). The Salesforce CDN is turned
off by default for all new sites created from Government Cloud orgs that have enabled Enhanced Domains.
How: To turn on the CDN, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter My Domain, and then select My Domain. Then, in the Routing
section, select Use Content Delivery Network (CDN) by default when enhanced domains are enabled for Experience Cloud
sites.
283
Refine Your Experience Cloud Site with New Customer Identity Features
Get more control over your identity verification process. Give users uninterrupted access across custom apps and Salesforce UIs by
bridging an existing access token into a new UI session. Enable Embedded Login.
Where: These changes apply to LWR, Aura, and Visualforce sites accessed through Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in
How: For more information about these changes, see these release notes.
• Use a Custom One-Time Password Provider (Beta)
• Brand the Welcome Email for Passwordless Registration
• Integrate Custom App Experiences with the Salesforce UI
• Enable Embedded Login
Try a More Flexible Integration Framework for Headless Identity Flows

The External Client App framework, a new generation of Connected Apps that’s easier to package and distribute, now supports all
variations of the headless Authorization Code and Credentials Flow. Use this improved framework to set up headless login, passwordless
login, and guest user identity flows in an off-platform app.
Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
SEE ALSO:
Use More OAuth Features with External Client Apps
Assign a New User Permission for Custom Domain Management

To provide more precise permissions management, assign the new Custom Domain Management user permission for managing custom
domains and custom URLs. With a custom domain, you provide your users a branded experience by serving your Experience Cloud sites
on a domain that you own, such as https://www.example.com.
Where: This change applies to Aura, LWR, and Visualforce sites accessed through Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise,
Performance, and Unlimited editions. Also available in Professional Edition with Marketing Cloud Account Engagement (Pardot).
SEE ALSO:
Grant Specific Permission to Manage Custom Domains

Audit more settings for your Visualforce sites in the Site History related list.
Where: This change applies to Visualforce sites in Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited,
and Developer editions.
SEE ALSO:
Audit More Changes to Salesforce Sites and Visualforce Sites
284
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Field Service
Field Service
IN THIS SECTION:
Discover innovative, AI-based features to help your teams deliver exceptional service.
Explore the latest features to help dispatchers create, manage, and optimize your team’s schedule.
Streamline, extend, and customize your Field Service operations with these new additions.
Enhance and elevate your customer interactions with these new features.
Explore what’s new in Field Service mobile, designed to help mobile workers provide outstanding service.

Discover innovative, AI-based features to help your teams deliver exceptional service.
IN THIS SECTION:
Customize the Pre-Work Brief with Prompt Builder
Access the Pre-Work Brief template in the Prompt Builder and modify the prompt according to your business needs. Mobile workers
can then see the customized AI-generated brief that tells them everything they need to know about their upcoming work.
Customize the Pre-Work Brief with Prompt Builder

Access the Pre-Work Brief template in the Prompt Builder and modify the prompt according to your business needs. Mobile workers can
then see the customized AI-generated brief that tells them everything they need to know about their upcoming work.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Einstein 1 Field Service Edition with the Field Service managed package installed.
The feature is available in the Field Service mobile app for Android and iOS. Einstein generative AI is available in Lightning Experience.
When: The Pre-Work Brief template in the Prompt Builder is available later in Summer ‘24.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up Pre-Work Brief (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Prompt Builder (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Einstein Features (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Explore the latest features to help dispatchers create, manage, and optimize your team’s schedule.
285
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Field Service Resource Management
IN THIS SECTION:
Benefit from advanced features and better schedule quality with Enhanced Scheduling and Optimization.
Work Capacity
Reserve workforce availability based on dynamic business priorities using Work Capacity.

Benefit from advanced features and better schedule quality with Enhanced Scheduling and Optimization.
IN THIS SECTION:
Enhance operational stability and reduce your optimization partial completion rate by preventing optimization requests from running
on overlapping datasets. Check for optimization requests being processed for the same territory and time horizon and then block
any identical or overlapping requests. For example, a dispatcher activates resource schedule optimization for a resource that’s already
part of a dataset optimized with in-day optimization. And, avoid setting up overlapping enhanced optimization requests when using
enhanced scheduled jobs. Previously, you could create an enhanced scheduled job with overlapping time periods within the same
job.
When a work order has visiting hours, you can now apply the time zone of the related service appointment’s service territory by
using the visiting hours time zone setting. Previously, when you scheduled appointments with visiting hours, the time zone of the
Visiting Hours object was used. This setting allows more flexibility when you’re working across multiple time zones by automatically
adjusting them to the service appointments’ local time zone.
Enhance Service Coverage and Boost Resource Productivity by Scheduling Across Multiple Time Zones
Increase resource utilization and reduce response time by enabling your resources to service multiple time zones in one shift. Set
operating hours on secondary service territories in various time zones to maximize resource availability. For example, a mobile worker
can service adjacent cities in different time zones. Or, a service resource can provide technical assistance from a call center to New
York, Tel Aviv, London, and Sydney. Previously, with Enhanced Scheduling and Optimization, secondary service territory memberships
with different time zones on operating hours were ignored.
Benefit from Smoother Scheduling and Optimization Services for Overlapping Travel Time Scenarios
Experience improved operational efficiency by minimizing disruptive failures in scheduling and optimization services for various
overlapping travel time use cases. Ensure uninterrupted business operations with Enhanced Scheduling and Optimization when the
travel time spans multiple shifts or operating hours. And, schedule and optimize service appointments even when the maximum
travel time at the expense of the resource exceeds the time between shifts. Previously, these scenarios resulted in errors that reduced
service continuity.
Get More Clarity and Resolve Issues Faster with Improved Error Messages
Identify enhanced scheduling and optimization issues and their root cause with detailed error messages that promote self-sufficient
troubleshooting. Discover which entities to fix with Object IDs, and get actionable guidance. Access additional details and review
potential solutions on a dedicated page in Salesforce Help.
Trace Who Triggered an Optimization in the Optimization Request
Let service managers easily identify the user who initiated the global, in-day, or resource schedule optimization request or configured
the scheduled job. This functionality facilitates system tracking, troubleshooting, and traceability. The Owner field in the optimization
request now shows the user’s name, providing insights into scheduling and optimization actions. Previously, all actions and triggering
services were attributed to the platform integration user.
286
Let Dispatchers Easily Set Criteria for Schedule Optimization

Help dispatchers make the right choice with fewer options in the Appointment Optimization Criteria field. You can customize this
field to show only those values that are relevant to your dispatchers. And, let your dispatchers know about the renamed and redesigned
Optimize window fields for enhanced usability. For example, previously the Appointment Optimization Criteria field was called Filter
service appointments by.
Review the History of Scheduling and Optimization Requests with Activity Reports (Beta)
Use Activity Reports to get information on scheduling and optimization requests that you run. You can generate an activity report
for a specific request type and easily identify whether it succeeded or failed. For example, generate a report on a Global Optimization
request that failed. The report output details the reasons for the failure, allowing you to take action and troubleshoot the issue quickly.
Access Optimization Request Files on Your Own (Beta)
Use Optimization Request Files to retrieve the request and response files of an optimization request. Review the files in a JSON format
to find out what happened to a specific request and quickly resolve related issues. Previously, you had to open a Support case and
wait to get the files, which delayed the troubleshooting process.
Keep Important Appointments Scheduled During Optimization (Beta)
Safeguard important service appointments, such as those with customer commitments, by preventing them from being dropped
from the schedule during global and in-day optimization. Define which appointments to keep scheduled by using Keep Scheduled
Criteria. For example, ensure emergency appointments remain scheduled. During optimization these appointments can move to a
different resource or time within the SLA. Previously, you could only pin appointments, limiting the ability to create the most optimal
schedule. You can also keep appointments scheduled via API by using the updated Optimize global Apex method, which is helpful
when you want to schedule optimization runs and aren't relying on manual actions.
Create More Precise Travel Time Estimations by Including a Buffer (Beta)
Align travel time estimations with your company’s business needs by adding a buffer to the estimated travel time. This buffer accounts
for additional arrival time considerations, such as parking, for improved travel time accuracy.
Get More Accurate Scheduling Recommendations with Appointment Insights (Beta)
Appointment Insights now supports more work rules, such as the Working Territories and the Extended Match rules, to help you
improve the scheduling of service appointments. This additional support provides more accurate information about why appointments
can't be scheduled and what changes you can make to qualify more time slots and candidates for scheduling.

Enhance operational stability and reduce your optimization partial completion rate by preventing optimization requests from running
on overlapping datasets. Check for optimization requests being processed for the same territory and time horizon and then block any
identical or overlapping requests. For example, a dispatcher activates resource schedule optimization for a resource that’s already part
of a dataset optimized with in-day optimization. And, avoid setting up overlapping enhanced optimization requests when using enhanced
scheduled jobs. Previously, you could create an enhanced scheduled job with overlapping time periods within the same job.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with the
Field Service managed package installed.
How: In Setup, go to Field Service Settings and verify that Field Service Enhanced Scheduling and Optimization is enabled. In the Field
Service Admin app, go to Field Service Settings. Select Optimization, and then select the Logic tab. Check that Enable optimization
overlaps prevention is enabled (default).
287
For enhanced scheduled jobs, go to the Scheduled Jobs tab and then select the General tab.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Manage Optimization Conflicts (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Manage Scheduled Jobs in Field Service (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
288
When a work order has visiting hours, you can now apply the time zone of the related service appointment’s service territory by using
the visiting hours time zone setting. Previously, when you scheduled appointments with visiting hours, the time zone of the Visiting
Hours object was used. This setting allows more flexibility when you’re working across multiple time zones by automatically adjusting
them to the service appointments’ local time zone.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with the
Service Admin app, click the Field Service Settings tab and select Scheduling. Then, under General Logic, deselect Use the Visiting
Hours object’s time zone when an appointment has visiting hours.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Work Rule Type: Service Appointment Visiting Hours (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Enhance Service Coverage and Boost Resource Productivity by Scheduling Across Multiple Time
Zones
Increase resource utilization and reduce response time by enabling your resources to service multiple time zones in one shift. Set operating
hours on secondary service territories in various time zones to maximize resource availability. For example, a mobile worker can service
adjacent cities in different time zones. Or, a service resource can provide technical assistance from a call center to New York, Tel Aviv,
London, and Sydney. Previously, with Enhanced Scheduling and Optimization, secondary service territory memberships with different
time zones on operating hours were ignored.
Why: Here’s an example of how this change enhances service efficiency and maximizes your mobile workers’ productivity. Melissa has
Columbus, GA, as her primary service territory with 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM operating hours and has a secondary service territory Phenix
City, AL, also with 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM operating hours. Columbus, GA is in a time zone that’s 1 hour ahead of Phenix City, AL. Melissa's
availability is calculated from each respective territory's operating hours such that Melissa is available to work for 9 hours overall. During
the first hour of her shift, Melissa services only Columbus, GA, while for the next 7 hours, she covers both territories. During the last hour
of her day, Melissa services only Phenix City, AL. Previously, Melissa couldn’t service both territories if operating hours existed on Phenix
City, AL, and her availability there was ignored.
How: In Setup, go to Field Service Settings and verify that Field Service Enhanced Scheduling and Optimization is enabled. Define
Operating Hours on secondary service territory memberships in different time zones.
289
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Guidelines for Creating Operating Hours for Field Service (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Benefit from Smoother Scheduling and Optimization Services for Overlapping Travel Time Scenarios
Experience improved operational efficiency by minimizing disruptive failures in scheduling and optimization services for various
overlapping travel time use cases. Ensure uninterrupted business operations with Enhanced Scheduling and Optimization when the
travel time spans multiple shifts or operating hours. And, schedule and optimize service appointments even when the maximum travel
time at the expense of the resource exceeds the time between shifts. Previously, these scenarios resulted in errors that reduced service
continuity.
How: In Setup, go to Field Service Settings and verify that Field Service Enhanced Scheduling and Optimization is enabled. Schedule or
optimize a job with a long travel time that spans multiple shifts or operating hours.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Limits and Limitations for Enhanced Scheduling and Optimization (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Get More Clarity and Resolve Issues Faster with Improved Error Messages
Identify enhanced scheduling and optimization issues and their root cause with detailed error messages that promote self-sufficient
troubleshooting. Discover which entities to fix with Object IDs, and get actionable guidance. Access additional details and review potential
solutions on a dedicated page in Salesforce Help.
How: In Setup, go to Field Service Settings and verify that Field Service Enhanced Scheduling and Optimization is enabled.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Field Service Enhanced Scheduling and Optimization Error Messages (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
290
Trace Who Triggered an Optimization in the Optimization Request

Let service managers easily identify the user who initiated the global, in-day, or resource schedule optimization request or configured
the scheduled job. This functionality facilitates system tracking, troubleshooting, and traceability. The Owner field in the optimization
request now shows the user’s name, providing insights into scheduling and optimization actions. Previously, all actions and triggering
services were attributed to the platform integration user.
How: In Setup, go to Field Service Settings and verify that Field Service Enhanced Scheduling and Optimization is enabled. Optimize
the team’s schedule by using scheduled jobs from Field Service Settings in the Field Service Admin app. Or, dispatchers can run optimization
manually from the dispatcher console by using the Optimize option. Then service managers view the optimization request details.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Optimize Your Schedule from the Field Service Dispatcher Console (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Salesforce Help: Monitor Field Service Schedule Optimization Requests (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Let Dispatchers Easily Set Criteria for Schedule Optimization

Help dispatchers make the right choice with fewer options in the Appointment Optimization Criteria field. You can customize this field
to show only those values that are relevant to your dispatchers. And, let your dispatchers know about the renamed and redesigned
Optimize window fields for enhanced usability. For example, previously the Appointment Optimization Criteria field was called Filter
service appointments by.
How: In Setup, go to Field Service Settings and verify that Field Service Enhanced Scheduling and Optimization is enabled. From the
object management settings for service appointments, go to Field Sets. Select Service Appointment Optimization Criteria, and
define the values for this field set.
These values are shown in the Optimize window accessed from the dispatcher console.
291
SEE ALSO:
preview)
Salesforce Help: Customize the Dispatcher Console with Field Sets (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Review the History of Scheduling and Optimization Requests with Activity Reports (Beta)
Use Activity Reports to get information on scheduling and optimization requests that you run. You can generate an activity report for a
specific request type and easily identify whether it succeeded or failed. For example, generate a report on a Global Optimization request
that failed. The report output details the reasons for the failure, allowing you to take action and troubleshoot the issue quickly.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with the Field Service managed
package installed.
Note: This feature is a Beta Service. A customer may opt to try such Beta Service in its sole discretion. Any use of the Beta Service
Service Admin app, click the Field Service Settings tab and select Scheduling. Then, enable activity reports under General Logic. To
access activity reports, from the App Launcher, find and select Optimization Center.
292
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Review the History of Scheduling and Optimization Requests with Activity Reports (Beta) (can be outdated or
unavailable during release preview)
Access Optimization Request Files on Your Own (Beta)

Use Optimization Request Files to retrieve the request and response files of an optimization request. Review the files in a JSON format
to find out what happened to a specific request and quickly resolve related issues. Previously, you had to open a Support case and wait
to get the files, which delayed the troubleshooting process.
package installed.
Service Admin app, click the Field Service Settings tab and select Scheduling. Then, enable optimization request files under General
Logic. To access optimization request files, from the App Launcher, find and select Optimization Center.
293
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Access Optimization Request Files (Beta) (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Keep Important Appointments Scheduled During Optimization (Beta)

Safeguard important service appointments, such as those with customer commitments, by preventing them from being dropped from
the schedule during global and in-day optimization. Define which appointments to keep scheduled by using Keep Scheduled Criteria.
For example, ensure emergency appointments remain scheduled. During optimization these appointments can move to a different
resource or time within the SLA. Previously, you could only pin appointments, limiting the ability to create the most optimal schedule.
You can also keep appointments scheduled via API by using the updated Optimize global Apex method, which is helpful when you
want to schedule optimization runs and aren't relying on manual actions.
Field Service manager package installed.
is subject to the applicable Beta Services Terms provided at Agreements and Terms
Service Admin app, click Field Service Settings. Under Optimization, in the Scheduled Jobs tab, configure Keep Schedule Criteria.
294
Then under Optimization, in the Logic tab, you can define a default value to show for this setting. Then, enable the Include Keep Scheduled
in Optimize Window custom permission the relevant permission set to show this field in the Optimize window accessed from the
dispatcher console.
Alternatively, use the new KeepApptScheduled property with the Optimize global Apex method, to define the value of the designated
Boolean field within the Service Appointment object. For example, define IsEmergency to ensure all appointments with this property
stay scheduled during optimization.
SEE ALSO:
preview)
Salesforce Help: Set Custom Permissions for Field Service (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Field Service Developer Guide : OAASRequest Class (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Create More Precise Travel Time Estimations by Including a Buffer (Beta)

Align travel time estimations with your company’s business needs by adding a buffer to the estimated travel time. This buffer accounts
for additional arrival time considerations, such as parking, for improved travel time accuracy.
package installed.
is subject to the applicable Beta Services Terms provided at Agreements and Terms
Service Admin app, go to Field Service Settings, select Scheduling, and then select Routing. Enter the number of minutes for the buffer.
295
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up Routing for Travel Time Calculations (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Get More Accurate Scheduling Recommendations with Appointment Insights (Beta)

Appointment Insights now supports more work rules, such as the Working Territories and the Extended Match rules, to help you improve
the scheduling of service appointments. This additional support provides more accurate information about why appointments can't be
scheduled and what changes you can make to qualify more time slots and candidates for scheduling.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with the Field Service managed
package installed.
How: In Setup, go to Field Service Settings and verify that Field Service Enhanced Scheduling and Optimization is enabled. From the
object management settings for service appointments, use Lightning App Builder to add the Appointment Insights Lightning web
component to the service appointment record page.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Get Recommendations with Field Service Appointment Insights (Beta) (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Work Capacity
Reserve workforce availability based on dynamic business priorities using Work Capacity.
IN THIS SECTION:
Reserve Workforce Capacity in a Service Territory
Define work capacity limits that restrict schedulable hours in a specific service territory according to your business priorities. You can
limit the daily work hours or the percentage of the workforce availability. For example, restrict the daily schedulable hours to 95%
of the resources’ work hours in Chicago in January, reserving 5% for unexpected work due to snowstorms.
Work Capacity Limit Relaxation Renamed for Better Clarity to Limit Override
The feature enabling schedule changes close to or on the day of service by allowing work to be scheduled, even if it exceeds the
daily limit, has been renamed Limit Override. Previously, it was referred to as Work Capacity Limit Relaxation.
296
Share Work Capacity Data and Information with Partner Community Dispatchers via Experience Cloud
Field Service Work Capacity objects and the Work Capacity tab are now supported in Experience Cloud sites. The Experience Cloud
site enables your partner community dispatchers to see consumption relative to the defined limit in service territories to which they
have access permissions. Based on their permissions, users can also create and edit work capacity limits for those service territories.
Reserve Workforce Capacity in a Service Territory

Define work capacity limits that restrict schedulable hours in a specific service territory according to your business priorities. You can
limit the daily work hours or the percentage of the workforce availability. For example, restrict the daily schedulable hours to 95% of the
resources’ work hours in Chicago in January, reserving 5% for unexpected work due to snowstorms.
How: In Setup, go to Field Service Settings and verify that Field Service Enhanced Scheduling and Optimization is enabled and Allow
defining work capacity limits is selected.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up Field Service Work Capacity (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Create a Work Capacity Limit (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Monitor Workstream Usage in Summary View (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Work Capacity Limit Relaxation Renamed for Better Clarity to Limit Override
The feature enabling schedule changes close to or on the day of service by allowing work to be scheduled, even if it exceeds the daily
limit, has been renamed Limit Override. Previously, it was referred to as Work Capacity Limit Relaxation.
SEE ALSO:
Share Work Capacity Data and Information with Partner Community Dispatchers via Experience
Cloud
Field Service Work Capacity objects and the Work Capacity tab are now supported in Experience Cloud sites. The Experience Cloud site
enables your partner community dispatchers to see consumption relative to the defined limit in service territories to which they have
access permissions. Based on their permissions, users can also create and edit work capacity limits for those service territories.
297
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Field Service Operations
SEE ALSO:

Streamline, extend, and customize your Field Service operations with these new additions.
IN THIS SECTION:
Service Documents
Discover what’s new for service documents.
Asset Management
Discover what's new to take asset management to the next level.
Boost operations with Field Service Intelligence data-driven solutions.
Service Documents
Discover what’s new for service documents.
IN THIS SECTION:
Personalize Service Documents with Embedded Expressions
Integrate field values into rich text components to incorporate your company’s voice and style throughout your service documents.
With embedded expressions, you can merge field values in rich text components to style the text, reference field values without
field names, and improve the flow of your document.
Personalize Service Documents with Embedded Expressions

Integrate field values into rich text components to incorporate your company’s voice and style throughout your service documents.
With embedded expressions, you can merge field values in rich text components to style the text, reference field values without field
names, and improve the flow of your document.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: In Document Builder, drag a rich text component onto the canvas. Optionally, add static text to give context for the embedded
field. To embed the field into the rich text component use the following syntax: {!Record.fieldname} or
{!Record.Objectname.fieldname}. For example, to embed a phone number for an account, the syntax is
{!Record.Account.phone}. Save the template, and then test it on the document preview.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Document Builder Standard Components (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
298
Asset Management
Discover what's new to take asset management to the next level.
IN THIS SECTION:
Minimize Downtime with Proactive Asset Tools
Combine the capabilities of Data Cloud and CRM Analytics to gain data-driven insights and proactive service recommendations. The
Proactive Asset Service monitors asset age, usage, and maintenance history, and then updates the Asset Health Score dashboard to
indicate whether an asset is in good, fair, or critical condition. Receive a notification when an asset needs attention. Notifications let
you easily identify asset performance and proactively address upcoming issues, ensuring uninterrupted operations and optimized
performance.
Eliminate discrepancies and minimize costly errors when managing entitlements for contracts, warranties, and maintenance plans.
The Entitlements view provides agents with an overview of a customer’s entitled services, making it easier to identify what was
consumed versus what was promised. Previously, entitlement information was available only in related lists, which made it difficult
to discern what was available to the customer.
Link Assets to Multiple Accounts and Contacts
Associate multiple service contracts from different accounts to the same asset to make it easier to track the history of work performed
for the asset. For example, associate a leased vehicle to the leasee and leaser accounts to manage a separate service contract for
each. Previously, you could only connect an asset to a single account and contact.
of updated features, migrate your Frequency and Frequency Type data to maintenance work rules. This update was first available
in Summer ’22 and was scheduled to be enforced in Winter ‘22, but we postponed the enforcement date to Winter ‘25.
Minimize Downtime with Proactive Asset Tools

Combine the capabilities of Data Cloud and CRM Analytics to gain data-driven insights and proactive service recommendations. The
Proactive Asset Service monitors asset age, usage, and maintenance history, and then updates the Asset Health Score dashboard to
indicate whether an asset is in good, fair, or critical condition. Receive a notification when an asset needs attention. Notifications let you
easily identify asset performance and proactively address upcoming issues, ensuring uninterrupted operations and optimized performance.
Where: Field Service Einstein 1 Edition or as an add-on. To purchase Field Service Einstein 1 Edition or as an add-on, contact your
Salesforce account executive.
How: To enable Proactive Asset Service, in Setup, go to Proactive Asset Service Setup and complete the required setup steps. Enable
CRM Analytics, and turn on Proactive Asset Service.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Proactive Asset Service (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Eliminate discrepancies and minimize costly errors when managing entitlements for contracts, warranties, and maintenance plans. The
Entitlements view provides agents with an overview of a customer’s entitled services, making it easier to identify what was consumed
versus what was promised. Previously, entitlement information was available only in related lists, which made it difficult to discern what
was available to the customer.
Where: This feature applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
299
How: From the Lightning App Builder, drag the Warranties View and Contracts View components to the asset record page, and activate
the changes. Next, in Object Manager, drag the Show Coverage (desktop) and Select Coverage (mobile) to the Work Order page layout,
and repeat for the Case page layout. Agents and technicians can choose the appropriate coverage on desktop and mobile.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Manage Entitlements in Field Service (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Link Assets to Multiple Accounts and Contacts

Associate multiple service contracts from different accounts to the same asset to make it easier to track the history of work performed
for the asset. For example, associate a leased vehicle to the leasee and leaser accounts to manage a separate service contract for each.
Previously, you could only connect an asset to a single account and contact.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Associate an Asset with Its Related Contacts (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Associate an Asset with Its Related Accounts (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
of updated features, migrate your Frequency and Frequency Type data to maintenance work rules. This update was first available in
Summer ’22 and was scheduled to be enforced in Winter ‘22, but we postponed the enforcement date to Winter ‘25.
Where: This change is available in Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
When: This release update is enforced in Winter ’25. To get the major release upgrade date for your instance, go to Trust Status, search
Why: Recent changes to Maintenance Work Rules replace and improve the functionality provided by the frequency fields. In Winter
’25, the retired fields will impact work order generation.
How: Find the release update in Setup. For Migration from Frequency Fields, follow the testing and activation steps.
For all impacted maintenance plans, select a maintenance plan that uses the frequency fields without the maintenance work rules.
Update the selected maintenance plan to use maintenance work rules instead, and click Enable Test Run. To hide the frequency fields
after the migration, go to Setup, turn off Field Service, and then turn it on again.
SEE ALSO:
Release Updates
Salesforce Knowledge Article: Migration Retirement Tips and Tricks (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Get Excited about Using Maintenance Work Rules (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Video: Spotlight on Implementing Preventative Maintenance (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Boost operations with Field Service Intelligence data-driven solutions.
300
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Field Service Customer Engagement
IN THIS SECTION:
Unlock Insights and Dashboards with Field Service Intelligence
The Field Service Intelligence app provides insights from Data Cloud with CRM Analytics to identify trends across your work orders,
service appointments, assets, and service resources. Access dashboards that centralize your field service data to make informed
operational decisions.
Unlock Insights and Dashboards with Field Service Intelligence

The Field Service Intelligence app provides insights from Data Cloud with CRM Analytics to identify trends across your work orders,
service appointments, assets, and service resources. Access dashboards that centralize your field service data to make informed operational
decisions.
Where: This feature applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Who: To use the Field Service Intelligence dashboards, you need the Field Service Intelligence User permission set. To manage the Field
Service Intelligence dashboards, you need the Field Service Intelligence Admin permission set.
How:To enable Field Service Intelligence, in Setup, go to Field Service Intelligence Setup and complete the required setup steps. Enable
CRM Analytics, and turn on Field Service Intelligence. Assign the Field Service Intelligence permission sets to the appropriate users.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Field Service Intelligence (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Enhance and elevate your customer interactions with these new features.
IN THIS SECTION:
Improve Your Data Security with Automated Deletion of Visual Remote Assistant Video Recordings
Use automation to retain only the data that you need by efficiently deleting unnecessary Visual Remote Assistant video session
recordings. Trigger an automated deletion process by creating custom criteria with a flow. Previously, you manually created a list of
videos and contacted Salesforce Customer Support.
Improve Your Data Security with Automated Deletion of Visual Remote Assistant Video
Recordings
Use automation to retain only the data that you need by efficiently deleting unnecessary Visual Remote Assistant video session recordings.
Trigger an automated deletion process by creating custom criteria with a flow. Previously, you manually created a list of videos and
contacted Salesforce Customer Support.
package installed.
How: Add a prebuilt Apex action to your flow. For example, create criteria to find specific Visual Remote Assistant videos and delete
them.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up Visual Remote Assistant for Field Service (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
301
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Field Service Mobile

Explore what’s new in Field Service mobile, designed to help mobile workers provide outstanding service.
IN THIS SECTION:
Customize your Field Service mobile experience with powerful, tailored components.
Give Workers Access to Files with Content Libraries
Create custom libraries to provide mobile workers quick, easy access to files they need to complete the job. From the Field Service
Mobile App Builder, create a custom tab for the bottom navigation bar, so mobile workers can view files in organized folders.
Previously, files weren’t organized and mobile workers had to scroll to find relevant files.
Track Hours Offline With Time Sheets Priming
With time sheets priming, you can prime up to three time sheet list views that mobile workers can access and edit offline to avoid
down time and complete jobs faster.
Stay on Track with the Field Service Widget (Generally Available)
This feature, which is now generally available, gives mobile workers quick access to their next appointment in a widget on their
home screen. Workers can see the appointment details and check when they must head out to the appointment to make sure that
they’re on time. And, workers can update the appointment status and navigate to the location. The widget is available out-of-the-box.
Get Accurate Site Check-Ins and Check-Outs (Generally Available)
This feature, which is now generally available, keeps track of the actual times that mobile workers arrived and left job sites. With
automated timestamps for geolocation-based actions, you can then create reports that give insights on the time that mobile workers
spend at each location. Timestamps are captured even when the mobile app is offline and are more reliable than the manual input
given by mobile workers.
Choose How Mobile Workers Navigate to Destinations
Let mobile workers navigate to destinations based on an address (default) or based on latitude and longitude coordinates. Select
the preferred option for your users in the Destination Type field in Field Service Mobile Settings. Previously, you could navigate only
based on address.
Measure an Object with Augmented Reality
Mobile workers can use augmented reality to measure between two or more points directly from the Field Service mobile app.
Create Leads and Opportunities from the Field
Use a flow template that lets your mobile workers create leads and opportunities for potential customers directly from the app
without contacting customer services. For example, if a customer mentions that their neighbor is interested in their services, the
mobile worker can create an opportunity. Customer services then sees the opportunity and follows up accordingly.
Upsell Your Business from the Field (Beta)
Let your mobile workers create quotes for customers directly from the Field Service mobile app without contacting customer services.
For example, if a mobile worker is repairing a customer’s oven and notices that some of the parts need replacement, the worker can
create a quote and provide a price estimate on-site.
Enhance your data retrieval speed and app performance by opting into the cache-first policy for the Field Service mobile app.
Cache-first improves functionality in areas with fluctuating connectivity by loading data from the cache first while simultaneously
fetching the latest data from the network. Load data faster with minimal delays compared to the previous online preferred policy.
The Field Service mobile app also refreshes the display with updated data immediately after network calls are completed, ensuring
access to the most current information.
302

Customize your Field Service mobile experience with powerful, tailored components.
IN THIS SECTION:
Simplify Interactions with Data with Near Field Communication on iOS
Streamline business processes and accelerate data exchange by creating a Lightning web component (LWC) that uses the Near
Field Communication (NFC) plug-in. The Field Service mobile app then uses the LWC to gather data, such as meter readings, in a
secure transmission. Previously, the plug-in was available only for Android devices.
Capture the Layout of a Space with Augmented Reality
Create a Lightning web component (LWC) that uses the Space Capture plug-in to capture an image showing the layout of a space.
The LWC uses the device’s native Lidar capability to capture 2D and 3D measurements within the Field Service mobile app.
Simplify Interactions with Data with Near Field Communication on iOS

Streamline business processes and accelerate data exchange by creating a Lightning web component (LWC) that uses the Near Field
Communication (NFC) plug-in. The Field Service mobile app then uses the LWC to gather data, such as meter readings, in a secure
transmission. Previously, the plug-in was available only for Android devices.
Where: This feature is available in the Field Service mobile app for Android and iOS.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Customize and Extend the Field Service Mobile App with Lightning Web Components (can be outdated or unavailable
Field Service Developer Guide: Add Lighting Web Components for Plug-Ins to the Field Service Mobile App (can be outdated or
Capture the Layout of a Space with Augmented Reality

Create a Lightning web component (LWC) that uses the Space Capture plug-in to capture an image showing the layout of a space. The
LWC uses the device’s native Lidar capability to capture 2D and 3D measurements within the Field Service mobile app.
Where: This feature is available in the Field Service mobile app for iOS.
How: Here's how a captured space looks.
303
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Customize and Extend the Field Service Mobile App with Lightning Web Components (can be outdated or unavailable
Field Service Developer Guide: Capture a Space on a Mobile Device (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Give Workers Access to Files with Content Libraries

Create custom libraries to provide mobile workers quick, easy access to files they need to complete the job. From the Field Service Mobile
App Builder, create a custom tab for the bottom navigation bar, so mobile workers can view files in organized folders. Previously, files
weren’t organized and mobile workers had to scroll to find relevant files.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Customize Tabs with the Field Service Mobile App Builder (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Work with Tabs (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Track Hours Offline With Time Sheets Priming

With time sheets priming, you can prime up to three time sheet list views that mobile workers can access and edit offline to avoid down
time and complete jobs faster.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter and select Field Service Mobile App Builder. Under App Navigation, select up to three
filters for the Time Sheets tab to ensure the time sheets in those list views are primed for offline use.
304
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Customize Tabs with the Field Service Mobile App Builder (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Offline Priming in the Field Service Mobile App (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Stay on Track with the Field Service Widget (Generally Available)

This feature, which is now generally available, gives mobile workers quick access to their next appointment in a widget on their home
screen. Workers can see the appointment details and check when they must head out to the appointment to make sure that they’re on
time. And, workers can update the appointment status and navigate to the location. The widget is available out-of-the-box.
Where: This feature is available in the Field Service mobile app for iOS.
How: Tell your mobile workers to add the Field Service widget to their iPhone’s home screen.
305
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Add the Field Service Mobile Widget (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Get Accurate Site Check-Ins and Check-Outs (Generally Available)

This feature, which is now generally available, keeps track of the actual times that mobile workers arrived and left job sites. With automated
timestamps for geolocation-based actions, you can then create reports that give insights on the time that mobile workers spend at each
location. Timestamps are captured even when the mobile app is offline and are more reliable than the manual input given by mobile
workers.
How: Create a flow that connects geolocation-based actions to service appointments. Previously, you created the actions using the
custom attributes. Create an action that’s triggered when the mobile worker arrives at a location and another one for when they leave
the location. Then, create a report that shows the timestamps.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up Geolocation-Based Actions for the Field Service Mobile App (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
306
Choose How Mobile Workers Navigate to Destinations

Let mobile workers navigate to destinations based on an address (default) or based on latitude and longitude coordinates. Select the
preferred option for your users in the Destination Type field in Field Service Mobile Settings. Previously, you could navigate only based
on address.
Where: This change applies to the Field Service mobile app for Android and iOS.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Learn More About Field Service Mobile Settings (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Measure an Object with Augmented Reality

Mobile workers can use augmented reality to measure between two or more points directly from the Field Service mobile app.
Where: This feature is available in the Field Service mobile app for iPhone 11 and above.
How: Instruct your mobile workers to tap the Measure global action and point their camera at the required object. They can then copy
the measurement to their clipboard and paste it into the required field.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Measuring Lengths with Augmented Reality (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Create Leads and Opportunities from the Field

Use a flow template that lets your mobile workers create leads and opportunities for potential customers directly from the app without
contacting customer services. For example, if a customer mentions that their neighbor is interested in their services, the mobile worker
can create an opportunity. Customer services then sees the opportunity and follows up accordingly.
307
How: Add an action to the mobile workers’ layout that launches the Field Service Mobile: Create Leads and Opportunities flow.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up Lead and Opportunity Creation for Field Service Mobile Workers (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)
Upsell Your Business from the Field (Beta)

Let your mobile workers create quotes for customers directly from the Field Service mobile app without contacting customer services.
For example, if a mobile worker is repairing a customer’s oven and notices that some of the parts need replacement, the worker can
create a quote and provide a price estimate on-site.
How: Add the New Quote (Beta) quick action to the mobile workers’ layout for work orders.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up Mobile Quoting for Field Service Mobile Workers (Beta) (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Enhance your data retrieval speed and app performance by opting into the cache-first policy for the Field Service mobile app. Cache-first
improves functionality in areas with fluctuating connectivity by loading data from the cache first while simultaneously fetching the latest
data from the network. Load data faster with minimal delays compared to the previous online preferred policy. The Field Service mobile
app also refreshes the display with updated data immediately after network calls are completed, ensuring access to the most current
information.
308
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Industries
When: The beta version of the cache-first policy became available for the Field Service mobile app starting June 5, 2024.
SEE ALSO:
Field Service Mobile Beta and Early Adopters Program
Offline Priming in the Field Service Mobile App
Industries
Goods Cloud streamlines delivery and distribution processes with Direct Store Delivery and Van Sales. Optimize service operations in
the field with Field Service for Industries. Health Cloud integrates with Milliman Care Guidelines (MCG) to bring industry-standard
assessments to Integrated Care Management. Loyalty Management gives marketing managers greater flexibility with Global Promotions
Management. Manufacturing Cloud helps manufacturers streamline the process of recovering costs on defective parts from suppliers
with Warranty Supplier Recovery. Salesforce for Education helps students plan their degrees better with Intelligent Degree Planning. We
also have plenty of changes for Automotive Cloud, Salesforce for Nonprofits, Public Sector Solutions, Industries common features, and
much more.
IN THIS SECTION:
Automotive Cloud
Diagnose issues, driver safety, and vehicle performance using the power of Data Cloud. Seamlessly visualize metrics and insights
from Data Cloud right in your Automotive app. Get reimbursed by your suppliers for faulty parts covered under warranty and recover
your costs with supplier recovery claims. Create effective product service campaigns and curate outreach lists for asset recalls.
Communications Cloud extends Salesforce Customer 360 to provide a solution specifically for the communications industry. It helps
businesses digitally transform to deliver new, industry-standard customer experiences and increase operational efficiencies. Explore
industry-specific apps including Enterprise Sales Management, Communications Cloud Agent Console, and Multiplay Subscription
Management, and business solutions including Field Service for Industries, Configure, Price, Quote (Industries CPQ), and Enterprise
Product Catalog (EPC).
Transfer data from Consumer Goods Cloud to Data Cloud by using data streams. Leverage the integrated data to segment retail
customers and strategize planning activities. Use the Direct Store Delivery and Van Sales features to streamline your delivery and
distribution processes. Conveniently administer sync features from a central location and improve traceability of sync records by
using sync ID. Use the Modeler CLI command to quickly add a validation method and use the dynamically proposed XML attributes
to accurately customize contracts. You can now do better precision rounding for KPIs with the Rounding within Period rounding
type, and run the Push Promotion process faster.
Energy & Utilities (E&U) cloud combines and extends the full power of Salesforce Sales and Service clouds and the Salesforce Platform
into an industry-specific solution for utilities, retail energy, and modern energy services companies.
309
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Industries

Field Service for Industries empowers businesses to build customer-centric field service operations, maximize asset lifetime value,
and elevate the experience of service teams. Use Field Service for Industries to accelerate service delivery, proactively manage assets,
and simplify the work order management process. Manage the repair, recall, and upgrade of assets at scale by using Product Service
Campaign. Estimate field service work before you create work orders by using Work Order Estimation.
Learn about the new features and enhancements in Financial Services Cloud that strengthen client management, automate tasks,
provide deeper customer insights, and simplify data organization.
Health Cloud
Einstein Generative AI automates assessment generation. Home Health optimizes visit scheduling and has a new component for
Experience Cloud users. Integrated Care Management integrates with Milliman Care Guidelines (MCG) to bring industry-standard
care guidelines and assessments to Health Cloud. The Group Benefits app helps insurance sales agents track leads and enroll members
better to boost sales performance. Intelligent Appointment Management now supports multi-step scheduling. Provider Network
Management gets a new app.
Insurance
Insurance connects frontline agents, back-office teams, and customers with flexible components that support policy administration,
benefit administration, claims, and billing. Learn about what’s in Summer ’24.
Life Sciences Cloud is a new end-to-end product built on the Salesforce platform for organizations engaged in the Life Sciences
industry. Inheriting a robust pool of features from other Salesforce Industries products, like Health Cloud, and adding its own
brand-new set of features, Life Sciences Cloud helps organizations optimize their operations in the clinical, medical, and commercial
domains. Life Sciences Cloud is available, starting June 2024.
Loyalty Management
Marketing managers can create flexible promotions rules with the Build Your Own Promotion template in Global Promotions
Management. Companies can now decide whether they want their members to hold a negative point balance. Easily clone and
launch your repeatable and most successful promotions. Add up to 50,000 partners to your loyalty program. Streamline marketing
manager and loyalty program manager onboarding with new permission sets.
Manufacturing Cloud
Harmonize, transform, and unlock insights at scale from asset, customer, sales, and service data by using Data Cloud features. Easily
manage your supplier recovery processes to recover the expenses for repairing defective parts procured from suppliers. Orchestrate
effective product service campaigns to segment faulty assets, perform product recalls, and manage customer outreach. Generate
estimates on field service work before you create work orders.
Media Cloud
With the Media Cloud business applications you can attract, engage, and support customers from anywhere, maximize lifetime
value, and improve operational efficiency across the media value chain.
Net Zero Cloud
Address compliance reporting with new features and enhancements to Net Zero Cloud and Disclosure and Compliance Hub. Design
and maintain disclosure document templates directly in Microsoft 365 Word. After you upload your disclosure reports from previous
years, Einstein generative AI helps you quickly create responses by searching for existing answers in your documents. Einstein can
also provide detailed explanations for each response, and help you confirm accuracy. View and export the greenhouse gas emissions
calculations. Enable field history tracking for seamless tracking of value changes in Net Zero Cloud objects. Make primary data
acquisition easier and more straightforward through a new simplified data collection. Streamline your workflows by giving users full
access to data entry and calculations.
310
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Automotive Cloud

Make it easy for constituents to file and track claims for social insurance benefits. Find and address circumstances that prevent
constituents from getting the care or services that they need. Coordinate with service providers to manage referrals and efficiently
deliver services to constituents. Easily capture interaction notes with a single unified component. Help constituents recertify for
benefits to renew or revise their benefit eligibility. Collaborate with partner organizations and funders to share performance indicators
and outcome results.
Referral Marketing
Marketing managers can now design referral promotions as per the marketing or industry requirements. Reusable promotion
templates enable marketing managers to decide at which stages advocates and their friends are rewarded and to customize promotion
stage names. Using the refreshed referral promotion guided flow, marketing managers can select the promotion's reward and then
decide the content of the promotion emails. Get the referral promotion emails ready for launch without spending much time editing
the emails. Run referral promotions for your company's loyalty program. Easily track the advocate count of referral promotions.
Salesforce Contracts allows customers to manage the end-to-end lifecycle of Contracts. Contracts can be associated with opportunities,
orders, quotes, standard Salesforce objects, and custom objects. A robust contract lifecycle management is crucial to the overall
health of an organization. The Salesforce Contracts app gives you complete control over the sales process integration, contract
management process, and contract lifecycle that starts from contract authoring to activation.
Provide an intuitive, guided degree planning experience for your students by using Intelligent Degree Planning. Enable students to
view the details of learning courses and programs, and track their progress by using new Lightning web components. Optimize the
matching of mentors and mentees by using a new guided flow and comparison layout. Simplify the appointment experience with
automatic resource assignments, and QR codes for onsite check-ins. Create assessments easily with intelligent suggestions from
Einstein. Migrate from Admissions Connect, Student Success Hub, and Education Data Architecture to the integrated version of
Education Cloud. Leverage Common App first-year data in Education Cloud.
Salesforce for Nonprofits includes platform solutions and managed packages for nonprofits. Nonprofit Cloud, built on the Salesforce
platform, makes it easier to monitor fundraising efforts by using source codes, generate donor acknowledgments, manage program
participation, and create cohorts of program participants.
Vlocity Contract Lifecycle Management (CLM) empowers businesses to generate and maintain accurate contracts associated with
opportunities, orders, and quotes. Vlocity CLM seamlessly integrates with Salesforce Lightning Experience. In the Lightning Experience,
Lightning actions such as Create Contract, Update Contract, and Pick Frame Contract are available on opportunities, orders, and
quotes.
Some products in Industries share features. In this release we’ve enhanced some of the features that help you provide excellent
customer service, made updates that save you time in Business Rules Engine, extended functionality in Data Processing Engine, and
much more.
Automotive Cloud
Diagnose issues, driver safety, and vehicle performance using the power of Data Cloud. Seamlessly visualize metrics and insights from
Data Cloud right in your Automotive app. Get reimbursed by your suppliers for faulty parts covered under warranty and recover your
costs with supplier recovery claims. Create effective product service campaigns and curate outreach lists for asset recalls.
311
IN THIS SECTION:
Unify your customer and vehicle data in Data Cloud, and connect data between external telematics systems and Automotive Cloud.
Use the telematics data model objects to ingest real-time vehicle data into Data Cloud. Then harmonize the data to build segments,
create calculated insights, and analyze key metrics. Use the Automotive data kit to access predefined calculated insights and data
streams that help you drive personalized experiences and monitor customer and vehicle performance. You can also add the predefined
flexcards to a Vehicle or an Account record page so that sales and service teams can visualize data stored in Data Cloud objects and
calculated insights.
Streamline the process of raising supplier recovery claims for parts covered by contract terms with suppliers. Whenever quality issues
arise in parts supplied by a partner, promptly initiate supplier recovery claims to recoup incurred costs. As a manufacturer, you can
enhance the supplier recovery rate and substantially reduce warranty costs. You can now create a supplier recovery claim from an
existing partner warranty claim. Suppliers can efficiently adjudicate these claims via the Experience Cloud site. The Claims Detail
context definition has been updated to improve efficiency.
Organize product service campaigns to service faulty products, recall defective assets, and manage outreach campaigns at scale.
Service managers can create and manage effective campaigns, nurture customer trust, and ensure customer safety. They can
effortlessly segment and curate lists of impacted vehicle parts. Service agents can use these lists to engage with customers and track
services to be performed on assets.
Make the most of the additional enhancements in Automotive Cloud. Action Launcher is now available in Experience Cloud, new
fields are added to Vehicle and Asset, and users can create quote actions for assets.
New and Enhanced Common Features for Industries

Automotive Cloud includes some features that are available across clouds and products in Industries. Use these features to extend and
customize Automotive Cloud based on your business needs.
• Action Launcher
Contact center agents (CCAs) can quickly resolve customer requests by launching Aura components. CCAs can now search for actions
based on semantic search or the meaning of search keywords. Out-of-the-Box Deployment is renamed as Standard Deployment.
Use the new and updated objects to provide CCAs with recommended actions and Aura components through Action Launcher.
• Business Rules Engine

Incorporate new logic into expression set versions efficiently by changing subexpressions in fewer clicks. Map a subexpression’s
variables to the local resources of the expression set that the subexpression is used in. Easily deactivate or modify the decision tables
that are referenced in expression set versions. Use medium-scale decision tables to process a large volume of rows. Save time and
effort by using ready-to-use templates to create decision tables. Enhance the decision-making capability of your decision tables by
using the Does Not Match and Contains operators.
• Context Service
Use context definitions as a source for mapping data. Map the nodes and attributes of a context definition to the objects in another
context definition. Conveniently generate and edit input mapping for all nodes and attributes of a definition, reducing manual
selection of each node. Support different mapping types with mapping intent operations.
• Criteria-Based Search and Filter

Enhance the search experience for customers and business partners by adding Criteria-Based Search and Filter to your Experience
Cloud sites. Help users visualize data by showing resources from search results in an interactive map. Make search results displayed
312
as cards easier to manage by providing sorting options. Share data from search results by using the prebuilt Copy Records and Create
Report actions for Criteria-Based Search and Filter.
• Data Processing Engine

Upload large amounts of data into your definition with CSV files. Use the Data Cloud runtime with extended functionality for join,
filter, formula, and writeback nodes.
• List Builder for Data Cloud Segment

The records removed from a Data Cloud segment get suppressed in the associated actionable list.
• Timeline
Configure a data graph in Timeline to show engagement events from data model objects (DMOs), including the Unified Individual
DMO. Include event summaries on Timeline.

Unify your customer and vehicle data in Data Cloud, and connect data between external telematics systems and Automotive Cloud. Use
the telematics data model objects to ingest real-time vehicle data into Data Cloud. Then harmonize the data to build segments, create
calculated insights, and analyze key metrics. Use the Automotive data kit to access predefined calculated insights and data streams that
help you drive personalized experiences and monitor customer and vehicle performance. You can also add the predefined flexcards to
a Vehicle or an Account record page so that sales and service teams can visualize data stored in Data Cloud objects and calculated
insights.
IN THIS SECTION:
Evaluate Vehicle and Driver Performance Telematics Data
Bring telematics data from multiple external systems into Data Cloud by using the predefined asset and vehicle data model objects.
Monitor and act on telematics data in real time, and track metrics such as battery health, ignition status, and speed. Improve driver
safety by monitoring data over time and during each trip, and detect changes and automatically alert drivers about the potential
safety issues. You can build insights and segments to analyze the telematics data and curate personalized experiences for your
customers and drivers.
Use the Vehicle Charger data model objects in Data Cloud to capture vital information about chargers and e-vehicles. Bring in data
related to charging ports, charging stations, a single vehicle charging session, and aggregated charger performance over time.
Represent general charging port specifications, unique instances of bases and connectors, and charging session data to build insights
around maintenance and monitoring. Use the data model objects to aggregate data and create calculated insights to unveil trends
and anomalies across charging sessions.
Connect Data Cloud and Automotive Cloud Using Prebuilt Data Streams
Create a bidirectional flow of data between Data Cloud and Automotive Cloud by using the data streams provided in the Automotive
data kit. Send Automotive Cloud data to Data Cloud to build actionable insights, perform calculations, and create segments. Then
bring back the transformed data into Automotive Cloud to help sales and service teams create personalized in-car experiences and
improve customer journeys. You can regularly sync the data streams to send the most current data related to assets, vehicles, retail
delivery reports, warranties, sales orders, and work orders to Data Cloud.
Improve Sales and Service Experiences for Customers Using Calculated Insights
Use predefined calculated insights in the Automotive data kit to view aggregated information about customer lifetime value, vehicle
lifetime value, and customer satisfaction. Track the revenue from dealer sales, direct manufacturer sales, and sale of parts and
accessories for each vehicle or customer. You can also track the count of all open cases and the count of open cases segmented by
owner and vehicle.
313

Show data that’s stored in Data Cloud to your users who use the Automotive app. Add the Vehicle Data Model Objects Parent flexcard
to the Vehicle record page so that sales and service teams can view telematics data directly in the app. The flexcard shows the latest
values as synced from Data Cloud for ignition status, odometer reading, acceleration, cruise control status, and engine revolutions
per minute. Users can also see the current latitude and longitude of the vehicle to monitor geofencing violations. The card also
shows a line graph that traces the average speed over time. Users can filter the data on the card for different time periods.
Show insights that’s stored in Data Cloud to your users who use the Automotive app. Add the Vehicle Calculated Insights Vehicle
Page Parent Card flexcard to the Vehicle record page so that sales and service teams can view calculated insights directly in the app.
The flexcard shows the latest values as synced from Data Cloud for vehicle lifetime value, the total count of cases, and the count of
open cases. Sales teams can also compare the aggregated revenue from sales of vehicles versus sales of parts and accessories. Users
can also compare the aggregated direct sales of vehicles from the manufacturer and the sales of vehicles from dealerships. Users
can filter the data on the card for different time periods.
Show insights that’s stored in Data Cloud to your users who use the Automotive app. Add the Vehicle Calculated Insights Account
Page Parent Card flexcard to the Account record page so that sales and service teams can view calculated insights directly in the
app. The flexcard shows the latest values as synced from Data Cloud for customer lifetime value and the count of open cases. Users
can filter the data on the card for different time periods.
Evaluate Vehicle and Driver Performance Telematics Data

Bring telematics data from multiple external systems into Data Cloud by using the predefined asset and vehicle data model objects.
Monitor and act on telematics data in real time, and track metrics such as battery health, ignition status, and speed. Improve driver safety
by monitoring data over time and during each trip, and detect changes and automatically alert drivers about the potential safety issues.
You can build insights and segments to analyze the telematics data and curate personalized experiences for your customers and drivers.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Data Cloud and Automotive
are enabled.
How: In Data Cloud, on the Data Model tab, go to the All list view. Select one of the following telematics data model objects.
• Asset Operation
• Asset Telematics Event
• Asset Performance
• Asset Operation Operator Performance
• Operator Performance
• Telematics Provider
• Vehicle Trip
• Vehicle Telematics Event
• Vehicle Performance
• Vehicle Trip Driver Performance
• Driver Performance
• Event Fault Code Mapping
314

Use the Vehicle Charger data model objects in Data Cloud to capture vital information about chargers and e-vehicles. Bring in data
related to charging ports, charging stations, a single vehicle charging session, and aggregated charger performance over time. Represent
general charging port specifications, unique instances of bases and connectors, and charging session data to build insights around
maintenance and monitoring. Use the data model objects to aggregate data and create calculated insights to unveil trends and anomalies
across charging sessions.
are enabled.
How: In Data Cloud, on the Data Model tab, go to the All list view. Select one of the following telematics data model objects.
• Vehicle Charger Base Definition
• Vehicle Charger Connector Definition
• Vehicle Charger Base
• Vehicle Charger Connector
• Vehicle Charging Session
• Vehicle Charging Session Interval
• Vehicle Charger Performance Summary
• Vehicle Charger Telematics Event
Connect Data Cloud and Automotive Cloud Using Prebuilt Data Streams
Create a bidirectional flow of data between Data Cloud and Automotive Cloud by using the data streams provided in the Automotive
data kit. Send Automotive Cloud data to Data Cloud to build actionable insights, perform calculations, and create segments. Then bring
back the transformed data into Automotive Cloud to help sales and service teams create personalized in-car experiences and improve
customer journeys. You can regularly sync the data streams to send the most current data related to assets, vehicles, retail delivery
reports, warranties, sales orders, and work orders to Data Cloud.
are enabled.
Who: Users must have access to the objects and fields for the data streams included in the Automotive Data Kit bundle.
How: In Data Cloud, on the Data Streams tab, go to the All list view. Select a data stream, such as Asset or Vehicle.
Improve Sales and Service Experiences for Customers Using Calculated Insights
Use predefined calculated insights in the Automotive data kit to view aggregated information about customer lifetime value, vehicle
lifetime value, and customer satisfaction. Track the revenue from dealer sales, direct manufacturer sales, and sale of parts and accessories
for each vehicle or customer. You can also track the count of all open cases and the count of open cases segmented by owner and
vehicle.
are enabled.
Who: Users must have access to the objects and fields for the calculated insights included in the Automotive Data Kit bundle.
How: In Data Cloud, on the Calculated Insights tab, go to the All list view. Select a record, such as Vehicle Lifetime Value or Count Of
Open Cases By Owner.
315

Show data that’s stored in Data Cloud to your users who use the Automotive app. Add the Vehicle Data Model Objects Parent flexcard
to the Vehicle record page so that sales and service teams can view telematics data directly in the app. The flexcard shows the latest
values as synced from Data Cloud for ignition status, odometer reading, acceleration, cruise control status, and engine revolutions per
minute. Users can also see the current latitude and longitude of the vehicle to monitor geofencing violations. The card also shows a line
graph that traces the average speed over time. Users can filter the data on the card for different time periods.
are enabled.
Who: Users must have the Data Cloud Metrics Visualization permission set assigned to them.
How: Add the Flexcard component to a Vehicle record page in the Lightning App Builder. Select the Vehicle Data Model Objects
Parent flexcard and modify the section names and metric display names as required.

Show insights that’s stored in Data Cloud to your users who use the Automotive app. Add the Vehicle Calculated Insights Vehicle Page
Parent Card flexcard to the Vehicle record page so that sales and service teams can view calculated insights directly in the app. The
flexcard shows the latest values as synced from Data Cloud for vehicle lifetime value, the total count of cases, and the count of open
cases. Sales teams can also compare the aggregated revenue from sales of vehicles versus sales of parts and accessories. Users can also
compare the aggregated direct sales of vehicles from the manufacturer and the sales of vehicles from dealerships. Users can filter the
data on the card for different time periods.
are enabled.
How: Add the Flexcard component to a Vehicle record page in the Lightning App Builder. Select the Vehicle Calculated Insights
Vehicle Page Parent Card flexcard and modify the help text and display names as required.

Show insights that’s stored in Data Cloud to your users who use the Automotive app. Add the Vehicle Calculated Insights Account Page
Parent Card flexcard to the Account record page so that sales and service teams can view calculated insights directly in the app. The
flexcard shows the latest values as synced from Data Cloud for customer lifetime value and the count of open cases. Users can filter the
data on the card for different time periods.
are enabled.
How: Add the Flexcard component to a Vehicle record page in the Lightning App Builder. Select the Vehicle Calculated Insights
Account Page Parent Card flexcard and modify the help text and display names as required.

Streamline the process of raising supplier recovery claims for parts covered by contract terms with suppliers. Whenever quality issues
arise in parts supplied by a partner, promptly initiate supplier recovery claims to recoup incurred costs. As a manufacturer, you can
enhance the supplier recovery rate and substantially reduce warranty costs. You can now create a supplier recovery claim from an existing
partner warranty claim. Suppliers can efficiently adjudicate these claims via the Experience Cloud site. The Claims Detail context definition
has been updated to improve efficiency.
316
IN THIS SECTION:
Standardize Supplier Recovery Terms Using Contracts
Use contracts to drive collaboration with your suppliers and mutually agree on supplier recovery terms. The contracts specify the
price that a supplier reimburses you for a causal part, whether you must return a part to a supplier, and the recovery terms for repairs
and replacements. When you create a supplier recovery claim from a partner warranty claim, the claimed amount for the supplier
recovery claim is automatically derived from the contract.
Automatically Create Supplier Recovery Claims from Dealer Claims
Create a supplier recovery claim for each causal part covered under a warranty claim now with a single click. You can create supplier
recovery claims directly from the warranty claim record that a dealer submits. You can enhance the claim with additional information
that a supplier requires during adjudication. Use the Summary tab of the supplier recovery claim to track information such as
associated warranty terms and fault codes. Update the claimed amount and quantity before you submit the claim, or when you
negotiate with suppliers.
Claim adjudicators at your supplier organizations can now use the Automotive Experience Cloud site to review the supplier recovery
claims. After you submit a supplier recovery claim from the Automotive app, the suppliers can track the claims on their portal. The
claim adjudicators can approve or reject claims, and access the contracts and products information directly from the Experience
Cloud site.
Manage Claims with an Improved Context Definition
The Claim Details context definition now has a simplified structure for ease of use. Retrieve claim information in business processes
using the reduced number of nodes. Update your existing business processes that use the Claim Details context definition and use
the new node structure.
Standardize Supplier Recovery Terms Using Contracts

Use contracts to drive collaboration with your suppliers and mutually agree on supplier recovery terms. The contracts specify the price
that a supplier reimburses you for a causal part, whether you must return a part to a supplier, and the recovery terms for repairs and
replacements. When you create a supplier recovery claim from a partner warranty claim, the claimed amount for the supplier recovery
claim is automatically derived from the contract.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Automotive Cloud.
Who: Users must have the Warranty Lifecycle Management permission set license to use this feature.
Automatically Create Supplier Recovery Claims from Dealer Claims

Create a supplier recovery claim for each causal part covered under a warranty claim now with a single click. You can create supplier
recovery claims directly from the warranty claim record that a dealer submits. You can enhance the claim with additional information
that a supplier requires during adjudication. Use the Summary tab of the supplier recovery claim to track information such as associated
warranty terms and fault codes. Update the claimed amount and quantity before you submit the claim, or when you negotiate with
suppliers.
Who: Users must have the Warranty Lifecycle Management permission set license to use this feature.

Claim adjudicators at your supplier organizations can now use the Automotive Experience Cloud site to review the supplier recovery
claims. After you submit a supplier recovery claim from the Automotive app, the suppliers can track the claims on their portal. The claim
adjudicators can approve or reject claims, and access the contracts and products information directly from the Experience Cloud site.
317
Who: Users must have the Warranty Lifecycle Management for Experience Cloud permission set license to use this feature.
Manage Claims with an Improved Context Definition

The Claim Details context definition now has a simplified structure for ease of use. Retrieve claim information in business processes using
the reduced number of nodes. Update your existing business processes that use the Claim Details context definition and use the new
node structure.
Who: Users must have the Warranty Lifecycle Management for Experience Cloud permission set license to use this feature.

Organize product service campaigns to service faulty products, recall defective assets, and manage outreach campaigns at scale. Service
managers can create and manage effective campaigns, nurture customer trust, and ensure customer safety. They can effortlessly segment
and curate lists of impacted vehicle parts. Service agents can use these lists to engage with customers and track services to be performed
on assets.
IN THIS SECTION:
Design timely product service campaigns to effectively assess and address issues on large numbers of products or services. Specify
the impacted product, and the priority, duration, status, and type of a campaign. Create work orders and return orders to capture
the services to be performed on impacted products.
Segment Assets for Product Service Campaigns Easily
Automotive service teams are no longer required to identify faulty assets and individually add them to product service campaigns.
Service managers can now identify, segment, and add a large number of assets in an actionable list. Easily curate lists of assets to
recall, audit, fix, or upgrade, and with a single click, add items from actionable lists to product service campaigns. Service managers
can use filter conditions or Data Cloud segments to group assets that are included in actionable lists. Finally, they can assign the lists
to service agents for engagement initiatives and outreach campaigns.

Design timely product service campaigns to effectively assess and address issues on large numbers of products or services. Specify the
impacted product, and the priority, duration, status, and type of a campaign. Create work orders and return orders to capture the services
to be performed on impacted products.
Who: Users must have the Product Service Campaign permission set license to use this feature.
How: Create a Product Service Campaign record, and specify its details. Create Product Service Campaign Item records and relate them
to the product service campaign. Create a Return Order or a Work Order record from the related list of a product service campaign record.
318
Segment Assets for Product Service Campaigns Easily

Automotive service teams are no longer required to identify faulty assets and individually add them to product service campaigns. Service
managers can now identify, segment, and add a large number of assets in an actionable list. Easily curate lists of assets to recall, audit,
fix, or upgrade, and with a single click, add items from actionable lists to product service campaigns. Service managers can use filter
conditions or Data Cloud segments to group assets that are included in actionable lists. Finally, they can assign the lists to service agents
for engagement initiatives and outreach campaigns.
Who: This feature is available to users who have the Product Service Campaign permission set license.
How: On a Product Service Campaign record page, click Create Actionable List. Create an actionable list and click Add to Service
Campaign.

Make the most of the additional enhancements in Automotive Cloud. Action Launcher is now available in Experience Cloud, new fields
are added to Vehicle and Asset, and users can create quote actions for assets.
IN THIS SECTION:
Help Partners and Customers Launch Actions from the Experience Cloud Site
The Action Launcher component is now available with the Automotive template for Experience Cloud. Add the Action Launcher
component to a page using the Experience Cloud Builder after you create a site using the Automotive template. Your dealers,
suppliers, customers, and partners can use the action launcher to trigger flow-based, omniscript-based, or quick-action-based
processes.
Specify the External System Name and Identifier for Vehicles and Parts
A Vehicle or an Asset record in the Automotive app can also reside in an external telematics system, an order intake system, or a
dealer management system. Use the two new fields Source System Name and Source System Identifier to specify the name of an
external system and the ID of an asset or a vehicle in that system. You can easily map data between Salesforce and external systems,
and use the fields during integrations.
Track Repair and Maintenance Costs for Assets Using Quotes
Use the new Asset field on a Quote Action record to track the estimated cost of products or services you offer to a customer. For
example, track the cost of repairing a faulty part and share the quote with the customer to get a confirmation before a service agent
starts the work.
Help Partners and Customers Launch Actions from the Experience Cloud Site
The Action Launcher component is now available with the Automotive template for Experience Cloud. Add the Action Launcher
component to a page using the Experience Cloud Builder after you create a site using the Automotive template. Your dealers, suppliers,
customers, and partners can use the action launcher to trigger flow-based, omniscript-based, or quick-action-based processes.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Automotive is enabled.
Who: Users must have the Automotive Foundation for Experience Cloud permission set assigned to them.
How: In Setup, go to All Sites. Click Builder for a site and add the Action Launcher component to a record page or the Home page.
319
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Communications Cloud
Specify the External System Name and Identifier for Vehicles and Parts
A Vehicle or an Asset record in the Automotive app can also reside in an external telematics system, an order intake system, or a dealer
management system. Use the two new fields Source System Name and Source System Identifier to specify the name of an external
system and the ID of an asset or a vehicle in that system. You can easily map data between Salesforce and external systems, and use the
fields during integrations.
Who: Users must have Create access on Vehicle and Asset objects.
Track Repair and Maintenance Costs for Assets Using Quotes

Use the new Asset field on a Quote Action record to track the estimated cost of products or services you offer to a customer. For example,
track the cost of repairing a faulty part and share the quote with the customer to get a confirmation before a service agent starts the
work.
Who: Users must have Create access on Quote, Quote Action, and Asset objects.
Communications Cloud extends Salesforce Customer 360 to provide a solution specifically for the communications industry. It helps
businesses digitally transform to deliver new, industry-standard customer experiences and increase operational efficiencies. Explore
industry-specific apps including Enterprise Sales Management, Communications Cloud Agent Console, and Multiplay Subscription
Management, and business solutions including Field Service for Industries, Configure, Price, Quote (Industries CPQ), and Enterprise
Product Catalog (EPC).
Learn about what’s in this release in the Communications Cloud.

Transfer data from Consumer Goods Cloud to Data Cloud by using data streams. Leverage the integrated data to segment retail customers
and strategize planning activities. Use the Direct Store Delivery and Van Sales features to streamline your delivery and distribution
processes. Conveniently administer sync features from a central location and improve traceability of sync records by using sync ID. Use
the Modeler CLI command to quickly add a validation method and use the dynamically proposed XML attributes to accurately customize
contracts. You can now do better precision rounding for KPIs with the Rounding within Period rounding type, and run the Push Promotion
process faster.
IN THIS SECTION:
Consolidate Your Customer Data with Data Cloud for Consumer Goods
Install Data Cloud for Consumer Goods Data Kit to deploy data streams and connect to pre-configured data model objects (DMOs)
in Data Cloud. Use the data streams to ingest data from Consumer Goods Cloud to Data Cloud, and use the integrated data to
segment retail customers and strategize planning activities.
Retail Execution
Set up routes and tours for the Direct Store Delivery and Van Sales process. A tour driver can start the tour and complete an initial
set of tour activities on the Consumer Goods Cloud offline mobile app. Capture store performance efficiently by using picklist options
for a set of parameters called Assessment Indicator Definitions (for example, the count of a product on a shelf, or product facings
on a shelf).
320
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Consumer Goods Cloud
Sync Management
Administer sync features from a central location and benefit from the optimized sync capabilities for an enhanced sync experience.
Customize contracts accurately with dynamically proposed XML attributes and add validation methods quickly using Modeler CLI
command.
Achieve precise rounding and retain the adjustments that you make for a KPI for a period with the Rounding within Period rounding
type. You can now execute Push Promotions faster, and easily extract claim data and download promotion data in shareable CSV
formats.
Assign the new permission sets, such as TPM Funds Calculation Worker and CGCloud Retail Supervisor User, to users, and save
yourself the hassle of managing permission sets every time you upgrade to the latest version of the Consumer Goods managed
package. The new permission sets are now shipped with the managed package and are automatically updated whenever the
managed package is upgraded.
Other Changes in Consumer Goods Cloud
Learn about the other changes for Consumer Goods Cloud in Summer ’24.
Consolidate Your Customer Data with Data Cloud for Consumer Goods
Install Data Cloud for Consumer Goods Data Kit to deploy data streams and connect to pre-configured data model objects (DMOs) in
Data Cloud. Use the data streams to ingest data from Consumer Goods Cloud to Data Cloud, and use the integrated data to segment
retail customers and strategize planning activities.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions where Data Cloud for Consumer Goods is
enabled.
Retail Execution
Set up routes and tours for the Direct Store Delivery and Van Sales process. A tour driver can start the tour and complete an initial set of
tour activities on the Consumer Goods Cloud offline mobile app. Capture store performance efficiently by using picklist options for a set
of parameters called Assessment Indicator Definitions (for example, the count of a product on a shelf, or product facings on a shelf).
IN THIS SECTION:
Plan Tours and Start Tours Activities Efficiently
With Direct Store Delivery and Van Sales, deliver consumer goods products directly to retail customers and manage deliveries
seamlessly. Set up tours and routes for specific markets by using the Direct Store Delivery data model. Direct store delivery drivers
can load their vehicles and start the delivery process by following the tour schedule.
Use generative AI in Consumer Goods Cloud to get a comprehensive summary of an account. Select a suggested action (for example,
summarize account) or post a question in the Einstein Bot, which uses the consumer goods cloud data to derive the account summary.
Account summary provides insights on account compliance, a recap of recent orders or visit transactions, and account performance
data. Account summary helps your users respond to customer queries, cross-sell or up-sell based on promotions, and act on account
compliance such as out-of-stock issues.
Enable your sales reps or supervisors to choose a picklist option during a store visit for comparison with the target value. Configure
the picklist values for a visit assessment task to help your users measure store performance more flexibly.
321

The Share Visit setting is scheduled for retirement in Spring ’25. After the upgrade to Spring ‘25, you can no longer see the Share
visits feature under Retail Execution Settings in Setup and visit access will be available only for the users who created the visit as per
the platform’s behavior. You can implement custom sharing by using the platform's sharing capabilities such as sharing rules and
role-based hierarchy or change the ownership of the visit record to the appropriate user. To avoid loss of visit data, complete the
required custom sharing implementation and turn off the share visit setting before the Spring ‘25 upgrade.
New and Changed Objects in Retail Execution
Do more with the new and updated Retail Execution objects.
Plan Tours and Start Tours Activities Efficiently

With Direct Store Delivery and Van Sales, deliver consumer goods products directly to retail customers and manage deliveries seamlessly.
Set up tours and routes for specific markets by using the Direct Store Delivery data model. Direct store delivery drivers can load their
vehicles and start the delivery process by following the tour schedule.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions where Consumer Goods Cloud is enabled.
Who: To set up routes and tours on the Consumer Goods Cloud Desktop app, you need the Direct Store Delivery for Consumer Goods
Cloud Offline Mobile App permission set. To use the Driver and the Tour Cockpit on the Consumer Goods Cloud offline mobile app, you
need the CGCloud Tour Driver permission set.
How:
• Plan and set up routes and tours for direct store delivery and van sales drivers by using tour templates on the Consumer Goods Cloud
Desktop app. Post setup, create tours independently, or derive them from a route. Define the allowed vehicles and document types
for a tour, and the safety and vehicle checks that drivers must complete at the start of the tour. You can even add a sequence of
customers to a route, or create a sequence of visits for a tour.
• On the Consumer Goods Cloud offline mobile app, direct store delivery or van sales drivers can start a tour and perform start of the
day activities such as reviewing tour and vehicle details, reviewing the tour visits, and validating the truckload based on the inventory
check-out document.

Use generative AI in Consumer Goods Cloud to get a comprehensive summary of an account. Select a suggested action (for example,
summarize account) or post a question in the Einstein Bot, which uses the consumer goods cloud data to derive the account summary.
Account summary provides insights on account compliance, a recap of recent orders or visit transactions, and account performance
data. Account summary helps your users respond to customer queries, cross-sell or up-sell based on promotions, and act on account
compliance such as out-of-stock issues.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions where Consumer Goods Cloud is enabled and
setup for Einstein Bots is available.
How: Define three custom Apex invocable functions to retrieve performance, compliance, and transactional data from the Account and
its related entities as part of the Consumer Goods Cloud Managed package. Use the configuration variables in the apex classes to configure
322
the duration and number of orders or visits for an account summarization. After adding the apex classes, create prompt templates with
the prompt type as Record Summary and status as Active.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Manage Apex Classes (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Apex Developer Guide: Invocable Actions (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Create a Prompt Template (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Copilot Action: Summarize Record (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Enable your sales reps or supervisors to choose a picklist option during a store visit for comparison with the target value. Configure the
picklist values for a visit assessment task to help your users measure store performance more flexibly.
How: Use Assessment Indicator Defined Value to configure the picklist options for an Assessment Indicator Definition of an assessment
task. Provide a target value in Assessment Indicator Value by associating the Retail Store KPI with the Assessment Indicator Defined
Values.

The Share Visit setting is scheduled for retirement in Spring ’25. After the upgrade to Spring ‘25, you can no longer see the Share visits
feature under Retail Execution Settings in Setup and visit access will be available only for the users who created the visit as per the
platform’s behavior. You can implement custom sharing by using the platform's sharing capabilities such as sharing rules and role-based
hierarchy or change the ownership of the visit record to the appropriate user. To avoid loss of visit data, complete the required custom
sharing implementation and turn off the share visit setting before the Spring ‘25 upgrade.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Sharing Rules
Apex Developer Guide: Understanding Apex Managed Sharing
Trailhead Module: Data Security
New and Changed Objects in Retail Execution

Do more with the new and updated Retail Execution objects.
Use these tour and route custom objects in Retail Execution to support the Direct Store Delivery and Van Sales feature.
Set up route types for various markets
Use the cgcloud__Route_Template__c object.
Create routes that act as a blueprint for creating tours
Use the cgcloud__Route__c object.
Add customers to a route
Use the cgcloud__Route_Account__c object.
Create executable trips
Use the cgcloud__Tour__c object.
323
Create or edit the vehicle and security checks of a tour

Use the cgcloud__Tour_Check__c object.
Define the allowed visits, signatures, and document types of a tour
Use the cgcloud__Tour_Object_Reference__c object.
Define tour settings for various markets
Use the cgcloud__Tour_Template__c object.
Store object references of a tour template
Use the cgcloud__Tour_Template_Object_Reference__c object.
Associate tour checks with a tour template
Use the cgcloud__Tour_Template_Tour_Check__c object.
Store the relationship between a tour and a tour check
Use the cgcloud__Tour_Tour_Check__c object.
Store the vehicle details
Use the cgcloud__Vehicle__c object.
Store the relationship between a vehicle and a warehouse
Use the cgcloud__Vehicle_Warehouse__c object.
Validate the driver's GPS location against the warehouse location at the end of the day
Use the new cgcloud__Should_Allow_End_Day_Geofencing__c field on the cgcloud__Tour_Template__c and
the cgcloud__Tour__c objects.
Enable GPS tracking for a tour at the end of the day
Use the new cgcloud__Should_Allow_End_Day_GPS_Tracking__c field on the cgcloud__Tour_Template__c and
Enable time tracking for a tour at the end of the day
Use the new cgcloud__Should_Allow_End_Day_Time_Tracking__c field on the cgcloud__Tour_Template__c
and the cgcloud__Tour__c objects.
Determine whether the user must scan seals when the Express Check-Out field is selected
Use the new cgcloud__Should_Allow_Seal_Scanning__c field on the cgcloud__Tour_Template__c and the
cgcloud__Tour__c objects.
Validate the driver's GPS location against the warehouse location at the start of the day
Use the new cgcloud__Should_Allow_Start_Day_Geofencing__c field on the cgcloud__Tour_Template__c and
Enable GPS tracking for a tour at the start of the day
Use the new cgcloud__Should_Allow_Start_Day_GPS_Tracking__c field on the cgcloud__Tour_Template__c
Enable time tracking for a tour at the start of the day
Use the new cgcloud__Should_Allow_Start_Day_Time_Tracking__c field on the cgcloud__Tour_Template__c
Determine the platform that the user can create a tour on
Use the new cgcloud__Creation_Platform__c field on the cgcloud__Tour_Template__c and the cgcloud__Tour__c
objects.
Set the default duration of a visit in a tour
Use the new cgcloud__Default_Tour_Visit_Duration__c field on the cgcloud__Tour_Template__c and the
324
Determine whether the user is required to document the odometer reading at the start and end of the day with a picture
Use the new cgcloud__Is_Odometer_Photo_Required__c field on the cgcloud__Tour_Template__c and the
Set the maximum distance allowed between the driver's GPS location and the warehouse or customer’s location during the
start, end, or visit of a tour
Use the new cgcloud__Geofence_Distance__c field on the cgcloud__Sales_Organization__c object.
Define the type of product check-in at the end of a tour
Use the new cgcloud__Product_Check_In_Policy__c field on the cgcloud__Order_Template__c object.
Define the type of product check-out document
Use the new cgcloud__Check_Out_Type__c field on the cgcloud__Order_Template__c object.
Sync Management
Administer sync features from a central location and benefit from the optimized sync capabilities for an enhanced sync experience.
IN THIS SECTION:
Get a consolidated view of the most relevant sync features and manage the feature settings on the Sync Settings page. Determine
the usage of those sync features for your users. Optimize your sync experience by downloading only relevant incremental data and
setting a threshold on the maximum users who can sync simultaneously. Trace sync logs using unique IDs and resolve sync
configuration issues by sending sync-related KPIs to Salesforce.
Expedite Sync Using Optimized Named Fetch Trees
Save on data volume and the time taken to download data as well as avoid redundant data transfers by downloading incremental
REST-based named fetch trees updates.
Identify Sync Records in Logs Easily with Sync IDs
Use the unique ID assigned to each synchronization operation to improve your debugging and troubleshooting experience. With
the sync ID appended to the logs, you can easily filter and trace sync transactions and plan necessary actions.
Process Simultaneous Sync Request Load Efficiently
Configure the maximum number of concurrent users on the Sync Configuration tab. Prevent overloading the system and maintain
optimal performance when the number of sales reps initiating sync simultaneously from their mobile devices exceeds the configured
limit.
Improve Support for Solving Sync Issues by Logging Extended Sync KPIs
Get better support and assistance to analyze and resolve your sync configuration issues by sending sync-related KPIs to Salesforce.
Sync admins can review the KPIs collected for a sync process and take actions to optimize sync performance. Improve support for
solving sync issues by logging extended sync KPIs
Include CPU Calculation Time in APEX Calculation
Protect your system from reaching potential Apex CPU governance limit exceptions by incorporating a buffer in the calculation of
sync execution time.
New and Changed Objects in Consumer Goods Cloud Sync
Do more with the new and updated objects in Consumer Goods Cloud Sync Management.
325

Get a consolidated view of the most relevant sync features and manage the feature settings on the Sync Settings page. Determine the
usage of those sync features for your users. Optimize your sync experience by downloading only relevant incremental data and setting
a threshold on the maximum users who can sync simultaneously. Trace sync logs using unique IDs and resolve sync configuration issues
by sending sync-related KPIs to Salesforce.
How: The new and enhanced sync features are enabled by default for all users in the new installations of Summer ’24, except the Calculate
sync time with CPU time setting. Existing users must manually enable the enhanced sync settings each time they upgrade the Sync
Management app. From the App Launcher, find and select Sync Configuration. Click Sync Settings, and on the Sync Settings page,
configure your sync processes.
326
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Sync Settings (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Expedite Sync Using Optimized Named Fetch Trees

Save on data volume and the time taken to download data as well as avoid redundant data transfers by downloading incremental
REST-based named fetch trees updates.
Why: The enhancement in downloading and calculating data for the named fetch trees marked as REST-based helps greatly reduce
your sync time and make the sync process performant.
327
How: From the App Launcher, find and select Sync Configuration. Click Sync Settings. In the User Settings section, select the Sync
using enhanced NFT over REST checkbox. This setting is enabled for all users by default. You can enable this setting for specific users
as needed. Switch named fetch trees to SF REST Enabled to take advantage of this enhancement.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Sync Using Enhanced Named Fetch Trees over REST (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Identify Sync Records in Logs Easily with Sync IDs

Use the unique ID assigned to each synchronization operation to improve your debugging and troubleshooting experience. With the
sync ID appended to the logs, you can easily filter and trace sync transactions and plan necessary actions.
Why: When a sales rep encounters a sync error on their mobile device, the unique sync ID in the error message helps the admin
troubleshoot the issue better. The admin uses the sync ID to identify the relevant log records from the device logs and Salesforce logs
and provide the appropriate resolution.
How: From the App Launcher, find and select Sync Configuration. Click Sync Settings. In the General Settings section, select the
Include sync ID in logs checkbox. This setting is enabled by default.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Include Sync IDs in Logs (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Process Simultaneous Sync Request Load Efficiently

Configure the maximum number of concurrent users on the Sync Configuration tab. Prevent overloading the system and maintain
optimal performance when the number of sales reps initiating sync simultaneously from their mobile devices exceeds the configured
limit.
Why: When the setting is enabled, the sync process queues the excess sync requests. By using the sales rep’s device details, the sync
process notifies the sales rep about the queued request and their queue position. This feature is supported with first-sync-of-the-day
(FSOD) and initial sync operations only.
Queue sync users at maximum limit checkbox. This setting is enabled by default.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Queue Sync Users at Maximum Limit (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Improve Support for Solving Sync Issues by Logging Extended Sync KPIs
Get better support and assistance to analyze and resolve your sync configuration issues by sending sync-related KPIs to Salesforce. Sync
admins can review the KPIs collected for a sync process and take actions to optimize sync performance. Improve support for solving
sync issues by logging extended sync KPIs
Why: You can identify potential sync limitations for their users or investigate and troubleshoot sync issues. The sync engine collects and
stores sync-related KPIs in a compressed format when a sync operation is initiated from a mobile device. The KPI data includes metrics
such as duration and record count for named fetch trees, named queries, and tracked objects.
328
How: From the App Launcher, find and select Sync Configuration. Click Sync Settings. In the User Settings section, select the Include
KPIs in sync logs checkbox. This setting is enabled for all users by default. You can enable this setting for specific users as needed.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Include KPIs in Sync Logs (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Include CPU Calculation Time in APEX Calculation

Protect your system from reaching potential Apex CPU governance limit exceptions by incorporating a buffer in the calculation of sync
execution time.
Why: Configure the time to deduct from the org's governance limit for CPU utilization. When you configure this setting, the system
includes the CPU calculation time during the calculation of the start time of sync transactions.
Calculate sync time with CPU time checkbox. This setting is disabled by default.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Calculate Sync Time with CPU Time (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
New and Changed Objects in Consumer Goods Cloud Sync

Do more with the new and updated objects in Consumer Goods Cloud Sync Management.
Store details of the Consumer Goods Cloud offline mobile app device that a sync request to Salesforce was initiated from
Use the new Sync_Client_Registration object.
Store the unique ID of the sync operation request initiated from a Consumer Goods Cloud offline mobile app device
Use the Sync_Id field in the Sync_Mobile_App_Log, Sync_History, and Sync_API_Log objects.
Store KPI data in a compressed format when a sync operation is run. The KPI data includes metrics such as duration and
record count for named fetch trees, named queries, and tracked objects
Use the Sync_KPIData field in the Sync_History object.
Define the maximum number of users who can perform the initial sync or first sync of the day simultaneously
Use the Sync_Concurrent_Users_Limit field in the Sync_Config object.
Define the buffer time that system should include when calculating CPU time limit to protect the system from Apex CPU
time limit exceptions during sync processes
Use the CPU_Time_Calculation_Buffer field in the Sync_Config object.

Customize contracts accurately with dynamically proposed XML attributes and add validation methods quickly using Modeler CLI
command.
IN THIS SECTION:
Simplify Contract Customization with Keyword Suggestions
Use the auto-completion capability in your VS Code based Modeler to create or customize a well-formed and accurate actionType
keyword in the processflow contract and the pagePattern and bindingMode keywords in the UI contract.
329
Add Validation Methods in A Few Quick Steps

Avoid the manual creation of validation functions during customization. The sf modeler workspace add CLI command
now supports the creation of the validation method type of business logic contract.
Deep Link Additional Apps in Your Consumer Goods Cloud Offline Mobile App
Your sales reps can collaborate, manage data efficiently, and streamline their field operations by using these third-party apps -
Facebook, Workplace from Meta, GoSpotCheck, Star PassPRNT, and MicroStrategy Library.
Simplify Contract Customization with Keyword Suggestions

Use the auto-completion capability in your VS Code based Modeler to create or customize a well-formed and accurate actionType
keyword in the processflow contract and the pagePattern and bindingMode keywords in the UI contract.
How: Upgrade your Modeler Plugin to Summer’24 and install the XML Language Support extension by Red Hat in your VS Code based
Modeler.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Configure Keyword Suggestions in Contracts (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Add Validation Methods in A Few Quick Steps

Avoid the manual creation of validation functions during customization. The sf modeler workspace add CLI command now
supports the creation of the validation method type of business logic contract.
How: Run the sf modeler workspace add CLI command in your workspace and follow the instructions provided to add a
validation method to new or existing modules in your Modeler workspace.
? Select the resource you want to add. businesslogic
? Specify a name for the businesslogic: <businesslogic_name>
? Select the module to which businesslogic businesslogic_name should be added.
<module_name>
? Select a suitable option for businesslogic 'businesslogic_name’. validation method
? Select the reference object to which you want to add the validation method.
<modeler_object>
? Do you really want to create the businesslogic 'businesslogic_name’? Yes
Deep Link Additional Apps in Your Consumer Goods Cloud Offline Mobile App
Your sales reps can collaborate, manage data efficiently, and streamline their field operations by using these third-party apps - Facebook,
Workplace from Meta, GoSpotCheck, Star PassPRNT, and MicroStrategy Library.
How: To integrate these third-party apps to your CG Cloud offline mobile app, link the apps to the Quick Access card of your offline
mobile app.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Allowlisted Third-Party Apps (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
330

Achieve precise rounding and retain the adjustments that you make for a KPI for a period with the Rounding within Period rounding
type. You can now execute Push Promotions faster, and easily extract claim data and download promotion data in shareable CSV formats.
IN THIS SECTION:
Retain Manually Entered KPI Values for Periods
With the new Rounding within Period rounding type, retain the KPI values manually entered for a period. This rounding type adjusts
the KPI values only within the period where the value is manually entered, and you don’t lose the changes that you made in the
previous period.
Key account managers can download data from the promotion P&L grid to a CSV file, and easily share the data with other stakeholders
or use in third-party systems. To ensure that they download only the required data, they can filter the promotion P&L grid data before
starting to download.
Use the Payment API to extract KPI values, such as Payout Amount, for each product and product level for every claim tactic that
you want to use in third-party systems. You can extract up to 60 KPIs per claim.
Configure system settings to change how batch processes are orchestrated. As a result, the Push Promotions process completed
faster.
Improve Promotion Effectiveness with Analytics Dashboards
Analyze account participation during promotional periods by using the new analytics dashboards for Trade Promotion Management.
Use the data on sales volume, value, and product placement compliance to assess the impact of promotions. Gain insights into your
brand and product performance. Compare the insights with competitor categories, brands, or products to measure and monitor
the effectiveness of your products.
Test a new version of CG Managed Package (CGPS) in your sandbox environment to verify that your business workflows are working
seamlessly with the updated CGPS. Test the new CGPS version in the sandbox early on to ensure that you don't face any hiccups
when you upgrade your production org to use the latest Trade Promotion Management features.
Retain Manually Entered KPI Values for Periods

With the new Rounding within Period rounding type, retain the KPI values manually entered for a period. This rounding type adjusts the
KPI values only within the period where the value is manually entered, and you don’t lose the changes that you made in the previous
period.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions where Consumer Goods Cloud Trade Promotion
Management is enabled.
How: For an editable or editable calculated KPI whose value you want to adjust within a period, select Rounding within Period as the
rounding type and Sub Periods Then Periods as the rounding order for the KPI definition. You can select this rounding type if View
and Edit for Months and Quarters is enabled for the sales organization.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Understand How KPI Values are Calculated when Rounding within Period is Enabled (can be outdated or unavailable
331

Key account managers can download data from the promotion P&L grid to a CSV file, and easily share the data with other stakeholders
or use in third-party systems. To ensure that they download only the required data, they can filter the promotion P&L grid data before
starting to download.
How: To enable the Download button in the promotion P&L grid, edit the page and select PL - Enable Download Button in the PL
Grid component.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Download Promotion Data (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Use the Payment API to extract KPI values, such as Payout Amount, for each product and product level for every claim tactic that you
want to use in third-party systems. You can extract up to 60 KPIs per claim.

Configure system settings to change how batch processes are orchestrated. As a result, the Push Promotions process completed faster.
How: Go to Custom Settings in Setup and add a system setting with Orchestrator as the value.
Improve Promotion Effectiveness with Analytics Dashboards

Analyze account participation during promotional periods by using the new analytics dashboards for Trade Promotion Management.
Use the data on sales volume, value, and product placement compliance to assess the impact of promotions. Gain insights into your
brand and product performance. Compare the insights with competitor categories, brands, or products to measure and monitor the
effectiveness of your products.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions where Consumer Goods Cloud
Trade Promotion Management and Consumer Goods intelligence or CRMA for Consumer Goods are enabled.
Who: The dashboard is a part of the Trade Promotion Effectiveness app and is available only to Consumer Goods Cloud Trade Promotion
Management users with the Consumer Goods Cloud Intelligence or the CRMA for CG add-on license.
How: From Setup, find and select Consumer Goods Cloud. Under Consumer Goods Cloud, go to the TPE Dashboard Configuration
section. Follow the instructions in the setup flow.

Test a new version of CG Managed Package (CGPS) in your sandbox environment to verify that your business workflows are working
seamlessly with the updated CGPS. Test the new CGPS version in the sandbox early on to ensure that you don't face any hiccups when
you upgrade your production org to use the latest Trade Promotion Management features.
332
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Energy and Utilities Cloud

Assign the new permission sets, such as TPM Funds Calculation Worker and CGCloud Retail Supervisor User, to users, and save yourself
the hassle of managing permission sets every time you upgrade to the latest version of the Consumer Goods managed package. The
new permission sets are now shipped with the managed package and are automatically updated whenever the managed package is
upgraded.
How: If you’re using Retail Execution, when you install the Consumer Goods managed package, use new profiles, and then based on
user roles, assign the new permission sets. If you’re using Trade Promotion Management, use a new batch user profile along with the
ones that you already have. Then, based on the role of the batch user, assign the new batch user permission sets and delete the older
permission sets.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Permission Sets (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Other Changes in Consumer Goods Cloud

Learn about the other changes for Consumer Goods Cloud in Summer ’24.
Where: These changes apply to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions where either Consumer Goods Cloud or
Consumer Goods Cloud Trade Promotion Management is enabled.
Why: Consumer Goods users can use these new enhancements.
• For improved simple pricing, use the Use Built In Pricing field in the Order Template to compute the order value. If you don’t enable
the Use Built In Pricing field, the order items value and order total remain 0 for new orders and unchanged for existing orders. This
change is applicable only to Retail Execution users.
• For promotions, the promotion templates now appear in ascending order of their sort value. To avoid errors when you create a
promotion, provide user profiles with Public Read or Write access for the Sort field in the Promotion Template object. This change
is applicable to both Retail Execution and Trade Promotion Management users.
SEE ALSO:
Sharing Rules (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Order Calculation (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Energy & Utilities (E&U) cloud combines and extends the full power of Salesforce Sales and Service clouds and the Salesforce Platform
into an industry-specific solution for utilities, retail energy, and modern energy services companies.
Learn about what’s in this release in the Energy and Utilities Cloud Release Notes.
333
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Field Service for Industries

Field Service for Industries empowers businesses to build customer-centric field service operations, maximize asset lifetime value, and
elevate the experience of service teams. Use Field Service for Industries to accelerate service delivery, proactively manage assets, and
simplify the work order management process. Manage the repair, recall, and upgrade of assets at scale by using Product Service Campaign.
Estimate field service work before you create work orders by using Work Order Estimation.
IN THIS SECTION:
Service faulty products, recall defective products, and manage communication initiatives at scale by using Product Service Campaign.
Service managers can design and manage effective campaigns, cultivate customer trust, maintain company reputation, and uphold
customer safety. They can easily segment and curate lists of impacted assets and vehicles. Service agents can use these lists to reach
out to customers and track the services to be performed on assets and vehicles.
Equip users to estimate field service work before they create a work order by using Work Order Estimation.

Service faulty products, recall defective products, and manage communication initiatives at scale by using Product Service Campaign.
Service managers can design and manage effective campaigns, cultivate customer trust, maintain company reputation, and uphold
customer safety. They can easily segment and curate lists of impacted assets and vehicles. Service agents can use these lists to reach out
to customers and track the services to be performed on assets and vehicles.
IN THIS SECTION:
Manage Mass Asset Recalls, Modifications, and Upgrades Easily
Create effective product service campaigns to monitor and address issues on large numbers of products or services. Specify the
impacted product, and the priority, duration, status, and type of a campaign. Track each asset or vehicle that is the focus of a product
service campaign. Create work orders and return orders to capture the services to be performed on impacted products.
Segment Assets in Product Service Campaigns Swiftly
It’s tedious to identify faulty assets and vehicles, and individually add them to product service campaigns. Service managers can
identify and segment a large number of assets and vehicles for product service campaigns easily using actionable lists. With a single
click, they can add items from actionable lists to product service campaigns. They can set list priorities, sort list orders, customize
details, and assign lists to service agents for engagement initiatives and service activities.
SEE ALSO:
Manage Mass Asset Recalls, Modifications, and Upgrades Easily

Create effective product service campaigns to monitor and address issues on large numbers of products or services. Specify the impacted
product, and the priority, duration, status, and type of a campaign. Track each asset or vehicle that is the focus of a product service
campaign. Create work orders and return orders to capture the services to be performed on impacted products.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Automotive Cloud, Communications Cloud, Energy and Utilities Cloud, and
Manufacturing Cloud, where Field Service for Industries is enabled.
Who: Users must have the Product Service Campaign permission set.
334
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Financial Services Cloud
How: Create a Product Service Campaign record, and specify its details.
Then, create a Product Service Campaign Item record, and specify its details.
Create a Return Order or a Work Order record from the related list of a product service campaign record.
Segment Assets in Product Service Campaigns Swiftly

It’s tedious to identify faulty assets and vehicles, and individually add them to product service campaigns. Service managers can identify
and segment a large number of assets and vehicles for product service campaigns easily using actionable lists. With a single click, they
can add items from actionable lists to product service campaigns. They can set list priorities, sort list orders, customize details, and assign
lists to service agents for engagement initiatives and service activities.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Actionable Segmentation, Query for Data Pipelines, and Product Service Campaign
permission sets.
Campaign.

Equip users to estimate field service work before they create a work order by using Work Order Estimation.
IN THIS SECTION:
Estimate Field Service Work Before You Create Work Orders
Improve customer satisfaction by enabling your users to provide your customers with a quote and an estimate of the work to be
done associated with a specific asset.
SEE ALSO:
Estimate Field Service Work and Quote Costs to Customers Easily
Estimate Field Service Work Before You Create Work Orders

Improve customer satisfaction by enabling your users to provide your customers with a quote and an estimate of the work to be done
associated with a specific asset.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Work Order Estimation permission set.
How: You can launch the work order estimation process from an account, an asset, or an existing work order. Define the work to be
done on the quote by providing the details, review the quote summary, and then generate a proposal. After the customer approves the
quote, work orders are generated.

Learn about the new features and enhancements in Financial Services Cloud that strengthen client management, automate tasks, provide
deeper customer insights, and simplify data organization.
335
IN THIS SECTION:
Digital Lending
Digital Lending supports the end-to-end lending lifecycle across all retail loan products and channels in a unified lending platform.
Create a loan application process that suits the needs of your clients, both self-service application intake and assisted application
intake. Digital Lending harnesses the power of Financial Services Cloud and common Industry features to offer a platform that serves
as both the point-of-sale and loan origination system.
Support banks and financial institutions in India with an end-to-end loan origination solution. Get started quickly with the loan
origination process by using assisted onboarding, guided application intake, prebuilt integration templates for key verifications and
screenings, and workflows that can be easily orchestrated using Stage Management. Unify the loan origination process on a single
platform, expedite decision making, and increase efficiency and transparency across the loan origination lifecycle.
Streamline the dispute resolution process by integrating Transaction Dispute Management with Mastercom®. Eliminate the inefficiencies
that arise from switching between systems, ensure regulatory compliance, and reduce operational costs to enhance customer and
employee experience.
Your users can use Business Client Engagement to anticipate and fulfill the needs of their clients. Drive efficiency and compliance
by streamlining complex onboarding tasks and business processes. Your users can focus on building strategic relationships by having
a detailed view of the business client ownership structure.
Use the Record Rollup Definitions feature to streamline the aggregation of records from various objects or groups and to provide a
consolidated view of your data.
Review the status of the integration callouts by using Integration Orchestration. Additionally, add the Integration Execution Status
lightning web component to your record page to manage the integration callouts.
Use the Party Relationship Group data model to create groups or households easily and quickly. Organize your customers in convenient
ways by using Groups or Households. Gain insights into a customer’s financial circles, such as a household with its family members
and professional connections.
Household API Setup
Aggregate records and associate them with the record of an unrelated object to consolidate information and make it easy for users
to access the information from both objects.
Updates to Calculated Insights in Data Cloud and FlexCards in Salesforce to view more customer insights.
View the cash inflow and outflow of your clients, identify spending trends, and prepare for upcoming client meetings.
Use Financial Account and related objects without installing the Financial Services Cloud managed package. Give your users greater
control and flexibility over their data models, enabling seamless integration and decreased dependencies by using these standard
objects. Enable the Financial Account Management Standard Objects setting and start using the Financial Account and related
standard objects, which help you model financial accounts and related information for your users.
Discover the new guided setups for Financial Services Cloud.
336

New videos help your users with comprehensive guidance on the KYC data model and integrated onboarding in Financial Services
Cloud.
Do more with the new and updated Financial Services Cloud objects.
Get to know the resource available with Financial Services Cloud.

Financial Services Cloud includes access to some features that are available across clouds and products in Industries. Use these features
to extend and customize Financial Services Cloud based on your business needs.
• Stage Management
With Stage Management, simplify complex business processes such as customer onboarding and transaction disputes with greater
visibility and control.
• Actionable List Members

List creators can now focus on important data by adding or removing columns in Actionable List Members. Use the default Record
Status filter to view only the active actionable list member records. To help list creators access list-specific OmniScripts on the Bulk
Action Panel, associate OmniScripts with bulk action configuration. List creators can now create action plans in bulk for list members.
Digital Lending
Digital Lending supports the end-to-end lending lifecycle across all retail loan products and channels in a unified lending platform.
Create a loan application process that suits the needs of your clients, both self-service application intake and assisted application intake.
Digital Lending harnesses the power of Financial Services Cloud and common Industry features to offer a platform that serves as both
the point-of-sale and loan origination system.
Use a new data model that supports the loan process across all consumer loan products. Provide lenders and clients with an
easy-to-navigate loan application experience by using scalable integrations and native capabilities for product catalog, eligibility, and
pricing. Use Product Catalog Management to create an entire loan product catalog composed of products, attributes, product classifications,
simple and bundled products, and rules. Use an intuitive user interface built using OmniStudio components to customize the client and
banker experience to meet your needs. Build a custom UI by using a Connect API that enables headless POST and GET operations for
core application data model objects. Dynamically determine the disclosures to show a loan applicant based on flexible input attributes,
such as loan product and intake channel, by using Business Rules Engine.
IN THIS SECTION:
Give Clients a Self-Serve Loan Application Process
Your clients can apply for a loan during a time that’s convenient for them by using Digital Lending self-service application intake.
An easy-to-configure Experience Cloud template supports the self-service application intake experience to meet the needs of your
clients. To determine the categories and products that an applicant sees based on their Account context, and determine applicant
loan eligibility, create product qualification rules. To show categories, products, and product attributes in Experience Cloud, use
quote and order capture. The minimal interaction with bankers at your financial institution and the simple steps help applicants
complete a loan application quickly and easily.
337

Digital Lending assisted application intake experience provides your bankers with a seamless loan application process. Show a banker
the loan products that the applicant is eligible for by creating loan products, catalogs, attributes, classifications, and rules by using
Product Catalog Management. Guide bankers through the loan application process, show contextual information, and provide access
to relevant tasks by using OmniStudio components.
Approve or Reject a Loan Application by Using Underwriter Console
Give underwriters easy access to loan application details to make informed decisions by using Underwriter Console. The underwriters
can get a consolidated view of a submitted loan application on the application form product record page. They can view and edit
assets, liabilities, and collateral details, assign action items, confirm pricing, verify integration results, such as Know Your Customer
and credit checks, and approve or reject an application.
Give Clients a Self-Serve Loan Application Process

Your clients can apply for a loan during a time that’s convenient for them by using Digital Lending self-service application intake. An
easy-to-configure Experience Cloud template supports the self-service application intake experience to meet the needs of your clients.
To determine the categories and products that an applicant sees based on their Account context, and determine applicant loan eligibility,
create product qualification rules. To show categories, products, and product attributes in Experience Cloud, use quote and order capture.
The minimal interaction with bankers at your financial institution and the simple steps help applicants complete a loan application
quickly and easily.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, and Unlimited editions where Financial Services Cloud
is enabled.
When: Digital Lending is available starting July 16, 2024.
Who: To use this feature, users need the Financial Services Cloud Extension and Financial Services Cloud Digital Lending permission
sets.
Why: Loan applicants who seek an application process that’s similar to self-checkout at a grocery store can now complete an application
online without communicating with anyone at your financial institution. The self-service application intake experience reduces the stress
of applying for a loan and helps them pause and resume their application at their convenience. In the post-intake experience, an applicant
can review and complete the action items assigned to them to complete the application process.
How: Digital Lending uses Financial Services Cloud and common Industry features. In Setup, turn on Digital Lending. Then use Product
Catalog Management, Qualification Rules, Business Rules Engine, OmniStudio, Salesforce Contracts, and Experience Cloud to set up and
deploy the self-service application intake experience to your clients.

Digital Lending assisted application intake experience provides your bankers with a seamless loan application process. Show a banker
the loan products that the applicant is eligible for by creating loan products, catalogs, attributes, classifications, and rules by using Product
Catalog Management. Guide bankers through the loan application process, show contextual information, and provide access to relevant
tasks by using OmniStudio components.
is enabled.
Who: To use this feature, users need the Financial Services Cloud Extension and Financial Services Cloud Digital Lending permission
sets.
Why: First-time loan applicants can be overwhelmed by the application and appreciate guidance from a banker to complete the process.
For example, a first-time homeowner needs a loan to complete the structural modifications identified in a home inspection. They require
the expertise of a banker to guide them to enter their applicant details, upload supporting documentation, and provide feedback on
338
the monthly payment, term, and rate options. The banker ensures that the application is completed correctly so that the loan is approved
quickly.
How: Digital Lending uses Financial Services Cloud and common Industry features. In Setup, turn on Digital Lending. Then use Product
Catalog Management, Qualification Rules, Business Rules Engine, OmniStudio, Salesforce Contracts, and Experience Cloud to set up and
deploy the assisted application intake experience to your clients.
Approve or Reject a Loan Application by Using Underwriter Console

Give underwriters easy access to loan application details to make informed decisions by using Underwriter Console. The underwriters
can get a consolidated view of a submitted loan application on the application form product record page. They can view and edit assets,
liabilities, and collateral details, assign action items, confirm pricing, verify integration results, such as Know Your Customer and credit
checks, and approve or reject an application.
is enabled.
Who: To use this feature, users need the Financial Services Cloud Extension, Financial Services Cloud Digital Lending, and Digital Lending
Workbench permission sets.
Why: Underwriter Console gives an underwriter a streamlined view of the loan application details without switching between tools. It’s
time-consuming for an underwriter to use different tools to analyze an applicant’s credit history, verify income, submit supporting
documentation, and gather personal data to determine if they qualify. Underwriter Console shows all these details in a single view,
helping the underwriter save time and approve applications faster.
How: Set up Digital Lending self-service application intake and assisted application intake experience. Then, assign users the Digital
Lending Workbench permission to give them access to digital lending underwriter console features.
Support banks and financial institutions in India with an end-to-end loan origination solution. Get started quickly with the loan origination
process by using assisted onboarding, guided application intake, prebuilt integration templates for key verifications and screenings, and
workflows that can be easily orchestrated using Stage Management. Unify the loan origination process on a single platform, expedite
decision making, and increase efficiency and transparency across the loan origination lifecycle.
IN THIS SECTION:
Get Digital Lending—India Up and Running with Ease
Streamline the end-to-end loan origination process with a guided setup. Follow simple, clear steps to set up Digital Lending—India.
The guided setup walks you through the prerequisites for enabling the Digital Lending—India sample app and the prebuilt integration
processing templates required for connecting with external service providers. Use the guided setup to configure the workflows for
application verification, applicant’s profile risk analysis, applicant eligibility evaluation, and pre-disbursement operations. View
information about the artifacts that you need throughout the loan origination lifecycle. You can also set up the application form,
applicant, and party profile stages and their transition rules by using the guided setup.
Increase Speed and Ease of Adoption with Digital Lending—India Sample App
Offer your users and customers a superior loan origination experience by providing them with a comprehensive view of all the
resources and capabilities required in a loan origination lifecycle. With the sample app, your users can quickly access important
information related to loan applications with only a few clicks. By providing consolidated information, eliminate the inefficiencies
that arise from switching between systems, and reduce the turnaround time in each phase of the loan origination process. You can
also customize the Digital Lending—India home page with lightning web components to meet your specific loan origination needs.
339
Onboard Loan Applicants Faster with Guided Application Intake

Eliminate the inefficiencies with the tedious loan origination process by offering your agents or relationship managers a guided
application intake experience. With guided application intake, reduce the need for applicants to visit banks for physical verification
or for providing documents. Agents can complete the loan application forms with more accuracy and minimal manual effort. Your
loan officers or mid-office agents can efficiently verify applicant and application details, and collect additional details to ensure
underwriters have the required information to decide application eligibility.
Offer a Smooth Loan Application Review Experience
Make loan decisioning easier for your underwriters by offering them a comprehensive view of the applicant, application, and
application form product details. Give your underwriters access to information about the documents collected and integrations run
at various stages of the loan application process. Additionally, empower underwriters to create, track, and review any deviations
before they accept a loan application. With this consolidated information and capabilities, underwriters can accurately and efficiently
determine if applicants qualify for a loan.
Reduce the Turnaround Time for a Loan Disbursal
When a loan is sanctioned, give your operations officers access to a guided OmniScript to easily collect details about bank accounts
and repayment methods. By capturing the repayment schedule details, efficiently manage a loan throughout its lifecycle after it’s
disbursed, and ensure that the applicants repay loans according to the agreed-upon repayment terms.
Get Digital Lending—India Up and Running with Ease

Streamline the end-to-end loan origination process with a guided setup. Follow simple, clear steps to set up Digital Lending—India.
The guided setup walks you through the prerequisites for enabling the Digital Lending—India sample app and the prebuilt integration
processing templates required for connecting with external service providers. Use the guided setup to configure the workflows for
application verification, applicant’s profile risk analysis, applicant eligibility evaluation, and pre-disbursement operations. View information
about the artifacts that you need throughout the loan origination lifecycle. You can also set up the application form, applicant, and party
profile stages and their transition rules by using the guided setup.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions where Digital Lending—India is enabled.
When: Digital Lending—India is available starting on July 16, 2024.
Who: To use this feature, your users need the Digital Lending India Admin User permission.
How: From Setup, find and select Lending, and then under Guided Setup, select Digital Lending—India.
Increase Speed and Ease of Adoption with Digital Lending—India Sample App
Offer your users and customers a superior loan origination experience by providing them with a comprehensive view of all the resources
and capabilities required in a loan origination lifecycle. With the sample app, your users can quickly access important information related
to loan applications with only a few clicks. By providing consolidated information, eliminate the inefficiencies that arise from switching
between systems, and reduce the turnaround time in each phase of the loan origination process. You can also customize the Digital
Lending—India home page with lightning web components to meet your specific loan origination needs.
Who: To use this feature, your users need the Digital Lending India Admin User permission.
How: From Setup, find and select Digital Lending—India, and then turn on Digital Lending—India. From the App Launcher, find and
select Digital Lending—India.
340
Onboard Loan Applicants Faster with Guided Application Intake

Eliminate the inefficiencies with the tedious loan origination process by offering your agents or relationship managers a guided application
intake experience. With guided application intake, reduce the need for applicants to visit banks for physical verification or for providing
documents. Agents can complete the loan application forms with more accuracy and minimal manual effort. Your loan officers or
mid-office agents can efficiently verify applicant and application details, and collect additional details to ensure underwriters have the
required information to decide application eligibility.
Offer a Smooth Loan Application Review Experience

Make loan decisioning easier for your underwriters by offering them a comprehensive view of the applicant, application, and application
form product details. Give your underwriters access to information about the documents collected and integrations run at various stages
of the loan application process. Additionally, empower underwriters to create, track, and review any deviations before they accept a loan
application. With this consolidated information and capabilities, underwriters can accurately and efficiently determine if applicants
qualify for a loan.
Reduce the Turnaround Time for a Loan Disbursal

When a loan is sanctioned, give your operations officers access to a guided OmniScript to easily collect details about bank accounts and
repayment methods. By capturing the repayment schedule details, efficiently manage a loan throughout its lifecycle after it’s disbursed,
and ensure that the applicants repay loans according to the agreed-upon repayment terms.

Streamline the dispute resolution process by integrating Transaction Dispute Management with Mastercom®. Eliminate the inefficiencies
that arise from switching between systems, ensure regulatory compliance, and reduce operational costs to enhance customer and
employee experience.
IN THIS SECTION:
Resolve Transaction Disputes Faster with Prebuilt Mastercom® Integration
Transaction Dispute Management now integrates with Mastercom® to assist you in resolving transaction disputes with an efficient
chargeback process. Use this integration to protect your customers against fraudulent or unsatisfactory transactions. Dispute specialists
can create chargebacks with a few clicks by using all the information captured in the dispute intake, without the need to reenter
the same data in multiple systems.
Resolve Transaction Disputes Faster with Prebuilt Mastercom® Integration

Transaction Dispute Management now integrates with Mastercom® to assist you in resolving transaction disputes with an efficient
chargeback process. Use this integration to protect your customers against fraudulent or unsatisfactory transactions. Dispute specialists
can create chargebacks with a few clicks by using all the information captured in the dispute intake, without the need to reenter the
same data in multiple systems.
341
is enabled.
Who: To use this feature, users need the OmniStudio Admin, OmniStudio User, and Financial Services Cloud Extension or FSC Service
permission sets.
Why: In banking services, a robust dispute resolution process for card transactions is essential to protect your customers against
unauthorized charges, unsatisfactory purchases, and errors. Fulfilling dispute requests, particularly when filing chargebacks, requires
significant operational effort, and involves multiple systems and stakeholders. By integrating Transaction Dispute Management with
Mastercom, streamline the chargeback initiation process to facilitate a reliable and transparent dispute resolution process. After a case
is created for a transaction dispute request, use prebuilt flows and integration procedures to orchestrate the end-to-end chargeback
process.

Your users can use Business Client Engagement to anticipate and fulfill the needs of their clients. Drive efficiency and compliance by
streamlining complex onboarding tasks and business processes. Your users can focus on building strategic relationships by having a
detailed view of the business client ownership structure.
IN THIS SECTION:
Discover the Ultimate Owners of Your Business Clients
Help your relationship managers connect dots easily by using the Onboarding and Know Your Customer data models. These models
help businesses efficiently capture the details of beneficial owners, controlling parties, and business structure hierarchy. Ensure a
clear and precise data-driven approach to identify the key stakeholders in various ownership structures.
Use the new prebuilt actionable relationship center (ARC) graph templates to visualize complex business relationships in a convenient
and interactive manner. View how your business client entities are related to each other and to other related accounts by using a
B2B Account to Account Relationship graph template and a B2B Applicant to Applicant Relationship graph template.
Discover the Ultimate Owners of Your Business Clients

Help your relationship managers connect dots easily by using the Onboarding and Know Your Customer data models. These models
help businesses efficiently capture the details of beneficial owners, controlling parties, and business structure hierarchy. Ensure a clear
and precise data-driven approach to identify the key stakeholders in various ownership structures.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions where Financial Services Sales Cloud and
Business Client Engagement are enabled.
Why: To go through your client’s complex corporate landscape can be challenging, and it often leads to trust and integrity issues. The
ultimate ownership information is critical in the process of onboarding clients, suppliers, and partners.
How: In Setup, search for and select Business Client Engagement Settings. Turn on Business Client Engagement.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Business Client Engagement
Salesforce Help: Setup of Business Client Engagement
342

Use the new prebuilt actionable relationship center (ARC) graph templates to visualize complex business relationships in a convenient
and interactive manner. View how your business client entities are related to each other and to other related accounts by using a B2B
Account to Account Relationship graph template and a B2B Applicant to Applicant Relationship graph template.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions where Financial Services Cloud and Business
Client Engagement are enabled.
Why: When you clone and add a B2B Account to Account Relationship graph to the account details page, you can see all subsidiaries,
the legal and beneficial owners and the controlling parties associated with these subsidiaries. When you clone and add B2B Applicant
to Applicant Relationship graph to an application form details page, you can visualize the related applicants that are associated with the
applicant and their relationships with them. These related applicants can be individuals or business accounts.
How: Create an ARC graph by using either the B2B Account to Account Relationship or B2B Applicant to Applicant Relationship template.
Add the graph to an Account page or an Application Form page in the Lightning App Builder.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up ARC Permissions in Financial Services Cloud
Salesforce Help: Create Actionable Relationship Center Graphs by Using Default Templates for Business Client Engagement

IN THIS SECTION:
The Record Rollup Definitions feature is available without installing the Financial Services Cloud managed package. By using an
easy-to-use and intuitive UI, you can create record rollup definitions with just a few clicks.

The Record Rollup Definitions feature is available without installing the Financial Services Cloud managed package. By using an easy-to-use
and intuitive UI, you can create record rollup definitions with just a few clicks.
is enabled.
Who: To set up record rollup definitions, users need the Financial Services Cloud Extension or FSC Sales, Data Pipelines Base User, and
OmniStudio Admin permissions sets.
Why: The new Record Rollup Definitions feature expands the record aggregation capability, enabling the aggregation of records from
one object to another object. For example, you can roll up financial accounts to the Party relationship Group so that your users can view
all the financial accounts associated with household members at the household level.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Rollup Definitions for Record Rollups
343

Review the status of the integration callouts by using Integration Orchestration. Additionally, add the Integration Execution Status
lightning web component to your record page to manage the integration callouts.
IN THIS SECTION:
Streamline Integration Callouts with Integration Orchestration
Use Integration Orchestration, which is now generally available, to dynamically create integration callout plans, and enable users to
review the status of integrations with different external endpoints. Users can easily track the progress of all integration callouts,
resulting in better process visibility and efficiency.
Visualize Integration Callouts and Manage Them Easily
Integration Orchestration now has a prebuilt Lightning Web Component. Add this component to your record page to give users a
consolidated view of all the integration callouts. Users can easily manage manual and automatically triggered integrations–all at
one place.
Streamline Integration Callouts with Integration Orchestration

Use Integration Orchestration, which is now generally available, to dynamically create integration callout plans, and enable users to
review the status of integrations with different external endpoints. Users can easily track the progress of all integration callouts, resulting
in better process visibility and efficiency.
is enabled.
Visualize Integration Callouts and Manage Them Easily

Integration Orchestration now has a prebuilt Lightning Web Component. Add this component to your record page to give users a
consolidated view of all the integration callouts. Users can easily manage manual and automatically triggered integrations–all at one
place.
is enabled.
How: In the Lightning App Builder, add the Integration Execution Status component to the record page.

Use the Party Relationship Group data model to create groups or households easily and quickly. Organize your customers in convenient
ways by using Groups or Households. Gain insights into a customer’s financial circles, such as a household with its family members and
professional connections.
IN THIS SECTION:
Use Party Relationship Groups to Create Groups Easily and Efficiently
Streamline the creation of groups or households with Party Relationship Groups. Group family members of a household as members
of a Party Relationship Group, and specify member roles and relationships easily and quickly. Add related contacts, groups, and
business accounts, and specify relationships with the group and its members.
344
Visualize Groups or Households with Actionable Relationship Center

Your financial advisors can deepen their understanding of a household by viewing the household and the related records on an
actionable relationship center (ARC) graph. Use the default templates available for Account Relations and Contact Relations to get
you started when you create ARC graphs. Use Account Contact Relationship, Account Account Relationship, and Contact Contact
Relationship as junction objects in ARC to show many-to-many relationships between contacts and accounts.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Group Membership and Households
Use Party Relationship Groups to Create Groups Easily and Efficiently

Streamline the creation of groups or households with Party Relationship Groups. Group family members of a household as members of
a Party Relationship Group, and specify member roles and relationships easily and quickly. Add related contacts, groups, and business
accounts, and specify relationships with the group and its members.
is enabled.
Who: To create Party Relationship Groups, users need the Group Membership permission set.
Why: Streamline the group creation process by using the New Group UI flow associated with Party Relationship Group. Easily create a
group of family members and professional connections and form a collective unit, such as a household. Use the New Group UI flow to
create records for each group member, related contact, and business account that must be included in the group based on the details
entered in the group. The flow simplifies the grouping of members and reduces data entry effort for group creators.
How: To create a group or household, go to the Party Relationship Group list view page, and then click New Group.
SEE ALSO:
Visualize Groups or Households with Actionable Relationship Center

Your financial advisors can deepen their understanding of a household by viewing the household and the related records on an actionable
relationship center (ARC) graph. Use the default templates available for Account Relations and Contact Relations to get you started when
you create ARC graphs. Use Account Contact Relationship, Account Account Relationship, and Contact Contact Relationship as junction
objects in ARC to show many-to-many relationships between contacts and accounts.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise and Unlimited editions where Financial Services Cloud
is enabled.
Who: To use ARC graphs, users need the Group Membership and ARC Access permission sets.
SEE ALSO:
Household API Setup

Aggregate records and associate them with the record of an unrelated object to consolidate information and make it easy for users to
access the information from both objects.
345
IN THIS SECTION:
Aggregate and View Salesforce Records in your Financial Planning Tool by Using API
Create a Household API Setup to use Connect API calls that retrieve household details and related records without the help of a
Salesforce Developer. This enables the retrieval of household details, such as Members and their Financial Accounts, Financial
Holdings, Assets and Liabilities, from within your financial planning tool.
Aggregate and View Salesforce Records in your Financial Planning Tool by Using API
Create a Household API Setup to use Connect API calls that retrieve household details and related records without the help of a Salesforce
Developer. This enables the retrieval of household details, such as Members and their Financial Accounts, Financial Holdings, Assets and
Liabilities, from within your financial planning tool.
is enabled.
When: The Household API for Wealth Management unmanaged package is available starting June 8, 2024.
Who: To use this feature, users need the Financial Services Cloud Extension and Manage Rollup Definitions permission sets.
Why: The Household API for Wealth Management unmanaged package contains the household API Retrieval Summary Definition that
retrieves household details by using the Household Members, Household Financial Accounts, Household Assets, and Household Liabilities
record aggregation definitions and the fields for each object. When you create a Household API Setup and call the endpoint, it returns
all the relevant information about the objects. Or use your own custom Record Rollup Definitions to streamline the aggregation of
household records as they relate to other objects to provide a consolidated view of your client’s household data.
How: Install the Household API for Wealth Management unmanaged package to use the preconfigured record aggregation definitions.
Or, in Setup, create Rollup Definitions that meet your business requirements. Then, create a Household API in Setup that references the
installed record aggregation definitions or your custom record rollup definitions.
SEE ALSO:
Aggregate Records Using API

Updates to Calculated Insights in Data Cloud and FlexCards in Salesforce to view more customer insights.
IN THIS SECTION:
Visualize Insights into a Household and its Members
Add the FSCDataCloudShowIncomeExpenses and FSCDataCloudCashFlowByCategory FlexCards to a household account record
page. On the FlexCards, use two new picklists to filter by members and financial accounts. In the time frame picklist on the
FSCDataCloudCashFlowByCategory FlexCard, select one month from the past 12 months to view cash flow category data in the pie
chart.
Use the Goal Status Calculated Insight in Data Cloud to gain insights into the progress of a financial goal based on the current value,
contributions, and target achievement date. View financial account data on the FSCDataCloudShowIncomeExpenses and
FSCDataCloudCashFlowByCategory FlexCards and sort the FSCDataCloudCashFlowByCategory FlexCard by month.
346
Visualize Insights into a Household and its Members

Add the FSCDataCloudShowIncomeExpenses and FSCDataCloudCashFlowByCategory FlexCards to a household account record page. On
the FlexCards, use two new picklists to filter by members and financial accounts. In the time frame picklist on the
FSCDataCloudCashFlowByCategory FlexCard, select one month from the past 12 months to view cash flow category data in the pie
chart.
is enabled.
Who: To use this feature, users need the Financial Services Cloud Extension, Data Cloud for Financial Services Cloud Admin User or Data
Cloud for Financial Services Cloud User, OmniStudio Admin or User permission set in their Salesforce org, and Data Cloud Admin
permission set in their Data Cloud org.
Why: To view the client financial income, surplus, and deficit data, hover over a bar on the FSCDataCloudShowIncomeExpenses FlexCard.
Or, show income and expense data in a line graph to easily view and track smaller financial changes. For example, when you view a
household, select one household member and one financial account to know how their income and expenses affect the overall financial
health of the household.
How: To show members and financial accounts for a household, add the FSCDataCloudShowIncomeExpenses and
FSCDataCloudCashFlowByCategory FlexCards to the household account record page.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: View Visualized Insights in Salesforce

Use the Goal Status Calculated Insight in Data Cloud to gain insights into the progress of a financial goal based on the current value,
contributions, and target achievement date. View financial account data on the FSCDataCloudShowIncomeExpenses and
FSCDataCloudCashFlowByCategory FlexCards and sort the FSCDataCloudCashFlowByCategory FlexCard by month.
is enabled.
Who: To use this feature, users need the Financial Services Cloud Extension, Data Cloud for Financial Services Cloud Admin User or Data
Cloud for Financial Services Cloud User, OmniStudio Admin or User permission set in their Salesforce org, and Data Cloud Admin
permission set in their Data Cloud org.
Why: View financial account data on the FSCDataCloudShowIncomeExpenses and FSCDataCloudCashFlowByCategory FlexCards by
using CompletionFinancialAccountName and FinancialAccountID, the new fields added to these calculated insights: Deposits for 3
Months, Deposits for 6 Months, Deposits for 1 Year, Expenses for 3 Months, Expenses for 6 Months, and Expenses for 1 Year. Sort the
FSCDataCloudCashFlowByCategory FlexCard by one month from the past 12 months by using Month and Year, the new fields added
to the Monthly Deposit by Category and Monthly Expense by Category calculated insights.
How: To view the new calculated insights and fields, in Data Cloud, select Data Explorer, and then select Calculated Insights. In
Salesforce, the FSCDataCloudCashFlowByCategory and FSCDataCloudShowIncomeExpenses FlexCards show data based on the new
fields added to the calculated insights.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: View Visualized Insights in Salesforce
Salesforce Help: Calculate Customer Insights Using Data Cloud
347

View the cash inflow and outflow of your clients, identify spending trends, and prepare for upcoming client meetings.
IN THIS SECTION:
Get a snapshot of the ingoing and outgoing transactions of your clients by using the FSCCashFlow FlexCard. Visualize the cash flow
trends in a month-by-month breakdown of the total income and expenses of your clients on a double bar or line graph. OmniStudio
components retrieve expense and income details on the Party Income and Party Expense objects to show client financial data. View,
add, and edit income and expenses in list views on the FlexCard. Select a time frame to filter data on a person account, household
account, or party relationship group record page.

Get a snapshot of the ingoing and outgoing transactions of your clients by using the FSCCashFlow FlexCard. Visualize the cash flow
trends in a month-by-month breakdown of the total income and expenses of your clients on a double bar or line graph. OmniStudio
components retrieve expense and income details on the Party Income and Party Expense objects to show client financial data. View,
add, and edit income and expenses in list views on the FlexCard. Select a time frame to filter data on a person account, household
account, or party relationship group record page.
is enabled.
Who: To use this feature, users need the Financial Services Cloud Extension permission set, and the OmniStudio Admin or OmniStudio
User permission set.
Why: Identify free cash flow to assist with savings goals and forecast income and expenditures. For example, select a time frame of the
last 3 months, 6 months, or 1 year to review your client’s total income, total expenses, total surplus, average monthly income, average
monthly expenses, and average monthly surplus in one FlexCard.
How: If you’re using person account and household in Financial Services Cloud Managed Package to organize your customers in a
household, confirm that managed package is set up. If you create and define groups of individuals and households by using party
relationship group and its related objects, confirm that party relationship group is set up. Then, add the FSCCashFlow FlexCard to a
person account, household, or party relationship group record page. Users can add income and expenses to the FlexCard and view their
client’s cash flow summary.
SEE ALSO:

Use Financial Account and related objects without installing the Financial Services Cloud managed package. Give your users greater
control and flexibility over their data models, enabling seamless integration and decreased dependencies by using these standard
objects. Enable the Financial Account Management Standard Objects setting and start using the Financial Account and related standard
objects, which help you model financial accounts and related information for your users.
348
IN THIS SECTION:
Deliver Excellent Banking Service with the Retail Banking Console App
Empower your bankers and customer service representatives (CSRs) to increase customer satisfaction and trust. You can access the
Retail Banking console app without installing the Financial Services Cloud managed package. Model your customer’s financial account
information in the console app by using Financial Account and the related standard objects.
Streamline Communication and Foster Customer Success with the Wealth Management Console App
Streamline client interaction and service management for wealth managers. You can access the Wealth Management console app
without installing the Financial Services Cloud managed package. Model your customer’s financial account information in the console
app by using Financial Account and the related standard objects.
Manage Your Commercial Banking Activities Efficiently with the Commercial Banking Console App
Commercial bankers can manage complex and changing customer requirements, compliance issues, and the competitive landscape.
You can access the Commercial Banking console app without installing the Financial Services Cloud managed package. Model your
customer’s financial account information in the console app by using Financial Account and the related standard objects.
Get Customer’s Financial Account Information with Standard Objects
Gain more control and flexibility when you work with financial account FlexCard components, such as FSCFinancialAccountDetails,
FSCFinancialAccountsSummary, and FSCFinancialAccountTransactionDetails. Model your customer’s financial account information
in the FlexCard components by using Financial Account and the related objects that are available either in the Financial Services
Cloud managed package or in the Financial Account Management Standard Objects data model.
Add Flexibility to Financial Accounts in Service Processes with Standard Objects
Gain more control and flexibility when you use financial account information in the OmniScripts of prebuilt service processes, such
as Address Update, Fee Reversal, Complaint Management, and Transaction Dispute Management. Model your customer’s financial
account information in the service processes by using Financial Account and the related objects that are available either in the
Financial Services Cloud managed package or in the Financial Account Management Standard Objects data model.
SEE ALSO:
Deliver Excellent Banking Service with the Retail Banking Console App
Empower your bankers and customer service representatives (CSRs) to increase customer satisfaction and trust. You can access the Retail
Banking console app without installing the Financial Services Cloud managed package. Model your customer’s financial account
information in the console app by using Financial Account and the related standard objects.
is enabled.
Who: To use this feature, users need the Industry Service Excellence, OmniStudio Admin, and Financial Services Cloud Extension or FSC
Service or FSC Foundation permission sets.
Why: The Retail Banking console app now offers a range of features to streamline service interactions for bankers and CSRs. The homepage
acts as a central hub for accessing updates, accounts, cases, financial accounts, and applications, as well as tasks and events. They can
also access a customer's profile card, review interaction history, schedule service appointments, and receive real-time alerts on record
changes, financial accounts, and transactions all conveniently accessible on different object record detail pages.
349
How: To use Financial Account and related standard objects in the console app, from Setup, find and select Financial Account Settings,
and then turn on Financial Account Management Standard Objects. From the App Launcher, find and select Retail Banking.
SEE ALSO:
Retail Banking Console App for Financial Services Cloud
Streamline Communication and Foster Customer Success with the Wealth Management Console
App
Streamline client interaction and service management for wealth managers. You can access the Wealth Management console app
without installing the Financial Services Cloud managed package. Model your customer’s financial account information in the console
app by using Financial Account and the related standard objects.
is enabled.
Who: To use this feature, users need the Industry Sales Excellence, OmniStudio Admin, and Financial Services Cloud Extension or FSC
Sales permission sets.
Why: The user-friendly interface offers a centralized hub for accessing key updates, accounts, cases, financial accounts, and applications,
as well as tasks and events for efficient time management. Wealth managers can track financial accounts, progress towards goals,
generate reports, view dashboards, access customer profiles, review interaction history, and schedule service appointments all conveniently
accessible on different object record details pages.
and then turn on Financial Account Management Standard Objects. From the App Launcher, find and select Wealth Management.
SEE ALSO:
Wealth Management Console App for Financial Services Cloud
Manage Your Commercial Banking Activities Efficiently with the Commercial Banking Console App
Commercial bankers can manage complex and changing customer requirements, compliance issues, and the competitive landscape.
You can access the Commercial Banking console app without installing the Financial Services Cloud managed package. Model your
customer’s financial account information in the console app by using Financial Account and the related standard objects.
is enabled.
Who: To use this feature, users need the Industry Sales Excellence, OmniStudio Admin, and Financial Services Cloud Extension or FSC
Sales permission sets.
Why: The Commercial Banking console app offers prebuilt features to streamline client interactions for commercial bankers. The
homepage shows key updates, recent accounts, cases, financial accounts, and applications, along with opportunities, tasks, and events
to help bankers manage their time efficiently. Bankers can access a customer's profile card, view interaction history, financial account
details, take relevant actions, and document interactions all conveniently accessible on different object record details pages.
and then turn on Financial Account Management Standard Objects. From the App Launcher, find and select Commercial Banking.
SEE ALSO:
Commercial Banking Console App for Financial Services Cloud
350
Get Customer’s Financial Account Information with Standard Objects

Gain more control and flexibility when you work with financial account FlexCard components, such as FSCFinancialAccountDetails,
FSCFinancialAccountsSummary, and FSCFinancialAccountTransactionDetails. Model your customer’s financial account information in
the FlexCard components by using Financial Account and the related objects that are available either in the Financial Services Cloud
managed package or in the Financial Account Management Standard Objects data model.
is enabled.
Who: To use this feature, users need the Industry Service Excellence and OmniStudio Admin permission sets.
How: To use Financial Account and related standard objects in the financial account FlexCard components, from Setup, find and select
Financial Account Settings, and then turn on Financial Account Management Standard Objects.
Add Flexibility to Financial Accounts in Service Processes with Standard Objects

Gain more control and flexibility when you use financial account information in the OmniScripts of prebuilt service processes, such as
Address Update, Fee Reversal, Complaint Management, and Transaction Dispute Management. Model your customer’s financial account
information in the service processes by using Financial Account and the related objects that are available either in the Financial Services
Cloud managed package or in the Financial Account Management Standard Objects data model.
is enabled.
Who: To use this feature, users need the Industry Service Excellence and OmniStudio Admin permission sets.
How: To use Financial Account and related standard objects in the financial account FlexCard components, from Setup, find and select
Financial Account Settings, and then turn on Financial Account Management Standard Objects.

Discover the new guided setups for Financial Services Cloud.
IN THIS SECTION:
Households give you the flexibility to organize your customers in ways that are meaningful to you. With a new guided setup, set up
standard objects and guided flows to create and define groups of individuals, such as households, without installing the Financial
Services Cloud managed package.
Get Record Rollups Up and Running with Ease
Use record rollup definitions to streamline the aggregation of records from various objects or groups and to have a consolidated
view of your data. With a new guided setup, set up record rollup definitions without installing the Financial Services Cloud managed
package. Additionally, the guided setup walks you through the steps to run record rollup definitions periodically by using flows.
Get Financial Accounts, Financial Account Parties, and Financial Account Transactions Up and Running with Ease
Agents can have a comprehensive view of financial account details and resolve customer queries quickly and efficiently. Depending
on your requirements, you can use the Financial Account and related standard objects to configure Financial Accounts, Financial
Account Parties, and Financial Account Transactions. The new guided setup helps you assign permissions and customize Lightning
pages to view financial accounts and transactions.
351

Households give you the flexibility to organize your customers in ways that are meaningful to you. With a new guided setup, set up
standard objects and guided flows to create and define groups of individuals, such as households, without installing the Financial Services
Cloud managed package.
is enabled.
How: From Setup, go to Guided Setup, click Group Membership and Households, and then click the Standard tab.
Get Record Rollups Up and Running with Ease

Use record rollup definitions to streamline the aggregation of records from various objects or groups and to have a consolidated view
of your data. With a new guided setup, set up record rollup definitions without installing the Financial Services Cloud managed package.
Additionally, the guided setup walks you through the steps to run record rollup definitions periodically by using flows.
is enabled.
How: From Setup, go to Guided Setup, click Record Rollups, and then click the Standard tab.
Get Financial Accounts, Financial Account Parties, and Financial Account Transactions Up and
Running with Ease
Agents can have a comprehensive view of financial account details and resolve customer queries quickly and efficiently. Depending on
your requirements, you can use the Financial Account and related standard objects to configure Financial Accounts, Financial Account
Parties, and Financial Account Transactions. The new guided setup helps you assign permissions and customize Lightning pages to view
financial accounts and transactions.
is enabled.
How: From Setup, go to Guided Setup, select Financial Account Management, and then go to the Standard tab.

New videos help your users with comprehensive guidance on the KYC data model and integrated onboarding in Financial Services
Cloud.
• Get to Know the Know Your Customer (KYC) Data Model for Financial Services Cloud explores how to use the Know Your Customer
(KYC) data model to onboard new customers.
• Validate Documents in Document Checklist Items explores how to validate a document in a Document Checklist Item against
data from the party profile and its child records.
• Learn How to Set Up the Summary Document Component explores how to set up the Summary Document component to
quickly access information and be better prepared for client meetings.
• Learn How to Set Up the Summary Document Component explores how to set up the Summary Document component to
quickly access information and be better prepared for client meetings.
• Get to Know the Discovery Framework Signature Element explores how to set up the Signature element on a form to capture a
respondent's signature.
• Get to Know the Discovery Framework QR Code Element explores how to set up the QR Code element on a form to let respondents
open the URL or application from their mobile device.
352
• Streamline Document Uploads in Assessments Using Discovery Framework Document Matrix Element explores how to streamline
the assessment process and ensure respondents upload correct documents by using the Discovery Framework Document Matrix
element.
• Grant Experience Cloud Site Guest Users Access to Discovery Framework OmniScripts explores how to deploy Discovery Framework
components on Experience Cloud sites for guest users.

Do more with the new and updated Financial Services Cloud objects.

Store information about different financial accounts, such as investment accounts, bank accounts, and credit cards
Use the new FinancialAccount object.
Store information about the role played by a person or organization involved with a financial account, such as a beneficiary,
owner, and a trustee
Use the new FinancialAccountParty object.
Store information about different balances of a financial account
Use the new FinancialAccountBalance object.
Store information about the transactions associated with a financial account
Use the new FinancialAccountTransaction object.
Store information about each address related to a financial account, such as communication address, billing address, and
statement address
Use the new FinancialAccountAddress object.
Store information about a financial account statement
Use the new FinancialAccountStatement object.
Store information about the financial asset owned by an individual or account
Use the new PartyFinancialAsset object.
Store information about the additional owner of an asset
Use the new PartyFinclAssetAddlOwner object.
Store information about a party asset associated with a financial account
Use the new FinclAcctPtyFinclAsset object.
Store information about a financial liability held by a party
Use the new PartyFinancialLiability object.
Store information about an additional party associated with a financial liability
Use the new PartyFinclLiabAddlBrwr object.
Store information about the card issued to a customer, such as debit card, credit card, prepaid card, gift card, and any other
card type
Use the new IssuedCard object.
Store information about the fee that's applicable on the financial account to service various requests, such as a request for
stop payment or a duplicate card
Use the new FinancialAccountFee object.
353
Store information about a financial security instrument, such as stocks and bonds
Use the new FinancialSecurity object.
Store information about the holdings associated with a financial account
Use the new SecuritiesHolding object.
Store information about the payment mandates given by a customer to their bank or financial institution to authorize a
third party to collect payments from their account
Use the new PaymentMandate object.
Applicant Object
Store the registered name of the business entity associated with the applicant
Use the new BusinessEntityName field on the existing Applicant object.
Store the primary contact for the business entity associated with the applicant
Use the new BusinessEntityPrimCtct field on the existing Applicant object.
Specify the type of the business entity associated with the applicant
Use the new BusinessEntityType field on the existing Applicant object.
Specify the type of the applicant
Use the new Type field on the existing Applicant object.

Represent the relationship between applicants, where an applicant can be either a business entity or an individual
Use the new ApplicantApplicantRelation object.
Specify the formal manner or approach used to officially state the stakeholder's role or position
Use the new DeclarationType field on the existing AccountAccountRelation object.
Indicate whether the stakeholder is a shareholder (true) or not (false)
Use the new IsShareholder field on the existing AccountAccountRelation object.
Specify the type of the shareholder
Use the new ShareholderType field on the existing AccountAccountRelation object.
Specify the shareholder's ownership type
Use the new ShareholderHierarchyRole field on the existing AccountAccountRelation object.
Represent the hierarchical level between the account and the intermediate shareholder
Use the new ShareholderHierarchyLevel field on the existing AccountAccountRelation object.
Store the total percentage of shares owned by the stakeholder, combining both direct and indirect ownership
Use the new TotalSharePercent field on the existing AccountAccountRelation object.
Specify the formal manner or approach used to officially state the stakeholder's role or position
Use the new DeclarationType field on the existing AccountContactRelation object.
Choose the type of the decision-making authority
Use the new DecisionMakingAuthorityType field on the existing AccountContactRelation object.
Indicate whether the stakeholder is a decision-making authority (true) or not (false)
Use the new IsDecisionMakingAuthority field on the existing AccountContactRelation object.
Indicate whether the stakeholder is a shareholder (true) or not (false)
Use the new IsShareholder field on the existing AccountContactRelation object.
354
Specify the type of the shareholder

Use the new ShareholderType field on the existing AccountContactRelation object.
Specify the shareholder's ownership type
Use the new ShareholderHierarchyRole field on the existing AccountContactRelation object.
Represent the hierarchical level between the account and the intermediate shareholder
Use the new ShareholderHierarchyLevel field on the existing AccountContactRelation object.
Store the total percentage of shares owned by the stakeholder, combining both direct and indirect ownership
Use the new TotalSharePercent field on the existing AccountContactRelation object.
Know Your Customer

Specify whether the business entity is listed on a stock exchange (true) or not (false)
Use the new IsBusEntyListonStockExch field on the existing PartyProfile object.
Specify the country where the business entity was formed
Use the new BusinessEntityCtryofInc field on the existing PartyProfile object.
Specify the country where the business entity is registered
Use the new BusinessEntityCtryofRgstr field on the existing PartyProfile object.
Store the incorporation date of the business entity associated with the party profile
Use the new BusinessEntityIncDate field on the existing PartyProfile object.
Store the incorporation number of the business entity associated with the party profile
Use the new BusinessEntityIncNumber field on the existing PartyProfile object.
Store the registered name of the business entity associated with the party profile
Use the new BusinessEntityName field on the existing PartyProfile object.
Store previous names of the business entity associated with the party profile
Use the new BusinessEntityPreviousNames field on the existing PartyProfile object.
Store the registration date of the business entity associated with the party profile
Use the new BusinessEntityRgstrDate field on the existing PartyProfile object.
Store the registration number of the business entity associated with the party profile
Use the new BusinessEntityRgstrNumber field on the existing PartyProfile object.
Store the trading name of the business entity associated with the party profile
Use the new BusinessEntityTradeName field on the existing PartyProfile object.
Specify the type of the business entity associated with the party profile
Use the new BusinessEntityType field on the existing PartyProfile object.
Store the name of the business license issuing authority
Use the new BusLicIssAuthorityName field on the existing PartyProfile object.
Store the industry that a business entity operates in
Use the new Industry field on the existing PartyProfile object.
Store the unique code associated with the industry that a business entity operates in
Use the new IndustryClassificationCode field on the existing PartyProfile object.
Store the unique identifier of the business entity used in all financial transactions
Use the new LegalEntityIdentifier field on the existing PartyProfile object.
Store the name of the stock exchange where the business entity is listed
Use the new StockExchangeName field on the existing PartyProfile object.
355
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Health Cloud
Specify the type of the party profile associated with the applicant
Use the new Type field on the existing PartyProfile object.
Represent the trading regions of a party, covering both domestic and international locations, where the business entity is
actively involved in trading activities
Use the new PartyBusinessRegion object.
Integration Orchestration
Specify the execution instance of an integration provider
Use the new IntegrationProviderExecution object.
Represents a decision requirement that is used to create integration provider records
Use the new IntegrationProviderDcsnRqmt object.
Integration Provider Definition

Indicate whether the integration definition can be used in integration orchestration
Use the new CanUseInIntegrationOrch field on the existing IntegrationProviderDef object.
Store information about the FlexCard component associated with the integration provider
Use the new OmniUiCardConfig field on the existing IntegrationProviderDef object.
Indicate whether the integration definition mode is manual or automatic
Use the new IsManual field on the existing IntegrationProviderDef object.
Indicate whether the JSON payload from the request response must be stored
Use the new StorePayload field on the existing IntegrationProviderDef object.

Get to know the resource available with Financial Services Cloud.
Get the data of a retrieval summary definition by using the root record ID and the retrieval summary definition ID.
Make a GET request to the
/connect/retrieval-summary/runtime/retrievalSummaryDefinitionApiName/rootRecordId
resource.
New response body: Retrieval Summary Result
Health Cloud
Einstein Generative AI automates assessment generation. Home Health optimizes visit scheduling and has a new component for
Experience Cloud users. Integrated Care Management integrates with Milliman Care Guidelines (MCG) to bring industry-standard care
guidelines and assessments to Health Cloud. The Group Benefits app helps insurance sales agents track leads and enroll members better
to boost sales performance. Intelligent Appointment Management now supports multi-step scheduling. Provider Network Management
gets a new app.
356
IN THIS SECTION:
Harness the power of Einstein generative AI to streamline healthcare operations and enhance patient health outcomes. Health
Cloud’s Assessment Generation leverages Einstein’s capabilities to simplify the labor-intensive process of creating assessment
questions by efficiently extracting question details from complex documents.
Streamline care coordination and deliver personalized patient care with the latest enhancements from Home Health. Use the new
Home Health Patient Visits lightning component to transform how patients engage with their home health agency. Enhance
productivity and health outcomes with manual assignment of resources, prioritization of skill preferences, and simplified scheduling
of dependent visits and group visits.
The new integration with Milliman Care Guidelines (MCG) enables Integrated Care Management users to access industry standard
care guidelines and make informed decisions on patient care. Administer MCG guidelines-based assessments and create personalized
care plans from completed assessments. Optionally, administer secondary assessments suggested from MCG assessments. Quickly
find every instance of an MCG assessment by using the Assessment History component. The enhanced Update Care Plan OmniScript
now has an option to update care plans using care plan templates.
Drive insurance sales success with the Group Benefits app. The app supports internal sales agents with tools for monitoring accounts
and opportunities, creating timely quotes, and enrolling members efficiently all in one place.
Streamline complex scheduling tasks by using multi-step scheduling to book a series of related appointments at once. Easily modify
appointments when patients and providers want to change appointment dates, times, and other details. Ensure a smoother Intelligent
Appointment Management implementation by getting step-by-step assistance in an expanded guided setup experience for
administrators.
The Medication Management Add-On license, which was previously required to use Medication Reconciliation and Medication
Therapy Management, is deprecated and not available anymore.
Use Patient Program Outcome Management to optimize program effectiveness, track patients' progress in a program, and measure
program outcomes. Improve patient experience and adherence with tailored assessments, store calculated response scores, and
assess outcomes to optimize patient service programs. Provide insights to improve case manager efficacy, identify programs that
deviate from expected outcomes, and enable preventive actions.
Prioritize getting patients on their prescribed medications faster. A clear and guided process empowers agents to quickly gain a
comprehensive understanding of the coverage details of a patient’s pharmacy benefits, including coverage status, co-pay, and
co-insurance. Agents can also generate a summary of medication benefits within a care program, and easily share the benefits
package with patients, fostering informed decisions about their treatment plans.
Use a new app to enable payers to seamlessly complete the recruiting, credentialing, and contracting processes in the provider
management lifecycle. Integrate the Provider Network Management app with DocuSign to collect the e-signatures of applicants,
and with reCAPTCHA to ensure that the applicants are humans, not bots. OmniScripts such as Primary Source Verification and Provider
Recruitment now use standard fields.
357

Scan relevant details more easily in search result cards with dynamic layouts. Get more accurate search results by matching text and
text area field values to specific fields. Refine the Provider Search experience by customizing which data is synchronized and searchable.
Ensure a smoother Provider Search implementation by getting step-by-step assistance in an expanded guided setup experience for
administrators.
Optimize Patient Care by Using Segmentation Insights
Gain comprehensive insights into patient demographics, risk scores, and health conditions by using the new Patient Segmentation
dashboard. Identify high-risk patients and assess their priorities. Strategically allocate resources to enhance patient care and optimize
resource utilization.
Health Cloud has a new console app.
We’ve made changes to how Health Cloud uses the Health Cloud Managed Package.
Find the Health Cloud Admin Guide in Salesforce Help.
Health Cloud Has New and Changed Objects
Store and access more data with these new and changed Health Cloud objects.
MuleSoft Direct Integrations with Health Cloud
MuleSoft Direct for Health Cloud offers comprehensive integration solutions tailored to fit the healthcare industry needs and use
cases of businesses.
New and Changed Invocable Actions in Health Cloud
Use the new and changed invocable actions for Health Cloud.

Health Cloud includes access to some features that are available across clouds and products in Industries. Use these features to extend
and customize Health Cloud based on your business needs.
• Action Launcher

Enhance the Provider Search experience for authenticated and guest users by adding Criteria-Based Search and Filter to your
Experience Cloud sites. Help users visualize data by showing providers from search results in an interactive map. Make search results
displayed as cards easier to manage by providing sorting options. Share data from search results by using the prebuilt Copy Records
and Create Report actions for Criteria-Based Search and Filter.

358
Upload large amounts of data into your definition with CSV files. Use Data Cloud runtime with extended functionality for join, filter,
formula, and writeback nodes.
• Intelligent Document Reader

Get Intelligent Document Reader to easily extract unstructured content and tables from documents, excluding unwanted records.
• Intelligent Form Reader

Get Intelligent Form Reader to easily extract unstructured content and tables from documents, excluding unwanted records.

Harness the power of Einstein generative AI to streamline healthcare operations and enhance patient health outcomes. Health Cloud’s
Assessment Generation leverages Einstein’s capabilities to simplify the labor-intensive process of creating assessment questions by
efficiently extracting question details from complex documents.
IN THIS SECTION:
Automate Assessment Generation With Einstein Generative AI
Transform how you handle assessments with Assessment Generation's precise document analysis and intricate detail extraction.
Healthcare organizations can save time, reduce costs, and optimize operations by automatically generating assessment questions
from uploaded PDF or DOCX documents. Administrators can easily set up a variety of healthcare assessments to screen a patient's
health comprehensively and improve the overall quality of healthcare.
Automate Assessment Generation With Einstein Generative AI

Transform how you handle assessments with Assessment Generation's precise document analysis and intricate detail extraction. Healthcare
organizations can save time, reduce costs, and optimize operations by automatically generating assessment questions from uploaded
PDF or DOCX documents. Administrators can easily set up a variety of healthcare assessments to screen a patient's health comprehensively
and improve the overall quality of healthcare.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with the Health Cloud and Einstein GPT Platform
add-on licenses. Einstein generative AI is available in Lightning Experience.
How: From Setup, go to the Einstein Setup page, and turn on Einstein. From Setup, go to the Industries AI Setup page, and turn on
Industries AI Setup. Next, from Setup, go to General Settings under Discovery Framework, and enable Discovery Framework and Generative
AI Assessment Questions.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Einstein Generative AI for Health Cloud

Streamline care coordination and deliver personalized patient care with the latest enhancements from Home Health. Use the new Home
Health Patient Visits lightning component to transform how patients engage with their home health agency. Enhance productivity and
health outcomes with manual assignment of resources, prioritization of skill preferences, and simplified scheduling of dependent visits
and group visits.
359
IN THIS SECTION:
Revolutionize Patient Care With Home Health
Enhance patient engagement, improve care coordination, and promote efficient health monitoring with the help of the new Home
Health Patient Visits lightning component. With this component available on an Experience cloud site, patients can easily connect
with their home health agency and access their past, current, and upcoming home visits from their personal devices.
Optimize Home Visit Scheduling With Manual Resource Assignment
Give your schedulers enhanced visibility and greater control over care resource assignment for home visits. Based on patients’ specific
resource preferences, schedulers can either accept the default auto assignment or choose the new manual assignment to handpick
the most suitable resource from a set of recommendations. With this added flexibility, schedulers gain valuable insights into the
assignment process, enabling them to implement a personalized and streamlined approach to patient care.
Provide Personalized Care by Recording Patient Preference Order
Schedulers can now find the most suitable care resource for patients by collecting their preference orders for care resource skills.
Home Health’s default scheduling policy considers the weight of each skill preference along with the patient’s preference order.
This approach empowers patients to make well-informed decisions regarding their skill preferences, which promotes collaborative
and patient-centered care, boosts patient satisfaction rates, minimizes grievances, and improves overall health outcomes.
Streamline Dependent Home Visit Scheduling With a New Flow
Reduce administrative delays and procedural issues by empowering your schedulers to manage dependent home visits more easily.
When your schedulers create two dependent visits, the new Create Home Visit Dependency flow automates the creation of the
appointment dependency record and links the visits. Also, when your schedulers cancel or reschedule one of the dependent visits,
Home Health performs the same action on the other visit as well. These time-saving solutions help schedulers avoid any manual
errors and focus on care continuity.
Deliver Effective Patient Care With Advanced Group Visit Capabilities
Your schedulers can now record the exact address of a group visit while scheduling one, helping care resources to easily track and
coordinate the visit and provide timely care. Additionally, schedulers can add a patient only once to a group visit even if the patient
has multiple clinical service requests for the visit’s work type. In line with these changes, we’ve updated the Bundle Home Healthcare
Visits flow to simplify scheduling and improve the efficiency of group visits.
Elevate Scheduler Efficiency With an Improved User Interface
Help schedulers view related visits and group visits directly from the patient's record page with the updated Home Health Visit
component. With active links in the Related Visit and Related Group columns, schedulers can save time, access accurate details, and
reduce repetitive navigation.
The enhanced guided setup walks you through configuring home visit dependencies, setting up patient’s preference order, and
building an experience cloud site for patients. Maximize your productivity with these simple, clear steps for prerequisite checks and
process setups. Stay focused and on track with links to other in-app setup pages and detailed help articles.
Revolutionize Patient Care With Home Health

Enhance patient engagement, improve care coordination, and promote efficient health monitoring with the help of the new Home
Health Patient Visits lightning component. With this component available on an Experience cloud site, patients can easily connect with
their home health agency and access their past, current, and upcoming home visits from their personal devices.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with the Health Cloud and the Home Health
add-on licenses.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Home Health Patient permission set license.
360
How: Enable Digital Experiences. Build an Experience cloud site and then place the Home Health Patient Visits component on the home
page. Use Sharing Settings to create sharing rules for customer portal users and partner users.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Home Health Portal for Patients
Salesforce Help: Set Up Home Health for Patients
Optimize Home Visit Scheduling With Manual Resource Assignment

Give your schedulers enhanced visibility and greater control over care resource assignment for home visits. Based on patients’ specific
resource preferences, schedulers can either accept the default auto assignment or choose the new manual assignment to handpick the
most suitable resource from a set of recommendations. With this added flexibility, schedulers gain valuable insights into the assignment
process, enabling them to implement a personalized and streamlined approach to patient care.
add-on licenses.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Manage Home Health permission set license.
How: No additional configuration is necessary.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Schedule Visits with Home Health
Salesforce Help: Set Up Home Health
Provide Personalized Care by Recording Patient Preference Order

Schedulers can now find the most suitable care resource for patients by collecting their preference orders for care resource skills. Home
Health’s default scheduling policy considers the weight of each skill preference along with the patient’s preference order. This approach
empowers patients to make well-informed decisions regarding their skill preferences, which promotes collaborative and patient-centered
care, boosts patient satisfaction rates, minimizes grievances, and improves overall health outcomes.
add-on licenses.
How: In the Lightning App Builder, place the Patient Preferences for Home Health lightning component on the Person Account record
page. In Setup, define skills and skill types to represent the preferences that you support. Then, for each skill type, define service objectives
for the Skill Preference record type. Add the service objectives to the Home Health Default Scheduling Policy.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Add Patient Preferences with Home Health
Salesforce Help: Define Skills, Preferences, Objectives, and Work Types for Home Health
361
Streamline Dependent Home Visit Scheduling With a New Flow

Reduce administrative delays and procedural issues by empowering your schedulers to manage dependent home visits more easily.
When your schedulers create two dependent visits, the new Create Home Visit Dependency flow automates the creation of the
appointment dependency record and links the visits. Also, when your schedulers cancel or reschedule one of the dependent visits, Home
Health performs the same action on the other visit as well. These time-saving solutions help schedulers avoid any manual errors and
focus on care continuity.
add-on licenses.
How: From Setup, go to Flows, and then clone and activate the Create Home Visit Dependency flow.
In the Lightning App Builder, place the Home Health Visits lightning component on the Person Account record page.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Schedule Dependent Visits with Home Health
Salesforce Help: Clone and Activate the Create Home Visit Dependency Flow
Deliver Effective Patient Care With Advanced Group Visit Capabilities

Your schedulers can now record the exact address of a group visit while scheduling one, helping care resources to easily track and
coordinate the visit and provide timely care. Additionally, schedulers can add a patient only once to a group visit even if the patient has
multiple clinical service requests for the visit’s work type. In line with these changes, we’ve updated the Bundle Home Healthcare Visits
flow to simplify scheduling and improve the efficiency of group visits.
add-on licenses.
How: From the App Launcher, go to Appointment Bundle Policies and create a bundle policy for home visits.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Schedule Group Visits with Home Health
Salesforce Help: Create a Bundle Policy for Group Visits
Elevate Scheduler Efficiency With an Improved User Interface

Help schedulers view related visits and group visits directly from the patient's record page with the updated Home Health Visit component.
With active links in the Related Visit and Related Group columns, schedulers can save time, access accurate details, and reduce repetitive
navigation.
add-on licenses.
362
How: In the Lightning App Builder, place the Home Health Visits lightning component on the Person Account record page.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Manage Home Visits and Authorizations
Salesforce Help: Set Up the Home Health Visits Component

The enhanced guided setup walks you through configuring home visit dependencies, setting up patient’s preference order, and building
an experience cloud site for patients. Maximize your productivity with these simple, clear steps for prerequisite checks and process
setups. Stay focused and on track with links to other in-app setup pages and detailed help articles.
add-on licenses.
How: From Setup, go to the Home Health Settings page to find the updated guided setup.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up Home Health

The new integration with Milliman Care Guidelines (MCG) enables Integrated Care Management users to access industry standard care
guidelines and make informed decisions on patient care. Administer MCG guidelines-based assessments and create personalized care
plans from completed assessments. Optionally, administer secondary assessments suggested from MCG assessments. Quickly find every
instance of an MCG assessment by using the Assessment History component. The enhanced Update Care Plan OmniScript now has an
option to update care plans using care plan templates.
IN THIS SECTION:
Access MCG Assessments and Care Guidelines
Integrated Care Management now supports assessments and evidence-based care guidelines from MCG Health. Users can search,
administer, and view MCG assessments using the updated Assessment component.
Use MCG assessments to create care plans, complete with problems, goals, and interventions. Similar to the Discovery Framework
assessments that you can configure in Salesforce, MCG assessments recommend a personalized care plan for a patient based on the
responses to the assessment. Personalized care plans, informed by MCG, ensure patients receive the highest quality of care.
Administer Assessments Suggested from MCG Assessments
On completion of an MCG assessment, a patient is recommended secondary assessments based on their responses to the primary
assessment. Suggested assessments help care providers thoroughly evaluate patients so that any potential risks or comorbidities
can be examined in a timely manner. If the suggested assessment isn’t relevant to the patient, care managers can change the status
to Ignored.
Track the history of MCG assessments with the Assessment History component. The component gives care managers an overview
of every instance of an assessment, including details such as the status and submitted date. With every instance of an assessment
listed in a single place, care managers can easily monitor patient progress without having to navigate to other pages.
363
Update Care Plans Using Care Plan Templates

Update existing care plans by adding new problems, goals, and interventions using predefined care plan templates. The OmniScript
shows care managers new problems, goals, and interventions based on the care plan templates that they select. A comparative
view of the recommended and current problems, goals, and interventions makes it easier to update care plans as needed.
In Integrated Care Management, save time and effort by automatically sharing Care Task records with users who have access to the
associated Task records.
Access MCG Assessments and Care Guidelines

Integrated Care Management now supports assessments and evidence-based care guidelines from MCG Health. Users can search,
administer, and view MCG assessments using the updated Assessment component.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with Health Cloud.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Care Plans Access permission set license. Users also need MCG API credentials to access
MCG care guidelines from Health Cloud.
Why: MCG care guidelines help healthcare professionals provide the appropriate care and treatment, resulting in improved outcomes
such as reduced length of stay and higher independent quality ratings.
How: Turn on MCG Care Guidelines in Setup. Create an integration definition for MCG. Then, in Lightning App Builder, add the
integration definition to the Assessment component, Assessment History component, and IndustriesHCCarePlanManager FlexCard.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: MCG Integration with Integrated Care Management

Use MCG assessments to create care plans, complete with problems, goals, and interventions. Similar to the Discovery Framework
assessments that you can configure in Salesforce, MCG assessments recommend a personalized care plan for a patient based on the
responses to the assessment. Personalized care plans, informed by MCG, ensure patients receive the highest quality of care.
How: Turn on MCG Care Guidelines in Setup. Place the IndustriesHCCarePlanManager FlexCard on the person account, case, or
clinical service request record page. Care managers can click New Care Plan on the care plan interface or on completion of an MCG
assessment.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Add MCG-Related Components to Record Pages
Salesforce Help: Complete an Assessment to Use with Integrated Care Management
Administer Assessments Suggested from MCG Assessments

On completion of an MCG assessment, a patient is recommended secondary assessments based on their responses to the primary
assessment. Suggested assessments help care providers thoroughly evaluate patients so that any potential risks or comorbidities can
be examined in a timely manner. If the suggested assessment isn’t relevant to the patient, care managers can change the status to
Ignored.
364
How: Turn on MCG Care Guidelines in Setup. Place the Assessment component on the account, case, or clinical service request record
page. In the Assessment component, care managers can search assessments in Suggested Assessments. Alternatively, care managers
can see suggested assessments on the primary assessment completion screen.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Complete an Assessment to Use with Integrated Care Management

Track the history of MCG assessments with the Assessment History component. The component gives care managers an overview of
every instance of an assessment, including details such as the status and submitted date. With every instance of an assessment listed in
a single place, care managers can easily monitor patient progress without having to navigate to other pages.
How: Turn on MCG Care Guidelines in Setup. In Lightning App Builder, place the DiscoveryFrameworkAssessmentHistory FlexCard
on the assessment record page. Then, add the MCG integration definition to the FlexCard.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Track MCG Assessment History
Update Care Plans Using Care Plan Templates

Update existing care plans by adding new problems, goals, and interventions using predefined care plan templates. The OmniScript
shows care managers new problems, goals, and interventions based on the care plan templates that they select. A comparative view of
the recommended and current problems, goals, and interventions makes it easier to update care plans as needed.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Care Plans Access permission set license.
Why: When you update a care plan, you can have a single, comprehensive care plan for a patient, which makes it easier to monitor
patient progress.
365
How: Select Care Plan Templates as the method for updating the care plan in the Update Care Plan OmniScript.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Update Care Plans

In Integrated Care Management, save time and effort by automatically sharing Care Task records with users who have access to the
associated Task records.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Health Cloud Foundation permission set.
How: Turn on Automatic Sharing of Care Task Records from the Integrated Care Management settings page in Setup.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Enable Integrated Care Management

Drive insurance sales success with the Group Benefits app. The app supports internal sales agents with tools for monitoring accounts
and opportunities, creating timely quotes, and enrolling members efficiently all in one place.
IN THIS SECTION:
Internal insurance sales agents now have a centralized location where they can track leads, create quotes, manage enrollment census
data, and enroll group members and dependents in selected insurance plans. Account, opportunity, quote, and contract page layouts
are tailored to the needs of sales agents. Customizable workflows walk agents through steps to create quotes for small group plans,
generate quote documents, and complete enrollment for small and large group plans. Create a document template for small group
quotes, and then clone and customize the template to meet various business requirements.

Internal insurance sales agents now have a centralized location where they can track leads, create quotes, manage enrollment census
data, and enroll group members and dependents in selected insurance plans. Account, opportunity, quote, and contract page layouts
are tailored to the needs of sales agents. Customizable workflows walk agents through steps to create quotes for small group plans,
generate quote documents, and complete enrollment for small and large group plans. Create a document template for small group
quotes, and then clone and customize the template to meet various business requirements.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with Health Cloud, the Insurance managed
package, and the Insurance Industries Extension managed package. The Group Benefits app requires OmniStudio with Managed Package
Runtime disabled.
Important: Don't install the Insurance managed package if the OmniStudio Foundation managed package is already installed.
Having both packages installed results in duplicate components, and the Group Benefits app doesn't work in orgs with duplicate
OmniStudio components. If your org already has the OmniStudio package installed and you want to install Insurance, contact
Salesforce support.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Health Cloud Foundation and the Industries Group Benefits User permission set. Make
sure you assign the Industries Group Benefits User permission set, not the Insurance Group Benefits User permission set. To configure
366
OmniScripts, users need the OmniStudio Admin permission set. To design document templates and generate documents, users need
the DocGen Designer permission set. For details about managing permissions required for Insurance objects, see Insurance documentation.
How: If you haven’t already done so, enable OmniStudio Server-Side document generation. Create or customize a document template
to use for small group quotes. Configure the Group Benefits Document Generation, Small Group Quoting, and Enrollment OmniScripts.
In the Group Benefits app, on the home page and on record pages such as account and opportunity, add the small group quote and
enrollment workflows.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Group Benefits App (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Streamline complex scheduling tasks by using multi-step scheduling to book a series of related appointments at once. Easily modify
appointments when patients and providers want to change appointment dates, times, and other details. Ensure a smoother Intelligent
Appointment Management implementation by getting step-by-step assistance in an expanded guided setup experience for administrators.
IN THIS SECTION:
Book a Series of Appointments with Multi-Step Scheduling
Make it easier for schedulers to book a series of related appointments at once. Reduce administrative overhead for schedulers by
creating templates that specify the types of appointments to book in a series, in the right order, and at the right time intervals. A
prebuilt workflow walks schedulers through the steps to book each of the appointments and confirms the availability of appointment
slots each step of the way. Schedulers can skip appointments in a series, cancel one or all of the appointments in a series, and act
swiftly when notifications alert them to scheduling issues.
Reduce Friction in Managing Appointment Changes
Schedulers can now accommodate patient and provider preferences and availability by modifying appointments rather than canceling
and rebooking them. They can change details such as the date, time, and provider. If an appointment was booked along with other
appointments in a multi-step process, the scheduler can view the overall context and modify subsequent appointments in the series.
Modifying appointments is faster than canceling and rebooking, and a smoother rescheduling process can help reduce no-shows
and improve patient outcomes.
Get Enhanced Guidance to Set Up Intelligent Appointment Management
The updated guided setup walks you through setting up permissions and essential data, Salesforce Scheduler, an external scheduling
system, optional features, self-scheduling, and multi-step scheduling. From start to finish, guided setup leads you through each step
with clear, simple directions, and links to contextual Help pages.
Book a Series of Appointments with Multi-Step Scheduling

Make it easier for schedulers to book a series of related appointments at once. Reduce administrative overhead for schedulers by creating
templates that specify the types of appointments to book in a series, in the right order, and at the right time intervals. A prebuilt workflow
walks schedulers through the steps to book each of the appointments and confirms the availability of appointment slots each step of
the way. Schedulers can skip appointments in a series, cancel one or all of the appointments in a series, and act swiftly when notifications
alert them to scheduling issues.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Health Cloud Appointment Management permission set.
How: To add multi-step scheduling to the Intelligent Appointment Management console, in the Healthcare Appointment Scheduler
component, select Show multi-step scheduling. To build a template for a series of appointments, create a work procedure that
367
represents an overall process, and create work procedure steps that represent the appointments to schedule as part of the process. For
example, create a template for checkups and tests before surgery, and a template for a vaccination series. Intelligent Appointment
Management can book up to 20 appointment slots in a series.
To schedule a series of appointments, in the Intelligent Appointment Management console, click Multi-Step Scheduling.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up Multi-Step Scheduling for Intelligent Appointment Management (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)
Reduce Friction in Managing Appointment Changes

Schedulers can now accommodate patient and provider preferences and availability by modifying appointments rather than canceling
and rebooking them. They can change details such as the date, time, and provider. If an appointment was booked along with other
appointments in a multi-step process, the scheduler can view the overall context and modify subsequent appointments in the series.
Modifying appointments is faster than canceling and rebooking, and a smoother rescheduling process can help reduce no-shows and
improve patient outcomes.
How: To show the Modify action in the Intelligent Appointment Management console, in the Healthcare Appointment Scheduler
component, select Show appointments list.
To modify an appointment in an appointment list, select the Modify Appointment action.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Show an Appointment List with Modify and Cancel Actions (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Get Enhanced Guidance to Set Up Intelligent Appointment Management

The updated guided setup walks you through setting up permissions and essential data, Salesforce Scheduler, an external scheduling
system, optional features, self-scheduling, and multi-step scheduling. From start to finish, guided setup leads you through each step
with clear, simple directions, and links to contextual Help pages.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Appointment, and then select Intelligent Appointment Management. Turn on
Intelligent Appointment Management. On each tab, enable the features you want to use and follow the guided setup steps.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Intelligent Appointment Management (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

The Medication Management Add-On license, which was previously required to use Medication Reconciliation and Medication Therapy
Management, is deprecated and not available anymore.
368
IN THIS SECTION:
Medication Management Add-On License is Deprecated
You no longer need the Medication Management Add-On license to use Medication Reconciliation and Medication Therapy
Management in Health Cloud. With the deprecation of the Medication Management Add-On license, these features are now available
with the Health Cloud Add-On license as of Summer ‘24.
Medication Management Add-On License is Deprecated

You no longer need the Medication Management Add-On license to use Medication Reconciliation and Medication Therapy Management
in Health Cloud. With the deprecation of the Medication Management Add-On license, these features are now available with the Health
Cloud Add-On license as of Summer ‘24.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions of Health Cloud.

program outcomes. Improve patient experience and adherence with tailored assessments, store calculated response scores, and assess
outcomes to optimize patient service programs. Provide insights to improve case manager efficacy, identify programs that deviate from
expected outcomes, and enable preventive actions.
your sole risk.
IN THIS SECTION:
Store Outcome Data in the Patient Program Outcome Management Data Model
With Patient Program Outcome Management, you can define program outcomes and indicators, and link program outcomes and
patient progress with the ability to measure at the outcomes level. This data is stored in the Patient Program Outcome Management
data model, which in turn is based on the Outcome Management data model. Patient Program Outcome Management also leverages
the Discovery Framework data model to support assessments.
Calculate Outcome Metrics Using Salesforce Flows
You can create Salesforce flows with your own outcome calculation algorithms to store results in the Patient Program Outcome
Management data model. Once you create a compatible flow and add it to a record in Indicator Definition, the Calculate Indicator
Result button appears on Indicator Performance Period records.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Patient Program Outcome Management
With Patient Program Outcome Management, you can define program outcomes and indicators, and link program outcomes and patient
progress with the ability to measure at the outcomes level. This data is stored in the Patient Program Outcome Management data model,
which in turn is based on the Outcome Management data model. Patient Program Outcome Management also leverages the Discovery
Framework data model to support assessments.
369
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with Health Cloud or Life Sciences Cloud
license.
When: Patient Program Outcome Management is available starting in June 2024.

Management data model. Once you create a compatible flow and add it to a record in Indicator Definition, the Calculate Indicator Result
button appears on Indicator Performance Period records.
license.
How: Create a flow with the process type Indicator Result Flow and associate it with an Indicator Definition record. After the flow is
added to an indicator definition, the Calculate Indicator Result button appears on Indicator Performance Period records associated with
that indicator definition. Click this button to launch the flow that you created.

comprehensive understanding of the coverage details of a patient’s pharmacy benefits, including coverage status, co-pay, and co-insurance.
Agents can also generate a summary of medication benefits within a care program, and easily share the benefits package with patients,
fostering informed decisions about their treatment plans.
IN THIS SECTION:
View a Comprehensive Summary of Patient’s Member Plans
View details of a patient’s associated member plans at a glance. Use these plans to verify the pharmacy benefits of a patient for the
prescribed drug.
Raise Verification Requests for Pharmacy Benefits
Pharmacy agents can initiate a pharmacy benefits verification request for a patient against a member plan from the
PharmacyBenefitsVerification flexcard on the care program enrollee record page. Agents can click the Verify Manually button on this
flexcard to initiate the omniscript that creates the verification request. This request includes information about the patient, prescriber,
prescribed drug, and preferred pharmacy.
Agents can use the PharmacyBenefitsVerification FlexCard to record the responses they get from payers about the verification
requests they raise for their patients. Agents can then use these responses to generate comprehensive reports that they can share
with patients or providers to make informed decisions.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Pharmacy Benefits Verification

prescribed drug.
370
license.
When: Pharmacy Benefits Verification is available starting in June 2024.
How: Add the PharmacyBenefitsVerification flexcard to the Care Program Enrollee record page.

license.

Agents can use the PharmacyBenefitsVerification FlexCard to record the responses they get from payers about the verification requests
they raise for their patients. Agents can then use these responses to generate comprehensive reports that they can share with patients
or providers to make informed decisions.
license.

Use a new app to enable payers to seamlessly complete the recruiting, credentialing, and contracting processes in the provider
management lifecycle. Integrate the Provider Network Management app with DocuSign to collect the e-signatures of applicants, and
with reCAPTCHA to ensure that the applicants are humans, not bots. OmniScripts such as Primary Source Verification and Provider
Recruitment now use standard fields.
IN THIS SECTION:
Use Provider Network Management in an App
Enable payers to seamlessly complete the provider management processes of recruiting, credentialing, and contracting by using
the new Provider Network Management app within Health Cloud.
Use DocuSign to Collect Provider Signature on Applications
Payers can obtain e-signatures on the applications of providers by integrating Provider Network Management with DocuSign.
With the new reCAPTCHA in the Provider registration form, your users can ensure that the forms are filled by humans, not a bot.
371
Use Provider Network Management in an App

Enable payers to seamlessly complete the provider management processes of recruiting, credentialing, and contracting by using the
new Provider Network Management app within Health Cloud.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions of Health Cloud with the Health Cloud Provider
Network Management Add-On license.
Who: This app is available to users with the Health Cloud Provider Network Management and CLM Runtime User permission sets.
How: To use the app, in the App Launcher, find and select Provider Network Management.
Use DocuSign to Collect Provider Signature on Applications

Payers can obtain e-signatures on the applications of providers by integrating Provider Network Management with DocuSign.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Health Cloud Provider Network Management and CLM Runtime User permission sets.
How: Create an Apex-defined integration definition, and create a connected app by using the existing auth provider callback
URL.

With the new reCAPTCHA in the Provider registration form, your users can ensure that the forms are filled by humans, not a bot.
Who: This feature is available to the guest users of the payer's experience sites.
How: On the provider registration page in the payer’s experience sites, select reCAPTCHA.

Scan relevant details more easily in search result cards with dynamic layouts. Get more accurate search results by matching text and text
area field values to specific fields. Refine the Provider Search experience by customizing which data is synchronized and searchable.
Ensure a smoother Provider Search implementation by getting step-by-step assistance in an expanded guided setup experience for
administrators.
IN THIS SECTION:
View More Relevant Details in Search Result Cards
Provider search results shown as cards now show fields specific to either practitioners or facilities. Cards for facilities no longer show
practitioner fields related to education levels, training, medical licenses, board certifications, and hospital affiliations. It’s easier and
faster to scan search results without these extraneous details.
Improve Provider Search Results with Precise Matching
Improve the accuracy of search results when users search by values in a text field or a text area field that accepts multiple values.
Provider Search finds records with matching values in the specified text or text area field, as opposed to matching values in any field.
372

Instead of using the standard Provider Search Data Processing Engine (DPE) definition to populate Care Provider Searchable Field
records, you can now configure a custom DPE definition tailored to your business needs. For example, you can build a DPE definition
that generates searchable data only for healthcare facilities, not healthcare practitioners. Your custom DPE definition can sync data
to Care Provider Searchable Field records or to custom searchable object records.
Get Enhanced Guidance to Set Up Provider Search
The updated guided setup walks you through setting up facilities and practitioners, configuring Criteria-Based Search and Filter, and
enabling optional features. From start to finish, guided setup leads you through each step with clear, simple directions, and links to
contextual Help pages.
View More Relevant Details in Search Result Cards

Provider search results shown as cards now show fields specific to either practitioners or facilities. Cards for facilities no longer show
practitioner fields related to education levels, training, medical licenses, board certifications, and hospital affiliations. It’s easier and faster
to scan search results without these extraneous details.
Who: Users with the Criteria-Based Search and Filter system permission can configure and use criteria-based search and filter capabilities.
To select or configure an OmniStudio FlexCard for the card view, users need the OmniStudio Admin permission set.
How: Add a search configuration that shows search results as cards. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Criteria, and then
select Criteria-Based Search and Filter. On the Search Configuration tab, click New. When you configure the display format of search
results, select Card, and then select an OmniStudio FlexCard.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Configure Provider Search with Criteria-Based Search and Filter (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Improve Provider Search Results with Precise Matching

Improve the accuracy of search results when users search by values in a text field or a text area field that accepts multiple values. Provider
Search finds records with matching values in the specified text or text area field, as opposed to matching values in any field.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Health Cloud Provider Search permission set or Health Cloud Provider Relationship
Management permission set.
Why: Provider Search matches search terms to values in multiple fields. For example, a search for Diabetes in the Specialty field returns
providers with Diabetes in the Specialty field as well as providers with Diabetes in a custom field. With Provider Search Precise Matching
enabled, search results show only the providers with Diabetes in the Specialty field.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Provider Search, and then select Provider Search Settings. On the Getting
Started tab, turn on Provider Search Precise Matching.
Note: The Provider Search Precise Matching setting doesn’t apply to searches run in the Criteria-Based Search and Filter component.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Compare Provider Search Features (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
373

Instead of using the standard Provider Search Data Processing Engine (DPE) definition to populate Care Provider Searchable Field records,
you can now configure a custom DPE definition tailored to your business needs. For example, you can build a DPE definition that generates
searchable data only for healthcare facilities, not healthcare practitioners. Your custom DPE definition can sync data to Care Provider
Searchable Field records or to custom searchable object records.
Who: Provider Search is available to users with the Health Cloud Provider Search permission set or Health Cloud Provider Relationship
Management permission set. To use Data Processing Engine, users need the Data Pipelines Base User permission. To edit a custom Data
Processing Engine definition for Provider Search, users need the Healthcare Provider Search Fields Access permission set.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Provider Search, and then select Provider Search Settings. Click the Custom
Data Processing Engine Definition tab. To clone the standard Provider Search definition, click Generate DPE Definition. Then edit the
cloned version to create a custom DPE definition.
To test your custom DPE definition, turn off Standard Provider Search Data Sync and turn on DPE Transaction Observer.
Important: We recommend that you edit and test your custom DPE definition in a sandbox environment.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Control Provider Search Data with Custom Data Transformations (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Get Enhanced Guidance to Set Up Provider Search

The updated guided setup walks you through setting up facilities and practitioners, configuring Criteria-Based Search and Filter, and
enabling optional features. From start to finish, guided setup leads you through each step with clear, simple directions, and links to
contextual Help pages.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Health Cloud Provider Search permission set or Health Cloud Provider Relationship
Management permission set.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Provider Search, and then select Provider Search Settings. Enable Standard
Provider Search Data Sync. On each tab, enable the features you want to use and follow the guided setup steps.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Provider Search (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Optimize Patient Care by Using Segmentation Insights

Gain comprehensive insights into patient demographics, risk scores, and health conditions by using the new Patient Segmentation
dashboard. Identify high-risk patients and assess their priorities. Strategically allocate resources to enhance patient care and optimize
resource utilization.
Who: The dashboard is a part of the Enhanced Analytics for Healthcare app and is available to users with the Healthcare Intelligence or
CRM Analytics for Health Cloud add-on license. Users with the Healthcare Analytics Admin or Health Intelligence Admin permission set
can create, edit, and delete the app. Users with the Healthcare Analytics User or Health Intelligence User permission set can view the
app dashboards.
374
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Health Cloud CRM Analytics Settings, and then select Enhanced
Analytics for Healthcare. Follow the instructions on the page to set up the Enhanced Analytics for Healthcare app.

Health Cloud has a new console app.
IN THIS SECTION:
View Events, Tasks, and More with the Health Cloud Console App
Your users can now stay up to date with their activities using the new Health Cloud Console app. The app’s home page shows users
all tasks assigned to them, tasks that are due for the day, events that they’re part of for the day, recently accessed records, and a feed
of their chatter activity. You can also customize this app to better suit the needs of your organization and users.
View Events, Tasks, and More with the Health Cloud Console App
Your users can now stay up to date with their activities using the new Health Cloud Console app. The app’s home page shows users all
tasks assigned to them, tasks that are due for the day, events that they’re part of for the day, recently accessed records, and a feed of
their chatter activity. You can also customize this app to better suit the needs of your organization and users.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Health Cloud Settings, and then select Health Cloud Settings. Enable the
Health Cloud Console setting.

We’ve made changes to how Health Cloud uses the Health Cloud Managed Package.
IN THIS SECTION:
Health Cloud doesn’t require customers to install the Health Cloud managed package as all relevant features now have counterparts
in the core Salesforce platform. Therefore, new customers onboarding into Health Cloud starting with the Summer ’24 release no
longer have access to the Health Cloud managed package. Customers who have onboarded before the Summer ’24 release can
continue to use the managed package, but we recommend evaluating the relevant features in the core Salesforce platform.
Use Standard Relationship Objects in More Health Cloud Features
You can now use Intelligent Appointment Management and the Patient API without using the relationship objects in the Health
Cloud managed package. After the corresponding setting is enabled, these features start using AccountAccountRelation,
AccountContactRelation, and ContactContactRelation instead.

Health Cloud doesn’t require customers to install the Health Cloud managed package as all relevant features now have counterparts in
the core Salesforce platform. Therefore, new customers onboarding into Health Cloud starting with the Summer ’24 release no longer
have access to the Health Cloud managed package. Customers who have onboarded before the Summer ’24 release can continue to
use the managed package, but we recommend evaluating the relevant features in the core Salesforce platform.
375
Use Standard Relationship Objects in More Health Cloud Features

You can now use Intelligent Appointment Management and the Patient API without using the relationship objects in the Health Cloud
managed package. After the corresponding setting is enabled, these features start using AccountAccountRelation,
AccountContactRelation, and ContactContactRelation instead.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Health Cloud Settings, and then select Health Cloud Settings. Enable the
Standard Objects for Account and Contact Relations setting.

Find the Health Cloud Admin Guide in Salesforce Help.
IN THIS SECTION:
Find the Single Source of Truth for the Health Cloud Admin Guide
There’s now a single source of truth for the Health Cloud Admin Guide in Salesforce Help. Previously, the guide was available on
both the Salesforce help site and developer.salesforce.com/docs.
Find the Single Source of Truth for the Health Cloud Admin Guide
There’s now a single source of truth for the Health Cloud Admin Guide in Salesforce Help. Previously, the guide was available on both
the Salesforce help site and developer.salesforce.com/docs.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions.
Why: We wanted to provide a single location for you to access the guide.
How: Navigate to Salesforce Help (help.salesforce.com) and click View all products. Then click the product tile for Health Cloud and
look for Administer Health Cloud.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Administer Health Cloud
376
Health Cloud Has New and Changed Objects

Store and access more data with these new and changed Health Cloud objects.
Advanced Therapy Management

Specify the status code for scheduling a service appointment group
Use the new StatusCode field in the ServiceAppointmentGroup object.
Specify the ID of the work procedure that’s associated with a service appointment group
Use the new WorkProcedureId field in the ServiceAppointmentGroup object.
Indicate whether a work procedure is active or not
Use the new IsActive field in the WorkProcedure object.
Calculate the lead time for a work procedure in minutes
Use the new Minutes picklist value in the LeadTimeUnitType field in the WorkProcedure object.
Represent the unit of measure used to calculate the lead time for a work procedure step
Use the new LeadTimeUnitType field in the WorkProcedureStep object.
Assessment Generation
Represent assessment questions and their source document
Use the new AssessmentQuestionSourceDoc object.
Specify the ID of the assessment question source document that's associated with the assessment question version
Use the new AssessmentQuestionSourceDocId field in the AssessmentQuestionVersion object.
Specify how the assessment question is created from the source document
Use the new QuestionCreationType field in the AssessmentQuestionVersion object.
Integrated Care Management

Represent additional information about a healthcare-related task such as process status, beneficiary, and related tasks.
Use the new CareTask object.
Represent extra details about a healthcare-related task such as the detail type, detail record, detail code, and detail value.
Use the new CareTaskDetail object.
Home Health
Represent the schedule preference that a party has for their appointment
Use the new PartySchedulePreference object.
Represent an appointment request for a party
Use the new PartyAppointmentRequest object.
Represent the order of the preference selected by a patient
Use the new PreferenceOrder field in the AccountServicePreference object.
Medication Management and Medication Review

Associate an author note to a clinical encounter.
Use the updated ParentRecordId field in the AuthorNote object.
377
Patient Segmentation
Store risk adjustment factors for Hierarchical Condition Category (HCC) Codes
Use the new HierCondHlthRskAdjFctr object.
Store risk adjustment factors for a set of interacting conditions
Use the new CondIntrctnHlthRskAdjFctr object.
Store risk adjustment factors for different age bands
Use the new AgeBandHlthRskAdjFctr object.
Store risk adjustment factors based on program eligibility
Use the new PgmBasedHlthRskAdjFctr object.
Map a condition code to a hierarchical condition category (HCC) code
Use the new HierCondHlthCodeMapping object.
Indicate the status of a patient’s risk factors
Use the new PartyProfile object.
Specify a patient or member’s benefit coverage type
Use the new BenefitCoverageType field on the existing CareProgramEnrollee object.
Specify a patient or member’s enrollment status type
Use the new EnrolleeType field on the existing CareProgramEnrollee object.
Specify a patient or member’s age at the time a risk score was calculated
Use the new Age field on the existing HealthScore object.
Specify the age band a patient or member was a part of at the time a risk score was calculated
Use the new AgeBand field on the existing HealthScore object.
Store a list of condition categories that applied to patient or member at the time a risk score was calculated
Use the new ConditionCategoryList field on the existing HealthScore object.
Indicate a patient or member’s disability status at the time a risk score was calculated
Use the new IsSubjectDisabled field on the existing HealthScore object.
Indicate a patient or member’s gender at the time a risk score was calculated
Use the new Gender field on the existing HealthScore object.
Store a list of hierarchical condition category (HCC) codes that applied to patient or member at the time a risk score was
calculated
Use the new HierCondCategoryCodeList field on the existing HealthScore object.
Indicate that the patient or member was institutionalized at the time a risk score was calculated
Use the new IsSubjectInstitutionalized field on the existing HealthScore object.
Specify the number of condition categories that applied to a patient at the time a risk score was calculated
Use the new ConditionCategoryCount field on the existing HealthScore object.
Specify a patient or member for whom a risk score was calculated
Use the new CareProgramEnrollee field on the existing HealthScore object.
Specify the year when a risk score was calculated for a patient or member
Use the new AssessmentYear field on the existing HealthScore object.
Provider Network Management

Store the date of birth of the provider
Use the new BirthDate field in the Lead object.
378
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Insurance
Store the specialty of the provider

Use the new Specialty field in the Lead object.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Health Cloud Developer Guide: ServiceAppointmentGroup (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Health Cloud Developer Guide: WorkProcedure (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Health Cloud Developer Guide: WorkProcedureStep (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
MuleSoft Direct Integrations with Health Cloud

MuleSoft Direct for Health Cloud offers comprehensive integration solutions tailored to fit the healthcare industry needs and use cases
of businesses.
Bulk Claims Data Ingestion into Data Cloud

Retrieve Medicare Part A, B, and D claims data for the attributed patients.
C-CDA Document Extraction and Ingestion into Data Cloud

Extract patient data from the CCDA documents and transform it into Fast Healthcare Interoperability Resources (FHIR) bundles for
ingestion into Salesforce Data Cloud.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: MuleSoft Direct Integrations
New and Changed Invocable Actions in Health Cloud

Use the new and changed invocable actions for Health Cloud.
Create home visits and assign care resources that are manually selected by the scheduler
Use the new scheduleHomeVisitsManually action.
Recommend resources to use when manually scheduling a start of care visit or recurring home visits
Use the new getResourcesforMnlScheduling action.
Create a group visit and set the address for the visit
Use the new groupVisitAddress and clinicalServiceRequestIds input fields on the existing scheduleGroupVisits action.
Insurance
Insurance connects frontline agents, back-office teams, and customers with flexible components that support policy administration,
benefit administration, claims, and billing. Learn about what’s in Summer ’24.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Insurance Summer '24 Release Notes (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
379
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Life Sciences Cloud (Generally Available)

Life Sciences Cloud is a new end-to-end product built on the Salesforce platform for organizations engaged in the Life Sciences industry.
Inheriting a robust pool of features from other Salesforce Industries products, like Health Cloud, and adding its own brand-new set of
features, Life Sciences Cloud helps organizations optimize their operations in the clinical, medical, and commercial domains. Life Sciences
Cloud is available, starting June 2024.
IN THIS SECTION:
Reduce the time it takes to discover clinical trials by adding the Criteria-Based Search and Filter (CBSF) to your Experience Cloud site.
Quickly identify participants meeting clinical trial criteria and streamline the application process for eligible participants by using
built-in OmniStudio components. Manage the complete enrollment journey efficiently with Stage Management. Eliminate complex
paper-based processes with a structured digital approach to capture participant consent.
program outcomes. Improve patient experience and adherence with tailored assessments, store calculated response scores, and
assess outcomes to optimize patient service programs. Provide insights to improve case manager efficacy, identify programs that
deviate from expected outcomes, and enable preventive actions.
comprehensive understanding of the coverage details of a patient’s pharmacy benefits, including coverage status, co-pay, and
co-insurance. Agents can also generate a summary of medication benefits within a care program, and easily share the benefits
package with patients, fostering informed decisions about their treatment plans.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Life Sciences Cloud
Reduce the time it takes to discover clinical trials by adding the Criteria-Based Search and Filter (CBSF) to your Experience Cloud site.
Quickly identify participants meeting clinical trial criteria and streamline the application process for eligible participants by using built-in
OmniStudio components. Manage the complete enrollment journey efficiently with Stage Management. Eliminate complex paper-based
processes with a structured digital approach to capture participant consent.
IN THIS SECTION:
Discover Clinical Trials Easily with Criteria-Based Search and Filter
Reduce the time it takes candidates to discover clinical trials by adding the Criteria-Based Search and Filter (CBSF) to your Experience
Cloud site. With CBSF, you can customize a unified searchable field that helps users easily search for and find clinical trials based on
conditions, keywords, or the name of the disease. You can provide sorting options for search results displayed as cards so that it's
easy for participants to navigate through matching trials. You can also set up trial search targeting options based on their location
to help participants find more suitable trials effectively.
380
Evaluate Participant Eligibility With Prescreening Assessments

Accelerate research study timelines by swiftly identifying participants who meet the eligibility criteria for clinical trials. You can
configure the built-in Omnistudio components to enable prescreening assessments for participants to quickly determine their
eligibility by responding to a few predefined questions. Make these assessments available on your Experience Cloud site. You can
also encourage non-eligible candidates to share contact information for future trials.
Simplify Application Process With Built-in Templates
Enhance participant engagement and provide a seamless application process for participants who cleared the prescreening eligibility.
You can configure the built-in Omnistudio components to capture essential participant details, which allows for direct and self-paced
application without intermediaries.
Capture Informed Participant Consents with Flows
Eliminate complex paper-based processes using a structured digital approach to capture candidate consent. Customize the consent
management process to meet your business needs and ensure it supports multiple languages and complies with all regulatory
standards. This feature helps clinical trial managers by streamlining the handling of consent versions and simplifying the process of
capturing timestamps for easier regulatory reporting. It also supports both scribble signatures and signatures via user login credentials.
Discover Clinical Trials Easily with Criteria-Based Search and Filter

Reduce the time it takes candidates to discover clinical trials by adding the Criteria-Based Search and Filter (CBSF) to your Experience
Cloud site. With CBSF, you can customize a unified searchable field that helps users easily search for and find clinical trials based on
conditions, keywords, or the name of the disease. You can provide sorting options for search results displayed as cards so that it's easy
for participants to navigate through matching trials. You can also set up trial search targeting options based on their location to help
participants find more suitable trials effectively.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with Life Sciences Cloud and Participant
Enrollment Add-On license.
When: Participant Management is available starting in June 2024.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Criteria-Based Search and Filter permission set license.
How: From Setup, find Criteria-Based Search and Filter, and turn on Criteria-Based Search and Filter. Next, go to the
Data Pipelines setup page and turn on data pipelines. Then, clone and activate the Research Study Searchable Field DPE definition. In a
new or existing Experience Cloud site, create a standard page for searching, add it as a menu item, and make the page publicly available.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Configure Data Processing Engine for Trial Search
Salesforce Help: Create Searchable Object Configuration for Trial Search
Salesforce Help: Create Search Configuration for Trial Search
Salesforce Help: Set Up Experience Cloud Site for Participant Management
Salesforce Help: Create Guest Users Sharing Rules in Participant Management
Evaluate Participant Eligibility With Prescreening Assessments

Accelerate research study timelines by swiftly identifying participants who meet the eligibility criteria for clinical trials. You can configure
the built-in Omnistudio components to enable prescreening assessments for participants to quickly determine their eligibility by
responding to a few predefined questions. Make these assessments available on your Experience Cloud site. You can also encourage
non-eligible candidates to share contact information for future trials.
381

Who: This feature is available to users with Health Cloud Starter, Omnistudio admin, and Omnistudio User permission set licenses.
How: From Setup, find Prefill Assessment Question Settings, turn on Prefill Assessment Questions, and then
create assessment question records. To activate candidate eligibility, create a version of the built-in Omniscript and add it to the care
program details record. Next, create a version of the built-in integration procedure. In the business rules engine settings, create and
configure an expression set. Next, create a version of the built-in integration procedure for eligibility results and add the expression set
you created to this integration procedure. Finally, add these components to your experience cloud site.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up Pre-Screenings Assessments
Salesforce Help: Clone and Activate Candidate Eligibility Omniscript
Salesforce Help: Clone Integration Procedures for Pre-Screening Assessments
Salesforce Help: Create and Configure an Expression Set for Pre-Screening Assessments
Simplify Application Process With Built-in Templates

Enhance participant engagement and provide a seamless application process for participants who cleared the prescreening eligibility.
You can configure the built-in Omnistudio components to capture essential participant details, which allows for direct and self-paced
application without intermediaries.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Health Cloud Starter, OmniStudio Admin and OmniStudio User permission set licenses.
How: From App Launcher, find and select authorization form text to create records. Next, set up person accounts. Create a new version
of the built-in candidate registration Omniscript, and add the authorization form text ID and person account record ID to the Omniscript.
Then, set up reCAPTCHA. From Setup, go to web-to-case-HTML-Generator, and enter the API key pair you got when registering the site.
Add the reCAPTCHA details to the Omniscript and experience cloud site.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create Authorization Form Text
Salesforce Help: Enable Participant Management
Salesforce Help: Enable Custom Sharing
Salesforce Help: Clone and Activate a Flow for E-Consents
Salesforce Help: Set Up Flows to Prepare Participant Consent Forms
Salesforce Help: Set Up Flows to View Consent Forms
Capture Informed Participant Consents with Flows

Eliminate complex paper-based processes using a structured digital approach to capture candidate consent. Customize the consent
management process to meet your business needs and ensure it supports multiple languages and complies with all regulatory standards.
This feature helps clinical trial managers by streamlining the handling of consent versions and simplifying the process of capturing
timestamps for easier regulatory reporting. It also supports both scribble signatures and signatures via user login credentials.
382
Who: This feature is available to users with Clinical Trial Manager permission set license.
How: From Setup, find and select participant management settings, and turn on Participant Enrollment and Custom Sharing. Enable
Named Crendentials. From Setup, find and select flows, and then clone and activate the built-in flow.

program outcomes. Improve patient experience and adherence with tailored assessments, store calculated response scores, and assess
outcomes to optimize patient service programs. Provide insights to improve case manager efficacy, identify programs that deviate from
expected outcomes, and enable preventive actions.
your sole risk.
IN THIS SECTION:
With Patient Program Outcome Management, you can define program outcomes and indicators, and link program outcomes and
patient progress with the ability to measure at the outcomes level. This data is stored in the Patient Program Outcome Management
data model, which in turn is based on the Outcome Management data model. Patient Program Outcome Management also leverages
the Discovery Framework data model to support assessments.
Management data model. Once you create a compatible flow and add it to a record in Indicator Definition, the Calculate Indicator
Result button appears on Indicator Performance Period records.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Patient Program Outcome Management
With Patient Program Outcome Management, you can define program outcomes and indicators, and link program outcomes and patient
progress with the ability to measure at the outcomes level. This data is stored in the Patient Program Outcome Management data model,
which in turn is based on the Outcome Management data model. Patient Program Outcome Management also leverages the Discovery
Framework data model to support assessments.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with Life Sciences Cloud or Health Cloud
license.
383
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Patient Program Outcome Management Data Model and Permissions

Management data model. Once you create a compatible flow and add it to a record in Indicator Definition, the Calculate Indicator Result
button appears on Indicator Performance Period records.
license.
How: Create a flow with the process type Indicator Result Flow and associate it with an Indicator Definition record. After the flow is
added to an indicator definition, the Calculate Indicator Result button appears on Indicator Performance Period records associated with
that indicator definition. Click this button to launch the flow that you created.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Indicator Result Calculation Flow

comprehensive understanding of the coverage details of a patient’s pharmacy benefits, including coverage status, co-pay, and co-insurance.
Agents can also generate a summary of medication benefits within a care program, and easily share the benefits package with patients,
fostering informed decisions about their treatment plans.
IN THIS SECTION:
prescribed drug.
Agents can use the PharmacyBenefitsVerification FlexCard to record the responses they get from payers about the verification
requests they raise for their patients. Agents can then use these responses to generate comprehensive reports that they can share
with patients or providers to make informed decisions.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Pharmacy Benefits Verification
384
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Loyalty Management

prescribed drug.
license.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Pharmacy Benefits Verification Request

license.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Initiate a Verification Request

Agents can use the PharmacyBenefitsVerification FlexCard to record the responses they get from payers about the verification requests
they raise for their patients. Agents can then use these responses to generate comprehensive reports that they can share with patients
or providers to make informed decisions.
license.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Benefit Coverage Response
Loyalty Management
Marketing managers can create flexible promotions rules with the Build Your Own Promotion template in Global Promotions Management.
Companies can now decide whether they want their members to hold a negative point balance. Easily clone and launch your repeatable
and most successful promotions. Add up to 50,000 partners to your loyalty program. Streamline marketing manager and loyalty program
manager onboarding with new permission sets.
385
IN THIS SECTION:
Use the Build Your Own Promotion template to create promotion rules whose criteria are based on various cart, product, customer,
and custom cart attributes. The template enables brands to offer discounts on carts, line items, unit prices, and combos, along with
rewards such as vouchers, badges, and games. Filter carts based on the unique attributes of your products. Design promotion rules
with no eligibility criteria. Admins can provide marketing managers access to Global Promotions Management by using permission
sets.
Provide Uninterrupted Member Services with Negative Points Balance
Allow non-qualifying currencies to go negative so members can redeem rewards even if they lack sufficient points balance. Specify
a negative balance limit for each tier in your loyalty program to restrict fraud. Adjust the negative balance with points that members
accrue for new transactions.
Replicate Seasonal and Repetitive Promotions with Minimal Effort
Marketing managers and loyalty program managers can minimize the time and effort needed to create promotions that run multiple
times annually or at different intervals throughout the year. When you clone a promotion, the promotion's related data is also cloned.
For example, a brand saw high customer traction with a promotion that ran during the Christmas of 2023. Clone the promotion
before Christmas each year and make slight modifications to keep the promotion relevant. Clone and run repetitive promotions like
shop for US$50 and get 10% off during different periods.
Streamline Program Manager Onboarding
Assign the Manage Loyalty Programs permission set to grant program managers access to all the objects required for creating and
running programs. Avoid manually assigning object permissions individually.
Increase Your Loyalty Program's Appeal by Partnering with More Brands
Your company's loyalty program can now partner with up to 50,000 brands. With more partners onboarded, the loyalty program
can offer members rewards for a more diverse range of products and run varied joint promotions. Earlier, a loyalty program could
onboard only 10,000 partners.
Quickly Find Vouchers and Badges When You Design Promotion Setup Rules
Program managers can now type the first three letters of the voucher or badge name and select the voucher or the badge that
they’re looking for. The Issue Voucher and the Assign Badge to Member actions now support type-ahead search for the Voucher
Definition and the Loyalty Program Member Badge fields. When program managers create a process by using the Issue Voucher
process template, they can use type-ahead search to select the voucher definition for a process.
New videos help your users learn about the capabilities of Loyalty Management.
New and Changed Objects in Loyalty Management
Do more with the new and updated Loyalty Management objects.
New Metadata Types in Loyalty Management
Make the most of the new metadata types in Loyalty Management.

Use the Build Your Own Promotion template to create promotion rules whose criteria are based on various cart, product, customer, and
custom cart attributes. The template enables brands to offer discounts on carts, line items, unit prices, and combos, along with rewards
such as vouchers, badges, and games. Filter carts based on the unique attributes of your products. Design promotion rules with no
eligibility criteria. Admins can provide marketing managers access to Global Promotions Management by using permission sets.
386
IN THIS SECTION:
Add Multidimensional Promotion Rules for Nuanced Business Requirements
With the new Build Your Own Promotion template, brands can create multifaceted promotion rules and criteria that span across
cart configuration, customer attributes, and product attributes. Marketing managers can also add criteria based on custom cart
attributes such as payment method. The promotion rule can also check whether customer carts meet an aggregated condition. The
promotion rule can offer customers discounts on cart, cart line items, unit price of cart items, and discounted combos. Along with
cart-level discounts, the promotion rule can offer games and vouchers to customers, and points and badges to loyalty program
members.
Refine Promotion Rule Eligibility Based on a Product's Attributes
Promotion rules can now contain a product attribute-based criterion that filters a customer's cart based on whether the cart contains
products with matching attributes. For example, carts with red color Level X shoes are eligible when the rule's product attribute
criteria contain Level X as the product and the attribute as color red. With product attribute-based criteria, companies can run
promotions that drive traction for specific products within their portfolio.
Design Promotion Rules with No Eligibility Requirements
Marketing managers can now create pricing rules without a qualification criterion. This means that customer carts that are eligible
for a promotion are automatically eligible for the promotion's rules that don't contain qualification criteria.
Control Who Can Create Promotions with Ease
Admins can now assign users with permission sets that enable them to create and manage promotions. Previously, admins manually
assigned users with the object permissions required to create promotions.
Add Multidimensional Promotion Rules for Nuanced Business Requirements

With the new Build Your Own Promotion template, brands can create multifaceted promotion rules and criteria that span across cart
configuration, customer attributes, and product attributes. Marketing managers can also add criteria based on custom cart attributes
such as payment method. The promotion rule can also check whether customer carts meet an aggregated condition. The promotion
rule can offer customers discounts on cart, cart line items, unit price of cart items, and discounted combos. Along with cart-level discounts,
the promotion rule can offer games and vouchers to customers, and points and badges to loyalty program members.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Developer, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions where Loyalty
Management is available and Global Promotions Management is enabled.
Why: Cloud Kicks wants to run a promotion that offers a 20% discount on carts that contain either one Level X shoe or two Vintage
shoes and when the payment mode is credit card. In this scenario, the marketing manager adds two criteria. The conditions in the first
criterion verify whether customers have added a Level X shoe or two Vintage shoes to their cart. The condition in the second criterion
verifies whether the customer selected a credit card as the cart's payment method. After the marketing manager adds the criteria, they
add a 20% discount as the rule's reward.
How: In the Select Promotion Template step of the Quick Promotions guided flow, select Build Your Own Promotion. Add the rule
eligibility criteria in the What Customers Do section and the reward in the What Customers Get section.
387
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Build Your Own Promotion (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Refine Promotion Rule Eligibility Based on a Product's Attributes

Promotion rules can now contain a product attribute-based criterion that filters a customer's cart based on whether the cart contains
products with matching attributes. For example, carts with red color Level X shoes are eligible when the rule's product attribute criteria
contain Level X as the product and the attribute as color red. With product attribute-based criteria, companies can run promotions that
drive traction for specific products within their portfolio.
How: The admin must create a custom object with two fields that look up to the Product and the Attribute Definition objects and map
the lookup fields in Global Promotion Management's context definition. After the admin completes their setup, product designers or
marketing managers can add the attributes for the company's products. On the Build Your Own Promotion template, marketing managers
click Add Custom Attributes. Select Product Attributes, and click Next. Select the product and the attributes for the criterion, and
click Done. A criterion is created. The marketing manager can select the operator and value for each attribute condition.
388
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up Product Attributes for Product-Based Promotion Rule Eligibility Criteria (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)
Salesforce Help: Build Your Own Promotion (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Design Promotion Rules with No Eligibility Requirements

Marketing managers can now create pricing rules without a qualification criterion. This means that customer carts that are eligible for
a promotion are automatically eligible for the promotion's rules that don't contain qualification criteria.
Why: When a promotion's eligibility condition specifies that customers have to shop online and the promotion's rule doesn't have a
qualification criterion, the promotion's rule is eligible for all online shopping carts.
How: In the What Customers Do section on Buy X templates and the Build Your Own Promotion template, select No qualification
criteria.
389
Control Who Can Create Promotions with Ease

Admins can now assign users with permission sets that enable them to create and manage promotions. Previously, admins manually
assigned users with the object permissions required to create promotions.
Why: These permission sets are provided with Global Promotions Management:
• Manage Promotions with Global Promotions Management—To create promotions outside the company's loyalty program.
• Manage Loyalty Promotions with Global Promotions Management—To create promotions for the company's loyalty program.
• Manage Data Cloud Segments with Global Promotions Management—To select Data Cloud segments as the target audience of
promotions.
• Manage Promotion Distribution with Global Promotions Management—To design and activate promotion launch emails.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Role-Based Permissions for Global Promotions Management (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Provide Uninterrupted Member Services with Negative Points Balance

Allow non-qualifying currencies to go negative so members can redeem rewards even if they lack sufficient points balance. Specify a
negative balance limit for each tier in your loyalty program to restrict fraud. Adjust the negative balance with points that members accrue
for new transactions.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Loyalty
Management - Growth or Loyalty Management - Advanced is enabled.
390
How: On the Loyalty Management Setting page in Setup, turn on Members Can Have a Negative Point Balance. After enabling the
setting, select the Allow Negative Balance checkbox for the non-qualifying currencies that allow members to hold a negative point
balance. Set the negative balance limit for each tier in the Loyalty Program Currency Tier records.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Enable Negative Point Balance for Non-Qualifying Currencies (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Negative Points (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Replicate Seasonal and Repetitive Promotions with Minimal Effort

Marketing managers and loyalty program managers can minimize the time and effort needed to create promotions that run multiple
times annually or at different intervals throughout the year. When you clone a promotion, the promotion's related data is also cloned.
For example, a brand saw high customer traction with a promotion that ran during the Christmas of 2023. Clone the promotion before
Christmas each year and make slight modifications to keep the promotion relevant. Clone and run repetitive promotions like shop for
US$50 and get 10% off during different periods.
Management is available.
How: You can deep clone promotions that are created using the Quick Promotion guided flow or standard promotions. On a promotion
record, click Deep Clone. Choose the promotion details that you want to duplicate, and click Clone.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Clone Promotions (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Clone Promotions with Global Promotions Management (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Streamline Program Manager Onboarding

Assign the Manage Loyalty Programs permission set to grant program managers access to all the objects required for creating and
running programs. Avoid manually assigning object permissions individually.
Increase Your Loyalty Program's Appeal by Partnering with More Brands

Your company's loyalty program can now partner with up to 50,000 brands. With more partners onboarded, the loyalty program can
offer members rewards for a more diverse range of products and run varied joint promotions. Earlier, a loyalty program could onboard
only 10,000 partners.
391
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Loyalty
Management - Growth or Loyalty Management - Advanced is enabled.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Manage Loyalty Program Partners (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Quickly Find Vouchers and Badges When You Design Promotion Setup Rules
Program managers can now type the first three letters of the voucher or badge name and select the voucher or the badge that they’re
looking for. The Issue Voucher and the Assign Badge to Member actions now support type-ahead search for the Voucher Definition and
the Loyalty Program Member Badge fields. When program managers create a process by using the Issue Voucher process template, they
can use type-ahead search to select the voucher definition for a process.

New videos help your users learn about the capabilities of Loyalty Management.
• Deisgn Promotions with Global Promotions Management shows how marketing managers can design pricing and loyalty
promotions.
• Run Promotions with Global Promotions Management demonstrates how system integrators can integrate Global Promotions
Management APIs with external systems like shopping site and point-of-sale (POS) systems.
New and Changed Objects in Loyalty Management

Do more with the new and updated Loyalty Management objects.
Set a limit for the negative points balance that members of a tier can hold for a non-qualifying currency
Use the new LoyaltyProgramCurrencyTier object.
Indicate whether a non-qualifying currency allows members to hold a negative point balance
Use the new DoesAllowNegativeBalancefield on the existing LoyaltyProgramCurrency object.
Specify the date and time from when a member's redemption settlement is pending
Use the new RedemStlPendFromDateTime field on the existing LoyaltyMemberCurrency object.
Identify whether a promotion is created by cloning another promotion
Use the new IsCloned and RelatedPromotionId fields on the existing Promotion object.
SEE ALSO:
Loyalty Management Developer Guide: Loyalty Management Standard Objects (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
New Metadata Types in Loyalty Management

Make the most of the new metadata types in Loyalty Management.
392
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Manufacturing Cloud
Settings
Turn on the capability of members to hold negative point balances for non-qualifying currencies
Use the enableNegativePointBalance field on the IndustriesLoyaltySettings metadata type.
SEE ALSO:
Loyalty Management Developer Guide: IndustriesLoyaltySettings (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Manufacturing Cloud
Harmonize, transform, and unlock insights at scale from asset, customer, sales, and service data by using Data Cloud features. Easily
manage your supplier recovery processes to recover the expenses for repairing defective parts procured from suppliers. Orchestrate
effective product service campaigns to segment faulty assets, perform product recalls, and manage customer outreach. Generate
estimates on field service work before you create work orders.
IN THIS SECTION:
Unify, harmonize, and analyze your assets operations, commercial operations, and service process data in Data Cloud by using new
data model objects and the Manufacturing data kit. Ingest asset telematics and customer data from different sources in data model
objects in Data Cloud. Transform, query, and segment asset telematics data at scale. Analyze asset revenue, customer revenue, and
customer cases data by using predefined calculated insights. Optimize asset maintenance schedules, maximize operational
performance, and improve operator safety by using asset telematics data.
Easily raise supplier recovery claims for parts that are covered under contract terms with suppliers. Significantly improve the supplier
recovery rate to reduce warranty costs. If you incur a cost due to quality issues in the products or services provided by a supplier,
create supplier recovery claims to recover the cost from the supplier. Create supplier recovery claims from an existing partner warranty
claim. Suppliers can adjudicate claims from the Experience Cloud site.
Organize focused, fruitful product service campaigns to service faulty products, recall defective assets, and manage customer
communications at scale. Service managers at manufacturers can create and manage effective campaigns, nurture customer trust,
sustain company reputation, and ensure customer safety. They can effortlessly segment and curate lists of impacted assets. Service
agents can use these lists to engage with customers and track services to be performed on assets.
Streamline the work order management process and drive productivity by helping service agents and field service technicians
generate cost estimates for onsite services using an intuitive guided flow. They can generate detailed quotes on the cost of the
services, and create work orders if customers approve the quotes.
Associate Any Sales Agreement with a Contract
Key account managers can now associate sales agreements with contracts if the actuals calculation mode of the sales agreement
is “Manually using API upload” or “Automatically from direct orders”. Previously, they associated a sales agreement to a contract only
if the actuals calculation mode of the sales agreement was “Automatically from orders through contracts”. By associating contracts
with sales agreements, key account managers can track the agreed-upon terms for the sale of products over a period of time,
irrespective of the way the actuals of the sales agreements are updated.
393

Manufacturing Cloud includes some features that are available across clouds and products in Industries. Use these features to extend
and customize Manufacturing Cloud based on your business needs.
• Action Launcher

• Context Service

• List Builder for Data Cloud Segment

• Timeline

Unify, harmonize, and analyze your assets operations, commercial operations, and service process data in Data Cloud by using new data
model objects and the Manufacturing data kit. Ingest asset telematics and customer data from different sources in data model objects
in Data Cloud. Transform, query, and segment asset telematics data at scale. Analyze asset revenue, customer revenue, and customer
cases data by using predefined calculated insights. Optimize asset maintenance schedules, maximize operational performance, and
improve operator safety by using asset telematics data.
IN THIS SECTION:
Harmonize Asset and Operator Performance Telematics Data
Ingest telematics data on asset operations, operator behavior, and asset faults from various systems into Data Cloud by using
predefined data model objects. Standardize and organize asset telematics data from disparate sources and see how different types
of data relate to each other. Examine and act on near real-time asset telematics data and track key metrics such as the temperature,
pressure, location, and health of assets.
394
Share Data Between Manufacturing Cloud and Data Cloud at Scale Using Data Streams
Connect data on assets, customers, warranties, and sales between Data Cloud and Manufacturing Cloud by using the predefined
data streams in the Manufacturing data kit. Seamlessly send the data in Manufacturing Cloud to Data Cloud to query, analyze, and
segment the data. Then, use the transformed data to enhance your business processes and give actionable insights to sales and
service teams.
Make Data-Driven Decisions on Assets and Customer Revenue with Calculated Insights
Use the predefined calculated insights on asset revenue, customer revenue, and customer cases in the Manufacturing data kit to
surface meaningful, actionable metrics to sales and service managers and define segments for assets, customers, and other data.
Analyze the lifetime revenue of each asset, broken down by sales and service revenue. Optimize service operations by evaluating
the count of total, open, and closed cases raised by each customer and for each asset.
Harmonize Asset and Operator Performance Telematics Data

Ingest telematics data on asset operations, operator behavior, and asset faults from various systems into Data Cloud by using predefined
data model objects. Standardize and organize asset telematics data from disparate sources and see how different types of data relate
to each other. Examine and act on near real-time asset telematics data and track key metrics such as the temperature, pressure, location,
and health of assets.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Manufacturing Cloud and
Data Cloud.
How: In Data Cloud, on the Data Model Objects tab, go to the All list view. Select a record, such as Asset Telematics Event, Asset Operation,
or Asset Operation Operator Behavior.
Share Data Between Manufacturing Cloud and Data Cloud at Scale Using Data Streams
Connect data on assets, customers, warranties, and sales between Data Cloud and Manufacturing Cloud by using the predefined data
streams in the Manufacturing data kit. Seamlessly send the data in Manufacturing Cloud to Data Cloud to query, analyze, and segment
the data. Then, use the transformed data to enhance your business processes and give actionable insights to sales and service teams.
Data Cloud.
How: In Data Cloud, on the Data Streams tab, go to the All list view. Select a data stream, such as AssetMilestone, WorkOrder, or
WarrantyTerm.
Make Data-Driven Decisions on Assets and Customer Revenue with Calculated Insights
Use the predefined calculated insights on asset revenue, customer revenue, and customer cases in the Manufacturing data kit to surface
meaningful, actionable metrics to sales and service managers and define segments for assets, customers, and other data. Analyze the
lifetime revenue of each asset, broken down by sales and service revenue. Optimize service operations by evaluating the count of total,
open, and closed cases raised by each customer and for each asset.
Data Cloud.
How: In Data Cloud, on the Calculated Insights tab, go to the All list view. Select a record, such as Asset Lifetime Value or Count Of Open
Cases By Customer.
395

Easily raise supplier recovery claims for parts that are covered under contract terms with suppliers. Significantly improve the supplier
recovery rate to reduce warranty costs. If you incur a cost due to quality issues in the products or services provided by a supplier, create
supplier recovery claims to recover the cost from the supplier. Create supplier recovery claims from an existing partner warranty claim.
Suppliers can adjudicate claims from the Experience Cloud site.
IN THIS SECTION:
Establish Contract Terms for Supplier Cost Recovery
Use contracts to drive collaboration with your suppliers and mutually agree on supplier recovery terms. Specify the price that a
supplier pays for a causal part, whether a part must be returned to a supplier, and the recovery terms for repairs and replacements.
The claimed amount for supplier recovery claims is automatically derived from the contract.
Efficiently Create and Edit Supplier Recovery Claims
With a single click, create a supplier recovery claim for each causal part covered under a warranty claim. Use the Summary tab of a
supplier recovery claim to track information about the causal part and expenses claimed from the supplier. Update the claimed
amount and quantity before you submit the claim, or when you negotiate with suppliers.
Manage Supplier Recovery Claims by Efficiently Using the Experience Cloud
Claim adjudicators at the supplier organizations can now use the Experience Cloud site to review the supplier recovery claims. The
claim adjudicators can approve or reject claims, and access the contracts and products information directly from the Experience
Cloud site.
Establish Contract Terms for Supplier Cost Recovery

Use contracts to drive collaboration with your suppliers and mutually agree on supplier recovery terms. Specify the price that a supplier
pays for a causal part, whether a part must be returned to a supplier, and the recovery terms for repairs and replacements. The claimed
amount for supplier recovery claims is automatically derived from the contract.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Manufacturing Cloud.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Warranty Lifecycle Management and Claims Foundation permission sets.
How: Enter into a contract with a supplier to define the supplier recovery terms. Stipulate the recovery terms in the supplier contract to
determine the payout.
Efficiently Create and Edit Supplier Recovery Claims

With a single click, create a supplier recovery claim for each causal part covered under a warranty claim. Use the Summary tab of a
supplier recovery claim to track information about the causal part and expenses claimed from the supplier. Update the claimed amount
and quantity before you submit the claim, or when you negotiate with suppliers.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Warranty Lifecycle Management and Claims Foundation permission sets.
How: From the App Launcher, find and select Claims. Open a warranty claim record from the list view, and click Create Supplier
Recovery Claims.
Manage Supplier Recovery Claims by Efficiently Using the Experience Cloud

Claim adjudicators at the supplier organizations can now use the Experience Cloud site to review the supplier recovery claims. The claim
adjudicators can approve or reject claims, and access the contracts and products information directly from the Experience Cloud site.
396
Who: This feature is available to users with the Warranty Lifecycle Management, Claims Foundation, and Warranty Supplier Recovery
for Experience Cloud permission sets.
How: As a supplier, log in to the Experience Cloud site to track and review the supplier recovery claims raised by the manufacturer.
Review the claims before approving or rejecting the payout.

Organize focused, fruitful product service campaigns to service faulty products, recall defective assets, and manage customer
communications at scale. Service managers at manufacturers can create and manage effective campaigns, nurture customer trust, sustain
company reputation, and ensure customer safety. They can effortlessly segment and curate lists of impacted assets. Service agents can
use these lists to engage with customers and track services to be performed on assets.
IN THIS SECTION:
Manage Mass Asset Recalls, Services, and Upgrades Efficiently
Design effective, timely product service campaigns to assess and address issues on large numbers of products or services. Specify
the impacted product, and the priority, duration, status, and type of a campaign. Track each asset that is the focus of a product
service campaign. Create work orders and return orders to capture the services to be performed on impacted products.
Identify and Segment Assets in Product Service Campaigns Easily
Swiftly curate lists of assets that you want to recall, audit, fix, or upgrade by creating actionable lists for product service campaigns.
Specify sophisticated filter conditions or use Data Cloud segments to group assets that you want to include in actionable lists. With
a single click, add items from actionable lists to product service campaigns. Set list priorities, sort list orders, customize details, and
assign lists to service agents for engagement initiatives and service activities.
SEE ALSO:
Manage Mass Asset Recalls, Services, and Upgrades Efficiently

Design effective, timely product service campaigns to assess and address issues on large numbers of products or services. Specify the
impacted product, and the priority, duration, status, and type of a campaign. Track each asset that is the focus of a product service
campaign. Create work orders and return orders to capture the services to be performed on impacted products.
Who: Users must have the Product Service Campaign permission set.
How: Create a Product Service Campaign record, and specify its details.
Then, create a Product Service Campaign Item record, and specify its details.
Create a Return Order or a Work Order record from the related list of a product service campaign record.
Identify and Segment Assets in Product Service Campaigns Easily

Swiftly curate lists of assets that you want to recall, audit, fix, or upgrade by creating actionable lists for product service campaigns.
Specify sophisticated filter conditions or use Data Cloud segments to group assets that you want to include in actionable lists. With a
single click, add items from actionable lists to product service campaigns. Set list priorities, sort list orders, customize details, and assign
lists to service agents for engagement initiatives and service activities.
397
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Media Cloud
Who: This feature is available to users who have the Actionable Segmentation, Query for Data Pipelines, and Product Service Campaign
permission sets.
Why: Manufacturers store rich data on a large number of assets. It’s cumbersome to identify faulty assets and individually add them to
product service campaigns. Service managers can identify and add a large number of assets to product service campaigns easily by
using actionable lists.
Campaign.

Streamline the work order management process and drive productivity by helping service agents and field service technicians generate
cost estimates for onsite services using an intuitive guided flow. They can generate detailed quotes on the cost of the services, and create
work orders if customers approve the quotes.
Who: Users must have the Work Order Estimation permission set.
How: Launch the work order estimation process from an account, an asset, or an existing work order. Define the work to be done on
the quote by providing the details, review the quote summary, and then generate a quote. After the customer approves the quote, work
orders are generated.
SEE ALSO:
Associate Any Sales Agreement with a Contract

Key account managers can now associate sales agreements with contracts if the actuals calculation mode of the sales agreement is
“Manually using API upload” or “Automatically from direct orders”. Previously, they associated a sales agreement to a contract only if the
actuals calculation mode of the sales agreement was “Automatically from orders through contracts”. By associating contracts with sales
agreements, key account managers can track the agreed-upon terms for the sale of products over a period of time, irrespective of the
way the actuals of the sales agreements are updated.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Manufacturing Sales Agreements Psl permission set.
How: On a contract record, specify a sales agreement with the “Manually using API upload actuals calculation” or “Automatically from
direct orders” mode.
Media Cloud
With the Media Cloud business applications you can attract, engage, and support customers from anywhere, maximize lifetime value,
and improve operational efficiency across the media value chain.
Learn about what’s in this release in the Media Cloud.
398
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Net Zero Cloud
Net Zero Cloud

Address compliance reporting with new features and enhancements to Net Zero Cloud and Disclosure and Compliance Hub. Design
and maintain disclosure document templates directly in Microsoft 365 Word. After you upload your disclosure reports from previous
years, Einstein generative AI helps you quickly create responses by searching for existing answers in your documents. Einstein can also
provide detailed explanations for each response, and help you confirm accuracy. View and export the greenhouse gas emissions
calculations. Enable field history tracking for seamless tracking of value changes in Net Zero Cloud objects. Make primary data acquisition
easier and more straightforward through a new simplified data collection. Streamline your workflows by giving users full access to data
entry and calculations.
IN THIS SECTION:
Insert Questions and Response Placeholders in Microsoft 365 Word to Design Document Templates for ESG Disclosures
Design and maintain disclosure document templates for environment, social, and governance (ESG) disclosures directly in Microsoft
365 Word by using the Salesforce Disclosure and Compliance Hub for Microsoft 365 Word add-in. Your admins or independent
software vendors (ISVs) use the add-in to insert questions and placeholders for the response data that an ESG compliance report
might require, including images, charts, and sheets. The reports that you launch by using the template help the add-in understand
the structure of the document and also allow for a more intelligent experience.
Use Einstein generative AI to get recommended answers from uploaded disclosure reports. Improve environment, social, and
governance (ESG) report accuracy by using Einstein to compare the guidance for a question to your proposed answer.
View and export the greenhouse gas emissions calculations used in annual emissions inventory and carbon footprints to audit Net
Zero Cloud calculations. To verify the validity of the calculations, an auditor can view the original values used in greenhouse gas
emissions calculations, the formulas used, and the system-calculated values.
Turn on field history tracking with a single action to expedite the setup process to track value changes for key Net Zero Cloud objects
and fields. Enable Field Audit Trail to seamlessly retain archived field history data for Net Zero Cloud objects.
Input energy use data through a new simplified lightning web component to collect data faster and easier and increase data quality.
Select the energy use type, enter the fields associated with the energy use entity, and upload any supporting documentation for
the record.
Grant Energy Use Data Upload and Entry Permissions to Users
Provide users with a Lightning Platform user license full access to data entry, calculations, and other lightweight functionalities,
including the ability to input carbon, energy, water, and waste data with a new permission set license. Previously, all Net Zero Cloud
functions were available to users with a Salesforce user license.
New and Changed Objects for Net Zero Cloud
Do more with the new and changed Net Zero Cloud objects.
399
Insert Questions and Response Placeholders in Microsoft 365 Word to Design

Document Templates for ESG Disclosures
Design and maintain disclosure document templates for environment, social, and governance (ESG) disclosures directly in Microsoft 365
Word by using the Salesforce Disclosure and Compliance Hub for Microsoft 365 Word add-in. Your admins or independent software
vendors (ISVs) use the add-in to insert questions and placeholders for the response data that an ESG compliance report might require,
including images, charts, and sheets. The reports that you launch by using the template help the add-in understand the structure of the
document and also allow for a more intelligent experience.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions with the Net Zero
Cloud Growth license.
Who: To edit Word documents, you need a Microsoft 365 license.
How: Install the add-in from the Microsoft store. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, in the Quick Find box, enter Disclosure and
Compliance Hub, and then select Disclosure and Compliance Hub Settings. Turn on Use Disclosure and Compliance Hub Plugin
for Microsoft 365.
To use the Design Document Template to create Microsoft 365 Word templates in Salesforce, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter
Document Generation, select General Settings, and then select Design Document Templates in Salesforce.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Design Document Templates in Microsoft 365 Word (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Use Einstein generative AI to get recommended answers from uploaded disclosure reports. Improve environment, social, and governance
(ESG) report accuracy by using Einstein to compare the guidance for a question to your proposed answer.
IN THIS SECTION:
Draft ESG Reports by Using Einstein Generative AI
Use Einstein generative AI to draft environment, social, and governance (ESG) reports directly in Microsoft 365 Word by using the
Salesforce Disclosure and Compliance Hub for Microsoft 365 Word add-in. Upload your previous years’ disclosure reports and reduce
the amount of time spent creating responses by using generative AI, which recommends answers by analyzing the uploaded
documents.
Other Improvements for ESG Report Accuracy Assessment by Using Einstein Generative AI
Improve environment, social, and governance (ESG) report accuracy by using Einstein generative AI to compare the guidance for a
question with your proposed response, directly in Microsoft 365 Word with the Salesforce Disclosure and Compliance Hub for
Microsoft 365 Word add-in.
Draft ESG Reports by Using Einstein Generative AI

Use Einstein generative AI to draft environment, social, and governance (ESG) reports directly in Microsoft 365 Word by using the
Salesforce Disclosure and Compliance Hub for Microsoft 365 Word add-in. Upload your previous years’ disclosure reports and reduce
the amount of time spent creating responses by using generative AI, which recommends answers by analyzing the uploaded documents.
Cloud Growth license and the Einstein for Sales, Einstein for Service, or Einstein for Platform add-on license. Einstein generative AI is
To purchase the Einstein for Sales, Einstein for Service, or Einstein Platform add-on, contact your Salesforce account executive.
400

How: Install the add-in from the Microsoft store. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Disclosure and Compliance Hub,
and then select Disclosure and Compliance Hub Settings. Turn on Einstein for Disclosure Authoring.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Einstein Generative AI For ESG Report Generation (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: ESG Report Generation with Einstein Generative AI (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Other Improvements for ESG Report Accuracy Assessment by Using Einstein Generative AI
Improve environment, social, and governance (ESG) report accuracy by using Einstein generative AI to compare the guidance for a
question with your proposed response, directly in Microsoft 365 Word with the Salesforce Disclosure and Compliance Hub for Microsoft
365 Word add-in.
Cloud Growth license and the Einstein for Sales, Einstein for Service, or Einstein for Platform add-on license. Einstein generative AI is
Why: These improvements help refine the quality of the disclosure reports.
• Seek specific guidance for each question.
A disclosure question can have multiple related questions, and the guidance provided with the question from the disclosure authority
describes the expected response for each of them. Einstein provides explanations for each question and related question and the
expected response, helping you validate the answers and provide feedback to improve them.
401
• Analyze the response to a question by using Einstein.

Einstein provides a score to help you evaluate the validity and correctness of a response by considering criteria such as the completeness
of the answer and the syntax.
How: Install the add-in from the Microsoft store. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Disclosure and Compliance Hub,
and then select Disclosure and Compliance Hub Settings. Turn on Einstein for Disclosure Authoring and then turn on Einstein to
Search for Disclosures. After you set up Einstein to Search for Disclosures, add the Guidance Information field to the Assessment Question
Version object’s page layout.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Search for Disclosure Guidance (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Analyze the Answers with Einstein Generative AI (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

View and export the greenhouse gas emissions calculations used in annual emissions inventory and carbon footprints to audit Net Zero
Cloud calculations. To verify the validity of the calculations, an auditor can view the original values used in greenhouse gas emissions
calculations, the formulas used, and the system-calculated values.
When: The Export Carbon Calculations for Audit is available later in Summer ’24.
402
Cloud Growth license.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Export Carbon Calculations (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Knowledge Article: CPU Limit Is Exhausted When Trying to Make Bulk Updates To Stationary Asset Energy Usage Records In Net Zero
Cloud

Turn on field history tracking with a single action to expedite the setup process to track value changes for key Net Zero Cloud objects
and fields. Enable Field Audit Trail to seamlessly retain archived field history data for Net Zero Cloud objects.
Cloud Starter or Growth license.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Field History Tracking, and then select Field History Tracking. Turn on Set
Net Zero Cloud Defaults.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Track Field History in Net Zero Cloud (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Monitor Net Zero Cloud Changes with Field History Tracking (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Audit Net Zero Cloud Field Changes (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Input energy use data through a new simplified lightning web component to collect data faster and easier and increase data quality.
Select the energy use type, enter the fields associated with the energy use entity, and upload any supporting documentation for the
record.
Cloud Starter or Growth license.
Who: Simplified data collection is available to Salesforce users with the Net Zero Cloud Manager or Net Zero Cloud Admin user permission
set, or Salesforce platform users with the Net Zero Cloud Light user permission set.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up Energy Use Data Collection (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Grant Energy Use Data Upload and Entry Permissions to Users

Provide users with a Lightning Platform user license full access to data entry, calculations, and other lightweight functionalities, including
the ability to input carbon, energy, water, and waste data with a new permission set license. Previously, all Net Zero Cloud functions
were available to users with a Salesforce user license.
Cloud Starter or Growth License.
403
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Public Sector Solutions
How: Create or edit a Lightning Platform user, and then assign the Net Zero Cloud Light user permission set to that user.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Determine Which Permission Set to Assign (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
New and Changed Objects for Net Zero Cloud

Do more with the new and changed Net Zero Cloud objects.
Changed Objects
Add guidance for the assessment question
Use the new GuidanceInformation field on the AssessmentQuestionVersion object.
Store the total scope 3 emissions from the employee commute
Use the new Scp3EmssnEmpCommute field on the StnryAssetCrbnFtprnt object.
Store the total scope 3 emissions from downstream leased assets
Use the new Scp3EmssnDnstrmLsdAst field on the VehicleAssetCrbnFtprnt object.
New Object
Store the documents that are referenced to search for answers during documentation authoring
Use the new SearchableReferenceDocument object.

Make it easy for constituents to file and track claims for social insurance benefits. Find and address circumstances that prevent constituents
from getting the care or services that they need. Coordinate with service providers to manage referrals and efficiently deliver services
to constituents. Easily capture interaction notes with a single unified component. Help constituents recertify for benefits to renew or
revise their benefit eligibility. Collaborate with partner organizations and funders to share performance indicators and outcome results.
IN THIS SECTION:
Enable Constituents to File Social Insurance Claims
Provide guided flows on your Experience Cloud site that simplify the claims process for constituents enrolled in social insurance
programs. For example, they can use a guided flow on your site to provide details of a work-related injury, upload supporting
documentation, and file a workers’ compensation claim. The employer can use a guided flow to view the claim, verify its details, and
provide additional required information. Constituents can also track the status of their workers’ compensation claim on the site.
Tackle Care Barriers with Care Plans and Goals
Identify circumstances that prevent constituents from getting the care and services that they need. Create personalized care plans
that factor in these circumstances. Assign constituents additional benefits or services for which they’re eligible. Define goals to
measure their progress and the effectiveness of the plans.
Enhance Service Delivery Experience for Public Sector Providers
Give service providers greater control over managing their clients and collaborate with them to deliver services with an Experience
Cloud site template designed for their needs. The template offers a comprehensive suite of capabilities to streamline business
operations and promote transparent collaboration between agencies and clients.
404
Efficiently Capture Complete Interaction Notes by Using a Guided Flow

Caseworkers can use a single guided flow to easily capture meeting notes. Use the flow to write detailed notes, record attendees,
document the date and time, add tags, and upload supporting documents. They can also share their notes with other users, and
publish the approved notes to prevent any further edits. This efficient, unified workflow saves caseworkers from going to multiple
pages to manage written and verbal communications.
Redetermine Benefit Eligibility When Constituents Recertify for Benefits
Provide a guided flow on your Experience Cloud site for constituents to easily recertify their circumstances to continue to receive a
benefit. Then, use another guided flow to review their recertification information and supporting documents. Check their benefit
eligibility and renew or adjust their assigned benefit amount as necessary.
Share Performance Indicators and Outcome Results on an Experience Cloud Site
Gain transparency and alignment by sharing your agency’s strategy and results with partner organizations and funders. Collaborate
with grantees to define indicators and targets, and collect indicator results from grantees, field staff, and partner organizations.
Help Employees Do More on the Employee Experience Cloud Site
Employees can complete the assessments assigned to them, file complaints about policy violations, and take the corrective actions
recommended by supervisors for any complaints filed against them. Employees can also apply for and get the benefits and assistance
that they need from the organization. Supervisors can administer performance assessments and create personalized care plans for
employee development. They can assign training programs to employees and track the progress of the employees through goals.
IdeaExchange Delivered: Give Inspectors a Link to More Information About a Regulatory Code
When a regulatory code is long or complex, inspectors need more information than what’s included in the regulatory code’s
description. Use the new External URL field to add a link to an external resource where inspectors can find all the details that they
need. We delivered this feature thanks to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
IdeaExchange Delivered: Make Follow-Up Visits Easier for Inspectors by Relating Them to the Previous Visit
On a follow-up visit to an establishment, help inspectors quickly find the regulatory code violations from the previous visit, the
violation enforcement actions assigned to the owner, and the items to check for compliance. We delivered this feature thanks to
your ideas on IdeaExchange.
Set Up Service Excellence Capabilities More Easily
Use a guided setup assistant to easily configure features that help caseworkers to address concerns raised by constituents and to
deliver excellent customer service, including action launcher, record alerts, and identity verification. In-app links help you quickly
configure required settings, while help links offer context and guidance for each task.
Save additional information about dynamic assessments in custom fields on the Assessment object. Previously, you saved information
only in the standard fields.
Set Up Licensing and Permitting Flows with Out-of-the-Box Components
Use readily available OmniStudio components in your org to set up guided flows that constituents can use to file health and safety
complaints against a business or individual and to assess their license and permit needs. Previously, you downloaded the components
from the Salesforce Industries Process Library and deployed them to your Public Sector Solutions org before you set up the flows.
Keep Your Benefit Management Flows Up to Date with the Latest Fixes and Improvements
After your org upgrades to Summer ’24, deploy version v5 of the Public Sector Benefit Management Discovery Framework sample
template. Then, to ensure that your flows continue to work as intended, check to see if the components that you use have a new
version, and customize and activate them as necessary.
New and Changed Objects in Public Sector Solutions
Do more with these new and changed objects.
Metadata API
405

Public Sector Solutions includes access to some features that are available across clouds and products in Industries. Use these features
to extend and customize Public Sector Solutions based on your needs.
• Action Launcher
Contact center agents can quickly resolve customer requests by launching Aura components. They can now search for actions based
on semantic search or the meaning of search keywords. Out-of-the-Box Deployment is renamed as Standard Deployment. Use the
new and updated objects to provide agents with recommended actions and Aura components through Action Launcher.

using the Does NotMatch and Contains operators.

Enhance the search experience for customers and external partners by adding Criteria-Based Search and Filter to your Experience
Cloud sites. Help users visualize data by showing resources from search results in an interactive map. Show search results as
easier-to-manage cards.

• Engagement
Einstein Copilot can now generate a summary of one or more customer interactions.
• Grantmaking
Create robust grant applications that allow grant seekers to save their progress and quickly see what sections are incomplete.
Applicants can also add collaborators to complete different sections of the application. Track and measure the impact of your grants
with Outcome Management. Ask grant recipients to report the outcomes achieved with your grant funding in Experience Cloud.

Get Intelligent Document Reader to easily extract unstructured content and tables from documents, excluding unwanted records.
• OmniStudio
In Summer '24, OmniStudio Standard (when the Managed Package Runtime setting is disabled) supports features from OmniStudio
for Vlocity, including filling address fields in OmniScripts with Google Map data, using Salesforce Private Connect for HTTP Actions
in Integration Procedures, choosing whether to merge entries within a list in an Integration Procedure List Action, and easily accessing
the Type Ahead Block in OmniScript from enhanced base Lightning components. Also, DataRaptor is now Omnistudio Data Mapper.
• Program Management
Quickly remove one or more participants from all upcoming benefit sessions. Group program participants by cohort to better track
results for individuals or the whole cohort. Save time with the new Program Management home page.
• Rollup Definitions for Record Rollups

Use the new Rollup Definitions feature to streamline the aggregation of records from various objects or groups and to provide a
consolidated view of your data. Your business executives can use the consolidated data to make informed decisions more quickly
and accurately.
406
• Timeline
SEE ALSO:
Public Sector Solutions Products: User, Feature, and Permission Set Licenses (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Enable Constituents to File Social Insurance Claims

Provide guided flows on your Experience Cloud site that simplify the claims process for constituents enrolled in social insurance programs.
For example, they can use a guided flow on your site to provide details of a work-related injury, upload supporting documentation, and
file a workers’ compensation claim. The employer can use a guided flow to view the claim, verify its details, and provide additional
required information. Constituents can also track the status of their workers’ compensation claim on the site.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Public Sector
Solutions is enabled.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up the Social Insurance Claim Flow (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Tackle Care Barriers with Care Plans and Goals

Identify circumstances that prevent constituents from getting the care and services that they need. Create personalized care plans that
factor in these circumstances. Assign constituents additional benefits or services for which they’re eligible. Define goals to measure their
progress and the effectiveness of the plans.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Social Insurance Benefits (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Enhance Service Delivery Experience for Public Sector Providers

Give service providers greater control over managing their clients and collaborate with them to deliver services with an Experience Cloud
site template designed for their needs. The template offers a comprehensive suite of capabilities to streamline business operations and
promote transparent collaboration between agencies and clients.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience for an extra cost in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions
where Public Sector Solutions is enabled.
Who: To use this feature, provider users need the Provider Management for Partner permission set license.
Why: With the new Experience Cloud site template, service providers can easily manage referrals, enroll clients in sessions, create
schedules, track service delivery, and collaborate with caseworkers. Previously, service providers created their own portal and set up
pages to do these tasks.
407
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, and then select All Sites. Click New, and then from the
available templates, select Service Provider Portal.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Build a Service Provider Experience Cloud Site in Public Sector Solutions (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)
Efficiently Capture Complete Interaction Notes by Using a Guided Flow

Caseworkers can use a single guided flow to easily capture meeting notes. Use the flow to write detailed notes, record attendees,
document the date and time, add tags, and upload supporting documents. They can also share their notes with other users, and publish
the approved notes to prevent any further edits. This efficient, unified workflow saves caseworkers from going to multiple pages to
manage written and verbal communications.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience where Interaction Summary and Enhanced Interaction Note Interface are enabled.
Who: To use this feature, users need the Industries Interaction Summary permission set license.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Efficiently Create and Manage Interaction Notes with a User-Friendly Interface (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)
Redetermine Benefit Eligibility When Constituents Recertify for Benefits

Provide a guided flow on your Experience Cloud site for constituents to easily recertify their circumstances to continue to receive a
benefit. Then, use another guided flow to review their recertification information and supporting documents. Check their benefit eligibility
and renew or adjust their assigned benefit amount as necessary.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up the Benefit Recertification Application Flow (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Share Performance Indicators and Outcome Results on an Experience Cloud Site

Gain transparency and alignment by sharing your agency’s strategy and results with partner organizations and funders. Collaborate with
grantees to define indicators and targets, and collect indicator results from grantees, field staff, and partner organizations.
Who: To use this feature, site users need the Outcome Management for Experience Cloud permission set.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Outcome Management Experience Cloud Site (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
408
Help Employees Do More on the Employee Experience Cloud Site

Employees can complete the assessments assigned to them, file complaints about policy violations, and take the corrective actions
recommended by supervisors for any complaints filed against them. Employees can also apply for and get the benefits and assistance
that they need from the organization. Supervisors can administer performance assessments and create personalized care plans for
employee development. They can assign training programs to employees and track the progress of the employees through goals.
Who: To use these capabilities, employees and supervisors need the Employee Experience For Public Sector permission set license.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Employee Experience for Public Sector Solutions (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Give Inspectors a Link to More Information About a Regulatory Code

When a regulatory code is long or complex, inspectors need more information than what’s included in the regulatory code’s description.
Use the new External URL field to add a link to an external resource where inspectors can find all the details that they need. We delivered
this feature thanks to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
SEE ALSO:
IdeaExchange: Hyperlinks within Description for Regulatory Codes in Public Sector Inspections
Salesforce Help: Create Regulatory Code Records (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Make Follow-Up Visits Easier for Inspectors by Relating Them to the Previous
Visit
On a follow-up visit to an establishment, help inspectors quickly find the regulatory code violations from the previous visit, the violation
enforcement actions assigned to the owner, and the items to check for compliance. We delivered this feature thanks to your ideas on
IdeaExchange.
SEE ALSO:
IdeaExchange: Follow-up inspections
Salesforce Help: Create an Inspection Visit in Public Sector Solutions (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Set Up Service Excellence Capabilities More Easily

Use a guided setup assistant to easily configure features that help caseworkers to address concerns raised by constituents and to deliver
excellent customer service, including action launcher, record alerts, and identity verification. In-app links help you quickly configure
required settings, while help links offer context and guidance for each task.
409
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Configure Service Excellence, and then select Assistant 9: Configure
Service Excellence.

Save additional information about dynamic assessments in custom fields on the Assessment object. Previously, you saved information
only in the standard fields.
Set Up Licensing and Permitting Flows with Out-of-the-Box Components

Use readily available OmniStudio components in your org to set up guided flows that constituents can use to file health and safety
complaints against a business or individual and to assess their license and permit needs. Previously, you downloaded the components
from the Salesforce Industries Process Library and deployed them to your Public Sector Solutions org before you set up the flows.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Download and Install the Licensing and Permitting Process Packages (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Keep Your Benefit Management Flows Up to Date with the Latest Fixes and
Improvements
After your org upgrades to Summer ’24, deploy version v5 of the Public Sector Benefit Management Discovery Framework sample
template. Then, to ensure that your flows continue to work as intended, check to see if the components that you use have a new version,
and customize and activate them as necessary.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Deploy the Benefit Management Discovery Framework Sample Template (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)
New and Changed Objects in Public Sector Solutions

Do more with these new and changed objects.
Capture an obstacle or circumstance that prevents a constituent from getting the required care or services
Use the new CareBarrier object.
Define the types of care barriers faced by constituents
Use the new CareBarrierType object.
410
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Referral Marketing
Associate a care plan with a care barrier

Use the new CarePlanDetail object.
Associate a goal assignment with a care barrier
Use the new GoalAssignmentDetail object.
Specify the number of days before the recertification due date that a constituent can recertify for a benefit
Use the new StartRecertificationFrom field on the existing Benefit object.
Specify the approval status of a benefit schedule
Use the new ApprovalStatus field on the existing Benefit Schedule object.
Specify the status of a meeting note
Use the new MeetingNotesStatus field on the existing Interaction Summary object.
Specify the authorization status of the referral for the associated provider
Use the new AuthorizationStatus field on the existing Referral object.
Provide an external reference for a regulatory code
Use the new ExternalUrl field on the existing RegulatoryCode object.
Associate a child visit with a parent visit
Use the new ParentVisit field on the existing Visit object.
Metadata API

Configure the application to map object record types
Use the new ApplicationRecordTypeConfig metadata type to configure the object record types to an application.
Referral Marketing
Marketing managers can now design referral promotions as per the marketing or industry requirements. Reusable promotion templates
enable marketing managers to decide at which stages advocates and their friends are rewarded and to customize promotion stage
names. Using the refreshed referral promotion guided flow, marketing managers can select the promotion's reward and then decide
the content of the promotion emails. Get the referral promotion emails ready for launch without spending much time editing the emails.
Run referral promotions for your company's loyalty program. Easily track the advocate count of referral promotions.
IN THIS SECTION:
Design Reusable Promotion Templates Aligned with Your Business Goals
Marketing managers can now use a promotion template to create multiple referral promotions that are tailored to their marketing
strategy or industry needs. Update promotion stage names with names that are relevant to your brand, customers, or industry.
Decide the stage and the activity that advocates and their referred friends are rewarded for. If the company doesn't want to reward
advocates or their friends, even that’s possible with promotion templates. A promotion's template now determines the promotion's
stages, when advocates and their friends are rewarded, and the promotion's email content.
411
Make the Most of the Refreshed Referral Promotion Guided Flow

The guided flow is now more intuitive and oriented to how marketing managers plan their referral promotions. In the second step
of the guided flow, marketing managers can decide the promotion's reward for advocates and their friends. After marketing managers
select the rewards, they can customize the promotion email content based on the selected rewards. The promotion emails and the
widget are grouped based on the stage that they belong to. The content of the emails is dynamically updated based on when the
promotion's template rewards advocates and their friends. In the last step of the guided flow, marketing managers can review which
content assets are activated in each stage and which stages issue rewards.
Save Time with the Revamped Promotion Email Templates
The updated referral promotion email templates automatically add the reward details in the emails corresponding to stages where
advocates or their friends are rewarded. The refreshed email content ensures that marketing managers spend less time to modify
the content based on the company's branding. After marketing managers select a promotion template for a promotion, the promotion
template decides which emails are part of the promotion and the email content.
Knock Off the Hassle of Determining the Sender Email Address
Your marketing managers no longer have to select an org-wide email address as the sender for referral promotion emails in orgs
where Referral Marketing is integrated with your company's Marketing Cloud instance. The sender profile of a promotion's Marketing
Cloud businesses unit is used for the promotion's emails.
Improve Referral Prediction Accuracy by Analyzing Additional Features
Accurately predict the likelihood of referrals from contacts and program members by analyzing the additional member features
such as mailing city, state, and contact age. Know your members better, manage costs effectively, and reduce member discontent
by targeting individuals with higher referral likelihood scores.
Track Advocate Count as a Promotion KPI
Marketing managers can now easily track the performance of a referral promotion against the company's advocate enrollment goal.
View the number of advocates for a promotion in the Loyalty Program Member Promotion related list on a referral promotion.
Marketing managers can also compare the advocate count across multiple promotions. Find out whether an advocate’s enrollment
is active from the advocate’s loyalty program member promotion record from the related list.
Reduce Customer Acquisition Costs by Running Referral Promotions for Your Members
Companies that have Referral Marketing and Loyalty Management in their org can now run referral promotions for their loyalty
program. Leverage your relationship with the existing members of your loyalty program to generate referrals. Keep your loyalty
members engaged by offering them rewards for their referrals.
New videos help your users learn about the capabilities of Referral Marketing.
New and Changed Objects in Referral Marketing
Access and manage your Referral Marketing data through these objects.
Design Reusable Promotion Templates Aligned with Your Business Goals

Marketing managers can now use a promotion template to create multiple referral promotions that are tailored to their marketing
strategy or industry needs. Update promotion stage names with names that are relevant to your brand, customers, or industry. Decide
the stage and the activity that advocates and their referred friends are rewarded for. If the company doesn't want to reward advocates
or their friends, even that’s possible with promotion templates. A promotion's template now determines the promotion's stages, when
advocates and their friends are rewarded, and the promotion's email content.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Referral
Marketing is enabled.
412
How: On the Promotion Template related list of a referral program, click New, provide a name, and save the promotion template. On
the Journey tab, edit the names of the last three stages and decide the stage when advocates and their friends are rewarded. At each
stage where a reward is provided, select the eligible activity.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Promotion's Template (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
413
Make the Most of the Refreshed Referral Promotion Guided Flow

The guided flow is now more intuitive and oriented to how marketing managers plan their referral promotions. In the second step of
the guided flow, marketing managers can decide the promotion's reward for advocates and their friends. After marketing managers
select the rewards, they can customize the promotion email content based on the selected rewards. The promotion emails and the
widget are grouped based on the stage that they belong to. The content of the emails is dynamically updated based on when the
promotion's template rewards advocates and their friends. In the last step of the guided flow, marketing managers can review which
content assets are activated in each stage and which stages issue rewards.
Why: If a promotion's template doesn't reward referred friends, then the marketing manager can't select a reward for the referred friends
in the second step of the guided flow. The content of the emails that are targeted towards friends doesn't mention rewards. If a promotion
uses a template that rewards advocates and friends at the last stage, then the last stage's emails for both advocates and friends contain
their reward details.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Design a Referral Promotion Using a Guided Flow (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Save Time with the Revamped Promotion Email Templates

The updated referral promotion email templates automatically add the reward details in the emails corresponding to stages where
advocates or their friends are rewarded. The refreshed email content ensures that marketing managers spend less time to modify the
content based on the company's branding. After marketing managers select a promotion template for a promotion, the promotion
template decides which emails are part of the promotion and the email content.
414
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Emails (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Knock Off the Hassle of Determining the Sender Email Address

Your marketing managers no longer have to select an org-wide email address as the sender for referral promotion emails in orgs where
Referral Marketing is integrated with your company's Marketing Cloud instance. The sender profile of a promotion's Marketing Cloud
businesses unit is used for the promotion's emails.
How: On the Marketing Cloud Integration page in Setup, admins can turn on Referral Marketing's integration with Marketing Cloud,
and connect the Marketing Cloud business units.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Emails (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Improve Referral Prediction Accuracy by Analyzing Additional Features

Accurately predict the likelihood of referrals from contacts and program members by analyzing the additional member features such as
mailing city, state, and contact age. Know your members better, manage costs effectively, and reduce member discontent by targeting
individuals with higher referral likelihood scores.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions where Referral Marketing, CRM Analytics for
Loyalty Management, and Scoring Framework are enabled.
Who: When you create CRM Analytics template configurations in Scoring Framework, the Referral Likelihood Score (Referral Marketing)
template configuration type is available to users with the Referral Marketing and Loyalty Analytics Apps permission set licenses.
How: To get predictions, go to the Scoring Framework page in Setup. Create a CRM Analytics template configuration by using the
Referral Likelihood Score (Referral Marketing) template configuration type. After you activate the template, go to the Likelihood of
Referrals dashboard in CRM Analytics.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Get Predictions about Contacts’ Likelihood of Referring (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Track Advocate Count as a Promotion KPI

Marketing managers can now easily track the performance of a referral promotion against the company's advocate enrollment goal.
View the number of advocates for a promotion in the Loyalty Program Member Promotion related list on a referral promotion. Marketing
managers can also compare the advocate count across multiple promotions. Find out whether an advocate’s enrollment is active from
the advocate’s loyalty program member promotion record from the related list.
415
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Track Advocate Count for Promotions (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Reduce Customer Acquisition Costs by Running Referral Promotions for Your Members
Companies that have Referral Marketing and Loyalty Management in their org can now run referral promotions for their loyalty program.
Leverage your relationship with the existing members of your loyalty program to generate referrals. Keep your loyalty members engaged
by offering them rewards for their referrals.
Marketing and Loyalty Management are enabled.
When: This functionality is available starting Spring '24.
How: From the App Launcher, find and select Loyalty Management. Open the loyalty program that you want to add a referral promotion
to. Click Experiences. On the Promotions related list, click New Referral Promotion.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Run Referral Promotions As Part of the Company's Loyalty Program (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)

New videos help your users learn about the capabilities of Referral Marketing.
Prepare Your Marketing Cloud Instance for Referral Marketing shows how admins connect their company's Marketing Cloud instance
with Referral Marketing.
New and Changed Objects in Referral Marketing

Access and manage your Referral Marketing data through these objects.
Create a reuseable promotion template
Use the new PromotionTemplate object.
Create stages for a promotion template
Use the new PromotionStageTemplate object.
Use a promotion template to create a promotion
Use the new PromotionTemplateId field on the existing Promotion object.
416
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Salesforce Contracts
Specify at which stage of a promotion's advocates and their referred friends are rewarded
Use the new ReferrerJournalSubTypeId and ReferredPartyJournalSubTypeId fields on the existing
PromotionStage object.
SEE ALSO:
Referral Marketing Developer Guide: PromotionTemplate (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Referral Marketing Developer Guide: PromotionStageTemplate (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Referral Marketing Developer Guide: Promotion (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Referral Marketing Developer Guide: PromotionStage (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Contracts allows customers to manage the end-to-end lifecycle of Contracts. Contracts can be associated with opportunities,
orders, quotes, standard Salesforce objects, and custom objects. A robust contract lifecycle management is crucial to the overall health
of an organization. The Salesforce Contracts app gives you complete control over the sales process integration, contract management
process, and contract lifecycle that starts from contract authoring to activation.
Learn about what’s in this release in the Salesforce Contracts .

Provide an intuitive, guided degree planning experience for your students by using Intelligent Degree Planning. Enable students to view
the details of learning courses and programs, and track their progress by using new Lightning web components. Optimize the matching
of mentors and mentees by using a new guided flow and comparison layout. Simplify the appointment experience with automatic
resource assignments, and QR codes for onsite check-ins. Create assessments easily with intelligent suggestions from Einstein. Migrate
from Admissions Connect, Student Success Hub, and Education Data Architecture to the integrated version of Education Cloud. Leverage
Common App first-year data in Education Cloud.
IN THIS SECTION:
Help Students Determine Their Steps to Graduation with Intelligent Degree Planning
Provide an intuitive, guided degree planning experience for your students. Learners can use the dynamic Intelligent Degree Planner
to view their program requirements, search for eligible courses, and design their path to degree completion by session, term, and
year. They can add, remove, and rearrange their courses by dragging elements in an intuitive interface and create placeholders as
needed. Students can submit the completed plans for approval and see status updates as their advisor reviews the plan.
Track Academic Advancement with Learner Progress
Use the new Learner Progress component to enable learners to track their academic progress on the learner portal. Learners can
view their progress on planned requirements, and stay on top of the unplanned requirements for their enrolled learning programs.
Advisors can view Learner Progress as a tab on the updated case record page for the Student Success app.
Compare and Connect Mentors with a Mentee
Match a mentor with a mentee by comparing the responses to predefined fields by using the new guided flow, Mentoring: Match
Mentor and Mentee. Launch the flow from the benefit assignment record page for a mentee, and compare potential mentors by
using data from the new Mentoring Profile object. Select a mentor to assign them as the provider for the benefit.
417
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Salesforce for Education
Migrate from Managed Packages to Education Cloud

Use the Education Cloud Data Migration Kit to map and copy your data from Admissions Connect, Student Success Hub, and Education
Data Architecture to Education Cloud objects. You can migrate your data within your current org or to a new org, depending on
your setup and needs. You can also use the included mapping documents to plan your migration approach with other tools.
Use Data Importer for Common App to bring your Common App First-Year data into Education Cloud. You can import standard
applicant, suspect, prospect, and recommender data into the applicable Education Cloud entities. You can also modify and extend
the included components to import additional fields as needed.
Get a Quick View of Admissions Item Status
Add the Admission Application Items FlexCard to the individual application record page layout to show the application items that
require verification or that were rejected by a reviewer. Admissions personnel can see all education, examination, and file records
that are in the unverified or rejected status.
Assign Appointment Resources Automatically and Efficiently
Choose how resources in a success team are assigned to appointments. Configure automatic assignments and appointment
distribution to efficiently manage resources based on defined appointment assignment policies.
Draft Questions by Using Einstein for Intake Assessments
Use Intelligent Question Generator to draft assessment questions with Einstein generative AI. Select a prompt template to instantly
generate relevant questions. You can provide additional context if required. Modify and use the questions to create intake assessments
for support programs.
Find skills to associate with your learning courses and learning programs in the new final step of the Learning Wizard, Einstein Skills
Generator. Let Einstein suggest skills that fit the course or program based on data from the public domain and your Education Cloud
org, or choose from the skills that you’ve used before.
Use the new QR Code component to generate QR codes for waitlist check-ins. Students can use the QR code to select a topic, and
add themselves to the waitlist for an in-person appointment. They can check the status of their check-ins and position in the queue
on the learner portal.
View Learning Details in Learning Summary
Enable learners to view details of programs and courses, and the associated learning requirements on the learner portal. Staff can
view Learning Summary as a tab on the updated learning program and learning course record pages.
Use Fundraising Updates for Advancement
Provide new and easy ways to acknowledge donors, enter new recurring donations, store the seasonal addresses of constituents,
understand donor behavior to positively affect outreach, and report on and build lists of donors.
Use Copilot Actions Fundraising Gift Proposals to streamline and expedite writing compelling and personalized gift proposals using
data in your Salesforce org. This feature is available with Einstein Copilot.
New and Changed Objects in Education Cloud
Do more with the new and updated Education Cloud objects.

Education Cloud includes access to some features that are available across clouds and products in Industries. Use these features to extend
and customize Education Cloud based on your business needs.
• Action Launcher
418
Use action launcher to provide quick and focused support to learners in your institution, such as sending an email to an advisee or
logging a call to a mentee.
• Disclosure and Compliance Hub

Use Disclosure and Compliance Hub with Education Cloud to organize questions, answers, and generate reports that can be easily
accessed and tracked.
• Timeline
Bring in multiple objects into one list so that staff can reference a chronological view of applicants or students' engagement to
evaluate progress and take action. For example, create a Student Activities timeline that references cases, service appointments,
record alerts, or care plans.
Help Students Determine Their Steps to Graduation with Intelligent Degree Planning
Provide an intuitive, guided degree planning experience for your students. Learners can use the dynamic Intelligent Degree Planner to
view their program requirements, search for eligible courses, and design their path to degree completion by session, term, and year.
They can add, remove, and rearrange their courses by dragging elements in an intuitive interface and create placeholders as needed.
Students can submit the completed plans for approval and see status updates as their advisor reviews the plan.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license
is enabled.
Who: To offer Intelligent Degree Planning to your students, you need the Learner Success Experience Cloud license. Users with the
Education Cloud Full Access permission set or the Education Cloud Limited Access permission set can set up the planner and create
templates. Users with the Education Cloud for Experience Cloud Access permission set can access the degree planner.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Intelligent Degree Planning (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Track Academic Advancement with Learner Progress

Use the new Learner Progress component to enable learners to track their academic progress on the learner portal. Learners can view
their progress on planned requirements, and stay on top of the unplanned requirements for their enrolled learning programs. Advisors
can view Learner Progress as a tab on the updated case record page for the Student Success app.
is enabled.
Who: Users with the Education Cloud Full Access permission set can create or modify sites in Experience Builder. Users with the Education
Cloud for Experience Cloud Access permission set can access the learner portal.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, and then select All Sites. Select your learner portal, and
then add and configure the Learner Progress component by using Experience Builder.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Learner Progress for Learners and Staff (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
419
Compare and Connect Mentors with a Mentee

Match a mentor with a mentee by comparing the responses to predefined fields by using the new guided flow, Mentoring: Match Mentor
and Mentee. Launch the flow from the benefit assignment record page for a mentee, and compare potential mentors by using data
from the new Mentoring Profile object. Select a mentor to assign them as the provider for the benefit.
and Mentoring are enabled.
Who: Users with the Education Cloud Full Access permission set can use this feature.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Compare and Assign Mentors Using a Screen Flow (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Migrate from Managed Packages to Education Cloud

Use the Education Cloud Data Migration Kit to map and copy your data from Admissions Connect, Student Success Hub, and Education
Data Architecture to Education Cloud objects. You can migrate your data within your current org or to a new org, depending on your
setup and needs. You can also use the included mapping documents to plan your migration approach with other tools.
Where: The Education Cloud Data Migration Kit is compatible with Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions
where the Education Cloud license is enabled.
Who: Users with the Education Cloud Full Access permission set can use the migration kit. The Data Migration Kit is best used by advanced
users (Salesforce Certified Administrators, for example) or with assistance from a Salesforce Partner.
Why: The Education Cloud Data Migration Kit is designed to copy data as part of a larger migration effort. It’s preconfigured for managed
package objects and fields which you can edit or supplement to include additional custom objects and fields. The kit guides implementers
to the person account migration process, but it doesn’t migrate any other metadata or custom code.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Migrate Your Data to Education Cloud (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Use Data Importer for Common App to bring your Common App First-Year data into Education Cloud. You can import standard applicant,
suspect, prospect, and recommender data into the applicable Education Cloud entities. You can also modify and extend the included
components to import additional fields as needed.
Where: Data Importer for Common App is compatible with Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where
the Education Cloud license is enabled.
When: Data Importer for Common App is available starting June 14, 2024.
Who: Users with the Education Cloud Full Access permission set can use the data importer.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Import Common App Data Into Education Cloud (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
420
Get a Quick View of Admissions Item Status

Add the Admission Application Items FlexCard to the individual application record page layout to show the application items that require
verification or that were rejected by a reviewer. Admissions personnel can see all education, examination, and file records that are in the
unverified or rejected status.
is enabled.
Who: Users with the Education Cloud Full Access, Education Cloud Limited Access, or Education Cloud Reviewer permission set can use
this feature.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Verify, Review, and Decide on Applications (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Assign Appointment Resources Automatically and Efficiently

Choose how resources in a success team are assigned to appointments. Configure automatic assignments and appointment distribution
to efficiently manage resources based on defined appointment assignment policies.
is enabled.
How: From the App Launcher, find and select Success Teams, and then click New. Enter the details, select Automatic as the resource
assignment type, and then save your changes.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Automatic Resource Assignment for Appointments (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Draft Questions by Using Einstein for Intake Assessments

Use Intelligent Question Generator to draft assessment questions with Einstein generative AI. Select a prompt template to instantly
generate relevant questions. You can provide additional context if required. Modify and use the questions to create intake assessments
for support programs.
is enabled.
How: Enable Einstein in Setup. From the App Launcher, find and select Assessment Questions, and then click Draft with Einstein
Using Instructions.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Intelligent Question Generation (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Find skills to associate with your learning courses and learning programs in the new final step of the Learning Wizard, Einstein Skills
Generator. Let Einstein suggest skills that fit the course or program based on data from the public domain and your Education Cloud
org, or choose from the skills that you’ve used before.
421
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud
and Einstein for Education Cloud licenses are enabled.
Who: Only users with the Education Cloud Full Access and Einstein for Education Cloud permission sets can use Einstein Skills Generator.
How: Enable Einstein AI and Einstein for Education Cloud in Setup. Then, from the app navigation menu in the Academic Operations
app, select Learning Courses or Learning Programs, and then click New from Learning Wizard.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Einstein Skills Generator (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Use the new QR Code component to generate QR codes for waitlist check-ins. Students can use the QR code to select a topic, and add
themselves to the waitlist for an in-person appointment. They can check the status of their check-ins and position in the queue on the
learner portal.
is enabled.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Lightning App Builder, and then select Lightning App Builder. Create or
edit a waitlist record page, and then add and configure the QR Code component.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Lobby Management for Drop In Appointments (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
View Learning Details in Learning Summary

Enable learners to view details of programs and courses, and the associated learning requirements on the learner portal. Staff can view
Learning Summary as a tab on the updated learning program and learning course record pages.
is enabled.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, and then select All Sites. Select your learner portal, and
then add and configure the Learning Summary component by using Experience Builder.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Learning Summary for Learners and Staff (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Use Fundraising Updates for Advancement

Provide new and easy ways to acknowledge donors, enter new recurring donations, store the seasonal addresses of constituents,
understand donor behavior to positively affect outreach, and report on and build lists of donors.
and Fundraising are enabled.
422
Who: Users with the Education Cloud Full Access permission set can access Fundraising.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Fundraising (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Use Copilot Actions Fundraising Gift Proposals to streamline and expedite writing compelling and personalized gift proposals using data
in your Salesforce org. This feature is available with Einstein Copilot.
SEE ALSO:
Draft Fundraising Gift Proposals with Einstein Copilot (Beta)
New and Changed Objects in Education Cloud

Do more with the new and updated Education Cloud objects.
Represent information about a Mentoring participant
Use the new MentoringProfile object.
Specify the URL for a waitlist
Use the new Link field on the Waitlist object.
Specify the opportunity for an academic term enrollment
Use the new Opportunity field on the AcademicTermEnrollment object.
Specify the opportunity for an educational info request
Use the new Opportunity field on the EducationalInfoRequest object.
Specify the opportunity for an individual application
Use the new Opportunity field on the IndividualApplication object.
Specify the opportunity for a learner program
Use the new Opportunity field on the LearnerProgram object.
Specify the resource assignment type for a success team
Use the new ResourceAssignmentType field on the SuccessTeam object.
Specify the display name of a group of courses
Use the new GroupName field on the LearningProgramPlanRqmt object.
Specify a learner program’s parent learner program
Use the new ParentLearnerProgram field on the LearnerProgram object.
Indicate whether an opportunity is created for expressions of interest in a learning program
Use the new DoesCreateOpportunityRecord field on the LearningProgram object.
Identify a learning program as a top-level program
Use the new IsTopLevelProgram field on the LearningProgram object.
Represent a template that a learner can apply to create a planned learning path
Use the new LearningPathwayTemplate object.
Represent a junction between Learning Program Plan and Learning Pathway Template objects
Use the new LearningPathwayTmplPgmPlan object.
423
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Salesforce for Nonprofits
Represent a requirement with completion details in the Learning Pathway Template

Use the new LearningPathwayTemplateItem object.
Represent a learner's planned path to the completion of their enrolled learning programs
Use the new LearnerPathway object.
Represent a requirement with completion details in the Learner Pathway
Use the new LearnerPathwayItem object.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Education Cloud Standard Objects (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Salesforce for Nonprofits includes platform solutions and managed packages for nonprofits. Nonprofit Cloud, built on the Salesforce
platform, makes it easier to monitor fundraising efforts by using source codes, generate donor acknowledgments, manage program
participation, and create cohorts of program participants.
IN THIS SECTION:
Nonprofit Cloud
Easily store seasonal addresses. Better target your donors by using RFM scores. Quickly add new recurring donations in the gift entry
flow. Quickly create individual or batch gift acknowledgments. Remove program participants from all upcoming sessions. Use
program cohorts to group participants and make sure that no one slips through the cracks.
Quickly Find Salesforce for Nonprofit Managed Package Release Information
Find new links to Salesforce release notes and Known Issues in GitHub releases for the open-source Salesforce for Nonprofit managed
packages. You can also take a deeper dive into the work included in a release by reviewing the recently closed pull requests.
Elevate Retirement
Salesforce is retiring the Elevate family of products. This affects Elevate Advanced Edition, Elevate Power of Us Editions, and all
add-ons. As part of this product retirement, the ability to renew subscriptions to this product will end on October 1, 2023, and we
anticipate that the product will be deactivated on or after October 1, 2024.
Salesforce is retiring foundationConnect. As part of this product retirement, the ability to renew subscriptions to this product will
end on January 31, 2025, and the product will be deactivated on January 31, 2026.
Nonprofit Cloud
Easily store seasonal addresses. Better target your donors by using RFM scores. Quickly add new recurring donations in the gift entry
flow. Quickly create individual or batch gift acknowledgments. Remove program participants from all upcoming sessions. Use program
cohorts to group participants and make sure that no one slips through the cracks.
IN THIS SECTION:
Fundraising
Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising provides new and easy ways to acknowledge donors, enter new recurring donations, store the
seasonal addresses of constituents, and evaluate donors by using RFM scoring to segment, report on, and build lists of donors. Built
on the secure and trusted foundation of Salesforce, Fundraising helps you increase operational efficiency, collaboration, and adoption
of best-in-class practices.
424
Program Management
Group program participants by cohort to better track the results for individuals or the whole cohort. Save time with the new Program
Management Home Page. Quickly remove one or more participants from all upcoming benefit sessions.
Caseworkers can use a single guided flow to easily capture meeting notes; record attendees, the date and time, and other details;
and add tags and upload documents. Case workers can also identify care barriers and create personalized care plans.
Use Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking to create robust grant applications so that grant seekers can save their progress and quickly
see what sections are left to be completed. Applicants can also add collaborators to complete various sections of the application.
Track and measure the impact of your grants with Outcome Management. Invite grant recipients to report the outcomes achieved
with your grant funding in Experience Cloud.

Salesforce for Nonprofits includes access to some features that are available across clouds and products in Industries. Use these features
to extend and customize Salesforce for Nonprofits based on your business needs.
• Action Launcher
Employees can quickly resolve program participants and donor requests by launching Aura components. Out-of-the-Box Deployment
is renamed as Standard Deployment. Use the updated object to provide employees with Aura components through Action Launcher.
• Actionable List Members

List creators can add or remove columns in Actionable List Members. The default Record Status filter shows only the active actionable
list member records to list creators. You can create bulk action configurations that include Omniscripts. Actionable list owners can
now create action plans in bulk for the selected list members, and assign tasks to various colleagues as defined in the action plan
template.

that are referenced in expression set versions. Use the Has more than one million rows option in decision tables to process large
volume of rows. Save time and effort by using templates to create decision tables. Enhance the text comparison capability of your
decision tables by using the Does Not Match and Contains operators.


Introducing Intelligent Document Reader for Nonprofit Cloud. Get Intelligent Document Reader to easily extract unstructured content
and tables from documents, excluding rows you need not save.
• Timeline
425
Fundraising
Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising provides new and easy ways to acknowledge donors, enter new recurring donations, store the seasonal
addresses of constituents, and evaluate donors by using RFM scoring to segment, report on, and build lists of donors. Built on the secure
and trusted foundation of Salesforce, Fundraising helps you increase operational efficiency, collaboration, and adoption of best-in-class
practices.
IN THIS SECTION:
Track Campaign Success With Source Codes on Marketing Cloud Growth Campaigns
Add new or existing outreach source codes to campaigns by using the campaign flow in Marketing Cloud Growth Edition to report
on the success of those campaigns.
Understand Donor Behavior to Develop Targeted and Effective Outreach
Build custom scores based on fields from the Donor Gift Summary object that reflect Recency, Frequency, and Monetary (RFM)
values. Use these values to give a cumulative RFM score for each donor. This score is viewable on the donor profile and can help
determine a donor’s receptivity to a campaign or appeal.
Generate Gift Acknowledgments and Receipts
Quickly and easily create individual transaction and end-of-the-year gift acknowledgments, individually or in a batch, and store them
electronically as PDF files. Mark the transactions as acknowledged and track non-tax-deductible gift amounts. Provide constituents
with a personalized acknowledgment or receipt based on a customizable template.
Store and Track Multiple Addresses for Constituents
Ensure that your mailed outreach directly reaches your constituents by sending the mail to the active address of the constituents.
Store multiple addresses for constituents.
Include more commitments and update the information on the donor for gift commitments with the Business Process API. Use the
Business Process APIs on the Postman platform. The Business Process API is an investment for partners to make faster and easier
integrations with Nonprofit Cloud.
Add New Recurring Gifts by Using Gift Entry
Save time and effort by creating recurring gifts during the gift entry. When you enter commitments during gift entry, Salesforce
creates records for the gift commitment, gift commitment schedule, gift transaction, gift transaction designation, and gift default
designation.
New and Changed Objects and Fields in Fundraising
Do more with the new and updated objects in Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising.
Make the most of the new metadata types in Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising.
Updated Fundraising Connect APIs
Make the most of the updated Fundraising Connect APIs. Connect REST APIs help customers, partners, and ISVs integrate with
Salesforce software and UIs.
Use Copilot Actions Fundraising Gift Proposals to streamline and expedite writing compelling and personalized gift proposals using
data in your Salesforce org. This feature is available with Einstein Copilot.
Track Campaign Success With Source Codes on Marketing Cloud Growth Campaigns
Add new or existing outreach source codes to campaigns by using the campaign flow in Marketing Cloud Growth Edition to report on
the success of those campaigns.
426
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Marketing Cloud Growth Edition where Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising is
enabled.
Who: Marketing Cloud users with the FundraisingAccess permission set can access the source codes on Marketing Cloud Growth Edition
campaigns.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create an Email in Marketing Cloud Growth (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Understand Donor Behavior to Develop Targeted and Effective Outreach

Build custom scores based on fields from the Donor Gift Summary object that reflect Recency, Frequency, and Monetary (RFM) values.
Use these values to give a cumulative RFM score for each donor. This score is viewable on the donor profile and can help determine a
donor’s receptivity to a campaign or appeal.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Fundraising is enabled.
Who: Users with the FundraisingAccess permission set can access Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising.
Generate Gift Acknowledgments and Receipts

Quickly and easily create individual transaction and end-of-the-year gift acknowledgments, individually or in a batch, and store them
electronically as PDF files. Mark the transactions as acknowledged and track non-tax-deductible gift amounts. Provide constituents with
a personalized acknowledgment or receipt based on a customizable template.
Who: Admins with the FundraisingAccess and DocGen Designer permission sets can set up gift acknowledgments and receipts in
Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising. Users with the FundraisingAccess and DocGen User permission sets can generate gift acknowledgments
and receipts in Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising.
Store and Track Multiple Addresses for Constituents

Ensure that your mailed outreach directly reaches your constituents by sending the mail to the active address of the constituents. Store
multiple addresses for constituents.
Who: Users with the FundraisingAccess permission set can access the new Contact Point Address fields in Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising.
How: To use the new seasonal, standardization, and change address fields, add the fields you want to use to the Contact Point Address
page layout. Then apply Contact Point Address as a related list to the Person Account page layout in the Lightning App Builder.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Object Reference for the Salesforce Platform, ContactPointAddress (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)

Include more commitments and update the information on the donor for gift commitments with the Business Process API. Use the
Business Process APIs on the Postman platform. The Business Process API is an investment for partners to make faster and easier integrations
with Nonprofit Cloud.
427
How: Use the Business Process Connect API endpoints to access the Business Process API tool.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Fundraising Business APIs (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Postman for Salesforce Developers: Fundraising (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Add New Recurring Gifts by Using Gift Entry

Save time and effort by creating recurring gifts during the gift entry. When you enter commitments during gift entry, Salesforce creates
records for the gift commitment, gift commitment schedule, gift transaction, gift transaction designation, and gift default designation.
Why: Streamline the process of entering a new gift commitment by entering it as part of the gift entry of the commitment’s first
installment.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create a Gift Entry (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Add a Gift Commitment (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
New and Changed Objects and Fields in Fundraising

Do more with the new and updated objects in Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising.
Enter new recurring gifts in Gift Entry
Use the new IsNewRecurringGift, TransactionPeriod, TransactionInterval, TransactionDay,
EffectiveStartDate, and ExpectedEndDate fields on the existing Gift Entry object.
Log constituent seasonal addresses
Use the new LastAddressStdStatus, LastAddressStdDate, LastChangeofAddressDate,
LastChangeofAddressStatus, SeasonalEndDay, SeasonalEndMonth, SeasonalStartDay,
SeasonalStartMonth, and IsUndeliverable fields on the existing ContactPointAddress object.
Generate gift acknowledgments
Use the new DocGenerationQueryResult object.
Separate the tax deductible amount from the non-tax-deductible amount of a gift
Use the new NonTaxDeductibleAmount field on the existing OutreachSourceCode object.
Note when an outreach message was sent
Use the new SendDateTime field on the existing OutreachSourceCode object.
Review a donor’s RFM score
Use the new RecencyScore, FrequencyScore, MonetaryScore, and CompositeRFMScore fields on the existing
DonorGiftSummary object.
428
Add outreach source codes to marketing emails

For orgs with Marketing Cloud Growth Edition, use the new OutreachSourceCode and
IsOutreachSourceCodeEnabled fields on the existing ListEmail object.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help:Fundraising Standard Objects (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Make the most of the new metadata types in Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising.
Configure outreach source codes for your fundraising product with a collection of UTM settings
Use the new UtmSource, UtmMedium, and UtmCampaign fields on the existing FundraisingConfig metadata type. Introduced
in API version 60.0, these fields are added to the Fundraising Tooling API Objects page of the Nonprofit Cloud Developer Guide.
Configure your Fundraising RFM score
Use the new AffinityScoreDefinition metadata type. Introduced in API version 61.0, this metadata object is added to the Fundraising
Metadata API Types page of the Nonprofit Cloud Developer Guide.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Fundraising Tooling API Objects (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Nonprofit Cloud Developer Guide: Fundraising Metadata API Types (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Updated Fundraising Connect APIs

Make the most of the updated Fundraising Connect APIs. Connect REST APIs help customers, partners, and ISVs integrate with Salesforce
software and UIs.
Support up to 100 commitments in a single post request
Make a POST request to the /connect/fundraising/commitments resource.
New request body: Create Commitment Input
New response body: Create Commitment Output
Update information about the donor when you update the schedule or details of a gift commitment
Make a PATCH request to the /connect/fundraising/commitments resource.
New request body: Update Commitment Input
New response body: Update Commitment
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Fundraising Business APIs (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Use Copilot Actions Fundraising Gift Proposals to streamline and expedite writing compelling and personalized gift proposals using data
in your Salesforce org. This feature is available with Einstein Copilot.
iOS and Android, and Sales Cloud Everywhere in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with Nonprofit Cloud or Education
429
Cloud and the Einstein for Sales, Einstein for Service, or Einstein Platform add-on. Setup for Einstein Copilot is available on the desktop
site.
Who: Copilot Actions Fundraising Gift Proposals is available to Nonprofit Cloud and Education Cloud users with the Use Einstein Copilot
for Salesforce and Execute Prompt Templates user permissions.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Copilot Actions Fundraising Gift Proposals (Beta) (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Program Management
Group program participants by cohort to better track the results for individuals or the whole cohort. Save time with the new Program
Management Home Page. Quickly remove one or more participants from all upcoming benefit sessions.
IN THIS SECTION:
Remove Participants from Upcoming Scheduled Sessions
On one benefit session, you can now remove the participants from upcoming sessions in one shot. Previously, you removed
participants from each benefit session.
Group Program Participants into Cohorts
Move a group of participants through the program together to make sure that individuals don’t slip through the cracks. Compare
current cohorts with previous ones or an individual’s progress against that of the rest of their cohort. The Program and Benefit
Management Access permission set now includes access to the new Program Cohort and Program Cohort Member objects and
fields.
Get a Comprehensive View of Your Program Delivery
Use the Program Management Home Page to track if programs are moving towards their targets, see new inbound referrals, get a
snapshot of your programs and benefits, and add participants to upcoming sessions.
New Objects in Program Management
Do more with the new Program Management objects.
Updated Program Management Connect API
Make the most of the updated Program Management Connect APIs. Connect REST APIs help customers, partners, and ISVs integrate
with Salesforce software and UIs.
Remove Participants from Upcoming Scheduled Sessions

On one benefit session, you can now remove the participants from upcoming sessions in one shot. Previously, you removed participants
from each benefit session.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Program
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Remove Participants from a Benefit Schedule or Benefit Session (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
430
Group Program Participants into Cohorts

Move a group of participants through the program together to make sure that individuals don’t slip through the cracks. Compare current
cohorts with previous ones or an individual’s progress against that of the rest of their cohort. The Program and Benefit Management
Access permission set now includes access to the new Program Cohort and Program Cohort Member objects and fields.
How: Add the new Program Cohort object to the existing Program Management console app.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Manage Program Cohorts and Cohort Members (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Get a Comprehensive View of Your Program Delivery

Use the Program Management Home Page to track if programs are moving towards their targets, see new inbound referrals, get a
snapshot of your programs and benefits, and add participants to upcoming sessions.
How: Add the new Program Management Home Page to the Program Management console app.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Explore the Program Management App (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
New Objects in Program Management

Do more with the new Program Management objects.
Group program participants by cohorts
Use the new ProgramCohort and ProgramCohortMember objects.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Developer Documentation: Program Management Standard Objects (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Updated Program Management Connect API

Make the most of the updated Program Management Connect APIs. Connect REST APIs help customers, partners, and ISVs integrate
with Salesforce software and UIs.
Update a session and all subsequent sessions where attendance is yet to be marked
REST Reference Resource: Benefit Schedule Participants (DELETE)
New query parameter: startingBenefitSessionId.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Developer Documentation: Benefit Schedule Participants (DELETE) (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
431

Caseworkers can use a single guided flow to easily capture meeting notes; record attendees, the date and time, and other details; and
add tags and upload documents. Case workers can also identify care barriers and create personalized care plans.
• Efficiently Capture Complete Interaction Notes by Using a Guided Flow
Caseworkers can also share their notes with other users, and publish approved notes to prevent any further edits. This efficient,
unified workflow saves caseworkers from having to navigate multiple pages to manage written and verbal communications.
• Tackle Care Barriers with Care Plans and Goals

Identify circumstances that prevent constituents from getting the care and services that they need. Create personalized care plans
that factor in these circumstances.
IN THIS SECTION:
Create Care Plan Tasks
Create, update and get tasks for the benefits, goals and also at a care plan level.
Create Care Plan Tasks

Create, update and get tasks for the benefits, goals and also at a care plan level.
Create, update, and get tasks for benefits, goals, and care plans
Introduced in API version 56.0, this API is added to the Case Management API guide.
Make a POST request to the new /connect/careplan/care-plans/carePlanId/tasks resource.
New request body: Create Care Plan Task Input
New response body: Create Care Plan Task

Use Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking to create robust grant applications so that grant seekers can save their progress and quickly see
what sections are left to be completed. Applicants can also add collaborators to complete various sections of the application. Track and
measure the impact of your grants with Outcome Management. Invite grant recipients to report the outcomes achieved with your grant
funding in Experience Cloud.
• Effortlessly Launch Complex Grant Applications
Grant applicants can work on an application over days or weeks in a guided manner and quickly see what sections are still incomplete.
• Measure the Impact and Success of Grants with Outcome Management

You can now indicate the funding opportunities and funding awards that you expect to drive outcomes. In addition, create increased
visibility into your overall strategy for creating impact and alignment across your organization.
• Securely Collaborate on Grantmaking Application Sections

Grant applicants can securely add collaborators to help complete sections of a grant application in your Experience Cloud site.
• Easily Add Grantmaking Permission Sets to Permission Set Groups

Add the Grantmaking permission sets to permission set groups to use alongside custom permission sets.
• Quickly Delete Individual Applications
432
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Vlocity Contract Lifecycle Management
Previously, in orgs with Grantmaking enabled users set individual applications to an inactive status. Now, they can delete the records
they don’t need.
• New and Changed Objects for Grantmaking

To build complex grant applications and define and measure the impact of your grants, use the new and updated Grantmaking and
Outcome Management objects and fields.
Quickly Find Salesforce for Nonprofit Managed Package Release Information

Find new links to Salesforce release notes and Known Issues in GitHub releases for the open-source Salesforce for Nonprofit managed
packages. You can also take a deeper dive into the work included in a release by reviewing the recently closed pull requests.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions with the Nonprofit
Success Pack, Outbound Funds, and Program Management Module managed packages.
SEE ALSO:
Github: NPSP Releases (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Github: Outbound Funds Releases (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Github:Program Management Module Releases (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Elevate Retirement
Salesforce is retiring the Elevate family of products. This affects Elevate Advanced Edition, Elevate Power of Us Editions, and all add-ons.
As part of this product retirement, the ability to renew subscriptions to this product will end on October 1, 2023, and we anticipate that
the product will be deactivated on or after October 1, 2024.
Where: This change applies to all Elevate products and editions.
Salesforce is retiring foundationConnect. As part of this product retirement, the ability to renew subscriptions to this product will end
on January 31, 2025, and the product will be deactivated on January 31, 2026.
Where: This change applies to all foundationConnect products and editions.
Why: Grantmaking is available as a new product option. Learn more in Introduction for Grantmaking and contact your Account Executive
with any questions.

Vlocity Contract Lifecycle Management (CLM) empowers businesses to generate and maintain accurate contracts associated with
opportunities, orders, and quotes. Vlocity CLM seamlessly integrates with Salesforce Lightning Experience. In the Lightning Experience,
Lightning actions such as Create Contract, Update Contract, and Pick Frame Contract are available on opportunities, orders, and quotes.
Learn about what’s in this release in the Vlocity Contract Lifecycle Management.

Some products in Industries share features. In this release we’ve enhanced some of the features that help you provide excellent customer
service, made updates that save you time in Business Rules Engine, extended functionality in Data Processing Engine, and much more.
433
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Industries Common Features
IN THIS SECTION:
Action Launcher
Contact center agents (CCAs) can quickly resolve customer requests by launching Aura components. Out-of-the-Box Deployment
is renamed as Standard Deployment. Use the updated object to provide CCAs with Aura components through Action Launcher.
list member records to list creators. You can create bulk action configurations that include OmniScripts. Actionable list owners can
now create action plans in bulk for the selected list members, and assign tasks to various colleagues as defined in the action plan
template.
that are referenced in expression set versions. Use the Has more than one million rows option in decision tables to process large
volume of rows. Save time and effort by using templates to create decision tables. Enhance the text comparison capability of your
decision tables by using the Does Not Match and Contains operators.
Context Service
Enhance the search experience for customers and business partners by adding Criteria-Based Search and Filter to your Experience
Cloud sites. Help users visualize data by showing resources from search results in an interactive map. Provide sorting options for
search results displayed as cards. Share data from search results by using the prebuilt Copy Records and Create Report actions for
Criteria-Based Search and Filter.
Einstein Summary
Use Einstein Summary to quickly generate a summary of the information stored in object records. For example, a contact center
agent can generate the summary of a customer interaction.
Engagement (Beta)
Grantmaking
Create robust grant applications to help grant seekers save their progress and quickly see incomplete sections. Applicants can also
add collaborators to complete different sections of the application. Track and measure the impact of your grants with Outcome
Management. Ask grant recipients to report the outcomes of your grant funding in Experience Cloud.
Deploy the prebuilt industry integrations to CloudHub 2.0 shared spaces supported by MuleSoft Automation Services. Additionally,
you can choose to hide the values of configuration parameters during the deployment process.
Get Intelligent Document Reader to easily extract unstructured content and tables from documents, excluding rows you need not
save.
Get Intelligent Form Reader to easily extract unstructured content and tables from documents, excluding rows you need not save.
434
Easily capture detailed notes of meetings and interactions by using a single, unified flow.
Scoring Framework
Use Scoring Framework, a CRM Analytics-based framework, to easily and quickly build and deploy propensity models for multiple
Industries clouds use cases using clicks instead of code. Define template configurations for your scoring use cases to create CRM
Analytics apps, Einstein Discovery models, and recipes.
You can now integrate Service Process Studio with Product Catalog Management to enable controlled access for service processes.
Stage Management
With Stage Management, simplify complex business processes with greater visibility and control.
Timeline
Action Launcher
Contact center agents (CCAs) can quickly resolve customer requests by launching Aura components. Out-of-the-Box Deployment is
renamed as Standard Deployment. Use the updated object to provide CCAs with Aura components through Action Launcher.
IN THIS SECTION:
Provide Prompt Customer Service by Quickly Launching Aura Components
Contact center agents can easily find and launch Aura components through Action Launcher. The Aura components are just a search
and click away through Action Launcher.
Experience Improved Clarity with the Renamed Out-of-the-Box Deployment Feature
Standard Deployment is the new name for the Out-of-the-Box Deployment feature. This change doesn't alter the feature's functionality,
but the new name aligns better with the feature's purpose.
Include Aura components in Action Launcher deployments with the updated object.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Action Launcher (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Provide Prompt Customer Service by Quickly Launching Aura Components

Contact center agents can easily find and launch Aura components through Action Launcher. The Aura components are just a search
and click away through Action Launcher.
Where: This change applies to Experience Cloud and Lightning Experience in clouds where Action Launcher is available.
Who: To use this feature, users need the Industry Service Excellence add-on license.
435
How: When you create a deployment, select the Aura components that you want to include in the deployment.
Experience Improved Clarity with the Renamed Out-of-the-Box Deployment Feature

Standard Deployment is the new name for the Out-of-the-Box Deployment feature. This change doesn't alter the feature's functionality,
but the new name aligns better with the feature's purpose.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in clouds where Action Launcher is available.
Who: To use this feature, users need the Industry Service Excellence add-on license.

Include Aura components in Action Launcher deployments with the updated object.
Indicate whether the record actions deployment includes components
Use the new Components field on the RecordActionDeployment object.

list member records to list creators. You can create bulk action configurations that include OmniScripts. Actionable list owners can now
create action plans in bulk for the selected list members, and assign tasks to various colleagues as defined in the action plan template.
IN THIS SECTION:
Add or Remove Columns in Actionable List Members to View Relevant Information
List creators can customize the table in Actionable List Members to suit their specific needs. The customization helps list creators
focus on the relevant data and work efficiently.
Improve the Efficiency of List Creators with the Record Status Filter
With the new default Record Status filter, list creators can immediately focus on the active actionable list member records without
applying the filter each time. The filter hides the suppressed and inactive actionable list member records.
Streamline the List Creator Workflow with Contextual OmniScripts on Bulk Action Panel
Improve the productivity of list creators by including OmniScripts in bulk action configurations. The bulk action configurations
integrate with actionable lists to show list-specific OmniScripts on Bulk Action Panel.
Save Time and Improve Efficiency with Bulk Action Plans
Generate action plans in bulk for your selected actionable list members. List creators can focus on high-value and strategic activities
because they can avoid the tedious and time-consuming task of creating individual action plans for every target on a list.
Add or Remove Columns in Actionable List Members to View Relevant Information

List creators can customize the table in Actionable List Members to suit their specific needs. The customization helps list creators focus
on the relevant data and work efficiently.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in clouds where Actionable List Members is available.
Who: To customize the table in Actionable List Members, administrators need the Industry Sales Excellence add-on license and the
Actionable Segmentation permission set.
How: To add or remove columns, click in Actionable List Members.
436
Improve the Efficiency of List Creators with the Record Status Filter
With the new default Record Status filter, list creators can immediately focus on the active actionable list member records without
applying the filter each time. The filter hides the suppressed and inactive actionable list member records.
Who: To use the Record Status filter in Actionable List Members, list creators need the Industry Sales Excellence add-on license and the
Actionable Segmentation permission set.
How: To see the Record Status filter applied by default, list creators must open an actionable list from the Actionable List list view.
Streamline the List Creator Workflow with Contextual OmniScripts on Bulk Action Panel
Improve the productivity of list creators by including OmniScripts in bulk action configurations. The bulk action configurations integrate
with actionable lists to show list-specific OmniScripts on Bulk Action Panel.
Who: To create bulk action configurations, you need the Industry Sales Excellence add-on license and the Actionable Segmentation
permission set.
How: When you create a bulk action configuration, select the objects and the associated OmniScripts that you want to include in the
configuration, and then select the OmniScripts that you want to show on Bulk Action Panel.
Save Time and Improve Efficiency with Bulk Action Plans

Generate action plans in bulk for your selected actionable list members. List creators can focus on high-value and strategic activities
because they can avoid the tedious and time-consuming task of creating individual action plans for every target on a list.
How: Select an actionable list. Then, select the list member records in the Actionable List Members component. To create action plans
for the selected records, click Create and Assign Action Plan.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create Action Plans by Using Prebuilt Bulk Action

Incorporate new logic into expression set versions efficiently by changing subexpressions in fewer clicks. Map a subexpression’s variables
to the local resources of the expression set that the subexpression is used in. Easily deactivate or modify the decision tables that are
referenced in expression set versions. Use the Has more than one million rows option in decision tables to process large volume of rows.
Save time and effort by using templates to create decision tables. Enhance the text comparison capability of your decision tables by
IN THIS SECTION:
Replace and Delete Subexpressions in Expression Sets Easily
Incorporate new logic into expression set versions efficiently with fewer clicks. Replace or delete subexpressions from expression
set versions without manually deleting the steps that reference the subexpression’s variables. The replaced subexpression’s input
variables that match the old subexpression’s variables are automatically reused. You can fix any errors that are shown in subsequent
expression set version steps that reference the old subexpression’s variables.
437
Map Subexpression Variables to Expression Set Resources Efficiently

Enjoy the flexibility to use expression set resources, and develop more meaningful expression set versions. After you add a subexpression
to an expression set version, map the subexpression’s input and output variables to the local resources of the expression set version.
Use Boolean Data Type in Expression Set Constants
Simplify rule processing by adding constants of the Boolean data type in expression set versions.
Use the increased default length of explainability messages to show your users more detailed explanations for why an expression
set version step returned a particular result.
Change Decision Tables Used in Expression Sets Effortlessly
Modify decision tables that are referenced in expression set versions with fewer clicks. Refresh the expression set builder to synchronize
with the changes in the decision table columns such as addition, deletion, or data type changes. This update helps you use decision
tables to incorporate changes in business rules without a significant downtime, making it business as usual.
Easily Create Decision Tables by using Templates
Save time and effort in creating a decision table by using industry-specific templates. Use these templates to quickly create a decision
table based on your business requirement, instead of creating it from scratch. The templates are available in your Salesforce org only
if your Industries solution has shipped it.
Enhance your Decision Table Logic by using the Does Not Match and Contains Operators
Enhance the text comparison capability of your decision tables by using the Does Not Match and Contains operators. Use the Does
Not Match operator to retrieve an output if the query value doesn’t contain the exact value or a subset of the value in the table’s
input cell. Use the Contains operator to retrieve an output if the input cell value is an exact match or subset of the value that you
look up.
Create Decision Tables that Support Large Number of Rows (Pilot)
When you create a decision table, select the Has more than one million rows option to indicate that a decision table has more than
100,000 rows. Previously, decision tables supported up to 100,000 rows. With this option you can have up to 2,000,000 rows in your
decision table.
Do more with these changed objects in Business Rules Engine.
Replace and Delete Subexpressions in Expression Sets Easily

Incorporate new logic into expression set versions efficiently with fewer clicks. Replace or delete subexpressions from expression set
versions without manually deleting the steps that reference the subexpression’s variables. The replaced subexpression’s input variables
that match the old subexpression’s variables are automatically reused. You can fix any errors that are shown in subsequent expression
set version steps that reference the old subexpression’s variables.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions for Industries clouds where Business
Rules Engine is enabled.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Tips to Work with Subexpressions (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Map Subexpression Variables to Expression Set Resources Efficiently

Enjoy the flexibility to use expression set resources, and develop more meaningful expression set versions. After you add a subexpression
to an expression set version, map the subexpression’s input and output variables to the local resources of the expression set version.
438
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Tips to Work with Subexpressions (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Use Boolean Data Type in Expression Set Constants

Simplify rule processing by adding constants of the Boolean data type in expression set versions.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Supported Data Types in Expression Sets (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Use the increased default length of explainability messages to show your users more detailed explanations for why an expression set
version step returned a particular result.
Rules Engine and Decision Explainer are enabled.
Who: Users with the Rule Engine Designer permission set can define explainability messages in expression set version steps.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Show Rule Explanations to Users (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Change Decision Tables Used in Expression Sets Effortlessly

Modify decision tables that are referenced in expression set versions with fewer clicks. Refresh the expression set builder to synchronize
with the changes in the decision table columns such as addition, deletion, or data type changes. This update helps you use decision
tables to incorporate changes in business rules without a significant downtime, making it business as usual.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Tips to Manage Decision Tables (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Easily Create Decision Tables by using Templates

Save time and effort in creating a decision table by using industry-specific templates. Use these templates to quickly create a decision
table based on your business requirement, instead of creating it from scratch. The templates are available in your Salesforce org only if
your Industries solution has shipped it.
439
Enhance your Decision Table Logic by using the Does Not Match and Contains Operators
Enhance the text comparison capability of your decision tables by using the Does Not Match and Contains operators. Use the Does Not
Match operator to retrieve an output if the query value doesn’t contain the exact value or a subset of the value in the table’s input cell.
Use the Contains operator to retrieve an output if the input cell value is an exact match or subset of the value that you look up.
How: You can use these operators when you configure the Column Logic in a decision table.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Does Not Match Operator in Decision Tables(can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Contains Operator in Decision Tables(can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Create Decision Tables that Support Large Number of Rows (Pilot)

When you create a decision table, select the Has more than one million rows option to indicate that a decision table has more than
100,000 rows. Previously, decision tables supported up to 100,000 rows. With this option you can have up to 2,000,000 rows in your
decision table.
Note: This feature isn’t generally available and is being piloted with certain customers subject to additional terms and conditions.
It isn’t part of your purchased services. To participate in the pilot, contact your Salesforce Product Manager. This feature is subject
to change, may be discontinued with no notice at any time at Salesforce’s sole discretion, and Salesforce may never make this
feature generally available. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. This feature
is made available on an AS-IS basis, and the use of this feature is at your sole risk.

Do more with these changed objects in Business Rules Engine.
Specifies the scale of the input that an expression set processes
Use the new ExecutionScale field in the ExpressionSet and ExpressionSetDefinition objects.
Specifies the label of the usage type that's associated with an expression set template
Use the new UsageTypeLabel field in the ExpressionSetView object.
Context Service
context definition. Conveniently generate and edit input mapping for all nodes and attributes of a definition, reducing manual selection
of each node. Support different mapping types with mapping intent operations.
IN THIS SECTION:
Automatically Map Context Definition to Standard Objects
Make use of the enhanced user experience to map Salesforce objects. Previously, you selected from a Mapping Type dropdown,
and left the field blank to map your context definition manually.
440
Generate Input Mapping Easily for Context Definitions

Avoid the manual selection of each node and attribute to generate input mapping. You can now edit the input mapping name.
Previously, to generate input mapping, you used Automatic Input Schema Mapping on the Add Mapping page.
Specify Context Mapping Intent to Use Different Mapping Types
Perform the Association, Hydration, Persistence and Translation operations to support one-to-one, one-to-many, many-to-one, and
cross attribute mappings. Based on the intent operation you select, the mapping type changes. Previously, only one-to-one attribute
mapping was available to perform the Hydration and Persistence operation.
Use Context Definitions as Mapping Data Source
Map a context definition to other context definitions to retrieve data from a definition. Previously, you selected from Salesforce
objects to fetch data from standard objects.
Do more with these new Context Service objects.
Connect REST APIs
Learn more about the updates to the Connect REST APIs in Context Service.
Context Namespace
The Context namespace is used to manage the sharing and consumption of business application data by using Context Service.
It has this new class and these methods.
Automatically Map Context Definition to Standard Objects

Make use of the enhanced user experience to map Salesforce objects. Previously, you selected from a Mapping Type dropdown, and
left the field blank to map your context definition manually.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions for Industries clouds
where Context Service is enabled.
How: To map your definition to standard objects, select Automatic Salesforce Object
Mapping.
441
Generate Input Mapping Easily for Context Definitions

Avoid the manual selection of each node and attribute to generate input mapping. You can now edit the input mapping name. Previously,
to generate input mapping, you used Automatic Input Schema Mapping on the Add Mapping page.
How: Open the context definition that you want to add input mapping to. On the Context Definition Details page, click the Map Data
tab. Click , and select Input Mapping. On the Edit Mapping page, click Generate All Mappings.
Specify Context Mapping Intent to Use Different Mapping Types

Perform the Association, Hydration, Persistence and Translation operations to support one-to-one, one-to-many, many-to-one, and cross
attribute mappings. Based on the intent operation you select, the mapping type changes. Previously, only one-to-one attribute mapping
was available to perform the Hydration and Persistence operation.
How: Open the context definition that you want to add the mapping to. On the Context Definition Details page, click the Map Data
tab. Click Add Mapping. On the Add Context Mapping window, enter Name, click Next. On the Mapping Intent Details window, select
the mapping intent operation.
442
Use Context Definitions as Mapping Data Source

Map a context definition to other context definitions to retrieve data from a definition. Previously, you selected from Salesforce objects
to fetch data from standard objects.
How: On the Context Definition Objects tab, select the definition that you want to map, and click
Done.

Do more with these new Context Service objects.
Indicates the user intent of the context mapping
Use the new ContextMappingIntent object.
Stores information for context to context mapping
Use the new CtxAttrHydrationCtx object.
Connect REST APIs

Learn more about the updates to the Connect REST APIs in Context Service.
443
IN THIS SECTION:
Learn more about the new resource available with Context Service.
This response body has changes.

Learn more about the new resource available with Context Service.
Configure a relationship node by adding child context nodes to a specific context node
Make a POST request to the new /connect/context-nodes/contextNodeId/configurerelationship resource.
New request body: Context Node ID Input
SEE ALSO:
Industries Common Resources Developer Guide: Context Service Business APIs

This response body has changes.
Context Node Relationship (POST)

Context Node
• canonicalNodeId—ID of the canonical node that’s used as a reference to create the context node.
• displayName—Name of the context node displayed on the UI.
SEE ALSO:
Industries Common Resources Developer Guide: Context Service Business APIs
Context Namespace
The Context namespace is used to manage the sharing and consumption of business application data by using Context Service. It
has this new class and these methods.
New Class
Manage the processes of a Context Service
These are highlights of the methods in the new IndustriesContext class. Use the buildContext(input) method
to create a context. Use the buildContext(input) method to delete a context. Use the getContext(input) method
to retrieve context details. Use the getContextTranslation(input) method to retrieve context mappings based on a
target mapping ID. Use the persistContext(input) method to persist the current data or state of context. Use the
queryRecordStatus(input) method to query the status of a record. Use the queryTags(input) method to query
a context by using tags. Use the updateContextAttributes(input) method to update the attributes of a context.
444

Enhance the search experience for customers and business partners by adding Criteria-Based Search and Filter to your Experience Cloud
sites. Help users visualize data by showing resources from search results in an interactive map. Provide sorting options for search results
displayed as cards. Share data from search results by using the prebuilt Copy Records and Create Report actions for Criteria-Based Search
and Filter.
IN THIS SECTION:
Enrich the Search Experience on Experience Cloud Sites
With Criteria-Based Search and Filter, authenticated and guest users can search across a rich set of data and initiate actions directly
from search results. Add style to your search page by applying a theme with fonts and colors that match your site design or brand.
Customize the search criteria, search result filters, and search result display to meet your business requirements.
Help users find the most suitable resource based on location by showing a map alongside search results. Map markers show essential
details about the people, places, or things in the search results.
Help Users Refine Search Results with Sorting for Cards
Provide an improved search experience to your users by adding options to sort search result cards. You can select up to 20 fields for
sorting criteria, and users can sort by up to three fields when they view search results. Sorting was previously available only for search
results in a list view.
With the new Copy Records and Create Report search actions, your users can now save and share search result details by copying
data or creating a report directly from search results. The new actions use data from the selected search result records and the
appropriate context record, such as the account record where the search is run.
Enrich the Search Experience on Experience Cloud Sites

With Criteria-Based Search and Filter, authenticated and guest users can search across a rich set of data and initiate actions directly from
search results. Add style to your search page by applying a theme with fonts and colors that match your site design or brand. Customize
the search criteria, search result filters, and search result display to meet your business requirements.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience editions where Criteria-Based Search and Filter is enabled.
To create an Experience Cloud site, users need the Create and Set Up Experiences and View Setup and Configuration permissions. To
run searches and view search results, authenticated and guest users on Experience Cloud sites need the Criteria-Based Search and Filter
for Experience Cloud permission set.
How: Configure a searchable object, search criteria, and search actions for authenticated and guest users on Experience Cloud sites. In
Experience Builder, drag the Criteria-Based Search and Filter component to a search page on your site. Select the search configurations
that you want to appear on the page and change or adjust the theme.

Help users find the most suitable resource based on location by showing a map alongside search results. Map markers show essential
details about the people, places, or things in the search results.
445
How: Add a search configuration with distance criteria. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Criteria, and then select
Criteria-Based Search and Filter. On the Search Configuration tab, click New. When you configure the distance criteria, turn on Show
Map. Then select the field values for the map marker titles and descriptions.
Help Users Refine Search Results with Sorting for Cards

Provide an improved search experience to your users by adding options to sort search result cards. You can select up to 20 fields for
sorting criteria, and users can sort by up to three fields when they view search results. Sorting was previously available only for search
results in a list view.
To select or configure an OmniStudio FlexCard for the card view, users need the OmniStudio Admin permission set.
How: Add a search configuration that sorts search results shown as cards. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Criteria, and
then select Criteria-Based Search and Filter. On the Search Configuration tab, click New. Select Card as the display format of search
results, and then select an OmniStudio FlexCard. For sorting criteria, move up to 20 fields from the Available Fields list to the Selected
Fields list.

With the new Copy Records and Create Report search actions, your users can now save and share search result details by copying data
or creating a report directly from search results. The new actions use data from the selected search result records and the appropriate
context record, such as the account record where the search is run.
How: To use the Copy Records action, create a search action that specifies the Copy Records Lightning web component. To use the
Create Report action, save the Create Report flow as a new flow. Specify a report template in the new flow, activate the flow, and then
create a search action that specifies the flow. To add the new actions to a search configuration, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter
Criteria, and then select Criteria-Based Search and Filter. On the Search Configuration tab, click New. When you select actions
for search results, move the new actions from the Available Fields list to the Selected Fields list.
The Copy Records action is available to internal users and Experience Cloud users. The Create Report action is available only to internal
users.

Upload large amounts of data into your definition with CSV files. Use the Data Cloud runtime with extended functionality for join, filter,
formula, and writeback nodes.
IN THIS SECTION:
Upload large amounts of CSV file data into your definition with the Data Cloud runtime. Add the CSV file in a data source node and
configure the fields to use in the definition. After a definition is run, download any failed records in Monitor Workflow Services.
Add Flexibility to Data Cloud Filter and Join Nodes with All Map Fields
Filter and join nodes now support all Map Field data types in definitions that use the Data cloud runtime. This extended functionality
brings the Data Cloud runtime in line with the CRMA runtime functionality in Data Processing Engine.
446
Support for Multiple Writeback Nodes with Data Cloud

You can now create up to five writeback object nodes per definition with the Data Cloud runtime. This extended functionality brings
the Data Cloud runtime in line with the CRMA runtime functionality in Data Processing Engine.
Make Smarter Definitions With Formula Nodes for Data Cloud
Formula nodes are now available in definitions that use the Data Cloud runtime. Create multiple formulas and store the results of
each formula in a new field. This extended functionality brings the Data Cloud runtime in line with the CRMA runtime functionality
in Data Processing Engine.
Metadata API

Upload large amounts of CSV file data into your definition with the Data Cloud runtime. Add the CSV file in a data source node and
configure the fields to use in the definition. After a definition is run, download any failed records in Monitor Workflow Services.
your sole risk.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Professional, and Unlimited editions where Data Processing Engine
is enabled.
Add Flexibility to Data Cloud Filter and Join Nodes with All Map Fields
Filter and join nodes now support all Map Field data types in definitions that use the Data cloud runtime. This extended functionality
brings the Data Cloud runtime in line with the CRMA runtime functionality in Data Processing Engine.
is enabled.
Support for Multiple Writeback Nodes with Data Cloud

You can now create up to five writeback object nodes per definition with the Data Cloud runtime. This extended functionality brings
the Data Cloud runtime in line with the CRMA runtime functionality in Data Processing Engine.
is enabled.
Make Smarter Definitions With Formula Nodes for Data Cloud

Formula nodes are now available in definitions that use the Data Cloud runtime. Create multiple formulas and store the results of each
formula in a new field. This extended functionality brings the Data Cloud runtime in line with the CRMA runtime functionality in Data
Processing Engine.
is enabled.
Metadata API
447

Improve data processing with enhanced CSV delimitation, file identification, directory referencing, and file sourcing for
BatchCalcJobDatasource
Use the new csvDelimiter, fileIdentifier, filePath, fileSource fields on the existing BatchCalcJobDatasource
metadata subtype of BatchCalcJobDefinition metadata type. Introduced in API version 61.0, this field has been added to the Industries
Common Resource Developer Guide.
Define input field data types for CSV data sources
Use the new dataType field on the existing BatchCalcJobDatasourceField metadata subtype of BatchCalcJobDefinition metadata
type. Introduced in API version 61.0, this field has been added to the Industries Common Resource Developer Guide.
Einstein Summary
Use Einstein Summary to quickly generate a summary of the information stored in object records. For example, a contact center agent
can generate the summary of a customer interaction.
IN THIS SECTION:
Efficiently Summarize the Information Stored in Object Records
Eliminate the manual effort of contact center agents (CCAs) to summarize the information stored in object records by using Einstein
Summary. For example, a CCA can use a prompt template to efficiently summarize a customer interaction and free up time to assist
more customers. Einstein Summary generates a summary of the customer interaction information that is stored in the records of
the Engagement Interaction object and its related objects: Engagement Topic and Content Document Link.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Einstein Summary (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Efficiently Summarize the Information Stored in Object Records

Eliminate the manual effort of contact center agents (CCAs) to summarize the information stored in object records by using Einstein
Summary. For example, a CCA can use a prompt template to efficiently summarize a customer interaction and free up time to assist
more customers. Einstein Summary generates a summary of the customer interaction information that is stored in the records of the
Engagement Interaction object and its related objects: Engagement Topic and Content Document Link.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in clouds where Einstein Summary is available.
Who: To use this feature, users need the Industry Service Excellence, Einstein GPT Platform, and Einstein for Service Innovations add-on
licenses.
How: Add the Einstein Summary component to a Lightning record page through Lightning App Builder. To generate a summary, CCAs
can select a prompt template in Einstein Summary.
Engagement (Beta)
448
IN THIS SECTION:
Efficiently Summarize a Customer Interaction (Beta)
Use Einstein Copilot to eliminate the manual effort required to summarize a customer interaction and free the time of contact center
agents to assist more customers. To generate the summary, Einstein Copilot taps into the customer interaction information, including
transcripts, which are stored in an Engagement Interaction, a Messaging Session, or a Voice Call record and in the Engagement Topic
and Content Document Link related object records.
Efficiently Summarize Up To Five Recent Customer Interactions (Beta)
Users can now harness the power of Einstein Copilot to generate a summary of up to five recent customer interactions. With Einstein
Copilot, users spend less time on summarizing customer interactions and more time on completing valuable tasks. To generate the
summary, Einstein Copilot taps into the customer interaction information, including transcripts, which are stored in the Engagement
Interaction, Messaging Session, or Voice Call records and in the Engagement Topic and Content Document Link related object
records.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Engagement (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Engagement (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Efficiently Summarize a Customer Interaction (Beta)

Use Einstein Copilot to eliminate the manual effort required to summarize a customer interaction and free the time of contact center
agents to assist more customers. To generate the summary, Einstein Copilot taps into the customer interaction information, including
transcripts, which are stored in an Engagement Interaction, a Messaging Session, or a Voice Call record and in the Engagement Topic
and Content Document Link related object records.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in clouds where Einstein Copilot is available.
Who: To use this feature, users need the Industry Service Excellence, Digital Engagement, and Service Cloud Voice add-on licenses.
How: To summarize a customer interaction, submit an utterance in Einstein Copilot from an Engagement Interaction, a Messaging
Session, or a Voice Call record page.
Efficiently Summarize Up To Five Recent Customer Interactions (Beta)

Users can now harness the power of Einstein Copilot to generate a summary of up to five recent customer interactions. With Einstein
Copilot, users spend less time on summarizing customer interactions and more time on completing valuable tasks. To generate the
summary, Einstein Copilot taps into the customer interaction information, including transcripts, which are stored in the Engagement
Interaction, Messaging Session, or Voice Call records and in the Engagement Topic and Content Document Link related object records.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in clouds where Einstein Copilot is available.
Who: To use this feature, users need the Industry Service Excellence add-on license and optionally, the Service Cloud Voice and Digital
Engagement add-on licenses.
How: To summarize up to five recent customer interactions, submit an utterance in Einstein Copilot from an Account record page.
449
Grantmaking
Create robust grant applications to help grant seekers save their progress and quickly see incomplete sections. Applicants can also add
collaborators to complete different sections of the application. Track and measure the impact of your grants with Outcome Management.
Ask grant recipients to report the outcomes of your grant funding in Experience Cloud.
IN THIS SECTION:
Effortlessly Launch Complex Grant Applications
Configure and launch a complex grant application with multiple sections. Grant applicants can work on an application over days or
weeks in a guided manner and quickly see what sections are still incomplete. The Grantmaking Manager and Grantmaking for
Experience Cloud permission sets now include access to the objects and fields related to Individual Applications.
Measure the Impact and Success of Grants with Outcome Management
visibility into your overall strategy for creating impact and alignment across your organization. Through Experience Cloud, grant
recipients can outline and report on the impact of the grant they received. The Grantmaking Manager and Grantmaking for Experience
Cloud permission sets now include access to the new Grantmaking fields on Outcome Management objects.
Securely Collaborate on Grantmaking Application Sections
Grant applicants can securely add collaborators to help complete sections of a grant application in your Experience Cloud site. For
example, the development director that completes the organizational summary information in an application can add the program
director to complete the details about their programs and the planned budget for the grant. The Grantmaking Manager and
Grantmaking for Experience Cloud permission sets now include access to the new Individual Application Task Participant object.
Easily Add Grantmaking Permission Sets to Permission Set Groups
To give more permissions to or remove permissions from users, create custom permission sets. Then, include your custom permission
sets in a permission set group with the Grantmaking permission. This approach ensures users always have the latest default permissions
and is an alternative to cloning permission sets. Previously, users cloned the Grantmaking permission set to customize permissions.
Now, they can add the Grantmaking permission sets to permission set groups to use alongside their custom permission sets.
Use the Delete button on individual applications that are a Grantmaking type. Previously, in orgs with Grantmaking enabled users
set individual applications to an inactive status. Now, they can delete the records they don’t need.
Effortlessly Launch Complex Grant Applications

Configure and launch a complex grant application with multiple sections. Grant applicants can work on an application over days or
weeks in a guided manner and quickly see what sections are still incomplete. The Grantmaking Manager and Grantmaking for Experience
Cloud permission sets now include access to the objects and fields related to Individual Applications.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Grantmaking
is enabled.
SEE ALSO:
Help Documentation: Create a Grantmaking Form (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
450
Measure the Impact and Success of Grants with Outcome Management

visibility into your overall strategy for creating impact and alignment across your organization. Through Experience Cloud, grant recipients
can outline and report on the impact of the grant they received. The Grantmaking Manager and Grantmaking for Experience Cloud
permission sets now include access to the new Grantmaking fields on Outcome Management objects.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Grantmaking and Outcome
Management are enabled.
SEE ALSO:
Help Documentation: Define and Measure the Impact of Grants with Outcome Management (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)
Securely Collaborate on Grantmaking Application Sections

Grant applicants can securely add collaborators to help complete sections of a grant application in your Experience Cloud site. For
example, the development director that completes the organizational summary information in an application can add the program
director to complete the details about their programs and the planned budget for the grant. The Grantmaking Manager and Grantmaking
for Experience Cloud permission sets now include access to the new Individual Application Task Participant object.
is enabled.
Who: To set up Compliant Data Sharing (CDS) for Grantmaking objects, users need the Grantmaking Manager permission set and the
Configure Compliant Data Sharing system permission. To share records by using CDS, users need the Use Compliant Data Sharing system
permission, and either be the owner of the record or have edit access on the record through CDS. To access a shared record, users need
the Use Compliant Data Sharing system permission.
SEE ALSO:
Help Documentation: Securely Share Grantmaking Records in CRM or Experience Cloud Using Compliant Data Sharing (can be
outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Easily Add Grantmaking Permission Sets to Permission Set Groups

To give more permissions to or remove permissions from users, create custom permission sets. Then, include your custom permission
sets in a permission set group with the Grantmaking permission. This approach ensures users always have the latest default permissions
and is an alternative to cloning permission sets. Previously, users cloned the Grantmaking permission set to customize permissions. Now,
they can add the Grantmaking permission sets to permission set groups to use alongside their custom permission sets.
is enabled.

Use the Delete button on individual applications that are a Grantmaking type. Previously, in orgs with Grantmaking enabled users set
individual applications to an inactive status. Now, they can delete the records they don’t need.
is enabled.
451

Enhance Applications with new Grantmaking fields
Use the existing ApplicationRenderMethod, ApplicationStageDefinition, and IndividualApplicationTask objects that are added to
the Grantmaking license.
Use Compliant Data Sharing with Individual Application
Turn on Compliant Data Sharing for the new IndvApplicationTaskParticipant object.
Connect Grantmaking to Outcome Management
Use the new FundingAward, FundingOpportunity, and IndividualApplication fields on the existing Outcome
Activity object. Use the new FundingAward, FundingOpportunity, and IndividualApplication fields on the
existing Indicator Assignment object. Use the new FundingAwardRequirement field on the existing Indicator Performance
Period object.
SEE ALSO:
Developer Documentation: Grantmaking Developer Guide

Deploy the prebuilt industry integrations to CloudHub 2.0 shared spaces supported by MuleSoft Automation Services. Additionally, you
can choose to hide the values of configuration parameters during the deployment process.
IN THIS SECTION:
Efficiently Deploy Industry Integrations to CloudHub 2.0
Deploy the pre-built industry integrations, which are available on the MuleSoft Direct page, to a specific shared space within CloudHub
2.0. Depending on your subscription, if you have a global deployment entitlement, all regions are accessible. Otherwise, only the
regions available to your organization are shown.
Ensure Confidentiality of Parameter Values on Anypoint Platform
Hide the values of the configuration parameters on Mulesoft’s Anypoint Runtime Manager when you deploy integration apps on
CloudHub 2.0.
Efficiently Deploy Industry Integrations to CloudHub 2.0

Deploy the pre-built industry integrations, which are available on the MuleSoft Direct page, to a specific shared space within CloudHub
2.0. Depending on your subscription, if you have a global deployment entitlement, all regions are accessible. Otherwise, only the regions
available to your organization are shown.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience where Industry Integration Solutions is enabled.
SEE ALSO:
https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sf.enable_integration_assets.htm
Ensure Confidentiality of Parameter Values on Anypoint Platform

Hide the values of the configuration parameters on Mulesoft’s Anypoint Runtime Manager when you deploy integration apps on
CloudHub 2.0.
452
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience where Industry Integration Solutions is enabled.
SEE ALSO:
https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sf.enable_integration_assets.htm

Get Intelligent Document Reader to easily extract unstructured content and tables from documents, excluding rows you need not save.
IN THIS SECTION:
Optimize Data Extraction by Excluding Rows in Tabular Data
Exclude rows during tabular data extraction that you do not need to save by using the new Skip record option in the Intelligent
Document Reader. Gain better control over the extraction process to capture only the relevant information.

Exclude rows during tabular data extraction that you do not need to save by using the new Skip record option in the Intelligent Document
Reader. Gain better control over the extraction process to capture only the relevant information.
Where: This change applies to the Lightning Experience of multiple Industries clouds.
Who: Apart from Financial Services Cloud, Health Cloud, and Public Sector Solutions, Intelligent Document Reader is also available with
the Intelligent Document Reader add-on license for the Automotive, Consumer Goods, Education, Manufacturing, Media, and Net Zero
clouds.

Get Intelligent Form Reader to easily extract unstructured content and tables from documents, excluding rows you need not save.
IN THIS SECTION:
Exclude rows during table extraction that you do not need to save by using the new Skip record option in the Intelligent Form Reader.
Gain better control over the extraction process to capture only the relevant information.

Exclude rows during table extraction that you do not need to save by using the new Skip record option in the Intelligent Form Reader.
Gain better control over the extraction process to capture only the relevant information.
Where: This change applies to the Lightning Experience of multiple Industries clouds.
Who: Apart from Financial Services Cloud, Health Cloud, and Public Sector Solutions, Intelligent Form Reader is also available with the
Intelligent Form Reader add-on license for the Automotive, Consumer Goods, Education, Manufacturing, Media, and Net Zero clouds.
Easily capture detailed notes of meetings and interactions by using a single, unified flow.
453
IN THIS SECTION:
Efficiently Create and Manage Interaction Notes
Reduce administrative overhead by taking Interaction Summary notes with a single component. Easily capture meeting notes; record
attendees; include dates, times, and other details; add tags; and upload documents in a simple flow. Share interaction notes with
other users and publish approved notes to prevent further edits with just a few clicks.
New and Changed Objects in Interaction Summaries
Do more with a new field on the Interaction Summary object.
Efficiently Create and Manage Interaction Notes

Reduce administrative overhead by taking Interaction Summary notes with a single component. Easily capture meeting notes; record
attendees; include dates, times, and other details; add tags; and upload documents in a simple flow. Share interaction notes with other
users and publish approved notes to prevent further edits with just a few clicks.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience where Interaction Summaries and Program and Benefit Management are enabled.
Who: Users with the Interaction Summaries and Program and Benefit Management permission set licenses.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Configure and Capture Interactions in Public Sector Solutions (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
New and Changed Objects in Interaction Summaries

Do more with a new field on the Interaction Summary object.
Specify the status of a meeting note
Use the new MeetingNotesStatus field on the existing Interaction Summary object.
Note: To use this field, Program and Benefit Management must be enabled. This field isn't available in Financial Services
Cloud.

IN THIS SECTION:
Get Better Outreach Results by Suppressing Irrelevant Records
The removal of records from a Data Cloud segment now suppresses the records in the associated actionable list. The status of the
suppressed records changes to inactive in the actionable list. When the records are reincorporated to the segment, the records revert
to the active status. With an up-to-date actionable list, contact center agents can contact the appropriate prospects and improve
the customer conversion rates.
Changed Object in List Builder for Data Cloud Segment
Use the changed object to suppress prospect records in an actionable list.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: List Builder for Data Cloud Segment (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
454
Get Better Outreach Results by Suppressing Irrelevant Records

The removal of records from a Data Cloud segment now suppresses the records in the associated actionable list. The status of the
suppressed records changes to inactive in the actionable list. When the records are reincorporated to the segment, the records revert
to the active status. With an up-to-date actionable list, contact center agents can contact the appropriate prospects and improve the
customer conversion rates.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in clouds where List Builder for Data Cloud Segment is available.
Who: To use this feature, list creators need the Industry Sales Excellence, Segmentation and Activation, and Data Spaces add-on licenses.
Changed Object in List Builder for Data Cloud Segment

Use the changed object to suppress prospect records in an actionable list.
Specify the status of the actionable list member record in the associated Data Cloud segment or other sources
Use the new SourceRecordStatus field on the ActionableListMember object.
Indicate the status of the actionable list member
Use the new RecordStatus field on the ActionableListMember object.
Store the ID of the actionable list member record created by combining the record's actionable list ID and reference record
values
Use the new AdditionalIdentifier field on the ActionableListMember object.

IN THIS SECTION:
Work More Intuitively with Record Rollup Definitions UI
Create record rollup definitions with just a few clicks by using an easy-to-use and intuitive UI. Use the record rollup definitions to
aggregate records from multiple objects or groups according to your business requirements. The record rollup definitions can be
run by using a simple schedule-triggered flow that runs the Data Processing Engine definition associated with the record rollup
definition. Use the ShowRecordRollupResults component to show record rollup results in a clear and organized format on the record
details page.
Learn more about the new resource available with Record Rollup Definitions.
Work More Intuitively with Record Rollup Definitions UI

Create record rollup definitions with just a few clicks by using an easy-to-use and intuitive UI. Use the record rollup definitions to aggregate
records from multiple objects or groups according to your business requirements. The record rollup definitions can be run by using a
simple schedule-triggered flow that runs the Data Processing Engine definition associated with the record rollup definition. Use the
ShowRecordRollupResults component to show record rollup results in a clear and organized format on the record details page.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience of multiple Industries clouds.
Why: Business executives often struggle to make informed decisions because the data is scattered across different objects. Deriving
intelligent insights from scattered data isn't only costly and time-consuming, but also prevents the business executives from seeing the
bigger picture. Your business executives can use the consolidated data to make informed decisions more quickly and accurately.
455
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Rollup Definitions, and then select Record Rollup Definitions. To create a
record rollup definition, click New Rollup Definition.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Rollup Definitions for Record Rollups

Learn more about the new resource available with Record Rollup Definitions.
Get record rollup results for a specific record aggregation definition
Make a POST request to the new
/connect/record-aggregation/recordAggregationDefinitionId/record-rollup-results resource.
New request body: Record Rollup Input
New response body: Record Rollup
SEE ALSO:
Industries Common Resources Developer Guide: Record Rollup Definitions Business APIs
Scoring Framework
Use Scoring Framework, a CRM Analytics-based framework, to easily and quickly build and deploy propensity models for multiple
Industries clouds use cases using clicks instead of code. Define template configurations for your scoring use cases to create CRM Analytics
apps, Einstein Discovery models, and recipes.
IN THIS SECTION:
Efficiently Debug Analytics App Installation Failures with Saved Assets
Maintain access to assets even if the analytics app installation fails to streamline issue identification and resolution. Save assets during
installation to enhance debugging efficiency.
Efficiently Debug Analytics App Installation Failures with Saved Assets

Maintain access to assets even if the analytics app installation fails to streamline issue identification and resolution. Save assets during
installation to enhance debugging efficiency.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience where Scoring Framework is enabled.
Who: This feature is available to users with the AI Accelerator with Scoring Framework permission set license.
How: To enable asset saving, go to the Setup page of Scoring Framework and open a CRM Analytics template configuration. Click Set
Up for the Configure Write Back of Predictions step and select Setup Debug Configuration.

You can now integrate Service Process Studio with Product Catalog Management to enable controlled access for service processes.
456
IN THIS SECTION:
Service Process Studio now integrates with Product Catalog Management. When you create service processes in Service Process
Studio, they’re automatically added as service process products in Product Catalog Management. With this integration, you can
associate active service process products with a product catalog and define user access control and customer eligibility rules. By
adding the catalog and expression set names in Action Launcher properties, you can show your users relevant service processes.
New video helps your users learn about the capabilities of Service Process Studio.

Service Process Studio now integrates with Product Catalog Management. When you create service processes in Service Process Studio,
they’re automatically added as service process products in Product Catalog Management. With this integration, you can associate active
service process products with a product catalog and define user access control and customer eligibility rules. By adding the catalog and
expression set names in Action Launcher properties, you can show your users relevant service processes.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions where Service Process Studio and Product
Catalog Management are available.
SEE ALSO:
https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sf.spd_eligibility_rules_and_access_control_for_service_processes.htm

New video helps your users learn about the capabilities of Service Process Studio.
• Streamline Customer Service Operations with Service Process Studio explores how to use Service Process Studio to quickly and
efficiently design seamless case-driven customer service processes.
Stage Management
With Stage Management, simplify complex business processes with greater visibility and control.
IN THIS SECTION:
Automate and Manage Business Process Stage Transitions
Use Stage Management to achieve sophisticated automation within Salesforce. Define the business process stages, transitions, and
criteria that are required to complete each stage of a complex business process. For example, you can specify the criteria and
conditions to facilitate the transition between the stages during customer onboarding and run post-transition steps.
Automate and Manage Business Process Stage Transitions

Use Stage Management to achieve sophisticated automation within Salesforce. Define the business process stages, transitions, and
criteria that are required to complete each stage of a complex business process. For example, you can specify the criteria and conditions
to facilitate the transition between the stages during customer onboarding and run post-transition steps.
When: Stage Management is available starting on 1st August, 2024.
457
Why: Complex workflows often require custom code to manage the transition between stages, which is time-consuming and costly.
Stage Management provides:
• Increased efficiency: Save time and resources by reducing the reliance on custom code development.
• Improved visibility: Gain clear insight into record stage progress, enabling you to optimize your business processes more efficiently.
• More granular stage control: Restrict stage transitions based on user access and entry criteria.
• Improved automation: Configure and automate post-transition actions, such as the integration with external systems or the completion
of document checklist items.
How: In Setup, search for and select Stage Management. Turn on Stage Management.
Timeline
Configure a data graph in Timeline to show engagement events from data model objects (DMOs), including the Unified Individual DMO.
Include event summaries on Timeline.
IN THIS SECTION:
Quickly Deliver Better Customer Insights to Contact Center Agents (CCAs) With Data Graph
Configure Timeline with data graphs to load engagement events faster from data model objects (DMOs), including the Unified
Individual DMO. The consolidated list of events helps CCAs enhance information retrieval, understand the historical context, and
have contextual and concise communication with customers and prospects.
Provide Personalized Support to Customers with Summaries on Timeline
Configure Timeline to show summaries of events to your contact center agents (CCAs). The summaries provide the CCAs with a
quick overview of events and enhance their understanding of past events.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: View Events Using Timeline in Salesforce (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Quickly Deliver Better Customer Insights to Contact Center Agents (CCAs) With Data Graph
Configure Timeline with data graphs to load engagement events faster from data model objects (DMOs), including the Unified Individual
DMO. The consolidated list of events helps CCAs enhance information retrieval, understand the historical context, and have contextual
and concise communication with customers and prospects.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in clouds where Timeline and Data Cloud are available.
Who: To use this feature, users need the Industry Service Excellence and Data Graph add-on licenses. CCAs must have access to the
selected data space and data graph. You must turn on the Data Cloud Events admin setting.
How: From Setup, on the Timeline page, create a Timeline and click Timeline Related Objects. On the Data Graph tab, enter the details,
and then activate the Timeline.
Provide Personalized Support to Customers with Summaries on Timeline

Configure Timeline to show summaries of events to your contact center agents (CCAs). The summaries provide the CCAs with a quick
overview of events and enhance their understanding of past events.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in clouds where Timeline is available.
Who: To use this feature, users need the Industry Service Excellence add-on license. You must turn on the Timeline Summary admin
setting.
458
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Marketing
How: From Setup, on the Timeline page, create a Timeline and click Timeline Related Objects. On the Salesforce Platform Events tab,
enter the details, select the field containing the summary, and then activate the Timeline.
Marketing
Salesforce offers three marketing products: Account Engagement (formerly known as Pardot), Engagement (formerly known as Marketing
Cloud), and Marketing Cloud Growth edition. Unified Messaging tools support Marketing Cloud Growth and other Salesforce apps.
IN THIS SECTION:
Save time and reduce workload by sending operational emails through Engagement Studio, copying your assets directly to Salesforce
CMS, and viewing account alerts in Optimizer. If you use the Engage for Gmail Chrome extension, make a transition plan before June
2024.
The Summer ’24 Marketing Cloud Engagement release occurs June 7, 2024 through June 28, 2024. Some features are made available
to your instance within a week of the release.
Marketing Cloud Growth offers a number of enhancements in Summer ’24, including the introduction of campaign members to
build lists, external tracking options, additional Flow Builder elements, and productivity enhancements to content workspaces.
Unified Messaging
Unified Messaging consolidates customer communication channels, like email, SMS, and WhatsApp, into one unified platform. You
can now bring your existing WhatsApp number into Unified Messaging. Improve the customer support experience in Journey Builder
with new tools.

Save time and reduce workload by sending operational emails through Engagement Studio, copying your assets directly to Salesforce
CMS, and viewing account alerts in Optimizer. If you use the Engage for Gmail Chrome extension, make a transition plan before June
2024.
IN THIS SECTION:
Send Operational Emails to Opted-Out Prospects Directly from Engagement Studio
You can now send non-marketing emails to opted-out prospects directly from Engagement Studio. Previously, you could only send
operational emails as list emails.
Copy Images to a Salesforce CMS Workspace
Transfer your images to a Salesforce CMS workspace where they can be accessed for future marketing initiatives, such as to create
an email campaign.
Access alerts and feature recommendation banners in a dedicated messaging section within the Account Engagement Optimizer.
Account Engagement API: New and Changed Items
Access more of your data with new updates for version 5 of Account Engagement API.
459
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Marketing Cloud Account Engagement
Engage for Gmail Chrome Extension Is Being Retired

Because Google is disabling its Manifest V2 Chrome extensions, the Engage for Gmail extension, which is built on Manifest V2, is
projected to retire in June 2024. We recommend working with your Account Engagement users to create a transition plan. You can
continue to send emails directly through Salesforce using the Account Engagement Sales Email & Alerts feature.
Send Operational Emails to Opted-Out Prospects Directly from Engagement Studio

You can now send non-marketing emails to opted-out prospects directly from Engagement Studio. Previously, you could only send
operational emails as list emails.
Where: This change applies to all Account Engagement editions.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Sending Non-Marketing Emails (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Copy Images to a Salesforce CMS Workspace

Transfer your images to a Salesforce CMS workspace where they can be accessed for future marketing initiatives, such as to create an
email campaign.
Where: This change applies to Marketing Cloud Account Engagement Growth edition, with Data Cloud enabled.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Enable Copy to CMS for Account Engagement Business Units (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Copy Image Files from Your Account Engagement Business Unit to a CMS Workspace (can be outdated or unavailable

Access alerts and feature recommendation banners in a dedicated messaging section within the Account Engagement Optimizer.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: About Account Engagement Optimizer (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Account Engagement API: New and Changed Items

Access more of your data with new updates for version 5 of Account Engagement API.
API Changes
Export Relationships
Exporting and pulling related data based on defined relationships is now supported.
Landing Pages
You can now create landing pages using the API.
460
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Marketing Cloud Engagement
API V5 for Flow

Bulk Asset Copy flows now support forms.
SEE ALSO:
Developer Documentation: Version 5 of the Marketing Cloud Account Engagement API (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Engage for Gmail Chrome Extension Is Being Retired

Because Google is disabling its Manifest V2 Chrome extensions, the Engage for Gmail extension, which is built on Manifest V2, is projected
to retire in June 2024. We recommend working with your Account Engagement users to create a transition plan. You can continue to
send emails directly through Salesforce using the Account Engagement Sales Email & Alerts feature.
SEE ALSO:
Knowledge Article: Marketing Cloud Account Engagement Engage for Gmail Chrome Extension Retirement

The Summer ’24 Marketing Cloud Engagement release occurs June 7, 2024 through June 28, 2024. Some features are made available
to your instance within a week of the release.
Get an exclusive, in-depth look at our new features by tuning into the Summer ’24 Marketing Cloud Engagement Release New Feature
Overview. Join this webinar on June 27, 2024 at 2 PM EDT.
IN THIS SECTION:
Welcome customers and obtain important subscriber information with Package Manager retail onboarding and interactive email
Industry Solutions. In Automation Studio, visualize automation history with a new dashboard, and do more with the updated Import
File activity. Optimize your scheduled automations with recommended start times. Also, Social Studio is being retired.
Cross-Cloud
Prevent sending Distributed Marketing emails that have empty text blocks.
Data Management
Data extension field limits in Contact Builder are now 255 characters.
Developers
Compress journey history downloads for smaller file sizes and faster retrieval. Manage data extensions using REST API. Release multiple
contacts from Wait Until API Event steps in journeys. Use AMPscript to encode JWTs with RSA signatures.
Journeys
Specify Inbox message send times in Journey Builder. Improve journey performance with new recommendations, and add a high
priority to journeys.
461
Messaging
In MobileConnect, you can now use DLT templates and shortened SMS links with custom domains. For MobilePush, this release
introduces more ENS events, improved guidance for SDK implementation, a self-diagnostic tool for troubleshooting app configurations,
and the option to bring MobilePush into your Flutter apps. Additional updates to MobilePush ensure that your iOS SDKs and push
notification sends to Android devices stay compliant with new privacy regulations and messaging requirements.
Analyze additional campaign data with Performance Max in Bing Ads, integrate Marketing Cloud Intelligence with Google Search
Ads 360, get more data with additional fields in Google Display & Video 360, and understand customer behavior with LinkedIn.
Proactively manage more org-wide total and dataset-specific Marketing Cloud Personalization consumption metrics.
Marketing Cloud Engagement release notes from 2023 and earlier are available for PDF download. Refer to help documentation for
the most accurate and current information about Engagement.
SEE ALSO:
Marketing Cloud Engagement Spring ’24 Release Notes

Welcome customers and obtain important subscriber information with Package Manager retail onboarding and interactive email Industry
Solutions. In Automation Studio, visualize automation history with a new dashboard, and do more with the updated Import File activity.
Optimize your scheduled automations with recommended start times. Also, Social Studio is being retired.
IN THIS SECTION:
Quickly Deploy a Retail Onboarding Journey with Industry Solutions
Increase efficiency and engage customers by using Package Manager Industry Solutions retail onboarding campaign templates with
industry-specific journeys, content, automations, and landing pages.
Get More Subscriber Information with Package Manager Interactive Email Industry Solutions
Use Package Manager Industry Solutions campaign templates to work faster with industry-specific journeys, content, automations,
and landing pages. Get important subscriber information and quickly deploy interactive email forms with all the required assets with
these five new interactive email solutions—case form, empty form, lead form, progressive profile form, and review form. Subscribers
can submit forms without leaving their inbox and you can obtain important subscriber information.
View your automations over time and improve overall automation health using the new automation history dashboard. Get information
about automation status, low success rates, and high skip or error counts. Access the report on the new History tab in Automation
Studio. This feature is available only in English.
Use the improved Data Copy or Import activity—previously called the Import File activity—to copy large datasets by using a data
extension as the source. The updated copy activity eliminates the need to create SQL queries for copying data. Existing Import File
activities are now labeled Data Copy or Import, but their behavior is unaffected.
Improve security by granting your SFTP users different levels of access. At the user level, assign access to view, edit, download from,
and upload to top-level SFTP folders. You can also apply an additional layer of access by customizing each user’s home directory.
462
Plan Automations Based on Start-Time Scheduling Recommendations

Automation Studio experiences significant traffic during the beginning of the hour (:00) and middle (:30). Use start-time scheduling
recommendations to help you plan automation start times and distribute tasks to more efficient periods. Existing automation
schedules are unaffected, and you can continue to specify the exact start time.
Schedule automations that repeat as often as every 15 minutes. Previously, the minimum interval for a scheduled automation was
1 hour.
Get More Insights About Your Automation Health and History
The health and history report provides more details about your automations. You can now see the source, creation date, frequency,
and the most recent run date and time.
Secure Event Notification Service Connections with OAuth 2.0 with Assertion Authentication
Use OAuth 2.0 with assertion to authenticate using a JSON Web Token (JWT) to securely connect to Event Notification Service before
pushing event notifications to webhooks. Assertion authentication enhances the existing authentication options. Use the ENS
Authentication API to implement OAuth 2.0 with assertion.
Monitor Event Notification Service Callbacks Using Alert Manager
Alert Manager now notifies you whenever a server-side issue with an ENS callback occurs, giving you instant and transparent insight
into ENS health. The Alert Manager integration enables you to fall back to alternative reporting methods during ENS outages.
Social Studio is being retired on November 18, 2024. When your existing contract ends or on November 18, 2024, whichever comes
first, you can no longer access Social Studio. Your customer data will be deleted 90 days later in compliance with the Salesforce
Marketing Cloud Security, Privacy, and Architecture (SPARC) documentation. To switch to another approved Salesforce product,
contact your account executive.
Quickly Deploy a Retail Onboarding Journey with Industry Solutions

Increase efficiency and engage customers by using Package Manager Industry Solutions retail onboarding campaign templates with
industry-specific journeys, content, automations, and landing pages.
Where: This change applies to all Marketing Cloud Engagement editions.
When: This feature is available on or after July 1, 2024.
Get More Subscriber Information with Package Manager Interactive Email Industry Solutions
Use Package Manager Industry Solutions campaign templates to work faster with industry-specific journeys, content, automations, and
landing pages. Get important subscriber information and quickly deploy interactive email forms with all the required assets with these
five new interactive email solutions—case form, empty form, lead form, progressive profile form, and review form. Subscribers can
submit forms without leaving their inbox and you can obtain important subscriber information.
When: This feature is available on or after July 1, 2024.

View your automations over time and improve overall automation health using the new automation history dashboard. Get information
about automation status, low success rates, and high skip or error counts. Access the report on the new History tab in Automation Studio.
This feature is available only in English.
463
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Automation History and Health (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Use the improved Data Copy or Import activity—previously called the Import File activity—to copy large datasets by using a data
extension as the source. The updated copy activity eliminates the need to create SQL queries for copying data. Existing Import File
activities are now labeled Data Copy or Import, but their behavior is unaffected.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Data Copy or Import Activity (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Improve security by granting your SFTP users different levels of access. At the user level, assign access to view, edit, download from, and
upload to top-level SFTP folders. You can also apply an additional layer of access by customizing each user’s home directory.
When: This feature is available on a rolling basis starting in May 2024.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Manage Marketing Cloud Engagement SFTP Accounts (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Plan Automations Based on Start-Time Scheduling Recommendations

Automation Studio experiences significant traffic during the beginning of the hour (:00) and middle (:30). Use start-time scheduling
recommendations to help you plan automation start times and distribute tasks to more efficient periods. Existing automation schedules
are unaffected, and you can continue to specify the exact start time.
464
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Configure a Scheduled Automation (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Schedule automations that repeat as often as every 15 minutes. Previously, the minimum interval for a scheduled automation was 1
hour.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Configure a Scheduled Automation (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Get More Insights About Your Automation Health and History

The health and history report provides more details about your automations. You can now see the source, creation date, frequency, and
the most recent run date and time.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Automation History and Health (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
465
Secure Event Notification Service Connections with OAuth 2.0 with Assertion Authentication
Use OAuth 2.0 with assertion to authenticate using a JSON Web Token (JWT) to securely connect to Event Notification Service before
pushing event notifications to webhooks. Assertion authentication enhances the existing authentication options. Use the ENS
Authentication API to implement OAuth 2.0 with assertion.
Who: To access Event Notification Service settings, you need the Event Notification Service permissions.
Monitor Event Notification Service Callbacks Using Alert Manager

Alert Manager now notifies you whenever a server-side issue with an ENS callback occurs, giving you instant and transparent insight
into ENS health. The Alert Manager integration enables you to fall back to alternative reporting methods during ENS outages.
Who: Users with Administrator and Event Notification Service permissions can set up ENS callback status alerts in Alert Manager.

Social Studio is being retired on November 18, 2024. When your existing contract ends or on November 18, 2024, whichever comes first,
you can no longer access Social Studio. Your customer data will be deleted 90 days later in compliance with the Salesforce Marketing
Cloud Security, Privacy, and Architecture (SPARC) documentation. To switch to another approved Salesforce product, contact your
account executive.
Where: This change applies to the Social Studio family of products: Social Studio, Command Center, Social Studio Mobile App, Social
Studio Automate, and Social Customer Service (including the free Starter Pack offering).
How: We recommend that you retrieve your data 90 days before November 18, 2024 or the end of your contract, whichever is first. To
retrieve your Social Studio data, see Social Studio Data Extracts.
SEE ALSO:
Knowledge Article: Marketing Cloud Social Studio Retirement (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
External Link: Salesforce Marketing Cloud Security, Privacy, and Architecture (SPARC) (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Cross-Cloud
Prevent sending Distributed Marketing emails that have empty text blocks.
IN THIS SECTION:
Prevent Email Sends with Empty Fields in Distributed Marketing
Distributed Marketing admins can enable a setting that blocks email sends with empty text blocks. This setting doesn't apply to
default text blocks.
Prevent Email Sends with Empty Fields in Distributed Marketing

Distributed Marketing admins can enable a setting that blocks email sends with empty text blocks. This setting doesn't apply to default
text blocks.
466
Data Management
Data extension field limits in Contact Builder are now 255 characters.
IN THIS SECTION:
Maximum Length of a Data Extension Field Has Changed
To improve performance when using sendable data extensions in new and existing sends and journeys, the length of the field chosen
in the send relationship is now limited to 255 characters in Contact Builder. Previously, the limit was 254, but based on your feedback,
the limit was increased to 255. This limit applies to new data extensions and isn't enforced in integrations using API.
Maximum Length of a Data Extension Field Has Changed

To improve performance when using sendable data extensions in new and existing sends and journeys, the length of the field chosen
in the send relationship is now limited to 255 characters in Contact Builder. Previously, the limit was 254, but based on your feedback,
the limit was increased to 255. This limit applies to new data extensions and isn't enforced in integrations using API.
Developers
Compress journey history downloads for smaller file sizes and faster retrieval. Manage data extensions using REST API. Release multiple
contacts from Wait Until API Event steps in journeys. Use AMPscript to encode JWTs with RSA signatures.
IN THIS SECTION:
AMPscript RetrieveSalesforceObjects() Function Rowset Limit
The AMPscript RetrieveSalesforceObjects() function returns data from Salesforce objects based on criteria that you
specify. To maximize performance, the rowset that this function generates is now limited to 1,000 rows. Previously, there was no
limit to the size of the rowset.
REST API operations related to downloading journey history now support file compression. Because downloads are limited to 1 GB,
a compressed 1-GB journey history data file can contain more data than an uncompressed file of the same size.
Query, create, and modify data extensions by using the Custom Objects endpoints in REST API.
Release Multiple Contacts from Journey Waits Simultaneously
Trigger up to 100 contacts to exit a journey wait step with a single API request. For example, you can send a shipping confirmation
when a truckload of packages leaves a warehouse. This update to journey management in REST API delivers consistent performance
at a higher scale compared to the existing API wait activity for Journey Builder. Previously, you made individual API requests for each
contact.
Use AMPscript to Encode JWTs with RSA Signatures
The AMPscript GetJWTByKeyName() function can now encode JWT tokens with RSA signatures that use SHA-256, SHA-384,
and SHA-512 hashing algorithms. Previously, the GetJWTByKeyName() function only supported the encoding of JWTs by using
HMAC signatures.
467
AMPscript RetrieveSalesforceObjects() Function Rowset Limit

The AMPscript RetrieveSalesforceObjects() function returns data from Salesforce objects based on criteria that you specify.
To maximize performance, the rowset that this function generates is now limited to 1,000 rows. Previously, there was no limit to the size
of the rowset.
SEE ALSO:
RetrieveSalesforceObjects() (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

REST API operations related to downloading journey history now support file compression. Because downloads are limited to 1 GB, a
compressed 1-GB journey history data file can contain more data than an uncompressed file of the same size.
Where: This change applies to Marketing Cloud Engagement in Corporate and Enterprise editions and to customers with the Journey
Builder add-on.
How: When you issue a GET request to the /interaction/v1/interactions/journeyhistory/estimate endpoint,
the output now includes a compressedSize attribute, which shows the file size of the requested data after applying deflate
compression. To retrieve data, issue a POST request to the /interaction/v1/interactions/journeyhistory/download
endpoint. Include the accept-encoding header in your request with a value of gzip or deflate. The API returns the requested
data by using the compression method that you specified.
SEE ALSO:
Get Journey History Download Estimate (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Download Journey History (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Query, create, and modify data extensions by using the Custom Objects endpoints in REST API.
How: Use the /data/v1/customobjects endpoints to manage data extensions and add data to them.
SEE ALSO:
Custom Object API (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Release Multiple Contacts from Journey Waits Simultaneously

Trigger up to 100 contacts to exit a journey wait step with a single API request. For example, you can send a shipping confirmation when
a truckload of packages leaves a warehouse. This update to journey management in REST API delivers consistent performance at a higher
scale compared to the existing API wait activity for Journey Builder. Previously, you made individual API requests for each contact.
Builder add-on.
SEE ALSO:
Insert Contacts into a Journey Asynchronously (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
468
Use AMPscript to Encode JWTs with RSA Signatures

The AMPscript GetJWTByKeyName() function can now encode JWT tokens with RSA signatures that use SHA-256, SHA-384, and
SHA-512 hashing algorithms. Previously, the GetJWTByKeyName() function only supported the encoding of JWTs by using HMAC
signatures.
How: Use Key Management in Marketing Cloud Engagement setup to store an .asc file that contains your RSA private key. After you
store the key, use the GetJWTByKeyName() function to encode JWTs.
SEE ALSO:
GetJWTByKeyName() (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Journeys
Specify Inbox message send times in Journey Builder. Improve journey performance with new recommendations, and add a high priority
to journeys.
IN THIS SECTION:
System priority is a relative priority between journeys that use shared system resources. In addition to the existing Low and Standard
system priorities, Marketing Cloud Engagement admins can now select High priority.
Get Useful Journey Information on the Canvas
Quickly find a journey’s total count of activities and get the DefinitionID of the version on the journey canvas.
Send a Larger Volume of Emails with High-Throughput Sending
To increase sending throughput by two times or more, select High-Throughput Sending for Journey Builder emails in the Journey
Settings panel.
Specify Inbox Message Send Dates in Journey Builder
When defining an Inbox message for sends through Journey Builder, you can now set the start and end dates.
Improve Journey Performance with Recommendations
During journey validation, Journey Builder proactively surfaces configuration recommendations that can elevate performance. Get
recommendations regarding stale content, long timeouts for custom activities, long waits at the end of a journey, and transactional
journeys.

System priority is a relative priority between journeys that use shared system resources. In addition to the existing Low and Standard
system priorities, Marketing Cloud Engagement admins can now select High priority.
Builder add-on.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Journey Settings (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
469
Get Useful Journey Information on the Canvas

Quickly find a journey’s total count of activities and get the DefinitionID of the version on the journey canvas.
Builder add-on.
Why: This feature helps marketers and developers more easily troubleshoot journey performance issues.
Send a Larger Volume of Emails with High-Throughput Sending

To increase sending throughput by two times or more, select High-Throughput Sending for Journey Builder emails in the Journey Settings
panel.
Builder add-on.
When: This feature rolled out in March 2024.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Journey Builder High-Throughput Sending Considerations (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Specify Inbox Message Send Dates in Journey Builder

When defining an Inbox message for sends through Journey Builder, you can now set the start and end dates.
Builder add-on.
Improve Journey Performance with Recommendations

During journey validation, Journey Builder proactively surfaces configuration recommendations that can elevate performance. Get
recommendations regarding stale content, long timeouts for custom activities, long waits at the end of a journey, and transactional
journeys.
Builder add-on.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Journey Builder Configuration Recommendations (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Messaging
In MobileConnect, you can now use DLT templates and shortened SMS links with custom domains. For MobilePush, this release introduces
more ENS events, improved guidance for SDK implementation, a self-diagnostic tool for troubleshooting app configurations, and the
option to bring MobilePush into your Flutter apps. Additional updates to MobilePush ensure that your iOS SDKs and push notification
sends to Android devices stay compliant with new privacy regulations and messaging requirements.
IN THIS SECTION:
Shorten SMS Links in MobileConnect and Journey Builder
Reduce SMS size and minimize cost by shortening SMS links with the Marketing Cloud Engagement link shortener. Measure
subscriber-level engagement and campaign effectiveness through link tracking.
470
Secure a Custom Domain for SMS Link Shortening in MobileConnect

Enhance subscribers’ user experience and brand recognition by using a custom domain in your shortened links in Mobile Connect.
To use a custom domain, shorten the links with the Marketing Cloud Engagement shortener.
Simplify SMS Messaging by Using DLT Templates in MobileConnect
Use Digital Ledger Technology (DLT) templates to ensure that you comply with the Telecoms Regulatory Authority of India (TRAI)
regulations. Simplify your campaign process and reduce spam messages by using the templates for your messages in MobileConnect
and Journey Builder.
Integrate MobilePush functionality, including run-time toggles and custom mobile app events, with the new MobilePush Flutter
plug-in. Send personalized mobile app messages that enhance user engagement and drive business results.
Test and Troubleshoot Your App Configuration Using the MobilePush Diagnostic Tool
Use the new, self-guided MobilePush diagnostic tool to check your app setup and troubleshoot issues related to contact and device
registration and contact opt-in statuses.
MobilePush Developer Documentation Has Been Updated
The revamped MobilePush developer documentation provides detailed examples and relevant resources to guide you in your SDK
implementation journey.
Enhance Message Engagement Tracking with More MobilePush Events
Receive near real-time updates on message delivery and engagement by subscribing to eight new MobilePush events introduced
in Event Notification Service (ENS). Serve reporting and retargeting uses cases by moving data off the Marketing Cloud Engagement
platform at scale.
Stay Compliant with Apple Privacy Regulations with the New Privacy Manifest
With iOS 17, Apple requires third-party SDKs to provide a privacy manifest file to better understand how third-party SDKs use data,
secure software dependencies, and provide privacy protection for end users. The privacy manifest file included with MobilePush iOS
SDK version 8.1.2 and SFMC SDK for iOS version 1.1.2 complies with Apple’s latest privacy update for App Store submissions. It
includes pre-declared data and API types used by these SDKs and the usage reasons.
Adopt the New Authentication Pattern for Android Applications in MobilePush
The authentication pattern for Android apps integrated with Marketing Cloud Engagement is changing to stay compliant with
requirements for Google Firebase Cloud Messaging. To send push notifications to Android devices after this date, admins can upload
the Service Account JSON file for each active Android app before June 1, 2024.
Shorten SMS Links in MobileConnect and Journey Builder

Reduce SMS size and minimize cost by shortening SMS links with the Marketing Cloud Engagement link shortener. Measure subscriber-level
engagement and campaign effectiveness through link tracking.
Where: This feature is available to orgs on Hyperforce.
SEE ALSO:
Shorten URLs in an SMS Message (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Link Tracking (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Secure a Custom Domain for SMS Link Shortening in MobileConnect

Enhance subscribers’ user experience and brand recognition by using a custom domain in your shortened links in Mobile Connect. To
use a custom domain, shorten the links with the Marketing Cloud Engagement shortener.
Where: This change applies to orgs using Hyperforce.
471
How: Contact your Account Executive or Salesforce Customer Support to enable this feature.
Simplify SMS Messaging by Using DLT Templates in MobileConnect

Use Digital Ledger Technology (DLT) templates to ensure that you comply with the Telecoms Regulatory Authority of India (TRAI)
regulations. Simplify your campaign process and reduce spam messages by using the templates for your messages in MobileConnect
and Journey Builder.
Where: This feature is available only for orgs using Hyperforce in India.
SEE ALSO:
DLT Template Settings for SMS Messages in India (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Upload a DLT Template (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Use a DLT Template in an SMS Message (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Integrate MobilePush functionality, including run-time toggles and custom mobile app events, with the new MobilePush Flutter plug-in.
Send personalized mobile app messages that enhance user engagement and drive business results.
When: The plugin is available for download on April 1, 2024.
How: Download and integrate the MobilePush Flutter plug-in using Pub.
Test and Troubleshoot Your App Configuration Using the MobilePush Diagnostic Tool
Use the new, self-guided MobilePush diagnostic tool to check your app setup and troubleshoot issues related to contact and device
registration and contact opt-in statuses.
Who: To use the MobilePush diagnostic tool, you need the Administer MobilePush permission.
How: To access the diagnostic tool in MobilePush, go to the Administration tab and click Settings for the app that you want to test.
MobilePush Developer Documentation Has Been Updated

The revamped MobilePush developer documentation provides detailed examples and relevant resources to guide you in your SDK
implementation journey.
Where: This change applies to the MobilePush SDK developer guides.
When: The developer documentation site for MobilePush is available in May 2024.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Developers: MobilePush
472
Enhance Message Engagement Tracking with More MobilePush Events

Receive near real-time updates on message delivery and engagement by subscribing to eight new MobilePush events introduced in
Event Notification Service (ENS). Serve reporting and retargeting uses cases by moving data off the Marketing Cloud Engagement platform
at scale.
Who: Users with Event Notification Service permissions can configure subscriptions to consume ENS events.
How: You can now add these MobilePush events.
• Push Sent
• Push Not Sent
• Push Bounced
• Push Open
• In-App Delivered
• In-App Displayed
• In-App Dismissed
• Inbox Open
Stay Compliant with Apple Privacy Regulations with the New Privacy Manifest
With iOS 17, Apple requires third-party SDKs to provide a privacy manifest file to better understand how third-party SDKs use data, secure
software dependencies, and provide privacy protection for end users. The privacy manifest file included with MobilePush iOS SDK version
8.1.2 and SFMC SDK for iOS version 1.1.2 complies with Apple’s latest privacy update for App Store submissions. It includes pre-declared
data and API types used by these SDKs and the usage reasons.
When: The privacy manifest mandate goes into effect on May 1, 2024.
How: Upgrade to MobilePush SDK for iOS version 8.1.2 and SFMC SDK for iOS version 1.1.2 to start using privacy manifests.
Adopt the New Authentication Pattern for Android Applications in MobilePush

The authentication pattern for Android apps integrated with Marketing Cloud Engagement is changing to stay compliant with requirements
for Google Firebase Cloud Messaging. To send push notifications to Android devices after this date, admins can upload the Service
Account JSON file for each active Android app before June 1, 2024.
When: Complete all uploads by June 1, 2024.
How: To upload Service Account JSON files, go to the Administration tab in MobilePush.

Analyze additional campaign data with Performance Max in Bing Ads, integrate Marketing Cloud Intelligence with Google Search Ads
360, get more data with additional fields in Google Display & Video 360, and understand customer behavior with LinkedIn.
473
IN THIS SECTION:
Get Customer Behavior Information with the LinkedIn Company Page Connector
Pull valuable information about user-generated posts when connecting to the LinkedIn API to learn more about your customers’
behavior, interests, and needs.
Leverage More Data from Google Display & Video 360
Analyze customer behavior data with additional fields, including data fees, full-screen selections, video mutes and unmutes, pauses,
and skips.
Easily Integrate Marketing Cloud Intelligence with Google Search Ads 360
Take advantage of a more seamless integration, requiring less implementation, while using the newly added custom columns.
Drive Campaign Performance with Performance Max Data in Bing Ads
Pull in Performance Max campaign data with the Bing Ads API connector and analyze all your campaign data.
Get Customer Behavior Information with the LinkedIn Company Page Connector
Pull valuable information about user-generated posts when connecting to the LinkedIn API to learn more about your customers’ behavior,
interests, and needs.
Where: This change applies to Marketing Cloud Intelligence.
How: From the Connect & Mix tab, create a data stream, and search for the LinkedIn Company Page tile. Under Extended Properties,
select Get UGC Posts Data.
Leverage More Data from Google Display & Video 360

Analyze customer behavior data with additional fields, including data fees, full-screen selections, video mutes and unmutes, pauses, and
skips.
How: From the Connect & Mix tab, create a data stream, and search for the Google Display & Video 360 tile. Click Mapping and select
the data fields you want to map.
Easily Integrate Marketing Cloud Intelligence with Google Search Ads 360
Take advantage of a more seamless integration, requiring less implementation, while using the newly added custom columns.
How: From the Connect & Mix tab, create a data stream, and search for the Google Search Ads 360 connector tile. Under Extended
Properties, enter the custom columns in the Saved Columns textbox.
Drive Campaign Performance with Performance Max Data in Bing Ads

Pull in Performance Max campaign data with the Bing Ads API connector and analyze all your campaign data.
How: From the Connect & Mix tab, create a data stream, and search for the Bing Ads API connector tile. Under Extended Properties,
select Get Performance Max Campaign Data.

Proactively manage more org-wide total and dataset-specific Marketing Cloud Personalization consumption metrics.
474
IN THIS SECTION:
Track More Marketing Cloud Personalization Product Metrics
Use the Consumption report to proactively manage org-wide total and dataset-specific usage of both monthly unique visitors and
named individual profile limits.
Salesforce has switched support from using the Google legacy Firebase Cloud Messaging (FCM) API to the new FCM HTTP V1 API.
To continue sending push notifications to mobile devices using FCM, you must generate and upload a new certificate for FCM.
Track More Marketing Cloud Personalization Product Metrics

Use the Consumption report to proactively manage org-wide total and dataset-specific usage of both monthly unique visitors and
named individual profile limits.
Where: This change applies to all Marketing Cloud Personalization editions.
How: From the Marketing Cloud Personalization main navigation menu, hover over Reports and select Usage > Personalization
Consumption Report.
Salesforce has switched support from using the Google legacy Firebase Cloud Messaging (FCM) API to the new FCM HTTP V1 API. To
continue sending push notifications to mobile devices using FCM, you must generate and upload a new certificate for FCM.
Where: This change applies to all Marketing Cloud Personalization editions.
How: Access your FCM account and create a service account configured with limited role access. Using this account, generate and
upload a new certificate.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Complete Mobile Push Setup (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Developers: Marketing Cloud Personalization iOS SDK Push Notifications
Salesforce Developers: Marketing Cloud Personalization Android SDK Push Notifications

Marketing Cloud Engagement release notes from 2023 and earlier are available for PDF download. Refer to help documentation for the
most accurate and current information about Engagement.
Included Releases PDF Link
• Spring ’23 2023 Marketing Cloud Engagement Release Notes
• Summer ’23
• Winter ’24
• Spring ’22 2022 Marketing Cloud Engagement Release Notes
• Summer ’22
• Winter ’23
475
Included Releases PDF Link
• Spring ’22 2022 Marketing Cloud Intelligence Release Notes
• Summer ’22
• Fall ’22
• Winter ’23
• Fall ’22 2022 Marketing Cloud Intelligence Data Pipelines Release Notes
• Winter ’23
• January 2021 2021 Marketing Cloud Engagement Release Notes
• April 2021
• June 2021
• August 2021
• October 2021
• April 2020
• June 2020
• August 2020
• October 2020
• April 2019
• June 2019
• August 2019
• October 2019
• April 2018
• June 2018
• August 2018
• October 2018
• March 2017
• June 2017
• August 2017
• October 2017
476
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Marketing Cloud Growth

Marketing Cloud Growth offers a number of enhancements in Summer ’24, including the introduction of campaign members to build
lists, external tracking options, additional Flow Builder elements, and productivity enhancements to content workspaces.
IN THIS SECTION:
Work More Efficiently with New Access Points on Campaigns
Curate a customer experience by adding a templated flow to your campaign from the campaign record. Plus, preview and test your
campaign content without going into Flow Builder and review campaign assets with related lists for flows.
Get More Done with Updated Flow Functionality
New and updated elements in Flow Builder help you automate common marketing tasks. You can create consent records from form
submission, create rules that remove users from flows when they meet conditions that you specify, and maintain data hygiene with
duplication checks.
Build a Static List Quickly with Campaign Members
Relate leads and contacts to a campaign to plan your marketing effort, report on engagement, and analyze the success of a campaign.
Add leads and contacts as campaign members individually or in bulk, and then send messages to them from the campaign record.
When you send to campaign members, a segment is created for you based on campaign membership.
Track and Use Data to Inform Your Strategy
Scoring and activity data can help you make campaign decisions and optimize your marketing efforts. Assess people on engagement
and fit with customizable scoring rules to help you identify your ideal customer. Plus, track web activity on sites outside of Marketing
Cloud Growth when you set up external activity tracking.
Streamline Tasks with Content Creation Enhancements
Brand creation for your emails and landing pages, including mobile-specific styles for landing pages, is now generally available. Plus,
improve productivity when you clone content within your workspace or share content from one workspace to another. New text
formatting options are also available to apply to your brand styles and to your content components.
Make Your Landing Pages More Accessible and Secure
Improve the security of landing pages that have forms by adding Google reCAPTCHA, and make them easier to find with search
engine optimization (SEO) properties. Before publishing, preview a landing page as a guest or authenticated user. Then when you’re
ready to publish, you can review the associated form and flow details and automatically activate the URL alias.
You can now save your work while you’re requesting a new 10-digit long code, brand, or campaign. Enable Flow for your SMS sends
in Unified Messaging.
Marketing Cloud Growth offers other useful features that are automatically available with the Summer ’24 release.
Work More Efficiently with New Access Points on Campaigns

Curate a customer experience by adding a templated flow to your campaign from the campaign record. Plus, preview and test your
campaign content without going into Flow Builder and review campaign assets with related lists for flows.
Where: These changes apply to Salesforce Enterprise and Unlimited editions with Marketing Cloud Growth edition.
How: To preview and test content from the campaign record, use the Preview and Test option in the content table.
477
To add flows to a campaign (1) or access related lists (2), use the options in the sidebar on the campaign record home. You can also
customize which related lists appear on campaign records.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Manage Marketing Efforts with Campaigns (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Customize Related Lists (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

New and updated elements in Flow Builder help you automate common marketing tasks. You can create consent records from form
submission, create rules that remove users from flows when they meet conditions that you specify, and maintain data hygiene with
duplication checks.
Collect Consent with Signup Forms

Form-triggered flows have a new element. When you create a signup form campaign to collect customer data, you can now add a
Create Consent Status Record element to the flow. After someone submits a form, a consent record is automatically created. This element
is included by default in the signup form campaign flow.
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Signup Form Campaign Flows (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Remove Users from Flows with Exit Rules

An exit rule ends a flow for people who meet one or more rule conditions. Since a person’s circumstances can change over time, exit
rules can be especially useful for long-running flows with Wait elements. You can create up to 10 rules in a segment-triggered flow.
Select conditions using the flow’s global attributes or choose data graph attributes, related attributes, or calculated insights from Data
Cloud.
478
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Create a Rule to Remove a User from a Flow (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Check for Duplicates Before Creating Records

For better data hygiene, check for records that match a set of criteria in the Create Records element. Also, specify what happens when
the flow finds matching records.
SEE ALSO | Release Notes: Check for Duplicates Before Creating Records in a Flow on page 615
Access Data Graph Attributes in Your Campaign Flows

A data graph is a collection of fields from Data Cloud data model objects that you can group for easy access and use. You can now create
conditions in exit rules and Decision elements using Data Cloud data graph attributes.
SEE ALSO:
Flow Marketing Cloud Updates
Build a Static List Quickly with Campaign Members

Relate leads and contacts to a campaign to plan your marketing effort, report on engagement, and analyze the success of a campaign.
Add leads and contacts as campaign members individually or in bulk, and then send messages to them from the campaign record.
When you send to campaign members, a segment is created for you based on campaign membership.
How: From the lead or contact list view, select one or more records, and then use the Add to Campaign button to add them to a new
or existing campaign. To add members from a campaign record, click Campaign Members (1), and then add either leads or contacts
(2).
To send to campaign members, click the action menu in the Start Trigger section and select Send to Campaign Members.
479
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Segment-Triggered Campaign Flows (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Campaign Members in Marketing Cloud Growth (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Track and Use Data to Inform Your Strategy

Scoring and activity data can help you make campaign decisions and optimize your marketing efforts. Assess people on engagement
and fit with customizable scoring rules to help you identify your ideal customer. Plus, track web activity on sites outside of Marketing
Cloud Growth when you set up external activity tracking.
Track Engagement on External Sites

Marketing Cloud Growth can now track external web activity data, including form submissions and page views. To get started, configure
external tracking in Marketing Cloud Growth Setup, and then add the generated code snippet to your website.
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Track Activity on External Sites (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Customize Engagement and Fit Scoring Rules

Decide which criteria indicate that someone is ready to move on to the next phase of your sales funnel. Customize and build on the
default scoring rules to adjust engagement and fit scores based on criteria you specify.
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Score People Based on Engagement and Fit (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Page Customization in Marketing Cloud Growth (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Streamline Tasks with Content Creation Enhancements

Brand creation for your emails and landing pages, including mobile-specific styles for landing pages, is now generally available. Plus,
improve productivity when you clone content within your workspace or share content from one workspace to another. New text
formatting options are also available to apply to your brand styles and to your content components.
Brand Your Content (Generally Available)

Create brand styles that content authors can easily apply to emails and landing pages. New fields give you control over spacing, borders,
and text formatting, and you can specify custom sizes in pixels or rem values. In the preview panel, see your brand style updates in real
time. You can create separate brand styles for the desktop and mobile versions of your landing pages. Mobile-specific brand values don’t
apply to emails. If you save your brand in a workspace that’s shared with another workspace, you can apply the brand to an email or
landing page in the shared workspace.
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Brand Your Content in Marketing Cloud Growth (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
480
Share Content Across Marketing Workspaces

Reuse content between workspaces without duplicating records. Work with content shared from a source workspace to a target workspace
in the new Shared with Workspaces folder. After a content admin or manager configures the Workspace Settings to allow sharing,
marketers can find that content in the Shared with Workspaces folder.
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Types of Content in Marketing Cloud Growth
Save Time with Content Cloning

Instead of creating a content record from scratch, make a copy of any content type and its variants. Organize content into folders, and
edit cloned content for quick reuse.
SEE ALSO | Release Notes: Save Time with Content Record Cloning in Your Enhanced CMS Workspace on page 597
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Create Content in Marketing Cloud Growth (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Make Your Landing Pages More Accessible and Secure

Improve the security of landing pages that have forms by adding Google reCAPTCHA, and make them easier to find with search engine
optimization (SEO) properties. Before publishing, preview a landing page as a guest or authenticated user. Then when you’re ready to
publish, you can review the associated form and flow details and automatically activate the URL alias.
Boost Your Landing Page in Search Engine Results

To surface your landing page to search engine results, add it to a sitemap. For more targeted results, add SEO properties, such as a page
description and the <link>, <meta>, and <script> head tags, to your landing page. The public page title SEO property, which
appears in search results and in a user’s browser tab when they visit your site, is now a required field. To use SEO properties, a content
admin republishes the Marketing Landing Page site in Experience Builder.
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Working with Landing Pages in Marketing Cloud Growth
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: SEO Head Tags in Marketing Cloud Growth
481
Safeguard Landing Pages with Forms Using reCAPTCHA

Protect forms on your marketing landing pages from bots, fraudulent activities, spam, and abuse with Google reCAPTCHA. The Google
reCAPTCHA v2 integration is available only for marketing landing pages with forms.
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Protect Forms with reCAPTCHA
Preview Landing Pages as a Guest or Authenticated User

To see how your landing page looks for a broad audience, preview it as a guest user. To see your landing page as a customer who’s
logged in, preview it as an authenticated user. Contributors to your Marketing workspace can preview a landing page even if they aren’t
contributors to the Marketing Landing Pages site.
SEE ALSO | Release Notes: Preview CMS Content as a Guest or Authenticated User on page 597
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Working with Landing Pages in Marketing Cloud Growth (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
See Flow Details When You Publish a Landing Page

When you publish a landing page that contains a form, you can now review the details of the flow associated with the form. See these
details in a new step in the publishing process.
Activate the URL Alias When You Publish a Landing Page

After a landing page successfully publishes, its inactive or draft URL alias automatically activates, and your public URL is live. You no
longer need to visit the URL tab of the landing page content details page to complete this step.
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Create a Landing Page in Marketing Cloud Growth (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

You can now save your work while you’re requesting a new 10-digit long code, brand, or campaign. Enable Flow for your SMS sends in
Unified Messaging.
Where: These changes apply to Salesforce Enterprise and Unlimited editions with Marketing Cloud Growth Edition.
Save Your SMS Drafts

To help you manage the 30-minute time frame to complete a 10-digit long code, brand, or campaign request for SMS messaging, save
a draft and submit your request at another time. Your drafts are also auto-saved at 1-minute intervals so that you don’t lose any of your
work.
Enable SMS Usage in Flow for Unified Messaging

In Unified Messaging Setup, specify that a specific SMS code can send and receive SMS messages using Flow. This capability enables
Flow to perform the sending tasks necessary to maintain a conversation with your customers.

Marketing Cloud Growth offers other useful features that are automatically available with the Summer ’24 release.
482
Setup Experience Was Reorganized

The new setup experience guides you through the required and recommended tasks to begin using Marketing Cloud Growth. Find the
updates on the Assistant Home page in Salesforce Setup.
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Getting Started with Marketing Cloud Growth Setup (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Data Kits and Analytics Packages Were Updated

To support the latest features, we updated data kits and analytics packages to include new data streams and other enhancements. First,
reinstall the Marketing Setup Objects data kit and redeploy it in Data Cloud. Then install the Flow Reports analytics package.
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Install and Deploy Data Streams (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Manually Update Consent on Lead and Contact Records

If you receive an unsubscribe request directly, you can now manually adjust the consent status from a lead or contact record. On the
Consent Status component, use the action menu for a communication subscription to update the consent status. To get this functionality,
an admin must add the Marketing Consent Status component to lead and contact records.
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Review Marketing Consent Data (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Personalize Messages and Experiences with Related Data

Now you have more ways to personalize your marketing efforts. With a data graph, you can set Unified Individual as the primary object,
then add other objects and fields as related attributes. After the data graph is deployed and enabled, the attributes and fields you selected
are available as merge fields and in flow Decision elements.
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Configure a Data Graph to Personalize Messages (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Route Your Incoming Email with Reply Mail Management

Reply mail management helps you route email messages that are sent to your sending domain. Select an email inbox that can receive
incoming emails and decide what to do with those messages. You can configure an automatic response to incoming messages, and
choose whether to delete out-of-office messages and automatic replies.
Personalize Your Email with Custom Domain Links

Select a custom domain that is applied to all URLs that you include in your email content. These custom domains help improve message
deliverability and improve click-through rates.
API Name Field Added to Marketing Workspaces, Form, and Image Content
You can now use API names as a developer-friendly way to identify marketing workspaces, forms, and images. An API name is required
for workspaces and is generated for content unless you enter a custom one. After you save the workspace or content, you can’t change
its API name. The API name for the default Content Workspace for Marketing Cloud is Default_Content_Workspace.
SEE ALSO | Release Notes: Add an API Name to New Enhanced CMS Workspaces and Content (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)
Jump-start Your Campaign Using a Brief

To plan your key message and audience, create a brief. Then associate it with a campaign.
483
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Unified Messaging
Add Segments to a Campaign

When you create a campaign with Einstein, you can choose how to create an associated segment. Let Einstein generate a segment,
select an existing segment, or choose to create it manually.
Unified Messaging
Unified Messaging consolidates customer communication channels, like email, SMS, and WhatsApp, into one unified platform. You can
now bring your existing WhatsApp number into Unified Messaging. Improve the customer support experience in Journey Builder with
new tools.
IN THIS SECTION:
Merge Marketing and Service by Migrating from WhatsApp-First Business Messaging to Unified Messaging
In Unified Messaging, service and marketing interactions occur in one channel. Previously, you couldn’t create unified WhatsApp
channels with a number that was associated with a Marketing Cloud Engagement WhatsApp channel. Now, when you migrate from
a WhatsApp-First or externally provided WhatsApp channel to a unified WhatsApp channel, your messaging history and most channel
settings are preserved. You also get access to Unified Messaging features such as Data Cloud reporting.
Transfer a WhatsApp Conversation from Marketing Cloud Engagement to Service Cloud with Journey Builder
You can transfer a WhatsApp conversation from a Marketing Cloud Engagement interaction to a Service Cloud interaction. Place
the WhatsApp Session Transfer activity after a Wait Until Chat Response or an Inbound Chat activity. The information passed as part
of the transfer includes conversation history, journey data, the recipient’s WhatsApp number, and the cross-cloud WhatsApp phone
number.
View Analytics for the WhatsApp Session Transfer Activity in Journey Builder
Learn how customers interact with your WhatsApp journeys and why they’re transferred to support with the Session Transfer analytics
dashboard. Use this dashboard to view the number of total, successful, and failed transfers from Marketing Cloud Engagement
interactions to Service Cloud support, and learn more about each transfer. This information can help you identify areas where you
can improve your customer experience.
Suppress Promotional WhatsApp Messages During Support Interactions with Journey Builder
For WhatsApp numbers in Unified Messaging, control whether a Marketing Cloud Engagement message is sent to a customer
engaged in an active or open Service Cloud support conversation. This feature prevents customers from receiving promotional or
other low-priority content while they work with support and ensures they receive only relevant messages.
Expand the Data Available for Your WhatsApp Engagement Queries in Unified Messaging
You can now include Correlation ID, Sender Display Name, and Interactive Content Type information in your WhatsApp engagement
queries. Use the information from your queries to better refine and target your communications with subscribers. For example,
segment recipients who received a specific type of interactive content or who received messages as part of a specific send.
Merge Marketing and Service by Migrating from WhatsApp-First Business Messaging

to Unified Messaging
In Unified Messaging, service and marketing interactions occur in one channel. Previously, you couldn’t create unified WhatsApp channels
with a number that was associated with a Marketing Cloud Engagement WhatsApp channel. Now, when you migrate from a WhatsApp-First
or externally provided WhatsApp channel to a unified WhatsApp channel, your messaging history and most channel settings are preserved.
You also get access to Unified Messaging features such as Data Cloud reporting.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with the Marketing Cloud Engagement add-on.
484
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Unified Messaging
How: To migrate a WhatsApp channel, contact your Salesforce account executive to purchase Unified Messaging. Then, go to the Your
Numbers page in Setup under WhatsApp. Click Add Number and follow the prompts to add the number that was previously in use in
Marketing Cloud Engagement.
Warning: When you bring a WhatsApp number from a Marketing Cloud Engagement channel to a unified channel, it’s a one-way
move. You can’t move the number back to its original channel in the future.
SEE ALSO:
Merge Marketing and Service by Migrating from Enhanced WhatsApp to Unified Messaging
Salesforce Help: WhatsApp Unified Messaging Channel Capabilities (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Number Reuse and Migration in WhatsApp Unified Messaging (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Transfer a WhatsApp Conversation from Marketing Cloud Engagement to Service

Cloud with Journey Builder
You can transfer a WhatsApp conversation from a Marketing Cloud Engagement interaction to a Service Cloud interaction. Place the
WhatsApp Session Transfer activity after a Wait Until Chat Response or an Inbound Chat activity. The information passed as part of the
transfer includes conversation history, journey data, the recipient’s WhatsApp number, and the cross-cloud WhatsApp phone number.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create a WhatsApp Session Transfer Activity (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
View Analytics for the WhatsApp Session Transfer Activity in Journey Builder
Learn how customers interact with your WhatsApp journeys and why they’re transferred to support with the Session Transfer analytics
dashboard. Use this dashboard to view the number of total, successful, and failed transfers from Marketing Cloud Engagement interactions
to Service Cloud support, and learn more about each transfer. This information can help you identify areas where you can improve your
customer experience.
Where: This change applies to Marketing Cloud Engagement Corporate and Enterprise editions with Unified Messaging.
How: To view the analytics dashboard in Journey Builder, click the WhatsApp Session Transfer activity.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create a WhatsApp Session Transfer Activity (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Suppress Promotional WhatsApp Messages During Support Interactions with Journey

Builder
For WhatsApp numbers in Unified Messaging, control whether a Marketing Cloud Engagement message is sent to a customer engaged
in an active or open Service Cloud support conversation. This feature prevents customers from receiving promotional or other low-priority
content while they work with support and ensures they receive only relevant messages.
Where: This change applies to Marketing Cloud Engagement Corporate and Enterprise editions with Unified Messaging.
485
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes MuleSoft
How: To choose if and when a message sends, go to the Message Configuration section of a WhatsApp activity and select a value from
the Messaging Timing dropdown list.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up a WhatsApp Unified Messaging Channel (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Expand the Data Available for Your WhatsApp Engagement Queries in Unified
Messaging
You can now include Correlation ID, Sender Display Name, and Interactive Content Type information in your WhatsApp engagement
queries. Use the information from your queries to better refine and target your communications with subscribers. For example, segment
recipients who received a specific type of interactive content or who received messages as part of a specific send.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with the Marketing Cloud Engagement add-on.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: WhatsApp Engagement Data in Unified Messaging (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
MuleSoft
Use the MuleSoft Anypoint Platform suite of products to connect and integrate apps, systems, and data across your enterprise. Streamline
operations by building and automating processes with clicks instead of code. You can design, develop, govern, and share APIs and
integration apps and host them in the cloud or on-premises.
• The Mulesoft Release Notes are organized by product.
• The MuleSoft Release Note Summary by Month is organized by latest updates.
To learn more about MuleSoft products, see MuleSoft Documentation.
Mobile
Configure offline landing pages without code using Mobile Builder for Salesforce Mobile App, which is now generally available. Improve
your Mobile Publisher app with new security features and prepare your app for new notification and device operating system requirements.
Submit the required Firebase information for push notifications on Android mobile connected apps.
IN THIS SECTION:
Create custom offline landing pages with Mobile Builder for Salesforce Mobile App, which is now generally available. Customer
service agents can now message customers from the Salesforce mobile app through Service Cloud’s enhanced messaging channels
and Messaging for In-App and Web.
Mobile Publisher
Enhance your Mobile Publisher app with new security features, such as user opt-in biometric login (beta) and custom mobile security
policies. To meet Google’s requirements for push notifications on Android, submit your app’s Firebase information. Prepare your
Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud app users to update their devices to Android 8 or iOS 16 and later.
General Mobile Updates
Enter the required Google Firebase information to support push notifications on Android mobile connected apps.
486
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Salesforce Mobile App

Create custom offline landing pages with Mobile Builder for Salesforce Mobile App, which is now generally available. Customer service
agents can now message customers from the Salesforce mobile app through Service Cloud’s enhanced messaging channels and
Messaging for In-App and Web.
IN THIS SECTION:
Our latest round of new and improved Salesforce mobile app features makes it easier to access Salesforce on the go.

Our latest round of new and improved Salesforce mobile app features makes it easier to access Salesforce on the go.
The new Salesforce mobile app is available for all editions, except Database.com, without an additional license. Your org’s Salesforce
edition and licenses, as well as a user’s assigned profile and permission sets, determine the Salesforce data and features that are available
to each user.
Most features become available for the Salesforce mobile app the week of June 17, 2024.
Set Up in
Salesforce for Salesforce for
Salesforce App Enhancements and Changes the Full
Android iOS
Site
Einstein
Access the Recent Activity Timeline on the Salesforce Mobile App with Copilot
Enabled
Customer Service Features
Message Customers in the Salesforce Mobile App (Beta)
Offline Access
Configure Offline App Landing Pages Easily with Mobile Builder (Generally
Available)
Keep Working While Your Records Download with Background Priming (Beta)
Hide Global Search for Specific Lightning Apps

Give your users a more focused experience by hiding the global search for specific Lightning apps in your org. When they switch to
another app, the search bar is visible again
Where: This change applies to mobile connected apps. Connected apps can be created in Group, Professional, Enterprise, Essentials,
How: This feature is enabled through a connected app setting, which you configure. The setting,
HIDE_SEARCH_ICON_FOR_LIGHTNING_APP, accepts one or more app developer names as its value.
487
To see your lightning app developer names, open Lightning Experience App Manager.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Control Access and Security for the Salesforce Mobile App
Configure Offline App Landing Pages Easily with Mobile Builder (Generally Available)
With Mobile Builder for Salesforce Mobile App you can customize offline landing pages for your mobile users without writing a single
line of code. Now you can show the most important records to your mobile users so they can quickly and easily take relevant actions
based on their use cases. Mobile Builder was beta in Spring ’24 and is now generally available.
Where: These changes apply to Salesforce Mobile App Plus for Android and iOS on phones and tablets in all editions, except Database.com.
Who: Mobile Builder is available to users in orgs with the Salesforce Mobile App Plus license who have the user permission Mobile Offline
for Salesforce Mobile App Plus.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Mobile Builder, and then select Mobile Builder for Salesforce Mobile App.
Create configurations, assign them to user profiles, and publish.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Customize with Mobile Builder (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Salesforce Mobile App Plus (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Keep Working While Your Records Download with Background Priming (Beta)
Now when you download records for offline use, that process happens in the background and you can continue using your mobile
device uninterrupted. Take a phone call, schedule a meeting, or even lock your device and take a break. The app notifies you when the
download is complete and you’re ready to work offline.
Where: This change applies to the Salesforce Mobile App Plus for iOS and Android on phone and tablets in all editions, except
Database.com.
Who: Mobile Offline is available in orgs with the Salesforce Mobile App Plus license and to users within that org who have the Mobile
Offline for Salesforce Mobile App Plus user permission.
How: To participate in this beta program, contact your customer success representative or account executive.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Get Started With Mobile Offline (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
See Only Actions You Can Use in Mobile Builder

The Salesforce Mobile app supports only Lightning Web Component (LWC) global actions. When you configure a landing page in Mobile
Builder and add actions in the actions card, non-LWC actions are now automatically filtered out. This way, you only add actions that are
supported.
Where: These changes apply to Salesforce Mobile App Plus for Android and iOS on phones and tablets in Developer, Enterprise, and
Unlimited editions.
488
Who: Mobile Builder is available to users in orgs with the Salesforce Mobile App Plus license who have the user permission Mobile Offline
for Salesforce Mobile App Plus.
How: If you previously had non-LWC actions in your Mobile Builder landing page, they didn’t display to your users on your offline landing
page, they only displayed in Mobile Builder. They now appear blank in Mobile Builder, and you can remove them.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Quick Actions
Access the Recent Activity Timeline on the Salesforce Mobile App with Copilot Enabled
The Salesforce mobile app now shows your Recent Activity timeline for leads, opportunities, accounts, and contacts, even when Einstein
Copilot is enabled. Previously, you couldn’t access the Recent Activity timeline.
Where: This change applies to the Salesforce mobile app for iOS and Android in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with
the Einstein for Sales, Einstein for Service, or Einstein Platform add-on. Setup for Einstein Copilot is available on desktop.
How: For iOS and Android devices, the Recent Activity timeline is part of the overflow menu on a record page, if there are more than 4
actions in the action bar. If there are fewer than 4 actions, the Recent Activity timeline is visible on the action bar. If Einstein Copilot isn’t
enabled, the Recent Activity timeline is accessible at the bottom of the app.
489

Modernize your customer service by letting agents message customers from the Salesforce mobile app. Previously, agents had to be
signed in to Omni on the Salesforce agent console to engage in conversations.
Where: This change applies to all enhanced messaging channels and Messaging for In-App and Web. View required editions.
When: This feature is available after June 15, 2024.
Who: Users with a Messaging User permission set license can message customers in the Salesforce app.
Why: Gone are the days of requiring agents to sign in to the agent console to message customers. Some of our customers work in
face-to-face environments like real estate or rideshare where a computer isn’t available. Some of our customers want to be available all
the time, even when they’re away from a computer. Some of our customers work in highly regulated industries where they need to use
an approved device to have 1:1 engagements with their clients in a compliant way. We offer messaging in the Salesforce app as a solution
to the evolving landscape of human connectedness.
How: To accept or send messages, agents sign in to the Salesforce app and make themselves available in the Omni widget.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Message Customers in the Salesforce Mobile App
490
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Mobile Publisher
Mobile Publisher
Enhance your Mobile Publisher app with new security features, such as user opt-in biometric login (beta) and custom mobile security
policies. To meet Google’s requirements for push notifications on Android, submit your app’s Firebase information. Prepare your Mobile
Publisher for Experience Cloud app users to update their devices to Android 8 or iOS 16 and later.
IN THIS SECTION:
Submit Your Mobile Publisher Android App’s Required Firebase Information Before June
Because of a change in how Google handles push notifications for Android apps, Mobile Publisher requires new information from
your app’s Google Firebase project. To make sure that there’s no disruption to your Android app’s push notifications, upload your
app’s Firebase Admin SDK private key and Firebase config file to Setup for Mobile Publisher before June 2024.
Mobile Publisher Android Apps with Managed Public Distribution Are No Longer Updated
Mobile Publisher retired Android app distribution through the Managed Public option in Winter ’23. Existing Mobile Publisher Android
apps distributed with the Managed Public option continue to work but no longer receive app updates in Summer ’24 and later
releases. We recommend that you transfer your app to your own Google Play account for Delegated Public or Delegated Private
distribution as soon as possible.
Experience Cloud Apps Now Require Android 8 or iOS 16 and Later
Starting in app version 12.2, Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud apps no longer support devices with Android 7 and earlier or
devices with iOS 15 and earlier.
Set Up Opt-In Biometric Login for Fast and Secure Experience Cloud App Logins (Beta)
With User Opt-In Biometric Login (beta), you can now set your Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud app to let users opt in to using
biometric credentials (face or fingerprint recognition) to log in. After a user first logs in to the app with their username and password,
they can opt in to using their biometric credentials for future logins. Previously, if you enabled biometric app unlock for logging in
to your app, users couldn’t log in to your app without using biometric credentials.
Configure How Your Experience Cloud App Responds to Security Threats
With Enhanced Mobile App Security, you can customize how your Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud app responds to security
threats. Set your app to detect security threats, such as a jailbroken device or a man-in-the-middle attack. Then configure the severity
level of how your app automatically responds when the threat is detected.
Binary Upload Is the Default Distribution Method for New Mobile Publisher Apps
When you create a project in Setup for Mobile Publisher, you select an App Distribution Method. You choose whether you submit
your app for Apple or Google review (Binary Upload), or if Salesforce submits your app for review (Fully Managed). Binary Upload is
now the default App Distribution Method for new Mobile Publisher apps. The Fully Managed option is still available, and there’s no
change to existing apps.
Add Links to an Experience Cloud iOS App’s Login Page
Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud iOS apps now support links from the app’s login page. Use your app’s login screen to point
your users to important pages, such as your app’s privacy policy or terms and conditions. Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud
Android apps support links on the login page in app versions 11.3 and later.
Set the Default Method for How Your Experience Cloud App Opens External URLs (Generally Available)
The default experience is that your Experience Cloud site’s URLs open in the in-app web view, while all URLs external to your site
open in the in-app browser. You can now choose how your app opens all URLs external to your site, without having to configure
each individual URL. You can configure all external URLs to open in an in-app web view, an in-app browser, an external browser, or
an in-app browser that shares cookies with your app’s web view. Setting the default method for opening external URLs is now also
supported for Messaging for In-App and Web in Service Cloud.
491
Customize Mobile Publisher Android App Permission Requests to Post Notifications

In Setup for Mobile Publisher, you can now customize the text shown to users when your Android app requests permission to post
notifications to the notification tray on their device. Make sure that your permission description meets Google Play’s requirements
for prominent disclosure.
Simplify Site Navigation on Mobile Publisher for LWR Sites (Beta)
Give your customers easier navigation by showing the hamburger menu and back button in Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud
apps on the LWR platform. To customize these navigation options for your LWR site, use the new getNavigationConfig
wire adapter. The wire adapter exposes properties that enable or disable the hamburger menu and back button for Android and
iOS apps.
Privacy Manifests Are Now Generated for Experience Cloud iOS Apps
Apple now requires privacy manifest files, which describe how your app and third-party SDKs collect and use app-user data. Mobile
Publisher for Experience Cloud now generates this file on your behalf and uploads the file to your App Store account. There are no
changes to the user experience of your app.
Submit Your Mobile Publisher Android App’s Required Firebase Information Before
June
Because of a change in how Google handles push notifications for Android apps, Mobile Publisher requires new information from your
app’s Google Firebase project. To make sure that there’s no disruption to your Android app’s push notifications, upload your app’s
Firebase Admin SDK private key and Firebase config file to Setup for Mobile Publisher before June 2024.
Where: This change applies to Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud and Mobile Publisher for Salesforce Mobile App Plus Android apps.
Setup for Mobile Publisher is available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
How: Get the required information and files from your Firebase project in the Google Firebase Console. Then submit the information to
your app’s Setup for Mobile Publisher project.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Register Your Firebase App to Enable Mobile Publisher Android Push Notifications (can be outdated or unavailable
Firebase FAQ: FCM features deprecated in June 2023
Mobile Publisher Android Apps with Managed Public Distribution Are No Longer
Updated
Mobile Publisher retired Android app distribution through the Managed Public option in Winter ’23. Existing Mobile Publisher Android
apps distributed with the Managed Public option continue to work but no longer receive app updates in Summer ’24 and later releases.
We recommend that you transfer your app to your own Google Play account for Delegated Public or Delegated Private distribution as
soon as possible.
Where: This change applies to Mobile Publisher Android apps distributed through the legacy Managed Public option. Setup for Mobile
Publisher is available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
SEE ALSO:
Knowledge Article: Mobile Publisher Android - Managed Public Retirement
492
Experience Cloud Apps Now Require Android 8 or iOS 16 and Later

Starting in app version 12.2, Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud apps no longer support devices with Android 7 and earlier or devices
with iOS 15 and earlier.
Where: This change applies to apps created with Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud Aura and LWR sites in Enterprise, Performance,
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Requirements for Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Set Up Opt-In Biometric Login for Fast and Secure Experience Cloud App Logins (Beta)
With User Opt-In Biometric Login (beta), you can now set your Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud app to let users opt in to using
biometric credentials (face or fingerprint recognition) to log in. After a user first logs in to the app with their username and password,
they can opt in to using their biometric credentials for future logins. Previously, if you enabled biometric app unlock for logging in to
your app, users couldn’t log in to your app without using biometric credentials.
Where: This change applies to Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud app versions 12.2 and later.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Connected App, and then select Manage Connected Apps. Find your Mobile
Publisher for Experience Cloud app’s connected app, and then add custom attributes that configure opt-in biometric login.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: User Opt-In Biometric Login (Beta) (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Enable User Opt-In Biometric Login (Beta) (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Configure How Your Experience Cloud App Responds to Security Threats

With Enhanced Mobile App Security, you can customize how your Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud app responds to security
threats. Set your app to detect security threats, such as a jailbroken device or a man-in-the-middle attack. Then configure the severity
level of how your app automatically responds when the threat is detected.
Where: This change applies to Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud app versions 12.3 and later. Setup for Mobile Publisher is available
in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions. Enhanced Mobile App Security is available for Mobile Publisher
for Experience Cloud apps at no additional cost.
How: Enable Enhanced Mobile App Security in your app’s Setup for Mobile Publisher project. Then configure the mobile security policies
for your app in Mobile Security.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up Enhanced Mobile App Security for Mobile Publisher (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Enhanced Mobile App Security Policies for Mobile Publisher (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
493
Binary Upload Is the Default Distribution Method for New Mobile Publisher Apps
When you create a project in Setup for Mobile Publisher, you select an App Distribution Method. You choose whether you submit your
app for Apple or Google review (Binary Upload), or if Salesforce submits your app for review (Fully Managed). Binary Upload is now the
default App Distribution Method for new Mobile Publisher apps. The Fully Managed option is still available, and there’s no change to
existing apps.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
Note: There’s no change to the Mobile Publisher App Distribution Types, which determine whether an app is publicly or privately
distributed to end users.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: App Distribution Methods (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Advantages of Binary Upload Distribution Method (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Add Links to an Experience Cloud iOS App’s Login Page

Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud iOS apps now support links from the app’s login page. Use your app’s login screen to point your
users to important pages, such as your app’s privacy policy or terms and conditions. Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud Android apps
support links on the login page in app versions 11.3 and later.
Where: This change applies to Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud iOS app versions 12.3 and later.
How: Use Experience Builder to add links to your site’s login page.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Customize Sites with Experience Builder (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Set the Default Method for How Your Experience Cloud App Opens External URLs
The default experience is that your Experience Cloud site’s URLs open in the in-app web view, while all URLs external to your site open
in the in-app browser. You can now choose how your app opens all URLs external to your site, without having to configure each individual
URL. You can configure all external URLs to open in an in-app web view, an in-app browser, an external browser, or an in-app browser
that shares cookies with your app’s web view. Setting the default method for opening external URLs is now also supported for Messaging
for In-App and Web in Service Cloud.
Where: This change applies to apps created with Mobile Publisher for your Experience Cloud Aura and LWR sites in Enterprise, Performance,
Unlimited, and Developer editions. Setup for Mobile Publisher is available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and
Unlimited editions.
How: In your app’s Setup for Mobile Publisher project, configure the settings in the URL Management section.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Manage How URLs Open from Your App (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Test How URLs Open in the Playground Publisher App (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: What’s Messaging for In-App and Web? (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
494
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes General Mobile Updates
Customize Mobile Publisher Android App Permission Requests to Post Notifications

In Setup for Mobile Publisher, you can now customize the text shown to users when your Android app requests permission to post
notifications to the notification tray on their device. Make sure that your permission description meets Google Play’s requirements for
prominent disclosure.
Where: This change applies to Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud Android apps. Setup for Mobile Publisher is available in Lightning
Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
How: In your app’s Setup for Mobile Publisher project, enable the Post Notification app permission. Then, edit the permission description
to explain to users why your app is requesting permission to post notifications.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Enable App Permissions for Device Capabilities (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: App Permissions on Android Devices (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Simplify Site Navigation on Mobile Publisher for LWR Sites (Beta)

Give your customers easier navigation by showing the hamburger menu and back button in Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud apps
on the LWR platform. To customize these navigation options for your LWR site, use the new getNavigationConfig wire adapter.
The wire adapter exposes properties that enable or disable the hamburger menu and back button for Android and iOS apps.
Why: In Experience Builder, the settings in the Additional Navigation Options section are available only for Aura sites on the Customer
Account Portal, Partner Central, Customer Service, and Help Center templates. The settings aren’t supported in apps created with Mobile
Publisher for the LWR platform. The wire adapter provides a way for you to show the hamburger menu and back button options on LWR
sites.
SEE ALSO:
Lightning Web Components Developer Guide: getNavigationConfig (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Privacy Manifests Are Now Generated for Experience Cloud iOS Apps
Apple now requires privacy manifest files, which describe how your app and third-party SDKs collect and use app-user data. Mobile
Publisher for Experience Cloud now generates this file on your behalf and uploads the file to your App Store account. There are no
changes to the user experience of your app.
Where: This change applies to Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud iOS app versions 12.2 and later.
SEE ALSO:
Apple Developer Documentation: Privacy manifest files
General Mobile Updates

Enter the required Google Firebase information to support push notifications on Android mobile connected apps.
495
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes OmniStudio
IN THIS SECTION:
Update Your Android Mobile Connected App with Firebase Information Required for Push Notifications
The legacy Firebase Cloud Messaging API server key is no longer accepted for configuring Android push notifications on mobile
connected apps. Because of a change in how Google handles push notifications, Android mobile connected apps now collect the
Admin SDK private key and project ID from a Google Firebase project. To make sure that there’s no disruption to the delivery of your
app’s notifications, submit the Firebase Admin SDK private key and project ID required for the new Firebase Cloud Messaging API
(HTTP v1).
Update Your Android Mobile Connected App with Firebase Information Required for
Push Notifications
The legacy Firebase Cloud Messaging API server key is no longer accepted for configuring Android push notifications on mobile connected
apps. Because of a change in how Google handles push notifications, Android mobile connected apps now collect the Admin SDK private
key and project ID from a Google Firebase project. To make sure that there’s no disruption to the delivery of your app’s notifications,
submit the Firebase Admin SDK private key and project ID required for the new Firebase Cloud Messaging API (HTTP v1).
Where: This change applies to mobile connected apps with Android push notifications. Connected apps can be created in Group,
Professional, Enterprise, Essentials, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: Get the required information from your Firebase project in the Google Firebase Console. Then submit the information to your
mobile connected app’s settings in App Manager.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Configure Android Push Notifications (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
OmniStudio
procedures, and choosing whether to merge entries within a list in an integration procedure list action. Also, DataRaptor is now Omnistudio
Data Mapper. For Winter '25 upgrades, disable New Order Save Behavior. To prepare for future releases, remove organization and profile
standard objects from data mappers, remove OmniStudio components with unlocked packages, and check the impact of the date
change in the ADDDAY function return.
IN THIS SECTION:
Easily and Accurately Complete Address Fields
Quickly fill out address fields in OmniScripts with Google Maps data. When a customer, agent, or other user starts typing an address,
they can select an address from the matching addresses that the field shows, and the remaining address fields are automatically
filled. To enable this setting, designers add a Type Ahead block to an OmniScript and configure the Google Maps autocomplete
settings, including whether to show a Google map.
Make Secure HTTP Outbound Calls to AWS VPC
OmniStudio Standard now supports Salesforce Private Connect for HTTP Actions in Integration Procedures. Use Private Connect to
make secure outbound HTTP calls from an OmniStudio org to an external service that runs on AWS Virtual Private Cloud (VPC). In
the HTTP action of an Integration Procedure, specify a named credential with an outbound network connection to AWS with Private
Connect.
496
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Easily and Accurately Complete Address Fields
Remove Duplicates Within a List When Merging Lists

To merge two lists in a List Action of an Integration Procedure, designers can now specify whether to merge entries within a list if it
has duplicate entries. If an entry has a duplicate and is used as a Merge field, then the merged output is sometimes not as expected.
OmniStudio DataRaptor Has a New Name
We've renamed DataRaptor to Omnistudio Data Mapper. You'll see the updated name in the feature name and labels in the OmniStudio
designers, documentation, and Trailhead modules. APIs, object fields, signatures, and URLs with dataraptor aren't changed so that
your implementations continue to work. The new name appears in OmniStudio Spring '24 release and later.
Configure New Order Save Behavior During Upgrade
Before you upgrade the OmniStudio package from Spring ‘24 or Summer ‘24 to Winter ‘25 or any patch release, disable New Order
Save Behavior, complete the upgrade process, and then re-enable New Order Save Behavior to avoid upgrade failures.
Remove Organization and Profile Standard Objects from Data Mappers Used by Customer Portal Users
Currently, our customers who are using the managed package runtime provides access to Organization and Profile Standard Objects
for Customer Portal users through data mappers used in OmniScripts and FlexCards. Starting in Spring ‘25, Customer Portal users
can’t access these Standard Objects in data mappers. We recommend that our customers verify the current data mappers used in
the OmniScripts and FlexCards that are used by Customer Portal users, and remove Organization and Profile Standard Objects from
those data mappers.
The ADDDAY(date, days) function of the Set Value element currently adds the specified number of days to the specified date, and
returns the sum of both the values without considering the user’s time zone. In Spring ‘25, the ADDDAY function returns the date
after considering the time zone, the same as in the package runtime output. Review your current setup to understand the impact
of this change.
Remove OmniStudio Components from Unlocked Packages
In Spring '25, Salesforce stops supporting OmniStudio components in unlocked packages. Make sure that you remove OmniStudio
components with unlocked packages from your deployment pipelines.
Find out about bug fixes, minor updates, and known issues about OmniStudio made after Summer '24 and before Winter '25.
Easily and Accurately Complete Address Fields

Quickly fill out address fields in OmniScripts with Google Maps data. When a customer, agent, or other user starts typing an address,
they can select an address from the matching addresses that the field shows, and the remaining address fields are automatically filled.
To enable this setting, designers add a Type Ahead block to an OmniScript and configure the Google Maps autocomplete settings,
including whether to show a Google map.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience and Experience Cloud sites in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions
where OmniStudio is enabled.
Who: This feature is available to OmniStudio customers who use the managed package or standard runtime.
How: The Google Maps settings are available by default. Designers require a Google API key. After they enable the Google Maps
autocomplete, they enter the key, configure the properties, and preview the autocomplete field.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Use Google Maps Autocomplete in OmniScripts (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
497
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Make Secure HTTP Outbound Calls to AWS VPC
Make Secure HTTP Outbound Calls to AWS VPC

OmniStudio Standard now supports Salesforce Private Connect for HTTP Actions in Integration Procedures. Use Private Connect to make
secure outbound HTTP calls from an OmniStudio org to an external service that runs on AWS Virtual Private Cloud (VPC). In the HTTP
action of an Integration Procedure, specify a named credential with an outbound network connection to AWS with Private Connect.
Who: This feature is available to OmniStudio customers who use the managed package or standard runtime.
Why: Salesforce Private Connect provides a fully managed secure connection between Salesforce first-party data centers and Amazon
Web Services. Directly connect your Salesforce org to your Virtual Private Clouds (VPCs) that run on AWS by using Amazon’s PrivateLink.
All traffic is routed over a dedicated connection (fully managed by Salesforce) without exposing your VPCs to the public internet.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: HTTP Action Properties for Integration Procedures (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Remove Duplicates Within a List When Merging Lists

To merge two lists in a List Action of an Integration Procedure, designers can now specify whether to merge entries within a list if it has
duplicate entries. If an entry has a duplicate and is used as a Merge field, then the merged output is sometimes not as expected.
Who: This feature is available to OmniStudio customers who use the standard runtime or managed package.
How: To disable merging entries within a list if it has duplicate entries, in the Design view of a List Action property, select Prevent Intra
List Merge.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: List Action Properties for Integration Procedures (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
OmniStudio DataRaptor Has a New Name

We've renamed DataRaptor to Omnistudio Data Mapper. You'll see the updated name in the feature name and labels in the OmniStudio
designers, documentation, and Trailhead modules. APIs, object fields, signatures, and URLs with dataraptor aren't changed so that your
implementations continue to work. The new name appears in OmniStudio Spring '24 release and later.
Where: This change applies to all editions with OmniStudio licenses.
Configure New Order Save Behavior During Upgrade

Before you upgrade the OmniStudio package from Spring ‘24 or Summer ‘24 to Winter ‘25 or any patch release, disable New Order Save
Behavior, complete the upgrade process, and then re-enable New Order Save Behavior to avoid upgrade failures.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Experience Cloud sites in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions
When: Starting in Winter ‘25, New Order Save Behavior is enabled by default in OmniStudio.
Who: This change impacts OmniStudio customers who use the managed package and standard runtime.
498
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Remove Organization and Profile Standard Objects from Data
Mappers Used by Customer Portal Users
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then click Release Updates. On the Needs Action page,
go to Enable New Order Save Behavior, and then click Get Started. If the guided flow shows the Disable Test Run button, click it to
disable New Order Save Behavior. If you see the Enable Test Run button, New Order Save Behavior is already disabled, and you can
proceed with the package installation. After the package installation is complete, enable New Order Save Behavior.
Remove Organization and Profile Standard Objects from Data Mappers

Used by Customer Portal Users
Currently, our customers who are using the managed package runtime provides access to Organization and Profile Standard Objects
for Customer Portal users through data mappers used in OmniScripts and FlexCards. Starting in Spring ‘25, Customer Portal users can’t
access these Standard Objects in data mappers. We recommend that our customers verify the current data mappers used in the
OmniScripts and FlexCards that are used by Customer Portal users, and remove Organization and Profile Standard Objects from those
data mappers.
Where: This change applies to Experience Cloud sites in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions where OmniStudio is enabled.
Who: This change impacts OmniStudio customers who use the managed package runtime.

The ADDDAY(date, days) function of the Set Value element currently adds the specified number of days to the specified date, and returns
the sum of both the values without considering the user’s time zone. In Spring ‘25, the ADDDAY function returns the date after considering
the time zone, the same as in the package runtime output. Review your current setup to understand the impact of this change.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Experience Cloud sites in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions
Who: This change impacts OmniStudio customers who use the standard runtime and have disabled the Managed Package Runtime
setting.
Why: In this example, the ADDDAY function is defined with the user’s time zone in Pacific Time (PT):
ADDDAY("2023-10-04T04:04:00.000Z", 21)
The input for the ADDDAY function is "2023-10-04T04:04:00.000Z", which represents October 04, 2023 at 04:04 AM in the UTC format.
This output shows the current ADDDAY function output in the standard runtime:
{
"addDay": "2023-10-25T04:04:00.000Z"
}
In this output, the resulting date, 25, is the sum of the specified date (04) and the number of days (21). It currently doesn’t account for
the user’s time zone and displays it along with the output.
In Spring ‘25, the input in the ADDDAY function is first converted to the user's time zone. In this example, the input date in the user's
time zone is 2023-10-04 21:04:00.000 PT. The output of the ADDDAY function after adding 21 days to the input date is “2023-10-24''.
Note that the output is in the Date format, and not Date Time format.
{"addDay": "2023-10-24"}
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Function Reference (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
499
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Remove OmniStudio Components from Unlocked Packages
Remove OmniStudio Components from Unlocked Packages

In Spring '25, Salesforce stops supporting OmniStudio components in unlocked packages. Make sure that you remove OmniStudio
components with unlocked packages from your deployment pipelines.
Where: This change applies to Salesforce Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions where OmniStudio is enabled.
Who: This change impacts OmniStudio customers who use unlocked packages with OmniStudio components. See Metadata Coverage
for the list of supported OmniStudio components.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce DX Developer Guide: Unlocked Packages

Find out about bug fixes, minor updates, and known issues about OmniStudio made after Summer '24 and before Winter '25.
Revenue
processing issues.
IN THIS SECTION:
Realize faster time to revenue with Revenue Lifecycle Management’s robust product catalog, pricing, configurator, quoting, and
asset management features. Support your unique business practices by customizing Revenue Lifecycle Management’s extensible
objects and APIs.
Salesforce Billing
Salesforce Billing provides usability improvements that make it easier to identify and fix batch invoice run errors.
Learn more about the new metadata type in Salesforce Subscription Management.

Realize faster time to revenue with Revenue Lifecycle Management’s robust product catalog, pricing, configurator, quoting, and asset
management features. Support your unique business practices by customizing Revenue Lifecycle Management’s extensible objects and
APIs.
IN THIS SECTION:
New videos help you learn about the capabilities of Revenue Lifecycle Mangement.
500
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Revenue Lifecycle Management

Swiftly add multiple products based on a product classification to a product bundle and reduce time to market. Use Product Catalog
Management APIs to translate select fields on the Product and Product category objects, and make the objects accessible to a global
audience. Represent monetary and percentage-based product characteristics by using the currency and percent attribute data types.
Define custom fields on select Product Catalog Management objects, and extend the objects to meet your business needs. Select
the slider display type for product attributes of the number, percent, and currency data type, and adjust attribute values with slider
controls in run time. Quickly set up Product Discovery and provide an enhanced product browsing experience to your partners and
customers.
Salesforce Pricing
Calculate accurate prices for all your line items by deriving a product’s price from other source products or assets or by generating
contract-based prices. Set profile-level security for each element within a pricing procedure. Use the Operations Console as a one-stop
shop to see all your pricing data. Dynamically map output variables in a lookup table and change context tag values for variables by
using the new Assignment element. Document all costs associated with the creation of a product.
Easily manage product compatibility and validation with actionable configuration rules. Build flexible bundles by searching and
adding qualified products in real-time. Configure products with the currency and percentage attributes that reflect real-world values
such as discounts and fees.
Enhance the selling experience with Transaction Line Editor enhancements. Use custom fields to extend Revenue Lifecycle
Management. Display unique prices depending on the type of transaction. Generate professional quote documents with Document
Builder in Revenue Lifecycle Management. Estimate the tax on your orders. Submit orders to Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator for
fulfillment or automatically submit eligible orders for fulfillment.
Asset Lifecycle
Provide sales reps with insights into customer assets and help your company increase customer lifetime value by using Revenue
Lifecycle Management.
Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator, or DRO, is a flexible order fulfillment product that is natively built on the Salesforce platform and
embedded into end-to-end sales processes. DRO provides a complete view of the entire fulfillment design and runtime, including
order decomposition and fulfillment plans, plus jeopardy management, and a graphic UI for enriching products with data.

New videos help you learn about the capabilities of Revenue Lifecycle Mangement.
• Introduction to Revenue Lifecycle Management gives an overview of the Revenue Lifecycle Management solutions.

Swiftly add multiple products based on a product classification to a product bundle and reduce time to market. Use Product Catalog
Management APIs to translate select fields on the Product and Product category objects, and make the objects accessible to a global
audience. Represent monetary and percentage-based product characteristics by using the currency and percent attribute data types.
Define custom fields on select Product Catalog Management objects, and extend the objects to meet your business needs. Select the
slider display type for product attributes of the number, percent, and currency data type, and adjust attribute values with slider controls
in run time. Quickly set up Product Discovery and provide an enhanced product browsing experience to your partners and customers.
501
IN THIS SECTION:
Use Dynamic Options to Add All Products Based On a Product Classification to a Product Bundle
Your product designers can now dynamically add all optional products with similar characteristics to a configurable product bundle,
even as the product components in the bundle grow and evolve over time. Product designers can simply add a product classification
component to the configurable product bundle. All the products that are based on the product classification are dynamically available
for selection to your buyers and sellers at run time.
Maximize Product Reach with Translated Product and Product Category Data
In a global business with users from diverse linguistic backgrounds, use Product Catalog Management APIs to provide translated
data for fields in Product2 and ProductCategory objects. Translated data ensures that non-English users can access and effectively
use products and product categories.
Accurately Represent Monetary Values and Percentages in Product Attributes
Use the currency and percent attribute data types to describe product characteristics that represent currency and percentage
values. Previously, you used only the number data type. Use the currency data type for product attributes used in financial calculations
and reporting. Use the percentage data type for product attributes that represent discounts, commissions, and other percentage-based
metrics.
Alter Product Attribute Values Through Slider Controls
Show attributes of the currency, number, and percent data types as sliders at run time. Instead of typing in a number, or using
increment buttons, drag the slider on a predefined scale to adjust the attribute values. Sliders are intuitive and provide immediate
visual feedback as your users make attribute adjustments.
Personalize Product Catalog Management Objects with Custom Fields
You can now add custom fields to multiple Product Catalog Management objects and pass the custom fields as additional fields in
the Product List API and Bulk Product Details API. These APIs return values of all the custom fields to the requesting run time systems.
Other Changes in Product Catalog Management
To include or exclude picklist values from product classification attributes, product attribute definitions, or overridden product
attributes, you can now use the Include or Exclude Picklist Values action next to the attributes. Previously, you used the Excluded
Picklist Values field when you edited the product classification attribute, product attribute definition, or overridden product attribute.
The Excluded Picklist Values field is no longer available. Additionally, to validate the component count, and to ensure that every
product attribute in a static and simple bundle has a default value, and that the group cardinality is in compliance, you can now use
Validate Product Definition. Previously, this functionality was called Validate Product Bundle. Finally, when a group has multiple
products, click Show More to see 10 products at a time. Previously, Show More expanded to show five products.
Product Discovery
Set up product discovery faster by using the new predefined pricing and qualification procedure templates. Provide an enhanced
product browsing experience to your customers and partners by using Product Discovery components on Experience Cloud sites.
Customize the product browsing experience for your sales reps, customers, and partners to provide the information and options
that they need. Explore the support for derived pricing, and an enhancement to easily add multiple products.
New and Changed Objects in Product Catalog Management
Do more with the new and changed objects in Product Catalog Management.
Connect REST APIs
Learn more about the updates to the Connect REST APIs in Product Catalog Management.
502
Use Dynamic Options to Add All Products Based On a Product Classification to a Product Bundle
Your product designers can now dynamically add all optional products with similar characteristics to a configurable product bundle,
even as the product components in the bundle grow and evolve over time. Product designers can simply add a product classification
component to the configurable product bundle. All the products that are based on the product classification are dynamically available
for selection to your buyers and sellers at run time.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help:Add Components to a Configurable Product Bundle (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Maximize Product Reach with Translated Product and Product Category Data
In a global business with users from diverse linguistic backgrounds, use Product Catalog Management APIs to provide translated data
for fields in Product2 and ProductCategory objects. Translated data ensures that non-English users can access and effectively use products
and product categories.
Why: Data translation is available for the name, description, and help text fields on the Product2 object via the Product List API, Product
Details API, and Bulk Product Details API. Data translation is available for the name and description fields on the Product Category object
via the Category List API and Category Details API.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help:Set Up Data Translation In Product Catalog Management (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help:Translate Product2 and ProductCategory Data Management (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Accurately Represent Monetary Values and Percentages in Product Attributes

Use the currency and percent attribute data types to describe product characteristics that represent currency and percentage
values. Previously, you used only the number data type. Use the currency data type for product attributes used in financial calculations
and reporting. Use the percentage data type for product attributes that represent discounts, commissions, and other percentage-based
metrics.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Dynamic Attributes (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Alter Product Attribute Values Through Slider Controls

Show attributes of the currency, number, and percent data types as sliders at run time. Instead of typing in a number, or using increment
buttons, drag the slider on a predefined scale to adjust the attribute values. Sliders are intuitive and provide immediate visual feedback
as your users make attribute adjustments.
503
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Attribute Fields (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Edit Product Classification Attributes (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Configure Product Attributes (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Personalize Product Catalog Management Objects with Custom Fields

You can now add custom fields to multiple Product Catalog Management objects and pass the custom fields as additional fields in the
Product List API and Bulk Product Details API. These APIs return values of all the custom fields to the requesting run time systems.
Why: You can add custom fields to these objects:
• AttributeCategory
• AttributeCategoryAttribute
• AttributePicklist
• AttributePicklistValue
• AttrPicklistExcludedValue
• ProductClassification
• ProductClassificationAttr
• ProductAttributeDefinition
• ProductRelatedComponent
• ProductRelComponentOverride
• ProductComponentGroup
• ProductComponentGrpOverride
• ProductRelationshipType
Other Changes in Product Catalog Management

To include or exclude picklist values from product classification attributes, product attribute definitions, or overridden product attributes,
you can now use the Include or Exclude Picklist Values action next to the attributes. Previously, you used the Excluded Picklist Values
field when you edited the product classification attribute, product attribute definition, or overridden product attribute. The Excluded
Picklist Values field is no longer available. Additionally, to validate the component count, and to ensure that every product attribute in
a static and simple bundle has a default value, and that the group cardinality is in compliance, you can now use Validate Product Definition.
Previously, this functionality was called Validate Product Bundle. Finally, when a group has multiple products, click Show More to see
10 products at a time. Previously, Show More expanded to show five products.
How:
To include or exclude picklist values from product classification attributes of the picklist data type, click Include or Exclude Picklist
Values.
504
To include or exclude picklist values from product attribute definitions of the picklist data type, click Include or Exclude Picklist Values
next to the overridden inherited attribute.
To include or exclude picklist values from overridden product attributes of the picklist data type, click Include or Exclude Picklist Values
next to the overridden product attribute.
To validate the product definition, click Validate Product Definition.
505
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Include or Exclude Picklist Values in a Product Classification Attribute (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Salesforce Help: Include or Exclude Picklist Values in a Product Attribute (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Include or Exclude Picklist Values in Overridden Product Attributes (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Salesforce Help: Validate Product Definition (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Product Discovery
Set up product discovery faster by using the new predefined pricing and qualification procedure templates. Provide an enhanced product
browsing experience to your customers and partners by using Product Discovery components on Experience Cloud sites. Customize
the product browsing experience for your sales reps, customers, and partners to provide the information and options that they need.
Explore the support for derived pricing, and an enhancement to easily add multiple products.
IN THIS SECTION:
Quickly Create Pricing Procedures and Qualification Procedures
Clone the new predefined Product Discovery Pricing Procedure and Product Discovery Qualification Procedure templates from the
Expression Set Templates page, and then customize them according to your business requirements.
Supercharge Product Browsing Experience for Your Partners and Customers
You can now add the Product List, Product Details, Product Attribute Details, and Product Bundle Details components to Experience
Cloud site pages. Partners and customers can use the Product List Page component to browse catalogs, categories, and products
in a simple, structured way to identify the most suitable products. They can use the Product Details, Product Attribute Details, and
Product Bundle Details components to get a single, comprehensive view of product information to make quick, informed decisions.
Fine-Tune Product Browsing Experience
Provide only the required options and information to your sales reps when they browse products. Use the Product List Page component
settings to show additional fields and to show or hide the options to configure products, enter quantity, and select multiple products.
To improve performance and usability, you can change the number of additional products that are loaded when a user reaches the
end of the displayed list of products.
506
Use Pricing and Qualification Procedures Only When Relevant

Enable or disable the usage of pricing and qualification procedures for Product Discovery. After you enable these procedures for
Product Discovery, you can also enable or disable them for different components. With Summer ’24, these procedures are disabled
for all orgs by default. If you want to continue to use these procedures, enable the settings.
Easily Add Products to Quotes and Orders
Sales reps can directly select products from catalog pages, and then create quotes or orders with the selected products. To enable
this option, select the Product List Page component in Lightning App Builder or Experience Builder. Then, in the Add Products To
field, select Quote or Order.
Browse and Add Products with Derived Pricing
Sales reps can now browse and add products that are priced based on another pricing source, such as a product or an asset. For
products that use derived pricing, the price is calculated and displayed only after users add them to quotes or orders.
Select and Add Products Faster
With a single click, sales reps, partners, and customers can select all the qualified products from the displayed list of products by
using the All Products checkbox.
Connect REST APIs
Learn more about the updates to the Connect REST APIs in Product Discovery.
Quickly Create Pricing Procedures and Qualification Procedures

Clone the new predefined Product Discovery Pricing Procedure and Product Discovery Qualification Procedure templates from the
Expression Set Templates page, and then customize them according to your business requirements.
Supercharge Product Browsing Experience for Your Partners and Customers

You can now add the Product List, Product Details, Product Attribute Details, and Product Bundle Details components to Experience
Cloud site pages. Partners and customers can use the Product List Page component to browse catalogs, categories, and products in a
simple, structured way to identify the most suitable products. They can use the Product Details, Product Attribute Details, and Product
Bundle Details components to get a single, comprehensive view of product information to make quick, informed decisions.
How: Open an Experience Cloud site page in Experience Builder, click Components, and then drag components to the canvas. If needed,
select a component and change its properties.
Fine-Tune Product Browsing Experience

Provide only the required options and information to your sales reps when they browse products. Use the Product List Page component
settings to show additional fields and to show or hide the options to configure products, enter quantity, and select multiple products.
To improve performance and usability, you can change the number of additional products that are loaded when a user reaches the end
of the displayed list of products.
How: Select the Product List Page component in Lightning App Builder or Experience Builder, and then specify the properties.
507
Use Pricing and Qualification Procedures Only When Relevant

Enable or disable the usage of pricing and qualification procedures for Product Discovery. After you enable these procedures for Product
Discovery, you can also enable or disable them for different components. With Summer ’24, these procedures are disabled for all orgs
by default. If you want to continue to use these procedures, enable the settings.
How: Enable or disable pricing and qualification procedures for Product Discovery from the Product Discovery Settings page. After you
enable the procedures for Product Discovery, select the Product List Page component in Lightning App Builder or Experience Builder,
and then select or deselect the Run pricing procedure and Run qualification procedure checkboxes.
Easily Add Products to Quotes and Orders

Sales reps can directly select products from catalog pages, and then create quotes or orders with the selected products. To enable this
option, select the Product List Page component in Lightning App Builder or Experience Builder. Then, in the Add Products To field, select
Quote or Order.
Browse and Add Products with Derived Pricing

Sales reps can now browse and add products that are priced based on another pricing source, such as a product or an asset. For products
that use derived pricing, the price is calculated and displayed only after users add them to quotes or orders.
How: Create a pricing procedure by using the updated ProductDiscoveryContext context definition template, the new predefined Pricing
Procedure template, and a decision table that contains the IsDerived field.
If you created a pricing procedure before Summer ’24 and want to use derived pricing, first sync the context definition that you created.
Then, edit your pricing procedure with a decision table that contains the IsDerived field.
Select and Add Products Faster

With a single click, sales reps, partners, and customers can select all the qualified products from the displayed list of products by using
the All Products checkbox.
How: Open a product list, and then click Add Products.
Connect REST APIs

Learn more about the updates to the Connect REST APIs in Product Discovery.
508
IN THIS SECTION:
New Connect REST API Resources
Learn more about the resources available with Product Discovery.

Learn more about the resources available with Product Discovery.
Product Discovery
Retrieve details for multiple products
Make a POST request to the /connect/cpq/products/bulk resource.
New request body: Bulk Product Details Input
New response body: CPQ Base Bulk Details

Products Details (POST)

Product Details Input
• additionalFields—Additional standard or custom fields to include in the response.
Global Search (POST)

Products Search Input
This request body has these new properties.
• additionalFields—Additional standard or custom fields of the Product2 object to include in the response.
• includeCatalogDetails—Indicates whether to include catalog details in the response.
Products List (POST)

Product List Input
• additionalFields—Additional standard or custom fields of the Product2 object to include in the response.
• includeCatalogDetails—Indicates whether to include catalog details in the response.

509
Products Details (POST)

CPQ Base Details
• additionalFields—Key-value pair of additional standard or custom fields with their values.
Global Search (POST) and Products List (POST)

CPQ Base List
• additionalFields—Key-value pair of additional standard or custom fields of the Product2 object with their values.
New and Changed Objects in Product Catalog Management

Do more with the new and changed objects in Product Catalog Management.
Who: Users upgrading from Spring ‘24 must set field level security to access the new fields on the Product2 object.
Exclude attribute picklist values from product classification attributes and product attributes
Use the new AttrPicklistExcludedValue object.
Get translated values for the product specification type’s label and description
Use the new ProductSpecificationTypeLocalization object.
Define the quantity of a fulfillment order line item
Use the new FulfillmentQtyCalcMethods field on the existing Product2 object.
Define the number of fulfillment order line items that must be generated
Use the new DecompositionScope field on the existing Product2 object.
Adjust the attribute value in increments or decrements of the step value at run time
Use the new StepValue field on the existing ProductAttributeDefinition and ProductClassificationAttr objects.
Display attributes of number, currency, and percent data types as sliders at run time
Use the new supported value Slider in the existing Display Type field on the ProductAttributeDefinition and
ProductClassificationAttr object.
Represent monetary and percentage-based attributes
Use the new supported values Currency and Percent in the DataType field on the AttributeDefinition object.
Connect REST APIs

Learn more about the updates to the Connect REST APIs in Product Catalog Management.
IN THIS SECTION:
Learn more about the resources available with Product Catalog Management.
This request body has changes.
510

SEE ALSO:
Revenue Lifecycle Management Developer Guide: Product Catalog Management Business APIs

Learn more about the resources available with Product Catalog Management.

Retrieve details for multiple products
Make a POST request to the /connect/pcm/products/bulk resource.
New request body: Products Detail Bulk Input
New response body: Products Output

This request body has changes.
Products List (POST)

Product Input
• additionalFields—Map of the object and the list of additional standard or custom fields to be queried along with the
standard response.

Products List (POST) and Product By ID (GET)

Product
• additionalFields—Key-value pair of additional standard or custom fields with their values.
• catalogs—List of the associated catalogs.
Bulk Products Details (POST) and Product By ID (GET)

Product Classification
• code—Code of the product classification record.
• name—Name of the product classification record.
• status—Status of the product classification record.
511
Salesforce Pricing
Calculate accurate prices for all your line items by deriving a product’s price from other source products or assets or by generating
contract-based prices. Set profile-level security for each element within a pricing procedure. Use the Operations Console as a one-stop
shop to see all your pricing data. Dynamically map output variables in a lookup table and change context tag values for variables by
using the new Assignment element. Document all costs associated with the creation of a product.
IN THIS SECTION:
Accurately Derive Prices from Products and Assets Using Salesforce Pricing
Create derived price records to determine a product's price by using another pricing source, such as a product or an asset. Incorporate
a wide range of pricing factors and enhance pricing accuracy and accurate pricing for your derived products.
Automatically Populate Output Variables for Pricing Elements
Set default mappings for specific output columns of lookup tables associated with the List Price and Price Adjustment Matrix elements
to reduce manual user entry. You can set default mapping only for the unit price, adjustment type, and adjustment value variables.
Use the Assignment element in a pricing procedure to set and change the context tag values of variables. Give your users the flexibility
to customise a variable's value within a pricing procedure and enable their business to optimise their pricing strategies for maximum
effectiveness.
Set profile-level access to grant access to all pricing elements in a pricing procedure. Based on the security level you set, only the
users who have access can see pricing information, and the decisions made and displayed in the Waterfall view after a pricing
procedure runs.
Tailor Pricing Discounts for Your Business Using Contract-Based Pricing
Implement contract-based pricing to set discounts to specific business conditions using the predefined Contract Pricing Entries
lookup table. Establish pricing rules linked to contracts, using List Price, Volume Discounts, Tier Discounts, Attribute-Based Price,
Bundle-Based Price, and Price Adjustment Matrix elements. These contracted prices can override existing methods, including base
price calculations and various discount types. Turn on the contract-based pricing option in a pricing element and provide a value
for the Contract Pricing output variable.
Monitor Your Pricing Data From the Operations Console
Get a complete overview of the pricing data from the Operations Console. At a glance, you see the data consumed when pricing
operations are performed and the event log files generated during the execution of pricing processes.
Comprehensively Track Product Cost by Using Cost Books
Create and organize multiple cost books to define expenses that occur when you create a product. Set a default cost book and create
individual cost book entries to track all the cost factors associated with product creation.
The modification of Lightning components, Salesforce Lightning Design System (SLDS) styles, and custom properties help your users
use the new record pickers to search for any price book. They are no longer required to depend on the limited options in a dropdown..
Previously, the Choose Price Book component was on a type picklist and couldn’t show more than 2000 records.
Do more with these new Salesforce Pricing objects.
Connect REST APIs
Learn more about the updates to the Connect REST APIs in Salesforce Pricing.
New Metadata Type
Learn more about the new metadata type in Salesforce Pricing.
512
Accurately Derive Prices from Products and Assets Using Salesforce Pricing
Create derived price records to determine a product's price by using another pricing source, such as a product or an asset. Incorporate
a wide range of pricing factors and enhance pricing accuracy and accurate pricing for your derived products.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Revenue Lifecycle Management
is enabled.
IN THIS SECTION:
Ensure Precise Pricing for a Derived Product
Define pricing rules by creating derived price records for products assigned as derived products in your organization’s price book.
Derived pricing rules ensure precise pricing for derived products by leveraging other internal products and assets.
Accurately Calculate Derived Prices with Pricing Contributors
Use discovery elements to retrieve contributing pricing factors from appropriate lookup tables to accurately access pricing data and
calculate a product's derived price. This pricing data is written into a context definition by using custom context nodes. Create a
discovery procedure and set the usage type as Pricing Discovery to locate the pricing data stored in the context definition.
Dynamically Calculate Product Prices Using the Derived Price Element
Convert your previously defined pricing policies into pricing procedures that calculate a product’s derived price. Add the Derived
Price element to a pricing procedure and use the pricing data fetched from the discovery procedure to calculate the product’s
derived price.
Ensure Precise Pricing for a Derived Product

Define pricing rules by creating derived price records for products assigned as derived products in your organization’s price book. Derived
pricing rules ensure precise pricing for derived products by leveraging other internal products and assets.
is enabled.
How: Create a price book entry for a product and select Is Derived. Ensure that the list price of the derived product is 0.
Then, from the App Launcher, find Derived Prices and create a derived price record.
513
Accurately Calculate Derived Prices with Pricing Contributors

Use discovery elements to retrieve contributing pricing factors from appropriate lookup tables to accurately access pricing data and
calculate a product's derived price. This pricing data is written into a context definition by using custom context nodes. Create a discovery
procedure and set the usage type as Pricing Discovery to locate the pricing data stored in the context definition.
is enabled.
How: From the App Launcher, search for and create a discovery procedure with Pricing Discovery as the usage type.
The discovery procedure uses three pricing elements to help locate pricing data to calculate the derived price.
• Fetch Pricing Rules: Locate products that apply pricing rules to your derived price element.
• Map Products: Map the products used to derive prices from each other.
• Asset Discovery: Locate assets that apply pricing rules to your derived price element.
Dynamically Calculate Product Prices Using the Derived Price Element

Convert your previously defined pricing policies into pricing procedures that calculate a product’s derived price. Add the Derived Price
element to a pricing procedure and use the pricing data fetched from the discovery procedure to calculate the product’s derived price.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Developer, Enterprise, and Unlimited editions where Revenue Lifecycle Management
is enabled.
514
How: In the Pricing Procedure Builder, add the Derived Price element.
Automatically Populate Output Variables for Pricing Elements

Set default mappings for specific output columns of lookup tables associated with the List Price and Price Adjustment Matrix elements
to reduce manual user entry. You can set default mapping only for the unit price, adjustment type, and adjustment value variables.
is enabled.
How: From Setup, search and and select Pricing Recipes. Then, select a pricing recipe and go to the Price Adjustment Matrix tab.
Choose either the List Price or Custom Discount pricing component type, and set default mappings.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Modify Price Adjustment Matrices (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Use the Assignment element in a pricing procedure to set and change the context tag values of variables. Give your users the flexibility
to customise a variable's value within a pricing procedure and enable their business to optimise their pricing strategies for maximum
effectiveness.
is enabled.
515
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Assignment (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Set profile-level access to grant access to all pricing elements in a pricing procedure. Based on the security level you set, only the users
who have access can see pricing information, and the decisions made and displayed in the Waterfall view after a pricing procedure runs.
is enabled.
Tailor Pricing Discounts for Your Business Using Contract-Based Pricing

Implement contract-based pricing to set discounts to specific business conditions using the predefined Contract Pricing Entries lookup
table. Establish pricing rules linked to contracts, using List Price, Volume Discounts, Tier Discounts, Attribute-Based Price, Bundle-Based
Price, and Price Adjustment Matrix elements. These contracted prices can override existing methods, including base price calculations
and various discount types. Turn on the contract-based pricing option in a pricing element and provide a value for the Contract Pricing
output variable.
is enabled.
516
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Contract-Based Pricing (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Monitor Your Pricing Data From the Operations Console

Get a complete overview of the pricing data from the Operations Console. At a glance, you see the data consumed when pricing
operations are performed and the event log files generated during the execution of pricing processes.
is enabled.
How: To generate event log files, from Setup, under Event Monitoring Settings, turn on Generate event log files.
From the App Launcher, search for and select Operations Console.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Operations Console (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Comprehensively Track Product Cost by Using Cost Books

Create and organize multiple cost books to define expenses that occur when you create a product. Set a default cost book and create
individual cost book entries to track all the cost factors associated with product creation.
517
is enabled.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create a Cost Book (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Add a Cost Book Entry (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
The modification of Lightning components, Salesforce Lightning Design System (SLDS) styles, and custom properties help your users
use the new record pickers to search for any price book. They are no longer required to depend on the limited options in a dropdown..
Previously, the Choose Price Book component was on a type picklist and couldn’t show more than 2000 records.
is enabled.

Do more with these new Salesforce Pricing objects.
Track the total cost of a product
Use the new CostBook object.
Associate each cost factor in your cost book with a price
Use the new CostBookEntry object.
Calculate the price of a product from another product or asset
Use the new PriceBookEntryDerivedPrice object.
Localize product selling model names
Use the new ProductSellingModelDataTranslation object. Translation Workbench must be enabled for your org.
Capture the price of a product on a contract
Use the new ContractItemPrice object.
Connect REST APIs

Learn more about the updates to the Connect REST APIs in Salesforce Pricing.
IN THIS SECTION:
Get to know the new and changed resources in Salesforce Pricing.
SEE ALSO:
Revenue Lifecycle Management Developer Guide: Salesforce Pricing Business APIs

Get to know the new and changed resources in Salesforce Pricing.
518
Get the source product for the Price Book Entry (PBE) derived pricing
Make a POST request to the /connect/core-pricing/pbeDerivedPricingSourceProduct resource.
New request body: PBE Derived Pricing Input
New response body: PBE Derived Pricing
Get the persisted price waterfall
Make a POST request to the /connect/core-pricing/waterfall/lineItemId/executionId resource.
New query parameter: tagsToFilter

Price Context (POST) and Pricing (POST)

Configuration Override Input
• discoveryProcedure—Name of the discovery procedure to use to fetch the details of assets.
• skipDiscovery—Indicates whether the discovery procedure must be skipped.
New Metadata Type

Learn more about the new metadata type in Salesforce Pricing.
Metadata Type
Manage the settings for Salesforce Pricing
Use the new IndustriesPricingSettings metadata type. Introduced in API version 60.0, this metadata type is now added to the Revenue
Lifecycle Management Developer Guide.
SEE ALSO:
Revenue Lifecycle Management Developer Guide: IndustriesPricingSettings
Easily manage product compatibility and validation with actionable configuration rules. Build flexible bundles by searching and adding
qualified products in real-time. Configure products with the currency and percentage attributes that reflect real-world values such as
discounts and fees.
IN THIS SECTION:
Increase Productivity with Actionable Configuration Rules
Easily manage product compatibility and validation with actionable configuration rules. Use these rules to automatically add or
remove products, set product quantities, specify attribute values for products, and display informative messages. You can now create
a rule for a product or a product bundle with up to three conditions, three actions, and eight sub-conditions. This enhanced
functionality simplifies product configuration, reduces errors, and streamlines the entire process.
519

Add products to a bundle when you configure a product. Sales reps can now search and add qualified products to a bundle in
real-time, and create flexible and customized sales packages. Additionally, sales reps can add the same product multiple times with
a unique name-attribute identifier.
Enhance Product Configuration with Additional Data Types
You can now configure products with the currency and percentage attributes that reflect real-world values like discounts and fees.
These attributes are supported in the Product You can now configure products with the currency and percentage data types that
reflect real-world values such as discounts and fees. These data types are supported in the Product Configurator Flow, Configurator
UI, and Headless API, and provide a smooth data intake
Increase Service Adaptability With Custom Field and Field Mapping Support
Revenue Lifecycle Management now supports custom field mapping for operations such as quote creation, order creation, asset
creation, asset update, and contract creation. Add custom fields to Revenue Lifecycle Management objects to meet your business
goals. Map the custom fields between objects in the transaction lifecycle for your sales reps. Use the option to map additional fields
to enhance the adaptability and utility of Revenue Lifecycle Management service.
New and Changed Objects for Product Configurator
Do more with the new and changed objects in Product Configurator.
Connect REST APIs
Learn more about the new and changed Connect REST APIs in Product Configurator.
Increase Productivity with Actionable Configuration Rules

Easily manage product compatibility and validation with actionable configuration rules. Use these rules to automatically add or remove
products, set product quantities, specify attribute values for products, and display informative messages. You can now create a rule for
a product or a product bundle with up to three conditions, three actions, and eight sub-conditions. This enhanced functionality simplifies
product configuration, reduces errors, and streamlines the entire process.
and Product Configurator are enabled.

Add products to a bundle when you configure a product. Sales reps can now search and add qualified products to a bundle in real-time,
and create flexible and customized sales packages. Additionally, sales reps can add the same product multiple times with a unique
name-attribute identifier.
Enhance Product Configuration with Additional Data Types

You can now configure products with the currency and percentage attributes that reflect real-world values like discounts and fees. These
attributes are supported in the Product You can now configure products with the currency and percentage data types that reflect
real-world values such as discounts and fees. These data types are supported in the Product Configurator Flow, Configurator UI, and
Headless API, and provide a smooth data intake
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Developer, Enterprise, and Unlimited editions where Revenue Lifecycle
Management and Product Configurator are enabled.
520
Increase Service Adaptability With Custom Field and Field Mapping Support
Revenue Lifecycle Management now supports custom field mapping for operations such as quote creation, order creation, asset creation,
asset update, and contract creation. Add custom fields to Revenue Lifecycle Management objects to meet your business goals. Map the
custom fields between objects in the transaction lifecycle for your sales reps. Use the option to map additional fields to enhance the
adaptability and utility of Revenue Lifecycle Management service.
Why: With support for custom field mapping, the values are passed from object to object as your transaction moves from one stage to
the other. For example, add a unique Installation Date field, that can be configured in Product Configurator, modified in Quote and Order
Capture, and assetized in Asset Lifecycle.
New and Changed Objects for Product Configurator

Do more with the new and changed objects in Product Configurator.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Developer, Enterprise, and Unlimited editions for Industries clouds where Revenue
Lifecycle Management and Product Configurator are enabled.
Changed Object
Specify the order for executing the configuration rule
Use the new Sequence field in the ProductConfigurationRule object.
Connect REST APIs

Learn more about the new and changed Connect REST APIs in Product Configurator.
IN THIS SECTION:
Get to know the resources available with Product Configurator.
SEE ALSO:
Revenue Lifecycle Management Developer Guide: Product Configurator Business APIs

Get to know the resources available with Product Configurator.
Add a child product line item as a node within a root product
Make a POST request to the /connect/cpq/configurator/actions/add-nodes resource.
New request body: Configurator Add Nodes Input
New response body: Configurator Add Nodes
Create a session by passing a transaction ID
Make a POST request to the /connect/cpq/configurator/actions/load-instance resource.
521
New request body: Configuration Load Instance Input

New response body: Configuration Load Instance
Create a session by passing a transaction JSON payload
Make a POST request to the /connect/cpq/configurator/actions/set-instance resource.
New request body: Configuration Set Instance Input
New response body: Configuration Set Instance
Delete product line items in a product configuration
Make a POST request to the /connect/cpq/configurator/actions/delete-nodes resource.
New request body: Configurator Delete Nodes Input
New response body: Configurator Delete Nodes
Get the JSON representation of a configuration instance
Make a POST request to the /connect/cpq/configurator/actions/get-instance resource.
New request body: Configuration Get Instance Input
New response body: Configuration Get Instance
Save a product configuration instance
Make a POST request to the /connect/cpq/configurator/actions/save-instance resource.
New request body: Configuration Save Instance Input
New response body: Configuration Save Instance
Set the quantity of a product
Make a POST request to the /connect/cpq/configurator/actions/set-product-quantity resource.
New request body: Product Quantity Set Configurator Input
New response body: Product Quantity Set Configurator
Update product line items in a product configuration
Make a POST request to the /connect/cpq/configurator/actions/update-nodes resource.
New request body: Configurator Update Nodes Input
New response body: Configurator Update Nodes

Configuration Load Instance (POST)

Configuration Load Instance
• configuratorUIModifications—Map of a sales transaction ID and a list of configurator UI modifications.
Configuration Set Instance (POST)

Configuration Set Instance
522
Product Set Quantity (POST)

Product Quantity Set Configurator
Configurator Add Nodes (POST)

Configurator Add Nodes
Configurator Update Nodes (POST)

Configurator Update Nodes
Configurator Delete Nodes (POST)

Configurator Delete Nodes
Configuration (POST)
Configuration Details
• uiModifications—Map of a sales transaction ID and a list of configurator UI modifications.

Enhance the selling experience with Transaction Line Editor enhancements. Use custom fields to extend Revenue Lifecycle Management.
Display unique prices depending on the type of transaction. Generate professional quote documents with Document Builder in Revenue
Lifecycle Management. Estimate the tax on your orders. Submit orders to Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator for fulfillment or automatically
submit eligible orders for fulfillment.
IN THIS SECTION:
Customize the transaction experience for partner users. Manage transactions better with enhancements to the Transaction Line
Editor. Know when prices in a transaction are inaccurate and easily refresh them.
Extend Revenue Lifecycle Management With Custom Field Support
Revenue Lifecycle Management now supports custom field mapping for operations such as quote creation, order creation, asset
creation, asset update, and contract creation. Add custom fields to Revenue Lifecycle Management objects. Map the custom fields
between objects in the transaction lifecycle for your sales reps. Map additional fields apart from the predefined set of fields, to
enhance the adaptability and utility of Revenue Lifecycle Management.
523
Customize Prices for Different Types of Transactions

Trigger different pricing procedures based on the type of transaction by using the Sales Transaction Type object. For each type of
transaction, create Sales Transaction Type records and assign pricing procedures to them. For example, create a Sales Transaction
Type for B2B or B2B2C transactions with their own pricing procedures. Use Flow builder to default to specific types or give your sales
reps permission to override the types. Sales reps can create transactions for different businesses or types of customers, and automatically
see the right prices and discounts.
Craft Professional Quote Documents with Document Builder
Give your quote documents an enhanced and professional look by using the capabilities of Document Builder. Use the branding of
documents, embedded images, document preview, and the PDF generation features, to ensure that your documents reflect your
business goals and meet your customer needs. Drag the standard components in Document Builder onto the Template Builder and
easily create beautiful, formatted document templates.
Get Better Cost Estimates by Including Tax Information on Orders
Sales reps, partners, and customers can now view estimated taxes on their orders. When an order is created from a quote, the tax
information from the quote is automatically copied to the order. If users make any changes that impact prices on the order, the tax
is recalculated. Users can navigate to order product pages to view information such as the tax treatment that was applied and the
total amount with tax. They can open the related Order Product Tax Line Item record to view more information such as tax type, tax
rate, and the tax effective date.
To submit orders to Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator for fulfillment, use the submitOrder invocable action from flows or Apex classes.
You can use flows and Apex classes to enable sales reps and sales operations reps to manually submit orders or to automatically
submit eligible orders for fulfillment. After an order is submitted for orchestration, sales reps can view the fulfillment status.
New and Changed Objects in Quote and Order Capture
Access more data through these new objects and fields.

Customize the transaction experience for partner users. Manage transactions better with enhancements to the Transaction Line Editor.
Know when prices in a transaction are inaccurate and easily refresh them.
IN THIS SECTION:
Accurately Derive Prices in Quotes and Orders
Sales reps can now see automated and customizable prices in the Transaction Line Editor that are priced based on another pricing
source, such as a product or an asset. Automatically apply pre-defined pricing rules based on customizable formulas so your sales
reps can quickly generate tailored and accurate pricing proposals. Also, sales reps can use the Price Waterfall to see a breakdown of
the prices.
Customize the Transaction Experience for Your Partner Users
Customize the Transaction Line Editor and transaction summary so that your partner users see the right data on their quotes and
orders. Also, enable the side panel in the Transaction Line Editor to see the details of all fields for a product.
Edit Transaction Line Items in Bulk
Select multiple line items in the Transaction Line Editor and update the data for all the items. For example, your sales reps can update
the quantity for multiple items in a transaction in just one action.
Enhance the Transaction Experience for Your Sales Reps
Enhance the productivity of your sales reps with improvements to the Transaction Line Editor.
524
Quickly Search and Add Products Across All Catalogs

Previously, in the Add Products search field, the Transaction Line Editor displayed products only from the first catalog. Now, the Add
Products search field displays products from all your catalogs so your sales reps can quickly add products from any catalog to their
transaction.
Refresh Inaccurate Prices
When your transaction contains outdated prices, the Transaction Line Editor displays a warning. If necessary, your sales reps can
refresh the prices. The reps can also manually update the Validation Status field to submit the transaction.
You can visually track the changes you’re making to your quotes or orders. When you’re amending, renewing, or canceling line items
you see easy to read visual badges showing your current actions. Reduce errors and spend less time reviewing and finalizing changes
to your customer’s multiline quotes or orders.
Accurately Derive Prices in Quotes and Orders

Sales reps can now see automated and customizable prices in the Transaction Line Editor that are priced based on another pricing
source, such as a product or an asset. Automatically apply pre-defined pricing rules based on customizable formulas so your sales reps
can quickly generate tailored and accurate pricing proposals. Also, sales reps can use the Price Waterfall to see a breakdown of the prices.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Unlimited, Enterprise, and Developer editions for Industries clouds where Revenue
Lifecycle Management is enabled.
Why: Define formulas to dynamically calculate the prices for products based on a related product. Say, the insurance for an iPhone is
10% of the iPhone’s price. Use derived pricing to dynamically calculate the price of the insurance rather than manually setting the price
of insurance for each product.
How: Create a pricing procedure by using the updated SalesTransactionContext context definition template, the new predefined Pricing
Procedure template, and a decision table that contains the IsDerived field.
Customize the Transaction Experience for Your Partner Users

Customize the Transaction Line Editor and transaction summary so that your partner users see the right data on their quotes and orders.
Also, enable the side panel in the Transaction Line Editor to see the details of all fields for a product.
Where: This change applies to Aura sites accessed through Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where
Revenue Lifecycle Management is enabled.
Who: To use this feature, users must have the Revenue Lifecycle Management Add-On license. Partner community users need a Partner
Community, Partner Community Login, Channel Account, or a Gold Partner license.
How: Edit your Experience Cloud page and click the component that you want to customize. In the properties pane, customize the
component to add or remove fields, or enable the side panel for the Transaction Line Editor. For example, move the fields that you want
to show to the Selected section, and rearrange them as necessary.
Edit Transaction Line Items in Bulk

Select multiple line items in the Transaction Line Editor and update the data for all the items. For example, your sales reps can update
the quantity for multiple items in a transaction in just one action.
How: In the Transaction Line Editor, select the line items and click the field that you want to update. Edit or select a value and save your
changes.
525
Enhance the Transaction Experience for Your Sales Reps

Enhance the productivity of your sales reps with improvements to the Transaction Line Editor.
Why: The Transaction Line Editor helps your sales reps to:
• Easily refer to rows with row numbers. Say, you’re a sales rep that wants to verify with a sales operation rep that a large quantity of
laptop line items can be fulfilled. When screen sharing the transaction with them, refer to its row number. Then, you can submit the
transaction knowing it can be fulfilled.
• Free up rows by hiding the filter rows.
• See links and images for products. For example, see images for products so that they can be easily identified.
Quickly Search and Add Products Across All Catalogs

Previously, in the Add Products search field, the Transaction Line Editor displayed products only from the first catalog. Now, the Add
Products search field displays products from all your catalogs so your sales reps can quickly add products from any catalog to their
transaction.
How: In the Add Product search field of the Transaction Line Editor, search for a product. The names of the products and the names of
their catalogs appear.
526
Refresh Inaccurate Prices

When your transaction contains outdated prices, the Transaction Line Editor displays a warning. If necessary, your sales reps can refresh
the prices. The reps can also manually update the Validation Status field to submit the transaction.
How: In the warning message above the Transaction Line Editor, click Refresh Prices.

Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Developer, and Unlimited editions where Revenue Lifecycle Management
is enabled.
Why: The additional badges in the quote or order transaction line table make it clear what you are changing on each quote or order.
Note: These badges don’t appear on new or initial sale quotes or orders. They only appear when changes are made to quotes or
orders for amendments, renewals, or cancellations.
How: The badges appear by default. You can hide them in the current session by selecting Hide Badges in the product name column
options.
527
Extend Revenue Lifecycle Management With Custom Field Support

Revenue Lifecycle Management now supports custom field mapping for operations such as quote creation, order creation, asset creation,
asset update, and contract creation. Add custom fields to Revenue Lifecycle Management objects. Map the custom fields between
objects in the transaction lifecycle for your sales reps. Map additional fields apart from the predefined set of fields, to enhance the
adaptability and utility of Revenue Lifecycle Management.
Why: With support for custom field mapping, the values pass from object to object as your transaction moves from one stage to the
other. For example, add a unique Installation Date field that you can configure in Product Configurator, modify in Quote and Order
Capture, and assetize in Asset Lifecycle.
Customize Prices for Different Types of Transactions

Trigger different pricing procedures based on the type of transaction by using the Sales Transaction Type object. For each type of
transaction, create Sales Transaction Type records and assign pricing procedures to them. For example, create a Sales Transaction Type
for B2B or B2B2C transactions with their own pricing procedures. Use Flow builder to default to specific types or give your sales reps
permission to override the types. Sales reps can create transactions for different businesses or types of customers, and automatically see
the right prices and discounts.
Craft Professional Quote Documents with Document Builder

Give your quote documents an enhanced and professional look by using the capabilities of Document Builder. Use the branding of
documents, embedded images, document preview, and the PDF generation features, to ensure that your documents reflect your business
goals and meet your customer needs. Drag the standard components in Document Builder onto the Template Builder and easily create
beautiful, formatted document templates.
is enabled.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Document Builder User permission set.
How: To enable the feature, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Revenue Settings, and then select Revenue Settings.
Turn on Document Builder.
To create quote document templates, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Document Builder, and then select Document
Builder.
To view the document configured by using Document Builder, on the quotes record page, click Generate Document.
Get Better Cost Estimates by Including Tax Information on Orders

Sales reps, partners, and customers can now view estimated taxes on their orders. When an order is created from a quote, the tax
information from the quote is automatically copied to the order. If users make any changes that impact prices on the order, the tax is
recalculated. Users can navigate to order product pages to view information such as the tax treatment that was applied and the total
amount with tax. They can open the related Order Product Tax Line Item record to view more information such as tax type, tax rate, and
the tax effective date.
How: Set up a tax engine, create a tax policy, and then enable the Include Estimated Tax in Quotes and Orders setting.
528

To submit orders to Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator for fulfillment, use the submitOrder invocable action from flows or Apex classes. You
can use flows and Apex classes to enable sales reps and sales operations reps to manually submit orders or to automatically submit
eligible orders for fulfillment. After an order is submitted for orchestration, sales reps can view the fulfillment status.
Lifecycle Management and Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator are enabled.
Who: Users with the Order Submit User permission set can submit orders to Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator for fulfillment.
New and Changed Objects in Quote and Order Capture

Access more data through these new objects and fields.
Store information about the type of a sales transaction
Use the new SalesTransactionType object.
Also, use these new objects.
• SalesTransactionTypeOwnerSharingRule
• SalesTransactionTypeShare
View if a quote was configured and priced by Revenue Lifecycle Management
Use the new ValidationResult field in the Quote object.
View if an order was configured and priced by Revenue Lifecycle Management
Use the new ValidationResult field in the Order object.
View the orchestration submission status of an order
Use the new OrchestrationSbmsStatus field in the Order object.
View the price and tax calculation status of an order
Use the new CalculationStatus field in the Order object.
Specify a custom name that overrides the name of an order item
Use the new CustomProductName field in the OrderItem object.
Specify the number of terms in the subscription of an order item
Use the new SubscriptionTerm field in the OrderItem object.
Specify the status and the template used to create a quote document
Use the new Status and DocumentTemplate fields in the QuoteDocument object.
Capture a price of a product on a contract
Use the new ContractItemPrice and ContractItemPriceHistory objects.
Set the pricing source and renewal terms on contracts
Use the new PricingSource, RenewalTerm2, and RenewalTermUnit fields on the existing Contract object.
Asset Lifecycle
Provide sales reps with insights into customer assets and help your company increase customer lifetime value by using Revenue Lifecycle
Management.
529
IN THIS SECTION:
The Assetize Orders flow is a standard assetization flow that provides added flexibility to users and streamlines the process of assetizing
orders. In the past, users needed to assetize their orders using external tools. With the Assetize Orders flow, asset managers can
activate an order with a click of a button in the Salesforce user interface. Users can customize the flow to their business needs so
that assets can be created on order activation and order fulfillment.
Use Contract Pricing to Apply Prices and Discounts
With Contract Pricing, sales reps can negotiate prices and discounts for products to be used in future transactions after the contract
is finalized. Automatically create contract prices from quote line prices or discounts by using a flow configuration or create contract
pricing on the contract itself. Sales reps can use and apply the negotiated contract pricing on new quotes or orders, renewals, or
amendments to satisfy customer’s pricing expectations.
Create Contract Prices and Discounts Using a Flow
Sales reps can create contract-based prices and discounts using the Create Contract From Quote flow. This flow allows a user to
create a contract from a quote and optionally capture quote line item prices or discounts in the contract.
Asset Conversion Tool for Transitioning from Subscription Management to Revenue Lifecycle Management
Using the Asset Conversion Tool, administrators can migrate existing Assets from the Subscription Management (SM) data model
to the Revenue Lifecycle Management (RLM) data model, ensuring uninterrupted asset lifecycle operations. The tool enables
continued Asset Management capabilities in RLM for Assets created in Subscription Management (SM). The conversion tool enables
asset data to be seamlessly migrated so customers can continue managing their install base. After the migration, previous SM assets
can be amended, renewed, or canceled in RLM.
Customer Community and Customer Community Plus Support for Asset Lifecycle
With Customer Community and Customer Community Plus support for Asset Lifecycle Management, both Customer Community
and Customer Community Plus users can see their assets so they can manage their install base. Customers have read-only access
to the Managed Asset Viewer.
With the Managed Asset Viewer, users can now view and edit asset data in a centralized location. Users can expand their view of an
asset by selecting the asset name, thus enabling the side panel to see additional details including attributes. Users can also edit data
within the Asset Viewer or via the Side Panel. To navigate to the Asset Record, click View on the row action of an asset.
Access more data through this new object.

The Assetize Orders flow is a standard assetization flow that provides added flexibility to users and streamlines the process of assetizing
orders. In the past, users needed to assetize their orders using external tools. With the Assetize Orders flow, asset managers can activate
an order with a click of a button in the Salesforce user interface. Users can customize the flow to their business needs so that assets can
be created on order activation and order fulfillment.
Where: This change applies to customers with Revenue Lifecycle Management enabled.
Who: To use the Assetize Orders flow, customers need a Revenue Lifecycle Management license.
530
How: Asset managers can implement an order-to-asset flow that automatically creates assets from their Revenue Lifecycle Management
order items. Assets are created when an order changes to Activated or Fulfilled status. Customers can modify the flow — for example,
to assetize the order based on a different order status — or they can create a new flow.
Use Contract Pricing to Apply Prices and Discounts

With Contract Pricing, sales reps can negotiate prices and discounts for products to be used in future transactions after the contract is
finalized. Automatically create contract prices from quote line prices or discounts by using a flow configuration or create contract pricing
on the contract itself. Sales reps can use and apply the negotiated contract pricing on new quotes or orders, renewals, or amendments
to satisfy customer’s pricing expectations.
is enabled.
Who: Sales reps with the Salesforce Pricing Design Time User permission set can use this feature.
Why:
With Contract Pricing, you can:
• Create a contract from a quote.
• Create contract prices and discounts on the contract itself.
• Apply contract prices when pricing a quote or order.
• Apply contract discounts to a quote or order.
• Amend or renew assets to maintain negotiated prices.
How:
From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Revenue Settings, and then select Revenue Settings. Turn on Access Revenue Lifecycle
Management Features.
Create Contract Prices and Discounts Using a Flow

Sales reps can create contract-based prices and discounts using the Create Contract From Quote flow. This flow allows a user to create
a contract from a quote and optionally capture quote line item prices or discounts in the contract.
is enabled.
Who: Admins and users with the Manage Flow permission can create contracts from quotes.
Why: The Create Contract From Quote flow helps sales reps give customers the contract prices and discounts that they establish in their
business relationship for future use. They can also create a contract without capturing any contract-based prices or discounts.
How: In Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter flow, and then select Flows under Process Automation. Select the Create Contract From
Quote screen flow from the All Flows list. To suit your business, customize the standard flow.

is enabled.
Why: The additional badges in the quote or order transaction line table make it clear what you are changing on each quote or order.
531
Note: These badges don’t appear on new or initial sale quotes or orders. They only appear when changes are made to quotes or
orders for amendments, renewals, or cancellations.
How: The badges appear by default. You can hide them in the current session by selecting Hide Badges in the product name column
options.
Asset Conversion Tool for Transitioning from Subscription Management to Revenue Lifecycle
Management
Using the Asset Conversion Tool, administrators can migrate existing Assets from the Subscription Management (SM) data model to
the Revenue Lifecycle Management (RLM) data model, ensuring uninterrupted asset lifecycle operations. The tool enables continued
Asset Management capabilities in RLM for Assets created in Subscription Management (SM). The conversion tool enables asset data to
be seamlessly migrated so customers can continue managing their install base. After the migration, previous SM assets can be amended,
renewed, or canceled in RLM.
Where: The Asset Conversion Tool is an open-source tool for Salesforce customers. The tool is called the SMToRLMAssetConversionTool
and is publicly available on GitHub.
How: The GitHub page outlines the process of transforming assets from the SM Assets data structure to align with the RLM Assets data
format. The person executing the Apex script that runs the tool has read and/or update access on required fields for Asset Actions, Asset
Action Sources, Asset Relationships, Order Items, Order Item Relationships, and Product Related Components. Customers can invoke the
tool in an Execute Anonymous window on the developer console, or as part of any Apex script. They can then specify a list of Asset IDs
they want to convert and call the convert function. Debug logs will indicate if the code executed without error.
532
Customer Community and Customer Community Plus Support for Asset Lifecycle
With Customer Community and Customer Community Plus support for Asset Lifecycle Management, both Customer Community and
Customer Community Plus users can see their assets so they can manage their install base. Customers have read-only access to the
Managed Asset Viewer.
Where: This change applies to Sales Cloud and Service Cloud in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions
with a Revenue Lifecycle Management license and an Experience Cloud license. This change also applies to Aura, LWR, and Visualforce
sites accessed through Lightning Experience in the same editions.
Who: Users can access this feature under the following conditions: They can customize customer communities and can access the
components in the Experience Builder OR they’re authenticated external users who are meant to access Asset Lifecycle features.
How: Create a custom permission set for the Customer Community or Customer Community Plus user license you wish to give access
to. Under System Permissions, enable Manage Revenue Lifecycle Management and any combination of “Amend Assets”, “Cancel Assets”,
“Manage Assets”, or “Renew Assets”. Under “Object Settings” grant Read access to Assets, Asset State Periods, Orders, and Price Books.
Assign the permission set to a Customer Community or Customer Community Plus user.

With the Managed Asset Viewer, users can now view and edit asset data in a centralized location. Users can expand their view of an
asset by selecting the asset name, thus enabling the side panel to see additional details including attributes. Users can also edit data
within the Asset Viewer or via the Side Panel. To navigate to the Asset Record, click View on the row action of an asset.
Where: This change applies to Sales Cloud and Service Cloud in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions
with a Revenue Lifecycle Management license. This change also applies to Aura, LWR, and Visualforce sites accessed through Lightning
Experience in the same editions.
Who: Users with the Customize Application permission can add the Asset Viewer component to the accounts record page and can
configure which columns are shown in the Asset Viewer. Users with Read access to Account record pages can use the search, sort, and
filtering features in the Asset Viewer.
How: To access the Managed Asset Viewer, make sure that the Assets-related list is on the Account record page. In Lightning App Builder,
drag the Managed Asset Viewer to the Account record page, and select the checkbox to show the side panel when a user clicks a record
link.

Access more data through this new object.
Store key-value pairs for asset attributes in asset state periods
Use the new AssetStatePeriodAttribute object.
Introduced in API version 60.0, this object is now added to the Revenue Lifecycle Management Developer Guide.

Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator, or DRO, is a flexible order fulfillment product that is natively built on the Salesforce platform and
embedded into end-to-end sales processes. DRO provides a complete view of the entire fulfillment design and runtime, including order
decomposition and fulfillment plans, plus jeopardy management, and a graphic UI for enriching products with data.
533
IN THIS SECTION:
Enable Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator for Your Org
Enable Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator to work in your org and select the user license. Doing so allows you to get the full power of
Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator.
Administrators can grant permissions to certain groups of people, allowing them the access they need. For example, a fulfillment
operator has to see how an order progresses, but doesn’t need access to admin tools. You can also ask someone like a sales rep to
submit an order without requiring full access to decomp and orchestration.
See Your Fulfillment at a Glance from the Home Page
From the Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator home page, you can view the most important things about your fulfillment, whether that’s
orders in progress, failed fulfillment steps, pending tasks, and so on. With a click, you can see more details about any aspect of
fulfillment that you want to.
Create Decomposition Rules that define the way that Order Line Items decompose during runtime. You can also add conditions that
control when, or whether, such an item is decomposed at all. Then set the scope to determine how many instances of a Fulfillment
Order Line Item are created.
Create fulfillment steps and organize their dependencies directly within an intuitive graphic interface. Set up reusable step groups
and order them by clicking and dragging.
Using a point and click graphical interface, set up rules for how downstream Fulfillment Order Line Items are enriched with data
from Order Line Items. You can choose to pass on a direct copy of the value from the Order Line Item, or set up paired lists of data.
For example, a location can be passed as a post code.
View and work within a graphical interface showing product decomposition. The Decomposition Viewer shows exactly how fulfillment
order items were decomposed, helping to validate the correctness of order decomposition, as well as quickly troubleshoot any
fallout.
View every fulfillment step as it flows through the fulfillment process. See the status of every step and its dependencies in the
Fulfillment Plan graphical interface. With a single click from the plan, you can change the state of a fulfillment step or see its details.
Set up criteria for alerts to let you know when a fulfillment step is taking longer than expected to complete. You can set up when
it’s in jeopardy and when it’s late. The steps are added to a list and appear in a different color in the Fulfillment Plan Viewer.
Manage Fallout
Set up how fulfillment steps are handled when they fail. For example, you can define how many times a step is retried. When an
order is running, you can see in the Orchestration Plan or a list view which ones have fallen out, and retry or complete them directly.
Do more with these new Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator objects.
Learn more about the new metadata type in Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator.
Use the new invocable action in Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator.
534
Enable Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator for Your Org

Enable Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator to work in your org and select the user license. Doing so allows you to get the full power of
Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in Developer, Enterprise, and Unlimited editions where Revenue Lifecycle
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator Settings and select it.

Administrators can grant permissions to certain groups of people, allowing them the access they need. For example, a fulfillment operator
has to see how an order progresses, but doesn’t need access to admin tools. You can also ask someone like a sales rep to submit an
order without requiring full access to decomp and orchestration.
See Your Fulfillment at a Glance from the Home Page

From the Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator home page, you can view the most important things about your fulfillment, whether that’s
orders in progress, failed fulfillment steps, pending tasks, and so on. With a click, you can see more details about any aspect of fulfillment
that you want to.

Create Decomposition Rules that define the way that Order Line Items decompose during runtime. You can also add conditions that
control when, or whether, such an item is decomposed at all. Then set the scope to determine how many instances of a Fulfillment
Order Line Item are created.
How: From the App Launcher, launch Product Fulfillment Decomposition Rules.

Create fulfillment steps and organize their dependencies directly within an intuitive graphic interface. Set up reusable step groups and
order them by clicking and dragging.
How: From the App Launcher, launch Fulfillment Workspaces.

Using a point and click graphical interface, set up rules for how downstream Fulfillment Order Line Items are enriched with data from
Order Line Items. You can choose to pass on a direct copy of the value from the Order Line Item, or set up paired lists of data. For example,
a location can be passed as a post code.
535
How: From a Decomposition Rule, click the Fields & Attributes Mapping tab. Then click the source and the target directly in the
interface. After you’ve linked the source and target, you’re asked for more details.

View and work within a graphical interface showing product decomposition. The Decomposition Viewer shows exactly how fulfillment
order items were decomposed, helping to validate the correctness of order decomposition, as well as quickly troubleshoot any fallout.
How: From an order, click the Fulfillment Lines tab.

View every fulfillment step as it flows through the fulfillment process. See the status of every step and its dependencies in the Fulfillment
Plan graphical interface. With a single click from the plan, you can change the state of a fulfillment step or see its details.
Why: In the Fulfillment Plan Viewer, Fulfillment Operators can see what's happening with their order. They can see the dependencies
between steps, which steps have been completed, and so on. They can also complete a task directly from their workspace, and get more
information about that task.
How: From the App Launcher, find and select Fulfillment Plans, and then edit a fulfillment plan or create one.

Set up criteria for alerts to let you know when a fulfillment step is taking longer than expected to complete. You can set up when it’s in
jeopardy and when it’s late. The steps are added to a list and appear in a different color in the Fulfillment Plan Viewer.
How: To configure jeopardy settings, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Fallout and SLA Settings.
536
Manage Fallout
Set up how fulfillment steps are handled when they fail. For example, you can define how many times a step is retried. When an order
is running, you can see in the Orchestration Plan or a list view which ones have fallen out, and retry or complete them directly.
How: To configure fallout settings, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Fallout and SLA Settings.

Do more with these new Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator objects.
Define a step that must be executed during fulfillment orchestration
Use the new FulfillmentAsset object.
Use the new FulfillmentAssetAttrribute object.
Use the new FulfillmentFalloutRule object.
Use the new FulfillmentStepJeopardyRule object.
Use the new ProductFulfillmentDecompRule object.
Use the new FulfillmentStepDefinition object.
Create a group of fulfillment step definitions
Use the new FulfillmentStepDefinitionGroup object.
Create a dependency between two fulfillment step definitions
Use the new FulfillmentStepDependencyDefinition object.
Create a group of fulfillment step definitions
Use the new FulfillmentStepDefinitionGroup object.
Create a link between a product and the corresponding group of fulfillment steps that's necessary to fulfill that product
Use the new ProductFulfillmentScenario object.
Associate a fulfillment step with a type, like callout or manual task
Use the new FulfillmentStepType object.
Create a graphic view of the set up steps needed to fulfill an order
Use the new FulfillmentPlan object.
Create a fulfillment step that executes during fulfillment of an order
Use the new FulfillmentStep object.
Create a dependency between two fulfillment steps
Use the new FulfillmentStepDependency object.
Create a link between a fulfillment step and corresponding order lines
Use the new FulfillmentStepSource object.
537
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Salesforce Billing

Learn more about the new metadata type in Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator.
Salesforce Flow
Submit an order for fulfillment
Use the new submitOrder value in the existing actionType field, which is on the FlowActionCall subtype of the Flow
metadata type.
SEE ALSO:
Revenue Lifecycle Management Developer Guide: Flow for Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator

Use the new invocable action in Dynamic Revenue Orchestrator.
Submit an order for fulfillment
Use the new submitOrder action.
SEE ALSO:
Revenue Lifecycle Management Developer Guide: Submit Order Action
Salesforce Billing
Salesforce Billing provides usability improvements that make it easier to identify and fix batch invoice run errors.
IN THIS SECTION:
The invoice run clean-up process updates the status of invoice lines to Canceled. If the clean-up process encounters errors, decrease
the clean-up's batch size to help its completion. The improved error logs help you differentiate between invoice run and clean-up
errors.
New Metadata Type
Learn more about the new metadata type in Salesforce Billing.

The invoice run clean-up process updates the status of invoice lines to Canceled. If the clean-up process encounters errors, decrease the
clean-up's batch size to help its completion. The improved error logs help you differentiate between invoice run and clean-up errors.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions
of Salesforce Billing.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Installed Packages, and then select Installed Packages. Click Configure for
the Salesforce Billing package, go to the Invoice tab, and then turn on Invoice Run Clean Up.
From Object Manager or the Picklist Value Sets setup page, add the Completed with errors value to the CleanUp Status field of the Invoice
Run object.
538
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Salesforce Subscription Management
To define the invoice run clean-up batch size, configure the Invoice Run Clean Up Batch Size setting.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Invoice Package Settings (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Cleaning up Invoice Runs (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
New Metadata Type

Learn more about the new metadata type in Salesforce Billing.
Metadata Type
Manage the settings for Salesforce Billing
Use the new InvLatePymntRiskCalc metadata type. Introduced in API version 55.0, this metadata type is now added to the Revenue
Use the new CollectionsDashboard metadata type. Introduced in API version 56.0, this metadata type is now added to the Revenue

Learn more about the new metadata type in Salesforce Subscription Management.
Metadata Type
Manage the settings for Salesforce Subscription Management
Use the new SubscriptionManagementSettings metadata type. Introduced in API version 55.0, this metadata type is now added to
the Revenue Lifecycle Management Developer Guide.
Sales
Boost your sales teams’ results with new Einstein features, more actions, and improved performance and setup experiences. Sales rep’s
get a boost to their productivity with standard and custom list view actions in the Account, Contact, and Lead Intelligence views. Sales
teams have a bird’s-eye view of their conversations with customers with Conversation Signals. Use Generative Conversation Insights to
create custom insights for video calls and get answers to things such as customer sentiment or deal terms. Sales managers have more
flexibility in how they view forecasts. Enablement has an improved test and deploy experience for sales programs. And in Salesforce
Maps, users experience better performance when plotting for high-volume data.
IN THIS SECTION:
Einstein for Sales
Let Einstein draft sales emails from a sales rep’s inbox and include related information with generative AI. Ramp up on accounts and
opportunities by visualizing your contacts in a relationship map. Add buyer profile data to your contacts automatically to avoid
manual data entry. Sales reps can draft meeting request emails, with possible meeting slots and a link to the sender’s calendar, using
Einstein generative AI.
539
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Sales
Sales Foundations
Find your next best customer with the power of AI. Create contacts automatically from email and calendar activity. Apply personal
labels to organize and find records. Get more information on the Seller Home page. And boost productivity with the power of
standard and custom list view actions in the Account, Contact, and Lead Intelligence views.
Get a bird’s-eye view of your sales teams’ conversations with Conversation Signals. Using AI technology, Conversation Signals groups
different product or competitor mentions into relevant topics that you can dive into and explore. Another Einstein feature, Generative
Conversation Insights, allows you to create custom insights powered by generative AI. Einstein Conversation Insights can now process
single-user meetings. Users can also easily expand edit access to record collections, and we’ve rolled out more dashboard
improvements.
Sales Engagement
Link cadences, use screen flows as cadence steps, save cadences in any folder, and create and edit email templates in Cadence
Builder 2.0. Prepare for Cadence Builder Classic retirement.
Nurture relationships with stakeholders and identify opportunities to expand markets with lead metrics in the Einstein Account
Management Account Inspector. Update your revenue data more frequently with the new hourly app refresh schedule. Explore all
the Revenue Insights resources after a successful app installation using the Resources tab.
Sales managers can choose to review forecast rollups by team, then by forecast group or product family, or by group or product
family, then by team.
Pipeline Inspection
Boost productivity with the power of standard and custom list view actions in Pipeline Inspection. Get insight into potentially risky
contacts on a deal.
Elevate the performance, confidence, and impact of your sales team and drive business growth with a community of informed and
engaged partners. Give sales reps immediate, actionable feedback on their sales pitches, courtesy of Einstein, all in their flow of work.
Create programs that align with your most complex revenue metrics, and provide more transparency and accountability to users
who take your programs. Integrate the governance of your Enablement rollout with other Salesforce systems and processes.
Partner sellers can get help drafting personalized, thoughtful emails to their contacts and leads quickly with an assist from Einstein
generative AI.
Get a serious bump in processing performance while plotting high-volume data such as ArcGIS Online layers and complex shape
layers when you preview the new Salesforce Maps framework. Plan for and centralize your company’s unique segmentation, territories,
and quota targets in Sales Planning. And determine compensation for reps based on their effective territory assignment dates in
Enterprise Territory Management, now named Sales Territories.
Sales reps can use generative AI in their Salesforce email integrations. Inbox mobile has been retired. The retirement date for Salesforce
for Outlook has been extended.
As sales reps search for prospects on the internet, the Sales Cloud Everywhere Chrome extension keeps up with their web investigations.
And sales reps can choose which fields to see in their detail pages, and in which order.
Learn about other changes we made in Summer ‘24.
540
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Einstein for Sales
Einstein for Sales

Let Einstein draft sales emails from a sales rep’s inbox and include related information with generative AI. Ramp up on accounts and
opportunities by visualizing your contacts in a relationship map. Add buyer profile data to your contacts automatically to avoid manual
data entry. Sales reps can draft meeting request emails, with possible meeting slots and a link to the sender’s calendar, using Einstein
generative AI.
IN THIS SECTION:
Draft Personalized Sales Emails with Einstein
Einstein Sales Emails empowers busy sales reps to move quickly and expand deals through personalized and informed email content
that buyers love. Einstein uses your sales data to generate personalized emails for contacts and leads, a method known as grounding.
Sales reps can draft common emails, like a follow-up or a meeting invitation, by choosing an email type or by using generative AI.
Email types can include product information or related objects.
Control Whether Users Can Enter Their Own Sales Email Prompt Instructions
Sales reps can now enter prompt instructions for Einstein to use in creating a unique draft email. This feature is on by default. If your
company isn’t ready to let sales reps use generative AI to create sales emails, disable this feature.
Einstein Automated Contacts Is Being Retired in February 2025
To build content-rich profiles for all your contacts, we recommend moving to Automatic Contact Creation. This feature replaces
Einstein Automated Contacts and gives users new capabilities.
Improve the Convenience of Setting Up Meeting Requests
Empower your team to conveniently use AI-generated sales meeting requests and boost productivity. Your team can generate
customized emails to request meetings. When a seller asks Einstein to schedule a meeting with a customer, the Send Meeting
Request copilot action drafts an email to request for a meeting. The draft contains three possible meeting time slots and a link to
the sender’s calendar.
Close deals faster by visualizing your contacts in a relationship map. Let Einstein generative AI add buyer profile data to your contacts
automatically. No more manual data entry is required.
Draft Personalized Sales Emails with Einstein

Einstein Sales Emails empowers busy sales reps to move quickly and expand deals through personalized and informed email content
that buyers love. Einstein uses your sales data to generate personalized emails for contacts and leads, a method known as grounding.
Sales reps can draft common emails, like a follow-up or a meeting invitation, by choosing an email type or by using generative AI. Email
types can include product information or related objects.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in Performance and Unlimited editions. Einstein generative AI is available in
Lightning Experience.
To purchase Einstein for Sales, contact your Salesforce account executive.
Who: To use Einstein Sales Emails, users need the Einstein Sales Emails permission set. To let reps access the feature in Gmail or Outlook,
set up the Gmail or Outlook integration.
Why: Generative AI and large language models (LLMs) are the current talk of the town. But you need assurances that AI output is
trustworthy and accurate. You can rely on Salesforce to uphold our #1 value, trust, and treat your data with care and security at the
forefront.
How: In Lightning Experience, Einstein Sales Emails is built directly into the email composer. In Salesforce Outlook or Gmail integrations,
users can see Einstein generative AI features in the email application pane.
541
Start creating an email. Then click Draft with Einstein.
Choose between pre-made email instructions (1) or enter your own instructions (2) for Einstein and click Draft Email. The pre-made
instructions can be default instructions or custom instructions created by your company’s admin.
If the instructions use information from Salesforce, such as a product record, a selection window appears. Select or search for an existing
product and click Continue.
A proposed draft email appears for review.
542
Review and edit the email, and then send it.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Draft a Sales Email with Einstein Generative AI (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Control Whether Users Can Enter Their Own Sales Email Prompt Instructions
Sales reps can now enter prompt instructions for Einstein to use in creating a unique draft email. This feature is on by default. If your
company isn’t ready to let sales reps use generative AI to create sales emails, disable this feature.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in Performance and Unlimited editions, when using the Lightning email composer.
Einstein generative AI is available in Lightning Experience.
When: This feature became available on April 11, 2024.
Who: To use Sales Emails, users need the Einstein Sales Emails permission set. To let reps access the feature in Gmail or Outlook, set up
the Gmail or Outlook integration.
How: In Setup, enter Einstein for Sales and select Einstein for Sales.
543
Disable Add Email Prompt Instructions.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Control If Users Can Enter Their Own Sales Email Prompt Instructions (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Einstein Automated Contacts Is Being Retired in February 2025

To build content-rich profiles for all your contacts, we recommend moving to Automatic Contact Creation. This feature replaces Einstein
Automated Contacts and gives users new capabilities.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
How: When Einstein Automated Contacts is retired, Salesforce won’t suggest new contacts and opportunity contact roles. Salesforce
admins and users also lose access to Einstein Contact Suggestions and Einstein Opportunity Contact Role Suggestions items on the App
Launcher, the Added by Einstein list view, and other items.
SEE ALSO:
Knowledge Article: Einstein Automated Contacts Retirement
Improve the Convenience of Setting Up Meeting Requests

Empower your team to conveniently use AI-generated sales meeting requests and boost productivity. Your team can generate customized
emails to request meetings. When a seller asks Einstein to schedule a meeting with a customer, the Send Meeting Request copilot action
drafts an email to request for a meeting. The draft contains three possible meeting time slots and a link to the sender’s calendar.
Where: Einstein generative AI is available in Lightning Experience. This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance,
and Unlimited editions with the Einstein for Sales add-on. Setup for Einstein Copilot is available on the desktop site.
To purchase the Einstein for Sales add-on, contact your Salesforce account executive.
Who: This feature is available to users with the Send Meeting Request and Inbox Without Einstein Activity Capture permission sets. Users
also need the Use Einstein Copilot for Salesforce permission to access Copilot and the Execute Prompt Templates permission to run
prompt templates.
To let reps access the feature in Gmail or Outlook, set up the Gmail and Outlook integration.
544
How: To get started with the Send Meeting Request copilot action, turn on Einstein Generative AI in Setup. Next, turn on Make Inbox
Available to Users in the EmailIqSetup page. Then, turn on Einstein Copilot for Salesforce from the Einstein Copilot page in Setup. Your
new copilot is available on the Einstein Copilots page. Add the Send Meeting Request action and assign the required user permissions.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Copilot Action: Send Meeting Request
Salesforce Help: Set Up Send Meeting Request in Einstein Copilot
Salesforce Help: Set Up Einstein Copilot
Close deals faster by visualizing your contacts in a relationship map. Let Einstein generative AI add buyer profile data to your contacts
automatically. No more manual data entry is required.
IN THIS SECTION:
Visualize Key Contacts on the Buyer Relationship Map
On opportunities and accounts, you can now visualize contacts across company levels with the buyer relationship map. Discover
key stakeholders, deal champions, potential risks, and more. Let insights recommend contacts for you to add and update.
Let Einstein generative AI identify and add your contacts’ phone, address, title, seniority level, department group, and buyer attributes
automatically from email interactions. Build content-rich profiles for all your contacts to show on buyer relationship maps to help
close deals.

On opportunities and accounts, you can now visualize contacts across company levels with the buyer relationship map. Discover key
stakeholders, deal champions, potential risks, and more. Let insights recommend contacts for you to add and update.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Einstein 1 Sales Edition editions with
Sales Cloud that have Buyer Relationship Map enabled.
Why: For example, here’s a relationship map for the Global Media account. Contacts’ seniority level, department group, and buyer
attributes such as their role in the account are shown.
This relationship map for an Acme opportunity has insights to help you complete the map.
545
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter map, and then select Buyer Relationship Map. To show contacts on the map, contacts
must have values for Seniority Level and Department Group. To automatically complete these values from your email activity, enable
Automatic Contact Enhancements.
SEE ALSO:
Identify Potentially Risky Contacts on Deals
Salesforce Help: Buyer Relationship Map (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Let Einstein generative AI identify and add your contacts’ phone, address, title, seniority level, department group, and buyer attributes
automatically from email interactions. Build content-rich profiles for all your contacts to show on buyer relationship maps to help close
deals.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Einstein 1 Sales Edition, and
Developer editions with Sales Cloud that have Einstein Activity Capture enabled. Einstein generative AI is available in Lightning Experience.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter autocreation, and then select Autocreation Settings. Enable Automatic Contact
Enhancements.
To show contacts on a buyer relationship map, they must have values for Seniority Level and Department Group fields. Fill in these values
automatically by enabling Automatic Contact Enhancements.
Important: Automatic Contact Enhancements doesn't update contacts added by Automatic Contact Creation unless they're in
a Buyer Relationship Map.
SEE ALSO:
Einstein Features
Salesforce Help: Automatic Contact Enhancements (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: How Automatic Contact Enhancements Works with the Buyer Relationship Map (can be outdated or unavailable
Salesforce Help: Einstein Activity Capture (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
546
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Sales Foundations
Sales Foundations
Find your next best customer with the power of AI. Create contacts automatically from email and calendar activity. Apply personal labels
to organize and find records. Get more information on the Seller Home page. And boost productivity with the power of standard and
custom list view actions in the Account, Contact, and Lead Intelligence views.
IN THIS SECTION:
Contacts
Let Salesforce create contacts automatically from your email and calendar activity. Also, add buyer profile data to your contacts
automatically through Einstein generative AI.
Activities
The To Do list now saves filters, sort order, and side panel visibility.
Now users can apply their own labels to records to help them organize, track, and find the records they need quickly and easily. Add
labels to records related to a region, project, campaign, or anything else that helps keep work organized. Labels that users add to
records are separate from labels that are added to To Do List items.
See More Valuable Information in Seller Home
Seller Home now includes information about a user’s best prospects, forecast commit, and Salesblazer articles. With a fuller view of
their landscape, reps can pinpoint exactly where they need to start their day.
IdeaExchange Delivered: Save Time with More Actions in the Intelligence Views
Boost productivity with the power of standard and custom list view actions in the Account, Contact, and Lead Intelligence views.
For example, send an email to an entire list of contacts; change ownership for multiple leads; or add a label to a group of accounts.
Select up to 200 records and update them in bulk instead of one at a time. And, now you can update multiple records to the same
value inline. We delivered this feature thanks to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
Contacts
Let Salesforce create contacts automatically from your email and calendar activity. Also, add buyer profile data to your contacts automatically
through Einstein generative AI.
IN THIS SECTION:
Never create a contact from scratch again. You can also set a threshold to create or suggest contacts after they’re mentioned in your
email or event activity up to 3 times.
Enhance Your Contact Information Automatically
Use generative AI and Automatic Contact Enhancements to add phone, address, title, seniority level, department group, and buyer
attributes (such as decision maker or detractor) automatically to your contacts based on sales activity. You can show contacts with
this information on a buyer relationship map, which helps you visualize key players in your deal or account.
547

Never create a contact from scratch again. You can also set a threshold to create or suggest contacts after they’re mentioned in your
email or event activity up to 3 times.
Developer editions with Sales Cloud that have Einstein Activity Capture enabled.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter autocreation, and then select Autocreation Settings. Enable Automatic Contact
Creation and set a threshold as to how many times a person is mentioned in email or event activity before a contact is created or
suggested automatically.
On Seller Home, see how many contacts were automatically created in the last 7 days.
Important: Automatic Contact Enhancements doesn't update contacts added by Automatic Contact Creation unless they're in
a Buyer Relationship Map.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Automatic Contact Creation (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Einstein Activity Capture (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Enhance Your Contact Information Automatically

Use generative AI and Automatic Contact Enhancements to add phone, address, title, seniority level, department group, and buyer
attributes (such as decision maker or detractor) automatically to your contacts based on sales activity. You can show contacts with this
information on a buyer relationship map, which helps you visualize key players in your deal or account.
Developer editions with Sales Cloud that have Einstein Activity Capture enabled. Einstein generative AI is available in Lightning Experience.
SEE ALSO:
Einstein Features
Activities
The To Do list now saves filters, sort order, and side panel visibility.
548
IN THIS SECTION:
Return to Your To Do List Exactly as You Left It
The To Do List now helps users pick up right where they left off from the previous session by remembering their filters, sort order,
and side panel visibility.
Return to Your To Do List Exactly as You Left It

The To Do List now helps users pick up right where they left off from the previous session by remembering their filters, sort order, and
side panel visibility.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Professional, and Unlimited editions with Sales Cloud.

Now users can apply their own labels to records to help them organize, track, and find the records they need quickly and easily. Add
labels to records related to a region, project, campaign, or anything else that helps keep work organized. Labels that users add to records
are separate from labels that are added to To Do List items.
Why: When users add labels to records, they can quickly view all records with a specific label, as well as the list of labels they’ve created.
Each user creates and manages their own set of labels.
You can add labels to records on these objects.
• Account
• Cadence
• Cadence Step Tracker
• Call Script
• Campaign
• Contact
• Case
• Email Template
• Lead
• Opportunity
• Orchestration Work Item
• Task
• Custom objects
Personal labels added to records are separate from Topics, which other users can see.
How: To see the labels you've added to a record in the My Labels component, add the component to your page layouts.
549
View the list of labels you've created on the Labels home page.
On a label's record page, view the list of records with the label assigned.
550
The Label object can't be edited with the Object Manager. The page layout for label records also isn't editable.
Note: Standard user profiles include access to the Label object. If you use custom profiles, ensure users continue to have access
to To Do List labels and can begin using record labels by adding access to the Label object.
Grant Access to the Label Object In Custom Profiles To Continue Using To Do List
Labels (Release Update)
How: The Label object is available in user profiles. To let users assign labels to records and continue using labels in the To Do List, make
sure all user profiles include access to the Label object.
• Your standard profiles include access to the Label object automatically.
• For any custom profiles, you must add access to the Label object manually.
For more information, see Profiles in Salesforce Help.
See More Valuable Information in Seller Home

Seller Home now includes information about a user’s best prospects, forecast commit, and Salesblazer articles. With a fuller view of their
landscape, reps can pinpoint exactly where they need to start their day.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with Sales Cloud.
Why: With more useful information available at a glance, users can get oriented faster and choose what to do next. Seller Home now
includes three updated cards.
551
• Top Prospects—When Prospecting Center is enabled via Data Cloud, this card shows the user’s accounts with the top combined
Fit and Engagement scores.
• Goals—This card now includes the user's forecast commit and a link to the related forecast. This card appears when Forecasting is
enabled and the user has visited the Forecasts page.
• Salesblazer—Get expert advice from leaders in the sales community. This card links to the Salesblazer site for even more content.
Save Time with More Actions in the Intelligence Views

Boost productivity with the power of standard and custom list view actions in the Account, Contact, and Lead Intelligence views. For
example, send an email to an entire list of contacts; change ownership for multiple leads; or add a label to a group of accounts. Select
up to 200 records and update them in bulk instead of one at a time. And, now you can update multiple records to the same value inline.
We delivered this feature thanks to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with Sales Cloud.
How: Standard and custom quick actions from the list view appear as buttons on the Intelligence view, with additional actions in a
dropdown.
To mass update records, select one or more records from the table (1), and then apply the action (2). To update multiple records inline,
first select one or more records from the table. Then hover over a field. Similar to other list views, a pencil appears if the field is editable.
Select the pencil icon, then the checkbox indicating you want to update multiple items, and apply your changes (3).
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Mass Quick Actions (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
552
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Einstein Conversation Insights

Get a bird’s-eye view of your sales teams’ conversations with Conversation Signals. Using AI technology, Conversation Signals groups
different product or competitor mentions into relevant topics that you can dive into and explore. Another Einstein feature, Generative
Conversation Insights, allows you to create custom insights powered by generative AI. Einstein Conversation Insights can now process
single-user meetings. Users can also easily expand edit access to record collections, and we’ve rolled out more dashboard improvements.
IN THIS SECTION:
Use large language models (LLMs) to see the topics that your customers are bringing up with your sales teams. Filter topics by
category and keyword to see a dashboard of relevant conversations. These conversations are based on products or competitors you
identified while setting up ECI. Drill into each topic for more details, so that you and your team can identify any obstacles or
opportunities.
Configure Custom Insights with Generative Conversation Insights
Use Generative Conversation Insights to answer any questions you have about your teams’ sales calls. Define prompts that query a
large language model (LLM) with the transcript of the call, and show relevant insights on the call record. Using generative AI, get
answers to things such as customer sentiment or deal terms surfaced for sales conversations automatically.
Use Einstein Conversation Insights with Single User Meetings
Do you want to get transcripts, insights, and coaching for your sales pitches and other preparatory meetings? Einstein Conversation
Insights now supports processing for meetings that include only one user.
Share Edit Access for Record Collections with Other Users
Need a colleague’s help creating a collection of all-time-best sales calls for new sales reps? It’s now easier to update collections with
others. You can share write permissions for record collections with different users or groups.
Enhanced dashboard features are available to Einstein Conversation Insights (ECI) users, including new pages for Coaching and
Related Record Calls.
Use large language models (LLMs) to see the topics that your customers are bringing up with your sales teams. Filter topics by category
and keyword to see a dashboard of relevant conversations. These conversations are based on products or competitors you identified
while setting up ECI. Drill into each topic for more details, so that you and your team can identify any obstacles or opportunities.
Where: This feature requires Einstein Conversation Insights, Data Cloud, and Einstein for Sales, and is available in Lightning Experience
in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions. Einstein generative AI is available in Lightning Experience.
When: Sales Signals is available in August 2024.
Who: This feature is available to users with access to Einstein Conversation Insights and the Sales Signals permission set in orgs that
have Einstein for Sales enabled.
How: To bring up Sales Signals, select Sales Signals within the Conversation Insights app.
Select a category (Product or Competitor) and a keyword to show a dashboard of relevant conversations about the keyword.
553
Conversations are sorted by topic across different cards, and relevant metrics are shown for each topic. Topics are sorted based on the
number of times they’ve been mentioned.
To see more related information, click the Details tab or View Details on a topic.
Admins can refresh conversation data 7 days after the last update.
Turn on the feature from the Einstein for Sales page in Setup.
554
The setup process includes setting up Data Cloud, enabling the feature, and assigning relevant permission sets.
Note: To allow Sales Signals to process and generate topics, set organization-wide sharing defaults for voice and video calls to
public.
SEE ALSO:
Einstein Features
Configure Custom Insights with Generative Conversation Insights

Use Generative Conversation Insights to answer any questions you have about your teams’ sales calls. Define prompts that query a large
language model (LLM) with the transcript of the call, and show relevant insights on the call record. Using generative AI, get answers to
things such as customer sentiment or deal terms surfaced for sales conversations automatically.
Where: This feature requires Einstein Conversation Insights and Einstein for Sales, and is available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise,
Performance, and Unlimited editions. Einstein generative AI is available in Lightning Experience.
Who: This feature applies to all video calls recorded by users with the Einstein Sales Generative Insights permission set.
Users without the permission set can see generative insights for calls they have access to, but their video calls aren’t processed for
generative insights.
How: To bring up Generative Conversation Insights, select the tab. See the insights available on each call.
555
Turn on the feature from the Einstein for Sales page in Setup.
To create a generative insight, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Call Insights, and then select Call Insights.
Select Configure Insight, and then click Generative Insight and follow the steps listed.
We recommend testing each insight in Call Explorer before activation. You’re limited to 5 active generative insights.
SEE ALSO:
Einstein Features
556
Use Einstein Conversation Insights with Single User Meetings

Do you want to get transcripts, insights, and coaching for your sales pitches and other preparatory meetings? Einstein Conversation
Insights now supports processing for meetings that include only one user.
Where: This change applies to Einstein Conversation Insights in Lightning Experience. Einstein Conversation Insights is available in
Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions, and as an add-on in Enterprise Edition for more than 10 users.
Why: Single-user meetings are now processed automatically. After you record a solo video meeting, it’s processed like any other external
call.
Share Edit Access for Record Collections with Other Users

Need a colleague’s help creating a collection of all-time-best sales calls for new sales reps? It’s now easier to update collections with
others. You can share write permissions for record collections with different users or groups.
Why: Users can share record collections. Select the collection record, click Share Collection, and the Read/Write option is now available
to share with groups or individual users.
Users with Read/Write permission can add or remove records from collections, and also share access with others.

Enhanced dashboard features are available to Einstein Conversation Insights (ECI) users, including new pages for Coaching and Related
Record Calls.
Who: This feature is now available to users with access to Einstein Conversation Insights.
Why: ECI users can access new features from the Conversation Insights dashboard. New pages are available for Coaching and Related
Record Calls with additional filters and reports on each page.
557
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Sales Engagement
Users can see whether calls have been coached or not based on whether they include comments.
It’s also easy to find calls based on related records.
Sales Engagement
Link cadences, use screen flows as cadence steps, save cadences in any folder, and create and edit email templates in Cadence Builder
2.0. Prepare for Cadence Builder Classic retirement.
For pricing details, contact your Salesforce account executive. Sales Dialer is also available for an extra cost as an add-on license.
IN THIS SECTION:
Use Screen Flows as Cadence Steps in Cadence Builder 2.0
Now sales managers can specify a screen flow as a cadence step in Cadence Builder 2.0. Use screen flow steps to let reps create a
case, event, or task or to perform another action. The screen flow runs when the sales rep initiates the step for a target from their To
Do List, Work Queue, or the Sales Engagement component on target records. Use the Cadence Step Flow process type to create
screen flows for cadence steps, or use the included flow templates.
Create More Customized Sales Playbooks in Cadence Builder 2.0
Sales managers can create more flexible sales outreach playbooks by linking multiple cadences together in Cadence Builder 2.0.
When prospects go through one cadence, they’re automatically added to the next one. Sales managers can design one cadence for
hot leads and connect it to a cadence for leads that don’t convert during the first one.
Save Time by Creating Email Templates with Cadences
When users create a cadence, they can now create, view, or edit an email template directly from within the email step card in Cadence
Builder 2.0. Previously, users had to create email templates before adding them to a cadence.
Cadence creators can now organize their cadences in the way that makes the most sense for their team. Save Cadence Bulder 2.0
cadences to any public or private folder.
558

In Summer ’25, Salesforce is retiring Cadence Builder Classic (1.0) within the Sales Engagement product. Cadence Builder Classic
uses an older structure to allow responsiveness to target engagements. Cadence Builder 2.0 replaces that structure with a simpler
one.
Use Screen Flows as Cadence Steps in Cadence Builder 2.0

Now sales managers can specify a screen flow as a cadence step in Cadence Builder 2.0. Use screen flow steps to let reps create a case,
event, or task or to perform another action. The screen flow runs when the sales rep initiates the step for a target from their To Do List,
Work Queue, or the Sales Engagement component on target records. Use the Cadence Step Flow process type to create screen flows
for cadence steps, or use the included flow templates.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with Sales Cloud.
How: In the Flow Builder, create a screen flow from the Cadence Step Flow process type. Three flow templates are included with Sales
Engagement. Flow templates must be activated before being cloned.
• Create a Case
• Create an Event
• Create a Task
Then add a screen flow step in Cadence Builder 2.0 (1) and choose a screen flow (2).
559
Create More Customized Sales Playbooks in Cadence Builder 2.0

Sales managers can create more flexible sales outreach playbooks by linking multiple cadences together in Cadence Builder 2.0. When
prospects go through one cadence, they’re automatically added to the next one. Sales managers can design one cadence for hot leads
and connect it to a cadence for leads that don’t convert during the first one.
How: To send targets from one cadence to another, add a Cadence Link as the last step of the first cadence (1). Then choose the linked
cadence (2).
560
Save Time by Creating Email Templates with Cadences

When users create a cadence, they can now create, view, or edit an email template directly from within the email step card in Cadence
Builder 2.0. Previously, users had to create email templates before adding them to a cadence.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Professional editions with the Sales Cloud.
Who: Cadences are available to users with the Sales Engagement Cadence Creator or Sales Engagement Cadence Creator Included
permission.
How: Users can choose to create an email template right from the dropdown list (1). Edit a selected template by clicking the pencil icon
(2).

Cadence creators can now organize their cadences in the way that makes the most sense for their team. Save Cadence Bulder 2.0
cadences to any public or private folder.

In Summer ’25, Salesforce is retiring Cadence Builder Classic (1.0) within the Sales Engagement product. Cadence Builder Classic uses
an older structure to allow responsiveness to target engagements. Cadence Builder 2.0 replaces that structure with a simpler one.
Why: Start using Cadence Builder 2.0 now. The new builder is available beginning with Spring ’24. It uses a set of three separate
tracks—Main, Positive, and Negative—rather than branches to allow for responsiveness to target engagement. The three-track design
enables faster and simpler cadence building.
Keep these dates in mind.
• Beginning in Spring ’25, Cadence Builder Classic can only edit existing Classic cadences. Users can no longer create or clone Classic
cadences.
561
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Revenue Intelligence
• In Summer ’25 Cadence Builder Classic will be retired. Users won’t be able to access Cadence Builder Classic and sales reps won't be
able to use cadences created in Cadence Builder Classic. Users will only be able to work with Cadence Builder 2.0 cadences.
Rebuild your branched cadences in Cadence Builder 2.0 before Summer ’25. See Build Cadences with Cadence Builder 2.0.
Nurture relationships with stakeholders and identify opportunities to expand markets with lead metrics in the Einstein Account Management
Account Inspector. Update your revenue data more frequently with the new hourly app refresh schedule. Explore all the Revenue Insights
resources after a successful app installation using the Resources tab.
IN THIS SECTION:
Navigate Revenue Insights Dashboards More Easily
Move quickly between your dashboards and insights with tabs across the top of your Revenue Insights app. You can also pin your
preferred dashboard so that it opens automatically.
Use Custom Fiscal Forecasts in Revenue Insights
If your forecast types are configured with custom fiscal quarters or periods, you can now use them in Revenue Insights. For example,
you can look at the total amount of closed won opportunities for the custom fiscal period defined for your group.
Increase Your Deal Potential with Lead Data in Einstein Account Management
Nurture relationships with stakeholders and identify opportunities to expand markets with lead metrics. Now, you can see lead
metrics in the Einstein Account Management Account Inspector. You can see details such as the breakdown of leads by industry,
source, or status. And you can see the conversion rate for leads and drill down into lead details.
Access Your Revenue Insights Resources in One Place
Explore Revenue Insights resources after a successful app installation. These resources consist of insights and assets, including
dashboards, components, and Einstein Studio models. View data assets such as datasets and data model objects, and see
transformations including recipes and batch data transforms.
Update your revenue data more frequently with the new hourly app refresh schedule option.
Monitor Your Revenue Insights Installations and Upgrades
When Revenue Insights is installed or upgraded, the process progress displays the elapsed time.
Navigate Revenue Insights Dashboards More Easily

Move quickly between your dashboards and insights with tabs across the top of your Revenue Insights app. You can also pin your
preferred dashboard so that it opens automatically.
Where: This change applies to Sales Cloud in Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions for an additional cost.
How: From the Sales app navigation bar, find Revenue insights, and open it. View your dashboards and insights tabs across the top of
the screen.
562
Use Custom Fiscal Forecasts in Revenue Insights

If your forecast types are configured with custom fiscal quarters or periods, you can now use them in Revenue Insights. For example,
you can look at the total amount of closed won opportunities for the custom fiscal period defined for your group.
How: To use this feature, enable custom fiscal year usage in Data Prep. From Analytics Object Manager, go to Data Prep Settings, and
click Enable Date Settings.
Increase Your Deal Potential with Lead Data in Einstein Account Management
Nurture relationships with stakeholders and identify opportunities to expand markets with lead metrics. Now, you can see lead metrics
in the Einstein Account Management Account Inspector. You can see details such as the breakdown of leads by industry, source, or
status. And you can see the conversion rate for leads and drill down into lead details.
How: From the Sales app navigation bar, find Einstein Account Management and open the Account Inspector. Find the Lead metrics
card by navigating the carousel.
563
Access Your Revenue Insights Resources in One Place

Explore Revenue Insights resources after a successful app installation. These resources consist of insights and assets, including dashboards,
components, and Einstein Studio models. View data assets such as datasets and data model objects, and see transformations including
recipes and batch data transforms.
How: In Revenue Insights setup, installed versions of Revenue Intelligence are listed. Select a version and use the Resources tab to view
all the assets. Click an asset to open it in its respective tool.
564

Update your revenue data more frequently with the new hourly app refresh schedule option.
How: In Revenue Insights setup, installed versions of Revenue Intelligence are listed. View details and update scheduled app refreshes
on the Settings tab.
Monitor Your Revenue Insights Installations and Upgrades

When Revenue Insights is installed or upgraded, the process progress displays the elapsed time.
How: In Revenue Insights setup, installed versions of Revenue Intelligence are listed. View the installation progress on the app tab.
565
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Collaborative Forecasts
Sales managers can choose to review forecast rollups by team, then by forecast group or product family, or by group or product family,
then by team.
IN THIS SECTION:
View Forecasts Grouped How It Makes Sense to You
Review forecast rollups by team, forecast group, or product family on the forecasts page. For user role hierarchy forecast types that
include groups or product families, Sales Managers can select to view forecasts rolled up by team, then by product family or group.
Or, they can select to view forecasts rolled up by group values or product family, then by team.
View Forecasts Grouped How It Makes Sense to You

Review forecast rollups by team, forecast group, or product family on the forecasts page. For user role hierarchy forecast types that
include groups or product families, Sales Managers can select to view forecasts rolled up by team, then by product family or group. Or,
they can select to view forecasts rolled up by group values or product family, then by team.
When: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional and Developer editions and in Enterprise and Unlimited editions
with the Sales Cloud.
Why: To make comparisons while reviewing forecasts, Sales Managers review the sales performance of their direct reports and the
forecasts rolled up to different business segments.
566
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Pipeline Inspection
How: On the forecasts page, select a forecast type that uses a custom picklist to group values or is grouped using product families. Then,
in the Grouped By field in the forecast header, select how to group the rollup values.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Group Sales Forecasts to Match Your Business (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Pipeline Inspection
Boost productivity with the power of standard and custom list view actions in Pipeline Inspection. Get insight into potentially risky
contacts on a deal.
IN THIS SECTION:
Save Time with More Actions in Pipeline Inspection
Boost productivity with the power of standard and custom list view actions in Pipeline Inspection. You can update the close date of
multiple deals, add opportunity products to opportunities, or even create quotes, without leaving the Pipeline Inspection view.
Select up to 200 records and update them in bulk instead of one at a time. And, now you can update multiple records to the same
value inline.
With a new insight in Pipeline Inspection, sales reps can now learn whether a contact is a detractor on one of their deals. To see the
detractor’s relationships with other contacts on the deal, reps can view the Buyer Relationship Map directly from the insight.
567
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Pipeline Inspection
Save Time with More Actions in Pipeline Inspection

Boost productivity with the power of standard and custom list view actions in Pipeline Inspection. You can update the close date of
multiple deals, add opportunity products to opportunities, or even create quotes, without leaving the Pipeline Inspection view. Select
up to 200 records and update them in bulk instead of one at a time. And, now you can update multiple records to the same value inline.
How: Standard and custom quick actions from the list view appear as buttons on Pipeline Inspection, with additional actions in a
dropdown.
To mass update opportunities, select one or more records from the table (1), and then apply the action (2). To update multiple records
inline, first select one or more records from the table. You can edit any field that shows a pencil icon when you hover. Select the pencil
icon, then the checkbox indicating you want to update multiple items, and apply your changes (3).
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Mass Quick Actions (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Guidelines and Limits for Pipeline Inspection (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

With a new insight in Pipeline Inspection, sales reps can now learn whether a contact is a detractor on one of their deals. To see the
detractor’s relationships with other contacts on the deal, reps can view the Buyer Relationship Map directly from the insight.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Einstein 1 Sales Edition editions with
Sales Cloud and with Buyer Relationship Map enabled.
How: The contact detractor insight is shown in the Pipeline Inspection side panel when it’s found for an opportunity that has a Buyer
Relationship Map created.
SEE ALSO:
568
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Sales Programs and Partner Tracks with Enablement

Elevate the performance, confidence, and impact of your sales team and drive business growth with a community of informed and
engaged partners. Give sales reps immediate, actionable feedback on their sales pitches, courtesy of Einstein, all in their flow of work.
Create programs that align with your most complex revenue metrics, and provide more transparency and accountability to users who
take your programs. Integrate the governance of your Enablement rollout with other Salesforce systems and processes.
IN THIS SECTION:
Provide Users with Coaching-Inspired Feedback Driven by Einstein Generative AI
Give sales reps private, personal, and timely coaching so they can excel in their roles without adding to a peer or manager’s workload.
With Einstein Coach in Enablement programs, Enablement admins can create Feedback Request exercises where Enablement users
receive AI-generated coaching on their sales pitch in their flow of work. Einstein analyzes how reps introduce themselves, set context,
articulate the value and benefit of the product or solution, define a business solution, make compelling points, use storytelling, and
deliver complex information.
Make Your Enablement Goals More Effective with Advanced Milestone Options
Build more powerful milestones and outcomes related to your company’s revenue goals, with no customization required. With new
composite goals, your company can more easily integrate complex but critical metrics that require evaluating multiple objects.
Associate two measures with a milestone or outcome and specify a calculation logic to aggregate the measure results. The aggregated
measure result is compared against the target to track users’ progress toward a goal. For example, count the total number of activities
such as calls and emails, which track separate objects, on the same milestone. Previously, milestones or outcomes could reference
only one measure, and more complicated use cases required customization such as custom objects or fields.
Get Transparency on Your Goal Progress with Itemized Progress Details
Enablement users can now gain deeper insights on their progress toward an outcome or a milestone with display of the data being
measured. The qualifying records tables in the Guidance Center and in supported Experience Cloud site pages show individual
records that contribute to a goal completion. Users can analyze the qualifying records to validate their progress toward a goal and
take strategic decisions to complete the program.
Help Users Discover and Complete Enablement Program Goals on Time
Encourage discovery, adoption, and completion of your company’s sales programs in Lightning Experience or partner programs in
Experience Cloud sites. Provide accountability and transparency for users who contribute to your revenue outcomes by keeping
them informed about upcoming due dates for programs, outcomes, and milestones. Help users stay focused by minimizing the
noise and turning on only the notifications that make sense for your company and fine-tuning when those notifications are sent.
Develop, Test, and Deploy Enablement Programs and Measures More Easily
Elevate your Enablement rollout strategy by integrating programs and measures with other sophisticated enterprise operations in
your Salesforce implementation. After you develop and test Enablement programs and measures in a sandbox, easily deploy them
to production with Metadata API for change sets and Salesforce CLI. Previously, Enablement admins could develop and test programs
and measures in a sandbox but couldn’t move them to production.
Tailor Your Enablement Programs to Your Company’s Preferred Content System - Developer Preview
Provide a more streamlined connection between your company’s preferred content management system and your Enablement
programs. Create custom exercise types that reference content from your own repository or a third-party repository. With custom
exercise types, you can easily bring content from anywhere into your program. Previously, exercise types in Enablement programs
supported content only from Salesforce systems, including Digital Experiences content, Trailhead, and Assessment surveys. Your
sales reps can view custom exercise content in the flow of a program without navigating to a different page.
Salesforce admins, Enablement teams, and content creators benefit from other enhancements throughout the Enablement workflow.
569
Provide Users with Coaching-Inspired Feedback Driven by Einstein Generative AI

Give sales reps private, personal, and timely coaching so they can excel in their roles without adding to a peer or manager’s workload.
With Einstein Coach in Enablement programs, Enablement admins can create Feedback Request exercises where Enablement users
receive AI-generated coaching on their sales pitch in their flow of work. Einstein analyzes how reps introduce themselves, set context,
articulate the value and benefit of the product or solution, define a business solution, make compelling points, use storytelling, and
deliver complex information.
in Lightning Experience. An Einstein for Sales license and Enablement add-on license are required.
Who: Enablement admins and users with the Use Einstein Coach permission can access AI-generated feedback for Feedback Request
exercises. This permission is enabled by default in the Access Einstein Coach default permission set.
How: Turn on Einstein Coach in the Einstein for Sales setup page.
Generated feedback appears in the Guidance Center when users complete a Feedback Request exercise that uses Einstein Coach.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Einstein Features (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Managing Einstein Coach for Feedback Request Exercises (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
570
Make Your Enablement Goals More Effective with Advanced Milestone Options
Build more powerful milestones and outcomes related to your company’s revenue goals, with no customization required. With new
composite goals, your company can more easily integrate complex but critical metrics that require evaluating multiple objects. Associate
two measures with a milestone or outcome and specify a calculation logic to aggregate the measure results. The aggregated measure
result is compared against the target to track users’ progress toward a goal. For example, count the total number of activities such as
calls and emails, which track separate objects, on the same milestone. Previously, milestones or outcomes could reference only one
measure, and more complicated use cases required customization such as custom objects or fields.
Where: This change applies to:
• Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Sales Cloud, Service Cloud, or Salesforce
Platform. An Enablement add-on license is required, or you can try this enhancement with Enablement Lite.
• Supported Experience Cloud sites accessed through Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer
editions with Sales Cloud and Service Cloud. An Enablement add-on license and PRM add-on license are required.
How: To create a composite goal, Enablement admins add an outcome or milestone component to a program from the Program Builder.
Then Enablement admins add multiple measures to the goal and select a calculation logic to aggregate the results of the measures.
Enablement users complete a composite goal outside the Guidance Center and refresh progress to view the milestone progress details.
Partner users complete a composite goal outside their supported Experience Cloud site and refresh progress to view the progress details.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Managing Composite Outcomes and Milestones (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
571
Get Transparency on Your Goal Progress with Itemized Progress Details

Enablement users can now gain deeper insights on their progress toward an outcome or a milestone with display of the data being
measured. The qualifying records tables in the Guidance Center and in supported Experience Cloud site pages show individual records
that contribute to a goal completion. Users can analyze the qualifying records to validate their progress toward a goal and take strategic
decisions to complete the program.
How: Sales reps open a program in the Guidance Center and refresh program progress. To view the qualifying records for an outcome
or milestone, reps click that goal. Reps can select a record to view its details on the record home page.
Partner users access a program in a supported Experience Cloud site and refresh program progress. To view the qualifying records for
an outcome or milestone, users click that goal. Users can select a record to view its details on the site.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Take Enablement Programs (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
572
Help Users Discover and Complete Enablement Program Goals on Time

Encourage discovery, adoption, and completion of your company’s sales programs in Lightning Experience or partner programs in
Experience Cloud sites. Provide accountability and transparency for users who contribute to your revenue outcomes by keeping them
informed about upcoming due dates for programs, outcomes, and milestones. Help users stay focused by minimizing the noise and
turning on only the notifications that make sense for your company and fine-tuning when those notifications are sent.
How: In Setup, the Enablement Settings and Partner Enablement Settings pages include new options for managing notifications. Specify
whether users receive a notification when a program is assigned or completed. Send reminders when a program hasn’t been started or
for upcoming program, outcome, or milestone due dates. For each type, specify whether users receive in-app notifications or email
notifications.
Previously, users always received an in-app and email notification when a program was assigned or completed, and no options were
available for modifying these settings.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Manage Notifications for Enablement Programs, Outcomes, and Milestones (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)
Develop, Test, and Deploy Enablement Programs and Measures More Easily
Elevate your Enablement rollout strategy by integrating programs and measures with other sophisticated enterprise operations in your
Salesforce implementation. After you develop and test Enablement programs and measures in a sandbox, easily deploy them to production
with Metadata API for change sets and Salesforce CLI. Previously, Enablement admins could develop and test programs and measures
in a sandbox but couldn’t move them to production.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with Sales Cloud, Service Cloud,
or Salesforce Platform. An Enablement add-on license is required, or you can try this enhancement with Enablement Lite.
573
How: Use the new EnablementMeasureDefinition and EnablementProgramDefinition metadata types with change sets and Salesforce
CLI. To avoid errors, retrieve and deploy program dependencies first, including measures, Digital Experiences content, surveys, and sites.
Then, retrieve and deploy programs.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Deploy Enablement Programs and Measures from a Sandbox to Production (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)
Salesforce Developers: EnablementProgramDefinition (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Developers: EnablementMeasureDefinition (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Developers: Deploying and Retrieving Metadata (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Developers: Salesforce CLI Command Reference (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Trailhead: Package.xml Metadata Management
Tailor Your Enablement Programs to Your Company’s Preferred Content System -

Developer Preview
Provide a more streamlined connection between your company’s preferred content management system and your Enablement programs.
Create custom exercise types that reference content from your own repository or a third-party repository. With custom exercise types,
you can easily bring content from anywhere into your program. Previously, exercise types in Enablement programs supported content
only from Salesforce systems, including Digital Experiences content, Trailhead, and Assessment surveys. Your sales reps can view custom
exercise content in the flow of a program without navigating to a different page.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Developer Edition with Sales Cloud. Custom exercise types are available as a
developer preview feature. The feature isn’t generally available unless or until Salesforce announces its general availability in documentation
or in press releases or public statements.
Who: To add custom exercises to Enablement programs, users must have the View Setup and Configuration permission.
How: Salesforce developers at your company configure the custom items for your Salesforce org by using Apex classes and render them
on the Salesforce platform through Lightning Web Components. Developers then map a preferred repository to host content for the
custom exercises.
Enablement admins first add their content to the mapped repository. Then Enablement admins add a custom exercise to their program
from Program Builder and select the content for it.
Sales reps view the referenced content in the flow of the program when they click a custom exercise in the Guidance Center.
574
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Custom Exercise Types in Enablement Programs (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Salesforce admins, Enablement teams, and content creators benefit from other enhancements throughout the Enablement workflow.
How: These changes are available.
• Enablement is now available in Developer Edition with Sales Cloud, Service Cloud, or Salesforce Platform. Enablement in Developer
Edition doesn’t include Einstein Conversation Insights (ECI) or surveys.
• When you add an exercise and create Digital Experiences content for the exercise in Program Builder, the title and description you
enter for the exercise persist to the New Content window. Previously, you specified the title and description separately in the exercise
properties in Program Builder and in the New Content window.
• You can edit Digital Experiences content for an exercise directly from Program Builder. Previously, to edit content for an exercise,
you could only navigate to the Digital Experiences app, locate the Enablement workspace, and edit content outside of the program.
• The Usage Info tab on the detail page of a content record in the Digital Experiences app now lists the published programs where
the content is used. This enhancement helps ensure that content managers don’t disrupt users who are taking a program by
accidentally unpublishing or deleting content from the program. For Enablement Lite, the Usage Info tab doesn't show data if you
published a program, turned off Enablement Lite, and then turned it on again. In this case, unpublish your Enablement Lite programs
and republish them to see the Usage Info tab details.
• Your company can request a change in the maximum number of users assigned to or enrolled in a partner program in supported
Experience Cloud sites. To change the default limit of 10,000 users, submit a Salesforce Customer Support case. Previously, this limit
was fixed.
575
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Partner Relationship Management
• In sandboxes, the Prepare Your Sandbox for Enablement step now appears first on the Enablement Settings page in Setup. Previously,
this step appeared at the end of the page.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Enablement Compatibility with Other Products and Environments (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Salesforce Help: Guidelines for Digital Experiences Content in Enablement Programs (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Salesforce Help: Create Content for an Exercise from Program Builder (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Sandbox Support for Enablement (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Partner sellers can get help drafting personalized, thoughtful emails to their contacts and leads quickly with an assist from Einstein
generative AI.
IN THIS SECTION:
Unleash partner productivity and drive higher email engagement rates with a little help from Einstein generative AI. Einstein Sales
Emails and custom sales email prompt templates are now available in Experience Cloud sites built on the Aura framework. From the
email composer on contacts and leads, partners can lean on generative AI to quickly draft impactful emails, such as introductions,
nudges, and meeting invitations. Plus, any custom sales emails prompt templates that you create in Prompt Builder for your Lightning
Experience users are also available for partner users from their Experience Cloud sites.

Unleash partner productivity and drive higher email engagement rates with a little help from Einstein generative AI. Einstein Sales Emails
and custom sales email prompt templates are now available in Experience Cloud sites built on the Aura framework. From the email
composer on contacts and leads, partners can lean on generative AI to quickly draft impactful emails, such as introductions, nudges,
and meeting invitations. Plus, any custom sales emails prompt templates that you create in Prompt Builder for your Lightning Experience
users are also available for partner users from their Experience Cloud sites.
Where: This change applies to Experience Cloud Aura sites accessed through Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions.
A PRM add-on license and an Einstein for Sales add-on license are required for each partner user.
How: Partners start by creating an email from a contact or lead. Click Draft with Einstein, choose an email prompt type from the list,
review and edit the email, and then click Send.
576
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Sales Performance Management
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up Einstein Sales Emails for Partners (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Einstein Features

Get a serious bump in processing performance while plotting high-volume data such as ArcGIS Online layers and complex shape layers
when you preview the new Salesforce Maps framework. Plan for and centralize your company’s unique segmentation, territories, and
quota targets in Sales Planning. And determine compensation for reps based on their effective territory assignment dates in Enterprise
Territory Management, now named Sales Territories.
IN THIS SECTION:
Plot high-volume data such as ArcGIS Online layers and complex shape layers in a fraction of the usual time when you try out the
new Salesforce Maps framework. And get the scoop on changes underway for importing data from custom data sources within
Salesforce Maps Advanced.
Sales Planning
Define a sales strategy with input from key stakeholders. Structure sales plans that reflect your company’s unique segmentation,
territories, and quota targets—all in one place. In the latest Sales Planning experience, sales leaders and ops determine which
disciplines to apply during planning processes.
577

Get to know Enterprise Territory Management as its new name, Sales Territories. And determine compensation for reps when their
effective start and end dates differ from the dates they were added to and removed from their assigned territories.

Plot high-volume data such as ArcGIS Online layers and complex shape layers in a fraction of the usual time when you try out the new
Salesforce Maps framework. And get the scoop on changes underway for importing data from custom data sources within Salesforce
Maps Advanced.
IN THIS SECTION:
Experience dramatic performance improvements while plotting high-volume data including ArcGIS Online layers and complex shape
layers when you switch to the new framework in Salesforce Maps. And give your reps access to a modern and robust list view
experience.
Prepare for changes that affect the way you import data from custom sources within Salesforce Maps Advanced. That way your reps
continue making the most of plotting that data on the map without interruptions.

Experience dramatic performance improvements while plotting high-volume data including ArcGIS Online layers and complex shape
layers when you switch to the new framework in Salesforce Maps. And give your reps access to a modern and robust list view experience.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions
on desktops.
When: Expect the new Salesforce Maps framework by or shortly after the general availability of Summer ’24.
Why: When you enable the enhanced framework, your reps can plot high volumes of data including ArcGIS Online layers and complex
shape layers in less time. The framework also comes with these benefits.
Feature Area Enhanced Framework Benefits

The map Your reps get access to a world of available data for plotting on the map. Here’s how the data helps them.
• Plot extensive, subscription-free data by using ArcGIS Living Atlas of the World, from Esri. For example,
plot weather events and their historical paths, demographics, and utility and agricultural infrastructures.
See Plot Publicly Available Content from Around the World.
• Identify recent traffic events such as road closures, accidents, and construction areas.
• Page between neighboring markers and shape layers that overlap.
List views Modernized list views unlock your reps’ productivity. Here’s how.
• Perform actions on rows within any tab in list views. For example, add records to campaigns, change
record owners, and set proximity centers based on record addresses.
• Refine list views continuously instead of having to create ones that include your changes.
Shape drawing Drawn shapes offer flexibility for your reps. Here’s how.
functions • When your reps edit drawn shapes, they’re moveable to other areas on the map.
578
Feature Area Enhanced Framework Benefits
• Set the center in shapes for travel time, travel distance, and circular boundaries by address or by latitude
and longitude coordinates. As your reps enter addresses, Salesforce Maps suggests addresses with an
auto-complete feature.
Appearance The enhanced framework adds a refreshed and functional style for marker pop-ups, shape drawing features,
list views, and marker clusters.
How: To experience the new framework, open Salesforce Maps configuration, click Settings, and then select Preview Enhanced User
Experience.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Switching to the Enhanced User Experience (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Prepare for changes that affect the way you import data from custom sources within Salesforce Maps Advanced. That way your reps
continue making the most of plotting that data on the map without interruptions.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Why: Support for importing data from custom sources retires on May 16, 2025. But an alternative method for bringing in the data
provides an option for storing the data in Salesforce.
How: First create a custom object so that you can store your data in its records, and then import your data by using the Data Import
Wizard. Next, create a base object that represents your newly created custom object. And finally, create your marker layers that include
the imported data for your sales reps.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create a Custom Object (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Import Data with the Data Import Wizard (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Create Base Objects to Plot on Maps (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Create Marker Layers (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
579
Sales Planning
Define a sales strategy with input from key stakeholders. Structure sales plans that reflect your company’s unique segmentation, territories,
and quota targets—all in one place. In the latest Sales Planning experience, sales leaders and ops determine which disciplines to apply
during planning processes.
IN THIS SECTION:
Start your sales planning process with relevant data from Salesforce or from other proprietary and third-party sources that you
connect to in Sales Planning.
Segmentation
Plan for and capture your company’s unique business units and record assignments within Sales Planning. Segment by location,
industry, and any demographics from your data sources so that your business units align with your business objectives.
Territory Planning
Assign work within territories fairly by applying the drive-time network, update details and assignments directly from the legend,
and anticipate changes that affect how users interact with the legend.
Quota Planning
Motivate sellers while achieving business objectives when you create quota plans in Sales Planning. Add insight to your quota plans
by adding historical role and calculated data.
Limited Availability of Original Sales Planning
Plan your company’s sales strategy in the original Sales Planning experience until Winter ’25. Afterward, plan new strategies with
the latest Sales Planning experience, in which you structure sales plans that reflect your company’s unique segmentation, territories,
and quota targets.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Sales Planning (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Start your sales planning process with relevant data from Salesforce or from other proprietary and third-party sources that you connect
to in Sales Planning.
How: In Sales Planning, select Data Sources. Add data sources that include standard Salesforce data or even proprietary and third-party
data from Data Pipelines. For example, search for and select from datasets that include accounts, accounts and leads, data from custom
objects, or data from outside Salesforce. After you create a sales plan, you’re ready to link to a data source.
580
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Data Sources Management (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Segmentation
Plan for and capture your company’s unique business units and record assignments within Sales Planning. Segment by location, industry,
and any demographics from your data sources so that your business units align with your business objectives.
How: In Sales Planning, select your sales plan, and then click Create Segments. Start with the top part of your sales hierarchy, and then
assign users and records to those segments. Split the top segments by a field. For example, to segment by country, split your segment
by Billing Country.
Create other segments from splits, or further split segments into smaller ones when you select specific fields depending on your goal.
For example, you create a segment for the AMER region that includes accounts in the Americas.
Then you split AMER into segments by industry. From any segment, delegate planning authority to team leaders and members.
581
When you’re done splitting your segments, you’re ready to add other planners to your split segments. Then those planners can carve
territories and plan quotas.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Segmentation (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Territory Planning
Assign work within territories fairly by applying the drive-time network, update details and assignments directly from the legend, and
anticipate changes that affect how users interact with the legend.
582
IN THIS SECTION:
Estimate Travel Times
Distribute work within territories fairly by estimating travel times between neighboring customers. Consider visit frequency and limit
travel time estimates to only assigned units in Territory Planning.
Edit Territory and Assignment Details on the Legend
Adjust details and assignments for individual units, areas, and boundaries when you edit them directly from the legend in Territory
Planning.
Other Improvements in Territory Planning
Better predict legend behaviors, clone datasets using the names of your choice, and recall the setting for including unassigned units
in alignments in Territory Planning.
Estimate Travel Times

Distribute work within territories fairly by estimating travel times between neighboring customers. Consider visit frequency and limit
travel time estimates to only assigned units in Territory Planning.
How: Open an alignment, and then click Options > Travel Time Estimates. Select options to consider visit frequency and whether to
estimate travel times for only assigned units.
Edit Territory and Assignment Details on the Legend

Adjust details and assignments for individual units, areas, and boundaries when you edit them directly from the legend in Territory
Planning.
How: To update territory, assignment, and attribute details directly on the legend, hover over the element that you want to update.
Then click Edit.
583
Some updates, such as calculations, appear after you reload the focus or the legend.
Other Improvements in Territory Planning

Better predict legend behaviors, clone datasets using the names of your choice, and recall the setting for including unassigned units in
alignments in Territory Planning.
Why: Territory Planning now comes enabled with these improvements.
Function Improvement
Legend panel Legend functions now work more like you expect. Here’s how.
• Adjust the size of the legend and preserve it even after changing the size of the browser and returning to
alignments.
• Filter data, create rules, and assign units by selecting fields and their values from Salesforce instead of
entering the values manually.
Dataset and When cloning datasets and alignments, name them during the cloning process instead of having to first save
alignment cloning them and then change their names.
Unassigned units in Control whether unassigned units appear when opening alignments for the first time. To include unassigned
alignments units, select the option to include unassigned units when first opening alignments in Territory Planning Settings.
Also, Territory Planning now recalls whether to include unassigned units when returning to alignments.
Boundaries in datasets Territory Planning includes updated boundaries so that you plan territories with the latest and most accurate
ones.
Download the most recent data coverage, which you can access in Data Coverage for Salesforce Maps and
Sales Performance Management.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Configure Options for Data Management (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
584
Quota Planning
Motivate sellers while achieving business objectives when you create quota plans in Sales Planning. Add insight to your quota plans by
adding historical role and calculated data.
How: Open a segment in Sales Planning. In Quota Plans, click New. You get options to create a plan with sample data or start one from
scratch. Or import your plan from a CSV file.
For example, you import from a CSV file. In your file, you include your hierarchy, owner, and historical and role details. After you import
the file, continue your quota planning.
585
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Quota Planning (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Limited Availability of Original Sales Planning

Plan your company’s sales strategy in the original Sales Planning experience until Winter ’25. Afterward, plan new strategies with the
latest Sales Planning experience, in which you structure sales plans that reflect your company’s unique segmentation, territories, and
quota targets.
Why: The latest Sales Planning experience better aligns with your planning teams’ processes. And it centralizes data when you create
datasets that include standard Salesforce data and even proprietary and third-party data from Data Pipelines.
How: If you need more time to migrate, you can still create plans in the original Sales Planning experience until Winter ’25.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Legacy Sales Planning (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Get to know Enterprise Territory Management as its new name, Sales Territories. And determine compensation for reps when their
effective start and end dates differ from the dates they were added to and removed from their assigned territories.
586
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Email, Calendar, and Integrations
IN THIS SECTION:
Enterprise Territory Management Is Now Sales Territories
Manage territories the same way you did by using Enterprise Territory Management, but now under the name Sales Territories. The
new name better represents key disciplines for designing and managing territories as part of your teams’ overall efforts around sales
performance management. And most importantly, Sales Territories isn’t just for enterprise businesses!
Compensate Reps Based on Effective Territory Coverage Dates
Determine compensation for reps based on their effective territory assignment dates when those dates differ from the assignment
dates entered into Sales Territories.
Enterprise Territory Management Is Now Sales Territories

Manage territories the same way you did by using Enterprise Territory Management, but now under the name Sales Territories. The new
name better represents key disciplines for designing and managing territories as part of your teams’ overall efforts around sales performance
management. And most importantly, Sales Territories isn’t just for enterprise businesses!
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Sales Territories (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Compensate Reps Based on Effective Territory Coverage Dates

Determine compensation for reps based on their effective territory assignment dates when those dates differ from the assignment dates
entered into Sales Territories.
Why: Territory assignment dates can differ from effective dates. For example, the assignment start date for a rep reflects when she joined
the company on May 1. But she didn’t assume ownership of her territory until her onboarding finished on May 31. Tracking that adjusted
start date ensures fair compensation for her effective territory coverage.
How: Track adjusted start dates, end dates, and reasons for any adjustments in custom fields or triggers that you add to the User Territory
Association Logs object and any page layouts you create for it. Then give managers more insight for sales planning, equitable compensation,
and analysis of sales performance when they report on that assignment data.

Sales reps can use generative AI in their Salesforce email integrations. Inbox mobile has been retired. The retirement date for Salesforce
for Outlook has been extended.
IN THIS SECTION:
Downloaded connection status reports now have more understandable field names.
Sales reps can use generative AI in their Salesforce email integrations.
Review information about the Inbox mobile retirement.
587

Full product retirement for Salesforce for Outlook is scheduled for December 2027. If you’re sticking with Salesforce for Outlook for
now, you can access past release notes about the current version from the Trailblazer Community.

Downloaded connection status reports now have more understandable field names.
IN THIS SECTION:
Understand Downloaded User Connection Reports Quickly
To improve readability when you review connection reports from Einstein Activity Capture Status & Metrics, the terms of service
field names changed. In the CSV file for the report, the Terms of Services and Global Terms of Services fields are now named User
Auth Terms of Service Accepted and Global Auth User Email Consent Status, respectively.
SEE ALSO:
Understand Downloaded User Connection Reports Quickly

To improve readability when you review connection reports from Einstein Activity Capture Status & Metrics, the terms of service field
names changed. In the CSV file for the report, the Terms of Services and Global Terms of Services fields are now named User Auth Terms
of Service Accepted and Global Auth User Email Consent Status, respectively.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
Who: This feature is available to users who have Einstein Activity Capture enabled.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Einstein Activity Capture, and then select Status & Metrics. Download
connection reports to see the improved field names.
• User Auth Terms of Service Accepted—For user-level authenticated email account connections, this field indicates whether a user
accepted the terms of service.
• Global Auth User Email Consent Status—For org or service account connections with email sync, this field indicates the status of
the user’s acceptance of the terms of service.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Check Connection Status and Metrics for Einstein Activity Capture Users (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)
Object Reference for the Salesforce Platform: ActivityUsrConnectionStatus (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Sales reps can use generative AI in their Salesforce email integrations.
588
IN THIS SECTION:
Enter Generative AI Instructions to Create Sales Emails in Email Integrations
Let sales reps create their own generative AI email drafts. The existing pre-made instructions for sales emails cover typical situations.
But sometimes a rep needs a special email and therefore wants to provide unique instructions to Einstein. Reps can use the draft
immediately or revise it until they get the output they’re looking for.
Email and event logging for the Outlook and Gmail integration for users without EAC is more intuitive. The Pick Records button,
formerly labeled Edit, makes it clear what the next step is. We also prevent you from logging an email or event without any associated
records by removing the Log Now button if no records are associated.
Enter Generative AI Instructions to Create Sales Emails in Email Integrations

Let sales reps create their own generative AI email drafts. The existing pre-made instructions for sales emails cover typical situations. But
sometimes a rep needs a special email and therefore wants to provide unique instructions to Einstein. Reps can use the draft immediately
or revise it until they get the output they’re looking for.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience in Performance and Unlimited editions. Einstein generative AI is available in
Lightning Experience.
When: This feature became available on April 11, 2024.
Who: To use Sales Emails, users need the Einstein Sales Emails permission set. To let reps access the feature in Gmail or Outlook, set up
the Gmail or Outlook integration.
How: When creating an email, click Draft with Einstein. Enter instructions for Einstein and click Draft Email.
A proposed draft email appears for review. Revise the content or use it to send an email.

Email and event logging for the Outlook and Gmail integration for users without EAC is more intuitive. The Pick Records button, formerly
labeled Edit, makes it clear what the next step is. We also prevent you from logging an email or event without any associated records
by removing the Log Now button if no records are associated.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer
editions.
When: This change became available with the Summer ’24 release.
589
How: For outbound emails, reps click Log on Send (1) and then send the email to use the associations that were created. Or, they can
make edits (2) to the associations first by clicking Pick Records, and then click Log on Send and sending the email.
Attachments are logged by default.

For inbound emails, the sales rep accepts the suggestions (1) or picks the correct records (2) before logging.
590

Review information about the Inbox mobile retirement.
IN THIS SECTION:
Inbox mobile is retired as of February 1, 2024.

Inbox mobile is retired as of February 1, 2024.
When: Full product retirement for Inbox mobile was February 1, 2024.
Why: Replace Inbox mobile with Outlook and Gmail integration with inbox on desktop to access most of the Salesforce Inbox features.
On mobile, use the Salesforce mobile application to access Salesforce records, with more exciting functionality coming in a future release.
For automatic email tracking, Einstein Activity Capture can also be used.
How: As of February 1, 2024, you can’t access or use Inbox mobile.
591
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Sales Cloud Everywhere

Full product retirement for Salesforce for Outlook is scheduled for December 2027. If you’re sticking with Salesforce for Outlook for now,
you can access past release notes about the current version from the Trailblazer Community.
IN THIS SECTION:
Salesforce for Outlook Is Now Being Retired in December 2027
Full product retirement for Salesforce for Outlook has been rescheduled for December 2027. Previously, retirement was scheduled
for June 2024. For the latest integration with Microsoft Outlook, we recommend moving to our next-generation products, the Outlook
integration and Einstein Activity Capture. These products replace Salesforce for Outlook features and give users new capabilities. We
continue to introduce enhancements for these products every release.
Salesforce for Outlook Is Now Being Retired in December 2027

Full product retirement for Salesforce for Outlook has been rescheduled for December 2027. Previously, retirement was scheduled for
June 2024. For the latest integration with Microsoft Outlook, we recommend moving to our next-generation products, the Outlook
integration and Einstein Activity Capture. These products replace Salesforce for Outlook features and give users new capabilities. We
continue to introduce enhancements for these products every release.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Contact Manager, Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise,
How: When Salesforce for Outlook is retired, it will no longer sync contacts, events, or tasks. Admins and users also lose access to Salesforce
for Outlook features, such as the side panel.
SEE ALSO:
Knowledge Article: Salesforce for Outlook Retirement
Salesforce Help: Move from Salesforce for Outlook to the Next-Generation Products (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Trailblazer Community: Salesforce for Outlook Release Notes

As sales reps search for prospects on the internet, the Sales Cloud Everywhere Chrome extension keeps up with their web investigations.
And sales reps can choose which fields to see in their detail pages, and in which order.
IN THIS SECTION:
See the Fields You Want in Sales Cloud Everywhere
As your sales reps use Sales Cloud Everywhere, they can choose the fields they want to see and arrange them the way they want to
work.
Focus on the Right Records and Personalize Your Workspace
Your sales reps don’t need to wade through extra, unwanted records. Instead they can create a workspace to filter their records and
focus only on the data they need. With a personalized targeted workspace with fewer records, they can get right to work.
See the Fields You Want in Sales Cloud Everywhere

As your sales reps use Sales Cloud Everywhere, they can choose the fields they want to see and arrange them the way they want to work.
592
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Starter, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
When: This feature is available beginning April 18, 2024.
How: In Sales Cloud Everywhere, go to an opportunity, contact, account, or lead page. Select a record to go to the detail page.
In the Key Fields section, click the edit gear.
593
Add any available fields to the key fields section and remove the fields that aren’t important to you. Update the order of the fields, if
needed, and save your choices.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Enable and Disable the Salesforce Everywhere Chrome Extension (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Focus on the Right Records and Personalize Your Workspace

Your sales reps don’t need to wade through extra, unwanted records. Instead they can create a workspace to filter their records and
focus only on the data they need. With a personalized targeted workspace with fewer records, they can get right to work.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Starter, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
When: This feature is available beginning April 18, 2024.
How: Open workspace from Sales Cloud Everywhere.
594
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Other Changes in the Sales Cloud
Click Manage Workspace.
Add filters based on field values. For example, maybe you want to see all the opportunities that close on a certain date, or next week.
All the filters work together to narrow which records are shown.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Filter Records in Workspace (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Learn about other changes we made in Summer ‘24.
595
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Salesforce CMS
IN THIS SECTION:
After the New Order Save Behavior is enabled, whenever an order product update causes a change to the parent order, Salesforce
runs custom application logic. Previously, in this scenario, Salesforce didn’t correctly evaluate custom application logic on the parent
record.

After the New Order Save Behavior is enabled, whenever an order product update causes a change to the parent order, Salesforce runs
custom application logic. Previously, in this scenario, Salesforce didn’t correctly evaluate custom application logic on the parent record.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
When: This update was first available in Winter ’20 and is enforced in Spring ’25. To get the major release upgrade date for your instance,
go to Trust Status, search for your instance, and click the maintenance tab.
How: To review this update, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates.
After the New Order Save Behavior is enabled, whenever an order product update causes a change to the parent order, Salesforce runs
custom application logic. Custom application logic consists of validation rules, Apex triggers and classes, workflow rules, and flows.
Previously, in this scenario, Salesforce didn't correctly evaluate custom application logic on the parent record.
Packages with orders created before Winter ’21 don't support the New Order Save Behavior release update by default. If you use a
package involving orders, wait for confirmation from your package provider before enabling the release update.
Salesforce CMS
Clone any content type and its variants, add an API name when you create an enhanced CMS workspace and content, and work with
CMS content previews.
IN THIS SECTION:
Save Time with Content Record Cloning in Your Enhanced CMS Workspace
Instead of creating a content record from scratch, make copies of an existing content record of any content type—and its variants—in
enhanced CMS workspaces. Organize content into folders, then edit cloned content for quick reuse.
Preview Custom Content Types in Enhanced CMS Workspaces
Preview custom content types on your enhanced LWR site without leaving your enhanced CMS workspace. Preview custom content
types before or after you publish, and change the view mode from desktop to mobile devices to see how the content appears for
your site visitors. Previously, you could preview only news, document, or image content.
Preview CMS Content as a Guest or Authenticated User
To see how your CMS content looks for a broad audience, preview it as a guest user. With this preview option, CMS workspace
contributors can preview content on a site even when they aren’t contributors to that site. To see your content as a customer who’s
logged in, preview it as an authenticated user.
Secure Linked Sources in Salesforce CMS Content with Trusted URLs
Salesforce’s strict content security policy (CSP) rules help prevent code injection attacks. Now, when you create CMS content and
insert a source image file with an external link, you must add the domain of the hosted image to your org’s trusted URL list. This way,
Salesforce CMS users can preview the linked image content and other content types that reference these images, such as a news
item with a banner image.
596
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Save Time with Content Record Cloning in Your Enhanced
CMS Workspace
Add an API Name to New Enhanced CMS Workspaces and Content

You can now use API names as a developer-friendly way to identify new enhanced CMS workspaces and CMS content. The API Name
field is required when you create a new enhanced CMS workspace. It’s not required for content, but if you leave it blank, Salesforce
creates an API name for you. In Summer ’24, after you save the workspace or content, you can’t change its API name.
Save Time with Content Record Cloning in Your Enhanced CMS Workspace
Instead of creating a content record from scratch, make copies of an existing content record of any content type—and its variants—in
enhanced CMS workspaces. Organize content into folders, then edit cloned content for quick reuse.
Where: This change applies to enhanced CMS workspaces in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer
editions.
How: There are two ways to clone content. From the content detail page in your enhanced CMS workspace, click Clone. Or, from the
row-level actions in the workspace’s content list, select Clone You can clone variants of the content record, too.
SEE ALSO | Salesforce Help: Create and Clone Content in a CMS Workspace
Preview Custom Content Types in Enhanced CMS Workspaces

Preview custom content types on your enhanced LWR site without leaving your enhanced CMS workspace. Preview custom content
types before or after you publish, and change the view mode from desktop to mobile devices to see how the content appears for your
site visitors. Previously, you could preview only news, document, or image content.
editions.
How: Add your enhanced LWR site as a channel to your enhanced CMS workspace. Then, from the Pages menu in Experience Builder,
create a CMS Content page for the site. To preview content in an enhanced CMS workspace, open the content detail page, and then
click Preview.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Preview Salesforce CMS Content on Your Site (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Preview CMS Content as a Guest or Authenticated User

To see how your CMS content looks for a broad audience, preview it as a guest user. With this preview option, CMS workspace contributors
can preview content on a site even when they aren’t contributors to that site. To see your content as a customer who’s logged in, preview
it as an authenticated user.
editions.
How: When you preview CMS content, switch between Authenticated User and Guest User with the Preview As menu. To preview as
a guest user, make sure that the enhanced LWR site has public access enabled. To preview as an authenticated user, a CMS workspace
contributor must also be a contributor to the site.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Preview Salesforce CMS Content on Your Site (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Control Public Access to Your Experience Builder Sites (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
597
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Secure Linked Sources in Salesforce CMS Content with Trusted
URLs
Secure Linked Sources in Salesforce CMS Content with Trusted URLs

Salesforce’s strict content security policy (CSP) rules help prevent code injection attacks. Now, when you create CMS content and insert
a source image file with an external link, you must add the domain of the hosted image to your org’s trusted URL list. This way, Salesforce
CMS users can preview the linked image content and other content types that reference these images, such as a news item with a banner
image.
editions.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Manage Trusted URLs (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Add an API Name to New Enhanced CMS Workspaces and Content

You can now use API names as a developer-friendly way to identify new enhanced CMS workspaces and CMS content. The API Name
field is required when you create a new enhanced CMS workspace. It’s not required for content, but if you leave it blank, Salesforce
creates an API name for you. In Summer ’24, after you save the workspace or content, you can’t change its API name.
editions.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create a CMS Workspace (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Create Content in a CMS Workspace (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Flow
IN THIS SECTION:
Flow Integration
MuleSoft Composer for Salesforce makes it easy to integrate data from any system with clicks and invoke processes in any flow.
When you create a secure process to connect the information stored in different systems, you build a real-time, integrated view of
your customers and business.
Use Einstein generative AI to draft a flow. Create better experiences for your users with screen flow enhancements like retrieving
information from an autolaunched flow, updating choices in real time, and finding addresses in Google Maps. Work more efficiently
with several quality of life enhancements in the Flow Builder UI. Transform collections of data with the Transform element, now
generally available. Check for duplicate records before creating new ones.
Send users to the end of a flow with exit rules. Wait for specific link clicks with the updated Wait Until Event element. Use data graph
attributes in exit rules and Decision elements. View detailed flow execution data in new reports. Verify proper flow behavior with
the ability to debug segment-triggered flows
598
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Flow Integration
Flow Testing and Debugging

Quickly run through various scenarios for your Data Cloud-triggered flows with tests. Troubleshoot scheduled flows with expanded
debug options.
Flow Runtime
Versioned updates are available for flows and processes that are configured to run on API version 61.0.
Flow Management
Mange flows in the Automation Lightning app, which is now available to all users. Use new permissions to enable users that don’t
have the Manage Flows permission to access certain elements. Get more flexibility managing your flows with unlimited paused and
waiting flow interviews.
Flow Actions
Lock and unlock records with an action. Set actions using visible default values and custom placeholder text. Configure a secure
MuleSoft connection with all org types and customers. Use threading tokens in emails to link email replies to the right records.
Salesforce Flow has several release updates that are scheduled to be enforced in future releases.
Flow Orchestration
Manually suspend a running orchestration. Fix the errors in an orchestration run that failed within the previous 14 days because of
a recoverable error, and then resume the orchestration run. See all of your assigned orchestration work items for a record and select
the one to complete first.
Flow Integration
MuleSoft Composer for Salesforce makes it easy to integrate data from any system with clicks and invoke processes in any flow. When
you create a secure process to connect the information stored in different systems, you build a real-time, integrated view of your customers
and business.
Where: MuleSoft Composer for Salesforce is available for an extra cost in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions that have
enabled Lightning Experience.
For Composer release notes and help, see MuleSoft Composer for Salesforce.

Use Einstein generative AI to draft a flow. Create better experiences for your users with screen flow enhancements like retrieving
information from an autolaunched flow, updating choices in real time, and finding addresses in Google Maps. Work more efficiently
with several quality of life enhancements in the Flow Builder UI. Transform collections of data with the Transform element, now generally
available. Check for duplicate records before creating new ones.
IN THIS SECTION:
Reach your automation goals with Einstein by describing what you want to automate and letting Einstein generative AI handle the
heavy lifting. From the description you provide, Einstein creates a draft screen, record-triggered, schedule-triggered, or autolaunched
flow to get you started. Einstein can build a flow using any element and most resources and can even use your org's custom objects.
Most Einstein draft flows can have up to six elements. You can help Einstein generative AI gain increased capabilities by providing
feedback on your flows.
599
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Flow Builder Updates
Screen Flow Updates

Help your users easily fill in create multiple instances of the same set of fields. Enable your users to find addresses in the Address
flow screen component more quickly with a search field powered by Google Maps. Require user input in the Address screen
component. Update choices on a screen in real time.
Easily find the type of flow or orchestration you want to build with a streamlined creation process. View elements by label instead
of API name. Work faster with auto-generated element names. Find resources more efficiently in Collection Filter, Collection Sort,
Decision, Loop, Subflows, Recommendation Assignment, and Orchestration Stages and Steps elements.
Transform Your Data in Flows (Generally Available)
Modify your data into the shape that fits your business process with the new Transform element in Flow Builder. Now generally
available, the Transform element includes some changes since the last release. Mapping tips help you avoid errors before you save
your flow. Previously, you received errors for the Transform element only when you saved the flow. Also, you can use your keyboard
and screen reader to navigate the Transform element more easily. Previously, you couldn’t navigate source or target data or hear
descriptions about mappings.
Configure Conditions More Easily with Is Blank and Is Empty Operators in Flows
Use the Is Blank operator in a condition to check whether a text value contains no characters or only white space. For data type
values other than text values, the Is Blank operator checks whether values are null. Previously, you used the Equals operator and the
Blank Value (Empty String) global constant. To check whether a collection is empty, use the Is Empty operator. Previously, you added
the Assignment and Decision elements to check the collection size.
Check for Duplicates Before Creating Records in a Flow
To prevent duplicate records, check for records that match a set of criteria in the Create Records element. Also specify whether to
skip or update matching records. If you choose to skip matching records, the flow doesn’t create or modify any records. If you choose
to update matching records, the flow modifies the records with the values that you provide. Some field-level configurations and
validations in your org override the settings in the Create Records element.

Reach your automation goals with Einstein by describing what you want to automate and letting Einstein generative AI handle the heavy
lifting. From the description you provide, Einstein creates a draft screen, record-triggered, schedule-triggered, or autolaunched flow to
get you started. Einstein can build a flow using any element and most resources and can even use your org's custom objects. Most
Einstein draft flows can have up to six elements. You can help Einstein generative AI gain increased capabilities by providing feedback
on your flows.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience.
• All Einstein 1 Editions
• Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions with the Einstein for Sales, Einstein for Service, or Einstein for Platform add-on.
• Einstein generative AI is available in Lightning Experience.
To purchase Einstein for Sales, Einstein for Platform, or Einstein for Service add-ons, contact your Salesforce account executive.
When: Einstein for Flow (Beta) is available later this summer.
How: To enable Einstein for Flow, turn on Einstein generative AI in Setup. Then, in Setup, find and select Einstein for Flow (Beta), and
activate it.
To use Einstein for Flow, from the Flows section in Setup, click New Flow, or from the Automation Lightning app, click New. Select Let
Einstein Help You Build (1) and then click Next.
600
Write instructions from scratch (2), or get started with sample instructions (3).
After your draft flow opens in Flow Builder, it’s important to check the flow for accuracy and safety. Also, be sure to debug and test the
flow before activating. To get increasingly better flows from Einstein, share your feedback in the Einstein window by hovering over the
Einstein message and selecting thumbs up or thumbs down (4). If the flow doesn’t meet your needs, start over in a new window (5).
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Let Einstein Help You Build Flows (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Video: Get to Know Einstein for Flow (Beta)
Salesforce Help: About Generative AI (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
601
Screen Flow Updates

Help your users easily fill in create multiple instances of the same set of fields. Enable your users to find addresses in the Address flow
screen component more quickly with a search field powered by Google Maps. Require user input in the Address screen component.
Update choices on a screen in real time.
IN THIS SECTION:
IdeaExchange Delivered: Collect User Input to Build a List of Records from a Screen (Generally Available)
Collect information about multiple items of the same type on a screen with the Repeater component. For example, use a Repeater
component to gather details about beneficiaries on an insurance policy. Users can add as many beneficiaries as needed on the
screen. You can then loop through the list of beneficiaries to create records. This feature, now generally available, includes some
changes since the last release. We delivered this feature thanks to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
IdeaExchange Delivered: Empower Users to Fill in Addresses More Quickly with the New Search Field in the Address Screen Component
Include a search field powered by Google Maps in the Address screen component. When the user selects an address in the search
field, the flow populates the address fields. We delivered this feature thanks to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
IdeaExchange Delivered: Require User Input in the Address Screen Component
Require users to fill in the fields of the Address screen component before navigating to the next screen with the Required field. If
you set the Required field to true, a red asterisk appears next to the label of each input fields in the component. We delivered this
Update Choices on a Screen in Real Time with Reactive Collection Choice Sets
Screen components that accept Collection Choice Set resources as inputs can now react to changes in other components on the
same screen. For example, you can now use the output of a Data Table component to populate a collection choice set resource,
and then use that resource to configure a Choice Lookup component on the same screen. Each time a user updates a selection in
the Data Table component, the Choice Lookup component reflects the change. Previously, collection choice set resources couldn’t
react to changes on the same screen.
Troubleshoot Screen Flows Faster with More Detailed Error Messages
Many runtime error messages in screen flows now include more details to help you troubleshoot issues such as network connection
problems, reactivity issues, and exceeded character limits in Lightning web components. Previously, these error messages provided
generic troubleshooting recommendations such as Hmm, that didn't work. Check your internet connection
and try again, or refresh the page. Now the messages include the cause of any errors in addition to the
recommendations. For example, when the client sends Salesforce an incompatible navigation action, the resulting error message
includes this detail: Action not available for interview: NEXT.
Restrict User Input on Screen Components with the Disabled and Read Only Fields
Use two new fields to specify how users interact with screen components. When the Disabled field is set to true, users can’t navigate
to or modify any fields in the component. A gray background appears on the input fields in the component to provide users with a
visual cue. When the Read Only field is set to true, users can’t modify any fields in the component. However, they can navigate to
and copy values.
Update Records Using the State and Country Codes Selected in Address Screen Components
The Address screen component now includes two new fields that store the ISO code for the country or territory and state or province
that a user selects. Previously, the Address component stored only the name associated with the user’s selection. With this new
support for ISO codes, you can update the country or territory and state or province fields on records with ISO codes instead of
names.
602
Run and Use the Results of an Autolaunched Flow on the Same Screen with the New Action Button Component (Beta)
Add an Action Button component to a flow screen to run and retrieve information from an active autolaunched flow without leaving
the screen. The component renders a button that invokes the flow when clicked. For example, create a screen that includes a Lookup
component that enables a user to search for and select a Contact record. Add an Action Button component to the screen to launch
a flow that retrieves the Account, Case, and Opportunity records associated with the Contact record and populates other fields on
the same screen. The user doesn’t have to navigate away from the screen to run the flow.
Enjoy improved formatting in the Display Text component. Have a better screen reader experience for Long Text Area, Picklist, and
Data Table components. See reactive interactions in input-only fields as soon as a screen loads.
Collect User Input to Build a List of Records from a Screen (Generally Available)
Collect information about multiple items of the same type on a screen with the Repeater component. For example, use a Repeater
component to gather details about beneficiaries on an insurance policy. Users can add as many beneficiaries as needed on the screen.
You can then loop through the list of beneficiaries to create records. This feature, now generally available, includes some changes since
the last release. We delivered this feature thanks to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited,
and Developer editions. It’s not supported in Classic runtime for flows.
Why: The Repeater component provides an intuitive interface for building a list and includes these enhancements since the beta release:
• Use custom components and all standard generally available screen components as child components.
• Reference the output of a child component in a different child component in a Repeater component.
• Apply conditional field visibility, input validation, and help text.
• When you debug a flow that includes a Repeater component, view information about the component in the debugger.
• Configure the component to react to user input on the same screen.
How: In Flow Builder, open a Screen element and add a Repeater component. Add child components to the Repeater component. For
example, add components to collect the first name, last name, date of birth, and relationship for a beneficiary on an insurance policy.
After the Screen element, loop through the Repeater component output and save the list of beneficiaries in a collection variable that
you can use elsewhere in the flow. For example, you can use the variable to create a Contact record for each beneficiary.
603
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Flow Screen Component: Repeater (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Flow Example: Create a Contact for Each Beneficiary on a Policy (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Empower Users to Fill in Addresses More Quickly with the New Search Field in the Address
Screen Component
Include a search field powered by Google Maps in the Address screen component. When the user selects an address in the search field,
the flow populates the address fields. We delivered this feature thanks to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
and Developer editions. It’s not supported in Classic runtime for flows. It’s also not supported in Playground, Experience Builder sites,
Lightning Out, Lightning Components for Visualforce, and standalone apps.
How: In Flow Builder, create a screen flow, add a Screen element to the flow and include an Address component in the Screen element.
In the Enable Google Maps Search Field field, enter {!$GlobalConstant.True} or specify a formula resource that evaluates to
true. Specify a label for the search field. Save and run the flow.
604
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Flow Screen Component: Address (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Require User Input in the Address Screen Component

Require users to fill in the fields of the Address screen component before navigating to the next screen with the Required field. If you
set the Required field to true, a red asterisk appears next to the label of each input fields in the component. We delivered this feature
How: In Flow Builder, create a screen flow, add a Screen element to the flow. Add an Address component to the screen. Set the Required
field to a Boolean value such as {!$GlobalConstant.True} or to a formula resource that evaluates to true. Save and run the
flow.
SEE ALSO:
605
Update Choices on a Screen in Real Time with Reactive Collection Choice Sets
Screen components that accept Collection Choice Set resources as inputs can now react to changes in other components on the same
screen. For example, you can now use the output of a Data Table component to populate a collection choice set resource, and then use
that resource to configure a Choice Lookup component on the same screen. Each time a user updates a selection in the Data Table
component, the Choice Lookup component reflects the change. Previously, collection choice set resources couldn’t react to changes
on the same screen.
How: In Flow Builder, create a screen flow, add a Screen element to the flow, and include a component that populates a collection
choice set on the screen. Add a choice component such as a Choice Lookup component to the screen and set the Choice value for the
component to the collection choice set. Save and run the flow.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Flow Resource: Collection Choice Set (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Make Your Screen Flows Reactive (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Troubleshoot Screen Flows Faster with More Detailed Error Messages

Many runtime error messages in screen flows now include more details to help you troubleshoot issues such as network connection
problems, reactivity issues, and exceeded character limits in Lightning web components. Previously, these error messages provided
generic troubleshooting recommendations such as Hmm, that didn't work. Check your internet connection
and try again, or refresh the page. Now the messages include the cause of any errors in addition to the
recommendations. For example, when the client sends Salesforce an incompatible navigation action, the resulting error message includes
this detail: Action not available for interview: NEXT.
Restrict User Input on Screen Components with the Disabled and Read Only Fields
Use two new fields to specify how users interact with screen components. When the Disabled field is set to true, users can’t navigate to
or modify any fields in the component. A gray background appears on the input fields in the component to provide users with a visual
cue. When the Read Only field is set to true, users can’t modify any fields in the component. However, they can navigate to and copy
values.
How: In Flow Builder, create a screen flow, add a Screen element to the flow. Include one or more components with the Disabled or
Read Only field. Set one or both of the new fields to {!$GlobalConstant.True} or to a formula resource that evaluates to true.
Save and run the flow. For example, this image shows a Name component with the Disabled field set to true.
The following table shows which components have the Disabled and Read Only fields.
606
Screen Component Has Disabled Field Has Read Only Field

Action Button (Beta) No Not applicable
Address Yes No
Checkbox Yes Not applicable
Checkbox Group Yes Not applicable
Choice Lookup Yes Not applicable
Currency Yes Yes
Date Yes Yes
Date & Time Yes Yes
Dependent Picklist No Not applicable
Email Yes Yes
File Upload Yes Not applicable
Long Text Area Yes Yes
Lookup No No
Multi-Select Picklist Yes Not applicable
Name Yes Yes
Number Yes Yes
Password Yes Yes
Phone No Yes
Picklist Yes Not applicable
Radio Buttons Yes Not applicable
Slider No Not applicable
Text Yes Yes
Toggle Yes Not applicable
URL Yes Yes
Update Records Using the State and Country Codes Selected in Address Screen Components
The Address screen component now includes two new fields that store the ISO code for the country or territory and state or province
that a user selects. Previously, the Address component stored only the name associated with the user’s selection. With this new support
for ISO codes, you can update the country or territory and state or province fields on records with ISO codes instead of names.
607
How: In Setup, on the State and Country/Territory Picklists page, ensure that Enable Picklists for Address Fields is enabled. In Flow Builder,
create a screen flow, add a Screen element to the flow and include an Address component in the Screen element. Optionally, specify a
default value in the Country Code and State or Province Code fields. Save and run the flow. Later in the flow, use the StateCode and
CountryCode values to update or create records.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Enable and Disable State and Country/Territory Picklists (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Run and Use the Results of an Autolaunched Flow on the Same Screen with the New Action Button
Component (Beta)
Add an Action Button component to a flow screen to run and retrieve information from an active autolaunched flow without leaving
the screen. The component renders a button that invokes the flow when clicked. For example, create a screen that includes a Lookup
component that enables a user to search for and select a Contact record. Add an Action Button component to the screen to launch a
flow that retrieves the Account, Case, and Opportunity records associated with the Contact record and populates other fields on the
same screen. The user doesn’t have to navigate away from the screen to run the flow.
(In case the "Agreements and Terms" link doesn't work when you copy and paste into Oxygen, it's
https://www.salesforce.com/company/legal/agreements/)
How: In Flow Builder, create and activate an autolaunched flow that retrieves data and saves data as one or more outputs that you can
reference later in the flow. Then, create a screen flow, add a Screen element to the flow, and include an Action Button on the screen.
Configure the Action Button component to launch the autolaunched flow that you previously created. Add another element to the
screen that ingests the data you retrieve with the Action Button component. Save and run the flow.
608
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Flow Screen Component: Action Button (Beta) (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Flow Example: Retrieve Opportunities for an Account that a User Selects (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)

Enjoy improved formatting in the Display Text component. Have a better screen reader experience for Long Text Area, Picklist, and Data
Table components. See reactive interactions in input-only fields as soon as a screen loads.
Where: These changes apply to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited,
and Developer editions. They’re supported only in Lightning runtime for flows.
Why: Screen flow users can now:
• See improved formatting when you reference Action Button or Data Table component outputs in Display Text components. Specifically,
the Display Text component now renders Decimal and Date record variable outputs with the correct formatting. Currency values
are still rendered without a currency symbol. To avoid this issue, wrap the reference in a formula.
• Have screen readers announce the label of Long Text Area and Picklist components when focusing on them. Previously, screen
readers didn’t announce these labels.
• Have screen readers announce when no items are selected in a Data Table component.

Easily find the type of flow or orchestration you want to build with a streamlined creation process. View elements by label instead of API
name. Work faster with auto-generated element names. Find resources more efficiently in Collection Filter, Collection Sort, Decision,
Loop, Subflows, Recommendation Assignment, and Orchestration Stages and Steps elements.
IN THIS SECTION:
Find the Type of Automation to Build with Ease
Now it’s easier to find the type of flow or orchestration you want to build. Instead of scrolling through all types and templates in one
window, you’re prompted to decide whether you want to start from scratch or use a template. The next window shows only relevant
information, based on what you selected on the previous window. For example, if you select the option to use a template, the next
window lists only templates. Also, you can now search for templates.
609
View Your Elements by Label in the Flow Builder Toolbox

Elements are now listed in the Flow Builder toolbox by their label instead of by their API name. This change unifies the label-first
user experience across Flow Builder. You can view the API name by hovering over a tooltip next to the element. You can now search
for an element by its label or by its API name.
Build Flows More Easily with Auto-Generated Element Names
Now when you add an element to your flow while in Auto-Layout mode, a value in the Label is generated automatically. We also
select that label so you can easily edit the generated value. This change applies to all elements except Screens. For Decision and
Wait elements, paths are also named automatically. We also updated the panel headings to be consistent across elements when
editing.
Find and Select Flow Resources More Easily in More Elements
With this update, Flow Builder extends enhanced resource selection to the Collection Filter, Collection Sort, Decision, Loop, Subflows,
Recommendation Assignment, and Orchestration Stages and Steps elements. It’s also available in Actions that don’t have custom
property editors. This enhanced selection is available only where an expression builder isn’t present with the exception of the Decision
element. Additional improvements include displaying resources by their labels and displaying icons that are more intuitive. There’s
also a new tooltip to provide more details for the resource such as data type and description. All of these improvements make it
easier for you to more quickly discover the resources that you need.
Use the Enhanced Action and Subflow Panel in Flow Builder
Flow Builder Action and Subflow panels now replace the existing Flow Builder Action and Subflow window for browsing, selecting,
and configuring invocable actions and creating HTTP Callout actions. Easily use the search bar functionality to browse by Category
and Custom Action Type.
Find the Type of Automation to Build with Ease

Now it’s easier to find the type of flow or orchestration you want to build. Instead of scrolling through all types and templates in one
window, you’re prompted to decide whether you want to start from scratch or use a template. The next window shows only relevant
information, based on what you selected on the previous window. For example, if you select the option to use a template, the next
window lists only templates. Also, you can now search for templates.
editions.
How: From the Flows section in Setup, click New Flow, or from the Automation Lightning app, click New. Select the type of automation
you want to build, then click Next.
If the selected automation type is Start From Scratch, the next window shows flows and orchestrations.
610
If the selected automation type is Use a Template, the next window shows templates. Search for your template to find it faster.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Flow Types (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
611
View Your Elements by Label in the Flow Builder Toolbox

Elements are now listed in the Flow Builder toolbox by their label instead of by their API name. This change unifies the label-first user
experience across Flow Builder. You can view the API name by hovering over a tooltip next to the element. You can now search for an
element by its label or by its API name.
editions.
How: From the Flow Builder canvas in Auto-Layout, click Toolbox and scroll down to view your element. Hover over the tooltip icon
to see the element’s description, API name, and label.
From the Flow Builder canvas in Free-Form, click Toolbox, then click Manager. Scroll down to view your element. Hover over the tooltip
icon to see the element’s description, API name, and label.
612
Build Flows More Easily with Auto-Generated Element Names

Now when you add an element to your flow while in Auto-Layout mode, a value in the Label is generated automatically. We also select
that label so you can easily edit the generated value. This change applies to all elements except Screens. For Decision and Wait elements,
paths are also named automatically. We also updated the panel headings to be consistent across elements when editing.
editions.
Why: To streamline the process of naming elements, we pre-populate the Label field to ensure that names are consistent and unique
across your flow.
How: From the canvas in Auto-Layout mode, add an element to your flow. The Label is automatically generated and selected.
Find and Select Flow Resources More Easily in More Elements

With this update, Flow Builder extends enhanced resource selection to the Collection Filter, Collection Sort, Decision, Loop, Subflows,
Recommendation Assignment, and Orchestration Stages and Steps elements. It’s also available in Actions that don’t have custom property
editors. This enhanced selection is available only where an expression builder isn’t present with the exception of the Decision element.
Additional improvements include displaying resources by their labels and displaying icons that are more intuitive. There’s also a new
tooltip to provide more details for the resource such as data type and description. All of these improvements make it easier for you to
more quickly discover the resources that you need.
editions.
How: Open an existing flow, select an element, and then click Edit Element. Click in a resource field. Resource grouping now displays
automatic outputs and variables with user-friendly labels under the elements in which they’re created.
Previously, you could search for a screen component by its name without having to drill into the specific screen. Now, you must select
the screen it was created from first. If you're unsure on which screen it was created, go to the Toolbox, click Manager, and search for
the screen component. Click to view in which Screen the component is used. This change in searching also impacts other nested
entities like Decision outcomes, Wait events, and Orchestration Steps.
613
Use the Enhanced Action and Subflow Panel in Flow Builder

Flow Builder Action and Subflow panels now replace the existing Flow Builder Action and Subflow window for browsing, selecting, and
configuring invocable actions and creating HTTP Callout actions. Easily use the search bar functionality to browse by Category and
Custom Action Type.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Essentials, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer
editions.
How: Click the add element icon from the open flow canvas. Choose between adding an Action or Subflow and begin your process.
Transform Your Data in Flows (Generally Available)

Modify your data into the shape that fits your business process with the new Transform element in Flow Builder. Now generally available,
the Transform element includes some changes since the last release. Mapping tips help you avoid errors before you save your flow.
Previously, you received errors for the Transform element only when you saved the flow. Also, you can use your keyboard and screen
reader to navigate the Transform element more easily. Previously, you couldn’t navigate source or target data or hear descriptions about
mappings.
How: To view a mapping tip of a misconfiguration error, hover over the error icon shown next to a target data field or collection when
you configure the Transform element in Flow Builder.
614
To view a mapping tip next to a target field or collection that’s unavailable for mapping, hover over the space next to the target field or
collection.
SEE ALSO:
Video: Transform Your Data with Flow Builder (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Transform Data in a Flow (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Flow Builder Tour (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Configure Conditions More Easily with Is Blank and Is Empty Operators in Flows
Use the Is Blank operator in a condition to check whether a text value contains no characters or only white space. For data type values
other than text values, the Is Blank operator checks whether values are null. Previously, you used the Equals operator and the Blank Value
(Empty String) global constant. To check whether a collection is empty, use the Is Empty operator. Previously, you added the Assignment
and Decision elements to check the collection size.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer
editions.
How: Add one of these elements to your flow: Decision, Wait for Conditions, or Collection Filter. To configure a condition in the element,
enter a resource that references a value. Select the Is Blank operator. Enter a resource that references a collection. And then select the
Is Empty operator.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Flow Operators in Decision and Wait Elements (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Flow Operators in Data Elements and Record Choice Sets (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Check for Duplicates Before Creating Records in a Flow

To prevent duplicate records, check for records that match a set of criteria in the Create Records element. Also specify whether to skip
or update matching records. If you choose to skip matching records, the flow doesn’t create or modify any records. If you choose to
update matching records, the flow modifies the records with the values that you provide. Some field-level configurations and validations
in your org override the settings in the Create Records element.
How: In Flow Builder, create a flow that includes a Create Records element. In the Create Records pane, enable Check for Matching
Records. Add one or more conditions. Select whether to update or skip matching records. Save the flow.
615
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Flow Marketing Cloud Updates
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Flow Element: Create Records (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Send users to the end of a flow with exit rules. Wait for specific link clicks with the updated Wait Until Event element. Use data graph
attributes in exit rules and Decision elements. View detailed flow execution data in new reports. Verify proper flow behavior with the
ability to debug segment-triggered flows
IN THIS SECTION:
End a Flow for a User at Any Point with Exit Rules
Create up to 10 rules in a segment triggered flow that specify when to end the execution of a flow for a user. For example, create a
rule that removes users who switch job roles. Since a user’s circumstances can change over time, exit rules can be especially useful
for long-running flows with Wait elements. Each exit rule contains one or more conditions, which act like filters to remove users.
Conditions are based on global attributes of the flow or Data Cloud data graph attributes, related attributes, or calculated insights.
Wait for Specific Link Clicks with the Wait Until Event Element
The Wait Until Event element is updated with the ability to wait until a specific link in an email or SMS is clicked.
In segment triggered flows, use Data Cloud data graph attributes to create conditions in exit rules and Decision elements. A data
graph is a collection of fields from existing Data Cloud data model objects that you group for fast access.
Analyze flow data from your segment-triggered flows in a report that aggregates flow run or flow element results by the triggering
individual. For example, get insights into which decision outcome paths were taken, flow exits, and when flows were triggered.
Test the behavior of your segment-triggered flows with the debug tool in Flow Builder.
616
Package Segment and Form-Triggered Flow Templates

Package segment and form-triggered flows that are in a draft status so that your users can use those flows as templates for their
own flows.
SEE ALSO:
End a Flow for a User at Any Point with Exit Rules

Create up to 10 rules in a segment triggered flow that specify when to end the execution of a flow for a user. For example, create a rule
that removes users who switch job roles. Since a user’s circumstances can change over time, exit rules can be especially useful for
long-running flows with Wait elements. Each exit rule contains one or more conditions, which act like filters to remove users. Conditions
are based on global attributes of the flow or Data Cloud data graph attributes, related attributes, or calculated insights.
Where: This feature is available in Lightning Experience for Salesforce Enterprise and Unlimited editions with Marketing Cloud Growth
edition.
How: In Flow Builder, open a segment triggered flow. In the Start node, click Edit next to the count of exit rules. Click Add Exit Rule.
Configure one or more conditions in the rule. Save your work. The flow evaluates the exit rules each time a user starts a flow, resumes a
flow after a pause, or invokes an action.
Wait for Specific Link Clicks with the Wait Until Event Element
The Wait Until Event element is updated with the ability to wait until a specific link in an email or SMS is clicked.
edition.
How: In Flow Builder, add the Wait Until Event element to the canvas. If the selected email or SMS contains links, you can select which
specific link to wait for.
617

In segment triggered flows, use Data Cloud data graph attributes to create conditions in exit rules and Decision elements. A data graph
is a collection of fields from existing Data Cloud data model objects that you group for fast access.
edition.
618
How: In Flow Builder, create a segment triggered flow that includes an exit rule or a Decision element. In the configuration pane for the
exit rule or Decision element, select a data graph field as the Resource in a condition. Finish configuring the flow, and save your work.

Analyze flow data from your segment-triggered flows in a report that aggregates flow run or flow element results by the triggering
individual. For example, get insights into which decision outcome paths were taken, flow exits, and when flows were triggered.
edition.
How: On the Reports tab, click New Report. In the Flow category, select the Flow History by Individual report to create a report to view
the overall result of each flow per triggering individual. Select Flow Run Details by Individual to see a flow’s results broken down by each
individual element in the flow.

Test the behavior of your segment-triggered flows with the debug tool in Flow Builder.
edition.
How: In Flow Builder, click Debug to debug your flow.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Debug a Flow in Flow Builder (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Package Segment and Form-Triggered Flow Templates

Package segment and form-triggered flows that are in a draft status so that your users can use those flows as templates for their own
flows.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in all editions.
619
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Flow Testing and Debugging
Flow Testing and Debugging

Quickly run through various scenarios for your Data Cloud-triggered flows with tests. Troubleshoot scheduled flows with expanded
debug options.
IN THIS SECTION:
Run Tests for Data Cloud-Triggered Flows
Create and manage specific scenarios to test your Data Cloud-triggered flows. With tests, you can quickly verify that your flow is
behaving as intended without having to manually configure debug parameters for each debug run.
Debug Scheduled Flows More Successfully
New options are available when debugging scheduled flows. You can skip the start condition requirements for the flow. You’re no
longer restricted to using the first available record to debug. Instead, you select the specific record on which to run. You can also
test multiple scenarios by selecting different triggering records to see whether a record runs.
Run Tests for Data Cloud-Triggered Flows

Create and manage specific scenarios to test your Data Cloud-triggered flows. With tests, you can quickly verify that your flow is behaving
as intended without having to manually configure debug parameters for each debug run.
How: In Flow Builder, click View Tests to create and manage tests.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Testing Your Flow (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
620
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Flow Testing and Debugging
Debug Scheduled Flows More Successfully

New options are available when debugging scheduled flows. You can skip the start condition requirements for the flow. You’re no longer
restricted to using the first available record to debug. Instead, you select the specific record on which to run. You can also test multiple
scenarios by selecting different triggering records to see whether a record runs.
Why: Because scheduled flow debugging automatically used the first available record as input, it can lead to inaccurate results or failures
when you’re debugging. This new flexibility can also help to identify potential performance issues.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select Flows. From your Flow list, open a scheduled flow. Click Debug.
Select your debug options and the triggering record from the list. Click Run. The debug executes.
When completed, the Debug Details panel shows the ID of the record on which the debug operation ran (1) and the number of records
impacted when the scheduled flow is triggered (2).
621
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Flow Runtime
Flow Runtime
Versioned updates are available for flows and processes that are configured to run on API version 61.0.
IN THIS SECTION:
Flow and Process Run-Time Changes in API Version 61.0
These updates affect only flows and processes that are configured to run on API version 61.0 or later.
Flow and Process Run-Time Changes in API Version 61.0

These updates affect only flows and processes that are configured to run on API version 61.0 or later.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and all versions of the mobile app in Essentials, Professional,
622
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Flow Management
How: With versioned updates you can test and adopt run-time behavior changes for individual flows and processes at your convenience.
To change the run-time API version of a flow, open it in Flow Builder and edit the flow version properties. To change the run-time API
version of a process, open it in Process Builder and edit its properties.
Run the Active Instead of the Latest Version of Subflows
This versioned update enables screen flows to call the active version of any subflows. Previously, a screen flow called the latest version
of a subflow regardless of whether it was also the active version.
Fields Available Only for Input in Screen Flow Components Are Reactive When the Screen Loads
This versioned update ensures that input-only fields such as the Source Collection field of the Data Table component are reactive
the first time a screen loads. This change also ensures that any Lightning web components configured to provide data to other
components on the same screen do so when the screen loads.
Flow Management
Mange flows in the Automation Lightning app, which is now available to all users. Use new permissions to enable users that don’t have
the Manage Flows permission to access certain elements. Get more flexibility managing your flows with unlimited paused and waiting
flow interviews.
IN THIS SECTION:
Manage Your Flows More Efficiently with the Automation Lightning App
View and monitor your flows in the Automation Lightning app, which is now available to all flow admins and other users that you
grant access to. From the app, you can create flows or open any flow that you have permission to access in Flow Builder. New list
views show your most recently modified flows and flow definitions that include errors. Search for flows using a keyword in the flow
label. Filter or sort flows by type, progress status, last modified date, last modifying user, and associated record fields. Additionally,
find a direct link to the Trailblazer Community and to relevant learning material on Trailhead.
Fine-Tune Access to Elements in Flow Builder
Use new permissions to enable users that don’t have the Manage Flows permission to access the Assignment, Collection Filter,
Collection Sort, Delete Records, Get Records, Loop, and Subflow elements in segment-triggered and form-triggered flows.
Have Unlimited Paused and Waiting Flows
We’ve removed the per-org usage-based limit for paused and waiting flow interviews. While there’s no limit now for paused and
waiting flow interviews, the number of paused and waiting flows can still be limited by the amount of storage available to your org.
If you need more storage, call your Salesforce account rep.
Organize Your Flows Based on Categories and Subcategories That You Define
Group your flows into categories and subcategories with two new fields on the flow record Details page. Use these fields to create
custom list views of your flows in the Automation Lightning app.
Manage Your Flows More Efficiently with the Automation Lightning App
View and monitor your flows in the Automation Lightning app, which is now available to all flow admins and other users that you grant
access to. From the app, you can create flows or open any flow that you have permission to access in Flow Builder. New list views show
your most recently modified flows and flow definitions that include errors. Search for flows using a keyword in the flow label. Filter or
sort flows by type, progress status, last modified date, last modifying user, and associated record fields. Additionally, find a direct link to
the Trailblazer Community and to relevant learning material on Trailhead.
editions.
623
How: In the App Launcher, search for Automation and select the Automation app. If you don’t see the app, go to Process Automation
Settings in Setup, and select Enable the Automation Lightning App.
Fine-Tune Access to Elements in Flow Builder

Use new permissions to enable users that don’t have the Manage Flows permission to access the Assignment, Collection Filter, Collection
Sort, Delete Records, Get Records, Loop, and Subflow elements in segment-triggered and form-triggered flows.
edition.
How: In Setup, on the Permission Sets page, select a permission set such as Marketing Cloud Admin. Go to App Permissions and select
one or more of these permissions:
Permission Name Description

Add Assignment Element to Flows Allow users without the Manage Flow user permission to add the
Assignment element to segment-triggered and form-triggered
flows in the Automation or Marketing apps.
Add Collection Filter Element to Flows Allow users without the Manage Flow user permission to add the
Collection Filter element to segment-triggered and form-triggered
Add Collection Sort Element to Flows Allow users without the Manage Flow user permission to add the
Collection Sort element to segment-triggered and form-triggered
Add Delete Records Element to Flows Allow users without the Manage Flow user permission to add the
Delete Records element to segment-triggered and form-triggered
624
Permission Name Description

Add Get Records Element to Flows Allow users without the Manage Flow user permission to add the
Get Records element to segment-triggered and form-triggered
Add Loop Element to Flows Allow users without the Manage Flow user permission to add the
Loop element to segment-triggered and form-triggered flows in
the Automation or Marketing apps.
Add Subflow Element to Flows Allow users without the Manage Flow user permission to add the
Subflow element to segment-triggered and form-triggered flows
in the Automation or Marketing apps.
Have Unlimited Paused and Waiting Flows

We’ve removed the per-org usage-based limit for paused and waiting flow interviews. While there’s no limit now for paused and waiting
flow interviews, the number of paused and waiting flows can still be limited by the amount of storage available to your org. If you need
more storage, call your Salesforce account rep.
Organize Your Flows Based on Categories and Subcategories That You Define
Group your flows into categories and subcategories with two new fields on the flow record Details page. Use these fields to create
custom list views of your flows in the Automation Lightning app.
editions.
How: In the Automation Lightning app, click a Flow Label to open the Details page for a flow. Edit the Category or Subcategory field.
For example, set the Category field to Service. Because Category and Subcategory are text fields, we recommend maintaining a list of
any values that you create.
In the Flows tab of the Automation Lightning app, create a new list view using the Category or Subcategory field as a filter.
625
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Flow Actions
Flow Actions
Lock and unlock records with an action. Set actions using visible default values and custom placeholder text. Configure a secure MuleSoft
connection with all org types and customers. Use threading tokens in emails to link email replies to the right records.
IN THIS SECTION:
Worried about someone updating a record when you’re updating it in a flow? Use the Lock Record action in a flow’s Action element
to lock or unlock a record and specify who can edit the record while it’s locked.
Use the New Toggle for Flow Action Inputs with Explicit Default Values
You can now see explicitly defined default values for flow action inputs. Use the Included with Default Value toggle value to see the
explicitly defined default value that's sent to the action at run time. Or use the Included with Specified Value toggle value to instead
specify a value for the input. You can also see custom guidance in inputs with defined placeholder text. This update doesn’t impact
actions that were created or updated before Summer ’24.
Configure a Secure Connection with MuleSoft in Setup (Generally Available)
Now generally available, customers can configure a secure connection with MuleSoft directly from the MuleSoft Services Setup page.
Manually add a connection through the simplified process of exchanging your provided MuleSoft and Salesforce org codes. Establishing
this connection enables MuleSoft to publish MuleSoft assets to Salesforce, creating the entities necessary to invoke those assets.
Now even automated emails support the new token-based threading. To securely link email replies to the correct record, place a
threading token in the email’s subject or body.

Worried about someone updating a record when you’re updating it in a flow? Use the Lock Record action in a flow’s Action element to
lock or unlock a record and specify who can edit the record while it’s locked.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs), and all versions of the mobile app in
Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Flow Core Action: Lock Record (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
626
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Flow Actions
Use the New Toggle for Flow Action Inputs with Explicit Default Values
You can now see explicitly defined default values for flow action inputs. Use the Included with Default Value toggle value to see the
explicitly defined default value that's sent to the action at run time. Or use the Included with Specified Value toggle value to instead
specify a value for the input. You can also see custom guidance in inputs with defined placeholder text. This update doesn’t impact
actions that were created or updated before Summer ’24.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Performance, Unlimited, Developer, Enterprise, and
How: Add an Action element to your flow. Select an action with an explicitly defined default value or custom placeholder text. See the
explicitly defined default value (1). To specify a different value, toggle Included with Default Value (2) to Included with Specified
Value. If the input has custom placeholder text, you can see it in the text box (3).
SEE ALSO:
Developer Documentation: InvocableVariable Annotation (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Configure a Secure Connection with MuleSoft in Setup (Generally Available)

Now generally available, customers can configure a secure connection with MuleSoft directly from the MuleSoft Services Setup page.
Manually add a connection through the simplified process of exchanging your provided MuleSoft and Salesforce org codes. Establishing
this connection enables MuleSoft to publish MuleSoft assets to Salesforce, creating the entities necessary to invoke those assets.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter MuleSoft, and then select MuleSoft > Services. Click Manage to open a new dialog.
Click Connect in the dialog to start establishing the connection.

Now even automated emails support the new token-based threading. To securely link email replies to the correct record, place a threading
token in the email’s subject or body.
627
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Flow and Process Release Updates
editions.
How: Go to the Send Email core action in Flow Builder. When you’re setting input values, choose to add a threading token to the email
subject or body. Be sure to include a Related Record ID.
If the related record is a case, Email-to-Case processes email replies automatically. Salesforce now also supports threading for other types
of objects. To process incoming emails containing tokens that aren’t cases, create an Apex Email Service and use the
EmailMessages.getRecordIdFromEmail function to find the record that matches the token. For example, if you’re implementing approval
processing and you’ve provided a Related Record ID of a PurchaseRequest custom object record, use the Apex Email Service to retrieve
the recordId and pass it to an autolaunched flow.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Flow Core Action: Send Email (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Email Services (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Apex Reference Guide: getRecordIdFromEmail (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Salesforce Flow has several release updates that are scheduled to be enforced in future releases.
IN THIS SECTION:
Enable EmailSimple Invocable Action to Respect Organization-Wide Profile Settings (Release Update)
With this update enabled, the Send Email invocable action adheres to organization-wide email address profile settings. This update
was first made available in Summer ’23 and was scheduled to be enforced in Spring ’24, but we postponed the enforcement date
to Summer ’24.
When this update is enabled, an autolaunched flow that runs in the default context enforces sharing rules when an Apex class
launches the flow. To enforce sharing, the Apex class must be declared using the with sharing keyword. This update is available
starting in Spring ’24.
After Prevent Guest User from Editing or Deleting Approval Requests is enabled, guest users can approve or reject an approval
request. Guest users are no longer able to edit, reassign, or delete approval requests. This update was first available in Winter ’23 and
enforcement was scheduled for Summer ’23. We then postponed the enforcement date to Spring ’24 and postponed again to Winter
’25.
With this update enabled, Salesforce restricts a user’s ability to run a flow. A user must be granted the correct profile or permission
set to run the flow. When enabled, this release update deprecates the FlowSites org permission. With this update, flows run more
securely because only users who are granted correct profiles or permission sets can run flows. This update is available starting in
Winter ’24.
To protect your users and network, apply stricter validation to the flow URL parameter that determines where you redirect users
after they complete a screen flow. With stricter validation, Salesforce blocks requests to redirect users to URLs that don’t meet the
additional validation requirements unless they’re on your list of trusted URLs in Setup. When Salesforce blocks a request, users see
an invalid-page redirection error. This update is available starting in Spring ’25.
628
This update preserves data integrity by rolling back transactions that end in an exception. When you execute an Apex action using
REST API, the API doesn’t change Salesforce data if that exception occurs. This update, originally named Enforce Rollbacks for Custom
Invocable Action Exceptions in Connect REST API, was first made available in Spring ’23 and was scheduled to be enforced in Winter
’24, but we postponed the enforcement date to Spring ’25.
ensures that a process with multiple criteria and a record update evaluates the original value of the field that began the process with
a value of null. This update was first made available in Summer ’19.
org and is scheduled to re-enforce it in Winter ’25.With this release update enabled, developers can trust that their legacy Apex
actions are properly protected and available only to other components in their managed packages. This update makes a flow fail if
it contains a public legacy Apex action.
$Api.Session_ID variable at run time. Previously, when a flow screen included the $Api.Session_ID variable, the browser session ID
of the user that ran the flow appeared on the screen. A user was able to employ the session ID to bypass security controls.
org and is scheduled to re-enforce it in Winter ’25. This critical update improves the behaviors and effects of failed invocable actions.
It only affects external REST API calls to invocable actions done in bulk. With this update, when invoking a set of actions in a single
request, a single failed invocable action no longer causes the entire transaction to fail. Without this update, if a single invocable
action fails, other invocable actions within the transaction are rolled back and the entire transaction fails.
Improve Scheduled Flow Performance with Updated Limits
Update your scheduled flow API to API version 61.0 to take advantage of the changed asynchronous limits. This change provides a
better automation experience for complex flows.
This update enables Apex batch action results to be returned in the order the requests are received. Currently, error-prone requests
are prioritized at the top of the result list, while successful ones are positioned at the bottom.
Enforce Permission Requirements Defined on Built-In Apex Classes Used as Inputs (Release Update)
This update enables permission requirements to be enforced for built-in Apex classes that are used as inputs for Apex actions. It also
guarantees that the affected Apex action operates within the current component context. Currently, Apex actions rely on the previous
component context. This behavior leads to failed flow interviews when the flow includes an Apex action that contains a built-in
Apex class with permission requirements as input.
629
Enable EmailSimple Invocable Action to Respect Organization-Wide Profile Settings

(Release Update)
With this update enabled, the Send Email invocable action adheres to organization-wide email address profile settings. This update was
first made available in Summer ’23 and was scheduled to be enforced in Spring ’24, but we postponed the enforcement date to Summer
’24.
When: Salesforce enforces this update in Summer ’24. To get the major release upgrade date for your instance, go to Trust Status, search
Why: When this update is enforced, any call to the EmailSimple invocable action adheres to organization-wide email address profile
settings. Using the Send Email action in Flow, Apex, or REST API without the correct email address profile setting results in an error.
How: If you have granted users access to invoke EmailSimple through internal features or via the REST API, review their implementation
and the profile settings applied to their organization-wide email addresses. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release
Updates, and then select Release Updates. To get the Enable EmailSimple Invocable Action to Respect Organization-Wide Profile
Settings release update, follow the assessment steps.
SEE ALSO:
Release Updates

When this update is enabled, an autolaunched flow that runs in the default context enforces sharing rules when an Apex class launches
the flow. To enforce sharing, the Apex class must be declared using the with sharing keyword. This update is available starting in Spring
’24.
Why: When an Apex class that’s declared using the with sharing keyword launches an autolaunched flow that runs in the default context,
the flow runs in system context with sharing rules. Previously, the flow ran in system context without sharing when an Apex class launched
the flow.
After this release update is enabled, the flow runs more securely in the default context when an Apex class that’s declared using the
with sharing keyword launches an autolaunched flow. The flow enforces the sharing rules of the user that executes the Apex class.
Previously, when sharing rules weren’t enforced, the flow was able to access all data.
How: When this update is enforced, data access is restricted for autolaunched flows that are run in the default context and launched
by an Apex class. The Apex class must be declared using the with sharing keyword. Data access is restricted to the sharing rules of the
user that executed the Apex class.
For example, a query can return fewer rows than it did in system context without sharing. An operation can fail because the user doesn’t
have the correct permissions.
SEE ALSO:
Release Updates
630
After Prevent Guest User from Editing or Deleting Approval Requests is enabled, guest users can approve or reject an approval request.
Guest users are no longer able to edit, reassign, or delete approval requests. This update was first available in Winter ’23 and enforcement
was scheduled for Summer ’23. We then postponed the enforcement date to Spring ’24 and postponed again to Winter ’25.
How: To apply this update, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates. For
Prevent Guest User from Editing or Deleting Approval Requests, follow the testing and activation steps.
SEE ALSO:
Release Updates

With this update enabled, Salesforce restricts a user’s ability to run a flow. A user must be granted the correct profile or permission set
to run the flow. When enabled, this release update deprecates the FlowSites org permission. With this update, flows run more securely
because only users who are granted correct profiles or permission sets can run flows. This update is available starting in Winter ’24.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and all versions of the mobile app in Essentials, Professional,
Why: Previously, in some cases, all users could run all flows without profiles or permission sets. Enabling this update restricts user access
to users who are granted the profile or permission set to run the flow.
Restrict User Access to Run Flows, follow the testing and activation steps.
After you enable Restrict User Access to Run Flows, all users must be granted access to run a flow. Add the Run Flows permission to a
permission set. For more granular access control, restrict specific flow access to an available profile. To create, update, and delete a flow,
add the Manage Flow permission.
SEE ALSO:
Release Updates
Salesforce Help: User Permissions (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Limit User Access to Execute Flows (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

To protect your users and network, apply stricter validation to the flow URL parameter that determines where you redirect users after
they complete a screen flow. With stricter validation, Salesforce blocks requests to redirect users to URLs that don’t meet the additional
validation requirements unless they’re on your list of trusted URLs in Setup. When Salesforce blocks a request, users see an invalid-page
redirection error. This update is available starting in Spring ’25.
editions.
631
When: Salesforce enforces this update starting in Spring ’25. To get the major release upgrade date for your instance, go to Trust Status,
search for your instance, and click the maintenance tab.
How: To review this update, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates. For
the Enable Secure Redirection for Flows release update, review the documentation links that describe valid redirection URLs, and then
follow the testing and activation steps.
SEE ALSO:
Release Updates
Salesforce Help: Customize a Flow URL to Control Finish Behavior (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Manage Redirections to External URLs (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
This update preserves data integrity by rolling back transactions that end in an exception. When you execute an Apex action using REST
API, the API doesn’t change Salesforce data if that exception occurs. This update, originally named Enforce Rollbacks for Custom Invocable
Action Exceptions in Connect REST API, was first made available in Spring ’23 and was scheduled to be enforced in Winter ’24, but we
postponed the enforcement date to Spring ’25.
How: Before you apply this update, review your Apex-defined invocable actions and ensure that they don’t generate exceptions when
executed. If the output isn’t void, ensure that inputs and outputs match on both the size and order. Then, from Setup, in the Quick Find
box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates. To get the Enforce Rollback for Apex Action Exceptions in REST
API release update, follow the testing and activation steps.
SEE ALSO:
Release Updates

When: Salesforce is scheduled to re-enforce this update in Winter ’25. To get the major release upgrade date for your instance, go to
Trust Status, search for your instance, and click the maintenance tab.
Why: Previously, a flow ran in system context when the flow was executed via REST API. A flow that runs in system context has permission
to access and modify all data.
With this update, the flow runs in the context of the user who is authenticated via REST API. When the flow runs via REST API, the running
user’s profile and permission sets determine the object permissions and field-level access of the flow.
For example, the Update Account Type flow is run via REST API.
POST /v54.0/actions/custom/flow/Update_Account_Type
632
This update improves security in Salesforce by preventing you from unintentionally allowing users to create or edit records they don’t
have access to.
How: Enabling this update prevents flows that run via REST API from editing records that the running user doesn’t have permission to
edit.
To review this update, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates. For Run Flows in
User Context via REST API, follow the testing and activation steps.
SEE ALSO:
Release Updates
ensures that a process with multiple criteria and a record update evaluates the original value of the field that began the process with a
value of null. This update was first made available in Summer ’19.
When: Salesforce enforces this update in Summer ’25. To get the major release upgrade date for your instance, go to Trust Status, search
Evaluate Criteria Based on Original Record Values in Process Builder, follow the testing and activation steps.
If you have a process with the Do you want to execute the actions only when specified changes are made to the record? option selected, or
it uses the ISCHANGED() function in your criteria, this update can cause the process to behave differently.
SEE ALSO:
Release Updates
org and is scheduled to re-enforce it in Winter ’25.With this release update enabled, developers can trust that their legacy Apex actions
are properly protected and available only to other components in their managed packages. This update makes a flow fail if it contains
a public legacy Apex action.
Why: This update resolves an issue where flows don’t respect the public access modifiers for legacy Apex actions. The issue affects only
legacy Apex actions that reference Apex classes installed from managed packages.
Legacy Apex actions were formerly known as Apex plug-ins. When you define an Apex class that implements the Process.Plugin
interface in your org, it's available in Flow Builder as a legacy Apex action.
Note: For new Apex integrations, we recommend using the InvocableMethod annotation instead of the
Process.Plugin interface. This update doesn't affect invocable Apex methods.
633
With this update enabled:

• Flows fail when they execute public legacy Apex actions.
• Public legacy Apex actions aren't available in Flow Builder.
• Global legacy Apex actions with public describe or invokemethods are available to flows in a different namespace.
How: We recommend that you test this update in a sandbox or developer org before activating the update in production. If you must
work in your production org, do so during off-peak hours. Test all paths that contain legacy Apex action elements and make sure your
flows work correctly. If a legacy Apex action is important for a business process but isn’t supported with this update, contact the package
developer. The developer can consider making a legacy Apex action global, or rebuilding the functionality in a new Apex class.
To apply this update, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and select Release Updates. For Make Flows
Respect Access Modifiers for Legacy Apex Actions, follow the testing and activation steps.
SEE ALSO:
Release Updates

$Api.Session_ID variable at run time. Previously, when a flow screen included the $Api.Session_ID variable, the browser session ID of
the user that ran the flow appeared on the screen. A user was able to employ the session ID to bypass security controls.
How: Before you apply this update, remove all dependencies on the $Api.Session_ID variable from your flows. Then, from Setup, in the
Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates. To get the Disable Access to Browser Session IDs in
Flows release update, follow the testing and activation steps.
SEE ALSO:
Release Updates

org and is scheduled to re-enforce it in Winter ’25. This critical update improves the behaviors and effects of failed invocable actions. It
only affects external REST API calls to invocable actions done in bulk. With this update, when invoking a set of actions in a single request,
a single failed invocable action no longer causes the entire transaction to fail. Without this update, if a single invocable action fails, other
invocable actions within the transaction are rolled back and the entire transaction fails.
When: Salesforce is scheduled to re-enforce this update in Winter ’25 . To get the major release upgrade date for your instance, go to
634
Why: Without this critical update, if one invocable action fails, other invocable actions in the same transaction are rolled back. With this
critical update, Salesforce tries three times to execute the invocable actions that run successfully and rolls back only the invocable actions
that fail to execute. This functionality is called “partial save.”
Most invocable action types that are invoked via REST API are enabled with the partial save functionality. However, even with this critical
update, the following action types don’t support partial save functionality:
• Cancel Fulfillment Order
• Cancellation Orders
• Capture Funds
• Content Workspaces
• Create Fulfillment Order
• Create Invoice from Fulfillment Order
• Create Service Report
• External Services
• Generate Work Orders
• Invocable Apex
• Skills-based Routing
• Submit Digital Form Response
Partial save can cause an external callout to occur multiple times, and external callouts can’t be rolled back. Repeated external callouts
can occur only when a flow is launched from a process or invoked from REST API, and that flow makes multiple attempts to execute the
action that’s making the external callouts.
Because partial save can make multiple attempts to execute an action, the transaction can take longer than expected. This can cause
your org to reach some limits sooner than expected.
How:
Review any API integrations that use invocable actions to ensure they properly accommodate partial-save behavior. Then, from Setup,
in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates. To get the Enable Partial Save for Invocable
Actions release update, follow the testing and activation steps
SEE ALSO:
Release Updates
Improve Scheduled Flow Performance with Updated Limits

Update your scheduled flow API to API version 61.0 to take advantage of the changed asynchronous limits. This change provides a better
automation experience for complex flows.
SEE ALSO:
Developer Documentation: Apex Governor Limits
635
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Flow Orchestration

This update enables Apex batch action results to be returned in the order the requests are received. Currently, error-prone requests are
prioritized at the top of the result list, while successful ones are positioned at the bottom.
Why: Currently, results with errors are prioritized at the top of the result list, and successful ones are positioned at the bottom. With this
change, all results are sorted by when the associated requests were received.
How: After this update is applied, Apex batch action results are ordered according to when the incoming requests were received. Then,
from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates. To get the Enforce Permission
Requirements Defined on File-Based Apex Classes Used as Inputs release update, follow the testing and activation steps.
Enforce Permission Requirements Defined on Built-In Apex Classes Used as Inputs

(Release Update)
This update enables permission requirements to be enforced for built-in Apex classes that are used as inputs for Apex actions. It also
guarantees that the affected Apex action operates within the current component context. Currently, Apex actions rely on the previous
component context. This behavior leads to failed flow interviews when the flow includes an Apex action that contains a built-in Apex
class with permission requirements as input.
Why: Currently, Apex actions rely on the previous component context. With this update enabled, permission requirements are enforced
for built-in Apex classes that are used as inputs for Apex actions. It also guarantees that the affected Apex action operates within the
current component context.
How: When this update is enabled, permission requirements for Apex inputs that use built-in Apex classes are enforced, and the affected
Apex action operates within the current component context. Then, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates,
and then select Release Updates. To get the Enforce Permission Requirements Defined on Built-In Apex Classes Used as Inputs release
update, follow the testing and activation steps.
Flow Orchestration
Manually suspend a running orchestration. Fix the errors in an orchestration run that failed within the previous 14 days because of a
recoverable error, and then resume the orchestration run. See all of your assigned orchestration work items for a record and select the
one to complete first.
IN THIS SECTION:
You started your loan processing orchestration, but your customer wants to pause the process so they can add more documentation.
What can you do? Now you can suspend a running orchestration, and when the customer has updated their documentation, you
can resume the orchestration.
Your orchestration ran for 3 weeks and then failed. Did it fail because a flow or action called by a step failed? If it did and the
orchestration run failed within the last 14 days, you can now fix the error and resume the orchestration run.
636
Select the Orchestration Work Item to Complete

You’ve been assigned 3 work items for an opportunity record. You can now see all items assigned to you in the Orchestration Work
Guide component on the associated record page, so you select the one that you want to complete first. When you’ve completed a
work item, the work item list refreshes automatically.
Use Omni-Channel Routing with Work Items
When an interactive step is assigned to a group or queue, the orchestration run emails all assigned users a notification that they
have an assigned work item. Now use Omni-Channel to route work items based on routing logic that you define. To use Omni-Channel
routing, assign an interactive step to a queue that’s associated with the Orchestration Work Item object. With Omni-Channel routing,
queue members still receive notification emails, but they’re also notified via the Omni-Channel widget based on your routing logic.
Configure Conditions More Easily with the Is Blank Operator in Orchestrations
You can now use the Is Blank operator in a condition to check whether a text value contains no characters or only white space. For
values of data types other than text, the Is Blank operator checks whether the values are null. Previously, you used the Equals operator
and the Blank Value (Empty String) global constant.
Other Changes to Flow Orchestration
We made several improvements to Flow Orchestration.

You started your loan processing orchestration, but your customer wants to pause the process so they can add more documentation.
What can you do? Now you can suspend a running orchestration, and when the customer has updated their documentation, you can
resume the orchestration.
Who: Users with the Manage Orchestration Runs user permission or the Manage Orchestration Runs and Work Items user permission.
How: To suspend an orchestration run, from the Orchestration Runs list view, locate the orchestration run you want to suspend, and,
from its Quick Action menu, select Suspend Run. To resume a suspended orchestration run, from the Orchestration Runs list view, locate
the suspended orchestration run you want to resume, and, from its Quick Action menu, select Resume Run.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Suspend a Running Orchestration (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Resume a Suspended Orchestration (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Your orchestration ran for 3 weeks and then failed. Did it fail because a flow or action called by a step failed? If it did and the orchestration
run failed within the last 14 days, you can now fix the error and resume the orchestration run.
Who: Users with the Manage Orchestration Runs user permission or the Manage Orchestration Runs and Work Items user permission.
How: To resume a failed orchestration run, from the Orchestration Runs list view, locate the orchestration run you want to resume, and,
from its Quick Action menu, select Resume Run. Resume Run isn’t available for an orchestration run when its failure wasn’t due to a
called flow or when action or the failure occurred more than 14 days in the past.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Resume a Failed Orchestration (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
637
Select the Orchestration Work Item to Complete

You’ve been assigned 3 work items for an opportunity record. You can now see all items assigned to you in the Orchestration Work
Guide component on the associated record page, so you select the one that you want to complete first. When you’ve completed a work
item, the work item list refreshes automatically.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: View Orchestration Work Items on a Record (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

When an interactive step is assigned to a group or queue, the orchestration run emails all assigned users a notification that they have
an assigned work item. Now use Omni-Channel to route work items based on routing logic that you define. To use Omni-Channel
routing, assign an interactive step to a queue that’s associated with the Orchestration Work Item object. With Omni-Channel routing,
queue members still receive notification emails, but they’re also notified via the Omni-Channel widget based on your routing logic.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Route Work with Omni-Channel (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Configure Conditions More Easily with the Is Blank Operator in Orchestrations

You can now use the Is Blank operator in a condition to check whether a text value contains no characters or only white space. For values
of data types other than text, the Is Blank operator checks whether the values are null. Previously, you used the Equals operator and the
Blank Value (Empty String) global constant.
How: Add a Stage element, a Decision element, or Step resource to your orchestration. To determine whether a text resource references
an empty string, configure a condition with a resource that can contain a string. Then select the Is Blank operator.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Flow Orchestration Operators in Decision Elements (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Other Changes to Flow Orchestration

We made several improvements to Flow Orchestration.
Enhanced Flow Orchestration Object Relationships

We’ve enhanced the relationships between Flow Orchestration objects. This change means that you can add relationships to custom
reports and use those reports in more robust dashboards.
638
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Salesforce for Slack Integrations
Searchable Work Items in the To-Do List

You can now search orchestration work items that appear in the To-Do List.
Ownership of Work Items Assigned to Queues

When you assign an interactive step to a queue, ownership of the work item depends on whether the queue supports the Orchestration
Work Item object. If the queue doesn’t support the Orchestration Work Item object, then the work item owner is still the automated
process user. If the queue supports the Orchestration Work Item object, then the work item owner is now the queue.
Updated Resource Picker for Orchestrations

When you set up conditions or pass values to called actions, access resources associated with steps through the step’s parent stage in
the Resource picker.
Updated Orchestration Run Quick Menu Labels

We’ve updated the labels on the orchestration run Quick Menu. Cancel Orchestration and Debug Orchestration are now Cancel and
Debug respectively.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Flow Orchestration Work Items (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce for Slack Integrations

Use Slack and Salesforce together to connect with customers, track progress, collaborate seamlessly, and deliver team success from
anywhere.
See the release notes for the latest updates: Salesforce for Slack Integrations Release Notes.

external client apps now support a bunch of new OAuth flows. Give users access to manage custom domains with a new, more targeted
user permission. Create uninterrupted user experiences across Salesforce and custom interfaces with the new Single-Access UI Bridge
API. Access your Data Cloud encryption policy status from the Security Center Encryption Policy metric. Scratch orgs on Salesforce Edge
Network use partitioned domains. And Android mobile connected apps now require the Admin SDK private key and project ID from a
Google Firebase project.
IN THIS SECTION:
Salesforce Backup
Salesforce Backup managed package expands the list of supported objects to cover read-only objects. Choose when your backups
run with new customizable backup scheduling.
Domains
Update references to legacy Salesforce URLs before redirections stop in Winter ’25. Give users access to manage custom domains
with a new, more targeted user permission. And scratch orgs on Salesforce Edge Network use partitioned domains.
639
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Salesforce Backup

Use the External Client App Manager in Setup to create and manage external client apps, and check out the new flows for external
client apps. Also in Setup, define and enable OAuth 2.0 token exchange handlers for the OAuth 2.0 token exchange flow. Create
uninterrupted user experiences across Salesforce and custom interfaces with the new Single-Access UI Bridge API.
Privacy Center
Review recent changes to Privacy Center’s user interface and functionality.
Salesforce Shield
Encrypt more Nonprofit Cloud data. Net Zero Cloud objects are compatible with Field Audit Trail. Event Log File Browser is generally
available for easy access to event log files right from Setup. And say goodbye to third-party tools for digging into event logs. Event
Monitoring’s new event log object framework (beta) captures event data in standard objects that support direct queries via API.
Security Center
View pertinent data with enhanced charts. Access your Data Cloud encryption policy status from the Security Center Encryption
Policy metric. Create custom metrics (beta) in Security Center.
Other Security Changes
To prepare for two release updates, view blocked redirections and resources in an updated Setup page. Reduce emails about certificate
expirations, and create certificates with a 3072-bit key length. And refresh Named Credentials access tokens based on non-standard
HTTP status codes.
Salesforce Backup
Salesforce Backup managed package expands the list of supported objects to cover read-only objects. Choose when your backups run
with new customizable backup scheduling.
IN THIS SECTION:
Every organization has their own rhythm, schedules, and work cadences. You can now customize your backup schedule to suit your
needs. Configure your policy to capture backups monthly, weekly, daily, or hourly. You can also choose a start time and preferred
time zone. This change is available in v2.19 of the Salesforce Backup managed package.
Add Read-Only Objects to Your Backup Policy
Version 2.19 of the Salesforce Backup managed package now supports some read-only objects, including History associated objects
and more Activities objects. Add these objects to your policy when you want to retain records for future auditing purposes such as
reviewing changes to important fields over time.

Every organization has their own rhythm, schedules, and work cadences. You can now customize your backup schedule to suit your
needs. Configure your policy to capture backups monthly, weekly, daily, or hourly. You can also choose a start time and preferred time
zone. This change is available in v2.19 of the Salesforce Backup managed package.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Professional, and Unlimited editions.
Who: This change applies to editions that have the Salesforce Backup add-on subscription.
How: In the Salesforce Backup app, on the Backup tab, click Configure Policy Defaults. Then choose when you want the app to make
backups.
640
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Domains
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set a Custom Backup Schedule (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Add Read-Only Objects to Your Backup Policy

Version 2.19 of the Salesforce Backup managed package now supports some read-only objects, including History associated objects and
more Activities objects. Add these objects to your policy when you want to retain records for future auditing purposes such as reviewing
changes to important fields over time.
Who: This change applies to editions that have the Salesforce Backup add-on subscription.
How: In the Salesforce Backup app, on the Backup tab, supported read-only objects appear in the list of available objects. Select an
object, and enable it in your policy.
Domains
Update references to legacy Salesforce URLs before redirections stop in Winter ’25. Give users access to manage custom domains with
a new, more targeted user permission. And scratch orgs on Salesforce Edge Network use partitioned domains.
IN THIS SECTION:
Prevent disruption for your customers and end users when the temporary redirection of legacy Salesforce domains ends. To help
your users update outdated links and bookmarks, show a brief message during the redirections that provides the updated URL. Then
update references to your previous Salesforce URLs, including site URLs and URLs that contain your Salesforce instance but not your
My Domain name.
Identify Redirections for Your Instanced My Domain Hostnames
Identify your hard-coded instanced My Domain URLs to update before those redirections end in Winter ’25. To help you, a field on
the Hostname Redirects event type now tracks redirections for these URLs.
Permit users to add, edit, and delete custom domains and custom URLs without granting them broader admin privileges. A custom
domain serves your Experience Cloud sites or Salesforce Sites on a domain that you own, such as https://www.example.com.
Previously, to manage custom domains, you assigned the Customize Application user permission.
641
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Domains
Maximize Availability with Partitioned Domains in More Orgs

To maximize the availability of your orgs, My Domain uses partitioned domains for new Developer Edition orgs, patch orgs, scratch
orgs, demo orgs, and Trailhead Playgrounds. Partitioned domains include a word related to the org type so that Salesforce can
gradually roll out service-delivery changes. This feature is enabled by default in new qualifying orgs, and sandboxes with enhanced
domains are always partitioned. To ensure continued access to all your orgs, update your allowlists for the new domains. To include
your existing org in the Salesforce deployment schedule for that org type, enable and deploy partitioned domains.

Prevent disruption for your customers and end users when the temporary redirection of legacy Salesforce domains ends. To help your
users update outdated links and bookmarks, show a brief message during the redirections that provides the updated URL. Then update
references to your previous Salesforce URLs, including site URLs and URLs that contain your Salesforce instance but not your My Domain
name.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance,
When: Salesforce stops the redirections for these hostnames in Winter ’25. The deployment of that release is scheduled to start in August
2024 for sandboxes and in September 2024 for production.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Prepare for the End of Redirections for Non-Enhanced Domains (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Identify Redirections for Your Instanced My Domain Hostnames

Identify your hard-coded instanced My Domain URLs to update before those redirections end in Winter ’25. To help you, a field on the
Hostname Redirects event type now tracks redirections for these URLs.
The Hostname Redirects event is available in the API but not in the Event Monitoring Analytics app. This event is free for all customers
with a 24-hour data retention period.
SEE ALSO:

Permit users to add, edit, and delete custom domains and custom URLs without granting them broader admin privileges. A custom
domain serves your Experience Cloud sites or Salesforce Sites on a domain that you own, such as https://www.example.com. Previously,
to manage custom domains, you assigned the Customize Application user permission.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions. Custom
domains are also available in Professional Edition with Marketing Cloud Account Engagement (Pardot).
642
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Identity and Access Management
How: Add the new Custom Domain Management user permission to a new or existing permission set. Then assign the permission set
to the users who require this permission.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Custom Domains (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Permission Sets (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Maximize Availability with Partitioned Domains in More Orgs

To maximize the availability of your orgs, My Domain uses partitioned domains for new Developer Edition orgs, patch orgs, scratch orgs,
demo orgs, and Trailhead Playgrounds. Partitioned domains include a word related to the org type so that Salesforce can gradually roll
out service-delivery changes. This feature is enabled by default in new qualifying orgs, and sandboxes with enhanced domains are always
partitioned. To ensure continued access to all your orgs, update your allowlists for the new domains. To include your existing org in the
Salesforce deployment schedule for that org type, enable and deploy partitioned domains.
Where: This change applies to non-production orgs with enhanced domains in Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and all versions
of the Salesforce mobile app in Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions. The scratch
partition is newly available if you use Salesforce Edge Network. Only the sandbox partition is available in Government Cloud—Defense
orgs. Partitioned domains aren’t available in Trailhead Playgrounds on Salesforce Edge Network.
How: To ensure that your users can connect to partitioned domains, update your allowlists.
In existing demo orgs, Developer Edition orgs, patch orgs, scratch orgs, and Trailhead Playgrounds with enhanced domains, you can
enable or disable this feature from the My Domain Setup page. When you enable the Use partitioned domains option in the My Domain
Details section, you can preview your new My Domain login URL at the bottom of the screen. To use partitioned domains, save the
change and deploy your new My Domain.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Partitioned Domains (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Use the External Client App Manager in Setup to create and manage external client apps, and check out the new flows for external client
apps. Also in Setup, define and enable OAuth 2.0 token exchange handlers for the OAuth 2.0 token exchange flow. Create uninterrupted
user experiences across Salesforce and custom interfaces with the new Single-Access UI Bridge API.
643
IN THIS SECTION:
Customize SMS One-Time Password Delivery for Experience Cloud Sites (Beta)
To provide branded, personalized identity verification experiences for external users, create an Apex handler to send one-time
passwords (OTPs) via an SMS messaging provider of your choice. Customize the content of the message and the short code that
tells users who sent it. Use the handler to send OTPs for any Experience Cloud identity verification use case, such as multi-factor
authentication (MFA) and passwordless login.
Brand the Welcome Email for Passwordless Registration
Take control of identity experiences for customers and partners. Use the new Welcome New Member for Passwordless Registration
email template to customize the one-time password (OTP) email that users receive when they sign up for your Experience Cloud
site using passwordless registration.
Create External Client Apps While Maintaining Security and Defined User Roles
Try the new External Client App Manager to create, manage, and update your external client apps. You can still do all these things
with Metadata API, but this new user interface means that now you don’t have to. With External Client App Manager,you can create
a local app just for your org or design one to package and distribute.
The external client apps framework, a new and improved generation of connected apps, is catching up to connected apps fast. The
new framework now supports headless login, passwordless login, and guest user flows using the Authorization Code and Credentials
Flow. You can also configure an external client app to issue JSON Web Token (JWT)-based access tokens.
Integrate Custom App Experiences with the Salesforce UI
Give users uninterrupted access across custom apps and Salesforce. With the new Single-Access UI Bridge API, use an existing
Salesforce access token to load a new session in a Salesforce UI, such as a Visualforce site or mobile app. For example, when users
are logged in to a headless app, redirect them to your Experience Cloud site to view Support cases without making them log in
again.
Create Token Exchange Handlers More Easily
For better usability when configuring the OAuth 2.0 token exchange flow, define and enable OAuth 2.0 token exchange handlers
in Setup instead of using Metadata API. Create a handler definition, link it to an Apex class, and set some of its properties, such as
what types of tokens it supports and whether it can create users.
If you see this release update, your Salesforce instance is using our original single-configuration SAML framework, which supports
single sign-on (SSO) with only one external identity provider. With this release update, we’re removing support for the
single-configuration SAML framework and supporting only the multiple-configuration SAML framework. To preserve your existing
configuration, follow the steps to apply this update. If you don’t, your SSO configuration stops working when this update is enforced.
This update was first made available in Spring ’24. It was scheduled to be enforced for all instances in Summer ’24, but we postponed
the enforcement date for production instances to Spring ’25. This update is still enforced for sandboxes in Summer ’24.
Enter New Firebase Information Required for Android Push Notifications
The legacy Firebase Cloud Messaging API server key is no longer accepted for configuring Android push notifications on mobile
connected apps. Because of a change in how Google handles push notifications, Android mobile connected apps now require the
Admin SDK private key and project ID from a Google Firebase project.
Use REST API for Access to External Client App OAuth Consumer Credentials (Release Update)
644
Verify Email Addresses to Meet the Email Verification Requirement

To complete enforcement of the email verification requirement introduced in the Spring ’22 major release, Salesforce now requires
all users in all orgs and Experience Cloud sites to verify their email address. If a user sends an email from an unverified email address,
Salesforce rejects this email message and doesn’t complete the send. Unverified email addresses can’t be used for sends until the
user verifies their email address or resets their password. To avoid disruptions, ensure that all user email addresses are verified.
Multi-factor authentication (MFA) is turned on by default for direct logins to production orgs as of April 8, 2024. Starting in Summer
’24, admins get in-app reminders if they don’t comply with the MFA requirement.
Forced Login is Permanently Disabled in Winter ’25
To improve security, in Winter ’25, users can no longer log in to Salesforce by passing a username and password as URL query string
parameters in the login URL, also known as forced login. This change will break implementations and third-party integrations that
use a forced login via a URL, as well as direct login (autologin) links. To avoid service disruptions, update integrations that use forced
login.
Identify the Origin IP Address for Logins with One or More Proxies
To monitor login activity more thoroughly and prevent potential threats, you can now see what value the client passed in the
X-Forwarded-For header of their HTTP request to Salesforce. For logins that redirect users to one or more proxies, the
X-Forwarded-For field is sometimes used to store the origin IP address of the client. Use the new Forwarded for IP column
in the Login History and related fields to track the origin IP address. This change isn’t available for OAuth and single sign-on (SSO)
logins.
Password Reset Login Subtype Label Is Changed
For more consistency with naming conventions, we renamed the label for the password reset login subtype in the Login History.
When a user resets their password, the Login Subtype column now displays UI Password Reset instead of Change Password.
Although Salesforce doesn’t recommend it, if you must use Embedded Login with your Experience Cloud Site, you can enable it on
the Login & Registration page. In Summer ’24, Salesforce disabled Embedded Login by default to encourage users to move to OAuth
2.0 Web Server Flow or OAuth 2.0 User-Agent Flow.
Take Advantage of Apex Enhancements for Processing JSON Web Tokens (JWTs)
With changes to how JSON Web Tokens (JWTs) are processed, it’s now easier to extract data from JWTs generated by methods in
the Auth.JWTUtil class. We also clarified what methods we support for a JWT depending on where it came from. And you can
get more test coverage by mocking HTTP callouts when processing JWTs.
With new support for larger tokens, use the OAuth 2.0 token exchange flow with a wider range of third-party identity providers.
When you send third-party tokens to Salesforce in the subject_token parameter, the value can be up to 10,000 characters
long. Previously, the maximum length for values in this parameter was 2,000 characters.
To reduce performance issues, we now prevent client apps from sending simultaneous token requests with the same refresh token
when using the OAuth 2.0 refresh token flow. Previously, identical token requests sent at the same time didn’t fail, but they did lead
to system issues across Salesforce. To avoid disruptions, update integrations that use the refresh token flow to stop sending
simultaneous, identical requests to the token endpoint. Improve the efficiency of your integrations by reusing access tokens instead
of continually requesting new ones.
645
Customize SMS One-Time Password Delivery for Experience Cloud Sites (Beta)
To provide branded, personalized identity verification experiences for external users, create an Apex handler to send one-time passwords
(OTPs) via an SMS messaging provider of your choice. Customize the content of the message and the short code that tells users who
sent it. Use the handler to send OTPs for any Experience Cloud identity verification use case, such as multi-factor authentication (MFA)
and passwordless login.
Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Why: For Experience Cloud sites, use a custom OTP provider for any identity verification use case that uses SMS, such as MFA, passwordless
login and registration, self-registration with SMS, and device activation.
For headless apps, use a custom OTP provider to send SMS messages during the headless forgot password, passwordless login, and
registration flows.
How: Create a custom one-time password delivery handler Apex class. From your Experience Cloud Login & Registration settings, in the
Customized OTP Delivery section, select your Apex handler class.
To opt in to this feature, contact your Salesforce account executive. Opting in to this feature affects all Experience Cloud sites. To avoid
disruptions, enable the Apex handler for all sites.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Customize OTP Delivery for Experience Cloud Identity Verification (Beta) (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)
Brand the Welcome Email for Passwordless Registration

Take control of identity experiences for customers and partners. Use the new Welcome New Member for Passwordless Registration email
template to customize the one-time password (OTP) email that users receive when they sign up for your Experience Cloud site using
passwordless registration.
Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Customize the Passwordless Registration Welcome Email Template (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Create External Client Apps While Maintaining Security and Defined User Roles
Try the new External Client App Manager to create, manage, and update your external client apps. You can still do all these things with
Metadata API, but this new user interface means that now you don’t have to. With External Client App Manager,you can create a local
app just for your org or design one to package and distribute.
Who: The External Client App Manager is shown only to Lightning Experience-enabled users on orgs that have opted in to External
Client Apps.
646
Why: As part of the new generation of Connected Apps, External Client Apps offers the ability to connect external applications with
Salesforce data while maintaining security and clearly defining user roles. External client apps are designed with the security of
second-generation managed packaging in mind.
How: In Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter External Client App, and then select Settings. Select Opt in to External Client
Apps.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Comparison of Connected Apps and External Client Apps Features (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)

The external client apps framework, a new and improved generation of connected apps, is catching up to connected apps fast. The new
framework now supports headless login, passwordless login, and guest user flows using the Authorization Code and Credentials Flow.
You can also configure an external client app to issue JSON Web Token (JWT)-based access tokens.
Where: The changes to support the Authorization Code and Credentials Flow apply to LWR, Aura, and Visualforce sites accessed through
Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions. The changes to support JWT-based access
tokens apply to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and
Developer editions.
Why: Unlike the connected apps framework, the external client apps framework is compatible with second-generation packaging (2GP),
making apps easier to package and distribute. It’s also more secure and fully metadata-exposed. And its design makes it easy to define
clear roles for developers and admins.
How: Create and edit external client apps via the External Client App Manager in Setup, or use Metadata API. External client apps currently
support all variations of the Authorization Code and Credentials Flow except headless registration.
SEE ALSO:
Metadata API
Salesforce Help: Headless Identity APIs for Customers and Partners (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: JWT-Based Access Tokens (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
647
Integrate Custom App Experiences with the Salesforce UI

Give users uninterrupted access across custom apps and Salesforce. With the new Single-Access UI Bridge API, use an existing Salesforce
access token to load a new session in a Salesforce UI, such as a Visualforce site or mobile app. For example, when users are logged in to
a headless app, redirect them to your Experience Cloud site to view Support cases without making them log in again.
How: Using a POST request, send an access token to the new /services/oauth2/singleaccess endpoint on your My
Domain or Experience Cloud site. Salesforce returns a JSON response with a frontdoor.jsp URL. Use the URL to redirect the user and load
a new, authenticated session in a custom interface.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Generate a Frontdoor URL to Bridge into UI Sessions (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Create Token Exchange Handlers More Easily

For better usability when configuring the OAuth 2.0 token exchange flow, define and enable OAuth 2.0 token exchange handlers in
Setup instead of using Metadata API. Create a handler definition, link it to an Apex class, and set some of its properties, such as what
types of tokens it supports and whether it can create users.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience (not available in all orgs) in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer
editions.
Why: The token exchange flow simplifies your integration patterns for use cases that include a central identity provider, such as Okta,
along with multiple service providers and microservices.
How: From the Token Exchange Handlers page in Setup, define and enable the handler. The ability to edit the handler in Setup isn’t
currently supported. To edit its definition, use Metadata API.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: OAuth 2.0 Token Exchange Flow (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

If you see this release update, your Salesforce instance is using our original single-configuration SAML framework, which supports single
sign-on (SSO) with only one external identity provider. With this release update, we’re removing support for the single-configuration
SAML framework and supporting only the multiple-configuration SAML framework. To preserve your existing configuration, follow the
steps to apply this update. If you don’t, your SSO configuration stops working when this update is enforced. This update was first made
available in Spring ’24. It was scheduled to be enforced for all instances in Summer ’24, but we postponed the enforcement date for
production instances to Spring ’25. This update is still enforced for sandboxes in Summer ’24.
Note: This release update is available only if you're using a single-configuration SAML framework. If you don't see this release
update, you're already using the multiple-configuration framework, and this release update doesn't apply to your instance.
When: This update is enforced for production instances in Spring ’25 and is enforced for sandboxes in Summer ’24. This update was
scheduled to be enforced for all instances in Summer ’24 but was postponed to Spring ’25 for production instances only. To get the
major release upgrade date for your instance, go to Trust Status, search for your instance, and click the maintenance tab.
Why: We’re no longer supporting the single-configuration SAML SSO framework that you’re currently using. When this update is enforced,
you’re required to use a multiple-configuration SAML framework. To keep using your existing SAML SSO configuration, migrate to the
multiple-configuration framework. Otherwise, your SAML SSO stops working for you when this update is enforced.
648
How: These changes apply to your existing SAML SSO configuration.

• SAML responses from your identity provider must include the audience attribute.
• Your Salesforce Login URL changes.
• If Salesforce can’t parse a SAML response, it isn’t recorded in the login history.
Make sure you understand these changes, update your configuration accordingly, and test all changes in a sandbox before enabling
this update. If you don’t, your configuration stops working when this update is enforced.
To review this update, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates. For Migrate
to a Multiple-Configuration SAML Framework, follow the testing and activation steps.
Enter New Firebase Information Required for Android Push Notifications

The legacy Firebase Cloud Messaging API server key is no longer accepted for configuring Android push notifications on mobile connected
apps. Because of a change in how Google handles push notifications, Android mobile connected apps now require the Admin SDK
private key and project ID from a Google Firebase project.
Where: This change applies to mobile connected apps with Android push notifications. Connected apps can be created in Group,
Professional, Enterprise, Essentials, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: Get the required information from your Firebase project in the Google Firebase Console. Then submit the information to your
mobile connected app’s settings in App Manager.
SEE ALSO:
Update Your Android Mobile Connected App with Firebase Information Required for Push Notifications
Salesforce Help: Configure Android Push Notifications (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Use REST API for Access to External Client App OAuth Consumer Credentials (Release
Update)
Where: This change applies Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
When: Salesforce enforces this update in Winter ‘25. To get the major release upgrade date for your instance, go to Trust Status, search
Who: This change applies to existing External Client App users who use Metadata API to access consumer credentials.
Why: Accessing consumer secrets through the credentials endpoint of the Connect REST API removes the possibility of accidentally
committing consumer secrets to source control.
How: Access consumer secrets through the credentials endpoint of the Connect REST API. Unless you contact Salesforce Customer
Support to continue using Metadata API, your external client apps can’t access consumer secrets via Metadata API after Winter ’25.
649
Verify Email Addresses to Meet the Email Verification Requirement

To complete enforcement of the email verification requirement introduced in the Spring ’22 major release, Salesforce now requires all
users in all orgs and Experience Cloud sites to verify their email address. If a user sends an email from an unverified email address,
Salesforce rejects this email message and doesn’t complete the send. Unverified email addresses can’t be used for sends until the user
verifies their email address or resets their password. To avoid disruptions, ensure that all user email addresses are verified.
Where: This change is available in Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in all editions.
Who: This requirement applies to all users in all orgs and Experience Cloud sites, including employee, customer, and partner users across
sandbox and production instances. Most users affected by this change are SSO users because non-SSO users verify their email address
when they sign up. However, some non-SSO users can be affected if they use email addresses that were added to Salesforce before the
current verification process existed.
Email verification for org-wide email addresses was already and continues to be required. Any features that use org-wide email address
functionality, such as Service Email, already meet email verification requirements.
Why: In past releases, Salesforce enforced this requirement for all orgs and Experience Cloud sites except for paid production instances
with single sign-on (SSO) users. In Spring '24, Salesforce started enforcing the requirement for paid production instances with SSO users,
but only for instances created after Spring '24. With the Summer ’24 release, Salesforce now enforces the requirement for all orgs and
Experience Cloud sites, including all paid production instances with SSO users, regardless of when they were created.
How: As a Salesforce admin, check a user’s email verification status by viewing the user’s details. From the Users page in Setup, select
a user and check the Email field. When the user completes verification, the Verify link changes to Verified. Users can also see their own
email verification status from the Advanced User Details page.
For unverified users, you have several options for verifying their email address. The best method for your use case depends on how many
users you’re verifying and what kind of experience you want to provide.
For an individual user, you can initiate verification or the user can do it themselves. With either of these methods, the user receives a
Salesforce-branded verification email that can’t be customized.
For a large number of users or to have more control over branding and the user experience, use these options.
• To verify multiple users at once, use the async email method. You can customize the verification email template to suit your brand.
• To automatically verify all email addresses that belong to a specific domain, verify the domain using DomainKeys Identified Mail
(DKIM). Use this method when you don’t want users to receive a verification email at all.
Salesforce also verifies a user’s email address during some processes, such as password reset and device activation.
For a full overview of the different ways to verify email addresses, see User Email Verification in Salesforce Help.

Multi-factor authentication (MFA) is turned on by default for direct logins to production orgs as of April 8, 2024. Starting in Summer ’24,
admins get in-app reminders if they don’t comply with the MFA requirement.
Where: The change to turn on MFA by default applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and all versions of the mobile app in
all editions. The change to add in-app reminders applies to Lightning Experience and all versions of the mobile app in all editions.
How: For more information on these changes, see MFA Is On by Default for Direct Logins to Production Orgs and Salesforce Admins Get
In-App Reminders If MFA Is Turned Off.
Forced Login is Permanently Disabled in Winter ’25

To improve security, in Winter ’25, users can no longer log in to Salesforce by passing a username and password as URL query string
parameters in the login URL, also known as forced login. This change will break implementations and third-party integrations that use
a forced login via a URL, as well as direct login (autologin) links. To avoid service disruptions, update integrations that use forced login.
650
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience (not available in all orgs) and Salesforce Classic in all editions.
When: This change takes effect in Winter ’25.
Why: In the Spring ’22 release, Salesforce enforced a release update that disabled the ability for users to log in using their credentials,
but some orgs are still using this feature. With this change, forced login is permanently disabled in all orgs.
How: To prepare for the change, first review org usage of forced login. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Login History,
and then select Login History. View and download your org’s login history for the past 6 months. Review the HTTP method column. If
the HTTP method is GET, and there’s no entry for Login Subtype, it indicates that users are using forced login.
Note: The HTTP method also displays GET for password resets, so make sure you check the Login Subtype to confirm that the
entry doesn’t reflect a password reset.
If you find users who are logging in with forced login, notify them of the upcoming change and encourage them to update their
configuration before Winter ’25. Migrate any integrations that use forced login to external client apps or connected apps.
Identify the Origin IP Address for Logins with One or More Proxies
To monitor login activity more thoroughly and prevent potential threats, you can now see what value the client passed in the
X-Forwarded-For header of their HTTP request to Salesforce. For logins that redirect users to one or more proxies, the
X-Forwarded-For field is sometimes used to store the origin IP address of the client. Use the new Forwarded for IP column in the
Login History and related fields to track the origin IP address. This change isn’t available for OAuth and single sign-on (SSO) logins.
Where: This change is available in Lightning Experience (not available in all orgs) and Salesforce Classic in all editions.
Why: Salesforce tracks the Source IP of login requests, but for logins that redirect through multiple proxies, the origin IP address isn’t
always reflected in the source IP. In this case, the Forwarded for IP value is a better way to tell where the original request came from.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Login History, and then select Login History. Add the Forwarded for IP column
to your Login History list view.
SEE ALSO:
Password Reset Login Subtype Label Is Changed

For more consistency with naming conventions, we renamed the label for the password reset login subtype in the Login History. When
a user resets their password, the Login Subtype column now displays UI Password Reset instead of Change Password.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience (not available in all orgs) and Salesforce Classic in all editions.
SEE ALSO:

Although Salesforce doesn’t recommend it, if you must use Embedded Login with your Experience Cloud Site, you can enable it on the
Login & Registration page. In Summer ’24, Salesforce disabled Embedded Login by default to encourage users to move to OAuth 2.0
Web Server Flow or OAuth 2.0 User-Agent Flow.
651
Where: This change applies to Lightning communities accessed through Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in
all orgs) in Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Why: We recommend that you use the web server flow, the user-agent flow, or another redirect-based OAuth 2.0 flow instead of
Embedded Login. Embedded Login relies on third-party cookies, which are blocked or restricted in most browsers. And Embedded Login
works only on Google Chrome and only as long as third-party cookies are allowed there by default.
How: To use Embedded Login on your Experience Cloud Site, enable the feature on the Login & Registration page. From Setup in the
Quick Find Box, enter Digital Experiences, and then select All Sites. In the Digital Experiences picklist, select Workspaces
and then click Administration. On the Login & Registration tab select Allow embedded login on your Experience Cloud site.
Take Advantage of Apex Enhancements for Processing JSON Web Tokens (JWTs)
With changes to how JSON Web Tokens (JWTs) are processed, it’s now easier to extract data from JWTs generated by methods in the
Auth.JWTUtil class. We also clarified what methods we support for a JWT depending on where it came from. And you can get
more test coverage by mocking HTTP callouts when processing JWTs.
Where: These changes are available in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions.
How: For more information about these changes, see the Auth Namespace section in Apex: New and Changed Items.

With new support for larger tokens, use the OAuth 2.0 token exchange flow with a wider range of third-party identity providers. When
you send third-party tokens to Salesforce in the subject_token parameter, the value can be up to 10,000 characters long. Previously,
the maximum length for values in this parameter was 2,000 characters.
How: With the token exchange flow, you configure an app to exchange a token issued by an identity provider for a Salesforce token.
To initiate this exchange, your app sends a POST request to the /services/oauth2/token endpoint. The request includes the
provider’s token in the subject_token parameter.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Configure the Token Exchange Flow (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
To reduce performance issues, we now prevent client apps from sending simultaneous token requests with the same refresh token
when using the OAuth 2.0 refresh token flow. Previously, identical token requests sent at the same time didn’t fail, but they did lead to
system issues across Salesforce. To avoid disruptions, update integrations that use the refresh token flow to stop sending simultaneous,
identical requests to the token endpoint. Improve the efficiency of your integrations by reusing access tokens instead of continually
requesting new ones.
How: When using the refresh token flow, Salesforce processes one token request at a time. If your client sends another request while
one is being processed, the Status column in the Login History displays Failed: Token request is already being processed.
To prevent the refresh token flow from failing intermittently, update your integrations.
• Avoid or reduce simultaneous calls to the token endpoint with the same refresh token. Instead, after your client obtains an access
token from the refresh token flow, cache the token and reuse it.
652
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Privacy Center
• If you continue to make simultaneous, identical requests, which isn’t recommended, develop a way to retry the requests when this
error occurs.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: OAuth 2.0 Refresh Token Flow for Renewed Sessions
Privacy Center
Review recent changes to Privacy Center’s user interface and functionality.
IN THIS SECTION:
Data retention is coming to the new, platform-native version of Privacy Center. With data retention, you can copy records to an
external data store at the same time that you mask or delete them. You can also view the externally retained records by setting up
your retention store with Salesforce Connect. This feature becomes available on a rolling basis starting in July 2024.
UI Text and Functionality Improvements in Privacy Center
To improve the user experience in Privacy Center, we updated the user interface text in several places. We also changed the behavior
of two privacy policy filter operators.
Permission Requirements for the Consent Event Stream Are Enforced
To receive notifications via the Consent Event Stream, users need either the ReadAllData or the PrivacyDataAccess permission assigned
to them. Previously, this requirement was documented but not enforced. To resolve any disruptions that your users experience as
a result of this change, assign one of the applicable permissions to them.

Data retention is coming to the new, platform-native version of Privacy Center. With data retention, you can copy records to an external
data store at the same time that you mask or delete them. You can also view the externally retained records by setting up your retention
store with Salesforce Connect. This feature becomes available on a rolling basis starting in July 2024.
When: Data retention becomes available in different regions on a rolling basis, beginning in July 2024. For more information about the
release timeline or to learn about getting early access to the feature, contact your account executive.
Why: Under data privacy law, your customers have a right to be forgotten by your business or to have their data restricted from processing.
To stay compliant, you’re sometimes required to delete, archive, or obfuscate customer data. Now you can add data retention to your
compliance strategy without using the managed-package version of Privacy Center.
The platform-native version of Privacy Center is the modernized, enhanced version that we recommend for all customers. Here are some
advantages to consider.
• Your Privacy Center license includes data retention as an out-of-the-box feature, along with a limited amount of free storage. Details
about the amount of free storage and the cost for additional capacity are coming soon.
• Your production org and sandboxes can have separate retention stores provisioned to them.
• You can import privacy policies directly from a sandbox to a production org and vice versa. With this capability, you can test and
deploy your retention implementation seamlessly.
• Privacy Center offers an updated and improved user interface compared to the managed-package version of Privacy Center.
653
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Privacy Center
UI Text and Functionality Improvements in Privacy Center

To improve the user experience in Privacy Center, we updated the user interface text in several places. We also changed the behavior
of two privacy policy filter operators.
How:
• Review these changes in filter conditions for privacy policies.
– The is before operator was renamed to: is within the last. This operator captures records whose date field is within a specified
number of days before the policy execution date. For example, if the specified number of days is 45, then matching records need
a date field that’s within 45 days before the policy execution date. The new functionality better serves customer use cases.
– The is after operator was renamed to: is beyond the last. This operator captures records whose date field is beyond a specified
number of days before the policy execution date. For example, if the specified number of days is 45, then matching records need
a date field that’s more than 45 days before the policy execution date. The new functionality better serves customer use cases.
– The Number of Days field was renamed to: Number of Days Relative to Policy Execution Date. This change clarifies the field’s
meaning.
– The Preview field was renamed to: Summary. Additionally, we inserted a disclaimer that this field’s content is for informational
purposes and isn’t valid Salesforce Object Query Language (SOQL).
• When a user applies the Permanently delete records setting to a privacy policy, a warning banner alerts the user about the setting’s
risks. This change helps customers avoid accidental data loss.
• When a user cancels an in-progress job for a privacy policy, Salesforce prompts them to confirm the action with a warning. Canceling
in-progress jobs can cause some records to be modified or unrecoverable. The updated warning message clarifies these risks.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Add Filters and Conditions to Data Management Policies (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Manage Data Management Policies (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Permission Requirements for the Consent Event Stream Are Enforced

To receive notifications via the Consent Event Stream, users need either the ReadAllData or the PrivacyDataAccess permission assigned
to them. Previously, this requirement was documented but not enforced. To resolve any disruptions that your users experience as a
result of this change, assign one of the applicable permissions to them.
Who: This change impacts users who received notifications via the Consent Event Stream without having the documented permissions
assigned to them. Notifications are interrupted for those users.
How: To re-enable Consent Event Stream notifications, assign users the ReadAllData or PrivacyDataAccess permission with permission
sets or profiles (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview).
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Use the Consent Event Stream (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
654
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Salesforce Shield
Salesforce Shield
Encrypt more Nonprofit Cloud data. Net Zero Cloud objects are compatible with Field Audit Trail. Event Log File Browser is generally
available for easy access to event log files right from Setup. And say goodbye to third-party tools for digging into event logs. Event
Monitoring’s new event log object framework (beta) captures event data in standard objects that support direct queries via API.
IN THIS SECTION:
Data Detect
Einstein Data Detect is now Data Detect.
Event Monitoring
Explore and download all of your event log file data using the Event Log File Browser in Setup. Tailor your event log file data retention
period to your needs, up to 1 year. Store and query all of your event data via the API by using Event Monitoring’s Event Log Objects
(beta). Capture detailed network performance metrics with the new UI Telemetry Timing events. Track redirections for your instanced
URLs.
Field Audit Trail
Add Net Zero Cloud objects to your Field Audit Trail retention policies.
Encrypt more Grantmaking Compliant Data Sharing records data. Gather statistics and apply active keys to data with fewer timeouts.
Bring Your Own Key pages are compatible with assistive technologies. .
Data Detect
Einstein Data Detect is now Data Detect.
IN THIS SECTION:
To better reflect our broader Salesforce product offerings, Einstein Data Detect is now called Data Detect. Product documentation
and in-app wording are updated to reflect the new name. This name change doesn’t change how Data Detect works or behaves.
During the branding transition, it’s possible that the previous product name still appears in a few Salesforce resources.

To better reflect our broader Salesforce product offerings, Einstein Data Detect is now called Data Detect. Product documentation and
in-app wording are updated to reflect the new name. This name change doesn’t change how Data Detect works or behaves. During the
branding transition, it’s possible that the previous product name still appears in a few Salesforce resources.
Who: The Data Detect managed package is available to customers who purchase the Salesforce Shield add-on subscription.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Data Detect
655
Event Monitoring
Explore and download all of your event log file data using the Event Log File Browser in Setup. Tailor your event log file data retention
period to your needs, up to 1 year. Store and query all of your event data via the API by using Event Monitoring’s Event Log Objects
(beta). Capture detailed network performance metrics with the new UI Telemetry Timing events. Track redirections for your instanced
URLs.
IN THIS SECTION:
Store and query all of your event data via the API with the new event log object framework (beta) that captures event data in standard
objects.
Access and Download Event Log File Data with the Event Log File Browser (Generally Available)
Get easy access to all of your Event Log File data by using the Event Log File Browser directly in Setup without the need for third-party
tools.
Adjust your event log file data retention period and download up to 1 year of event log file data in case of a security incident.
To maximize the efficiency of your applications, capture detailed network performance metrics with the new UI Telemetry Timing
events. Use the Resource Timing event log file type to measure how long a browser takes to load specific application resources from
a remote server. Use the Navigation Timing event log file type to track metrics related to page navigation, such as how long a browser
takes to construct a page’s Document Object Model (DOM).
To help you identify hard-coded instanced URLs, the SOURCE_HOSTNAME field on the Hostname Redirects event type now tracks
redirections for these URLs. For example, if your Salesforce instance is IND76, legacy instanced hostnames include
ind76.salesforce.com, ind76.lightning.force.com, and
MyDomainName--c.ind76.content.force.com. Redirections for legacy My Domain hostnames stop in Winter ’25.
Previously, the HOSTNAME_REDIRECT field only tracked redirections from My Domain hostnames that didn’t contain an instance
name.

Store and query all of your event data via the API with the new event log object framework (beta) that captures event data in standard
objects.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Enterprise, Performance, and
Unlimited editions where Event Monitoring is enabled.
When: Event log objects (beta) won’t be functional for US East Hyperforce customers until at least June 2024.
Who: This change is only available to a subset of US East Hyperforce customers who purchased the Salesforce Shield or Salesforce Event
Monitoring add-on subscriptions.
How: Access Event Log Objects via the API or through CRM Analytics.
656
Access and Download Event Log File Data with the Event Log File Browser (Generally Available)
Get easy access to all of your Event Log File data by using the Event Log File Browser directly in Setup without the need for third-party
tools.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Event Monitoring
is enabled.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Event Log File Browser and then select Event Log File Browser. To download
event log file data, select a date range and, from the dropdown list next to the event log file, select Download as CSV File. Alternatively,
use the File Download servlet by adding /servlet/servlet.FileDownload?file=<ELF_ID_NUMBER> after your org
URL. For example,
https://mycompany.my.salesforce.com/servlet/servlet.FileDownload?file=0ATRM000000dcbH0A0.
The file download begins automatically.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Explore Event Log File Data using the Event Log File Browser (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Adjust your event log file data retention period and download up to 1 year of event log file data in case of a security incident.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Enterprise, Performance, and
Unlimited editions where Event Monitoring is enabled.
Who: This change is available to customers who purchased Salesforce Shield or Salesforce Event Monitoring add-on subscriptions.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Event Monitoring Settings and then select Event Monitoring Settings.
Enable the Retain event log files setting. Then, to specify the number of days to retain your data, use the
eventLogRetentionDuration field on the EventSettings Metadata API type.

To maximize the efficiency of your applications, capture detailed network performance metrics with the new UI Telemetry Timing events.
Use the Resource Timing event log file type to measure how long a browser takes to load specific application resources from a remote
server. Use the Navigation Timing event log file type to track metrics related to page navigation, such as how long a browser takes to
construct a page’s Document Object Model (DOM).
657
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Event Monitoring
is enabled. The events are available in the API and in the Event Log Browser, but not in the Event Monitoring Analytics app.
Who: This change is available to customers who purchased Salesforce Shield or Salesforce Event Monitoring add-on subscriptions.
SEE ALSO:
Object Reference for the Salesforce Platform: UI Telemetry Resource Timing Event Type (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Object Reference for the Salesforce Platform: UI Telemetry Navigation Timing Event Type (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)

To help you identify hard-coded instanced URLs, the SOURCE_HOSTNAME field on the Hostname Redirects event type now tracks
redirections for these URLs. For example, if your Salesforce instance is IND76, legacy instanced hostnames include
ind76.salesforce.com, ind76.lightning.force.com, and MyDomainName--c.ind76.content.force.com.
Redirections for legacy My Domain hostnames stop in Winter ’25. Previously, the HOSTNAME_REDIRECT field only tracked redirections
from My Domain hostnames that didn’t contain an instance name.
The Hostname Redirects event is available in the API but not in the Event Monitoring Analytics app. This event is free for all customers
with a 24-hour data retention period.
How: First, enable redirection logging. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter My Domain, and then select My Domain. In the
Redirections section, click Edit. Select Log Redirections, and save your changes.
After you save your changes, Salesforce produces a log for the Hostname Redirects event type in the next daily run. Then you can access
the Hostname Redirects event type through the API using a tool of your choice.
Alternatively, you can download the latest incremental daily hostname redirections log by clicking Download Redirections Log from
the My Domain Setup page.
658
SEE ALSO:
Object Reference for the Salesforce Platform: Hostname Redirects Event Type (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Prepare for the End of Redirections for Non-Enhanced Domains (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Field Audit Trail

Add Net Zero Cloud objects to your Field Audit Trail retention policies.

Extend the data retention period for your archived Net Zero Cloud field history values. Field Audit Trail customers can enable field history
tracking for all Net Zero Cloud objects with a single click, saving you time during the setup process.
Where: This change applies to Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs), Lightning Experience, and the Salesforce app in Contact
Manager, Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Database.com editions. Standard Objects
aren’t available in Database.com.
Who: This feature is available for customers who purchase Field Audit Trail or Salesforce Shield add-on subscriptions and have Net Zero
Cloud enabled.
How: In Setup, on the Field History Tracking page, click Set Net Zero Cloud Defaults. Field Audit Trail retains data for 18 months by
default. To retain data for longer, add Net Zero Cloud objects individually to your data retention policy.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Default Net Zero Cloud Object Fields to Track (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Field Audit Trail Implementation Guide: Field Audit Trail (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Encrypt more Grantmaking Compliant Data Sharing records data. Gather statistics and apply active keys to data with fewer timeouts.
Bring Your Own Key pages are compatible with assistive technologies. .
659
IN THIS SECTION:
Improvements to the Shield Platform Encryption architecture give you more ways to control the key material that encrypt search
indexes. Salesforce has always used envelope encryption to secure your tenant secrets and customer-supplied keys. Now you can
control the root key that generates and encrypts a data encryption key (DEKs) for your search indexes.
Encrypt Grantmaking Compliant Data Sharing Comments
Grantmaking Compliant Data Sharing records sometimes contain sensitive or personally identifiable information (PII). You can now
encrypt the Comments field on the Individual Application Task Participant object.
See Fewer Encryption Statistics and Sync Timeouts
Gather encryption statistics and sync historical data with your active Shield Platform Encryption key faster. Improved indexing now
handles large volumes of data more efficiently, resulting in fewer timeouts and faster processing times. Spend less time waiting for
key management tasks to complete and more time working through your to-do list.
Access the Bring Your Own Key Pages with Assistive Technologies
The Bring Your Own Key pages in Setup now use Lightning Experience styling. Better contrast makes the page easier to read, and
users can navigate tables and interactive page elements more easily with keyboard controls. These pages also now include clearer
labels and language support for screen readers.
Client application form and a seller product sometimes contain sensitive or personally identifiable information (PII). On the Application
Form Seller Item object, you can now encrypt the Vehicle Identification Number, Engine Number, Vehicle Registration Number,
Property Address, Scheduled Delivery Date, Property Unit Identifier, Make, Model, and Trim fields.
Encrypt Party Income and Party Expense Fields
Client expense and income records sometimes contain sensitive or personally identifiable information (PII). On the Party Income
object, you can now encrypt the Income As Of Date field. On the Party Expense object, encrypt the Expenses As Of Date field.
Encrypt Party Financial Liability, Party Financial Asset, and Party Financial Asset Lien Fields
Client financial, asset, and lien records sometimes contain sensitive or personally identifiable information (PII). On the Party Financial
Liability object, you can now encrypt the Start Date, Term, Lender, and Liability Account Identifier fields. On the Party Financial Asset
object, encrypt the OwnershipStartDateTime, ValuationDateTime, Description, SerialNumber, MakeName, ModelName, and ModelYear
fields. On the Party Financial Asset Lien object, encrypt the Lien Holder and Maturity Date fields.

Improvements to the Shield Platform Encryption architecture give you more ways to control the key material that encrypt search indexes.
Salesforce has always used envelope encryption to secure your tenant secrets and customer-supplied keys. Now you can control the
root key that generates and encrypts a data encryption key (DEKs) for your search indexes.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited,
When: This change is available on a rolling basis throughout the Summer '24 release.
Who: Available to customers who purchased a Salesforce Shield or Shield Platform Encryption add-on subscription.
How: If you aren't already encrypting search indexes, turn on encryption for search indexes on the Encryption Settings page. If you're
already encrypting search indexes, when your org’s search indexes are upgraded to support root keys, we generate a Salesforce root
key and DEK for you. Both keys are visible on the Key Management page in Setup. The new DEK is applied to new indexes as they’re
added. Just like other keys in Salesforce, you can rotate root keys and DEKs for control over your key lifecycle and encryption policy.
660
Encrypt Grantmaking Compliant Data Sharing Comments

Grantmaking Compliant Data Sharing records sometimes contain sensitive or personally identifiable information (PII). You can now
encrypt the Comments field on the Individual Application Task Participant object.
is enabled.
Who: This change is available to customers who purchased Salesforce Shield or Shield Platform Encryption add-on subscriptions.
How: On the Encryption Settings page, click Select Fields. Then click Edit, and select the Comments field of the Individual Application
Task Participant object. You can encrypt the Comments field with the probabilistic, case-sensitive deterministic, or case-insensitive
deterministic encryption schemes.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Which Standard Fields Can I Encrypt? (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
See Fewer Encryption Statistics and Sync Timeouts

Gather encryption statistics and sync historical data with your active Shield Platform Encryption key faster. Improved indexing now
handles large volumes of data more efficiently, resulting in fewer timeouts and faster processing times. Spend less time waiting for key
management tasks to complete and more time working through your to-do list.
Who: Available to customers who purchased the Salesforce Shield or Shield Platform Encryption add-on subscription.
Access the Bring Your Own Key Pages with Assistive Technologies
The Bring Your Own Key pages in Setup now use Lightning Experience styling. Better contrast makes the page easier to read, and users
can navigate tables and interactive page elements more easily with keyboard controls. These pages also now include clearer labels and
language support for screen readers.
Who: Available to customers who purchased the Salesforce Shield or Shield Platform Encryption add-on subscription.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Bring Your Own Key (BYOK) (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Client application form and a seller product sometimes contain sensitive or personally identifiable information (PII). On the Application
Form Seller Item object, you can now encrypt the Vehicle Identification Number, Engine Number, Vehicle Registration Number, Property
Address, Scheduled Delivery Date, Property Unit Identifier, Make, Model, and Trim fields.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Financial
Services Cloud is enabled.
Who: This change is available to customers with the Salesforce Shield or Shield Platform Encryption add-on subscriptions.
How: On the Encryption Settings page, click Select Fields. Click Edit, and then select the fields of the Application Form Seller Item
object that you want to encrypt.
661
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Security Center
Encrypt Party Income and Party Expense Fields

Client expense and income records sometimes contain sensitive or personally identifiable information (PII). On the Party Income object,
you can now encrypt the Income As Of Date field. On the Party Expense object, encrypt the Expenses As Of Date field.
How: On the Encryption Settings page, click Select Fields. Click Edit, and then select the fields of the Party Income and Party Expense
objects that you want to encrypt.
Encrypt Party Financial Liability, Party Financial Asset, and Party Financial Asset Lien Fields
Client financial, asset, and lien records sometimes contain sensitive or personally identifiable information (PII). On the Party Financial
Liability object, you can now encrypt the Start Date, Term, Lender, and Liability Account Identifier fields. On the Party Financial Asset
object, encrypt the OwnershipStartDateTime, ValuationDateTime, Description, SerialNumber, MakeName, ModelName, and ModelYear
fields. On the Party Financial Asset Lien object, encrypt the Lien Holder and Maturity Date fields.
How: On the Encryption Settings page, click Select Fields. Click Edit, and then select the fields of the Party Financial Liability, Party
Financial Asset, Party Financial Asset Lien objects that you want to encrypt.
Security Center
View pertinent data with enhanced charts. Access your Data Cloud encryption policy status from the Security Center Encryption Policy
metric. Create custom metrics (beta) in Security Center.
IN THIS SECTION:
Create Custom Metrics in Security Center (Beta)
Effortlessly monitor vital data from custom objects to bolster your organization’s security posture by creating your own custom
metrics that you can monitor from your Security Center dashboard.
View Pertinent Data with an Enhanced Security Center Dashboard Page
Quickly view relevant data with more engaging Security Center charts within your Security Landscape, which offers an improved
Security Center dashboard page experience.
View Your Data Cloud Encryption Policy Status from the Security Center Encryption Policy Metric
Get full visibility into how your organization is using Platform Encryption by conveniently accessing your Data Cloud encryption key
status from the Encryption Policies metric in Security Center.
With the Field Level Encryption metric, conveniently access fields encrypted under your Shield Platform Encryption policy from
Security Center.
Create Custom Metrics in Security Center (Beta)

Effortlessly monitor vital data from custom objects to bolster your organization’s security posture by creating your own custom metrics
that you can monitor from your Security Center dashboard.
662
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Security Center
Who: This change is available to users with the Security Center add-on subscription.
How: To create a custom metric with a custom object, go to the Custom Metrics tab in Security Center.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Security Center Metrics (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
View Pertinent Data with an Enhanced Security Center Dashboard Page

Quickly view relevant data with more engaging Security Center charts within your Security Landscape, which offers an improved Security
Center dashboard page experience.
Who: This change is available to users with the Security Center add-on subscription.
View Your Data Cloud Encryption Policy Status from the Security Center Encryption
Policy Metric
Get full visibility into how your organization is using Platform Encryption by conveniently accessing your Data Cloud encryption key
status from the Encryption Policies metric in Security Center.
663
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Other Security Changes
Who: This change is available to customers who purchased Shield Platform Encryption and Security Center add-on subscriptions.
How: Monitor Encryption Policies from the Security Center dashboard via the Configuration category in your Security Landscape.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Security Center Metrics (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
With the Field Level Encryption metric, conveniently access fields encrypted under your Shield Platform Encryption policy from Security
Center.
Who: This change applies to editions that have the Shield Platform Encryption and the Security Center add-on subscriptions.
How: Monitor this Encryption Policy metric from your Security Center dashboard via the Configuration category in Security Landscape.
Other Security Changes

To prepare for two release updates, view blocked redirections and resources in an updated Setup page. Reduce emails about certificate
expirations, and create certificates with a 3072-bit key length. And refresh Named Credentials access tokens based on non-standard
HTTP status codes.
IN THIS SECTION:
To protect your users and network, limit redirections to other Salesforce orgs. Add the specific Salesforce org URLs that you trust to
the Trusted URLs for Redirects allowlist. This update was first available in Winter ’24.
Lightning pages. This change can prevent externally hosted fonts and images from loading. It can also prevent external websites
from loading within an iframe on your Lightning pages. To prepare for this change, review the impact and update your trusted URLs.
This update is available starting in Summer ’24.
Review and Resolve Blocked External Redirections
Reduce your research and resolution time for allowing external redirections, including cross-org redirections. The Trusted URL and
Browser Policy Violations Setup page shows blocked external redirections and content security policy (CSP) violations in one view.
Previously, this Setup page was called CSP Violations.
IdeaExchange Delivered: Limit Who Receives Notifications About Certificate Expiration
By popular demand, you now have more control over who gets certificate expiration email notifications. Assign the new Receive
Certificate Expiration Notifications user permission to the admins who manage certificates. Also, notification emails now include
more details about how to update certificates before they expire. We delivered this feature thanks to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
Control Which HTTP Status Codes Refresh Access Tokens for Named Credentials
Now you can account for external systems that return non-standard HTTP status codes when callouts from Salesforce use invalid or
expired credentials. In addition to the standard 401 response, you can specify other 4xx HTTP status codes so that Salesforce can
refresh access tokens when the external system returns these codes.
664

Sometimes you need a certificate stronger than a 2048-bit certificate but without the performance limitation of a 4096-bit certificate.
Now you can create self-signed or CA (Certificate Authority)-signed certificates with a 3072-bit key length.
Track changes for more Salesforce Sites and Visualforce sites settings in Site History. Newly tracked items include the site default
record owner, the option to cache public Visualforce pages, guest access to the Support API, and more. Also, if you haven’t enabled
Salesforce Sites, the Setup Audit Trail now tracks when you register the Salesforce Sites domain and when a new site is created. And
two existing Setup Audit Trail messages are easier to understand.
Enjoy Faster Load Times for Cached Salesforce Site Pages
To improve page load times, the caching behavior is updated for public Salesforce Site pages.
The BrowserId_sec Cookie Was Removed
The BrowserId_sec cookie is no longer rendered in Salesforce because the BrowserId cookie serves the same purpose. Also, for clarity,
we updated Salesforce Help to reflect where the BrowserId cookie is rendered.
Visualforce Section Header Components Are Secure by Default
By default, only commonly used, secure HTML elements are evaluated in the <apex:sectionHeader> component’s
description attribute. Uncommon HTML elements, insecure attributes, and JavaScript are removed.

To protect your users and network, limit redirections to other Salesforce orgs. Add the specific Salesforce org URLs that you trust to the
Trusted URLs for Redirects allowlist. This update was first available in Winter ’24.
When: Salesforce enforces this update in Summer ’24. In orgs that received Winter ’24 before October 2023, this release update was
enabled by default. To get the major release upgrade date for your instance, go to Trust Status, search for your instance, and click the
maintenance tab.
How: To identify the impacted redirections, allowlist URLs for your other Salesforce orgs, and test this change, see Trust Redirections to
Your Other Salesforce Orgs in Salesforce Help.
To review this update, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates. For Allow
Only Trusted Cross-Org Redirections, follow the testing and activation steps.
SEE ALSO:
Release Updates

Lightning pages. This change can prevent externally hosted fonts and images from loading. It can also prevent external websites from
loading within an iframe on your Lightning pages. To prepare for this change, review the impact and update your trusted URLs. This
update is available starting in Summer ’24.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance, Developer, and Unlimited editions.
The Trusted URL and Browser Policy Violations Setup page is available only in Lightning Experience.
When: Salesforce enforces this update in Winter ’25, and this release update is enabled in orgs created in Summer ’24 by default. To get
the major release upgrade date for your instance, go to Trust Status, search for your instance, and click the maintenance tab.
665
How: To identify the impacted redirections, go to the Trusted URL and Browser Policy Violations Setup page and filter the list on Violation
Type. Use the equals operator and select img-src (image), frame-src (iframe content), and font-src (fonts).
To enable this change for testing, from the Session Settings Setup page, enable Adopt updated CSP directives.
To review this update, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates. For Adopt
Updated Content Security Policy (CSP) Directives, follow the testing and activation steps.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Manage Trusted URL and Browser Policy Violations (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Release Updates
Review and Resolve Blocked External Redirections

Reduce your research and resolution time for allowing external redirections, including cross-org redirections. The Trusted URL and
Browser Policy Violations Setup page shows blocked external redirections and content security policy (CSP) violations in one view.
Previously, this Setup page was called CSP Violations.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Trusted URL and Browser Policy Violations, and then select Trusted
URL and Browser Policy Violations. To view blocked external redirections, filter the list on the External Redirections violation type.
666
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Manage Trusted URL and Browser Policy Violations (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Limit Who Receives Notifications About Certificate Expiration

By popular demand, you now have more control over who gets certificate expiration email notifications. Assign the new Receive Certificate
Expiration Notifications user permission to the admins who manage certificates. Also, notification emails now include more details about
how to update certificates before they expire. We delivered this feature thanks to your ideas on IdeaExchange.
Why: When you assign the new system permission to at least one admin, all other admins see fewer certificate-related emails in their
inboxes. And admins that you designate to receive expiration notifications are better informed about how to handle impending certificate
expirations.
How: In Setup, add the Receive Certificate Expiration Notifications to a new permission set. Then assign that permission set to a
user. Users with the permission receive emails at 60, 30, and 10 days before a certificate expires. To prevent service interruptions caused
by expired certificates, we still send email notifications to all admins the day before and the day of a certificate's expiration.
If you don't assign this permission to anyone, all admins continue to receive all certificate expiration emails.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Expired Certificate Notification Permission (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Manage Expired Certificates (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Control Which HTTP Status Codes Refresh Access Tokens for Named Credentials
Now you can account for external systems that return non-standard HTTP status codes when callouts from Salesforce use invalid or
expired credentials. In addition to the standard 401 response, you can specify other 4xx HTTP status codes so that Salesforce can refresh
access tokens when the external system returns these codes.
667
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Named Credentials, and then select Named Credentials. Create or edit an
external credential, and in the Additional Status Codes for Token Refresh field, enter 4xx status codes, like 400 or 403.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create or Edit an External Credential (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Sometimes you need a certificate stronger than a 2048-bit certificate but without the performance limitation of a 4096-bit certificate.
Now you can create self-signed or CA (Certificate Authority)-signed certificates with a 3072-bit key length.
How: In the Certificate and Key Management page of Setup, both the Create Self-Signed Certificate and Create CA-Signed Certificates
forms now have options for 2048-bit, 3072-bit, and 4096-bit certificate sizes. The 2048-bit and 3072-bit certificates expire in 1 year. The
4096-bit certificate expires in 2 years, and it’s still the only certificate we recommend for use with the Shield Platform Encryption BYOK
(Bring Your Own Keys) feature.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Shield Platform Encryption Bring Your Own Keys (BYOK) (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Certificates and Keys (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Track changes for more Salesforce Sites and Visualforce sites settings in Site History. Newly tracked items include the site default record
owner, the option to cache public Visualforce pages, guest access to the Support API, and more. Also, if you haven’t enabled Salesforce
Sites, the Setup Audit Trail now tracks when you register the Salesforce Sites domain and when a new site is created. And two existing
Setup Audit Trail messages are easier to understand.
Where: This change applies to Salesforce Sites and Visualforce sites in Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise,
How: To view the Setup Audit Trail, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Setup Audit Trail, and then select Setup Audit
Trail. In addition to newly tracked audit trail actions for when you register the Salesforce Sites domain and when a new site is created,
the Audit Trail message for accepting the Salesforce Sites terms and conditions is improved. Also, the audit trail action is clearer for
enabling or disabling the setting Allow using standard external profiles for self-registration, user creation, and login. Here are examples
of the new and improved audit trail events.
668
To view changes made to site settings, use the Site History related list.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Monitor Setup Changes with Setup Audit Trail (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: View Salesforce Sites History (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Enjoy Faster Load Times for Cached Salesforce Site Pages

To improve page load times, the caching behavior is updated for public Salesforce Site pages.
Where: This change applies to Salesforce Sites in Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and
Developer editions.
SEE ALSO:
The BrowserId_sec Cookie Was Removed

The BrowserId_sec cookie is no longer rendered in Salesforce because the BrowserId cookie serves the same purpose. Also, for clarity,
we updated Salesforce Help to reflect where the BrowserId cookie is rendered.
669
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Service
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and all versions of the Salesforce mobile app in all editions.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Salesforce Platform Cookies (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Visualforce Section Header Components Are Secure by Default

By default, only commonly used, secure HTML elements are evaluated in the <apex:sectionHeader> component’s
description attribute. Uncommon HTML elements, insecure attributes, and JavaScript are removed.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs), and all versions of the Salesforce mobile
app in all editions.
How: For more information about this change, see Updated Default Behavior of Visualforce Section Header Components on page 205.
Service
IN THIS SECTION:
Discover Service Capabilities with My Service Journey (Beta)
Discover how to take your Service Cloud implementation from good to great with My Service Journey. Get the Salesforce point of
view on how to achieve your business goals for different Service areas, like the Help Site or Agent Console. With My Service Journey,
you can explore Service Cloud capabilities based on your business goals, edition, what’s new, whether it’s an Einstein feature, and
more.
Check out new Einstein for Service features that increase agent productivity by putting AI insights, summaries, and recommendations
directly in the flow of work.
Check out new Service Intelligence features that help you reduce costs and improve customer service.
Service Catalog
Check out new features that enhance self-service automation and enable customer service agents to work faster and more productively
across customer service channels.
Channels
Learn about Summer ’24 improvements to Email-to-Case, Messaging, and Service Cloud Voice.
Knowledge
Check out Unified Knowledge’s general availability and other features that help simplify knowledge management.
Routing
Omni-Channel users can now complete work from their mobile device. To avoid disconnecting calls, messaging sessions, or other
work, you can choose for all agents to remain logged in to their original Omni-Channel sessions when subsequent Salesforce tabs
or windows are opened.
Feedback Management
Check out the enhanced data mapper page.
670
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Discover Service Capabilities with My Service Journey (Beta)
Scheduled Reminders
Check out scheduled reminders for upcoming events and occasions.
Check out Industries features for Service Cloud that enhance the service experience and assist in automating complex decisions.
Discover Service Capabilities with My Service Journey (Beta)

Discover how to take your Service Cloud implementation from good to great with My Service Journey. Get the Salesforce point of view
on how to achieve your business goals for different Service areas, like the Help Site or Agent Console. With My Service Journey, you can
explore Service Cloud capabilities based on your business goals, edition, what’s new, whether it’s an Einstein feature, and more.
How: Launch My Service Journey from the App Launcher.

Check out new Einstein for Service features that increase agent productivity by putting AI insights, summaries, and recommendations
directly in the flow of work.
IN THIS SECTION:
Transform conversation data into service insights with Einstein Conversation Mining.
Check out AI-generated response summaries, survey insights dashboard, and more.
671
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Einstein for Service

Check out Einstein Work Summaries for Conversation Catch-Up in five additional languages, and get the gist of emails and email
threads with Einstein Work Summaries for Email.

Transform conversation data into service insights with Einstein Conversation Mining.
IN THIS SECTION:
Track Key Trends and Top Contact Reasons Across More Channels
Build reports and identify common customer issues with Einstein Conversation Mining using data from Messaging for In-App and
Web, in addition to Web-to-Case. Previously Einstein Conversation Mining only supported Email Message and Chat Transcript data.
Track Key Trends and Top Contact Reasons Across More Channels
Build reports and identify common customer issues with Einstein Conversation Mining using data from Messaging for In-App and Web,
in addition to Web-to-Case. Previously Einstein Conversation Mining only supported Email Message and Chat Transcript data.
When: This functionality is available starting in August 2024.
How: Go to Einstein Conversation Mining in Setup. When you create a report, select Enhanced Conversations or Web-to-Case for
the channel. To use Enhanced Conversations, turn on Data Cloud.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Enable Einstein Conversation Mining (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Build an Einstein Conversation Mining Report (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Check out AI-generated response summaries, survey insights dashboard, and more.
672
IN THIS SECTION:
Get Insightful Perspectives from Summaries of Survey Responses
Unlock a comprehensive understanding of your survey data as generative AI summarizes responses, providing nuanced insights.
Use data maps to create or update records with these summaries, which facilitate a thorough grasp of your audience's perspectives.
For example, create summaries of responses from your customer base, partners, and prospects. The summaries are tailored to the
question types of the survey, providing a comprehensive overview of audience insights.
Get the comprehensive Natural Language Processing Insights dashboard for a detailed analysis of survey results based on sentiments,
extracted entities, and keyphrases. Use this analysis to assess trends and monitor frequently appearing keyphrases and entities in
survey responses.
Get Insightful Perspectives from Summaries of Survey Responses

Unlock a comprehensive understanding of your survey data as generative AI summarizes responses, providing nuanced insights. Use
data maps to create or update records with these summaries, which facilitate a thorough grasp of your audience's perspectives. For
example, create summaries of responses from your customer base, partners, and prospects. The summaries are tailored to the question
types of the survey, providing a comprehensive overview of audience insights.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with the Einstein for Service add-on
where Feedback Management - Starter or Feedback Management - Growth is enabled. Einstein generative AI is available in Lightning
Experience. To purchase the Einstein for Service add-on, contact your Salesforce account executive.
Who: To create survey response summaries, users need the Salesforce Advanced Features Starter permission or the Salesforce Surveys
Advanced Features permission. They also need the Scoring Framework User permission and the Manage Natural Language Process
Results permission. Additionally, users need the Survey Response Summaries configuration in the Industries AI Setup page.
How: Open a survey, click Advanced Settings, and then select Survey Data Mapping. Click End Map, and then select Create Response
Summary. Select questions and summary length, and determine whether records are created every time or based on conditions.
673
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create Summaries from Survey Responses (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Einstein Features (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Get the comprehensive Natural Language Processing Insights dashboard for a detailed analysis of survey results based on sentiments,
extracted entities, and keyphrases. Use this analysis to assess trends and monitor frequently appearing keyphrases and entities in survey
responses.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions of Feedback Management, where
NLP Insights is enabled.
Who: The dashboards are a part of the Customer Lifecycle Analytics app and are available to users with the Salesforce Feedback
Management license.
How: Enable NLP Insights, and then install the Customer Lifecycle Analytics app from Analytics Studio to view the Natural Language
Processing insights dashboard. To enable NLP insights, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Industries AI Setup, and then
select Industries AI Setup. Create a use case configuration for Entity and Keyphrase extraction.
674

Check out Einstein Work Summaries for Conversation Catch-Up in five additional languages, and get the gist of emails and email threads
with Einstein Work Summaries for Email.
IN THIS SECTION:
Catch Up with Midconversation Summaries in Five More Languages
Conversation Catch-Up is now available in six languages: English, French, German, Italian, Japanese, and Spanish. Previously, it was
available only in English.
Catch Up Quickly On Emails with Einstein Work Summaries for Email (Generally Available)
Save agents time with high-quality, concise AI-generated summaries of individual emails or entire email threads.

Where: This change applies to all enhanced messaging channels and Messaging for In-App and Web. View required editions It also
applies to Voice channels in Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with the Einstein for Service add-on. Available
in Salesforce orgs with these telephony models.
Service Cloud Voice with Amazon Service Cloud Voice with Partner Service Cloud Voice with Partner
Connect Telephony from Amazon Connect Telephony
All models of Service Cloud Voice are available as an add-on license in Service and Sales Clouds. To purchase the Einstein for Service
add-on, contact your Salesforce Account Executive.
SEE ALSO:
Einstein Features
Salesforce Help: Show Agents and Supervisors Midconversation Summaries
Catch Up Quickly On Emails with Einstein Work Summaries for Email (Generally Available)
Save agents time with high-quality, concise AI-generated summaries of individual emails or entire email threads.
Where: This change applies to Live Chat conversations in Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited Editions with the Einstein
for Service add-on license.
To purchase the add-on, contact your Salesforce account executive.
How: In Setup, search for Einstein Generative AI and verify that it’s on. Then, search for the Einstein Work Summaries and toggle it on.
From the Email tab, map Einstein’s responses to Email Summary fields. Finally, turn on Email Message Summaries.
675
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Service Intelligence
SEE ALSO:
Einstein Features
Salesforce Help: Show Work Summaries for Email
Check out new Service Intelligence features that help you reduce costs and improve customer service.
IN THIS SECTION:
Get Your Service Intelligence Data Even Faster
Update your service data more frequently with the new hourly app refresh schedule option.
Monitor Your Service Intelligence Installations and Upgrades
When Service Intelligence is installed or upgraded, the process progress displays the elapsed time.
Access Your Service Intelligence Resources in One Place
After installing Service Intelligence, you can explore all the app’s Salesforce resources. These resources include analytics assets, like
dashboards and components, intelligence assets like Einstein Studio models, data assets like datasets and data model objects, and
transformations like batch data transforms.
Help Agents Predict Time to Resolve Cases
Add the Time to Resolve insight component to your case page layouts so your agents can estimate and prioritize workloads.
AI-powered insights evaluate how much time it might take to resolve cases so agents can better manage SLAs or reassign work to
teammates. Time to Resolve is a machine learning model built using Einstein Studio No Code Builder.
676
View Contact Center Metrics on Enhanced Dashboards

Spot key performance indicators (KPIs) on redesigned dashboards for cases, omni-channel, and conversation mining. New tabs for
Channel Performance, Agent Performance, and Knowledge Performance help you find specific metrics faster. New Data Explorer
sections let you analyze topics, such as case volume and routing effectiveness. Additions to case dashboards include the Contact
Reason field and Costly Contact Reasons chart so you view more insights about your contact center.
Simplify Service Intelligence Permission Sets
To streamline access to the CRM Analytics Platform, a new Service Intelligence App Admin permission set replaces the Service
Intelligence Admin permission set. Unlimited Edition orgs already have the CRM Analytics Platform, so the new Service Intelligence
permission set removes duplicate access.
Get Your Service Intelligence Data Even Faster

Update your service data more frequently with the new hourly app refresh schedule option.
Where: This change applies to Service Cloud in Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions for an additional cost.
How: In Service Intelligence setup, installed versions of Service Intelligence are listed. View details and update schedule app refreshes
on the Settings tab.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Service Intelligence Setup (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Monitor Your Service Intelligence Installations and Upgrades

When Service Intelligence is installed or upgraded, the process progress displays the elapsed time.
How: In Service Intelligence setup, installed versions of Service Intelligence are listed. View the installation progress on the app tab.
SEE ALSO:
677
Access Your Service Intelligence Resources in One Place

After installing Service Intelligence, you can explore all the app’s Salesforce resources. These resources include analytics assets, like
dashboards and components, intelligence assets like Einstein Studio models, data assets like datasets and data model objects, and
transformations like batch data transforms.
How: In the Service Intelligence setup menu, installed versions of Service Intelligence are listed. Select a version and use the Resources
tab to view all the assets. Click on an asset to open it in its respective tool.
SEE ALSO:
Help Agents Predict Time to Resolve Cases

Add the Time to Resolve insight component to your case page layouts so your agents can estimate and prioritize workloads. AI-powered
insights evaluate how much time it might take to resolve cases so agents can better manage SLAs or reassign work to teammates. Time
to Resolve is a machine learning model built using Einstein Studio No Code Builder.
Who: To use the Einstein Studio Insight, you need the Service Intelligence User permission set. To manage the Einstein Studio Insight,
you need the Service Intelligence App Admin permission set.
How: Use Lightning App Builder to drag the component to a case or custom Lightning page.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Service Intelligence (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
678
View Contact Center Metrics on Enhanced Dashboards

Spot key performance indicators (KPIs) on redesigned dashboards for cases, omni-channel, and conversation mining. New tabs for
Channel Performance, Agent Performance, and Knowledge Performance help you find specific metrics faster. New Data Explorer sections
let you analyze topics, such as case volume and routing effectiveness. Additions to case dashboards include the Contact Reason field
and Costly Contact Reasons chart so you view more insights about your contact center.
How: To see the redesigned dashboards, click either Cases, Omni-Channel, or Conversation Mining tabs.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Service Intelligence Dashboards (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Simplify Service Intelligence Permission Sets

To streamline access to the CRM Analytics Platform, a new Service Intelligence App Admin permission set replaces the Service Intelligence
Admin permission set. Unlimited Edition orgs already have the CRM Analytics Platform, so the new Service Intelligence permission set
removes duplicate access.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Service Intelligence Considerations and Requirements (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
679
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Service Catalog
Service Catalog
Check out new features that enhance self-service automation and enable customer service agents to work faster and more productively
across customer service channels.
IN THIS SECTION:
Run Catalog Items for Contacts in Service Console
Use Service Console to execute catalog items outside of Service Catalog. Catalog items are now available in the Actions &
Recommendations component, enabling service agents to run catalog items on behalf of customers who can’t order those services
themselves.
Make Catalog Items Available On External Sites with Lightning Out
Site admins can use a Lightning Out component to make catalog items available on external sites, which enable customers to order
services from external sites without needing access to Service Catalog. Additionally, authenticated users can use external sites to
confer their authentication to unauthenticated users, giving those unauthenticated users access to catalog items.
Provide Guest User Access to Service Catalog
Use a guest user profile in Service Catalog to control public user access to view and request items in your catalog without
authentication. Previously, only authenticated users were supported in Service Catalog.
Integrate Service Catalog with Knowledge
Provide even more customer self-service efficiency with Knowledge in Service Catalog. Attaching knowledge articles to catalog
items provides more information about the service than the catalog item description alone does. The additional information increases
customer self-service efficiency, because customers use the article to solve their own contact reasons.
Accelerate case deflections in Service Catalog with Einstein Copilot. Through its generative AI-powered conversational experience,
Einstein Copilot takes action in Service Catalog to resolve customers contact reasons without having them navigate your catalog or
requiring agent assistance.
Run Catalog Items for Contacts in Service Console

Use Service Console to execute catalog items outside of Service Catalog. Catalog items are now available in the Actions & Recommendations
component, enabling service agents to run catalog items on behalf of customers who can’t order those services themselves.
Who: To run catalog items for contacts, you must have the Service Catalog Agent user profile and the Service Catalog Access permission
set license.
How: Launch Service Console in the Lightning App Launcher, then select the contact ID of the user you are running the catalog item
for. The Action & Recommendation component in Service Console lists available catalog items. A catalog request and a Case are generated
after you run the catalog item for your contact.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create an Actions & Recommendations Deployment (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Make Catalog Items Available On External Sites with Lightning Out

Site admins can use a Lightning Out component to make catalog items available on external sites, which enable customers to order
services from external sites without needing access to Service Catalog. Additionally, authenticated users can use external sites to confer
their authentication to unauthenticated users, giving those unauthenticated users access to catalog items.
680
Who: To use this feature, you must have the Service Catalog Access permission set license and one of these community licenses.
• Channel Community
• Customer Community
• Customer Community Login
• Customer Community Plus
• Customer Community Plus Login
• External Apps
• Partner Community
• Partner Community Login
How: Add this component as a dependency to the Lightning Out app.
<html>
<script src="SiteURL/lightning/lightning.out.js"></script>
<body>
<h1>Header</h1>
<div id="item"></div>
</body>
<script>
// What needs to be done: in your org, add this URL (probably localhost) to CORS
var token = "<token, not prefixed by Bearer>"
$Lightning.use("runtime_service_servicecatalog:serviceCatalogLightningOut", function()
{
$Lightning.createComponent("runtime_service_servicecatalog:catalogItem",
{ itemApiName: "<itemName>", targetCustomerId: “<CustomerId>” },
"item",
function(newCmp, status, errorMessage) {
if (status === "SUCCESS") {
console.log("Component Created Successfully");
} else {
console.log("Component not created | " + errorMessage);
}
}
);
},"SiteURL"
,token);
</script>
</html>
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Lightning Web Components Developer Guide: Use Components Outside Salesforce with Lightning Out (Beta)
Salesforce Lightning Web Components Developer Guide: Share Lightning Out Apps with Unauthenticated Users
Provide Guest User Access to Service Catalog

Use a guest user profile in Service Catalog to control public user access to view and request items in your catalog without authentication.
Previously, only authenticated users were supported in Service Catalog.
681
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with Service Cloud for Aura and
LWR Experience Sites, Salesforce Sites, and sites built outside of Salesforce.
Who: To use this feature in Experience Sites, you must have the Service Catalog Access permission set license and one of these community
licenses.
• External Apps
To use this feature in Salesforce Sites or external sites, only the Service Catalog Access permission set license is required.
How: For Experience Cloud sites, head to the Experience Administration settings to enable the Guest User profiles, and then assign the
associated permissions and licenses for the Service Catalog Guest User. For Salesforce and external sites, create a Visualforce page to
expose catalog items externally and then create a Salesforce Site to allow guest users to access the items.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up Service Catalog Guest Users (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Integrate Service Catalog with Knowledge

Provide even more customer self-service efficiency with Knowledge in Service Catalog. Attaching knowledge articles to catalog items
provides more information about the service than the catalog item description alone does. The additional information increases customer
self-service efficiency, because customers use the article to solve their own contact reasons.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with Service Cloud and the
Customer Service Catalog add-on license.
Who: To use this feature, you must have the Service Catalog Builder permission set, Knowledge enabled, and one of these community
licenses.
• External Apps
682
How: Create a custom component for your Experience Cloud site to link knowledge articles with your Service Catalog, and then add it
to the Service Catalog Item Definition detail page.
SEE ALSO:
LWR Sites for Experience Cloud Developer Guide: Create Components for LWR Sites
Lightning Aura Components Developer Guide: Creating Components
Lightning Web Components Developer Guide: Create Lightning Web Components
Lightning Web Components Developer Guide: Configure a Component for Experience Builder

Accelerate case deflections in Service Catalog with Einstein Copilot. Through its generative AI-powered conversational experience,
Einstein Copilot takes action in Service Catalog to resolve customers contact reasons without having them navigate your catalog or
requiring agent assistance.
IN THIS SECTION:
Drive Case Resolution in Service Catalog with AI (Beta)
With Einstein Copilot as your AI assistant, your customers resolve their questions without navigating the catalog or requiring agent
assistance. Through a generative AI-powered conversational experience, Copilot uses an LLM to identify and execute relevant actions
to resolve customer contact reasons. In Service Catalog, Copilot uses actions to open catalog item requests for customers or provides
them with a URL link to the item in your catalog.
Share Catalog Item Links to Customers with Einstein Copilot (Beta)
Use Einstein Copilot in Service Catalog to build custom actions that resolve customer contact reasons by sharing URL links to the
items in your catalog. Through a generative AI-powered conversational experience, Copilot determines which of your catalog items
resolve the contact reason and then provides the customer a URL link to the item in you catalog.
Drive Case Resolution in Service Catalog with AI (Beta)

With Einstein Copilot as your AI assistant, your customers resolve their questions without navigating the catalog or requiring agent
assistance. Through a generative AI-powered conversational experience, Copilot uses an LLM to identify and execute relevant actions
to resolve customer contact reasons. In Service Catalog, Copilot uses actions to open catalog item requests for customers or provides
them with a URL link to the item in your catalog.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with Service Cloud, the Customer
Service Catalog add-on, and the Einstein for Service add-on. Einstein generative AI is available in Lightning Experience.
Who: To use this feature, you must have the Service Catalog Builder perm set and Use Einstein Copilot for Salesforce User perm set.
Why: Without requiring you to build any custom functionality, Service Catalog provides three custom actions and sample catalog items
for common support services: Update Phone Number, Update Email, and Get Help.
The catalog actions tell Copilot to resolve the contact reasons by opening a service catalog request for the item. The flow used in the
catalog fulfillment of catalog items determines how Copilot resolves the contact reason. All sample items contain autolauched flows in
their fulfillments, which always result in a catalog item request output.
683
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Channels
Copilot also resolves contact reasons by providing customers a URL link to the catalog item in your site that they can request. A URL
output is associated only with items that contain orchestration or screen flows in their fulfillment.
How: From Setup, enable Einstein generative AI and turn on Einstein Copilot for Salesforce from the Einstein Copilots page. Then, from
the Einstein Copilot actions guided setup, configure the provided Service Catalog actions and add the actions to your Copilot.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Einstein Copilot (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Einstein Copilot Actions (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Integrating AI into Your Service Catalog Site (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Share Catalog Item Links to Customers with Einstein Copilot (Beta)

Use Einstein Copilot in Service Catalog to build custom actions that resolve customer contact reasons by sharing URL links to the items
in your catalog. Through a generative AI-powered conversational experience, Copilot determines which of your catalog items resolve
the contact reason and then provides the customer a URL link to the item in you catalog.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with Service Cloud, the Customer
Service Catalog add-on, and the Einstein for Service add-on. Einstein generative AI is available in Lightning Experience.
Who: To use this feature, you must have the Service Catalog Builder perm set and Use Einstein Copilot for Salesforce User perm set.
How: You must build a custom Copilot action using the Service Catalog Item action type for any catalog item that contains orchestration
or screen flows in their fulfillment.
First, from Setup, enable Einstein generative AI and turn on Einstein Copilot for Salesforce from the Einstein Copilots page. Then, from
the Catalog Settings page in Setup, turn on Catalog Item Sharing.
Second, from the Einstein Copilot actions guided setup, create a custom action for your catalog items using the Service Catalog Item
action type.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Einstein Copilot (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Extend Your Copilot with Custom Actions (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Integrating AI into Your Service Catalog Site (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Channels
Learn about Summer ’24 improvements to Email-to-Case, Messaging, and Service Cloud Voice.
IN THIS SECTION:
Email
Get the gist of emails and email threads with Einstein Work Summaries for Email, use upgraded threading for automated emails,
and enjoy improvements to the composer experience.
Messaging
In Summer ’24, migrate enhanced WhatsApp channels to Unified Messaging, message customers in the Salesforce Mobile App,
analyze messaging transcripts in Data Cloud, and scale up your customer service with improvements to messaging components.
684
Voice
Reduce customer wait time by actively managing your contact center queue backlog. Get midconversation summaries for Voice in
five more languages. Protect sensitive data by masking customer phone numbers.
Social Media
Social Customer Service Starter Pack is retiring.
Chat
Chat is in maintenance-only mode, and some users can’t set up new channels.
Channel Tools
User verification works in Messaging for In-App and Web deployments that are added to Channel Menu, and the Search Individual
flow action is generally available.
Email
Get the gist of emails and email threads with Einstein Work Summaries for Email, use upgraded threading for automated emails, and
enjoy improvements to the composer experience.
IN THIS SECTION:
behavior, incoming emails aren’t matched using Ref IDs. Instead, they’re matched using a secure token in the email subject or body.
If no match is found, Email-to-Case checks metadata from the email headers. This update was first available in Winter ‘21.
Help agents quickly catch up on emails with concise summaries of individual emails or entire email threads.
Enjoy Improved Threading for Emails Sent by Flows
Now even automated emails support the new token-based threading. To securely link email replies to the correct record, place a
threading token in the email’s subject or body.
Previously, threading tokens were restricted to Cases. Now they’re a platform feature, and you can use them to thread responses to
emails for any object that supports activity tracking.
Threading Tokens Are Exempt From Salesforce Org Storage Policy
Previously, email threading tokens counted towards an org’s data storage limits. Now they’re just a benefit included with the email
channel.
Manage Visibility for Your Email Routing Address
Now you can decide whether users need permission to use an email routing address to send emails. With this option, it’s also easy
to curate a list of addresses for different sets of users.
Transition to the Lightning Editor for Email Composers in Email-to-Case (Generally Available) (Release
Update)
685
editions.
When: Salesforce enforces this update in Spring ‘25. To get the major release upgrade date for your instance, go to Trust Status, search
Why: Salesforce is replacing the email editor in the docked and case feed email composers and switching to a modern editor based in
HTML 5. The new editor provides similar functionality in Lightning Experience. New features include:
• Full-screen mode
• Printing
• Undo and Redo buttons
• Format painting
• Emoji picker
• Resizability
• A more responsive toolbar
You asked for a cleaner visual experience, and we listened. We also removed the automatically displayed table controls, word and
character counts, and the window about formatting pasted text.
How: This update is available to Salesforce orgs with Email-to-Case enabled. If your org was created in Winter ‘24 or later, you see the
new editor by default. If your org was created before Winter ‘24, you can enable it on the Release Updates page in Setup. After the release
update is enabled, users see similar functionality when they compose and edit emails. To revert to the previous editor, disable the release
update.
SEE ALSO:
Release Updates
behavior, incoming emails aren’t matched using Ref IDs. Instead, they’re matched using a secure token in the email subject or body. If
no match is found, Email-to-Case checks metadata from the email headers. This update was first available in Winter ‘21.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
When: Salesforce enforces this update in Spring ’25. If you’re a Salesforce admin for a Salesforce org that still uses Ref ID, you will see a
banner reminding you to transition to Lightning threading by the enforcement date.
Why: To match emails to corresponding cases, Lightning threading combines token- and header-based threading. Similar to Ref ID
threading, token-based threading inserts a formatted string into the email body or subject, but this string is now created in a way that
meets Salesforce security standards. When Lightning threading is enabled, new outbound emails don’t include a Ref ID.
Disable Ref ID and Transition to New Email Threading Behavior, follow the testing and activation steps.
When you enable Lightning threading, emails continue to thread to cases using email headers. If you disable the update and move back
to Ref ID, emails don’t always thread to previously created cases, resulting in new cases being generated. If Do Not Auto-Enable New
Features is off, we set email preferences for threading tokens based on the corresponding Ref ID settings for email subjects and bodies.
If you use merge fields in email templates, replace Case.Thread_Id with the merge field Case.Thread_Token.
686
In your custom code, replace Cases.getCaseIdFromEmailThreadId wherever it occurs with Cases.getCaseIdFromEmailHeaders,

EmailMessages.getRecordIdFromEmail, or a combination of both.
SEE ALSO:
Knowledge Article Disable Ref ID and Switch to Lightning Threading
Release Updates
Help agents quickly catch up on emails with concise summaries of individual emails or entire email threads.
Where: This change applies to Unlimited and Enterprise editions, with Service Cloud Einstein add-on. Einstein for Service is available
To purchase the Einstein for Service add-on, contact your Salesforce account executive.
How: In Setup, search for Einstein Generative AI and verify that it’s on. Then, search for the Einstein Work Summaries and toggle it on.
From the Email tab, map Einstein’s responses to Email Summary fields. Finally, turn on Email Message Summaries.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Use Work Summaries in the Console
Enjoy Improved Threading for Emails Sent by Flows

Now even automated emails support the new token-based threading. To securely link email replies to the correct record, place a threading
token in the email’s subject or body.
687
editions.
SEE ALSO:

Previously, threading tokens were restricted to Cases. Now they’re a platform feature, and you can use them to thread responses to
emails for any object that supports activity tracking.
How: To set up token-based threading for objects other than Case, create an Apex Email Service. Use the
EmailMessages.getRecordIdFromEmail function to find the record that matches the token.
SEE ALSO:
Email Services
Salesforce Developer Guide: getRecordIdFromEmail
Salesforce Developer Guide: getFormattedThreadingToken(recordId)
Threading Tokens Are Exempt From Salesforce Org Storage Policy

Previously, email threading tokens counted towards an org’s data storage limits. Now they’re just a benefit included with the email
channel.
Manage Visibility for Your Email Routing Address

Now you can decide whether users need permission to use an email routing address to send emails. With this option, it’s also easy to
curate a list of addresses for different sets of users.
How: Go to the Email-to-Case page under Setup. Choose a routing address to edit, or add a new routing address. Under Routing
Information, select Controlled by Permission Set, and then save.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Add Routing Addresses for Email-to-Case
Email Services
Messaging
In Summer ’24, migrate enhanced WhatsApp channels to Unified Messaging, message customers in the Salesforce Mobile App, analyze
messaging transcripts in Data Cloud, and scale up your customer service with improvements to messaging components.
688
IN THIS SECTION:
In Unified Messaging, service and marketing interactions occur in a single channel. Previously, you couldn’t create unified WhatsApp
channels with a number that was associated with a Service Cloud WhatsApp channel. When you migrate from an enhanced WhatsApp
channel to a unified WhatsApp channel, your messaging history and channel settings are preserved. You also get access to Unified
Messaging features such as Data Cloud reporting.
Message Your Customers from the Salesforce Mobile App
Modernize your customer service by letting agents message customers from the Salesforce mobile app. Previously, agents had to
be signed in to Omni on the Salesforce agent console to engage in conversations.
Say Goodbye to Standard WhatsApp Channels
Take advantage of a range of productivity-boosting tools available only in Enhanced Messaging. To avoid service interruptions,
upgrade your standard WhatsApp channels to enhanced channels by July 30, 2025. As of July 1, 2024, you also can’t create additional
standard WhatsApp channels.
Upgrade SMS and Facebook Messenger Channels from Standard to Enhanced
Upgrade your standard SMS or Facebook Messenger channels to enhanced channels to benefit from features such as messaging
components and session transfers. As part of this change, we’re phasing out the option to create standard SMS and Facebook
Messenger channels.
Block Sensitive Data in Enhanced Messaging, Messaging for In-App and Web, and Voice Transcripts
Set up rules that hide particular data patterns in enhanced messaging sessions, Messaging for In-App and Web sessions, and Voice
transcripts. For example, hide credit card numbers or profanity. You can remove the sensitive text or replace it with custom text,
such as “(credit card number)”. Previously, sensitive data rules were available only in standard Messaging channels.
Use Status-Based Capacity with Messaging (Beta)
Measure agent capacity more accurately with status-based capacity for enhanced Messaging channels and Messaging for In-App
and Web. When a status-based capacity model is used, a messaging agent’s capacity is based on the status of their accepted work
rather than on the number of open tabs and sessions. Previously, Messaging worked only with a tab-based capacity model.
When setting up an SMS channel, you can now register 10-digit long code numbers and toll-free long code numbers on the new
Regulatory Compliance page in Setup. Previously, a web form was used to register numbers, and you couldn’t see your registration
status.
If you’re keen to design a highly customized UI for your mobile app or web messaging experience—and flex your developer muscles
while you’re at it—try the new custom client deployment type.
In Summer ’24, translate messaging components into your customer’s language, use auto-response components in Partner Messaging,
and take advantage of improvements to secure forms, authentication components, and the List Selector format.
Summer ’24 features several key improvements to the way agents message with customers in the Service Console. It’s now easier
to attach files, refresh a conversation after experiencing connection issues, and view mid-conversation summaries. Admins can adjust
the Enhanced Conversation component height and customize the list of session transfer recipients.
Track Who Ends Enhanced Messaging Sessions
A new field on enhanced messaging sessions shows whether a session was ended by the customer, the agent, a bot, or automation.
Add the Ended By Type (EndedByType) field to your custom report types or messaging session list views to get insight into enhanced
messaging activity.
689
Activate or Deactivate Sensitive Data Rules from the Rules List View
Previously, you had to edit a rule and select or deselect the Active checkbox.
Einstein Conversation Mining is Now Available in Messaging for In-App and Web
Track key trends and top contact reasons with Einstein Conversation Mining. This reporting tool is now available to Messaging for
In-App and Web users.
Access to Sensitive Data Rules is Restricted to Admins
To prevent users from unintentionally modifying sensitive data rules, only Salesforce admins are allowed to create, edit, activate,
deactivate, and delete these rules. Users who aren’t admins can only view sensitive data rules.
Route Data to Objects in Partner Messaging (Beta)
You can use parameters, parameter mappings, and flow variables to send partner messaging conversation data to objects. This data
gives agents more context for who they’re messaging with. For example, create a Support Reason dropdown menu, and then route
the customer’s input to the Messaging Session object.
Set a More Informative Channel Type in Partner Messaging (Beta)
Partners can now write their own Channel Type field value when creating an AppExchange package for Partner Messaging. Supervisors
can report on Channel Type. Previously, all Partner Messaging channels had one Channel Type of Custom, making it difficult to
differentiate them.
Customize the Partner Messaging Channel Setup Experience Using Icons (Beta)
To help Salesforce admins select the right channel type when they set up Partner Messaging, use custom icons to uniquely identify
each channel integration. Messaging partners upload the custom icon, such as a channel logo, and bundle it with the managed
package. After the admin installs the package, the icon appears when they add the Messaging channel.
The Minimize Chat Window Button Is Relocated in Messaging for Web
To align with accessibility standards, the minimize chat window button appears in the messaging for web conversation window’s
header when it’s expanded in a desktop site. Previously, the button appeared below the expanded conversation window.
Check out the new code snippet settings to reduce noise during a session, restrict conversation history, control whether a new tab
loads the web chat client minimized, and more.
Send Automated Notifications in Partner Messaging Channels (Beta)
Automate customer updates with messaging components and the Send Conversation Messages action. Previously, you could send
automated notifications only in standard and enhanced Messaging channels.
In Unified Messaging, service and marketing interactions occur in a single channel. Previously, you couldn’t create unified WhatsApp
channels with a number that was associated with a Service Cloud WhatsApp channel. When you migrate from an enhanced WhatsApp
channel to a unified WhatsApp channel, your messaging history and channel settings are preserved. You also get access to Unified
Messaging features such as Data Cloud reporting.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited Editions with the Marketing Cloud Engagement and
Service Cloud Digital Engagement add-ons.
How: To migrate an enhanced WhatsApp channel, contact your account executive to purchase Unified Messaging. Then, go to the Your
Numbers page in Setup under WhatsApp. Click Add Number and follow the prompts to add the number that was previously in use in
Service Cloud Digital Engagement. You can also follow these steps to migrate a WhatsApp number from an external business service
provider.
690
Note: When you bring a WhatsApp number from a Service Cloud channel to a unified channel, it’s a one-way move. You can’t
move the number back to its original channel in the future. It’s also not possible to migrate from a standard WhatsApp channel
to a unified channel; migrate first from standard to enhanced WhatsApp, and then to a unified channel.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: WhatsApp Unified Messaging Channel Capabilities (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Migrate to Unified WhatsApp (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Message Your Customers from the Salesforce Mobile App

Modernize your customer service by letting agents message customers from the Salesforce mobile app. Previously, agents had to be
signed in to Omni on the Salesforce agent console to engage in conversations.
SEE ALSO:
Say Goodbye to Standard WhatsApp Channels

Take advantage of a range of productivity-boosting tools available only in Enhanced Messaging. To avoid service interruptions, upgrade
your standard WhatsApp channels to enhanced channels by July 30, 2025. As of July 1, 2024, you also can’t create additional standard
WhatsApp channels.
Where: This change applies to standard WhatsApp channels. View required editions.
Why: If a standard WhatsApp channel isn’t upgraded to an enhanced channel by July 30, 2025, you can no longer send or receive
messages in the channel. Because this change is due to changes in the WhatsApp API, Salesforce can’t provide extensions to this deadline.
How: To upgrade to an enhanced WhatsApp channel, you’ll first create an enhanced channel on the Messaging Settings page in Setup.
During this process, create another WhatsApp Business account (WABA) and business profile and select the phone number that you’re
transferring. Next, complete the steps in our channel activation checklist. Then activate your enhanced channel in Setup.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Considerations for Migrating or Upgrading to Enhanced WhatsApp (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Salesforce Help: Create or Upgrade to an Enhanced WhatsApp Channel (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Enhanced WhatsApp Messaging Channel Activation Checklist (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Upgrade SMS and Facebook Messenger Channels from Standard to Enhanced

Upgrade your standard SMS or Facebook Messenger channels to enhanced channels to benefit from features such as messaging
components and session transfers. As part of this change, we’re phasing out the option to create standard SMS and Facebook Messenger
channels.
Where: This change applies to standard and enhanced SMS and Facebook Messenger channels. View required editions.
Why: Here’s what’s changing in Summer ’24.
691
• If you have active standard Messaging channels of any type, you can still create standard SMS or Facebook Messenger channels.
However, we encourage you to create enhanced channels.
• If you don’t have active standard Messaging channels, you no longer see the option to create standard channels of any type.
• If you have a standard SMS or Facebook Messenger channel, you can now upgrade it to an enhanced channel. You must make a
few changes as part of the upgrade, such as updating your routing settings, but your channel data and preferences are preserved.
How: To upgrade a standard SMS or Facebook Messenger channel, go to the Messaging Settings page in Setup. Find your channel in
the list, click the down arrow to open its action menu, and select Upgrade to Enhanced. Review the list of upgrade tasks and verify
that you’ve completed them, and then click Upgrade.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Upgrading from Standard to Enhanced Messaging (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Block Sensitive Data in Enhanced Messaging, Messaging for In-App and Web, and Voice Transcripts
Set up rules that hide particular data patterns in enhanced messaging sessions, Messaging for In-App and Web sessions, and Voice
transcripts. For example, hide credit card numbers or profanity. You can remove the sensitive text or replace it with custom text, such
as “(credit card number)”. Previously, sensitive data rules were available only in standard Messaging channels.
Where: This change applies to enhanced Messaging channels, Messaging for In-App and Web, and Voice. View required editions.
How: To create a sensitive data rule, in Setup, go to the Sensitive Data Rules for Enhanced Channels page. Click New Rule, provide the
text patterns that you want to hide, and define your rule’s scope and behavior. When you’re ready to start enforcing your active rules,
turn on the Sensitive Data Rules setting at the top of the page.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Block Sensitive Data in Messaging Sessions and Voice Call Transcripts (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)

Measure agent capacity more accurately with status-based capacity for enhanced Messaging channels and Messaging for In-App and
Web. When a status-based capacity model is used, a messaging agent’s capacity is based on the status of their accepted work rather
than on the number of open tabs and sessions. Previously, Messaging worked only with a tab-based capacity model.
Where: This change applies to enhanced Messaging channels and Messaging for In-App and Web. View required editions.
Why: Here’s how using status-based capacity instead of tab-based capacity changes the messaging agent experience.
• Closing the tab of an active messaging session doesn’t change the session’s status or ownership, and the agent isn’t prompted to
end or inactivate the session. If the agent goes offline, all their active sessions remain active.
• If a session is inactive and the customer sends a new message, the agent who was handling it receives the message and continues
helping the customer. In contrast, with tab-based capacity, the session is routed to the support team as if it were a new session. In
that case, complex routing logic is required to ensure that the same agent receives it.
• In standard (not console) apps, agents have more freedom to simultaneously view multiple messaging session records without
session ownership being affected.
• With status-based capacity, an agent can be assigned a total of 100 work items at a time, versus having up to 100 tabs open with
tab-based capacity.
This feature is a Beta Service. Customer may opt to try such Beta Service in its sole discretion. Any use of the Beta Service is subject to
the applicable Beta Services Terms provided at Agreements and Terms.
692
How: On the Omni-Channel Settings page in Setup, make sure that enhanced routing is enabled and then select Enable Status-Based
Capacity Model. Then, on the Service Channels page in Setup, edit your messaging service channel and update the fields in the Capacity
Settings section.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up Routing for Messaging Channels in Service Cloud (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

When setting up an SMS channel, you can now register 10-digit long code numbers and toll-free long code numbers on the new
Regulatory Compliance page in Setup. Previously, a web form was used to register numbers, and you couldn’t see your registration
status.
Where: This change applies to standard and enhanced SMS channels. View required editions.
How: Follow the instructions to open a case requesting your new SMS channel. When your case is closed, it’s time to register your
number or numbers. In Setup, go to the Regulatory Compliance page under Messaging. Click Register Long Code to register a US or
Canadian 10-digit long code number, or click Register Toll-Free to register a toll-free long code number.
The registration timeline isn’t affected by this change. Registering a new phone number in the US and Canada can take 1 to 2 weeks for
toll-free numbers and 1 to 4 weeks for 10-digit long codes.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create SMS Long Code Channels in Service Cloud (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
If you’re keen to design a highly customized UI for your mobile app or web messaging experience—and flex your developer muscles
while you’re at it—try the new custom client deployment type.
Where: This change applies to Messaging for Web in a desktop site. View required editions.
When: Create custom client deployments in Messaging for In-App and Web starting on May 20, 2024.
Why: While our web or mobile deployments rely on our web client and mobile SDK, a custom client deployment lets you deliver a highly
customized UI with the Messaging for In-App and Web REST API. This REST API can be used to create conversations that house messaging
sessions, generate access tokens, and send messages and files. You can also integrate an external bot solution or partner-supported
messaging solutions.
693
How: Create custom client deployments on the Embedded Service Deployments page. Then, reference your deployment name when
invoking public endpoints from the new Messaging for In-App and Web REST API.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Configure a Custom Client Deployment for Messaging for In-App and Web
Developer Guide: Messaging for In-App and Web REST API
In Summer ’24, translate messaging components into your customer’s language, use auto-response components in Partner Messaging,
and take advantage of improvements to secure forms, authentication components, and the List Selector format.
IN THIS SECTION:
Send Messaging Components in Your Customer’s Language
Show any messaging component in your customer’s language with the help of Translation Workbench. For example, when you
send a French-speaking customer a question with options, show the question and options in French.
Customize Secure Forms with New Settings
When agents or bots send secure forms in messaging sessions, new settings help you customize every step of the form submission
experience. Show a welcome screen before the form questions, and provide a title and subtitle for each form field. And, include a
custom image and text in the form link that are both updated after the customer submits their responses.
Customize Lists in Messaging Components with New Settings
To control the way messaging components with clickable options appear in messaging sessions, try several new settings on the List
Selector format. Two types of messaging components use this format: time selectors and questions with options.
Control When Secure Forms Expire in Messaging Sessions
When a form messaging component is sent in a messaging session, your customer has 5 minutes by default to submit their responses
before the link expires. You can now customize this limit for each form. For example, change it to 60 minutes to accommodate
customers in Messaging for In-App and Web.
Form Format in Secure Forms Is Generally Available in Messaging for In-App and Web
Previously in Form messaging components, the Text format was generally available but the Form format was in beta for Messaging
for In-App and Web. The Form format was already generally available for enhanced Apple Messages for Business channels.
Extend Messaging Components with Custom Constants
To control the appearance of messaging components at a more granular level, add custom image or text constants to any messaging
component. Previously, standard constants were auto-added when you created some types of messaging components, but you
couldn’t add your own.
Authentication Messaging Components Improved for Compatibility
To remain compatible with Apple Messages for Business REST API, we’ve made a few changes to the way you set up authentication
messaging components. Agents use these components to verify a customer’s identity during an enhanced Apple Messages for
Business messaging session.
Auto-Response Components Are Available in Partner Messaging (Beta)
Previously only available to Messaging for In-App and Web customers, auto-response components are now available in Partner
Messaging. Save agents time by automating common messages to customers at the beginning of a messaging session, when an
agent joins, when the session ends, or when the session becomes inactive.
694
Send Messaging Components in Your Customer’s Language

Show any messaging component in your customer’s language with the help of Translation Workbench. For example, when you send a
French-speaking customer a question with options, show the question and options in French.
How: Two parts of a messaging component can be translated: the component name, which agents see, and constant values in the
component itself, which customers see. Prepare your messaging components for translation and upload your translations in Translation
Workbench. Next, give agents access to the new Messaging User Language field on the Messaging Session object.
At the start of a messaging session, the agent updates the Messaging User Language field on the session to list the customer’s preferred
language. When they send a messaging component during the session, the component appears in the customer’s language if a translated
version is available. Agents also see the messaging component names in their own preferred language, like any other text in the Service
Console.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Translate Messaging Components into Your Customer’s Language (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Customize Secure Forms with New Settings

When agents or bots send secure forms in messaging sessions, new settings help you customize every step of the form submission
experience. Show a welcome screen before the form questions, and provide a title and subtitle for each form field. And, include a custom
image and text in the form link that are both updated after the customer submits their responses.
Where: This change applies to enhanced Apple Messages for Business channels and Messaging for In-App and Web. View required
editions.
How: On the Messaging Components page in Setup, create a form messaging component. When the Messaging Component Builder
opens, add the Form format to your component. Then, click the format name and customize the new properties in the properties pane.
• To add a welcome screen that appears when the customer clicks the component link, update the properties whose names start
with Welcome Screen.
• To provide a title and subtitle for each form field, click a field in the form preview and update these properties: Field Title Configuration,
Field Subtitle Configuration.
• To provide the text and image shown in the component link when the agent or bot first sends it to a customer, update these
properties: Initial Message Configuration, Initial Image Configuration.
• To show different text and an image when the customer submits their responses, update these properties: Confirmation Message
Configuration, Confirmation Image Configuration.
695
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create and Send Secure Forms in Messaging Sessions (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Get to Know the Messaging Component Builder (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Customize Lists in Messaging Components with New Settings

To control the way messaging components with clickable options appear in messaging sessions, try several new settings on the List
Selector format. Two types of messaging components use this format: time selectors and questions with options.
Where: This change applies to enhanced WhatsApp and enhanced Apple Messages for Business channels. View required editions.
How: On the Messaging Components page in Setup, create a question with options or time selector messaging component. When the
Messaging Component Builder opens, add the List Selector format to your component. Then, click the format name and customize the
new properties in the properties pane.
• To provide the text and image shown in the component link when the agent or bot first sends it to a customer, update these
properties: Initial Message Configuration, Initial Image Configuration.
• To show different text and an image after the customer selects an option, update these properties: Confirmation Message Configuration,
Confirmation Image Configuration.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Messaging Component Types and Formats (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
696
Control When Secure Forms Expire in Messaging Sessions

When a form messaging component is sent in a messaging session, your customer has 5 minutes by default to submit their responses
before the link expires. You can now customize this limit for each form. For example, change it to 60 minutes to accommodate customers
in Messaging for In-App and Web.
How: On the Messaging Components page in Setup, click a form name to open the Messaging Component Builder. Click the
Customization tab on the left, enter your expiration limit for the form, and click Save.
After a form link expires, the customer can’t submit their responses. However, agents or automation can send them the form again.
SEE ALSO:
Form Format in Secure Forms Is Generally Available in Messaging for In-App and Web
Previously in Form messaging components, the Text format was generally available but the Form format was in beta for Messaging for
In-App and Web. The Form format was already generally available for enhanced Apple Messages for Business channels.
Where: This change applies to Messaging for In-App and Web. View required editions.
SEE ALSO:
Extend Messaging Components with Custom Constants

To control the appearance of messaging components at a more granular level, add custom image or text constants to any messaging
component. Previously, standard constants were auto-added when you created some types of messaging components, but you couldn’t
add your own.
Where: This change applies to enhanced Messaging sessions and Messaging for In-App and Web. View required editions.
Why: Here are two examples of ways to use custom constants.
• Customize the image shown in a component link: Add two custom constants to a form messaging component: one showing
a form, and one showing a checkmark. Then, click the Form format and select the first constant as your Initial Image, and the second
697
constant as your Confirmation Image. When an agent sends the form to a customer, the form link initially shows the form image,
and then updates to show the checkmark image when the customer submits their responses.
• Update messaging components that you plan to translate: Because only constants are translated, replace any properties that
use literal values with a custom constant. This way, the text can be translated.
How: Open a messaging component on the Messaging Components page in Setup. Then, click the Constants tab to manage your
standard and custom constants. After you create a component, edit it to upload an image or add text.
SEE ALSO:
Authentication Messaging Components Improved for Compatibility

To remain compatible with Apple Messages for Business REST API, we’ve made a few changes to the way you set up authentication
messaging components. Agents use these components to verify a customer’s identity during an enhanced Apple Messages for Business
messaging session.
Where: This change applies to enhanced Apple Messages for Business channels. View required editions.
How: If you have an authentication messaging component, make these updates to keep it working as expected.
• In the Messaging Component Builder, open your authentication component and copy the Callback URL from the Details tab. Then,
in the settings of your external identity provider, go to your authentication app and add the Callback URL to the list of redirect URLs.
• Copy the Token URL from your authentication app. Then, on the Auth. Providers page in Setup, paste it into the Token Endpoint URL
field on your authentication provider.
• Complete these additional steps if you’re using a custom authentication provider.
– If your authentication provider Apex class makes any HTTP callouts to fetch information, add each HTTP base URL as a
corresponding remote site on the Remote Site Settings page in Setup.
– If your authentication provider requires a redirect URL in the token URL callout, edit the handleCallback function in the
AuthProviderPluginClass to use the redirectUrl in the AuthProviderCallbackState.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create and Send Authentication Requests in Messaging Sessions (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Salesforce Developer Guide: AuthRequestHandler Interface
Salesforce Developer Guide: AuthProviderPluginClass
Auto-Response Components Are Available in Partner Messaging (Beta)

Previously only available to Messaging for In-App and Web customers, auto-response components are now available in Partner Messaging.
Save agents time by automating common messages to customers at the beginning of a messaging session, when an agent joins, when
the session ends, or when the session becomes inactive.
Where: This change applies to Partner Messaging. View required editions.
698
How: Create an Auto-Response messaging component in the component builder. Then add it to the Conversation Acknowledgement,
Start Conversation, End Conversation, or Inactivate Conversation boxes in the setup page for your Partner Messaging channel.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create and Send Auto-Response Components in Messaging Sessions (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)

Summer ’24 features several key improvements to the way agents message with customers in the Service Console. It’s now easier to
attach files, refresh a conversation after experiencing connection issues, and view mid-conversation summaries. Admins can adjust the
Enhanced Conversation component height and customize the list of session transfer recipients.
IN THIS SECTION:
Assign a New User Permission to Partner Messaging Agents (Beta)
To let Partner Messaging agents accept incoming and transferred messages and send outbound messages, assign the Message
Customers with Partner Messaging user permission.
The Attach File Action in the Enhanced Conversation Component Got a Makeover
Agents now have more options when they send files in enhanced Messaging sessions and Messaging for In-App and Web.
Enjoy a Better Messaging Experience Outside the Service Window
When viewing an enhanced WhatsApp or Facebook Messenger session outside the service window, agents now see a message that
too much time has passed to reply. They also can’t enter text. Previously, agents received an error if they tried to send a message
outside of the service window.
Refresh Conversations After a Lost Connection
Agents can refresh the Enhanced Conversation component with a new option in the End Chat dropdown menu. This option helps
agents reestablish a lost network connection.
Get Midconversation Summaries in Five New Languages
Conversation Catch-Up is now available in six languages: English, French, German, Spanish, Italian, and Japanese. Previously, it was
Customize Which Queues, Flows, and Profiles Your Agents Can Transfer To
Reduce long transfer destination lists when agents just need to deliver a session to the right place quickly. Choose whether to offer
all queues, flows, and profiles, or just offer some.
Adjust the Enhanced Conversation Component’s Height in the Agent Console
You asked, we listened. Whether you find the Enhanced Conversation component to be too tall or too compact, we now give you
control over its height.
Assign a New User Permission to Partner Messaging Agents (Beta)

To let Partner Messaging agents accept incoming and transferred messages and send outbound messages, assign the Message Customers
with Partner Messaging user permission.
699
How: Add Message Customers with Partner Messaging to a custom permission set license, and assign it to agents.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Prepare Your Agents to Use Partner Messaging (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
The Attach File Action in the Enhanced Conversation Component Got a Makeover
Agents now have more options when they send files in enhanced Messaging sessions and Messaging for In-App and Web.
Where: This change applies to all messaging channels. View required editions.
Why: Previously, only Salesforce files with a public link were available to send. Now, all Salesforce files that you have access to show up
when you select Send File.
Previously, you couldn’t set an expiration date on a public link, or preview a file before sending it. Now you can.
How: Select the Send File action from the agent’s Enhanced Conversation Component toolbar.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Send Images and Files in Messaging Sessions (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Enjoy a Better Messaging Experience Outside the Service Window

When viewing an enhanced WhatsApp or Facebook Messenger session outside the service window, agents now see a message that
too much time has passed to reply. They also can’t enter text. Previously, agents received an error if they tried to send a message outside
of the service window.
Where: This change applies to enhanced WhatsApp and enhanced Facebook Messenger channels. View required editions.
How: Currently, the Facebook Messenger service window is 7 days after the customer’s last message, while the WhatsApp service
window is 24 hours after the customer’s last message. Outside of this window, agents can still raise a flag or transfer, end, or inactivate
the session. In enhanced WhatsApp sessions, they can also send notification messaging components that are linked to approved
WhatsApp message templates.
Refresh Conversations After a Lost Connection

Agents can refresh the Enhanced Conversation component with a new option in the End Chat dropdown menu. This option helps agents
reestablish a lost network connection.
Where: This change applies to enhanced messaging channels and Messaging for In-App and Web. View required editions.
How: In a messaging session, click the End Chat dropdown menu and select Refresh.
Get Midconversation Summaries in Five New Languages

Conversation Catch-Up is now available in six languages: English, French, German, Spanish, Italian, and Japanese. Previously, it was
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Show Agents and Supervisors Midconversation Summaries (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
700
Customize Which Queues, Flows, and Profiles Your Agents Can Transfer To
Reduce long transfer destination lists when agents just need to deliver a session to the right place quickly. Choose whether to offer all
queues, flows, and profiles, or just offer some.
Where: This change is available to all enhanced Messaging channels and Messaging for In-App and Web. View required editions.
How: Go to Presence Configurations in Setup and edit the transfer destinations. Then save your changes.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Customize the Flows, Queues, or Profiles that Agents Can Transfer To (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Adjust the Enhanced Conversation Component’s Height in the Agent Console

You asked, we listened. Whether you find the Enhanced Conversation component to be too tall or too compact, we now give you control
over its height.
Where: This change applies to all enhanced Messaging channels and Messaging for In-App and Web. View required editions.
How: In the Enhanced Conversation Component editor, enter a height between 500 and 1,000 pixels. Then save your changes.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Add Messaging to the Service Console (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Track Who Ends Enhanced Messaging Sessions

A new field on enhanced messaging sessions shows whether a session was ended by the customer, the agent, a bot, or automation.
Add the Ended By Type (EndedByType) field to your custom report types or messaging session list views to get insight into enhanced
messaging activity.
How: The Ended By Type field has four possible values: End User, Agent, Bot, and System. “End User” refers to the customer. “System”
can mean three things.
• After being inactive for the maximum amount of time, the status automatically updated to Ended.
• The status automatically updated to Ended due to any automation in place.
• Something went wrong and the session ended with a status of Error.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Report on Messaging Activity in Service Cloud (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Activate or Deactivate Sensitive Data Rules from the Rules List View
Previously, you had to edit a rule and select or deselect the Active checkbox.
Where: This change applies to enhanced Messaging channels, Messaging for In-App and Web, and Voice. View required editions.
How: In Setup, go to the Sensitive Data Rules for Enhanced Channels page. In the list of rules, click any rule’s action menu and select
Activate or Deactivate. You can have up to 10 active sensitive data rules at a time for enhanced channels. If you reach this limit, you
can create additional rules but can’t activate them without first deactivating others.
701
Einstein Conversation Mining is Now Available in Messaging for In-App and Web
Track key trends and top contact reasons with Einstein Conversation Mining. This reporting tool is now available to Messaging for In-App
and Web users.
Where: This change applies to Messaging for In-App and Web. View required editions.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Release Notes: Track Key Trends and Top Contact Reasons Across More Channels
Access to Sensitive Data Rules is Restricted to Admins

To prevent users from unintentionally modifying sensitive data rules, only Salesforce admins are allowed to create, edit, activate, deactivate,
and delete these rules. Users who aren’t admins can only view sensitive data rules.
Where: This change applies to enhanced Messaging channels, Messaging for In-App and Web, and Voice. View required editions
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Block Sensitive Data in Messaging Sessions (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Route Data to Objects in Partner Messaging (Beta)

You can use parameters, parameter mappings, and flow variables to send partner messaging conversation data to objects. This data
gives agents more context for who they’re messaging with. For example, create a Support Reason dropdown menu, and then route the
customer’s input to the Messaging Session object.
How: Setup depends on how the partner has configured the AppExchange package. Consult your partner messaging documentation
for steps.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Route Data to Objects in Partner Messaging
Set a More Informative Channel Type in Partner Messaging (Beta)

Partners can now write their own Channel Type field value when creating an AppExchange package for Partner Messaging. Supervisors
can report on Channel Type. Previously, all Partner Messaging channels had one Channel Type of Custom, making it difficult to differentiate
them.
702
How: Set the masterLabel field on the ConversationChannelDefinition object to the name of the channel type, such as the partner
channel name.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Report on Messaging Activity in Service Cloud (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Customize the Partner Messaging Channel Setup Experience Using Icons (Beta)
To help Salesforce admins select the right channel type when they set up Partner Messaging, use custom icons to uniquely identify each
channel integration. Messaging partners upload the custom icon, such as a channel logo, and bundle it with the managed package.
After the admin installs the package, the icon appears when they add the Messaging channel.
How: Upload the custom icon as a static resource, and then set the customIcon field on the ConversationChannelDefinition object
to the name of the static resource file.
SEE ALSO:
Partner Messaging Developer Guide: Create the Conversation Channel Definition Record (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
The Minimize Chat Window Button Is Relocated in Messaging for Web

To align with accessibility standards, the minimize chat window button appears in the messaging for web conversation window’s header
when it’s expanded in a desktop site. Previously, the button appeared below the expanded conversation window.
Where: This change applies to Messaging for Web in a desktop site. View required editions.
703

Check out the new code snippet settings to reduce noise during a session, restrict conversation history, control whether a new tab loads
the web chat client minimized, and more.
IN THIS SECTION:
Reduce Noise During Messaging for Web Sessions
For a simpler read through, use a code snippet setting to control whether the conversation history shows when an agent or bot
joins or leaves the session. This setting affects the output in the messaging conversation window but not the transcript.
Restrict Conversation History by Channel in Messaging for Web
Clear an active messaging session when the user navigates to a page configured with a different Messaging channel, and fetch the
conversation history of the new Messaging channel. For example, if you have different Messaging channels for unverified and verified
users and you use this setting, the session clears and loads the conversation history of the verified user when the user logs in.
Minimize the Web Chat Client When Loading New Tabs for Messaging for Web
You can choose to open new tabs with the web chat client minimized. Previously, if you had an active messaging session and you
launched a new tab from that webpage, the new tab loaded with the web chat client maximized.
Place the Chat Button Where You Want for Messaging for Web
To prevent the chat button from overlapping with other features on your webpage, change the minimized chat button position.
The default position is the bottom-right corner.
Open the Web Chat Client with the Launch Chat API for Messaging for Web
The improved Launch Chat API now always maximizes the messaging conversation window when it is called. Previously, the API
maximized the window the first time you called it. If you minimized the window and called the API again, the API left the it minimized.
704
Reduce Noise During Messaging for Web Sessions

For a simpler read through, use a code snippet setting to control whether the conversation history shows when an agent or bot joins
or leaves the session. This setting affects the output in the messaging conversation window but not the transcript.
Where: This change applies to Messaging for Web. View required editions.
How: Use the code snippet setting
embeddedservice_bootstrap.settings.shouldShowParticipantChgEvntInConvHist.
SEE ALSO:
Messaging for Web Developer Guide: Settings
Restrict Conversation History by Channel in Messaging for Web

Clear an active messaging session when the user navigates to a page configured with a different Messaging channel, and fetch the
conversation history of the new Messaging channel. For example, if you have different Messaging channels for unverified and verified
users and you use this setting, the session clears and loads the conversation history of the verified user when the user logs in.
How: Use the code snippet setting
embeddedservice_bootstrap.settings.restrictSessionOnMessagingChannel.
SEE ALSO:
Minimize the Web Chat Client When Loading New Tabs for Messaging for Web
You can choose to open new tabs with the web chat client minimized. Previously, if you had an active messaging session and you
launched a new tab from that webpage, the new tab loaded with the web chat client maximized.
How: Use the code snippet setting embeddedservice_bootstrap.settings.shouldMinimizeWindowOnNewTab.
SEE ALSO:
Place the Chat Button Where You Want for Messaging for Web
To prevent the chat button from overlapping with other features on your webpage, change the minimized chat button position. The
default position is the bottom-right corner.
How: Use the code snippet setting embeddedservice_bootstrap.settings.chatButtonPosition.
SEE ALSO:
705
Open the Web Chat Client with the Launch Chat API for Messaging for Web
The improved Launch Chat API now always maximizes the messaging conversation window when it is called. Previously, the API
maximized the window the first time you called it. If you minimized the window and called the API again, the API left the it minimized.
How: Use the embeddedservice_bootstrap.utilAPI.launchChat() API.
SEE ALSO:
Messaging for Web Developer Guide: Utilities API
Send Automated Notifications in Partner Messaging Channels (Beta)

Automate customer updates with messaging components and the Send Conversation Messages action. Previously, you could send
automated notifications only in standard and enhanced Messaging channels.
Where: This change applies to Partner Messaging. Automated notifications based on the Send Conversation Messages invocable action
aren’t supported in Messaging for Web. View required editions
How: To set up automated notifications in Partner Messaging, create a Notification messaging component in Setup. Then, create a flow
that uses the Send Conversation Messages action to send the messaging component.
706
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Send Automated Messages in Enhanced Messaging Channels (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Flow Core Actions: Send Conversation Messages (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Voice
Reduce customer wait time by actively managing your contact center queue backlog. Get midconversation summaries for Voice in five
more languages. Protect sensitive data by masking customer phone numbers.
IN THIS SECTION:
Reduce customer wait time by actively managing your contact center queue backlog. When the Queue Management feature is
enabled, a supervisor can reassign idle agents to busy queues. For example, if a queue gets swamped with calls and agents are
running at capacity, a supervisor can reassign a group of agents from another queue.
Get Midconversation Summaries for Voice in Five More Languages
707
Protect Sensitive Data by Masking Customer Phone Numbers

Keep customer phone numbers confidential by enabling phone number masking from the Contact Center Setup page. With this
feature enabled, all phone numbers appear in Omni-Channel views, call recordings, and transcripts as “Masked Number.” The only
phone numbers that aren’t masked are ones used in agent-to-agent calls managed by partner telephony providers.
Generate a list of voice calls that are missing transcripts, and then recover and upload transcripts in bulk. Lambda errors, Amazon
Contact flow misconfiguration, and telephony system or Service Cloud Real Time downtime can result in calls missing critical
transcription data. Identify and proactively fix these gaps with insights from new custom report options and a new contactDataSync
Lambda function.
Configure your input and output audio devices in the Omni-Channel settings. Otherwise, the system device is set as the default
speaker and microphone. This feature isn’t available in the Apple Safari browser.
Security Increased for Authenticating Users in Amazon Connect with SSO
To increase security when you’re using SSO to authenticate users in Amazon Connect from Salesforce, an Amazon contact center
now supports a SAML identity certificate with an unlimited size. Previously, it supported up to 2,048-bit certificates.
Resolve Common Status Conflicts Between Omni-Channel and Amazon Connect
Enable the new agent status, sfdc_pending. to set in Amazon Connect when Omni-Channel is processing an agent work record.
Otherwise, Amazon Connect can mark the agent as available before the record finishes processing. For example, if an agent receives
a call but the customer hangs up before the agent can accept it, the Amazon Connect status is marked as sfdc_pending.
Toggle Between Callers and Put Other Agents on Hold in Multi-Party Calls
The Swap and Hold buttons are now available to agents on multi-party calls. This allows agents to toggle between calls with one
click and put other agents on hold.
Troubleshoot Failures During Amazon Contact Center Creation
To help you resolve failures quickly, we now provide more informative error messages. No need to contact Salesforce Customer
Support. For example, the enhanced messages specify the root cause of the problem, such as an AWS account issue.
Customize When to the Apply Sales Engagement Automatic Task Creation Feature
Optimize agents’ workflows by defining when outgoing calls generate associated tasks. To prevent the Sales Engagement automatic
task creation feature from generating tasks from Voice calls, disable automatic task creation from the Contact Center Setup page.
This action allows tasks to continue being auto-generated from calls initiated from Sales Engagements, To Do List, and Work Queue.
This release update adds a new intelligenceSignals flow input parameter that contains detected conversation intelligence signals.
Use this Apex-defined input parameter for your Recommendation Strategy and autolaunched flows linked to a Conversation
Intelligence rule. This update is available starting in Summer ’24.
This release update adds a new ruleDevName flow input parameter that’s sent to Recommendation Strategy and autolaunched
flows linked to the Conversation Intelligence rule. The input parameter contains the developer name of the rule. This update is
available starting in Spring ’24.
Show an Accurate Call-Recording State in Omni-Channel
Set a callRecordingDisabled contact attribute in an Amazon Connect flow to accurately reflect when voice call recording is disabled
in the Omni-Channel widget. Previously, if you used an Amazon Connect flow with call recording off, the Omni-Channel widget
falsely indicated to agents that the call was being recorded.
Control the Enhanced Conversation Component’s Height in the Voice Call Record Page
You asked, we listened. Whether you find the Enhanced Conversation component to be too tall or too compact, we now give you
control over its height.
708

To stop synchronizing data between an Amazon Connect contact trace record (CTR) and a Salesforce VoiceCall record, disable CTR
sync. For example, disable CTR sync during a phased rollout if you don’t want calls that are made directly through the Amazon
Connect Contact Center Panel (CCP) to create voice call records in Salesforce.
Get the Latest Enhancements for Your Amazon Connect Contact
Take advantage of the Service Cloud Voice enhancements and bug fixes for your Amazon Connect contact center. Summer ’24
includes Contact Center version 15.0. To test the updates before they go live in production, deploy them to your sandbox.

Reduce customer wait time by actively managing your contact center queue backlog. When the Queue Management feature is enabled,
a supervisor can reassign idle agents to busy queues. For example, if a queue gets swamped with calls and agents are running at capacity,
a supervisor can reassign a group of agents from another queue.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions. Available in Salesforce orgs with these telephony
models.
Note: This feature requires Queue Management to be enabled. Queue Management isn't available to partner telephony providers
that don't support the concept of groups.
All models of Service Cloud Voice are available as an add-on license in Service and Sales Clouds.
How: In the Agents tab of Omni Supervisor, select the agents, click Change Groups, and add them to a group associated with the new
queue.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Manage Contact Center Queues in Salesforce and Your Telephony Provider Using Groups (can be outdated or
Get Midconversation Summaries for Voice in Five More Languages

models.
709
All models of Service Cloud Voice are available as an add-on license in Service and Sales Clouds. To purchase the Einstein for Service
add-on, contact your Salesforce Account Executive.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Show Agents and Supervisors Midconversation Summaries (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Protect Sensitive Data by Masking Customer Phone Numbers

Keep customer phone numbers confidential by enabling phone number masking from the Contact Center Setup page. With this feature
enabled, all phone numbers appear in Omni-Channel views, call recordings, and transcripts as “Masked Number.” The only phone
numbers that aren’t masked are ones used in agent-to-agent calls managed by partner telephony providers.
models.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Mask Customer Phone Numbers (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Generate a list of voice calls that are missing transcripts, and then recover and upload transcripts in bulk. Lambda errors, Amazon Contact
flow misconfiguration, and telephony system or Service Cloud Real Time downtime can result in calls missing critical transcription data.
Identify and proactively fix these gaps with insights from new custom report options and a new contactDataSync Lambda function.
models.
How: Create a custom report type that includes Voice objects: Voice Channel Interaction Event and Voice Channel Interaction Detail
Event. To identify inbound and outbound calls without transcripts, create a report with this type, and filter the Source Type for Transcript
Not Found.
710
To backfill up to 100 transcripts at a time, manually run the contactDataSync Lambda function with your list of voice calls that are missing
transcripts. This Lambda works with Contact Lens for Amazon Connect transcripts only and calls Connect REST API.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Check Voice Channel Performance (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Service Cloud Voice Implementation Guide: ContactDataSync Lambda Function
Service Cloud Voice Implementation Guide: Upload or Update Transcripts with Connect REST API

Configure your input and output audio devices in the Omni-Channel settings. Otherwise, the system device is set as the default speaker
and microphone. This feature isn’t available in the Apple Safari browser.
models.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Use the Omni-Channel Component to Work with Customers (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Security Increased for Authenticating Users in Amazon Connect with SSO

To increase security when you’re using SSO to authenticate users in Amazon Connect from Salesforce, an Amazon contact center now
supports a SAML identity certificate with an unlimited size. Previously, it supported up to 2,048-bit certificates.
models.
711
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Manage Contact Center Certificates (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Resolve Common Status Conflicts Between Omni-Channel and Amazon Connect

Enable the new agent status, sfdc_pending. to set in Amazon Connect when Omni-Channel is processing an agent work record. Otherwise,
Amazon Connect can mark the agent as available before the record finishes processing. For example, if an agent receives a call but the
customer hangs up before the agent can accept it, the Amazon Connect status is marked as sfdc_pending.
models.
How: Configure Amazon Connect to recognize sfdc_pending as an allowed agent status, either manually through Amazon Connect or
by updating the Contact Center to Version 15, which adds sfdc_pending as an allowed agent status automatically. Then, select the
associated checkbox while configuring the Contact Center through the Amazon Contact Centers Setup page.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Resolve Common Status Conflicts (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Toggle Between Callers and Put Other Agents on Hold in Multi-Party Calls
The Swap and Hold buttons are now available to agents on multi-party calls. This allows agents to toggle between calls with one click
and put other agents on hold.
models.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Add Callers or Transfer Calls (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
712
Troubleshoot Failures During Amazon Contact Center Creation

To help you resolve failures quickly, we now provide more informative error messages. No need to contact Salesforce Customer Support.
For example, the enhanced messages specify the root cause of the problem, such as an AWS account issue.
models.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Troubleshoot Service Cloud Voice (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Customize When to the Apply Sales Engagement Automatic Task Creation Feature
Optimize agents’ workflows by defining when outgoing calls generate associated tasks. To prevent the Sales Engagement automatic
task creation feature from generating tasks from Voice calls, disable automatic task creation from the Contact Center Setup page. This
action allows tasks to continue being auto-generated from calls initiated from Sales Engagements, To Do List, and Work Queue.
models.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Customize Automatic Task Creation (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
This release update adds a new intelligenceSignals flow input parameter that contains detected conversation intelligence signals. Use
this Apex-defined input parameter for your Recommendation Strategy and autolaunched flows linked to a Conversation Intelligence
rule. This update is available starting in Summer ’24.
models.
713
How: To review this update, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates. Follow
the testing and activation steps for Use an Apex-Defined Variable for All Intelligence Signal Types.
Create an intelligenceSignals input variable in Flow Builder, and add the input variable to an autolaunched flow or Recommendation
Strategy flow for Next Best Action.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up an Autolaunched Flow (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Create the Recommendation Strategy Flow for Next Best Action (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Salesforce Help: Release Updates (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
This release update adds a new ruleDevName flow input parameter that’s sent to Recommendation Strategy and autolaunched flows
linked to the Conversation Intelligence rule. The input parameter contains the developer name of the rule. This update is available starting
in Spring ’24.
models.
714
Pass the Conversation Intelligence Rule as Input to Flows, follow the testing and activation steps.
Next, create a ruleDevName input variable in Flow Builder, and then add the input variable to a Recommendation Strategy or an
autolaunched flow.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up an Autolaunched Flow (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Create a Conversation Intelligence Rule to Trigger an Action (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Release Updates (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
715
Show an Accurate Call-Recording State in Omni-Channel

Set a callRecordingDisabled contact attribute in an Amazon Connect flow to accurately reflect when voice call recording is disabled in
the Omni-Channel widget. Previously, if you used an Amazon Connect flow with call recording off, the Omni-Channel widget falsely
indicated to agents that the call was being recorded.
models.
SEE ALSO:
Service Cloud Voice Implementation Guide: Examples of Common Use Cases
Control the Enhanced Conversation Component’s Height in the Voice Call Record Page
You asked, we listened. Whether you find the Enhanced Conversation component to be too tall or too compact, we now give you control
over its height.
models.
How: In the Enhanced Conversation Component editor, enter a height between 500 and 1,000 pixels. Then save your changes.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create the Voice Call Record Page (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

To stop synchronizing data between an Amazon Connect contact trace record (CTR) and a Salesforce VoiceCall record, disable CTR sync.
For example, disable CTR sync during a phased rollout if you don’t want calls that are made directly through the Amazon Connect Contact
Center Panel (CCP) to create voice call records in Salesforce.
models.
716
SEE ALSO:
Service Cloud Voice Implementation Guide: Disable CTR Sync for Voice Call Records Cases
Get the Latest Enhancements for Your Amazon Connect Contact

Take advantage of the Service Cloud Voice enhancements and bug fixes for your Amazon Connect contact center. Summer ’24 includes
Contact Center version 15.0. To test the updates before they go live in production, deploy them to your sandbox.
models.
SEE ALSO:
Knowledge Article: Service Cloud Voice Contact Center Updates
Social Media
Social Customer Service Starter Pack is retiring.
IN THIS SECTION:
Social Customer Service Starter Pack Is Being Retired
Social Customer Service is scheduled for retirement on November 16, 2024.
Social Customer Service Starter Pack Is Being Retired

Social Customer Service is scheduled for retirement on November 16, 2024.
Where: This feature is available in Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience. This feature is available in all editions with Service Cloud.
SEE ALSO:
Knowledge Article: Social Customer Service and Social Customer Service Starter Pack Retirement
Chat
Chat is in maintenance-only mode, and some users can’t set up new channels.
717
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Knowledge
IN THIS SECTION:
Legacy chat is scheduled for retirement on February 14, 2026, and is in maintenance mode until then. You can continue to use chat
until that date, but we recommend transitioning to Messaging for In-App and Web for modernized customer communication.
Messaging offers many of the chat features that you love plus asynchronous conversations that can be picked back up at any time.

Legacy chat is scheduled for retirement on February 14, 2026, and is in maintenance mode until then. You can continue to use chat until
that date, but we recommend transitioning to Messaging for In-App and Web for modernized customer communication. Messaging
offers many of the chat features that you love plus asynchronous conversations that can be picked back up at any time.
Where: This change applies to Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience in all editions.
How: As of February 14, 2026, legacy chat will be removed and you can’t access or use chat. To avoid service interruptions to your
customers, migrate to Messaging for In-App and Web before that date.
SEE ALSO:
Knowledge Article: Chat & Live Agent Retirement
Salesforce Help: Considerations when Replacing Chat with Messaging for In-App and Web
Channel Tools
User verification works in Messaging for In-App and Web deployments that are added to Channel Menu, and the Search Individual flow
action is generally available.
IN THIS SECTION:
The Search Individual Flow Action Is Now Generally Available
The Search Individual flow action links contacts, leads, employees, or person accounts to the interaction record. It’s a vital part of
Individual-Object Linking. Previously, this flow action was available in beta.
The Search Individual Flow Action Is Now Generally Available

The Search Individual flow action links contacts, leads, employees, or person accounts to the interaction record. It’s a vital part of
Individual-Object Linking. Previously, this flow action was available in beta.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in:
• Standard Messaging channels, enhanced Messaging channels, and Messaging for In-App and Web. View required editions.
• Service Cloud Voice channels in Enterprise and Unlimited editions.
• Email-to-Case in Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Knowledge
Check out Unified Knowledge’s general availability and other features that help simplify knowledge management.
718
IN THIS SECTION:
Bring all your knowledge articles into Salesforce from third-party systems like SharePoint, Confluence, Google Drive, and websites
within Salesforce. Expose Unified Knowledge across every customer touchpoint and search experience, and ground Generative AI
products for Einstein for Service. This feature, now generally available, includes some changes since the last release.
Turn On Lightning Article Editor and Article Personalization for Knowledge (Release Update)
Unlock a richer and more user-friendly experience with the new Lightning Article Editor. And with Article Personalization, your
knowledge content supports agent productivity specific to your business needs.
Run the Lightning Knowledge Migration Tool
Get the latest Knowledge features when you migrate from Knowledge Classic to Lightning Knowledge, like Einstein Article
Recommendations, Einstein Search for Knowledge, Flow support, and bots. The Classic Knowledge data model retirement phase is
in progress. To prepare for this retirement and take advantage of updated features, run the Lightning Knowledge Migration Tool.
After running the Lightning Knowledge Migration Tool, you can still use Classic Knowledge in the Classic UI. We aren’t retiring the
Classic UI for Knowledge.

Bring all your knowledge articles into Salesforce from third-party systems like SharePoint, Confluence, Google Drive, and websites within
Salesforce. Expose Unified Knowledge across every customer touchpoint and search experience, and ground Generative AI products for
Einstein for Service. This feature, now generally available, includes some changes since the last release.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Unlimited Edition and other editions with the Knowledge add-on license.
Salesforce has partnered with Zoomin to offer you Unified Knowledge. This feature is available as a free trial from Zoomin for 90 days,
along with three connector instances to third-party knowledge sources. Upgrades from the free trial are purchased directly through
Zoomin in Salesforce Setup.
Why: Organizational knowledge is often fragmented across multiple systems, which increases context-switching for service agents and
decreases the ability to surface the right knowledge in self-service sites. Unifying your knowledge articles in Salesforce reduces
fragmentation and improves the quality and accuracy of your generative AI content. With Unified Knowledge generally available:
• Use new connectors to third-party systems, such as Jira Cloud and SharePoint Server; or the new connector to Knowledge in Salesforce
orgs.
• Map labels from third-party systems to Salesforce fields and data categories, and use a new picklist interface to easily map labels to
fields and data categories.
• Force sync all third-party knowledge articles and label mappings into Salesforce, regardless of whether the content has changed,
before the 1 to 2-hour auto-sync or the 12-hour auto-sync for sitemaps.
• Drill into the Sync History page to see which articles synced and spot errors, such as invalid credentials or invalid label mappings.
• Choose whether article links in places like list views and search results open in Salesforce or directly in the third-party system.
• Update a connector’s audience, record type, or field and data category mappings and automatically apply the changes to all articles
in Salesforce.
• Enter a custom user agent to index all website pages for single-page sitemaps.
How: From Setup, enter Unified Knowledge in the Quick Find box and click Unified Knowledge.
719
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Unify Knowledge from Various Sources (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Set Up Unified Knowledge (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Trailhead: Unified Knowledge: Quick Look
Blog Post: 10 Ways To Prep Your Knowledge Base for AI Grounding
Turn On Lightning Article Editor and Article Personalization for Knowledge (Release
Update)
Unlock a richer and more user-friendly experience with the new Lightning Article Editor. And with Article Personalization, your knowledge
content supports agent productivity specific to your business needs.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, Developer, Essentials, and Professional editions.
Why: With the Lightning Article Editor, you can:
• Boost author productivity with accessible content formatting capabilities and advanced table editing.
• Size the editor to your liking to author articles more effectively and to better understand how articles look to readers.
• Copy and paste content from external sources, such as Google Docs or websites, while maintaining the look and feel of the source
content.
• Ensure your articles follow W3C accessibility standards using a built-in accessibility checker tool.
With Article Personalization, you can create custom visibility rules that hide or show fields based on the user, user permissions, and
record. Salesforce admins customize knowledge articles by controlling which parts of an article are shown or hidden from specific
audiences. Service agents interacting with the content find answers faster because they see only what they must see.
How: To enable the Lightning Article Editor and Article Personalization for Knowledge, go to Release Updates in Setup, find the update,
and get started.
After you enable the release update, the new Lightning Article Editor replaces the old Knowledge editor.
720
SEE ALSO:
Release Updates
Salesforce Help: Manage Release Updates (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Lightning Article Editor (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Supported Languages (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Set Up and Use Quick Text (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Release Updates
Salesforce Help: Manage Release Updates (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Article Personalization for Knowledge (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Run the Lightning Knowledge Migration Tool

Get the latest Knowledge features when you migrate from Knowledge Classic to Lightning Knowledge, like Einstein Article
Recommendations, Einstein Search for Knowledge, Flow support, and bots. The Classic Knowledge data model retirement phase is in
progress. To prepare for this retirement and take advantage of updated features, run the Lightning Knowledge Migration Tool. After
running the Lightning Knowledge Migration Tool, you can still use Classic Knowledge in the Classic UI. We aren’t retiring the Classic UI
for Knowledge.
When: Salesforce enforces this update on June 1, 2025.
Who: This change applies to all Salesforce customers using Classic Knowledge.
Why: The Classic Knowledge data model is no longer available starting with Summer ’25. Recent updates and features replace and
improve the Classic data model. After you run the Lightning Knowledge Migration Tool, you can take advantage of these Knowledge
improvements. You can still use Lightning Knowledge in Salesforce Classic, even after the update.
How: Run the Lightning Knowledge Migration Tool before the deadline to migrate to the Lightning Knowledge data model. Learn How
to Migrate in Help
After the migration tool is run, Lightning Knowledge works in these ways in Salesforce Classic.
• Because Lightning Knowledge uses record types instead of article types, you can no longer filter by article type.
• You can’t set a default record type in Salesforce Classic.
• Some actions, such as Change Record Type, aren’t available from the knowledge article record page in Salesforce Classic.
• Picklist values assigned to one record type in Knowledge aren’t visible on records in Salesforce Classic.
• If you have custom solutions for your Classic Knowledge implementation, such as Visualforce components or pages, refactoring
them to work with the Lightning Knowledge data model is sometimes required. Especially if your custom solution relies on article
721
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Routing
types, refactor it to work with record types. Use a sandbox to test your custom solutions before running the migration tool in
production.
SEE ALSO:
Trailhead: Lightning Knowledge Migration
Salesforce Help: Custom Lightning Page Components (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Routing
Omni-Channel users can now complete work from their mobile device. To avoid disconnecting calls, messaging sessions, or other work,
you can choose for all agents to remain logged in to their original Omni-Channel sessions when subsequent Salesforce tabs or windows
are opened.
IN THIS SECTION:
IdeaExchange Delivered: Support Customers While on the Go with Omni-Channel for Mobile (Beta)
Omni-Channel users can now complete work from their mobile device. With Omni Mobile, they can set their status and handle work
requests from all enhanced channels, with the exception of Voice. They also receive notifications on their mobile device about new
work, updates to work, and changes to their status. Omni Mobile is part of the Salesforce mobile app. We delivered this feature
Stay Logged In to Omni-Channel When Using Multiple Tabs
To improve the agent experience when they open multiple tabs and browsers, a third new Omni-Channel login option is available.
Now, with the Remained logged in to Omni-Channel in previous console option, the agent no longer has to decide which
Omni-Channel session to keep. The agent remains logged in to the original Omni-Channel session and will be offline for any sessions
created when they open additional tabs or browsers. Also, when an agent refreshes the Omni-Channel page, they now remain
logged in to the same session, keeping all in-progress work open.
Route Orchestration Work Items with Omni-Channel
Now use Omni-Channel to route orchestration work items to assigned users.
Pause Messaging Sessions with Omni-Channel Status-Based Capacity (Beta)
With this release, status-based capacity works with Enhanced Messaging, so you can take advantage of Enhanced Omni-Channel’s
paused work feature. Pause messaging sessions and keep track of inactive sessions. When a messaging session goes inactive, there’s
no need to use flows to set ownership or provide a notification when it becomes active again.
Keep your contact center running if the Omni-Channel routing service becomes unavailable. With Fallback Mode enabled, externally
routed work continues to be delivered to agents. For example, your telephony provider continues to route voice calls. Fallback Mode
supports Enhanced Omni-Channel only.
Support Customers While on the Go with Omni-Channel for Mobile (Beta)

Omni-Channel users can now complete work from their mobile device. With Omni Mobile, they can set their status and handle work
requests from all enhanced channels, with the exception of Voice. They also receive notifications on their mobile device about new work,
updates to work, and changes to their status. Omni Mobile is part of the Salesforce mobile app. We delivered this feature thanks to your
722
When:
This feature is available after June 15, 2024.
How: To enable a user to access Omni Mobile from the Salesforce mobile app, assign them the Digital Engagement license, verify that
Omni Inbox is set to Default On in their user profile, and add Omni Inbox to the app. Then ask the user to download the Salesforce mobile
app.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Go Mobile with Omni-Channel (Beta) (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Understand Capacity Models (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
723
Stay Logged In to Omni-Channel When Using Multiple Tabs

To improve the agent experience when they open multiple tabs and browsers, a third new Omni-Channel login option is available. Now,
with the Remained logged in to Omni-Channel in previous console option, the agent no longer has to decide which Omni-Channel
session to keep. The agent remains logged in to the original Omni-Channel session and will be offline for any sessions created when
they open additional tabs or browsers. Also, when an agent refreshes the Omni-Channel page, they now remain logged in to the same
session, keeping all in-progress work open.
How: In Omni-Channel Settings, select how you want to handle multiple sessions for the same agent.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Enable Omni-Channel (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Route Orchestration Work Items with Omni-Channel

Now use Omni-Channel to route orchestration work items to assigned users.
SEE ALSO:
Pause Messaging Sessions with Omni-Channel Status-Based Capacity (Beta)

With this release, status-based capacity works with Enhanced Messaging, so you can take advantage of Enhanced Omni-Channel’s
paused work feature. Pause messaging sessions and keep track of inactive sessions. When a messaging session goes inactive, there’s no
need to use flows to set ownership or provide a notification when it becomes active again.
724
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Feedback Management
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Understand Capacity Models (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Keep your contact center running if the Omni-Channel routing service becomes unavailable. With Fallback Mode enabled, externally
routed work continues to be delivered to agents. For example, your telephony provider continues to route voice calls. Fallback Mode
supports Enhanced Omni-Channel only.
How: To enable Fallback Mode, log a case with Salesforce Customer Support.
SEE ALSO:
Knowledge Article: Routing Work with Omni-Channel Fallback Mode
Salesforce Help: Handling Unrouted Work When the Omni-Channel Routing Service is Unavailable (can be outdated or unavailable
Feedback Management
Check out the enhanced data mapper page.
IN THIS SECTION:
Do More with an Enhanced Data Mapper Page
We redesigned the data mapper page to enhance the visual sequence of your survey data maps.
Survey Invitations View in Contact Activity Tab Is No Longer Supported
The survey invitation email view in the activity tab of contact records is no longer supported.
Do More with an Enhanced Data Mapper Page

We redesigned the data mapper page to enhance the visual sequence of your survey data maps.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Feedback Management -
Starter or Feedback Management - Growth is enabled.
725
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Scheduled Reminders
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create Survey Data Maps to Create or Update Records (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Survey Invitations View in Contact Activity Tab Is No Longer Supported

The survey invitation email view in the activity tab of contact records is no longer supported.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Feedback Management -
Starter or Feedback Management - Growth is enabled.
Scheduled Reminders
Check out scheduled reminders for upcoming events and occasions.
IN THIS SECTION:
Boost Participation for Upcoming Events with Scheduled Reminders
Maintain engagement and prevent users from missing upcoming occasions or responsibilities with scheduled reminders. Send
timely email reminders to alert users about approaching commitments. For example, survey creators can send reminders to recipients
to respond before the surveys expire. Previously, users could send reminders only for past events.
Boost Participation for Upcoming Events with Scheduled Reminders

Maintain engagement and prevent users from missing upcoming occasions or responsibilities with scheduled reminders. Send timely
email reminders to alert users about approaching commitments. For example, survey creators can send reminders to recipients to
respond before the surveys expire. Previously, users could send reminders only for past events.
Who: To create scheduled reminders, users need the Industries Scheduled Reminders license and Manage Scheduled Reminders user
permission.
How: From the App Launcher, find and select Reminder Definitions. Click New, and then follow the setup flow to create a before
event reminder.
726
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Industries in Service Cloud
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create Scheduled Reminders (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Check out Industries features for Service Cloud that enhance the service experience and assist in automating complex decisions.
IN THIS SECTION:
Extend Your Service Cloud Implementation with Service Innovations from Industries
Orchestrate every part of the service experience and provide meaningful, personalized interactions to your customers with Service
Innovations, now available in Service Cloud. Service Innovations, a collection of components from Industry Cloud, can help agents
quickly resolve customer cases and proactively address issues from the Service Console.
Build powerful, scalable lookups and calculations that automate complex decisions by using Business Rules Engine, now available
in Service Cloud. Your business users can create rules that are easy to maintain and integrate directly with Flow and third-party
workflow tools using Apex or REST APIs.
Extend Your Service Cloud Implementation with Service Innovations from Industries
Orchestrate every part of the service experience and provide meaningful, personalized interactions to your customers with Service
Innovations, now available in Service Cloud. Service Innovations, a collection of components from Industry Cloud, can help agents quickly
resolve customer cases and proactively address issues from the Service Console.
Who: To make the Service Innovations features available to Service Cloud, assign the Industry Service Excellence add-on license.
727
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Work.com
How: Add the components for Identity Verification, Audit Trail, Action Launcher, and Timeline to Service Console by using the Lightning
App Builder.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Identity Verfication
Salesforce Help: Audit Trail
Salesforce Help: Action Launcher
Salesforce Help: View Events Using Timeline in Salesforce

Build powerful, scalable lookups and calculations that automate complex decisions by using Business Rules Engine, now available in
Service Cloud. Your business users can create rules that are easy to maintain and integrate directly with Flow and third-party workflow
tools using Apex or REST APIs.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions where Business Rules Engine is enabled.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Business Rules Engine
Salesforce Help: Get Started with Business Rules Engine
Work.com
Prepare your business, employees, and facilities. Respond to major events, such as the current COVID-19 crisis, with the apps and services
in Work.com.
See the Work.com release notes for the latest updates: Work.com Release Notes
Other Salesforce Products and Services

Get the latest information on features from Customer Success Group, Heroku, IdeaExchange, and Trailhead GO.
Customer Success Group

Salesforce Success Plans gives every customer access to resources, guidance, and support at every step of the journey. From building
expertise and driving product adoption, to troubleshooting and maintaining technical health, we help you fast-track your success. With
each release, we introduce new and better ways to help you see results from all your Salesforce products. Highlights for Summer ’24
include:
• Success Plans for Tableau
– Standard, Premier, and Signature Success Plans are now available for Tableau. Signature provides a personalized proactive
partnership managed by a designated Customer Success Manager. Premier includes targeted guidance & best practices through
Expert Coaching Sessions & Developer Support. Standard provides all customers with on-demand resources and documentation.
• Enhanced Signature Success Plan Experience

– Signature customers can now collaborate with their designated Customer Success Manager, their single point of contact and
advocate. They deliver proactive expertise, personalized recommendations, and engage technical resources to address in-depth
728
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Other Salesforce Products and Services
product needs. The CSM also delivers up to 4 Success Reviews a year and helps keep customers on their journey with a personalized
Success Path.
• Customer Success Score Enhancements

– Improved personalized benchmarking: Score is now based on an individual account with a new Absolute Scoring model, so
customers can see progress year over year, rather than by comparing to peers
– Aligned to industry standards: Technical Health metric trends are now aligned to ITOps standards for modern SaaS architectures
– Expansion to more clouds. The Customer Success Score is now available for:
• Marketing Cloud Account Engagement
• Marketing Cloud Personalization
• B2C Commerce Cloud
• MuleSoft
– Added more signals. The Customer Success Score now includes signals for:
• Proactive Monitoring
• More signals from Sales, Service, & Data Cloud
• Expert Coaching Digital Catalog

– A new online digital Expert Coaching experience for all videos, webinars, and one-on-one sessions. Find and explore topics easier
with built-in features, embedded search bar, and targeted content.
• Signature Success Plan for Marketing Cloud Intelligence

– Signature Success Plan is now available for Marketing Cloud Intelligence. Signature provides a personalized proactive partnership
managed by a designated Customer Success Manager, expedited issue resolution with 24/7 support, and an emergency hotline.
Additional benefits include robust Key Event Management, Proactive Monitoring for maximizing uptime, and Annual Technical
Health Reviews to refine data integration and system architecture. This offering is designed to reduce business disruptions,
improve operational efficiency and is ideal for enhancing marketing effectiveness.
Get to know Success Plans by visiting our overview page or taking the Salesforce Success Plans Trailhead module. Or visit the Salesforce
Help Portal for more resources. To learn more about how to maximize your Salesforce success, check out our Salesforce Customer
Success overview page .
Heroku
Heroku is a cloud-based application platform for building and deploying web apps.
For information on new features, go to the Heroku Changelog.
IdeaExchange
Share ideas with the Trailblazer community and Salesforce product managers with the IdeaExchange. It features a search experience
that aids discoverability, more informative idea records, and search-as-you-type dupe detection to help avoid posting the same idea
twice. For more information, visit the IdeaExchange.
Trailhead GO
The newest release includes new widgets as well as enhancements to the Trailblazer Profile and Trailblazer Community.
729
Salesforce Summer ’24 Release Notes Legal Documentation
• Easily access learning right from your mobile home screen by adding a Trailhead widget on iOS, MacOS, and Android devices. You
can also add a see your progress anytime and get inspired to continue learning by adding a Trailblazer Ranks widget on Android
devices.
• See all of the Trailblazers Stamps you’ve collected by attending Salesforce events in-person or on Salesforce+, and check the Future
tab for upcoming eligible events. Trailblazer Stamps are highlighted on the Trailblazer Profile when you access it on mobile.
• Now, you can “upvote” answers you find most helpful in the Trailblazer Community, using the Answer Helpfulness Rating. The most
widely accepted answers are most visible in your feed.
Trailhead GO is available on iPhone, iPad, and Android devices.
• Android: Trailhead GO at Google Play
• iOS: Trailhead GO at the App Store
Legal Documentation
We made seasonal updates to Salesforce Legal Documents.
Trust & Compliance

For a complete list of changes to the Trust & Compliance documents related to this release, see the Salesforce Trust & Compliance
Documentation Change Log.
Business Associate Addendum Restrictions

For a complete list of changes to the Business Associate Addendum Restriction documents, see the Business Associate Addendum
Restrictions Change Log.
Acceptable Use Policy

For a complete list of changes to the Acceptable Use Policy documents, see the Acceptable Use Policy Change Log.
730

Salesforce Summer24 Release Notes

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Salesforce Summer24 Release Notes

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Salesforce Summer24 Release Notes

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Salesforce Release Notes

Future proof your business with CRM + AI + Data + Trust

Last updated: June 14, 2024

SALESFORCE SUMMER ’24 RELEASE NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

What’s New for the Salesforce Release Notes?

Find Updates for Marketing Cloud Engagement in One Place

How to Use the Release Notes

We want to know what works for you and what doesn’t.

Get Ready for the Release

Summer ’24 Highlights for Admins

What’s New This Release

Release Readiness Essentials

Release Notes for Features Released Monthly

June ’24 Release

Release Note Changes

June 17, 2024

New and Changed Standard Platform Events

Removed: Build Custom Forms with the ElementInternals Web API

June 10, 2024

May 27, 2024

Ensure Security in Search with Search Manager

May 20, 2024

Find Content on Managing Users and Data Access in One Place

May 13, 2024

Boost Sales Productivity with the Group Benefits App

Update More Commitments With Fundraising

April 29, 2024

Let Einstein Build a Draft Flow for You (Beta)

April 24, 2024

Supported Browsers and Devices for Lightning Experience

Desktop and Laptop Browsers

Microsoft® Microsoft® Microsoft® Google Mozilla® Apple®

Special setup Not supported Not supported No No No No

Limitations? Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes

Apple® Safari® Google Chrome™ Other Browsers Salesforce Mobile

Android — Not supported Not supported Supported

Third-Party Browser Extensions and JavaScript Libraries

Supported Browsers and Devices for Salesforce Classic

Microsoft® Microsoft® Microsoft® Google Mozilla® Apple®

Special setup Yes Not supported No No Yes No

Microsoft® Microsoft® Microsoft® Google Mozilla® Apple®

Supported Browsers for CRM Analytics

How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

Create and Verify Your Default No-Reply

Enable LWC Stacked Modals (Release

Add the New Setup Domain (not

Prepare for Restrictions on Salesforce

Temporarily Opt Out of Google Chrome

MFA Is On by Default for Direct Logins

Salesforce Admins Get In-App

Enabled for Requires Contact

See Improved Contrast in Focus States

Monitor Net Zero Cloud Changes with

Work More Efficiently with the Improved

Find and Buy Salesforce Products Faster

Experience Improved Performance for

Invite Customers to Enroll in Group

Enable Unauthenticated Users to Modify

Generate Personalized Appointment